Skip to main content

Full text of "Manual of instruction for the volunteers and militia of the Confederate States"

See other formats 


DUKE 

UNIVERSITY 

LIBRARY 


T^reasure  %oom 


MANUAL  OF  LNSTRUCTION 


FOR    THE 


VOLUNTEERS  AND  MILITIA 


OK    THE 


CONFEDERATE   STATES 


BY 


WILLIAM    GILHAM, 


COLOiN'KL  OF   VOLUNTEERS,   INSTRUCTOR  OF   TACTICS,   AND  COMMANDANT   OF   CADETS, 
VIROINIA   MILITARY  INSTITUTE. 


W 

^ 


RICHMOND,   VA. 

WEST     &     JOHNSTON, 

145  Main  Street. 


Entered  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1861,  hy 

WEST    &   JOHNSTON, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Confederate  States  for  the  Eastern 

District  of  Virginia, 


Printed  by  Evans  &  Cogswell,  No.  3  Broad  Strket,  Charleston,  S.  C. 


TV, 


r- 


L-     «=3i 


y^   ^   "    ^ ^ 


PREFACE. 


TiTK  following  work  was  undertaken  with  the  hope  of  meeting,  to 
some  extent  at  least,  a  long-felt  want  among  the  volunteers  and  mili- 
tia; that  is,  a  manual,  which,  Iwsides  containing  everything  which 
may  he  necessarj'^  for  mere  tactical  instruction,  should  also  embrace 
more  or  less  instruction  on  various  other  subjects  of  equal  importance 
with  tactics;  subjects  that  few  men  Avho  have  not  been  regularly 
trained  in  the  military  service  have  much  familiarity  with.  In  the 
regular  service  the  necessity  for  such  a  work  is  not  felt,  at  least  not  to 
the  same  extent  as  among  the  volunteers  and  militia,  from  the  fact 
that  the  militarj-  system  being  in  constant  operation,  and  each  indi- 
vidual, no  matter  what  his  present  rank  may  be,  having  gradually 
risen  from  a  low,  or  perhaps  the  very  lowest  grade,  has  abundant 
opportunities  for  becoming  familiar  with  it  in  all  its  details,  before  he 
is  called  upon  for  any  extensive  exercise  of  his  professional  knowledge. 
With  the  volunteers  and  militia,  however,  where  no  such  process  for 
the  acquisition  of  important  practical  knowledge  is  attainable,  the 
case  is  very  dilfcrent.  Called  suddenly  into  active  service,  from  the 
various  pursuits  of  civil  life,  all,  even  the  highest  in  rank,  and  the  best 
informed,  meet  with  difficulties  on  every  side;  what  would  seem  to  bo 
com])aratively  plain  and  simple  to  the  old  campaigner,  must  of  neces- 
sity be  more  or  less  obscure  to  the  volunteer  or  militia  officer,  whose 
opportunities  for  the  attainment  of  military  knowledge  have  been 
limited. 

It  is  not  intended,  nor  indeed  would  it  be  desirable,  that  the  present 
work  should  embrace  everything  which  is  proper  to  be  known  by  our 
citizen  soldiery  ;  its  aim  is,  simply  to  aid  the  inexperienced  so  far  as 
to  enable  them  to  become  familiar  with  such  principles  and  practical 
details  of  the  military  service  as  are  absolutely  essential  to  those  who 
would  be  competent  officers,  whether  in  the  line  or  in  the  staflF.  If  it 
accomplishes  this,  it  will  not  have  been  compiled  in  vain. 

The  Introduction,  or  "  Glossary,"  will,  it  is  hoped,  be  found  useful 
to  the  student  of  military  art  or  science,  and  to  the  reader  of  military 

history  X    0       ^     ^    S 


iv  PREFACE. 

Article  I,  on  Army  Organization,  commences  with  a  general  account 
of  the  four  arms  of  the  service — Infantry,  Cavalry,  Artillery  and 
Engineers — the  duties  of  each  in  the  conduct  of  a  campaign,  and  the 
proportion  they  should  bear  to  each  other  in  an  army.  The  latter  part 
of  the  Article  enters  more  fully  into  the  details  of  the  organization  of 
each  of  the  three  leading  arms,  and  closes  with  a  short  account  of  the 
duties  of  the  various  departments  of  the  staff. 

In  Article  II,  upon  Arms  and  Ammunition,  will  be  found  a  con- 
densed account  of  the  various  arms  and  kinds  of  ammunition  used  by 
infantry,  cavalry  and  artillery,  together  with  the  manner  of  preparing 
and  using  the  latter. 

From  Article  III  to  Article  XI,  inclusive,  will  be  found  the  tactical 
portion  of  the  work;  it  embraces  very  full  instructions  for  every  kind 
of  Infantry  troops,  from  the  School  of  the  Soldier  to  that  of  the  Bat- 
talion ;  Cavalry  tactics,  from  the  School  of  the  Trooper  to  the  Instruc- 
tion of  the  Regiment;  and  Artillery  tactics,  from  the  School  of  the 
Piece  to  the  Evolutions  of  a  Battery.  The  whole  will  be  found  to  be 
in  strict  conformity  with  the  requirements  of  the  United  States 
service. 

Article  XII  embraces  directions  and  forms  for  the  conduct  of  every 
form  of  parade ;  the  kinds  and  duties  of  guards ;  together  with  much 
other  matter  of  a  kindred  nature. 

In  Article  XIII  the  duties  of  captains,  and  other  company  officers, 
in  regard  to  the  internal  management,  police  and  morale  of  their 
companies,  together  with  the  proper  equipment  of  officers  and  men,  to 
secure  efficiency  as  well  as  comfort,  when  in  the  field,  camps,  marches, 
etc.,  are  discussed. 

Article  XIV  is  devoted  to  the  Staff,  and  embraces  such  directions 
for  the  conduct  of  those  departments  of  the  staff  upon  which  the 
efficiency  of  an  army  in  the  field  must  mainly  depend,  as  seemed 
most  necessary.  In  This  Article  will  also  be  found  directions  and 
forms  for  the  preparation  of  the  morning  reports  of  Companies,  Regi- 
ments, Brigades  and  Divisions,  together  with  such  forms  for  requisi- 
tions, returns,  etc.,  as  are  in  most  frequent  use. 

In  Article  XV  will  be  found  some  account  of  the  various  orders  of 
battle,  together  with  an  outline  of  the  manner  in  which  the  different 
kinds  of  troops  should  be  handled  in  action. 

Article  XVI  contains  directions  for  the  organization  and  conduct 
of  Military  Courts;  and  lastly,  the  Appendix,  containing  the  Articles 
of  War,  presents  us  with  the  Military  Law  now  in  force. 

W.  G. 

Virginia  Military  Institute,  JJecemhcr,  1860. 


CONTENTS. 


[The  numbej-s  refer  to  paragraphs  ami  not  to  pages.] 

ARTICLE   I. 

A  R  :\I  Y    ORGANIZATION. 

1.  Army  corps:    2.    Infantry  — Proportion    of  infantry  to    the    other 

arms — Distinction  between   heavy  and  light  troops— The  musket 

Uses  and  formation  of  infantry  of  the  line :  3.  Light  infantry  and 
riflemen— The  rifle  and  sword-bayonet— Duties,  and  mode  of  forma- 
tion of  light  troops  :  4.  Cavalry— Its  rank,  and  the  proportion  it 
should  bear  to  the  infantry— Distinguishing  qualities  and  uses  ;  5. 
Artillery  and  its  rank — Proportion  to  other  arms — Light  and  heavy 
artillery — Distinction  between  mounted  and  horse  artillery — Uses 
of  artillery;  6.  Engineer  troops. 

O  U  rj  A  N  I  Z  A  T  I  0  N      OF      INFANTRY. 

7.  The  company  and  its  ofliccrs- The  Platoon— Formation  of  the  com- 
pany ;  Comrades  in  buttle ;  8.  Posts  of  officers,  etc. ;  9.  The  regi- 
ment—Its oflicers;  10.  Posts  of  the  field  and  staff  of  the  regiment; 
11.  Pioneers,  field  music  and  band;  12.  Color  guard;  13.  General 
guides  and  markers;  14.  Battalion  in  column;  15.  Posts  of  officers 
in  column  ;  16.  Brigades  and  divisions— Posts  of  general  officers  in 
line  and  in  column. 

OHGAJflZATION      OF      CAVALRY. 

17.  The  company— Posts  of  officers,  etc.  :  18.  The  squadron— Posts  of 
officers  and  file-closers;  19.  The  regiment  in  line— Posts  of  the  field 
and  staff,  etc. :  20.  The  regiment  in  column  by  twos  and  fours ;  21. 
In  column  of  platoons;  22.  In  column  by  division ;  23.  Order  in 
close  column  of  squadron,  cavalry  brigades  and  divisions. 

ORGANIZAT  ION     OF     FIELD     ARTILLERY. 

25.  Batteries — Guns  and  howitzers — Relative  proportions  of  these — 
Caissons;  26.  Complement  of  officers  and  men  necessary  to  man  the 
battery;  27.  The  order  in  line;  28.  The  order  in  column;  29.  The 
order  in  battery;  30.  Two  or  more  batteries  united;  31.  The  posi- 
tion of  artillerv. 


VI  CONTENTS. 


THE      STAFF. 

32.  The  different  departments  of  the  .<taff:  :V.\.  Adjutant-ffeneral's 
department;  34.  The  inspector-f^eneral't^  department ;  35.  The  quar- 
termaster's department;  30.  The  eommissary  department  :  37.  The 
engineer  department;  3S.  The  ordnanee  department;  39.  The  jiay 
department;  40.  The  medical  department. 

ARTICLE   II. 

ARMS    AND    AMMUNITION. 

41.  Small  arms  now  in  use;  42.  The  smooth  bore  musket;  43.  The 
rifled  musket — The  cylindro-conical  hall:  H.  The  "altered  mus- 
ket;" 45.  The  rifle  (Minie) ;  40.  llifleil  earbines.  and  breeeh-loadiuf^ 
rifles;  47.  Pistols  and  pistol-rarbines ;  48.  Sabres;  4'J.  Artillery — 
Guns — Howitzers — Mortars — The  different  calibres  of  each  in  use; 
60.  Field  guns — Siege  and  garrison  guns — Sea-coast  guns  ;  51.  How- 
itzers— Field — Mountain — Siege  and  garrison — Sea-coast;  52.  Field 
howitzers;  53.  Mortars;  54.  Trunnions:  55.  Field  gun  carriages; 
50.  Caissons;  57,  5K.  Cartridges  f(»r  small  arms,  and  how  to  jtrepare 
them;  50.  Ball,  and  ball  an<l  buek-shot  cartridges;  00.  To  111!  car- 
tridges; 01,  ()2.  Cartridges  for  elongated  projectiles;  63.  How  to 
use  them:  04.  Cartridges  for  artillery  —  Fixed  ammunitinn  :  65. 
Dimensions,  and  h(»w  made;  00.  The  charges  of  jinwder  ;  07,08, 
Sabots;  00.  Canister  shot,  and  how  jjrepared  ;  70.  To  attach  the 
cartridge  to  the  projectile;  71,  72.  Cartridge  blocks,  and  paper  caps; 
73,74.  Shells  and  their  charges;  75,  Spherical-case  shot;  70.  To 
load  spherical-case;  77.  The  fuse;  78,70.  The  lioarman  fuse,  and 
how  to  use  it;  SO.  Priming  and  friction  tubes;  81.  Portfires  and 
their  uses. 

ARTICLE  IIL 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER. 

82.  General  directions;  83.  Position  of  soldier :  84-86,  The  facings; 
87.  Balance  step — Direct  step;  88-92.  Common  time — Quick  time — 
Double  quick  stej) — Double  quick  time:  03.  (iencral  directions  for 
manual;  04-141.  Manual  for  the  musket:  142-100.  Manual  for  the 
rifle :  101-190.  The  firings  :  107.  Bayonet  exercise ;  198.  Salute 
with  the  sword  or  sabre;  109.  Color  salute:  200-203.  The  align- 
ments;  204;  To  march  to  front:  205.  The  oblique;  206,  207.  The 
Double  quick  and  the  about;  208-210.  To  march  by  a  flank;  211- 
215.  AVheeling  and  turning. 

ARTICLE  IV. 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    C  0  M  P  A  N  Y . 

210.  To  form  the  company  :  217.  To  open  and  close  ranks  :  218-221. 
The  alignments:  222.223.  To  stack  arms;  225-230.  The  firings; 
231-236.  To  advance  in  line — The  oblique — Mark  time — March  in 
retreat— The  about;  237-230.  To  march  by  flank;  240.  On  right  by 
file  into  line:  241.  Marching  by  the  flank  to  form  company  or 
platoons;  242-245.  Breaking  into,  and  the  march  of,  a  column  of 
platoons;  240-248.  To  form  a  column  of  platoons  into  line  to  the 


CONTENTS.  Vii 

left  or  right :  249,  260.  A  company  marching  in  line,  to  break  into 
column  of  platoon.*,  and  to  re-form  comjiany :  2.i].  In  column  of 
platoon?,  to  break  files  to  the  rear:  252-255.'  The  route  step;  256. 
The  countfcrm.Trch  :  257.  In  column  of  platoon?,  to  form  line  on  the 
right  :  25H-261.  To  form  from  two  to  four  ranks,  and  reciprocally; 
2fi2.  General  directions  for  skirmishers  :  26.3.  Deployments ;  264! 
To  deploy  forward  ;  265.  To  deploy  by  a  flank  :  266.  To  deploy  oii 
the  centre:  267,  268.  To  extend  and  clo.<ie  intervals:  269.  To  relieve 
a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  :  270-273.  The  advance,  retreat, 
chiingcs  of  directions,  etc. ;  274-276.  The  firings  ;  277-282  The 
rally  ;  28.3.  The  assembly. 

ARTICLE   V. 
TARGET     PRACTICE. 

284-296.   The  various  rules  for  securing  accuracy  of  aim.  and  skill   in 
the  use  of  small  arms. 

ARTICLE   yi. 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION. 

297.  To  form  the  regiment  or  battalion;  298.  To  open  and  close  ranks; 
299.   The  firings:  300.  To  break  to  the  right  into  column :  301,302! 
To  break  to  the  right  and  rear  into  column  ;  303-305.  To  form  close 
column;    306-308.   To  march   in  column  at  full  distance;    309-312. 
To   close   the   column   to   half  distance,  or  in  mass  ;    313,   314.    In 
column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  to  take  distances;  315- 
317.   In  column   closed    in    mass,  to  change  direction;    318-320.  In 
column   by  company,  to   form   divisions;     321.  The  countermarch; 
322.  Mminer  of  determining  tiie  line  of  battle;  323-325.  A  column 
at  full  distance  formed  into  line  of  battle  to  the  left  or  right;  327. 
Successive  formations:    32.s.   On  the  right  into  line;    329,  330.   Col- 
umn at  full  distance  forward  into  line:    331-332.   Into  line  faced  to 
the  rear;    33.3-335.  Formation   of  the  line  of  battle   by  two  move- 
ments; 336-339.  Different  modes  of  passing  from  a  column  at  half 
distance    into    line    of   battle  ;     340-343.    Deployments    of  columns 
dosed  in  mass ;    314-347.   The  advance  and  retreat  in  line  of  battle, 
and  the  movements  incident  thereto  ;  .348-350.    The  passage  of  obsta- 
cles ;    351.    To  pass  a  defile  in   retreat;     352,  353.    To  march  by  a 
flank;    354.    To  form  the  battalion  on   the  right  or  left,  l)y  file,  into 
line;    355-357.  Changes  of    front;    358,  359.  To  form  the  battalion 
into  double  column  :  360-363.   The  deployment  of  the  double  column; 
364-379.  Dispositions  against  cavalry,  or  the  formation  of  squares; 
380.   To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers;  381.  The  rally. 

ARTICLE  VIL 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER. 

382-384.  Directions  for,  and  position  of  trooper  before  mounting;  385. 
To  mount;  386.  Position  of  trooper  mounted  ;  387-389.  The  use  of 
the  arms  and  legs;  390.  To  march;  391.  To  turn  to  the  right  or 
left;  392.  To  the  right  or  left  about;  393.  To  make  a  quarter  turn 
to  the  right  or  left;  394.    To  rein  back;  395.  To  dismount;  396.  To 


Viii  CONTENTS. 

file  off;  397-429.  Exercises  in  the  ridiu;;  house  in  sinjrle  and  in 
double  ranks;  430-432.  Principles  of  the  gallop;  433-438.  The 
wheelings  in  single  and  double  runk.«.  and  on  fixed  and  movable 
pivots;  439-461.  Sabre  exercise  ;  402-160.  Manual  of  carbine,  or 
breech-loading  rifle  for  horsemen  ;  467-469.  Manual  for  Colt's 
revolvers. 

ARTICLE  VIII. 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    T  K  0  O  P  . 

470,471.  General  directions  —  Mounting  and  forming  ranks;  472-476. 
The  alignments;  477.  To  open  and  dose  ranks:  47H.  To  rein  back: 
479-480.  To  break  the  troop  by  file,  and  the  direct  march  in  file; 
481.  The  oblique  march  :  482-484.  The  troop  marching  in  colunm, 
by  file,  to  form  it  into  line  to  (he  front,  to  the  left,  or  on  the  right: 
485-487.  To  break  the  tro(»p  by  twos  and  by  fours,  and  the  direct  and 
oblique  march  ;  488-490.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  twos 
or  by  fours,  to  form  it  to  the  front,  to  the  left,  or  on  the  right  into 
line;  491.  To  break  the  troop  by  the  left;  492.  To  break  by  twos 
and  fours  at  the  trot  and  at  the  gallop;  493.  494.  To  form  the  troop 
to  the  left  into  one  rank,  and  to  the  right  into  two  ranks  ;  496-499. 
To  form  twos  and  fours  at  the  sanie  gait,  and  to  break  by  twos 
and  by  fours  at  the  same  gait ;  o00-604.  To  form  twos  and  fours 
in  doubling  the  gait,  and  to  break  by  twos  and  fours  in  doubling 
the  gait;  605,  600.  Sabre  exercise;  507,  6(t8.  Direct  march  t»f 
the  troop  in  line:  509.  Tlie  couutermarcb ;  610-612.  The  troop 
being  in  line,  to  form  it  into  column  >\itb  distance,  and  the  march  of 
this  column;  613.  Tlie  ol)lique  march  in  column;  614-621.  In  col- 
umn, to  break  by  fours,  by  twos,  and  by  file,  and  to  form  two.«,  fours, 
and  platoons  at  the  same  gait:  622-527.  The  same  movements  in 
doubling  the  gait:  528,  529.  The  about  in  column,  and  the  halt; 
530-532.  To  form  line  to  left,  and  right:  633,  534.  To  form  line  on 
the  right,  and  on  the  left;  535,  To  form  front  into  line;  536,  537. 
The  formation  of  lines  faced  to  the  rear;  538-642.  Movements  by 
fours,  the  troop  being  in  column  with  distance  :  543-547.  The 
changes  of  direction  of  a  troop  marching  in  line;  548.  Movement 
by  fours,  the  troop  in  line;  549.  The  tritop  marching  in  line,  to  break 
it  by  platoons  to  the  right,  and  to  re-form  it;  550-551.  The  troop 
marching  in  line,  to  break  it  to  the  front  by  platoons,  and  to  re-form 
it;  552-557.  The  charge;  558.  Rallying:  559.  Skirmishing. 

AllTICLE  IX. 

SCHOOL    OF   *rHE    SQUADRON. 

560,  561.  The  movements  of  the  squadron  ;  562.  Successive  align- 
ments of  platoons  in  the  squadron  ;  563,  564.  To  break  from  the 
right  to  march  to  the  left:  565.  To  break  by  platoons  to  the  right, 
and  to  advance:  566.  To  form  line  to  the  front  by  inversion;  567. 
Break  to  the  right  by  platoons,  head  of  column  to  the  left  or  half 
left;  568.  To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  by  inversion,  en  the  rear  of 
the  column  :  569.  By  platoons  to  the  right,  head  of  column  to  the 
right,  or  half  right:  670.  To  form  line  face  to  the  rear,  by  inversion, 
on  the  head  of  the  column:  571.  The  oblique;  672.  The  oblique  by 
platoons  :  673.   By  fours  about,  and  face  to  \he  front  again :  574.   The 


CONTENTS.  IX 

about  \>y  platofin?  :  o75.  T'>  break  the  pquadron  to  the  front  by  pla- 
toon!", and  to  re-form  it;  576.577.  The  pa.«?ae:e  of  obstacles;  5?8- 
581.  Skirraisbing ;  582-587.  The  column  by  division. 

ARTICLE   X. 

EVOLUTIONS     OF     THE     REGIMENT. 

588.  Positions  of  the  guides  in  column;  589.  590.  The  alignments: 
591.  To  break  the  regiment  by  fours;  592,  593.  Form  pl.atoons, 
and  to  break  the  platoons  by  fours;  594,  595.  The  same  movements 
in  doubling  the  gait;  596-59H.  To  form  the  regiment  to  the  front, 
to  the  left,  and  upon  the  right  into  line;  599.  To  form  the  regiment 
into  column  with  distance;  600,  601.  To  break  from  the  right,  to 
march  to  the  left  ;  602-605.  To  form  the  regiment  into  close  column; 
606,  607.  The  march,  and  change  of  direction  in  column  ;  608. 
Platoons  left  about  wheel ;  609.  610.  By  fours  to  the  right,  and  right 
or  left  about;  611.  The  oblique;  612-620.  Various  methods  of 
forming  a  regiment  into  line  of  battle;  621.  622.  The  deploy- 
ments of  a  close  column:  623.  The  march  in  line:  624.  The  regi- 
ment marching  in  line  to  oblique  by  platoons;  625.  To  gain  ground 
to  the  right;  626.  To  march  in  retreat;  627.  628.  The  changes  of 
front  of  the  line;  629,  030.  The  pMsage  of  defiles;  631.  632.  The 
charge, 

ARTICLE  XI, 

LIGHT     ARTILLERY     TACTICS. 

633-635.  Manner  of  forming  the  gun  detachments,  and  posting  the 
cannoneers:  636-643.  Loading  and  firing  the  piece :  644,645.  Mov- 
ing the  piece  by  hand  ;  646.647.  Changing  posts  and  cfiuipments  ; 
648-650.  Limbering;  651.  Post  of  cann*)neers,  the  piece  limbered; 
652-656.  To  form  the  detachments,  their  posts,  and  changing  posts; 
657.  Moving  the  piece  by  hand,  when  limbered  :  658-660.  Unlim- 
bered  and  coming  into  action  ;  661.  Movements  with  the  prolonge  : 
662.  Service  of  the  gun  with  diminished  numbers;  663.  Supply  of 
ammunition  when  in  action  ;  664—666.  Pointing  and  ranges ;  667. 
Composition  of  the  battery — The  officers  and  men  necessary  to  man 
it;  668.  Posts  of  officers,  etc.  ;  669.  Manning  the  battery;  670,  671. 
To  mount  and  dismount  the  cannoneers  ;  072-684.  To  unpack,  and 
to  perform  various  movements  in  column  ;  685-687.  Various  ways  of 
passing  from  the  order  in  column  to  the  order  in  line;  688-695.  To 
pass  from  the  order  in  line  to  the  order  in  column;  696,  697.  To  form 
the  double  column  into  line  ;  698-700.  To  advance,  to  change  direc- 
tion in  line,  and  to  halt :  701-717.  Formations  in  battery  ;  718.  To 
pass  from  the  order  in  battery  to  the  order  in  column;  719-723.  The 
firings;  724-727.  The  changes  of  front  in  battery;  728,  729.  The 
passage  of  defiles. 

ARTICLE  XII. 

730.  Honors  paid  by  troops  to  the  President,  Governor,  Goneral-in- 
chief,  Major-Geueral.  Brigadier-General,  etc.,  Members  of  the  Cabi- 
net, etc..  Foreign  Ministers,  Officei-s,  etc.  ;  731.  Compliments  paid  by 
guards — Compliment?  paid  b3'  officers  and  soldiers  to  their  superiors; 


X  '  CONTENTS. 

732.  Artillery  salutes;  733.  Escorts  of  honor,  how  forme^  and  con- 
ducted; 734.  Funeral  honors — the  escort  for  various  grades — the 
manner  of  conducting  the  march,  etc. ;  735,  736.  Manner  of  inspect- 
ing infantry  and  cavalry  ;  737-741.  Forms  of  parade — Dress  parade 
— Review  of  infantry — Review  of  cavalry — Review  of  artillery;  742. 
Guard  mounting — Relieving  sentinels  and  guards;  743.  Method  of 
escorting  and  receiving  the  color  of  an  infantry  regiment;  744. 
Method  of  escorting  and  receiving  the  standard  of  a  cavalry  regi- 
ment; 74.5.  Method  of  receiving  one  body  of  troops  by  another  ;  746. 
Manner  in  which  orders  should  be  written  and  communicated;  747. 
The  manner  of  conducting  musters  of  the  troops;  748.  The  roster, 
or  details  for  service,  how  made ;  749.  Sentinels  are  relieved,  how 
often — The  countersign  and  parole — Duties  of  officers,  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  and  privates  of  guards — Manner  of  challenging — 
Receiving  the  "■  grand  rounds,"  etc.,  etc. ;  750.  General  arrange- 
ment of  the  guards  of  a  camp  or  position ;  751.  The  different  kinds 
of  guards  —  Police  guards — Pickets  —  Grand  guards  —  Outposts  — 
Patrols  :  .752.  Strength  and  duties  of  the  police  guard — Duties  of  the 
regimental  officer  of  the  day:  753.  Strength  and  duties  of  the 
pickets;  754-757.  Strength  and  duties  of  the  grand  guards  and  out- 
posts— Manner  of  posting  them,  etc.,  etc. 

ARTICLE  XIII. 

DUTIES    OP    CAPTAINS  — COMPANIES  — DUTIES    IN    CAMP 
AND  GARRISONS,  ETC. 

758.  Responsibility  of  captains;  759.  Manner  of  issuing  arms  to  vol- 
unteer companies  ;  700.  The  uniform  and  equipment  of  volunteers 
and  militia — The  knapsack — Haversack — Bedsack — Blankets,  etc. ; 
761.  Tents— The  Sibley  tent— The  shelter  tent— Tent  knapsack— 
Half-faced  camp;  762.  The  "kit,"  or  necessary  equipment  for  the 
field;  763.  Interior  police  of  companies — Method  of  keeping  the 
arms,  etc.,  in  order — The  ration,  how  cooked  and  served  ;  764,  765. 
Duties  in  camp  and  garrison — The  reveille — Breakfast  call — Troop — 
Surgeon's  call — Dinner  call — Retreat — Tattoo — Stable  call — Drum- 
mer's call;  765.  Daily  duties — General  officers  of  the  day — Field 
officers  of  the  day — Regimental  officers  of  the  day — Their  duties; 
766.  Camp  of  infantry;  767.  Camp  of  cavalry:  768.  Camp  of  artil- 
lery ;  769.  Bivouacs ;  770.  Cantonments  ;  771.  Preliminaries  for  the 
march — The  general — Long  roll — Directions  for  the  conduct  of  the 
march;  772.  The  camjjing  party — Going  into  camp — Details  for 
duty. 

ARTICLE  XIY. 

THE    STAFF. 

773-778.  Duties  of  the  adjutant-general's  department — Adjutant-gen- 
erals and  assistant  adjutant-generals — Morning  reports  of  brigades 
and  divisions — Orders,  how  distributed — The  parole  and  countersign, 
how  issued,  and  to  whom  sent — Manner  of  folding  the  countersign — 
Brigade  and  division  inspectors — Adjutants  of  regiments — Morning 
report  of  regiment;  779-785.  Quartermaster's  department — Quar- 
ters, and  the  allowance  of — Transportation — The  forage  ration — Sta- 
tionery—  Camp    and    garrison    equipage  —  Depot,    quartermaster's, 


CONTENTS.  XI 

etc.;  78G-789.  Subsistence  department — The  ration — Provision  re- 
turns— Issues;  790,  791.  The  medical  department — Surgeon's  call, 
and  morning  sick  report ;   792.   The  i)ay  dei^artment, 

ARTICLE  XV. 

BATTLES. 

793.  The  different  kinds  of  ])attles  ;  794.  When  a  defensive  battle 
should  be  given  :  795.  Conditions  to  be  satisfied  in  a  defensive  posi- 
tion ;  796.  Offensive  battles:  797.  The  meeting  of  two  armies;  798, 
799.  The  different  orders  of  battle:  800-808'.  The  infantry— The 
defence — Attack — Pursuit — Retreat — Means  of  prolonging  the  en- 
gagement— T)efence  against  cavahy — Against  artillery — Attack  on 
artillery  ;  809-812.  The  position  of  cavalry— The  defence— Its  attack 
upon  infantry — Upon  artillery;  813-815.  Position  of  artillery — De- 
fence— Attack. 

ARTICLE  XVL 

COURTS     MARTIAL. 

816.  Courts  martial  defined;  817.  What  officers  eligible  as  members; 
818.  Kinds  and  powers  of  courts  martial;  819.  Who  may  assemble 
general  courts  martial,  and  manner  of  assembling  them;  820.  Num- 
ber of  officers  necessary  to  compose  a  court;  821.  Revision  of  the 
proceedings,  etc. ;  822.  Regimental  and  garrison  courts;  how  con- 
vened, etc.;  823-828.  The  trial— Challenges— The  oath  of  the  mem- 
bers, and  of  the  judge  advocate — The  plea  of  the  i)risoner — The 
examinations  of  the  witnesses — The  defence;  829-831.  The  findings; 
832-834.  The  sentence;  835,  836.  Duties  of  the  judge  advocate; 
837.  Form  of  order  convening  a  court;  838.  Form  of  proceedings. 

APPENDIX. 

THE    ARTICLES    OF    ^\^  A  R  . 


INTRODUCTION 


GLOSSARY. 


A. 

Abatis.  A  specie?  of  intrcnchtncnt ;  it  consists  of  trees  felled,  and 
laid  with  their  branches  sharpened  and  interwoven,  so  as  to  present 
a  thick  row  of  pointed  stakes  toward  the  enemy.  They  are  general- 
ly used  in  front  of  field  works:  while  the  enemy  is  removing  them 
he  is  exposed  to  a  destructive  fire  from  the  defenders. 

About.  A  technical  word  to  express  the  movement  by  which  a  body  of 
troops  reverses  its  front.  In  infantry  the  about  is  always  to  the 
right;  in  cavalry  it  is  either  to  the  right  or  left;  and  in  artillery  it  ia 
to  the  left. 

AccKssiBf-K.  A  place  is  said  to  be  accessible,  by  land  or  sea,  when  it 
can  be  approached  by  a  hostile  force  on  either  of  these  sides. 

ArrouTRKMKXTs.  A  term  denoting  the  belts,  cartridge  box,  scabbard, 
etc.,  of  a  soldier. 

AcTiox,  in  military  language,  is  an  engagement  between  two  armies,  or 
any  smaller  bodies  of  troops. 

Ad.htant.  a  regimental  staff  officer,  who  discharges  all  the  duties  of 
detail  of  a  regiment  or  military  post,  communicates  all  orders,  forms 
the  battalion  for  drills,  parades,  etc..  mounts  the  guards,  and  in  the 
manoeuvres  assists  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

Ad.ittant-Genkrai.  is  the  chief  staff  officer  of  the  army,  division,  or 
brigade  to  which  he  belongs,  and  assists  the  general  in  the  discharge 
of  his  duties;  he  keeps  the  roster  of  the  officers;  makes  details  for 
duty;  makes  up  the  morning  reports,  returns,  etc.;  publishes  the 
orders  of  the  general;  and  is  the  channel  through  which  all  reports 
to,  and  correspondence  with  the  general,  pass. 

Advanced — signifies  some  part  of  the  army  in  front  of  the  rest,  as  in 
adtanccd  rjuardH,  which  always  precede  the  main  body;  it  applies 
also  to  any  portion  of  the  command  which  is  thrown  in  front  of  the 
first  line. 

Advantage  Ground.  A  ground  that  gives  superiority,  or  an  opportu- 
nity for  annoyance  or  resistance. 

Affair.  An  action  or  engagement ;  genferally  between  small  bodies  of 
troops. 

Aid-de-Camp.  An  officer  appointed  to  attend  a  general  officer;  he  re- 
ceives and  carries  orders,  and  discharges  such  other  duties  as  may 
be  necessary.  A  brigadier-general  is  entitled  to  one,  and  a  major- 
general  to  two  aideB-de-camp. 


XIV  GLOSSARY. 

Aim.  The  act  of  bringing  the  firearm  to  its  proper  line  of  directiim 
with  the  object  to  be  struck. 

Alarm  is  a  sudden  apprehension  of  an  attack,  by  which  men  take  to 
their  arms,  and  stand  upon  their  guard. 

Alarm  Post  is  the  place  appointed  for  every  regiment  or  detachment 
to  assemble,  in  case  of  alarm. 

Aleut.     Vigilant. 

Alignment  is  the  placing  of  men  on  the  same  line.  In  artillery  it  ap- 
plies to  the  gun  carriages,  caissons,  etc. 

Ally,  in   a  military  sense,  implies  a  nation   united  to  another,  undur 

treaty,  either  otfensive  or  defensive. 
AsfBuscAPE.     A  body  of  men  posted  in  some  secret  or  concealed  place, 

for  the  purpose  of  falling  upon  an  enemy  by  stirprise. 
Ambush.     A  place  of  concealment  for  a  body  of  troops  intended  for  a 

surprise. 

Ammunition  implies  everything  in  the  way  of  powder,  balls,  shells, 
cartridges,  canister  and  grape  shot,  etc.,  etc. 

Appointments.     Warlike  habiliments,  accoutrements,  etc. 

Apprehend.     Seizing  or  confining  any  person. 

Approaches.  The  works  that  are  carried  on  toward  a  work  that  is  be- 
sieged. 

Covntcr-AppROAciiKS.  The  works  carried  on  by  the  besieged  against 
those  of  the  besiegers. 

Apron.  In  gunnerj^,  a  piece  of  leather  to  cover  the  rent  of  a  piece  of 
ordnance. 

Arm.  a  term  used  to  signify  a  particular  kind  of  troops,  as  the  iu/nn- 
try  arm,  cavalry  arm,  etc. 

To -Arm.     To  take  arms,  or  prepare  to  meet  an  enemy. 

Armed.     Something  provided  with  or  carrj'ing  arms. 

Ai}  Armed  body  of  men  denotes  a  corps  or  detachment  ready  for  an  en- 
gagement. 

Armistice.     A  temporary  truce. 

Armory.  A  place  for  the  construction  of  arms:  also  a  place  of  deposit 
for  arms. 

Arms.     All  weapons  whether  of  offence  or  defence. 

Fire-AnMS.     Any  machine  discharged  by  inflamed  gunpowder. 

Place  of  Arms.  A  part  of  the  covered  way  of  a  fortification.  (See 
Fortijication.) 

Army.  An  organized  body  of  armed  men  commanded  by  a  general. 
In  time  of  peace,  the  whole  organized  military  force  of  the  State  is 
intended  when  we  speak  of  the  army;  in  time  of  war  this  force  is 
broken  up  into  several  distinct  bodies,  each  of  which  is  an  army. 
These  armies  are  named,  from  the  particular  duty  assigned  them,  as 
the  army  of  inrasion,  army  of  occupation.,  etc.;  or  from  the  country 
or  direction  in  which  they  operate — as,  anny  of  the  North,  army  of 
Mexico,  etc.;  or  from  the  general  who  commands  it — as,  army  of 
Scott,  etc.  An  army  is  made  up  of  a  stafi"  and  administrative  depart- 
ments, and   four   distinct   arms— Infantry,   Cavalry,  Artillery,  and 


iiLOSSARY.  XV 

Engineers:  each  ha\ing  distinct  duties,  but  all  combining  to  form 
one  and  the  same  military  body. 

Arrest.  The  depriving  an  officer  of  his  sword,  preparatory  to  trial, 
for  an  offence  against  military  law.  The  order  for  arrest  usually 
designates  the  particular  limits  within  which  the  officer  is  required 
to  confine  himself.  An  officer  under  arrest  must  not  call  upon  his 
commanding  officer  without  permission,  and  then  it  must  be  upou 
business. 

Jirrnrh  of  Arrkst.  Going  beyond  the  limits  prescribed  in  the  order 
of  arrest  of  an  officer.     It  is  a  grave  offence. 

Arsenal.  A  place  of  deposit  for  arms  and  other  implements.  Arse- 
nals are  sometimes  nrncnnh  of  coiiKtrvrticm,  a  term  which  signifies 
that  it  is  a  place  of  construction  as  well  as  deposit. 

Articles  of  War.     Rules  for  the  better  government  of  the  army. 

Artillery.  Every  sort  of  firearms  of  large  calibre,  as  guns,  mor- 
tars, howitzers,  etc.,  together  with  everything  necessary  for  serving 
them  in  the  field,  at  sieges,  etc.  Also  a  term  applied  to  the  science 
which  treats  of  the  construction  and  service  of  artillery.  Also  a 
name  given  to  the  troops  which  serve  artillery. 

Assault.  A  furious  effort  to  carry  a  fortified  post,  camp,  or  fortifica- 
tion. 

Assembly.     The  signal  to  form  by  company. 

Attack.     An  onset  upon    the  enemy,  either  to   gain  a   post,  or  break 

his  ranks  :  or  to  divert  his  attention  and  make  him  divide  his  forces, 

when  it  becomes  n.  fahe  nlfaok. 

B. 

Baggage.  The  clothing,  tents,  utensils,  provisions,  etc.,  of  an  army 
or  corps. 

Band.     A  body  of  musicians  attached  to  any  regiment  or  battalion. 

Banquette.  A  small  elevation  of  earth  three  or  four  feet  wide,  and 
four  feet  nine  inches  below  the  crest  of  the  parapet,  to  enable  the 
shortest  men  to  fire  over  it  with  facility. 

Barbette-batteries  are  platforms  raised  behind  a  parapet  to  enable 
the  guns  mounted  on  them  to  fire  over  the  parapet,  and  sweep  the 
surrovinding  countr)-.  The.y  are  usually  ])laced  in  the  salirni  points 
of  works. 

Barracks.     Permanent  buildings  for  the  quartering  of  troops. 

Barricade.  To  barricade,  is  to  block  up  the  avenues  by  which  an 
enemy  might  have  access  to, any  position.  This  is  done  by  abatis, 
wagons,  etc. 

Barrier.     A  passive  obstacle. 

Bastion,  in  fortification,  is  a  work  constructed  at  one  of  the  angles  of 
a  polygon,  consisting  of  two  faces  and  two  flanks.  It  is  so  con- 
structed, that  every  part  of  it  is  defended  by  the  flanking  fire  of 
some  other  part  of  the  works. 

Battalion.  Any  body  of  infantry  from  two  companies  to  ten,  and 
serving  under  the  same  commander. 

Batter.     A  cannonade  of  heavy  ordnance. 


XVI  GLOSSARY. 

To  Battkr  in  hreacJi  is  a  heavy  cannonade  of  many  pieces  directed  to 
a  single  point  in  the  walls  of  a  fortification. 

Batteriks.  The  name  given  to  any  place  where  guns,  howitzers  or 
mortars  are  mounted,  either  for  the  purpose  of  attacking  the  enemy, 
or  of  battering  a  fortification.  When  a  number  of  pieces  of  artillery 
are  thrown  together  they  also  constitute  a  battery,  as  a  mounted  bat- 
tery, where  from  four  to  six  or  eight  pieces  are  together,  the  can- 
noneers serving  on  foot;  or  a  horse  artillery  battery,  where  the  same 
number  of  pieces  constitute  the  battery,  the  cannoneers  being 
mounted  on  horses. 

Battle.  An  action  in  which  the  forces  of  two  contending  armies  are 
engaged. 

Bayonet.  A  kind  of  triangular  dagger,  with  a  hollow  shank,  which 
tits  over  the  muzzle  of  the  musket,  rifle  or  carbine.  It  is  princi- 
pally used  by  infantry  troops.  A  new  form  of  bayonet  has  of  late 
,years  been  introduced  for  use  on  the  rifle;  this  bayonet  is  in  the 
form  of  a  short  sabre.  It  is  called  the  sabre-bayonet,  and  is  intended 
for  use  in  the  hand  as  well  as  on  the  rifle. 

Berm.  a  narrow  space  between  the  ditch  and  parapet  of  a  work,  to 
keep  the  parapet  from  falling  into  the  ditch. 

To  Besiege.     To  lay  siege  to  or  invest  any  place  with  an  armed  force. 

Besieged.     The  garrison  that  defends  a  place. 

Besiegers.     The  troops  that  lay  siege  to  a  fortified  place. 

Bivouac.  An  army  is  said  to  bivouac,  when,  instead  of  camping  in 
tents,  the  men  sleeji  around  the  fires,  or  make  temporary  shelters 
of  branches  of  trees,  etc. 

Body.  Any  number  of  men  serving  under  one  commander,  as  the 
main  body,  etc. 

Bombard.     To  throw  shells  from  mortars. 

Breach.  An  opening  in  the  works  of  a  fortified  place,  made  by  the 
artillery  or  mines  of  the  besiegers,  preparatory  to  making  an  as- 
sault. 

Breech  of  a  gun.     The  portion  from  the  vent  to  the  cascable. 

Brigade.  Two  or  more  regiments  of  infantry  or  cavalry,  or  both, 
under  the  command  of  a  brigadier-general. 

Brigadier-Gexeral.  The  commander  of  a  brigade  ;  an  officer  whose 
rank  is  next  above  that  of  a  colonel. 


Cadence.  Uniform  time  and  pace  in  marching,  an  indispensable  re- 
quisite in  the  manoeuvres  of  troops. 

Calibre,  in  gunnery,  is  the  diameter  of  the  bore  of  any  piece  of  ord- 
nance, or  the  weight  of  the  solid  shot  which  it  carries. 

Caisson.  A  carriage  for  artillery  ammunition ;  each  piece  of  field 
artillery  is  followed  by  its  caisson. 

Camp  is  the  extent  of  ground  occupied  by  an  army  when  under  can- 
vas. 

Campaign.     The  period  of  each  year  that  an  army  is  in  the  field. 

Cankok.     a  general  term  for  every  form  of  artillery. 


GLOSSARY.  XVll 

Cannoneers.     Soldiers  who  serve  or  manage  pieces-  of  artillery. 

Canteen.     A  small  vessel  used  bj  soldiers  to  carry  water,  etc. 

Cantonmknts.  Troops  are  in  cantonments  when  quartered  in  towns 
and  villages,  lying  as  near  as  possible  to  each  other. 

To  Capitulate  is  to  surrender  any  place  or  bodj^  of  troops  to  the  ene- 
my, on  certain  stipulated  conditions. 

Capitulation.     The  conditions  on  which  the  garrison  of  a  besieged 

place  agree  to  give  it  up. 
Caponniere,  in  fortification,  is  a  ditch  defence;  they  are  of  two  sorts, 

simjle  or  double 

Captain.     The  commander  of  a  company. 

Carbine.  A  species  of  fire-arms  smaller  than  the  musket,  .and  used 
mainly  by  cavalry. 

Cartel.  An  agreement  between  two  States  at  war  for  an  exchange  of 
prisoners  of  war. 

Cartridge.  A  case  of  pajior,  or  flannel,  fittotl  to  the  1)orc  of  a.  piece, 
and  holding  the  exact  charge  of  gun))owder.  Cartridges  for  small 
arms  are  made  of  strong  paper,  those  for  artillery  are  made  of  flan- 
nel, or  some  other  woollen  goods. 

Cartridge-box.  A  box  made  of  stout  leather,  attached  to  a  belt 
which  is  worn  over  the  shoulder,  or  around  the  waist,  and  used  to 
hold  cartridges  for  small  arms. 

Cascable.  in  artillery,  is  the  part  of  the  gun  in  rear  of  the  breech, 
and  consists  of  the  neck  and  the  knob. 

Casemate.  A  chamber  covered  with  a  boml)-proof  arch,  in  a  fortifica- 
tion, having  an  embrasure  cut  through  the  wall,  through  which  the 
gun  is  fired.     Used  in  fortifications  on  the  sea-coast. 

Cavalier.     A  work  constructed  in  the  interior  of  a  bastion. 

Cavalry.  That  portion  of  an  army  which  serves  and  fights  on  horse- 
back. 

Chamber,  of  a  mortar  or  hnipitzer.  A  cavity  at  the  bottom  of  the  mor- 
tar or  howitzer,  intended  to  receive  the  cartridge. 

Charge,  in  gunnery,  denotes  the  quantity  of  powder  with  which  the 
piece  is  loaded. 

In  the  evolutions,  the  charge  expresses  the  advance  of  a  body  of 
infantry  to  attack  the  enemy  with  bayonets  fixed;  or  the  rapid 
attack  of  cavalry. 

Chase  of  a  gun.     The  length  from  the  trunnions  to  the  muzzle. 

Cheek.  The  ])ieces  of  timber  which  form  the  sides  of  gun-carriages, 
and  upon  which  the  trunnions  rest;  also,  in  fortification,  the  oblique 
sides  of  the  embrasure. 

CnEVAL-DE-FRiEZE.  A  piccc  of  timber  some  six  inches  square,  pierced 
with  many  holes,  through  which  pass  pieces  of  wood  some  six  feet 
long,  crossing  each  other  at,  right  angles,  and  pointed  at  the  ends. 
They  are  used  to  stop  up  breaches,  to  block  up  the  avenues  of  ap- 
proach, etc. 

Line  of  Circumvallation.  An  earthen  work  consisting  of  a  low  para- 
pet and  trench,  made  around  a  place  which  it  is  intended  to  besiege. 

Colonel.     The  commander  of  a  regiment. 
2 


XVlll  GLOSSARY. 

Color.     Large  silk  flags  fixed  on  wooden  jioles. 

Camj)  Colors.  Small  flags,  eighteen  inches  square,  and  used  to  mark 
the  color  line,  jjoints  of  wheeling,  etc. ;  they  are  also  carried  by  the 
markers  in  the  evolutions. 

Combat.     A  battle. 

Commissary.  An  officer  charged  with  the  purchase  and  issue  of  pro- 
visions for  the  troops. 

Company.  A  small  body  of  from  50  to  100  men.  and  commanded  by  a 
captain. 

Convoy.  A  detachment  of  troops  emplo^^ed  to  guard  any  supply  of 
men,  money,  ammunition,  provisions,  etc.,  conveyed  in  time  of  war 
to  a  town  or  army. 

Corporal.     A  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  lowest  grade. 

Corps.     A  body  of  troops  acting  together  under  one  commander. 

Countersign.  A  particular  word  which  is  exchanged  between  guards, 
and  entrusted  to  those  employed  on  duty  in  camp  or  garrison. 

Court-Martial.  A  military  court  for  the  investigation  and  punish- 
ment of  all  offences  committed  by  officers  and  soldiers,  in  resistance 
of  military'  law. 

Cuirassiers.  Heavy  cavalry  armed  with  breast-plates  of  metal,  or 
cuirasses. 

A  Curtain,  in  fortification,  connects  two  contiguous  bastions. 

D. 

Defence,  in  fortification,  consists  of  all  sorts  of  works  that  cover  and 
defend  an  army  or  place. 

Defile.     A  narrow  passage  or  road  through  which  troops  can  only 

march  by  flank,  or  with  a  very  small  front. 
Deploy.     To  display,  or  spread  out  troops. 
Depot.     A  place  of  deposit  for  military  stores. 

Detachment.  A  body  of  troops  taken  from  an  army  for  a  particular 
service. 

Discipline.     The  instruction  and  government  of  soldiers. 

Dislodge.     To  drive  an  enemy  from  his  position. 

Dismantle.     To  strip  a  town  or  fortress  of  its  outworks. 

Ditch.  An  excavation  or  trench  made  around  the  works  of  a  fortifica- 
tion, from  whence  the  earth  necessary  for  the  construction  of  the 
parapet  is  raised.     Ditches  are  of  two  kinds — wet  and  dry.  *■ 

Dragoons,  are  a  kind  of  cavalry,  who  serve  both  on  horseback  and 


on  foot. 


E. 


Echelon.  A  position  in  tactics,  when  different  bodies,  whether  the 
divisions  of  a  battalion,  battalions,  or  brigades,  follow  each  other  on 
diflereut  lines.  By  this  arrangement,  both  the  front  and  one  or  both 
flanks  may  be  protected  at  once. 

Elevation.  In  gunnery,  the  angle  included  between  the  horizon  and 
the  axis  of  any  piece  of  artillery. 


GLOSSARY.  XIX 

Embrastre.  In  fortification,  an  opening,  or  aperture  in  the  parapet 
of  a  work,  through  which  pieces  of  artillery  are  fired  at  the  enemy. 

ExciEXTE,  in  fortification,  is  the  interior  wall  or  rampart  which  sur- 
rounds a  place. 

Encounter.     Combat.     Fight. 

Enemy.     One  who  is  on  the  opposite  side  in  war. 

To  Enfilade  is  to  throw  shot  along  the  whole  length  of  the  enemy's 
line. 

Engineers.  Officers  charged  with  planning,  constructing,  and  repair- 
ing all  fortifications  and  all  defensive  works;  witli  planning  the  at- 
tack and  defence  of  military  works,  etc.,  etc. 

Epaulement.  a  kind  of  Ijreastwork  to  cover  troops  in  front,  or  on  the 
flank. 

Epaulettes.     Shoulder-knots  worn  by  othcers. 

Eprouvette.     a  small  mortar  for  trying  the  strength  of  gunpowder. 

Equipage.     All  kinds  of  furniture  made  use  of  by  an  army. 

Establishment  implies  the  quota  of  officers  and  men  in  an  army,  regi- 
ment, troop,  or  company. 

Evolution.  The  movement  made  by  a  body  of  troops  when  they 
change  their  disposition. 

Exempts.     Men  who,  from  their  age  or  occupation,  are  not  liable  to  be 

called  upon  for  military  service. 
Expedition.     A  voyage  or  march  against  an  enemy. 


FALSE-a^ar?>(.     An  alarm  either  designedly  or  unintentionally  created 

by  noise,  reports,  etc.,  without  being  dangerous. 
FALSE-o<^acA\  An  approach  which  is  made  for  the  purpose  of  diverting 

an  enemy  from  the  real  point  of  attack. 

Fascines.  Long  cylindrical  bundles  of  twigs  intended  to  support  the 
earth  in  the  parapets  of  field  fortifications,  etc. 

Feint.     A  mock  attack  made  to  conceal  the  true  one. 

Field.  The  place  of  battle.  A  campaign,  or  the  action  of  an  army 
while  it  is  in  the  field. 

FiELD-o/^>e)-«.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  major  of  a  regi- 
ment. 

Fight.     Battle. 

File.  A  line  of  soldiers  drawn  up  behind  each  other.  As  a  general 
thing,  a  file  means  two  soldiers,  the  front  and  rear  rank  men. 

Firearms.     Every  description  of  arms  charged  with  powder  and  ball. 

Flanks.  The  right  and  left  of  an  army,  encampment,  battalion,  com- 
pany, etc. 

Flank.  In  fortification,  any  part  of  a  work  defending  another,  by  a 
fire  along  the  outside  of  the  parapet. 

Foil.     A  blunt  sword  used  in  fencing. 

Forage.  The  hay,  straw,  and  oats  required  for  the  subsistence  of  the 
horses  of  an  army. 


XX  GLOSSARY. 

Force.     Any  body  of  troops  assembled  for  military  purposes. 
EoRLORN-HOPE.     Men  appointed  to  make  the  first  attack  in  the  day  of 

battle,  or  to  be  the  first  to  storm  in  a  siege. 
Fort.     A  fortified  place  s^yrounded  by  a  ditch,  etc. 
FoRTiFicATiOff.     The  art  of  surrounding;  a  place  by  works  so  disposed 

as  to  render  it  capable  of  a  lasting  defence  against  a  besieging  army. 
i-^'eW-FoRTiFicATiON  is  the  art  of  constimcting  all  kinds  of  temporary 

works  in  the  field. 
Front.     A  word  of  command  signifying  that  the  men  are  to  turn  to 

their  proper  front. 

FuGLE-MAX.  A  well-drilled,  intelligent  soldier,  advanced  in  front  of 
the  line,  to  give  the  time  in  the  manual,  etc. 

Furlough.     A  leave  of  absence. 

Fuse.  A  tube  fixed  into  a  shell  filled  with  combustible  materials, 
which,  when  the  shell  is  fired,  burns  and  causes  the  shell  to  explode. 

G. 

Gabiox.    A  cylindrical  basket  without  bottom,  and  employed  in  throw- 
ing up  intrenchments,  etc. 
Gallery.     A  passage  in  a  mine. 
Garrison.     A  place  where  troops  are  quartered. 

General-officers.  All  officers  above  the  rank  of  colonel.  The  only 
grades  in  our  service  are  brigadier-general,  major-general,  and  lieu- 
tenant-general. 

Glacis.     In  permanent  fortifications,  the  parapet  of  the  covered  way. 

Grenade.  A  small  shell  thrown  from  the  hand  upon  the  enemy. 
Used  in  defending  a  work. 

Grape.     A  kind  of  shot. 

Guard.  A  body  of  men  whose  duty  it  is  to  protect  an  army  or  place 
from  surprise.  It  also  applies  to  troops  kept  to  guard  generals  and 
other  persons,  or  public  property,  etc. 

Guidons.     Small  silk  standards  for  cavahy. 

Gunpowder.  A  composition  of  sulphur,  nitre  (or  saltpetre)  and  char- 
coal, mixed  together  and  granulated,  to  which,  if  fire  be  applied,  it 
burns  with  an  explosion. 

H. 

Harass.  To  annoj^,  perplex,  hang  upon  the  rear  or  Hanks  of  a  body 
of  men,  or  an  army,  or  to  interrupt  the  operations  of  a  siege  by  re- 
peated attacks. 

Haversack.     A  linen  bag  to  carry  a  soldier's  rations  on  the  march. 
Head-quarters.     The  place  where  the  officer  commanding  an  army 

or  independent  body  of  troops,  takes  up  his  residence. 
Hilt.     The  handle  of  a  sword. 

Holsters.  Cases  for  a  horseman's  pistols,  attached  to  the  pommel  of 
the  saddle. 

Hospital.     A  place  appointed  for  the  sick  and  wounded. 


(iLOhfSARY.  XXI 

Host.     An  army. 

IIosTiMTY — denotes  a  state  of  war  between  two  nations. 

Howitzer.  A  piece  of  artillery,  chambered  at  the  bottom  of  the  bore, 
and  intended  for  firinjj  hollow  shot,  canister,  and,  if  necessary,  can 
be  used  for  firing  solid  shot. 

I. 

Infantuv.     Foot  soldiers  armed  with  the  musket  or  rifle. 

Ini'vOAD.     Sudden  and  desultory  invasion. 

Inspector-Gknekal.  An  officer  whose  duty  it  is  to  inspect  the  troops 
at  stated  times,  and  report  the  state  of  their  discipline,  efficiency, 
etc. 

Intrenchment.  Any  work  intended  to  fortify  a  post  against  the  attack 
of  an  enemy. 

Invasion.  The  entrance  or  attack  of  the  troops  of  a  nation  on  the 
dominions  of  another. 

To  Invest.  To  seize  upon  all  the  avenues  of  approach  to  a  place  or 
town,  so  as  to  cut  it  off  li-om  succor. 


Knapsack.  A  leather  or  canvas  bag,  worn  on  the  backs  of  infantry 
soldiers,  and  which  contains  his  clothing  and  other  necessaries. 

L. 

LAnouATOUv.  A  jdace  where  all  sorts  of  fire-works  are  prepared, 
whether  for  actual  service  or  for  display. 

Lieutenant.     The  lowest  grade  of  commissioned  officers. 

Line  of  Battle  is  the  disposition  of  the  troops  for  battle. 

Links.  Thongs  of  leather  used  by  cavalry  to  fasten  their  horses  to- 
gether. 

Litter.     A  sort  of  bed  on  which  wounded  officers  and  men  are  carried 

off  the  field. 
Lodgment.     Possession  of  the  whole  or  a  part  of  the  enemy's  works. 
Liixkttk.     a  small  field  work. 

M. 

Magazine.     A  place  in  which  stores,  arms,  ammunition,  or  provisions 

are  kept. 
Major.     An  officer  next  in  rank  to  a  lieutenant-colonel. 
Martial  Law.     The  law  of  war. 
Match      A  preparation  to  communicate  fire  to  guns,  mortars,  mines, 

etc. 
Mines.     Subterranean  passages  dug  under  the  walls  of  a  fortification, 

or  under  the  works  of  a  besieging  army,  for  tlie  purpose  of  blowing 

them  up  by  means  of  gunpowder. 
Mortars.     Short  cannon  with  large  bores  fitted  with  chambers,  and 

used  for  throwing  shells,  stones,  etc. 


XXll  GLOSSARY. 

Muster.     A  parade  of  troops  for  the  purpose  of  inspection,  and  taking 

an  account  of  their  numbers,  presence,  etc. 
Mutiny,     Any  seditious  or  refractory  conduct  among  soldiers. 

N. 

Nitre.  A  compound  of  nitric  acid  and  potash,  used  in  the  manufac- 
ture of  gunpowder, 

0. 

Orders,  All  such  lawful  directions  as  may  be  issued  by  a  superior 
officer. 

Ordnance,     A  general  term  for  all  guns,  howitzers,  and  mortars. 
Outposts,     Bodies  of  troops  posted  beyond  the  bounds  or  limits  of  the 
encampment. 

Outworks,  in  fortification,  are  the  works  constructed  beyond  the  prin- 
cipal works. 

P. 

Palisades.     In  fortifications,  stakes  made  of  strong  pieces  of  wood, 

and  set  in  the  ground. 
Parallels.     The  trenches  or  lines  made  by  the  besiegers  around  the 

works  of  the  besieged. 
Parapet,     In  fortification,  an  elevation  of  earth  designed  for  covering 

the  soldiers  from  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

Park  op  Artillery,     The  place  appointed  for  the  artillery. 
Parley,     A  conference  with  the  enemy. 

Parole,  The  promise  or  word  of  honor  given  by  a  prisoner  of  war 
when  permitted  to  be  at  large,  that  he  will  return  at  the  time  ap- 
pointed. 

Parole  is  also  a  word  given  out  in  orders  for  the  purpose  of  distin- 
guishing friends  from  foes. 

Party.  A  small  detachment  of  troops  employed  upon  any  duty,  as 
fatigue  party,  etc. 

Patrol.  A  small  party  under  a  non-commissioned  officer  detached 
from  one  of  the  guards,  to  move  from  post  to  post,  through  streets, 
along  roads,  etc,  to  ensure  vigilance,  order,  etc. 

Paymaster,     An  oflficer  charged  with  the  payment  of  the  troops. 

Pickets.  Outguards  occupying  the  first  line  beyond  the  police  guards ; 
when  attacked  the  outposts  and  grand  guards  fall  back  upon  the 
pickets  for  support. 

Pillage,     Plunder, 

Pioneers,  A  small  body  of  soldiers,  provided  with  saws,  axes,  etc, 
and  intended  to  clear  the  way  for  troops  on  the  march,  to  work  on  the 
intrenchments,  etc. 

Platoon,     Half  a  company. 

Pontoons,  Small  boats  used  to  sustain  the  bridges  across  streams  for 
the  passage  of  troops. 

Portfire,     A  sort  of  match  for  firing  guns,  etc, 

Provost-Marshal.     An  officer  whose  duty  it  is  to  see  punishments  put 

in  force,  secure  prisoners,  etc, 
Pyrotechny,     Evei-y  kind  of  artificial  fireworks. 


GLOSSARY.  XXni 

Q. 

Quarter.     To  give  quarter  is  to  spare  the  life  of  a  vanquished  enemy. 
Quartermaster.     An  officer  whose  duty  it  is  to  supply  the  quarters, 
fuel,  clothing,  transportation,  etc.,  to  the  troops. 

R. 

Ralx^y.     To  re-form  disordered  or  dispersed  troops  into  regular  order. 

Rampart.  A  bank  of  earth  raised  about  a  place  to  resist  the  enemy's 
shot,  cover  the  buildings,  etc. 

Range.  The  distance  from  the  gun  to  the  place  where  the  projectile 
touches  the  ground. 

Rank.     A  lino  of  soldiers  drawn  up  side  by  side. 

Rank  and  File.     Non-commissioned  officers  and  privates. 

Ration.     The  daily  allowance  of  bread,  meat,  etc.,  to  the  soldiers. 

Rear  Guard.  A  detachment  of  troops  which  brings  up  and  protects 
the  rear  of  an  army. 

Reconnoitre.  To  view  and  examine  the  country  in  which  an  enemy  is 
operating;  to  examine  the  approaches  to  an  enemy's  works;  ascer- 
tain his  position,  strength,  etc.,  etc. 

Redoubt.     A  small  work  in  fortification. 

Regiment.  A  body  of  troops  composed  of  ten  or  twelve  companies, 
and  commanded  by  a  colonel. 

Reserve.  A  body  of  troops  so  posted  as  not  to  come  into  action  until 
near  its  close,  or  until  a  critical  moment  in  the  battle. 

Retreat.     To  retreat  is  to  make  a  retrogade  movement. 

Retrenchment.  Any  work  raised  to  cover  a  point,  and  fortify  it 
against  an  enemy. 

Ricochet.     The  rebounding  of  shot  or  shells  after  striking  the  ground. 

Rosters  are  lists  or  tables  by  which  the  details  of  officers,  non-com- 
missioned officers  and  privates,  for  various  duties,  are  regulated. 

Round.     A  general  discharge  of  cannon  or  small  arms. 

Rounds.  A  visiting  or  personal  inspection  of  the  guards  and  sentinels 
on  duty. 

Rout.  The  confusion  created  in  an  army  or  body  of  troops  when  de- 
feated or  dispersed. 

S. 

Sabre.  A  species  of  sword  with  a  broad  and  heavy  blade,  curved  to- 
ward the  point. 

Sack.  An  expression  used  when  a  town  has  been  taken  by  storm  and 
given  up  to  pillage. 

Safeguard.     A  protection  granted  by  the  general   of  an  army,  for 

some  of  the  enemy's  lands  or  persons,  to  preserve  them  from  being 

insulted  or  plundered. 
Sallv.     a   sally,   or   sortie,  is  a  secret  movement  of  attack  made  by 

strong  detachments  of  troops  from  a  besieged  place,  for  the  purpose 

of  destroying  the  enemy's  works. 

Salute.  A  discharge  of  artillery  in  compliment  of  some  individual. 
It  also  means  the  ceremony  of  presenting  arms. 


XXIV  GLOSSARY. 

Saxd  Bags.  Bags  filled  with  earth  for  the  purpose  of  repairing 
breaches,  etc. 

Scouts.  Horsemen  sent  in  advance  or  on  the  wings  of  an  ai'my  to  dis- 
cover the  enemy. 

Sextixel.  a  private  soldier  placed  upon  a  post,  whose  duty  it  is  to 
watch  the  motions  of  the  enemy,  prevent  surprise,  and  in  general  to 
enforce  any  specific  order  with  which  he  may  be  entrusted. 

Sergeant.     A  non-commissioned  ofiicer. 

Sergeant-Major.  The  first  non-commissioned  officer  of  his  regiment, 
and  assists  the  adjutant  in  the  discharge  of  his  duties. 

Service.  Every  kind  of  duty  which  a  military  man  may  be  called 
upon  to  perform. 

Shells.  Hollow  iron  balls  thrown  among  the  enemy  from  mortars  and 
howitzers.  Being  filled  with  powder,  and  provided  with  a  fuse  which 
sets  fire  to  the  contents,  the  shell  explodes. 

Siege.  The  art  of  surrounding  a  fortified  place  with  an  armj^,  and 
attacking  it  by  means  of  battei'ies,  mines  and  trenches. 

Skirmish.  A  loose  desultory  kind  of  combat  in  presence  of  two 
armies. 

Sorties.  Parties  that  sally  out  of  a  place  secretly  to  annoy  the  be- 
siegers. 

Spherical  Coxe  Shot.  Thin  shells  filled  with  musket  balls,  and  fired 
from  a  howitzer. 

Storm.     A  vigorous  assault  on  a  fortified  place. 

Stratagem.  A  scheme  or  plan  devised  by  a  general  to  cover  his  de- 
signs during  a  campaign. 

Strategy.  The  hostile  movements  of  armies  beyond  the  range  of  each 
other's  cannon. 

Surprise.     To  fall  upon  an  enemy  unexpectedly. 

T. 

Traverses.  Parapets  of  earth  raised  to  cover  troops  from  the  enfila- 
ding fire  of  an  enemy. 

Trenches.  Ditches  made  during  a  siege,  to  enable  the  assailants  to 
approach  more  securely. 

Troop.     A  company  of  cavalry. 

Trophy.     Anj^thing  captured  from  an  enemy. 

V. 

Vedettes.     Sentries  on  horseback  upon  outposts. 

Vent.  The  opening  in  firearms  through  which  the  fire  is  communica- 
ted to  the  charge. 

Volley.     The  simultaneous  discharge  of  a  number  of  firearms. 

W. 

Windage.  The  difference  between  the  diameter  of  the  bore,  and  the 
diameter  of  the  shot  or  shell. 

Wings.     The  right  or  left  divisions  of  an  army  or  battalion. 

"NVoRKS.     Fortifications. 


MANUAL 


F  O  11 


VOLUNTEERS  AND  MILITIA 


Article   I. 

ARMY     ORGANIZATION. 

1.  Every  thoroughly-organized  army  consists  of  one  or  more  army 
corps,  made  up  of  infantry  and  cavalry,  with  an  artillery  equipage  of 
one  or  more  batteries,  dejiending  upon  the  strength  of  the  corps,  engi- 
neer troops,  bridge  trains,  etc. 

2.  The  infantry,  from  its  powers  of  endurance,  its  capability  of 
operating  successfully  in  almost  every  position,  its  entire  indepen- 
dence of  the  various  casualties  which  sometimes  completely  paralyze 
cavalry  and  artillery,  ranks  first  in  importance  in  the  organization  of 
any  army.  The  strength  of  the  other  arms  is  always  based  upon  that 
of  the  infantry,  which  long  experience  has  shown  should  be  about /o«r- 

Ji/ths  of  the  entire  force. 

The  troops  which  compose  the  infantry  are  usually  divided  into 
heavy  and  light;  these  distinctions  arise  partly  from  the  nature  of 
the  weapons,  and  partly  from  their  different  destination  on  the  field 
of  battle.  The  former  is  known  as  the  infantry  of  the  line,  the  latter 
as  light  infantry  and  rifles. 

The  only  arm  of  the  infantry  of  the  line  of  the  present  day  is  the 
musket,  usually  the  rifled  musket,  provided  with  the  bayonet,  which, 
in  all  the  manoeuvres,  is  fixed  to  the  piece.  This  arm  possesses  all  the 
essential  qualities  of  the  rifle,  together  with  the  advantages  peculiar  to 
the  musket,  making  it  a  most  efiicient  weapon  in  the  hands  of  well 
disciplined  troops. 

The  infantry  of  the  line  should  be  so  disciplined  as  to  act  as  one 
mass,  which  knows  no  breaking;  it  should  be  prepared  to  deliver  its 
fire  in  line,  in  the  face  of  an  opposing  foe;  to  form  in  columns  to 
3 


26  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

attack  Avith  the  bayonet ;,  form  into  square  to  resist  the  charge  of  cav- 
alry ;  or  stand  unmoved  under  the  fire  of  artillery.  To  it  must  be 
confided  everything  in  the  conduct  of  a  battle  which  requires  unyield- 
ing firmness — as  the  attack  and  defence  of  strong  points,  the  formation 
of  attacking  or  supporting  columns,  the  reserves,  etc. 

The  habitual  formation  of  the  infantry  of  the  line  of  our  service  is 
in  two  ranks ;  the  men  of  each  rank  being  side  by  side,  with  an  inter- 
val of  thirteen  inches  between  the  backs  of  the  men  of  the  front  rank 
and  the  breasts  of  those  of  the  rear  rank. 

3.  Light  infantry  may  be  armed  with  the  musket,  the  same  as  the 
infantry  of  the  line,  the  bayonet  being  worn  by  the  side  except  upon 
rare  occasions,  when  it  is  fixed;  or,  it  may  be  armed  with  rifles,  when 
light  infantry  men  become  rijienten.  The  rifle  now  used  is  short,  light, 
easily  carried  on  long  or  rapid  marches,  and  possesses  the  additional 
advantage  of  the  sicord  bayonet,  which,  in  a  charge,  may  be  used  like 
the  ordinary  bayonet,  or  as  a  sword,  in  a  hand-to-hand  engagement. 

The  duties  of  light  troops  are  to  open  an  engagement,  and  to  do 
their  part  during  its  continuance.  They  should  cover  the  front  and 
flanks  of  the  infantry  of  the  line,  in  the  advance  of  the  latter,  driving 
the  enemy  out  of  all  covers,  etc.,  only  retiring  upon  the  main  body 
when  too  strongly  pressed  to  maintain  their  position.  Upon  them 
usually  devolve  advance  post,  detachment,  and  advance  and  rear  guard 
service. 

Light  troops  form  as  other  infantry  when  occasion  requires,  but  the 
habitual  order  of  battle  is  the  diajiersed  order,  in  which  each  man  is 
separated  some  distance  from  his  neighbor,  and  must  depend  in  a  great 
degree  upon  himself. 

They  should  be  expert  marksmen,  cool,  circumspect,  skilful  in  taking 
advantage  of  their  position  to  secure  cover,  etc.,  and  should  be  pre- 
pared to  keep  an  enemy  occupied  for  many  hours  at  once,  and  maintain 
their  ground  inch  by  inch. 

All  infantry  now  receives  very  nearly  the  same  instruction,  so  as  to 
enable  it  to  perform  all  the  duties  that  may  be  required  of  the  infantry 
soldier,  making  the  distinction  between  heavy  and  light  troops  much 
less. 

The  volunteers  and  militia  of  our  country  possess,  in  an  eminent 
degree,  all  the  qualities  requisite  for  both  heavy  and  light  troops,  and 
were  they  disciplined  and  well  instructed,  as  all  must  be  to  be  truly 
formidable,  might  serve  in  either  capacity  with  as  much  efficiency  as 
any  other  troops,  let  them  come  from  whatever  quarter  they  may. 

4.  "  In  all  countries  where  military  art  is  justly  appreciated,  the  cav- 
alry arm  is  placed  in  the  second  rank  to  infantry.  To  it  an  army  is 
often  indebted  for  turning  the  scales  of  victory,  and  giving  a  decisive 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  27 

character  to  the  issue.  To  it  the  infantry,  when  exhausted  by  fatigue, 
or  broken,  often  owes  its  safety,  and  through  the  respite  gained  by  its 
charges,  finds  time  to  breathe  and  re-form.  Without  it,  much  of 
advanced  post  duty,  patrols  and  detachment  service,  requii-ing  great 
activity,  would  be  but  badly  performed. 

"  But  the  arm  of  cavalry  by  itself  can  eflect  but  little ;  and,  in  many 
circumstances,  does  not  suffice  for  its  own  safety.  The  smallest  obsta- 
cles arc  sufficient  to  render  it  powerless;  it  can  neither  attack  nor  hold 
a  post  without  the  aitl  of  infantry  :  and  at  night  is  alarmed,  and  justly 
so,  at  every  phantom.  The  proportion  borne  by  the  cavalry  to  the 
infantry  should  vary  with  the  features  of  the  seat  of  Avar;  being  greater 
in  a  champaign  than  in  a  broken,  or  mountainous  counti'y.  The  pro- 
portion of  onc-fvurih  of  tlie  infantry  for  the  first,  and  oue-si.rth  for  the 
last,  is  generally  admitted  by  received  military  authority  as  the  best." 
— (Mahan.) 

The  essential  qualities  of  cavalry,  which  distinguish  it  from  all  other 
troops,  arc  that  of  celerity,  and  the  irresistible  force  with  which,  under 
favorable  circumstances,  it  bears  down  all  opposition  ,•  making  it,  when 
properly  handled,  a  truly  formidable  arm. 

Cavalry,  to  be  etficient,  should  unite  several  essential  conditions : 
horses  and  weapons  in  good  condition;  sufficient  ground  to  gather 
speed  for  the  charge,  and  space  for  rallying:  to  have  its  flanks  covered 
to  prevent  a  surprise ;  to  be  led  boldly  into  action ;  and  to  be  followed 
by  a  support  or  reserve  sufficient  to  cover  a  retreat,  or  secure  it  from 
confusion  if  brought  up  unexpectedly  by  the  enemy. 

In  European  armies  there  is  a  marked  distinction  between  heavy  and 
h'ght  cavalry,  but  in  ours  the  distinction  is  more  nominal  than  real ;  all 
cavalry  being  called  u^ion  alike  for  the  discharge  of  the  duties  of  both 
heavy  and  light  troops. 

When  acting  as  heavy  cavalry,  its  duties  are  usually  confined  to  the 
field  of  battle ;  there,  placed  in  reserve,  it  is  held  in  hand  until  the 
decisive  moment  arrives,  when  it  is  sent  forth  to  achieve  victory  or 
prevent  defeat. 

To  the  light  cavalry  are  entrusted  the  duties  of  securing  the  heavy 
cavalry  from  surprise;  to  watch  over  the  safety  of  the  field  artillery; 
to  perform  the  services  required  of  them  by  infantry  divisions,  and 
those  pertaining  to  out-post  and  detiichraent  service  in  general. 

In  our  service  all  cavalry  is  armed  with  the  aabre,  Avith  Colt's  revolv- 
ing 2>iftoIii,  and  with  breech-loading  rijiea,  or  carbines,  of  which  there 
are  several  different  patterns  now  in  use:  as  Sharpc's  rifle  and  carbine, 
Burnside's  and  Maynard's  rifles,  etc. 

r>.  "  The  artillery  is  placed  third  t»  rank  among  the  arms.  Its  duties 
are  to  support  and  cover  the    other  arms ;  keep  the  enemy  from   ap- 


28  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

preaching  too  near;  hold  him  in  check  as  he  advances;  and  prevent 
his  dehonching  at  particular  points.  To  perforin  these  duties  it  is  con- 
sidered that  an  allowance  of  one  j^icc^  for  each  tJwttsand  men^  of  the 
other  arms,  and  one  in  reserve  from  the  proper  quota  of  this  arm.  It  is 
to  be  remarked,  however,  that  this  proportion  supposes  the  other  arms 
in  an  excellent  state  of  organization  and  dis.ipliue.  In  the  contrary 
case,  the  quota  of  artillery  must  be  increased;  for  it  inspires  poor 
troops  with  confidence,  as  they  rely  upon  it  to  keep  off  the  enemy,  and 
cover  their  retreat." — (Mahan.) 

Artillery  is  incapable  of  defending  itself,  and  must  always  be  pro- 
tected by  a  sufficient  force  of  cavalry  or  infantry. 

Field  artillery,  like  the  other  arms,  is  divided  into  light  and  heavi/;  a 
division  which  results  from  differences  in  the  calibre  of  the  pieces,  and 
the  manner  in  which  they  are  used.  The  heavy  field  artillery  comprises 
the  12-pounder  gun,  and  the  24  and  32-pounder  howitzer;  they  are 
generally  reserved  for  batteries-  in  position,  and  are  seldom  shifted 
during  an  action. 

The  light  field  artillery  is  composed  of  the  6-pounder  field  gun,  and 
the  12-pounder  howitzer.  When  the  cannoneers  are  moi;nted  upon 
horses  during  the  evolution,  it  is  called  horse  artillery/;  when  they 
follow  the  pieces  on  foot,  it  becomes  mounted  artillery. 

To  the  heavy  artillery  are  assigned  the  duties  of  occupying  posi- 
tions for  strengthening  the  weak  points  of  the  field  of  battle ;  for 
securing  the  retreat  of  the  army  ;  for  defending  all  objects  whose  pos- 
session might  be  of  importance  to  the  enemy,  as  villages,  defiles,  etc. ; 
and  for  breaking  down  all  obstacles  that  protect  the  enemy,  or  check 
the  progress  of  the  other's  arms. 

The  light  pieces,  serving  as  mounted  artillery,  follow  the  move- 
ments of  the  infantry ;  covering  the  flanks  of  its  position,  preparing 
the  way  for  its  advance,  and  arresting  that  of  the  enemy.  When  well 
disciplined  and  skilfully  handled,  mounted  artillery,  by  having  the 
cannoneers  mounted  upon  the  ammunition  boxes,  may  be  moA^ed  with 
great  celerity,  and  made  almost,  if  not  quite,  as  efficient  as  horse 
artillery. 

The  horse  artillery,  besides  jDerforming  the  same  duties  as  the 
mounted  batteries,  may  be  used  with  great  effect  at  the  decisive  mo- 
ments of  an  action.  "When  launched  forth,  its  arrival  and  execution 
should  be  unexpected  and  instantaneous.  Ready  to  repair  all  disasters 
and  partial  reverses,  it,  at  one  moment,  temporarily  replaces  a  battery 
of  foot,  and  at  the  next  in  another  point  of  the  field,  to  force  back  an 

1  Tlie  proportion  in  our  service  is  tiuo  pieces  to  every  thousand  men,  and  one  in 
reserve. 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  29 

enemy's  column.  In  preparing  the  attacks  of  cavalry,  this  arm  is 
often  indispensable,  and  always  invaluable  ;  brought  Avith  rapidity  in 
front  of  a  line,  or  opposite  to  squares  of  infantry,  -within  the  range  of 
canister,  its  well-directed  fire,  in  a  few  discharges,  opens  a  gap,  or  so 
shakes  the  entire  mass,  that  the  cavalier  finds  but  a  feeble  obstacle, 
where,  without  this  aid,  he  would  in  vain  have  exhausted  all  his  pow- 
ers." 

6.  Engineer  troops  constitute  a  fourth  arm  of  service;  as  compared 
with  artillery,  their  relative  numbers  are  about  as  two  to  three.  They 
arc  divided  into  the  staff",  guards,  or  fort-keepers,  artificers,  sappers 
and  pioneers,  miners  and  pontoniers. 

The  officers  constituting  the  staff"  are  charged  in  time  of  peace  with 
planning,  constructing  and  repairing  all  fortifications  and  other  de- 
fensive works,  etc.  ;  in  time  of  war,  engineer  troops  are  charged  with 
the  attack  and  defence  of  military  works,  the  laying  out  and  con- 
struction of  field  defences,  redoubts,  intrenchments,  roads,  etc.;  in  the 
attack  they  form  a  part  of  the  advanced  guard,  to  remove  obstructions  ; 
and  in  reti'eat  they  form  a  part  of  the  rear-guard,  to  erect  obstacles, 
destroy  roads,  bridges,  etc.,  so  as  to  retard  an  enemy's  pursuit. 

ORGANIZATION    OF    INFANTRY. 

7.  In  the  organization  of  infantry,  the  smallest  number  complete  in 
itself,  is  the  conqxiny,  which  varies  in  number  from  50  to  100  rank  and 
file. 

A  captain,  two  or  more  lieutenants,  from  four  to  six  sergeants,  and  as 
many  corporals,  are  attached  to  every  company.  The  captain  and 
lieutenants  are  the  officers,  and  the  sergeants  and  corporals  the  non- 
commissioned officers  of  the  company. 

The  captain  is  responsible  for  the  instruction,  discipline,  general 
efficiency  and  moral  tone  of  the  company. 

The  lieutenants  assist  the  captain  in  the  maintenance  of  discipline, 
and  in  the  instruction. 

The  company  is  divided  into  two  equal  parts,  which  are  designated 
as  the  first  and  second  platoon,  counting  from  the  right;  and  each 
platoon  is,  in  like  manner,  divided  into  two  sections. 

The  company  is  formed  into  two  ranks  in  the  following  manner:  the 
corporals  on  the  right  and  left  of  platoons,  according  to  height;  the 
tallest  corporal  and  the  tallest  man  from  the  first  file  on  the  right,  the 
next  two  tallest  men  from  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file, 
which  is  composed  of  the  shortest  corporal  and  the  shortest  man. 

The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two,  in  the  company,  from 
right  to  left,  form  groups  of  four  men,  who,  when  they  act  as  light 
troops,  are  designated  comrades  in  battle. 


80  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

8.  The  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  company  are 
posted  in  the  following  manner  : 

The  captain  on  the  right  of  the  company,  touching  with  the  left 
elbow. 

The  first  sergeant,  in  the  rear  rank,  touching  with  the  left  elbow,  and 
covering  the  captain.  In  the  manoeuvres  he  is  denominated  covering 
sergeant,  or  right  guide  of  the  company. 

The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  are  posted  as  file-closers,  in  the 
ran^of  file-closers,  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

Th.&  first  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  fourth  section. 

The  second  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 

The  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the 
company.  In  the  manoeuvres  he  is  called  the  left  guide  of  the  com- 
pany. 

The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the 
second  platoon. 

Tlh.Q  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  first 
platoon. 

The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the  first 
platoon. 

The  corporals  are  posted  in  the  front  rank,  as  directed  in  No.  7. 

The  Regiment. 

9.  A  REGIMENT  is  composed  of  ten  companies,  which  are  habitually 
posted  from  right  to  left,  in  the  following  order  :  first,  sixth,  fourth, 
ninth,  third,  eighth,  fiftli,  tenth,  seventh,  second,  according  to  the  rank  of 
the  captain.  With  a  less  number  of  comj^anies  the  same  principle  will 
be  observed,  viz  :  the  first  captain  commands  the  right  company,  the 
second  captain  the  left  company,  the  third  captain  the  right  centre 
company,  and  so  on. 

The  companies  thus  posted  are  designated  from  right  to  \efi,  first 
company,  second  company,  etc.  This  designation  is  observed  in  all  the 
manoeuvres. 

The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever  their  denomination, 
form  the  first  division  ;  the  next  two  companies  the  second  division; 
and  so  on  to  the  left. 

In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regiment,  or  part  of  a  regi- 
ment, composed  of  two  or  more  companies,  is  called  a  battalion. 

Every  regiment  is  provided  with  a  color,  which  is  posted  with  its 
guard,  to  be  designated  hereafter,  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  com- 
pany,- that  company,  and  all  on  its  right  belong  to  the  right  wing  of 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  31 

the    regiment  or  battalion  ;  the  remaining  companies  constitute  the 
left  ii)i)if/. 

To  each  regiment  are  attached  a  colonel,  who  commands  it,  and  is 
responsible  for  its  general  discipline  and  instruction,  a  lieiitenant- 
colouel,  two  majors,  a  quartermaster,  comminnary,  paymaster,  sitrc/eon, 
and  frequently  an  assistant  surgeon,  an  adjutant,  sergeant-major,  quar- 
termaster-sergeant, and  commissary  sergeant.  The  four  first  named  of 
these  officers  are  iha  field  officers  of  the  regiment:  the  others  constitute 
its  commissioned  and  non-commissioned  staff'. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

10.  The  field  officers  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on  active  ser- 
vice must  be  on  horseback.  The  adjutant,  when  the  battalion  is 
manoeuvring,  is  on  foot;  when  on  the  march,  or  in  action,  he  is 
mounted. 

The  colonel's  post  is  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers,  and  oppo- 
site the  centre  of  the  battalion.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  senior 
major  are  behind  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings  respectively, 
the  junior  major  behind  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  all  twelve  paces  in 
rear  of  the  file-closers. 

The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  are  opposite  the  right  and  left  of 
the  battalion  respectively,  and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers. 
They  assist  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major,  respectively,  in  the 
manoeuvres. 

E.The  quartermaster,  surgeon,  and  other  staff'-otficers,  are  in  one  rank 
on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and  three  paces  in  his  rear.  The  quarter- 
master-sergeant is  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank  of  the  field  music,  and 
two  paces  on  its  right. 

Pioneers,  Field  Music  and  Band. 

11.  The  pioneers  (one  for  each  company)  are  drawn  up  in  two  ranks, 
and  posted  on  the  right,  having  their  left  four  jjaces  from  the  right  of 
the  first  compan_y.  A  corporal  of  pioneers,  selected  from  the  corporals 
by  the  colonel,  is  posted  on  the  right  of  the  pioneers. 

The  field  miigic  (two  musicians  to  each  company)  is  drawn  up  in 
four  ranks,  and  posted  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers,  the  left 
opposite  the  centre  company.  The  principal  musician  is  two  paces  in 
front  of  the  field  mui^ie.  The  regimental  band  (not  to  exceed  sixteen 
musicians),  if  thex'e  be  one,  is  drawn  up  in  tAVO  or  four  ranks,  accord- 
ing to  its  numbers,  and  posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  music, 
having  a  principal  musician  at  its  head. 


32  MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Color-Guard. 

12.  The  color-guard  of  a  regiment  or  battalion  is  composed  of  eight 
'(orporals,  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  compauj^,  of  which 
company,  for  the  time  being,  the  guard  forms  a  part. 

The  front  rank  is  composed  of  a  sergeant  selected  by  the  colonel, 
who  is  called  the  color-hearer,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals  on  his 
right  and  left;  the  rear  rank  is  composed  of  the  three  corporals  next 
in  rank;  the  three  remaining  corporals  are  posted  in  rear  in  the  rank 
of  file-closers.  The  left  guide  of  the  color  company,  when  the  three 
last  named  corporals  are  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  is  immediately  on 
their  left. 

In  battalions  of  less  than  five  companies,  there  should  be  no  color- 
guard,  and  no  display  of  colors,  except  at  reviews. 

General  Guides  and  Markers. 

13.  There  should  be  two  general  guides  in  each  battalion,  selected  by 
the  colonel  from  among  the  sergeants  (other  than  first  sergeants)  for 
their  accuracy  in  marching.  These  sergeants  are  denominated  right 
and  left  general  guide,  respectively,  and  are  posted  in  the  line  of  file- 
closers  ;  the  first  in  rear  of  the  right,  and  the  second  in  rear  of  the 
left  flank  of  the  battalion. 

Three  marhers  are  required  to  every  battalion;  they  are  posted 
behind  the  first  company  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  when  the  battalion 
is  in  line,  and  behind  the  leading  company  or  division  whenever  it  is 
in  column. 

The  Battalion  in  Column. 

14.  For  the  march,  in  many  of  the  manoeuvres,  etc.,  the  battalion  is 
in  column.  The  column  may  be  one  of  companies,  or  of  divisions,  in 
rare  instances  it  is  one  of  platoons.  It  may  be  a  column  right  in  front, 
in  which  case  the  first  company,  or  division,  is  in  front,  all  the  others 
being  behind  it  in  regular  succession ;  or  it  may  be  a  column  left  in 
front,  in  which  the  last  company  or  division  leads,  the  others  following 
in  the  inverse  order  of  their  numbers. 

When  the  right  is  in  front,  the  guides  of  the  column  are  habitually 
to  the  left,  and  to  the  right  when  the  column  is  left  in  front. 

The  column  may  be  one  at  full  dibfanve,  at  half  distance,  or  closed 
in  mass;  in  the  first  case  the  distance  between  the  guides  of  any  two 
consecutive  companies  of  the  column  is  equal  to  the  width  of  one  of 
the  companies  or  divisions;  in  the  second  case  it  is  one-half  the  width 
of  the  company  or  division ;  and  in  the  last  case,  that  of  the  column 
closed  in  mass,  the  distance  between  the  guides  is  six  paces. 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  33 

Posts  of  the  Officers  when  the  Battalion  is  in  Column. 

15.  The  colonel  is  on  the  directing  flank,  fifteen  or  twenty  paces 
from  the  guides,  and  abreast  the  centre  of  his  battalion  ;  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel is  on  the  directing  flank,  abreast  with  the  leading  company 
or  division,  and  six  i)aces  from  the  guide;  the  majors  are  on  the  same 
flank,  the  senior  abreast  with  the  rearmost  coi^pany  or  division,  and 
six  paces  from  the  guide,  the  junior  in  a  corresponding  position  abreast 
the  centre  company ;  the  adjutant  is  near  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and 
the  sergeant-major  near  the  senior  major. 

In  a  column  of  companies,  the  captains  are  two  paces  in  front  of  the 
centres  of  their  companies;  the  right  guide  of  each  companj^  is  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank,  the  left  guide  in  a  corresponding  position  on 
the  left;  the  lieutenants,  and  remaining  sergeants,  are  in  the  rank  of 
file-closers. 

In  a  column  of  divisions,  the  senior  captain  of  each  division  is  two 
paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division,  the  junior  captain  in  the 
interval  between  the  two  companies;  the  right  guide  of  the  right 
company  is  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division,  the  left 
guide  of  the  left  company  is  in  a  corresponding  position  on  the  left; 
the  right  guide  of  the  left  company  is  in  the  rear  rank,  behind  the 
junior  captain,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  right  company  is  in  the  rank 
of  the  file-closers. 

Brigades  and  Divisions. 

16.  Two  or  more  regiments  serving  together  constitute  a  brigade, 
under  the  command  of  a  l)rigadier-(jeneral. 

Two  or  more  brigades  serving  together  constitute  a  division,  com- 
manded by  a  uiaJor-gciieraL 

Two  divisions  serving  together  constitute  an  anin/  corjjs. 

The  army  corps,  Avheu  supplied  with  a  due  proportion  of  cavalry, 
artillery,  etc.,  comprises  Avithin  itself  all  the  elements  of  a  complete 
armj"^,  ready  for  any  emergency. 

The  interval  between  two  contiguous  regiments  in  the  same  brigade, 
division,  or  army  corps,  is  twenty-two  paces. 

As  often  as  one  or  more  brigades  or  divisions,  united  in  the  same 
line,  manoeuvre  together,  each  battalion  will  be  designated  by  its  num- 
ber, according  to  its  position  in  the  line.  The  battalion  on  the  right 
of  the  whole  is  denominated  ^/-s^,  that  next  on  its  left  second,  the  fol- 
lowing one  third,  and  so  on  to  the  battalion  that  closes  the  left  of  the 
line. 

In  line  of  battle,  the  (jencrul  (the  senior  major-general  present)  has 
no  fixed  pi-si'ion;  he  goes  wbilhersoevor  he  may  judge  his  presence 
necessary. 


34  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

In  column,  he  will  hold  himself  habitually  at  its  head,  in  order  to 
direct  it  according  to  his  views.  In  the  evolutions,  he  will  place  him- 
self at  the  point  Avhence  he  can  best  direct  the  general  execution  of 
the  movement. 

In  line  of  battle,  generals  of  division  place  themselves  at  about 
sevent}'  paces  in  rear  of  the  centres  of  their  divisions. 

In  column  the^'  ho4d  themselves  on  the  directing  flank,  abreast 
with  the  centres  of  their  divisions,  and  at  thirty  or  forty  paces  from 
the  guides. 

In  line  of  battle,  generals  of  brigade  place  themselves  at  about  forty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  brigades. 

In  column,  they  hold  themselves  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  outside 
the  guides,  and  abreast  with  the  centre  of  their  brigades. 

ORGANIZATION    OF    CAVALRY. 

The  Company. 

3  7.  The  company  in  cavalry  is  denominated  the  t'-oojy;  it  is  organ- 
ized upon  the  same  principles  as  that  of  infantry ;  its  habitual  forma- 
tion is  in  two  ranks. 

When  the  company  is  in  line,  and  acting  singly,  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  are  posted  as  follows  : 

The  captain  in  front  of  the  centre,  one  pace  from  the  front  rank. 

The  first  lieutenant  in  rear  of  the  centre,  in  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

The  second  lieutenant  commands  the  first  platoon  ,•  in  the  absence  of 
a  third  lieutenant,  the  second  platoon  is  commanded  by  the  senior  ser- 
geant. The  chiefs  of  platoons  are  posted  one  pace  in  front  of  the 
centres  of  their  respective  platoons. 

The  first  sergeant  in  rear  of  the  right,  in  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

The  second  and  third  sergeants  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  company, 
and  denominated  the  guide  of  the  right,  and  guide  of  the  left,  respect- 
ively. 

The  fourth  sergeant  is  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  in  the  front 
rank,  and  counted  in  the  rank;  tlie fifth  sergeant  is  in  a  corresponding 
position  on  the  right  of  the  second  platoon. 

Corporals  on  the  flanks  of  platoons. 

Buglers  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre. 

The  Squadron. 

18.  Two  companies  united  constitute  the  squadron.  Each  squadron 
is  composed  of  four  platoons,  distinguished  by  the  denomination  of 
first,  second,  third  and  fourth,  commencing  on  the  right. 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  35 

The  first  and  second  platoons  form  the  first  division,  the  third  and 
fourth  form  the  second  division. 

The  senior  captain  of  the  squadron  is  denominated  the  captain  com- 
mandinff,  the  junior  captain  the  second  captain. 

When  the  squadron  is  in  line,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned 
officers  are  posted  as  follows  : 

The  cajitain  commanding  at  the  centre  of  the«squadron,  tlie  croup  of 
his  horse  one  pace  in  front  of  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front 
rank. 

The  second  captain  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  squadron. 
He  is  charged  with  the  alignment  of  the  rear  rank  and  line  of  file- 
closers. 

The  senior  first  lieutenant  commands  the  first  platoon;  the.  junior  first 
lieutenant  commands  the  fourth  i^latoon. 

The  senior  second  lieutenant  covamands  the  second  platoon;  the  junior 
second  lieutenant  commands  the  third  platoon. 

Each  of  these  officers  is  posted  at  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  with  the 
croujJ  of  his  horse  one  pace  in  front  of  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the 
front  rank. 

The  senior  sergeant  is  posted  behind  the  first  file  fi-om  the  right  of 
the  first  platoon  ;  he  is  the  principal  guide  when  the  column  of  squad- 
rons is  left  in  front. 

The  second  sergeant  is  behind  the  third  file  from  the  left  of  the  fourth 
platoon ;  he  is  principal  guide  when  the  column  of  squadrons  is  right 
in  front. 

The  third  sergeant  is  posted  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the 
squadron ;  he  is  the  guide  of  the  right,  and  is  not  counted  in  the  rank. 

The  fourth  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank ;  he  is  guide  of  the. 
left,  and  not  counted  in  the  rank. 

The  ffth  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  and  counted  in  the 
rank. 

The  sixth  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  second  platoon,  also  counted 
in  the  rank. 

The  seventh  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  third  platoon;  the  eighth 
sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  fourth  platoon — both  are  counted  in  the 
rank. 

The  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  file-closers  are  at  one  pace  from  the 
croup  of  those  of  the  rear  rank. 

The  corporals  are  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  right  and  left  of  their 
respective  platoons,  and  supply  the  places  of  sergeants  when  neces- 
sary. 

When  guidons  are  used  they  are  carried  by  the  non-commissioned 
officers  on  the  left  of  the  first  and  third  platoons. 


80  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  Regiment  in  TAne. 

ID.  The  rcgiweut  is  made  up  of  five  .-^ciiuulron?,  di!-tin.<,'ui.shed  by  the 
dciiouiiniition,  //>«^  second,  third,  fuitrtli  au d  ji/th  ;  they  are  formed  on 
the  same  line,  in  the  order  of  these  numbers,  eommencing  on  the 
ri.L'ht,  and  with  an  interval  of  twelve  paces. 

This  is  the  iirimitivQ.aud  habitual  order  of  the  squadrons  in  regi- 
ments. 

When  a  regiment  is  to  mount,  bnot^  and  saddles  is  sounded  ;  at 
this  signal  the  horses  arc  saddled,  bridled,  and  prepared  to  be  led 
out. 

At  the  signal,  to  horse  !  the  first  sergeants  direct  the  men  to  lead 
out. 

The  sergeants,  corporals  and  privates  being  in  two  ranks,  in  the 
order  of  their  platoons,  at  the  head  of  their  horses,  the  orderly-ser- 
geant calls  the  roll. 

The  captain  directs  them  to  call  oif  by  fours  and  to  mount  (see  No. 
383),  and  on  reaching  the  regimental  parade,  reports  all  absentees  to 
the  adjutant,  through  the  orderly-sergeant. 

In  case  of  alarm  or  surprise,  to  horse  is  sounded  ,•  the  men  then 
saddle,  bridle  and  mount  with  the  utmost  celerity,  and  repair  to  the 
place  of  assembly,  which  is  always  previously  designated. 

The  ofiicers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  field  and  staff  of 
the  regiment  are  posted  as  follows  : 

The  colonel  twenty-five  paQcs  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  regiment, 
having  a  chief  bugler  behind  him. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  twelve  paces  in  advance  of  the  centre  of  the 
right  wing. 

The  iniijor  twelve  paces  in  advance  of  the  centre  of  the  left  wing. 

The  Junior  major,  when  there  is  one,  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  the  regiment. 

The  colonel  moves  where  his  presence  may  be  necessary. 

The  adjutant  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank,  two  paces  from  the  right 
of  the  regiment.  AVhen  the  regiment  marches  in  line  with  the  guide 
right,  it  is  his  duty  to  give  the  points  of  direction,  and  superintend  the 
guides  and  the  direction  of  the  march. 

The  Hertjcunt  major  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank,  two  paces  from  the 
left  of  the  regiment,  lie  is  charged  with  the  same  functions  as  the 
adjutant,  when  the  march  is  in  line  with  the  guide  left. 

The  adjutant,  assisted  by  the  sergeant-major,  is  also  charged  with 
tracing  the  lines. 

The  standard-hearer  is  placed  at  the  last  file  but  one  from  the  left 
of  the  front  rank  of  the  platoon  on  the  right  of  the  centre  of  the 
regiment. 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  37 

General  staff-officers  (surgeon,  paymaster,  etc.),  serving  with  the  regi- 
ment, twenty-five  jiaces  in  rear  of  the  right  of  the  first  squadron, 
according  to  rank. 

The  quartermaster-sergeant  hehind  the  adjutant,  on  the  line  of  the 
rear  rank. 

The  (jcneral  guides  of  the  right  and  left  are  jilaccd  in  the  rank  of 
file-closers,  in  rear  of  the  sergeant-major  and  quartermaster-sergeant. 

The  trumpeters,  formed  in  two  ranks,  are  twenty-five  paces  in  rear  of 
the  centre  of  the  regiment. 

The  truvipcfers  of  a  squadron  acting  separately,  arc  posted  in  the 
same  manner,  but  in  one  rank. 

Order  of  the  Regiment  in  Column. 

Bj  Tiro  or  bi/  four. 

20,  In  this  order  the  squadrons  preserve  an  interval  of  twelve  paces 
between  each  other;  the  same  as  in  line.  This  distance  is  measured 
from  the  croups  of  the  horses  of  the  last  files  of  one  squadron,  to  the 
heads  of  the  horses  of  the  first  files  of  the  next  squadron. 

The  colonel  marches  at  the  centre  of  the  regiment,  on  the  side  of  the 
guides,  twenty-five  paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column,  having  behind 
him  a  chief  bugler. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  twelve  paces  from 
the  flank  of  the  column ;  he  marches  on  a  line  with  the  lieutenants 
commanding  the  first  platoon  of  the  first  squadron. 

The  major  marches  in  the  same  direction  of  the  lieutenant-colonel, 
and  on  a  line  with  the  guide  of  the  left  of  the  fifth  squadron. 

The  adjutant  marches  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  two  paces  from  the 
flank,  and  on  a  line  with  the  leading  files  of  the  column,  to  observe 
the  guides  and  the  direction  of  the  march. 

The  sergeant-major  marches  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  two  paces  from 
the  flank  of  the  column,  and  on  a  line  with  the  guide  of  the  left  of  the 
fifth  squadron ;  if  the  left  is  in  front,  he  executes  on  the  side  of 
the  guides  what  is  prescribed  for  the  adjutant  when  the  right  is  in 
front. 

The  qnartermastcr-sergeant  having  the  right  general  guide  behind 
him,  marches  on  the  side  opposite  the  guides,  two  paces  from  the  flank, 
and  on  a  line  with  the  first  files  of  the  column. 

The  captains  commanding  march  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  and  four 
paces  from  the  flank,  and  abreast  of  the  centre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  second  captains  march  on  the  aide  opposite  the  guides,  four  paces 
from  the  flank,  and  abreast  of  the  centre  of  their  S(|ua<lronj'. 

The yrV*^  lieutenant  of  each  squadron  marches  at  the  head  of  the  first 


38  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

platoon,  one  pace  in  advance  of  the  first  files,  having  the  guide  of  the 
right  on  his  right. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  platoons  march  on  the  side  of  the  guides, 
one  pace  from  the  flank  of  the  column,  and  abreast  of  their  first  files ; 
the  file-closers  march  on  the  side  opposite  the  guides,  one  pace  from  the 
flank,  and  on  a  line  with  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 

They  all  march  in  a  similar  manner  on  the  flanks  of  the  column 
when  the  left  is  in  front ;  and,  in  this  ease,  it  is  the  junior  first  lieuten- 
ant who  marches  in  the  column  at  the  head  of  the  fourth  platoon  of 
each  squadron. 

The  guide,  who  in  line  is  posted  on  the  left  of  the  squadron,  marches 
behind  the  last  file  of  the  squadron  ;  when  the  column  is  left  in  front, 
he  takes  post  on  the  left  of  the  officer  commanding  the  fourth  platoon, 
one  pace  in  front  of  the  left  file. 

Order  in  Column  of  Platoonsi. 

21.  In  this  order,  the  distance  from  one  platoon  to  another,  measured 
from  the  men  of  one  front  rank  to  those  of  another  front  rank,  is  equal 
to  the  front  of  a  platoon  ;  that  is  to  say,  it  is  twelve  paces  if  the  platoon.s 
are  of  twelve  files,  subtracting  the  depths  of  two  ranks,  which  is  six 
paces,  there  remains  six  paces  from  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  the  rear 
rank  of  one  platoon  to  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank  of 
the  next  platoon,  a  distance  which  is  equal  to  half  of  the  front  of  a 
platoon. 

The  colonel  marches  at  the  centre  of  the  regiment,  on  the  side  of  the 
guides,  twenty-five  paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column. 

The  lieutoiant-coloncl  marches  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  twelve  paces 
from  the  flank  of  the  column,  and  on  a  line  with  the  lieutenant  com- 
manding the  first  platoon  of  the  first  squadron. 

The  major  marches  in  the  dii'ection  of  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and 
abreast  of  the  file  closers  of  the  last  platoon  of  the  column. 

The  adjutant  marches  behind  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon  to  direct 
the  guide  of  the  column ;  he  should  occasionally  place  himself  in  front 
of  this  file  to  satisfy  himself  that  the  guides  of  each  platoon  preserve 
the  same  direction. 

The  sergeant-major  marches  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  two  paces  from 
the  flank  of  the  column,  and  abreast  of  the  file-closers  of  the  fourth 
platoon  of  the  fifth  squadron  ;  and,  if  the  left  is  in  front,  he  executes 
on  the  side  of  the  guides  that  which  is  prescribed  for  the  adjutant  when 
the  right  is  in  front. 

The  quartermaster-sergeant  having  the  right  general  guide  behind 
him,  marches  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  guides,  two  paces  from  the 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  39 

flank  of  the  colmiin,  and  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank  of  the  first 
platoon. 

The  capiain>i  cowmaudiuff  march  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  four 
paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column,  and  habitually  abreast  of  the 
centre  of  their  squadrons. 

The  second  coptaiiix  march  on  the  side  opposite  to  the  guides,  four 
paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column,  and  abreast  of  the  centre  of  their 
squadrons. 

The  ///•«<  and  secoud  licnlenaiitH  march  at  the  centre  of  their  platoons, 
one  pace  from  the  front  rank  :  those  who  command  the  platoons  at  the 
head  of  squadrons,  preserve,  besides  their  distance,  the  ground  neces- 
sary to  enable  each  squadron,  in  wheeling  into  line,  to  maintain  its 
interval. 

The  sergeants,  who  are  file-closers,  march  on  the  side  opposite  to  the 
guides,  behind  the  third  file  of  their  platoons. 

When  the  column  marches  right  in  front,  the  guide  at  the  right  of 
each  squadron  marches  on  the  right  of  the  first  platoon  ;  and  the  guide 
of  the  left  places  himself  as  file-closer  behind  the  second  file  from  the 
left  of  the  fourth  platoon. 

The  post  of  these  sergeants  is  the  reverse  when  the  left  is  in  front. 

^  Order  in  Column  of  Divisions. 

22.  The  colonel,  lieufoinnt-colouel,  ntajor,  and  adjutant,  are  posted  as 
in  the  column  of  platoons.     ^ 

It  is  the  same  for  the  captains  connnanding,  and  the  second  cnjJtains. 

The  senior  first  lieutenant  commands  the  first  division,  the  other  Jirst 
lieutenant  the  second ;  they  remain,  however,  at  the  centre  of  their  pla- 
toons. 

All  the  other  ofiicers  and  sergeants  of  each  division  are  posted  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  order  in  column  of  platoons,  the  file-closers  remaining  in 
their  places,  on  whatever  side  the  guide  may  be. 

Order  in  close  Colunifi  of  Squadrons. 

23.  In  this  order,  the  distance  from  one  squadron  to  another  is 
twelve  paces,  measured  from  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  the  rear  rank  of 
one  squadron,  to  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank  of  the  next 
squadron. 

The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  major,  are  posted  as  in  column  of 
l)latoons. 

The  adjutant  marches  behind  the  left  guide  of  the  first  squadron,  on 
the  alignment  of  the  file-closers,  to  superintend  the  direction  of  the 
march. 


40  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  sergeant-major  is  posted  as  in  column  of  platoons,  and  when  the 
left  is  in  front,  he  performs  the  same  duties  as  the  adjutant  when  the 
right  is  in  front. 

The  quarfermaster-sei-geant  marches  on  the  side  opposite  the  guides, 
as  in  column  of  platoons. 

The  guide  of  the  left  of  the  left  wing  of  the  first  squadron  moves  to 
the  front  on  the  alignment  of  the  officers;  he  is  replaced  by  the  sergeant 
file-closers  of  the  fourth  platoon.  If  the  left  is  in  front,  the  guide  of 
the  right  of  the  fifth  squadron  places  himself  on  the  alignment  of  the 
officers  to  serve  as  guide ;  he  is  replaced  by  the  sergeant  file-closer  of 
the  first  platoon. 

All  the  officers  of  the  squadron,  and  the  file-closers,  remain  posted  as 
in  the  order  of  battle,  except  the  captains  commanding,  who  march  on 
the  sides  of  the  guides,  four  paces  from  the  flank,  and  on  a  line  with 
the  officers  of  their  squadrons. 

Cavalry  Brigades  and  Divisions. 

24.  Two  or  more  regiments  of  cavalry  constitute  a  brigade;  and  two 
or  more  brigades  constitute  a  division.  They  are  officered  in  the  same 
manner  as  infantry  brigades  and  divisions. 

Mixed  brigades  and  divisions,  composed  of  regiments  of  infantry 
and  cavalry,  are  sometimes  formed. 

ORGANIZATION     OF    FIELD     ARTILLERY. 

25.  Field  artillery  is  always  formed  into  batteries.  A  battery  may  be 
composed  of  four,  six,  or  eight  pieces;  the  pieces  may  be  all  6-pounder 
or  12-pounder  guns,  or  it  may  be  composed  of  6-pounder  guns  and 
12-pounder  howitzers,  or  12-pounder  guns  and  24  or  32-pounder  how- 
itzers. 

The  number  of  guns  should  be  double  that  of  the  howitzers ;  for  a 
defensive  war,  from  i  to  l-5th  of  the  pieces  should  be  12  pounder  guns, 
and  2-4  or  32-i)ounder  howitzers.  For  an  oft'ensive  war,  from  l-7th  to  i: 
only  should  be  of  these  calibres,  otherwise  the  batteries  could  not  be 
moved  with  sufficient  celerity. 

Each  piece  is  followed  by  a  caisson  for  ammunition ;  each  piece  and 
caisson  is  drawn  by  four  or  six  horses. 

2fi.  A  battery  of  six  pieces  will  be  supposed ;  it  is  divided  into  three 
sections,  the  right,  centre  and  left;  each  containing  two  pieces  and 
two  caissons.  In  each  section,  the  pieces  are  denominated  right  pieces 
and  left  pieces. 

The  battery  is  also  divided  into  half  batteries,  denominated  right 
and  left  half  batteries. 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  41 

The  word  piece  applies  to  the  gun  or  howitzer,  either  with  or  without 
its  limber;  and  sometimes  to  the  piece  and  caisson  together. 

The  officers  and  men  required  for  the  service  of  the  battery,  are  as 
follows  : 

One  cfijJtaiu,  who  commands  the  battery. 

Four  lieutenants  ;  the  first  in  rank  commanding  the  right  section  (of 
two  pieces),  the  second  the  left,  the  third  the  centre,  and  the  fourth  the 
line  of  caissons.  When  half  batteries  are  formed,  the  first  commands 
the  right,  and  the  second  the  left. 

Six  mounted  serf/cants,  each  charged  with  guiding  and  superintend- 
ing a  piece. 

Twenty-four  or  thirty-six  drivers,  being  one  to  each  pair  of  horses. 

Six  detachments  of  cannoneers,  each  containing  nine  men  in  mounted 
batteries,  and  eleven  in  horse  artillerj',  including  the  chief  of  the  cais- 
son, and  the  gunner  who  commands  the  detachment.  In  each  detach- 
ment of  horse  artillery,  the  two  last  extra  men  are  horni'holders,  who 
hold  the  horses  of  the  detachment  while  it  is  serving  the  piece. 

Two  trumpeters  or  buglers.     One  guidon. 

Order  in  Line. 

27.  The  order  in  line  is  that  in  which  the  carriages  arc  formed  in  two 
lines;  the  horses  all  facing  the  same  direct  ion  (to  the  front),  the  pieces 
limbered,  and  each  followed  or  preceded  by  its  caisson. 

The  interval  between  the  carriages  in  a  mounted  battery  is  fourteen 
yjxrds ;  in  a  horse  artillery  battery  it  is  seventeen  yards. 

The  distance  between  the  two  lines,  in  a  mounted  battery,  measured 
from  the  rear  of  the  carriages  of  one  line  to  the  heads  of  the  horses  of 
the  second,  is  two  yards;  in  horse  artillery  the  detachments  being  two 
yards  in  rear  of  their  pieces,  the  second  line  is  two  yards  in  rear  of 
them. 

In  a  mounted  battery  the  cannoneers  are  at  their  posts. 

The  captain  is  four  yards  in  front  of  the  centre;  but,  during  the 
manoeuvres,  he  goes  wherever  his  presence  may  be  most  necessary,  and 
where  his  commands  may  be  best  heard. 

Each  chief  of  section  is  in  line  with  his  leading  drivers,  and  midway 
between  the  leading  carriages  of  his  section. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  opposite  the  centre,  four  yards 
behind  the  rear  line  of  carriages. 

Each  chief  of  piece  is  on  the  left,  and  near  the  leading  driver  of  his 
leading  carriage.  In  horse  artillery,  when  the  chiefs  of  caissons  are 
mounted,  each  chief  of  carriage  is  near  its  leading  driver  on  the  left. 

The  trximpeter  is  near  the  captain. 
4 


42  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

Order  in  Column. 

28.  The  order  in  column  is  that  in  Avhieh  the  battery  is  formed  by- 
sections  ;  the  carriages  being  in  two  files,  and  each  piece  being  followed 
or  preceded  by  its  caisson. 

In  a  mounted  batter}^,  the  interval  between  the  two  pieces  of  each 
section  of  the  column  is  fourteen  yards  ;  the  distance  between  the 
carriages  is  two  yards.  The  cannoneers  are  in  file  on  each  side  of 
their  pieces. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  interval  between  carriages  is  seventeen  yards* 
The  distance  between  the  carriages  and  detachments  is  two  yards. 
The  detachments  formed  in  two  ranks  are  two  yards  in  rear  of  their 
pieces. 

The  captain  is  generally  fourteen  yards  from  the  column  and  oppo- 
site the  centre. 

Each  chief  of  section  is  in  line  with  his  leading  drivers  and  midway 
between  his  leading  carriages. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caisson fi  is  in  line  with  the  captain,  on  the 
same  side  of  the  column,  and  four  yards  from  it;  but  he  does  not 
change  his  position  to  conform  to  that  of  the  captain. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  caissons  are  posted  as  in  line. 

Order  in  Baiter?/. 

29.  The  order  in  battery  is  that  in  which  the  pieces  are  prepared  for 
firing;  the  pieces,  limbers,  and  caissons  being  turned  toward  the 
enemy,  and  formed  in  three  parallel  lines. 

In  a  mounted  battery  the  interval  between  the  carriages  is  fourteen 
yards.  The  distances  between  the  lines  of  pieces  and  limbers  is  six 
yards,  measured  from  the  end  of  the  handspike  to  the  heads  of  the 
leading  horses.  The  distance  between  the  lines  of  limbers  and  caissons 
is  eleven  yards,  measuring  from  the  rear  of  the  limbers  to  the  heads  of 
the  leading  horses  of  the  caissons.     The  cannoneers  are  at  their  posts. 

In  horse  artillery  the  interval  between  the  pieces  is  seventeen  yards. 
The  distances  between  the  lines  are  the  same  as  for  the  mounted  battery. 
The  cannoneers  are  at  their  posts,  and  the  detachments  of  horses  are 
four  yards  in  rear  of  the  limbers. 

The  captain  is  generally  on  the  left  of  the  chief  of  the  centre  sec- 
tion ;  but  he  may  go  wherever  his  presence  is  required. 

Each  chief  of  section  is  habitually  in  the  centre  of  his  section,  half 
way  between  the  lines  of  pieces  and  limbers. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  opposite  the  centre,  four  yards  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  caissons. 

Each  chief  of  jyicce  is  outside  the  file  on  the  left  of  his  piece;  but 


ARMY   ORGANIZATION.  43 

near  it,  and  opposite  the  middle  of  the  trail  handspike.  During  the 
executions  of  the  firings  he  habitually  dismounts  and  gives  the  reins 
of  his  horse  to  the  driver  of  the  wheel  horses  of  the  limber. 

Each  chief  of  caisson  is  on  the  left,  and  four  yards  in  rear  of  the 
limber  of  the  piece.  In  horse  artillery  he  gives  the  reins  of  his  horse 
to  the  driver  of  the  wheel  horses  of  the  caissons. 

Tico  or  more  Batteries  united. 

30.  When  necessary,  two  or  more  batteries  may  be  united  ;  they  uifty 
be  formed  by  sections  in  one  or  more  parallel  columns,  or  in  two 
columns  joined,  and  presenting  a  front  of  four  pieces  with  the  same 
intervals  as  in  line.  Sometimes  they  arc  formed  in  close  column  with 
a  front  of  four  or  six  pieces,  and  the  batteries  being  placed  a  distance 
apart  equal  to  the  interval  between  two  pieces.  When  the  batteries 
are  in  line,  the  intervals  between  them  are  twice  the  intervals  between 
the  pieces. 

The  position  of  Artillery. 

31.  Artillery  seldom  or  never  acts  in  an  independent  capacity,  but  in 
conjunction  with  either  infantry  or  cavalry,  or  both. 

The  positions  usually  assigned  batteries  are  on  the  flanks,  or  in  the 
intervals  between  regiments  and  brigades,  these  intervals  being  in- 
creased suflicicntly  to  admit  them.  When  a  battery  is  brought  into 
action,  it  is  usually  thrown  forward  some  sixty  paces  in  front  of  the 
main  line. 

Two  mounted  batteries  are  usually  assigned  to  each  division  of 
infantry,  and  one  of  horse  artillery  to  every  division  of  cavali\y. 
Besides,  for  each  array  corps  of  infantry,  there  is  a  reserve  of  several 
batteries. 

THE    STAFF. 

32.  The  well-being  and  efficiency  of  an  army  must  depend  in  a  large 
degree  upon  the  thorough  organization  of  the  various  dei^ai'tments  of 
the  Stajf. 


These  ai'e : 


An  Adjutant- General's  Department 
An  Inspector-GeneraVs  Department. 
A  Quartermaster's  Department. 
A  Commissary  Department. 
An  Engineer  Department. 
An  Ordnance  Department. 
A  Pay  Department. 
A  Medical  Depai'tment. 


44  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

33.  The  officers  of  the  adjutant-general's  department  are,  an  adju- 
tant-general, with  such  rank  as  may  be  assigned  him  by  legislative 
enactment,  usually  that  of  colonel  or  brigadier-general,  with  as  many 
assistant  adjutant-generals  as  the  exigencies  of  the  service  may  require. 

The  adjutant-general  should  be  the  chief  of  the  staif  of  the  com- 
mander-in-chief. He  is  the  regular  channel  through  which  command- 
ers of  corps  and  chiefs  of  departments  communicate  with  the  com- 
mander-in-chief; and  all  orders,  special  instructions  and  general 
r^ulations,  issued  by  the  commander-in-chief  relative  to  the  organiza- 
tion, discipline  and  instruction  of  the  forces,  are  prepared  and  pub- 
lished by  the  adjutant-general,  conformably  to  the  direction  of  the 
commander-in-chief. 

When  the  commander-in-chief  takes  the  field  the  adjutant-general 
should  accompany  him;  when  an  army  in  the  field  is  in  command  of 
any  general  not  the  general-in-chief,  an  assistant  adjutant-general  is 
assigned  to  him  as  chief  of  his  staff. 

An  assistant  adjutant-general,  with  the  rank  of  captain,  is  assigned 
to  the  commander  of  each  brigade,  and  one  with  the  rank  of  major  is 
assigned  to  the  general  of  every  division.  In  each  case  the  assistant 
adjutant-general  is  the  chief  of  staff  of  his  general,  and  his  duties  are 
of  the  same  general  nature  as  those  of  the  adjutant-general. 

An  adjutant  is  the  chief  of  staff  of  his  regiment. 

34.  The  officers  of  the  inspector-general's  department  are  one  or 
more  inspector-generals,  with  a  division  inspector  for  each  division,  and 
a  brigade  insp>ector  for  each  brigade. 

To  the  inspector-general,  and  the  division  and  brigade  inspectors, 
are  assigned  the  duties  of  inspecting  the  troops,  fortifications,  camps, 
etc.,  at  stated  times ;  and  division  and  brigade  inspectors  are  specially 
entrusted  with  the  instruction  of  regimental  officers.  The  militia  laws 
of  Virginia,  and  some  of  the  other  States,  impose  all  the  duties  of  this 
department  upon  that  of  the  adjutant-general,  in  which  case  the  divis- 
ion and  brigade  inspectors  become  the  chiefs  of  staff  of  their  divisions 
and  brigades,  and  discharge  all  the  duties  which  usually  devolve  upon 
the  assistant  adjutant-general. 

35.  The  officers  of  the  quartermaster's  department  are,  a  quarter- 
master-general, who  has  the  control  of  the  department;  one  or  more 
assistant  quartermaster-generals,  quartermasters  and  assistant  quarter- 
masters. 

The  duties  of  this  department  are,  to  provide  quarters  and  transpor- 
tation for  the  troops;  storage  and  transportation  for  all  army  supplies; 
clothing  for  the  troops ;  camp  and  garrison  equipage ;  cavalry  and 
artillery  horses  ;  fuel;  forage;  straw,  and  stationery. 

36.  The  officers  of  the   commissary  department  are,   a  commissary 


ARMY    ORGANIZATION.  45 

(jeneral,  one  or  more  assistant  comm!ssar>/-generaIs,  and  as  many  com- 
viissnries  and  assistant  commissaries  as  the  exigencies  of  the  service 
may  require. 

To  this  department  are  assigned  the  duties  of  providing  all  the  sup- 
plies necessary  for  the  subsistence  of  the  troops. 

37.  The  officers  of  the  engineer  department  are,  a  chief  enf/iuecr,  and 
as  many  officers  of  engineers  as  may  be  necessary  to  give  efficiency  to 
the  department. 

The  duties  of  this  department  usually  relate  to  the  construction  of 
l)ermanent  and  field  fortifications;  works  for  the  attack  and  defence 
of  places;  for  the  passage  of  rivers;  for  the  movements  and  operations 
of  troops  in  the  field,  and  such  reconnoissances  and  surveys  as  may  be 
required  for  these  objects. 

38.  The  ordnance  department  is  officered  in  the  same  manner  as  that 
of  the  engineers. 

This  department  has  charge  of  all  arsenals  and  armories;  all  cannon 
and  artillery  carriages  and  equipments;  all  apparatus  and  machines 
for  the  service  and  manoeuvres  of  artillery;  all  small  arms  and  accou- 
trements and  horse  equipments;  all  ammunition,  and  all  materials  for 
the  construction  of  munitions  of  war. 

39.  The  officers  of  the  pay  department  are,  a  pa^»ia.sfe/--f/c»e;-a/,  one 
or  more  deputy  pa)jmaster-<jenerals,  and  one  paymaster,  ordinarily,  to 
every  regiment.  When  large  bodies  of  troops  are  serving  together,  the 
number  of  paymasters  may  be  very  much  reduced  without  detriment  to 
the  service. 

To  this  department  belong  all  the  duties  pertaining  to  thepayment  of 
the  troops  when  they  are  in  the  service  of  the  State. 

40.  The  officers  of  the  medical  dejjartment  are  a  siiygeon-fjeneval,  with 
one  surgeon  to  each  regiment,  and  such  other  surgeons  and  assistant 
surgeons  as  a  proper  attention  to  the  health  of  the  troops  may  require. 

The  senior  medical  officer,  on  duty  with  any  corps  in  the  field,  unless 
otherwise  specially  ordered  by  the  commanding  officei',  will  be,  e.r- 
ojficio,  the  medical  director,  and  Avill  have  the  general  control  of  the 
medical  officers  and  the  supervision  of  the  hospitals  under  their  charge. 


46  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MIILTIA. 


Article    II. 

ARMS. 

41.  The  principal  small  arms  used  in  warfare  at  the  present  day  are 
the  common  or  smooth,  bore  musket  with  percussion  lock,  the  rifled 
musket,  the  rifle  with  elongated  ball,  rifled  carbines,  pistols  and  sabres. 

42.  The  smooth  bore  musket  (U.  S.  service  pattern)  is  four  feet  ten 
inches  in  length  from  the  butt  to  the  muzzle ;  is  provided  with  a  bayonet 
eighteen  inches  in  length,  which  fits  upon  the  outside  of  the  muzzle,  and 
locks,  so  as  to  prevent  its  removal  by  an  adversary;  it  has  a  bore  of 
0.69  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  carries  a  leaden  ball  running  32  to  the 
pound.  The  musket  with  its  bayonet  weighs  ten  pounds  nearly.  The 
fire  of  the  musket  is  inaccurate,  but  in  a  general  action,  where  accuracy 
of  fire  is  not  attainable,  it  may  be  made  effective  up  to  300  yards;  be- 
yond 400  yards  it  is  useless. 

This  arm  is  being  rapidly  superseded  by  the  rifled  musket,  or  Minie 
musket,  as  it  is  sometimes  called. 

43.  The  rifled  musket  is  nothing  but  the  common  musket  "rijled;" 
the  grooves  are  three  in  number,  they  are  of  eq^^al  width,  and  equal  in 
width  to  the  "lands ;"  the  twist  of  the  grooves  is  a  uniform  spiral  of 
one  turn  to  six  feet  in  length ;  the  grooves  are  very  shallow  at  the  muz- 
zle (0.005  of  an  inch),  and  deepen  slightly  as  they  go  down  to  the 
breech.  The  projectile,  instead  of  being  round,  as  in  the  common 
musket,  is  made  cylindm-conical,  the  cylindrical  portion  having  three 
grooves  around  it,  and  the  base  or  bottom  being  hollowed  out  in  a  coni- 
cal form.  The  object  of  giving  the  ball  a  pointed  form  is  that  it  may 
meet  with  the  least  possible  resistance  in  its  flight  through  the  air ;  the 
effect  of  the  grooves  is,  by  the  action  of  the  air  upon  them,  to  keep  the 
point  of  the  ball  in  front,  and  cause  it  to  strike  first;  the  object  of 
making  it  hollow  at  the  base  is  to  make  it  expand  when  the  piece  is 
fired,  thereby  causing  it  to  fill  the  grooves,  and  follow  them  in  its 
passage  out  of  the  piece. 

The  dimensions  of  the  rifled  musket  (U.  S.  pattern)  are  as  follows: 
length,  without  bayonet,  four  feet  eight  inches ;  with  bayonet  fixed,  six 
feet  two  inches ;  weight,  ten  pounds ;  diameter  of  bore,  0.58  of  an 
inch;  weight  of  ball,  500  grains. 

44.  The  "altered  musket"  of  the  U.  S.  service  is  the  old  pattern 
musket  rifled;  the  principal  difference  between  this  and  the  new  rifled 


ARMS.  47 

musket  being  that  the  altered  inuskct  has  a  larger  bore,  its  diameter 
being  0.69  of  an  inch.  The  ball  carried  by  it  is  heavier,  weighing  730 
grains,  and  a  heavier  charge  of  powder  is  necessary. 

45.  The  riflej  or  Minic  rifle,  as  it  is  generality  called,  is  rifled  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  muskets;  the  diameter  of  the  bore  is  0.58  of  an 
inch,  the  same  as  the  new  musket,  and  the  same  ball  is  used;  it  is 
shorter  than  the  musket,  being  but  four  feet  one  inch  in  length,  without 
the  bayonet,  and  not  quite  six  feet  with  the  bayonet  fixed  :  its  weight  is 
greater  than  that  of  the  musket,  it  being,  without  the  bayonet,  ten 
pounds,  within  a  small  fraction,  and  thirteen  with  it.  The  bayonet  is 
not  quite  twenty-two  inches  in  length ;  it  is  made  in  the  form  of  a 
heavy  sabre,  but  slightly  curved  near  the  point.  It  is  usually  worn  at 
the  side,  and  is  only  fixed  when  pressed  by  cavalry,  or  in  a  charge. 

46.  There  are  sevei'al  forms  of  rifles  and  carbines  which  are  more  or 
less  in  use  by  mounted  troops,  as  Colt's  repeating  carbines  and  repeat- 
ing rifles,  Maynard's,  Burnsides,  and  Sharp's  rifles,  and  Sharp's  carbine 
all  of  which  arc  breech-loading  arms.  Colt's  arms  are  intended  for 
both  round  and  elongated  balls;  in  the  others,  the  elongated  ball  is 
alone  used. 

47.  The  pistols  in  general  use  at  this  time  are  the  largest  size  of 
Colt's  repeaters;  they  are  rifled,  and  may  be  used  as  cai'bines  by  the 
attachment  of  an  ''  adjustable  breech." 

There  is  also  a  "a  pistol  carbine"  manufactured  by  the  U.  S.  ord- 
nance department;  it  is  rifled,  has  the  same  bore  as  the  rifle  and  rifle 
musket,  and  the  same  ball  may  be  used,  although  a  ball  with  a  larger 
cavity  than  that  of  the  rifle  ball  is  preferable.  This  arm  may  be  used 
as  a  pistol  or  carbine — in  the  latter  case  an  adjvistable  breech  becomes 
necessary. 

48.  All  cavalry  and  artillery  troops  are  armed  with  sabres — the  U.  S. 
cavalry  and  artillery  sabres  have  steel  scabbards  ;  are  forty-three  and 
thirty-eight  inches  long  respectively,  and  are  attached  to  "sling"  belts, 
which  are  worn  around  the  waist. 

49.  The  fire-arms  used  in  artillery  are  divided  into  three  classes,  gnni, 
hoioitzers  and  mortars.  Guns  are  used  to  throw  solid  shot,  which  cut 
by  their  force  of  percussion,  hence  they  are  always  fired  with  lai'ge 
charges  of  powder,  say  from  one-fifth  to  one-half  the  weight  of  the 
ball.  They  are  used  to  strike  an  object  direct,  and  at  a  distance  ;  or,  by 
their  ricochet  fire,  for  reaching  objects  not  attainable  by  direct  fire. 
They  arc  also  used  to  batter  down  the  walls  of  fortifications.  They  are 
always  designated  by  the  weight  of  solid  shot  which  they  carry. 

There  are  six  different  calibres,  which  are  divided  into  three  classes, 
they  are  6,  12,  18,  24,  32  and  42-poundors. 

60.  The  6  and  12-pounders,  usually  made  of  bronze,  but  sometimes 


48  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

of  cast  iron,  constitute  one  class  called  field  guns  ;  the  12,  18,  and  24- 
l^ounders,  made  of  cast  iron,  constitute  a  second  known  as  siege  and 
garrison  guns ;  and  the  32  and  42-pounders,  also  cast  iron,  make  the 
third,  denominated  sea-coast  guns. 

Field  guns  are  used  in  the  field  as  light  artillery  ;  siege  and  garrison 
guns  are  used  in  permanent  and  field  fortifications,  and  in  sieges,  to 
batter  down  the  walls,  etc. ;  sea-coast  guns  are  principally  used  in  per- 
manent fortifications  on  the  sea-board. 

61.  A  howitzer  is  a  gun  with  a  chamber  in  it.  It  is  used  principally 
for  firing  hollow  projectiles,  or  shells  ;  in  order  to  prevent  breaking  the 
shell,  and  at  the  same  time  to  give  the  projectile  sufficient  velocity,  a 
small  charge  of  powder  is  fired  from  a  cylindrical  chamber  at  the  bot- 
tom of  the  bore. 

The  calibre  of  howitzers  is  designated  by  the  weight  of  the  solid  shot 
which  they  would  carry,  or  by  the  number  of  inches  that  the  bore  is  in 
diameter.  They  are  divided  into  field  howitzers,  mountain  howitzers, 
siege  a)id  garrison,  and  sea-coast  honntzers  ;  field  howitzers  are  12,  24, 
and  32-pounders,-  mountain  howitzers  are  12-pouuders,  siege  and  gar- 
rison howitzers  are  24-pounders  and  8-inch,  and  sea-coast  howitzers  are 
8  and  10  inch. 

52.  Field  howitzers  are  used  with  light  batteries  in  the  field;  the 
mountain  howitzer  is  for  service  in  countries  too  rough  to  admit  the 
passage  of  wheeled  carriages  ,•  siege  and  garrison  howitzers  are  used  in 
the  trenches  at  sieges,  and  in  the  defence  of  permanent  fortifications  ; 
and  sea-coast  howitzers  are  used  in  permanent  fortifications  on  the  sea- 
board. 

53.  There  are  several  kinds  of  mortars  ranging  from  six  to  sixteen 
inches  in  calibre;  the  heavy  mortars  are  principally  used  on  the  sea- 
coast;  the  others  are  for  use  in  the  trenches  at  sieges,  and  in  the  defence 
of  fortifications  of  all  kinds. 

54.  Pieces  of  artillery  are  mounted  on  their  carriages  by  means  of 
trunnions  ;  they  are  cylinders  cast  with  the  gun,  having  a  common  axis 
at  right  angles  to  that  of  the  gun.  The  trunnions  of  the  G-pounder  gun, 
and  12-pounder  howitzer  have  the  same  diameter,  so  that  guns  and 
howitzers  may  be  mounted  on  the  same  sized  carriages,  and  serve  to- 
gether in  the  same  battery;  the  trunnions  of  the  12-pounder  gun,  and 
24  and  32-pounder  howitzer,  are  also  of  the  same  size,  so  that  they  may 
be  thrown  together  in  the  same  battery. 

55.  The  field  gun  carriage  is  composed  of  two  jDarts — the  portion  on 
which  the  piece  rests  when  it  is  fired,  and  the  limber.  The  first  part, 
or  carriage  proper,  is  two-Avheeled ;  from  the  axle  proceeds  the  stock,  to 
which  are  fastened  two  upright  pieces  called  cheeks,  upon  which  the 
trunnions  rest.     The  end  of  the  stock,  designated  the  trail,  rests  on  the 


AMMUNITION.  49 

ground  during  the  firings  ;  at  other  times  it  is  attached  to  the  limber ; 
the  piece  gets  its  proper  elevation  by  means  of  the  elevating  screw, 
which  works  through  a  plate  on  the  stock.  The  limber  is  the  part  of 
the  carriage  to  which  the  horses  are  attached ;  on  the  end  of  the  trail 
is  an  iron  plate  called  the  lunette,  throitgh  which  there  is  an  opening, 
which  goes  over  a  hook  on  the  axle  of  the  limber  called  the  j^^'^tle-hooJc, 
and  is  secured  in  its  place  by  a  bolt  called  the  2)rntle-holt.  The  limber 
also  carries  an  ammunition  box,  which  may  be  removed  at  pleasure. 

56.  Each  piece  is  followed  by  its  caisfion  or  carriage,  for  ammunition. 
The  wheels  of  the  carriage,  limber  and  caisson,  are  all  of  the  same  size ; 
and  may,  when  necessai'y,  replace  each  other,  and  a  spare  wheel  is  car- 
ried on  the  rear  of  every  caisson.  The  caisson  carries  three  ammu- 
nition boxes,  of  the  same  size  as  the  one  on  the  limber,  and  movable, 
so  tbat  when  the  box  on  the  limber  is  empt}',  it  may  be  exchanged  for 
a  full  one  from  the  caisson.  Tbe  boxes  arc  partitioned  off  into  small 
compartments,  each  compartment  being  the  receptacle  for  a  charge  of 
ammunition. 

Every  artillery  carriage  is  drawn  by  from  four  to  six  horses,  a  driver 
being  required  for  each  pair  of  horses. 


AMMUNITION. 


57.  When  troops  are  in  the  field  it  is  not  only  necessary  that  they 
shoulii  go  with  a  suflScient  supply  of  ammunition,  but  that  it  should  be 
put  up  in  such  form  as  to  be  convenient  for  use,  and  at  the  s.ame  time 
as  well  protected  as  possible  from  the  effects  of  the  weather,  etc. 
Cartridges  made  of  paper  or  flannel,  or  some  other  woollen  goods,  are 
in  general  use  ;  the  foriner  for  small  arms,  and  the  latter  foV  artillery. 

58.  To  make  the  cylinders  for  blank  cartridges,  the  paper  is  cut  in  a 
trapezoidal  form,  with  a  pattern.  The  former  is  a  cylinder  of  hard 
wood,  of  the  same  diameter  as  the  ball,  concave  at  one  end,  and  con- 
vex at  the  f>ther.  The  paper  is  laid  on  a  table  with  the  side  perpen- 
dicular to  the  bases  next  the  workman,  the  broad  end  to  the  left,  the 
former  laid  on  it  with  the  concave  end  half  an  inch  from  the  broad 
edge  of  the  paper,  and  enveloped  in  it  once.  The  right  hand  is  then 
laid  flat  on  the  former,  and  all  the  paper  rolled  on  it.  The  projecting 
end  of  the  paper  is  now  neatly  folded  down  into  the  concavity  of  the 
former,  pasted,  and  pressed  on  a  ball  imbedded  in  the  table  for  the 
purpose. 

Instead  of  being  pasted,  these  cylinders  may  be  closed  by  choking 
5 


50  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

with  a  striug  tied  to  the  table,  aud  having  at  the  other  end  a  stick  by 
which  to  hold  it.  The  convex  end  of  the  former  is  placed  to  the  left, 
and  after  the  paper  is  rolled  on,  the  former  is  taken  in  the  left  hand, 
and  a  turn  made  around  it,  with  the  choking  string,  half  an  inch  from 
the  end  of  the  paper.  Whilst  the  string  is  drawn  tight  with  the  right 
hand,  the  former  is  held  in  the  left,  with  the  forefinger  resting  on  the 
end  of  the  cylinder,  folding  it  neatly  down  upon  the  end  of  the  former. 
The  choke  is  then  firmly  tied  with  twine. 

69.  For  ball  cartridges,  the  cylinders  are  made  and  choked  as  above, 
and  the  choke  tied  without  cutting  the  twine.  The  former  is  then 
withdrawn,  the  ball  inserted,  and  followed  by  the  concave  end  of  the 
former.  Two  half-hitches  are  made  just  above  the  ball,  and  the  twine 
cut  off. 

For  ball  and  buck-shot  cartridges  make  the  cylinder  as  before,  insert 
three  buck-shot,  fasten  them  with  a  half-hitch,  and  insert  and  secure 
the  ball  as  before. 

For  buck-shot  cartridges  make  the  cylinder  as  before,  insert  four 
tiers  of  thi'ee  buck-shot  each,  as  at  first,  making  a  half-hitch  between 
the  tiers,  and  ending  with  a  double  hitch. 

60.  To  fill  the  cartridges,  the  cylinders  are  placed  upright  in  a  box, 
and  the  charge  poured  into  each  from  a  conical  charger  of  the  appro- 
priate size;  the  mouths  of  the  cylinders  are  now  folded  down  on  the 
powder  by  two  rectangular  folds,  and  the  cartridges  bundled  in  pack- 
ages of  ten.  For  this,  a  folding  box  is  necessary ;  it  is  made  with  but 
two  vertical  sides,  at  a  distance  from  each  other  equal  to  five  diameters 
of  the  ball,  and  two  diameters  high. 

Put  a  wrapper  in  the  folding  box,  and  place  in  it  two  tiers  of  five 
cartridges  each,  parallel  to  each  other  and  to  the  sliort  sides  of  the 
wrapper,  the  balls  alternating,-  wrap  the  cartridges  whilst  in  the  fold- 
ing-box, by  folding  the  paper  over  tliem,  and  tie  them.  A  package  of 
twelve  percufiaioli  caps  is  placed  in  each  bundle  of  ten  cartridges. 

The  bundles  are  marked  with  the  numl)cr  and  kind  of  cartridge. 

61.  The  cartridges  for  elongated  projectiles  diff"er  so  much  from  those 
used  with  the  spherical  bullet,  that  a  separate  description  is  necessary. 

Each  cartridge  is  made  of  three  pieces  of  paper,  the  larger  piece  or 
cartridge  proper,  is  made  of  what  is  known  as  cartridge  paper,  but  it 
should  not  be  too  strong ;  the  second  piece  is  made  of  the  same  or 
stronger  paper,  and  the  third  is  made  of  the  stoutest  rocket  paper. 

Before  enveloping  the  balls  in  the  cartridges,  their  cylindrical  parts 
should  be  covered  with  a  melted  composition  of  one  part  beeswax  and 
three  parts  tallow;  it  should  be  applied  hot,  in  which  case  the  super- 
fluous pai-t  would  run  off.     Care   should  be   taken   to   remove   all   the 


AMMUNITION.  51 

grease  from  the  bottom  of  the  ball,  lest  by  coming  in  contact  with  the 
bottom  of  the  case  it  penetrate  the  paper  and  injure  the  powder. 

62.  The  sticks  on  which  the  cartridges  are  rolled  are  made  of  tho 
same  diameter  as  the  bore  of  the  piece j  the  dimensions  given  are  for 
the  U.  S.  muykct  or  ritlc  of  0.58  bore.  The  piece  of  stiff  or  rocket  pa- 
per is  laid  on  the  smaller  trapezoidal  piece,  with  one  of  its  longer  sides 
coinciding  with  the  shorter  parallel  side  of  the  trapezoid.  The  former 
is  laid  on  the  side  of  the  trapezoid,  perpendicular  to  the  parallel  sides, 
leaving  about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  of  the  side  uncovered  by  the  former, 
and  the  paper  is  rolled  around  the  former;  the  projecting  end  of  the 
paper  is  then  folded  down  and  pasted.  After  the  cylinder  thus  made  is 
dry,  it  is  again  put  on  the  stick;  the  stick  is  then  taken  in  the  left  hand 
and  laid  upon  the  outer  wrapper,  the  end  not  far  from  the  middle  of  the 
wrapper  (the  oblique  edge  of  the  wrapper  turned  from  the  workman, 
the  longer  vertical  edge  toward  his  left  hand),  and  snugly  rolled  up. 
The  ball  is  then  inserted  in  the  open  end  of  the  cartridge,  the  base 
resting  on  the  cylinder  case,  the  paper  neatly  choked  around  the  point 
of  the  ball,  and  fastened  by  tying  with  cartridge  thread.  Tho  stick  is 
then  withdrawn,  sixty  grains  of  powder  pourcdjnto  the  case,  and  the 
mouth  of  the  cartridge  is  "pinched"  or  folded  in  the  usual  way. 

63.  To  use  this  cartridge,  tear  the  fold  and  pour  out  the  powder; 
then  seize  the  ball  end  firmlj'  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the 
right  hand,  and  strike  the  cylinder  a  smart  blow  across  the  muzzle  of 
the  piece;  this  breaks  the  cartridge  and  e.xposes  the  bottom  of  the  ball; 
a  slight  pressure  of  the  thumb  and  forefinger  forces  the  ball  into  the 
bore  clear  of  all  cartridge  paper.  In  striking  the  cartridge  the  cylinder 
should  be  held  square  across,  or  at  right  angles  to  the  muzzle;  other- 
wise, a  blow  given  in  an  oblique  direction  would  only  bend  the  cartridge 
without  breaking  it. 

64.  The  ammunition  for  artillery  consists  of  a  charge  of  powder  con- 
tained in  a  cartridge  bag,  and  the  projectile,  which  may  be  either  fixed 
to,  or  separate  from  the  cartridge.  When  the  two  are  fastened  together, 
the  whole  constitutes  a  charge  oi  fixed  ammunition. 

65.  The  cartridge  bag  should  be  made  of  merino,  bombazette,  or  flan- 
nel, which  should  be  all  wool,  otherwise  fire  might  be  left  in  the  piece 
after  its  discharge.  The  texture  and  sewing  should  be  close  enough  to 
prevent  the  powder  sifting  through.  Untwillcd  stuff  is  preferable.  The 
bag  is  formed  of  two  pieces,  a  rectangle,  which  forms  the  cylinder,  and 
a  circular  piece  which  forms  the  bottom.  As  the  stuff  does  not  stretch 
in  the  direction  of  its  length,  the  long  side  of  the  rectangle  should  be 
taken  in  that  direction,  otherwise  the  cartridge  might  become  too  large 
for  convenient  use  with  its  piece.  The  material  is  laid  sometimes  scve- 
r:il  folds  thick,  on  a  (.'ilili-.  !iii<l  the  rectangles  and  circles  marked  out  on 


52  MANUAL    rOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

it  with  chalk,  using,  for  the  purpose,  patterns  made  of  hard,  well  season- 
ed wood,  sheet  iron,  or  tin.  The  pieces  are  then  cut  with  the  scissors. 
For  a  6-pounder  gun  and  12-pounder  howitzer,  the  rectangle  is  11.4 
inches  long  by  7.25  inches  in  height,  the  diameter  of  the  bottom  being 
4.37  inches — the  seam  is  half  an  inch  wide.  For  the  12-pounder  gun, 
and  24  and  32-pounder  howitzer,  the  rectangle  is  14.2  inches  by  10,  and 
the  diameter  of  the  bottom  is  6.25  inches.  The  short  sides  of  the  rec- 
tangle are  sewed  togther,  and  the  bottom  sewed  in.  The  sewing  is  done 
with  woollen  yarn,  twelve  stitches  to  the  inch.  The  two  edges  of  the 
seam  are  turned  down  on  the  same  side,  and  basted,  to  pi-event  the 
powder  from  sifting  through. 

Blank  cartridge  bags,  or  those  intended  for  immediate  use,  may  be 
made  of  two  rectangular  pieces  with  semi-circular  ends  sewed  together. 

66.  When  special  accuracy  is  required,  charges  are  carefully  weighed 
in  delicate  scales ;  but  usually  the  bags  are  filled  by  measurement.  The 
powder  measures  are  made  of  sheet  copper;  they  are  cylindrical,  and 
their  diameters  and  height  are  equal.  A  measure  3.628  inches  in  diam- 
eter and  height,  holds  one  and  a  quarter  pounds  of  powder,  the  charge 
for  a  6-pounder  gun  when  it  fires  solid  shot;  one  of  3.368  inches  holds 
one  pound  of  powder,  the  charge  for  the  same  gun  when  it  fires  spheri- 
cal case  or  canister;  it  is  also  the  charge  for  the  12-pounder  how- 
itzer. A  measure  of  4.24  inches  in  diameter  and  height,  holds  two 
pounds  of  powder,  the  light  charge  for  a  24-pounder  howitzer;  one  of 
4.57  inches  holds  two  and  a  half  pounds  of  powder,  the  heaviest  charge 
for  the  24-pounder  howitzer,  and  the  light  charge  for  the  32-pounder. 
The  one  pound  and  a  quarter  measure,  and  the  two  pound  measure, 
making  three  and  a  quarter  pounds,  will  be  the  heavy  chai'ge  for  the 
32-pounder  howitzer. 

67.  Blank  cartridges,  and  those  for  the  12-pounder  gun,  are,  after 
being  filled,  simply  tied  firmly  about  the  neck  with  twine.  Those  for 
fixed  ammunition  are  attached  to  pieces  of  wood  called  sabots,  by  tying 
them  with  strong  twine;  before  attaching  them  to  the  sabots,  however, 
the  sabot  must  be  fastened  to  the  projectile. 

The  sabot,  for  guns,  is  cylindrical,  or  nearly  so,  in  shape,  and  for 
howitzers,  conical.  For  shot  and  spherical  case  for  guns,  they  have 
one  groove  for  attaching  the  cartridge;  those  for  gun  canisters,  and  for 
12-pounder  howitzer  shells,  spherical  case,  and  canister,  have  two 
grooves.  Sabots  for  32-pouuder  and  24-pounder  howitzers  have  no 
grooves,  but  are  furnished  with  handles  made  of  a  piece  of  cord,  pass- 
ing through  two  holes,  and  fastened  by  knots  countersunk  on  the  inside. 

68.  The  sabots  are  fastened  to  shot  and  shell  with  strips  of  sheet  tin. 
For  shot  there  are  two  straps  crossing  at  right  angles,  one  passing 
through  a  slit  in  the  middle  of  the  other.     For  shells  there  are  four 


AMMUNITION.  58 

ptraps  soldered  to  a  ring  of  tin;  the  straps  are  nailed  to  the  sabot.  If 
tin  cannot  be  pi'ocured,  straps  may  be  niade  of  strong  canva>t,  one  inch 
wide,  sowed  at  the  point  of  crossing.  The  part  of  the  ball  which  is  to 
be  inserted  into  the  socket  is  dipped  in  glue;  the  straps  are  glued  to  the 
ball,  and  nailed  to  the  sabot. 

69.  A  canister  shot  is  a  cylinder  of  tin,  of  the  same  diameter  as  the 
bore  of  the  piece,  filled  with  small  balls.  The  cylinder  is  left  open  at 
both  ends;  after  being  soldered,  it  is  nailed  to  the  sabot,  and  a  plate  of 
rolled  iron  placed  at  the  bottom  of  the  sabot.  To  prevent  rusting,  the 
cylinder  before  filling  should  be  covered  with  beeswax  dissolved  in 
spirits  of  turpeutiuc,  and  the  balls  should  be  painted  or  lacquered. 

To  fill  the  canister  place  it  upright  on  its  sabot;  put  in  a  tier  of  balls, 
filling  the  interstices  with  dry  sawdust,  jiacking  it  with  a  pointed  stick, 
so  that  the  balls  will  hold  by  themselves  when  the  case  is  turned  over, 
and  throw  out  the  loose  sawdust.  Place  another  tier  of  balls,  and  pro- 
ceed in  the  same  manner  until  the  canister  is  filled;  cover  the  top  tier 
with  a  layer  of  sawdust,  and  put  on  the  cover,  which  is  a  circular  plate 
of  sheet  iron,  settling  it  well  witli  a  mallet  in  order  to  compress  the 
sawdust.  The  top  of  the  cylinder  is  cut  into  slits  about  half  an  inch 
oug,  which  are  turned  down  over  the  cover  to  secure  it. 

70.  The  shot,  shell,  or  canister  being  secured  to  the  sabot,  the  car- 
tridge is  tied  to  it,  making  the  charge  complete.  The  mouths  of  the 
bag  are  first  twisted  and  pressed  down,  so  as  to  settle  the  powder;  they 
are  then  opened  and  the  powder  smoothed.  The  sabot  is  introduced, 
and  the  cartridge  drawn  up  around  it,  until  it  reaches  the  powder;  the 
cartridge  is  then  secured  by  passing  several  turns  of  strong  twine 
around  it  in  the  grooves,  and  tying  it,  after  which  the  excess  of  the  bag 
is  cut  oif. 

71.  The  cartridge  and  projectile  for  the  24  and  32-pounder  howitzers 
arc  kept  separate;  the  projectile  is  attached  to  the  sabot  as  has  been 
explained,  No.  68,  and  the  cartridge  to  a  cylindrical  piece  of  light  wood 
called  a  cartridge  block. 

These  blocks  give  a  better  finish  to  the  cartridge,  help  to  fill  the 
chamber  and  keep  the  cartridge  from  turning  in  the  bore  while  the  piece 
is  being  loaded.  They  have  but  one  groove ;  the  grooved  end  is  in- 
serted in  the  mouth  of  the  cartridge,  and  pressed  down  upon  the  pow- 
der; the  bag  is  pulled  over  it  and  tied  with  twine  in  the  groove.  The 
mouth  of  the  bag  is  then  turned  down,  and  another  tie  made  over  it, 
which  keeps  the  powder  from  working  up  between  the  block  and  the 
bag.     The  superfluous  part  of  the  bag  is  then  cut  off". 

72.  For  the  greater  security  of  field  ammunition,  the  cartridges  are 
covered  with  paper  cylinders  and  caps.  They  are  both  made  together, 
on  the  same  former,  which  is  a  piece  of  board  with  slightly  inclined 


51  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

sides  and  rounded  edges.  The  paper  is  pasted  around  this.  The  re- 
quisite length  for  the  cylinder  is  cut  from  the  smaller  end,  the  rest 
forming  the  cap,  which  is  choked  at  the  end  from  which  the  cylinder  is 
cut.  For  choking,  a  cylindrical  former  of  wood,  with  a  hemispherical 
end,  is  used,  which  should  be  bored  through  the  end  to  facilitate  the 
drawing  off  of  the  cap.  The  cylinder  fits  over  the  body  of  the  car- 
tridge and  a  part  of  the  sabot  to  which  it  is  tied,  while  the  cap  fits  over 
the  end.  When  the  cap  is  drawn  off,  which  is  always  done  when  the 
cartridge  is  placed  in  the  piece,  the  lower  end  is  left  exposed  so  that 
the  priming  wire,  or  fire  from  the  friction  tube,  can  reach  it  without 
going  through  any  pajDer. 

73.  Shells  arc  hollow  shot,  the  interior  space  being  formed  of  a 
sphere  concentric  with  the  outer  surface,  making  the  sides  of  equal 
thickness.  They  have  a  conical  opening  or  eije,  used  to  load  the  shell, 
and  in  which  is  inserted  ihQ  fuze  to  communicate  fire  to  the  charge. 

74.  To  load  shells,  they  are  set  upon  their  sabots,  the  charges  meas- 
ured out  in  the  proper  powder  measure,  and  poured  in  through  a  copper 
funnel.  The  32-pounder  requires  a  charge  of  one  pound  of  powder 
(rifle  or  musket  powder)  to  burst  it,  the  24-pounder  twelve  ounces  and 
the  12-pounder  seven  ounces.  If  now  the  shell  is  to  be  fired  by  an 
ordinary  fuze  (see  article  on  fuzes),  a  conical  piece  of  dry  beech  is 
firmly  driven  into  the  eye,  and  then  a  hole  is  reamed  out  through  it  to 
receive  the  fuze,  and  stopped  with  a  wad  of  tow,  the  fuze  not  to  be 
driven  in  until  the  shell  is  to  be  fired. 

75.  Spherical  ease,  or  Schrapnel  shot,  as  they  are  called,  after  the 
English  officer  who  brought  them  to  perfection,  are  thin-sided  shells  in 
which,  besides  the  bursting  charge,  are  placed  a  number  of  musket 
balls.  Their  sides  are  much  thinner  than  those  of  the  ordinary  shell, 
in  order  that  they  may  contain  a  greater  number  of  bullets;  and  these 
acting  as  a  support  to  the  sides  of  the  shell  prevent  it  from  being  broken 
by  the  force  of  the  discharge.  The  weight  of  the  empty  case  is  about 
one-half  that  of  the  solid  shot  of  the  same  diameter.  Lead  being  much 
more  dense  than  iron,  the  schrapnel  is,  when  loaded,  nearly  as  heavy 
as  the  solid  shot  of  the  same  calibre ;  but  on  account  of  the  less  charge 
which  it  is  necessary  to  use  to  prevent  breaking  the  case,  their  fire  is 
neither  so  accurate  nor  the  range  so  great  as  with  the  solid  shot.  But 
when  the  schrapnel  bursts  just  in  front  of  an  object  the  effect  is  terri- 
ble, being  as  great  as  the  discharge  of  grape  from  a  piece  at  a  very 
short  range. 

76.  To  load  a  schrapnel  shot,  the  requisite  number  of  balls  are 
placed  in  ,•  the  shell  for  a  6-pound  gun  requires  thirty-eight  balls,  that 
for  the  12-pound  gun  and  howitzer  seventy-eight,  the  24-pound  howitzer 
one  hundred  and  seventy-five,  and  the  32-pound  howitzer  two  hundred 


AMMUNITION.  55 

and  twenty-five.  The  balls  being  inscrtcfl,  a  stick  a  little  less  in  diam- 
eter than  the  fuze-hole,  and  having  a  groove  on  each  side  of  it,  is  in- 
serted and  pushed  to  the  bottom  of  the  chamber  by  working  the  balls 
aside.  The  shell  is  then  heated  to  about  the  melting  point  of  sulphur, 
and  melted  sulphur  is  poured  in  to  fill  up  the  interstices  between  the 
balls.  When  the  shell  is  cool  the  stick  is  withdrawn,  and  any  adhering 
sulphur  is  removed. 

If  a  fuze-plug  and  common  fuze  are  to  be  used,  the  charge  is  placed 
in  and  the  plug  inserted  as  for  shells;  but  if  the  Boarman  fuze  is  to  be 
used  (see  the  article  on  fuzes),  the  charge  is  to  be  inserted,  and  the 
stopper  and  fuze  are  screwed  into  their  places.  The  bursting  charges 
are  as  follows:  for  the  6-pouudei',  2,5  ounces  j  for  the  12-pounder,  4.5 
ounces;  for  the  2i-pounder,  6  ounces;  and  for  the  32-pounder,  8  ounces. 

77.  A  fuse  is  a  contrivance  for  communicating  fire  to  the  charge  in  a 
shell.  It  consists  of  a  highly  inflammable  composition,  inclosed  in 
a  wood,  metal  or  paper  case.  The  i^aper  fuze  consists  of  a  conical 
paper  case,  containing  the  composition,  whose  rate  of  burning  is  shown 
by  the  color  of  the  case,  as  follows : 

Black   burns  two  seconds  to  the  inch. 

Red  "      three     "  "         " 

Green        "      four       "  "         " 

Yelloio     "      five        "  "         " 

Each  fuze  is  made  two  inches  long,  and  the  yellow  burns,  conse- 
quently, ten  seconds.  For  any  shorter  time,  the  fuse  is  cut  with  a 
sharp  knife.  This  fuze  is  not  placed  in  the  shell  until  it  is  to  be  fired, 
when  the  wad  of  tow  is  removed  from  the  fuze-plug,  and  the  fuze 
pressed  down  with  the  thumb. 

78,  The  Belgian  or  Boarman  fuze  is  the  best  now  in  use.  The  fuze 
case  is  made  of  metal  (an  alloy  of  lead  and  tin),  and  consists,  first,  of 
a  short  cylinder,  having  at  one  end  a  horse-shoe  shaped  indentation, 
one  end  only  of  which  communicates  with  the  magazine  of  the  fuze 
placed  in  the  centre.  The  indentation  extends  nearly  to  the  other  end 
of  the  cylinder,  a  thin  layer  of  metal  only  intervening.  This  is  grad- 
uated on  the  outside  into  equal  parts,  representing  seconds  and  quarter 
seconds.  In  the  bottom  of  this  channel  a  smooth  layer  of  the  compo- 
sition is  placed,  with  a  piece  of  wick  or  yarn  underneath  it;  on  this  is 
placed  a  piece  of  metal,  the  cross  section  of  which  is  wedge-shaped; 
and  this  is  by  machinery  pressed  down  upon  the  composition.  The 
cylindrical  opening  is  filled  with  fine  powder  and  covered  with  a  sheet 
of  tin,  which  is  soldered  in  its  place,  closing  the  magazine  from  the 
external  air.  Before  using  the  fuse,  several  holes  are  punched  through 
this  sheet  of  tin  to  allow  the  flame  to  escape  into  the  shell.  On  the 
side  of  the  fuse  the  thread  of  a  screw  is  cut  which  fits  into  one  on  the 


5a  MANUxVL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

inside  of  the  fuze  hole,  and  the  fuze  is  screwed  into  the  shell  with  a 
wrench. 

79.  The  thin  layer  of  raetal  over  the  composition  is  cut  away  with  a 
gouge  or  chisel  of  any  kind,  at  the  point  marked  with  the  number  of 
seconds  which  we  wish  the  fuze  to  burn.  The  metal  of  this  fuze  being 
soft,  there  is  danger  of  its  being  driven  into  the  shell  by  the  explosive 
force  of  the  charge.  To  prevent  this,  a  circular  piece  of  iron,  of  a  less 
diameter  than  the  fuze,  with  a  hole  through  its  centre,  and  the  thread 
of  a  screw  on  the  outside,  is  screwed  into  the  fuze-hole  before  the  fuze 
is  placed  in. 

The  regularity  and  certainty  of  this  fuze  is  very  great;  one  of  its 
most  important  advantages  is,  the  fact  that  the  shells  can  be  loaded,  all 
ready  for  use,  and  remain  so  for  any  length  of  time,  perfectly  safe  from 
explosion ;  as  the  fuze  can  be  screwed  to  its  j^lace,  and  the  composition 
never  exposed  to  external  fire  until  the  metal  is  cut  through.  The  only 
operation  to  be  performed  when  the  shell  is  to  be  fired  is  to  gouge 
through  the  metal  at  the  proper  point,  which  may  be  done  with  any 
kind  of  a  chisel,  knife  or  other  instrument. 

80.  Fire  is  communicated  to  the  charge  in  a  cannon  by  means  of 
priininr/  tubes  and  friction  tubes. 

Quill  priming  tubes  are  made  from  quills  by  cutting  off  the  barrel  at 
both  ends,  and  splitting  down  the  large  end  for  about  half  an  inch,  into 
seven  or  any  other  odd  number  of  parts;  these  are  bent  outward,  per- 
pendicular to  the  body  of  the  quill,  and  from  the  cup  of  the  tube. 
Fine  woollen  yarn  is  then  woven  into  these  slits  like  basket  work,  the 
end  being  brought  down  and  tied  on  the  stem ;  or  a  perforated  dish  of 
paper  is  pasted  on  them. 

These  tubes  are  filled  by  injecting  into  them,  with  a  tube-injector,  a 
liquid  paste  made  of  mealed  powder  and  spirits  of  wine;  a  better 
method  is,  not  to  make  the  paste  too  thin,  and  then  press  it  in  with  the 
thumb.  A  strand  of  quick  match,  two  inches  long,  is  now  laid  across 
the  cup,  jmd  pasted  in  them  with  the  powder  paste.  A  small  wire  is 
then  run  through  the  tube,  and  remains  there  until  the  paste  is  dry; 
this  leaves  an  aperture,  furnishing  a  quick  communication  for  the  fire 
along  the  tube.  A  paper  cap  is  placed  over  the  cup,  and  twisted  tightly 
around  the  tube  under  the  cup. 

Tubes  are  also  made  of  metal ;  they  are  either  moulded,  or  formed 
into  tubes  by  machinery.  They  are  filled,  primed  and  capped  in  the 
same  way  as  quill  tubes. 

Priming  tubes  are  now  almost  superseded  hy  friction  tubes,  which  are 
made  by  machinery  at  one  of  the  U.  S.  arsenals. 

81.  To  fire  priming  tubes  2^oitfires  are  used;  they  consist  of  paper 
eases,  filled  with  a  highly  inflammable,  but  slowly  bui-ning  composi- 


AMMUNITION.  57 

tion,  ti.e  flame  of  which  is  very  intense  and  penetrating,  and  cannot  be 
extinguished  with  water. 

Friction  tubes  are  fired  by  means  of  a  lu„i,,n;l ;  this  is  a  stout  cor<l 
which  has  a  wooden  handle  at  one  end,  and  an  iron  hook  upon  the 
other;  the  cannoneer  puts  the  hook  through  the  loop  in  the  wire  of  the 
friction  tube,  and,  holding  the  lanyard  by  the  handle,  pulls  sleadily 
until  the  wire  is  withdrawn,  when  an  explosion  takes  place,  induced  by 
the  friction  of  the  wire  against  the  composition  in  the  tube. 


58  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILTTIA. 


Article  III. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

GENERAL    RULES. 

82.  The  object  of  this  school  is  the  individual  instruction  of  the 
soldier;  it  should  be  taught  with  the  greatest  possible  care  and  preci- 
sion, as  on  it  depends  the  efficiency  of  the  instruction  of  the  company, 
which  is  again  so  necessary  to  that  of  the  battalion,  and  from  that  of 
the  battalion  to  the  evolutions  of  the  line,  where  an  entire  army  is 
manoeuvred  with  as  much  precision  as  a  single  company. 

The  instructor  should  never  require  a  movement  to  be  executed  until 
he  has  fully  explained  it,  and  joined  example  to  precept  by  performing 
the  movement  in  person.  He  should  accustom  the  soldier  to  take  for 
himself  the  position  required,  cori'ecting  him  when  necessary,  and 
should  labor  to  prevent  the  formation  of  a  habit  of  carelessness  in  the 
execution  of  the  movements. 

Each  movement  should  be  thoroughly  understood  before  passing  to 
another.  After  they  have  been  properly  executed  in  the  order  laid 
down,  the  instructor  should  no  longer  confine  himself  to  that  order. 
The  men  should  be  allowed  to  rest  for  a  few  moments,  frequently,  in 
the  earlier  stages  of  their  instruction,  and  as  often  at  other  times  as  the 
instructor  may  think  necessary  to  pi'event  weariness,  which  is  the 
prelude  to  carelessness.  When  tlfSy  are  at  attention,  however,  he 
should  not  allow  any  looking  to  the  right  or  left;  no  changing  of  posi- 
tion, or  laughing,  or  whispering,  etc.,  so  common  among  volunteers  and 
militia.  Here  is  the  place  to  make  the  individual  soldier,  to  give  him 
habits  of  attention,  teach  him  subordination,  etc.  If  he  does  not 
acquire  them  in  this  school,  it  will  be  too  late  when  he  is  advanced  in 
the  company. 

At  the  command  rest,  the  soldier  is  no  longer  required  to  preserve 
immobility  or  to  remain  in  his  place.  If  the  instructor  wishes  merely 
to  relieve  the  attention  of  the  soldier,  he  commands,  in  j)hice  —  rest; 
the  soldier  is  then  only  required  to  keep  one  of  his  feet  in  place ;  if  he 
wishes  to  move  that  foot,  the  other  is  first  brought  up  to  its  proper 
position. 

The  school  of  the  soldier  is  divided  into  three  parts,  the  first  compre- 
hending what  ought  to  be  taught  to  recruits  without  arms ;  the  second, 
the  manual  of  arms,  the  loadings  and  firings ;  the  third,  the  principles 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  b^ 

of  alignment,  the  march  by  the  front,  the  different  steps,  the  march  by 
the  flank,  the  principles  of  wheeling  and  those  of  change  of  direction. 
In  this  school,  the  company  is  broken  up  into  small  squads,  the  number 
of  men  in  each  squad  being  i^roportioned  to  the  number  of  instructors  ; 
the  S(iuads  for  the  first  and  second  part  should  be  as  small  as  possible, 
and  the  men  placed  in  single  rank  ;  for  instruction  in  the  third  part, 
two  or  more  squads  of  about  equal  i^roficiency  should  be  united. 


PART  FIRST. 

In  this  part,  the  men  should  be  without  arms,  and  about  one  pace 
apart. 

Position  of  the  Soldier. 

83.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as  the  conformation  of 
the  men  will  permit;  because,  if  one  were  in  rear  of  tho  other,  the 
shoulder  on  that  side  would  be  thrown  back. 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  each  other  something 
less  than  a  right  angle;  because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more 
than  the  other,  a  shoulder  would  be  deranged,  and  if  both  feet  be 
too  much  turned  out,  it  would  not  be  practicable  to  give  the  body  its 
proper  position. 

The  knees  straight,  without  stiffness  ;  because,  if  stiffened,  constraint 
and  fatigue  would  be  unavoidable. 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  forward,  because  it  gives 
stability  to  the  position.  Soldiers  are  at  first  disposed  to  project  the 
belly  and  throw  back  the  shoulders  when  they  wish  to  hold  themselves 
erect,  from  which  result  many  inconveniences  in  marching ;  it  is,  there- 
fore, important  that  the  instructor  should  be  particular  to  enforce  this 
rule  at  the  beginning. 

The  shoulders  square,  and  falling  equally;  if  the  shoulders  are  ad- 
vanced beyond  the  line  of  the  breast,  and  the  back  arched  (the  defect 
called  round-shouldered),  the  man  cannot  align  himself,  nor  use  his  piece 
with  skill.  In  correcting  this  defect,  the  instructor  will  take  care  that 
the  shoulders  are  not  thrown  too  much  to  the  rear,  causing  the  body  to 
project,  and  the  small  of  the  back  to  curve. 

The  arms  hanging  naturally;  elbows  near  the  body;  palms  of  the 
hands  turned  a  little  to  the  front,  the  little  finger  behind  the  seam  of 
the  pantaloons.  These  positions  are  important  to  the  shouMer  arms,  to 
prevent  the  man  from  occupying  more  space  in  ranks  than  is  neces- 
sary, and  to  keep  the  shoulders  in  proper  position. 


60  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

The  head  erect,  aud  square  to  the  front,  without  constraint;  the  chin 
slightl}'-  drawn  in  ;  the  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  in  order  to  pre- 
vent derangement  of  the  shoulders,  and  striking  the  ground  at  the  dis- 
tance of  about  fifteen  paces. 

84.  The  instructor  having  given  the  squad  the  position  of  the  soldier 
without  arms,  will  now  teach  the  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes.  He 
will  command: 

1.  Eyes — Right.     2.  Front. 

At  the  word  right,  the  soldier  will  turn  his  head  gently,  so  as  to 
bring  the  inner  corner  of  the  left  eye  in  a  line  with  the  buttons  of 
the  coat,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  in  the  same 
rank.  At  the  command  Front  the  head  will  resume  the  direct  or 
habitual  position.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  movement 
of  the  head  does  not  derange  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders,  and 
that  the  men  do  not  acquire  a  habit  of  throwing  down  the  head  in 
dressing. 

The  movement  of  Ui/es — Left  will  be  executed  by  inverse  means. 

Facings. 

85.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed  in  one  time  or 
pause.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad.      2.  Right  (or  left) — Face. 

At  the  word  Face,  raise  the  right  foot  slightly,  turn  on  the  left  heel, 
to  the  right  (or  left),  raising  the  left  toe  a  little,  and  then  replace  the 
right  heel  beside  the  left,  and  on  the  same  line.  The  face  should  al- 
ways be  through  a  right  angle,  and  should  be  executed  by  the  feet  and 
legs,  the  body  moving  around  to  the  right  (or  left)  without  twisting  or 
constraint.  The  instructor  should  labor  to  keep  the  body  steady,  and 
to  prevent  the  formation  of  the  habit  of  bending  the  knees,  or  spring- 
ing. 

86.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  is  always  to  the  right,  and  is  executed 
in  two  times,  or  pauses.     The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Squad.     2.  About — Face. 

First  motion.  At  the  word  about,  the  soldier  will  turn  far  enough  on 
the  left  heel  to  bring  the  left  toe  directly  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time 
carrying  his  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  opposite  to,  and  full  three 
inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet  square  to  each  other.  The  back  of 
the  right  hand  is  placed  a  little  above  the  right  hip,  and  the  body  is 
turned  to  the  right  sufficiently  to  give  ease  to  the  position. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  61 

Second  motion.  At  the  word  face,  the  soldier  raises  his  toes  a  little, 
turns  upon  both  heels,  faces  to  the  rear,  keeping  his  legs  straight,  and 
draws  back  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  at  the  same  tiui.e 
dropping  his  right  hand  by  his  side. 

Balance  Step. 

87.  Before  commencing  the  march  the  soldier  should  always  be 
instructed  in  the  balance  step,  the  object  of  which  is  to  teach  him  the 
free  movement  of  his  limbs,  while  he,  at  the  same  time,  preserves  per- 
fect squareness  of  the  shoulders,  with  the  greatest  steadiness  of  the 
body  J  no  labor  should  be  spared  to  attain  this  object,  which  lies  at  the 
very  foundation  of  good  marching. 

The  squad  being  at  attention,  the  instructor  commands : 

Left  foot — Foil  WARD. 

At  this  command  the  soldier  will  throw  his  left  foot  gently  forward, 
about  twenty-four  inches,  balancing  his  body  well  on  the  right  foot 
without  changing  the  position  of  the  shoulders,  and  without  the  body 
losing  its  erect  position.  The  toe  should  be  turned  out  as  in  the  pot:i- 
tion  of  the  soldier,  the  foot  about  three  inches  from  the  ground  and 
very  nearly  parallel  to  it.  the  toe  being  very  slightly  depressed. 

At  the  command : 

Left  foot — Rear. 

The  left  foot  is  brought  gently  back,  the  ball  of  the  left  foot  close  to 
the  I'ight  heel,  the  leg  straight,  toe  raised,  and  heel  depressed. 

As  soon  as  the  soldier  becomes  steady  in  the  new  position,  the  in- 
structor repeats  the  command,  left  foot  forward,  then  left  foot  rear, 
for  several  times,  and  then  commands  : 

Halt  : 

at  which  the  left  foot,  either  advanced  or  to  the  rear,  is  brought  to  the 
right,  as  in  the  position  of  the  soldier. 

The  instructor  then  causes  the  soldier  to  balance  on  the  right  foot, 
by  advancing  and  retiring  the  right,  as  has  been  directed  for  the  left. 

The  Direct  Step. 

88.  After  the  soldier  is  sufficiently  instructed  in  the  balance  step  to 
execute  it  on  either  foot  without  losing  his  balance,  the  instructor  will 


62  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

proceed  to  instruct  him  in  the  mechanism  of  the  direct  step.     For  this 
purpose  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  numbers — Forward.     2.  One. 

At  the  command  one,  the  soldier  will  throw  forAvard  the  left  foot,  as 
in  the  position  of  left  foot  forward,  the  instructor  then  commands : 

Two. 

At  this  command,  the  weight  of  the  body  is  thrown  forward,  the  left 
foot  striking  the  ground  without  shock,  at  the  distance  of  twenty-eight 
inches  from  the  right;  the  body  assumes  the  perpendicular  position, 
and  the  right  foot  is  brought  up  to  the  position  of  rujht  foot  rear. 

The  right  foot  is  then  brought  forward  at  the  command  one,  and  the 
stfep  completed  at  the  command  two;  thus  the  squad  is  made  to  advance 
step  by  step.     The  halt  is  executed  as  in  the  balance  steji. 

89.  When  the  squad  is  sufficiently  instructed  in  the  mechanism  of  the 
direct  step,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  take  up  the  march  in  common 
time,-  for  this  i')urposc  he  will  command: 

1.  Squad  forward — Common  time.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  forioard,  the  soldier  will  throw  the  weight  of  his 
body  on  the  right  leg,  without  bending  the  left  knee. 

At  the  command  march,  he  will  smartly,  but  without  a  jerk,  carry 
straight  forward  the  left  foot  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  right,  the 
sole  near  the  ground,  the  leg  extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed,  and 
both  it  and  the  knee  slightly  turned  out;  he  will  at  the  same  time  throw 
the  weight  of  the  body  forward,  and  plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without 
shock,  precisely  at  the  distance  where  it  finds  itself  from  the  right 
when  the  weight  of  the  body  is  brought  forward,  the  whole  of  which 
will  now  rest  on  the  left  foot.  The  soldier  will  next,  in  like  manner, 
advance  the  right  foot  and  plant  it  as  directed  for  the  left,  the  heel 
twenty-eight  inches  from  the  heel  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  continue  the 
march  without  crossing  the  legs,  or  striking  one  against  the  other,  with- 
out turning  the  shoulders,  and  always  preserving  the  face  direct  to  the 
front.  Common  time  is  executed  at  the  rate  of  ninety  steps  to  the 
minute. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  arrest  the  march  he  commands : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

The  command  halt  should  be  given  just  as  one  foot  has  come  to  the 
ground  and  the  other  is  raised  for  making  the  next  step;  the  soldier 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  63 

instinctively  completes  the  pace  with  the  raised  foot,  and  brings  the 
other  firmly  to  its  place  beside  it.  By  careful  attention  to  this  rule  a 
large  command  may  be  as  readily  halted  at  the  same  instant  as  a  single 
individual. 

90.  The  i^rinciples  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are  the  same  as  for  com- 
mon time;  it  is  executed,  however,  at  the  rate  of  110  steps  per  minute. 
After  the  soldier  is  well  established  in  the  length  and  swiftness  of  the 
step  at  common  time,  he  should  be  jiractiscd  in  quick  time,  as  it  is  the 
pace  best  adapted  to  marches,  the  manoeuvres,  etc. 

The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in  quick  time,  commands: 

1.  Squad  forward.     2.  March. 


Principles  of  the  Double  Quick  Step. 

91.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  is  thirty-three  inches,  and  its 
swiftness  is  at  the  rate  of  165  steps  per  minute.  This  step  is  designed 
especially  for  light  troops,  such  as  light  infantry  and  riflemen,  and  to 
them  it  is  indispensable;  its  utility  has,  however,  been  so  frequently 
demonstrated  of  late  years,  as  to  make  it  proper  that  it  should  form  a 
part  of  the  instruction  of  all  infantry  troops. 

The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  his  squad  the  principles  and  mechan- 
ism of  the  double  quick  step,  commands: 

1.  Double  quick  step.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  double  qniclr  step,  the  soldier  will  raise  bis  hands  to 
a  level  with  his  hips,  the  hands  closed,  the  nails  toward  the  body,  the 
elbows  to  the  rear  and  well  drawn  in  toward  the  body. 

At  the  command  march,  he  will  raise  his  left  knee  as  high  as  possible 
without  derangement  of  the  body,  keeping  his  leg  from  the  knee  down 
in  a  vertical  position,  the  toe  depressed;  he  will  then  replace  his  foot  in 
its  former  position.  At  the  command  tim,  he  will  execute  with  the  right 
leg  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left,  and  the  alternate  move- 
ment of  the  legs  at  the  commands  one,  Hco,  will  be  continued  until  the 
command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  half,  the  soldier  will  bring  the  foot  which  is  raised 
by  the  side  of  the  other,  and  at  the  same  time  dropping  his  hands  by 
his  side  will  resume  the  position  of  the  soldier  without  arms. 

When  the  squad  has  learned  to  execute  the  step  properly,  the  instruc- 


64  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

tor  will  repeat  the  words  one,  two,  in  more  rapid  succession,  and  will 
finally  drop  them,  leaving  the  files  to  execute  the  step  in  their  own  time. 
The  instructor  will  see  that  the  step  is  taken  in  rapid  sucession,  and 
that  none  of  the  files  lose  the  step. 

92.  The  soldier  being  suflBciently  established  in  the  principles  of  this 
step,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  Double  quick.     3.  March. 

At  the  command  forward,  the  soldier  will  throw  the  weight  of  his 
body  on  the  right  leg,  withou.t  bending  the  left  knee. 

At  the  command  double  quick,  he  will  place  his  arms  as  indicated 
above. 

At  the  command  march,  he  will  carry  forward  the  left  foot,  and  plant 
it,  the  toe  first,  at  the  distance  of  thirty-three  inches  from  the  right, 
the  legs  slightly  bent,  and  the  knee  somewhat  raised;  he  will  then 
execute  with  the  right  foot  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left. 
This  altei'nate  movement  of  the  legs  will  take  place  by  throwing  the 
weight  of  the  body  on  the  foot  that  is  planted,  and  by  allowing  a 
natural,  oscillatory  motion  to  the  arms.  The  feet  should  not  be  raised 
too  much,  a  common  fault  with  beginners,  and  the  body  should  incline 
slightly  forward. 

The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with  different  degrees  of 
swiftness.  Under  urgent  circumstances,  the  cadence  of  this  step  may 
be  increased  to  180  per  minute.  At  this  rate,  a  distance  of  4000  yards 
would  be  i^assed  over  in  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

The  men  should  also  be  exercised  in  running;  the  principles  are  the 
same  as  for  the  double  quick  step,  the  only  difference  consisting  in  a 
greater  degree  of  swiftness. 

It  is  recommended,  in  marching  in  double  quick  time  or  the  run, 
that  the  men  should  breathe  as  much  as  possible  through  the  nose, 
keeping  the  mouth  closed. 

PART   SECOND. 

General  Rules. 

93.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  soldiers  to  this  second  part  until 
they  are  well  established  in  the  position  of  the  body,  and  in  the  man- 
ner of  marching  at  the  different  steps. 

In  the  manual  of  arms,  each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time 
(or  pause),  but  this  time  will  be  divided  into  motions,  the  better  to 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  65 

make  known  the  mechanism  and  to  secure  uniformity  and  precision  iu 
the  movements. 

The  rate  (or  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  iu  the  manual  of  arms,  is 
fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute:  but  the  instructor  will,  at  first, 
look  more  particularly  to  the  execution  of  the  motions,  without  I'cquir- 
ing  a  nice  observance  of  the  cadence,  to  which  he  will  bring  the  men 
progressively,  and  after  they  have  become  a  little  familiarized  with  the 
use  of  the  weapon. 

The  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to  the  I'ammer,  and  to  the 
fixing  and  unfixing  of  the  bayonet,  cannot  be  executed  at  the  rate  pre- 
scribed, or  even  with  uniform  swiftness;  the  instructor  will,  however, 
labor  to  have  these  motions  executed  with  promptness  and  regularity. 

The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of 
the  first  motion  of  each  time  (or  pause).  The  commands  two,  three 
&nd  four,  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the  other  motions.  As  soon 
as  the  men  comprehend  well  the  positions  of  the  several  motions  of  a 
time,  they  will  be  taught  to  execute  the  time  without  resting  on  its 
motions;  the  mechanism  of  the  time  must,  however,  be  observed,  as 
well  to  give  perfect  use  of  the  weapon  as  to  prevent  carelessness  or 
slighting  of  the  motions.  When  the  men  have  acquired  sufficient  pro- 
ficiency to  execute  the  times  without  resting,  the  instructor  must  be 
careful  to  have  the  proper  cadence  observed;  great  promptness  in  the 
execution  of  the  motions  is  not  incompatible  with  the  observance  of  a 
pause  between  them,  so  that  they  may  be  executed  at  the  prescribed 
rate  —  that  is,  of  ninety  to  the  minute.  Those  instructors  who  insist 
most  upon  the  strict  observance  of  this  rule  are  those  vfhose  squads 
execute  the  manual  in  the  best  manner. 


Principles  of  Shouldered  Armh\ 

94.  Each  soldier  being  in  the  position  of  the  soldier,  the  instructor 
will  cause  him  to  turn  up  the  left  hand  without  bending  the  wrist,  the 
left  forearm  only  acting.  The  instructor  will  raise  the  piece  perpen- 
dicularly, and  place  it  as  follows  : 

The  piece  in  the  left  hand,  the  arm  very  slightly  bent,  the  elbow 
back  near  the  body,  the  palm  of  the  hand  pressing  on  the  outer  flat  of 
the  butt;  the  outer  edge  of  the  latter  on  the  uppei^ joints  of  the'fingers, 
the  heel  of  the  butt  between  the  middle  and  forefingers,  the  thumb  on 
the  front  screw  of  the  butt  plate,  the  remaining  fingers  under  the  butt, 
the  butt  more  or  less  kept  back  according  to  the  conformation  of  the 
man,  so  that  the  piece,  «een  from  the  front,  shall  appear  perpendicular, 
and,  also,  that  the  movement  of  the  thigh,  in  marching,  may  not  raise 
6 


66  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 

it  or  cause  it  to  waver;  the  stock,  below  the  tail-band,  resting  against 
the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  just  within  the  joint,  the  right  arm  hanging 
naturally,  as  prescribed  in  the  jyosition  of  the  soldier. 

Soldiers  on  first  bearing  ai'ms  are  liable  to  derange  their  position, 
and  particularly  to  distort  the  shoulders,  which,  causing  the  musket 
to  lose  its  point  of  support,  they  drop  the  left  hand  to  prevent  the 
musket  from  falling  from  the  shoulder,  which  again  causes  that  shoulder 
to  droop,  a  curvature  of  the  side,  spreading  of  the  elbows,  etc.  The 
insti'uctor  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults  by  continually  rec- 
tifying the  position ;  he  will  avoid  fatiguing  the  men  too  much  in  the 
beginning,  but  labor  to  render  this  position  so  natural  and  easy  by 
degrees,  that  they  may  remain  in  it  a  long  time  without  fatigue. 

The  instructor  will  also  take  great  care  that  the  musket  be  not  car- 
ried too  high  or  too  low;  if  too  high,  the  left  elbow  would  spread  out, 
the  soldier  would  occupy  too  much  space  in  I'anks  and  the  musket 
would  be  unsteady;  if  too  low,  the  files  would  be  too  close,  the  man 
would  not  have  the  necessary  space  to  handle  his  musket  with  facility, 
the  left  arm  would  become  too  much  fatigued,  the  shoulder  would 
droop,  etc. 

The  manual  of  the  musket  will  be  taught  in  the  following  order: 
The  instructor  commands : 

Support — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

95.  First  motion.  With  the  right  hand  seize  the  small  of  the  stock 
briskly,  four  inches  below  the  lock,  raising  the  piece  a  little,  but  not 
turning  it. 

Second  motion.  Take  the  left  hand  from  the  butt;  extend  the  left 
forearm  upward  across  the  body,  and  under  the  hammer,  the  left  hand 
flat  on  the  right  breast. 

Third  motion.     Drop  the  right  arm  smartly  to  its  position. 

The  squad  being  at  supiiort  arms,  the  instructor  commands : 

Carry — Arms. 

())ie  time  and  three  motions. 

J)G.  First  motion.  Carry  quickly  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the 
stock. 

Second  motion  Place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  as  in  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms. 

Third  motion.     Lot  fall  smartly  the  right  hand  to  its  position,  and 


\ 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  67 

drop  with   the  left,  at   the  same   time,  the  piece   into   the   position  of 
shoulder  anus. 

Present — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

97.  First  motion.  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  out, 
and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand, 
the  piece  perpendicular  and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  hand 
remaining  under  the  hutt. 

Second  motion.  Complete  the  turning  inward  of  the  piece,  so  as  to 
hring  it  erect  before  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  rammer  to  the  front, 
the  right  hand  under  and  against  the  guard;  seize  it  smartly  at  the 
same  time  with  the  left  hand  just  above  the  lock,  the  thumb  extended 
along  the  barrel  and  on  the  stock,  the  left  forearm  resting  on  the  body 
without  constraint,  and  the  hand  at  the  height  of  the  elbow. 

Shoulder— Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

98.  First  motion.  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  the  barrel  to 
the  front,  raise  and  support  it  against  the  left  shoulder  with  the  right 
hand,  drojj  the  left  under  the  butt,  the  right  hand  resting  on,  without 
grasping,  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Second  motion.     Drop  quickly  the  right  hand  into  its  position. 

Order — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

99.  First  motion.  Drop  the  piece  smartly  by  extending  the  left  arm, 
seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand,  above  and  near  the  tail- 
band ;  quit  the  hold  of  the  left  hand,  and  carry  tbe  piece  opposite  to 
the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  the  little  finger  behind  the 
barrel,  the  right  hand  supported  against  the  hip,  the  butt  three  inches 
from  the  ground,  the  piece  erect,  tbe  left  hand  hanging  by  the  side. 

Second  motion.  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground  without  shock,  and  take  the  position  about  to  be  described. 

Position  of  Order  Anns. 

100.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  ex- 
tended along  the  stock j    the  other  fingers  extended  and  joined;  the 


68  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

muzzle  about  two  inches  from  the  right  shoulder;  the  rammer  in  front; 
the  toe  of  the  butt  against,  and  in  a  line  with,  the  toe  of  the  right  foot, 
the  barrel  perpendicular. 

101.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  give  repose  in  this  position,  he 
commands  : 

Rest. 

At  this  command  the  soldiers  will  not  be  required  to  preserve  silence 
or  steadiness.  They,  however,  will  not  quit  their  rank  without  special 
permission. 

102.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  men  to  pass  from  this  position 
to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

At  the  second  word,  the  men  will  reserve  the  position  of  order  arnifi, 
and  remain  firm  and  silent. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

103.  First  77iotion.  Raise  smartly  the  piece  with  the  right  hand, 
carry  it  against  the  left  shoulder,  turning  it,  so  as  to  bring  the  barrel 
to  the  front;  at  the  same  time  place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  and 
slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  lock. 

Second  motion.     Let  the  right  hand  fall  briskly  to  its  position. 

Charge — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  tioo  motions. 

104.  First  motion.  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel, 
bring  the  left  toe  directly  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  place  the  right 
foot  behind,  and  at  right  angles  with  the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  right 
foot  opposite  to,  and  about  three  inches  from  the  left  heel;  turn  the 
piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  outward,  and  seize  the  small  of  the 
stock  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand,  the  musket  perpendicular 
and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

Second  motion.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  letting  it 
fall  firmly  into  the  left,  the  latter  seizing  it  a  little  in  advance  of  the 
tail-band,  the  barrel  up,  the  left  elbow  near  the  body,  the  right  hand 
against  the  hip,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  as  high  as  the. eye. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  69 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  fico  motions. 

105.  First  motion.  Face  to  the  front  by  turning  on  the  left  heel, 
bring  up  the  right  by  the  side  of  the  left  heel ;  at  the  same  time  bring 
up  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  to  the  left  shoulder,  and  place  the  left 
hand  under  the  butt. 

Second  motion.     Let  the  right  hand  fall  promptly  into  its  position. 

Load  in  ten  times. 
1.  Load. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

106.  First  motion.  Drop  the  piece  by  a  smart  extension  of  the  left 
arm,  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band;  at 
the  same  time  carry  the  right  foot  forward,  the  heel  against  the  hollow 
of  the  left  foot. 

Second  motion.  Drop  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  along  the  left 
thigh,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  the  right,  and  with  the  left 
hand  let  it  descend  to  the  ground,  without  shock,  the  piece  touching 
the  left  thigh,  and  the  muzzle  opposite  the  centre  of  the  body ;  carry 
the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  cartridge-box  and  open  it. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

107.  Seize  a  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  the  next  two  fingers,  and 
place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

108.  Tear  the  paper  down  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cartridge  upright 
between  the  thumb  and  the  next  two  fingers,  near  the  top  ;  in  this 
position  place  it  in  front  of  and  near  the  muzzle,  the  back  of  the  hand 
to  the  front. 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 

109.  Fix  the  eye  on  the  muzzle,  turn  quickly  the  back  of  right  hand 
toward   the  bod}'^,  in  order  to  discharge  the   powder  into  the  barrel, 


70  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

raise  the  elbow  to  the  height  of  the  wrist,  shake  the  cartridge,  force  it 
into  the  muzzle,  and  leave  the  hand  reversed,  the  fingers  closed  but 
not  clenched. 

5.  Draw — Eammer. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

110.  First  motion.  Drop  the  right  elbow  smartly,  and  seize  the  ram- 
mer between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  bent,  the  other  fingers  shut ; 
draw  it  smartly,  extending  the  arm,  seize  the  rammer  again  at  the 
middle  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  the  hand  reversed,  the  palm 
to  the  front,  the  nails  up,  the  eyes  following  the  movement  of  the  hand, 
clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  by  again  extending  the  arm. 

Second  motion.  Turn  rapidly  the  rammer  between  the  bayonet  and 
the  face,  closing  the  fingers,  the  rammers  of  the  rear  rank  grazing  the 
right  shoulders  of  the  men  of  the  same  file  in  front,  the  rammer  paral- 
lel to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  butt  of  the  rammer  opposite 
to  the  muzzle,  but  not  yet  inserted,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  muzzle. 

Third  motion.  Insert  the  butt  of  the  rammer,  and  force  it  down  as 
low  as  the  hand. 

6.  Earn — Cartridge. 

One    time   and   one   motion. 

111.  Extend  the  arm  to  its  full  length  to  seize  the  rammer  betAveen 
the  right  thumb  extended  and  the  forefinger  bent,  the  other  fingers 
closed  J  with  force  ram  home  twice  and  seize  the  rammer  at  the  small 
end,  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  bent,  the  other  fingers  closed, 
the  right  elbow  touching  the  body. 

7.  lleturn — Rammer. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

112.  First  motion.  Draw  the  rammer  briskly,  re-seize  it  at  the  mid- 
dle between  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  the  hand  reversed,  the  palm  to 
the  front,  the  nails  up,  the  eyes  following  the  hand,  clear  the  rammer 
from  the  barrel  by  extending  the  arm. 

Second  motion.  Turn  the  rammer  rapidly  between  the  bayonet  and 
the  face,  closing  the  fingers,  the  rammers  of  the  rear  rank  grazing  the 
right  shoulders  of  the  men  in  the  same  file  in  front,  the  rammer  paral- 
lel to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  little  end  of  the  rammer 
opposite  to  the  first  pipe,  but  not  yet  inserted,  the  eyes  fixed  on  that 
pipe. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  71 

Third  motion.  Insert  the  small  end,  and  with  the  thumb,  which  will 
follow  the  movement,  force  it  as  low  as  the  middle  band ;  raise  the 
hand-  quickly,  a  little  bent,  place  the  little  finger  on  the  butt  of  the 
rammer,  and  force  it  down ;  lower  the  left  hand  on  the  barrel  to  the  ex- 
tent of  the  arm  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

8.  Cast — About. 

One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

113.  Fiist  motion.  With  the  left  hand  bring  up  the  piece  vertically 
against  the  left  shoulder,  seize  it  smartly  with  the  right  hand  at  the 
small  of  the  stock,  and  slide  the  left  hand  down  as  low  as  the  chin. 

Second  motion.  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel,  bring 
the  left  toe  to  the  front,  place  the  right  foot  at  the  same  time  close 
behind,  and  at  right  angles  with  the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot 
against  the  left  heel ;  carry  the  piece  opposite  to  the  right  shoulder ; 
bring  doAvn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  into  the  left,  which  Avill  seize 
it  at  tlie  tail-band,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  stock,  the  butt  under  the 
right  forearm,  the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body,  and  about  two 
inches  under  the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  eye,  the 
left  elbow  supported  against  the  side,  the  right  hand  grasping  the 
small  of  the  stock. 

9.  Prime. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

114.  Place  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the  hammer  (the  fingers 
remaining  under  and  against  the  guard),  and  half  cock  the  piece; 
brush  off  the  old  cap,  and  with  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the 
right  hand  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch,  place  it  firmly  on  the  cone  by 
pushing  it  down  with  the  thumb,  and  seize  the  piece  by  the  small  of 
the  stock. 

10.  Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  tn-o  motions. 

115.  First  motion.  Face  to  the  front  by  turning  on  the  left  heel;  at  the 
same  time  bring  the  piece  briskly  with  the  right  hand  to  the  left 
shoulder,  and  place  tlie  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

Second  motion.  Let  the  right  hand  fall  smartly  into  its  position  at 
shonlder  arms. 


72  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Ready.     (From  the  position  of  prime.^ 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

116.  Place  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the  hammer  (the  fingers 
remaining  under  and  against  the  guard),  cock  the  piece,  and  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock. 

Ready.     (From  the  position  of  shoulder  arms.) 

One  time  and  four  motions. 

117.  First  motion.  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  to  the 
front,  seize  it  at  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand,  at  the  same 
time  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel,  bringing  the  left  toe 
to  the  front,  and  placing  the  right  foot  behind,  and  at  right  angles  to 
the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  foot  against  the  left  heel. 

Second  motion.  Bring  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  to  the  middle  of 
the  body,  place  the  left  hand  just  above  the  lock,  the  thumb  extended 
along  the  stock  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  counter  (or  S)  plate  turn- 
ed toward  the  body,  the  rammer  obli([uely  to  the  left  and  front. 

Third  motion.  Place  the  thumb  on  the  hammer,  the  forefinger  under 
and  on  the  guard,  the  other  three  fingers  joined  to  the  first,  the  elbow 
at  the  height  of  the  hand. 

Fourth  motion.  Close  the  right  elbow  smartly  to  the  body  in  cocking, 
without  bending  the  wrist,  seize  the  piece  by  the  small  of  the  stock,  let 
it  descend  along  the  body  in  the  left  hand  to  the  tail-band,  which  will 
remain  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder. 

Aim. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

118.  Raise  the  butt  to  the  shoulder,  the  left  elbow  a  little  down,  shut 
the  left  eye,  direct  the  right  along  the  barrel,  drop  the  head  upon  the 
butt  to  catch  the  object,  and  place  the  forefinger  on  the  trigger.  The 
rear  rank  will  at  the  same  time,  carrj'^  the  right  foot  about  eight  inches 
toward  the  left  heel  of  the  man  next  on  his  right. 

Fire. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

119.  Apply  the  forefinger  with  force  to  the  trigger  without  further 
lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in  that  position. 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   SOLDIER.  /o 

Load.     (From  the  Fire.) 

One  time  and  two  motioiiH. 

120.  First  motion.  Bring  back  the  piece  quickly  with  both  hands, 
depress  the  butt  strongly  by  extending  the  right  arm,  and  carry  it  with 
the  arm  thus  extended  to  the  left  side,  the  barrel  to  the  front  and  oppo- 
site to  the  left  shoulder,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the 
back  of  the  hand  to  the  front,  the  left  forearm  touching  the  stock;  at 
the  same  time  face  to  the  front  and  carry  the  right  foot  forward,  the  heel 
against  the  hollow  of  the  left  foot. 

Second  motion.  Let  go  the  handle  with  the  right  hand,  let  the  piece 
descend  through  the  left  to  the  ground,  without  shock,  and  take  the 
position  of  the  second  motion  of  load. 

Shoulder — Arms.     (From  the  Fire.) 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 

121.  First  motion.  Bring  back  the  piece  with  both  hands,  face  to 
the  front,  carry  the  piece  against  the  left  shoulder,  and  place  the  left 
band  under  the  butt. 

Second  motion.     Let  the  right  hand  fall  smartly  to  its  position. 
The  squad  being  in  the  position  of  aim,  the  instructor,  to  habituate 
the  soldiers  to  wait  for  the  word  fire,  sometimes  commands  : 

Recover — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

122.  Withdraw  the  finger  from  the  trigger,  throw  up  the  muzzle 
smartly,  and  retake  the  position  of  the  fourth  motion  of  ready. 

The  men  being  in  this  jjosition,  if  the  instructor  wishes  them  to  come 
to  a  shoulder,  he  commands  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

123.  At  the  word  shoulder,  the  squad  will  face  to  the  front,  and  bring 
their  pieces  to  the  middle  of  the  body  again  ;  the  left  thumb  at  the  height 
of  the  chin,  the  little  finger  just  above  the  lock;  next  place  the  right 
thumb  on  the  head  of  the  hammer,  support  the  forefinger  on  the  trig- 
ger, sustain  the  hammer  carefully  in  its  descent  at  the  same  time,  to  the 
position  of  half-cock,  then  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand.  At  the  word  ai-ms,  carry  the  piece  to  the  shoulder  smartly,  and 
take  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

1 


74  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

To  load  in  four  times  (or  pauses). 

124.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Load  in  four  timp:s.     2.  Load. 

Execute  the  first  time  of  loading,  handle  cartridge,  tear  cartridge, 
charge  cartridge. 

Two. 

125.  Draw  rammer,  enter  it  as  far  as  the  hand,  and  ram  twice. 

Three. 

126.  Return  rammer,  cast  about,  and  prime. 

Four. 

127.  Execute  the  tenth  time  of  loading. 

128.  The  soldiers  being  at  a  shoulder,  when  the  instructor  may  wish 
to  return  bayonets,  he  commands : 

Unfix — Bayonets. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

First  motion.  Drop  the  piece  by  a  smart  extension  of  the  left  arm, 
seize  it  with  the  right  hand  above  and  near  the  tail-band. 

Second  motion.  Drop  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  along  the  left 
thigh,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  the  right,  lengthen  out  the  left 
arm,  rest  the  butt  on  the  ground,  without  shock,  and  carry  the  right 
hand  at  the  same  time  to  the  bayonet,  with  the  thumb  lower  the  clasp 
against  the  stop,  and  then  seize  the  bayonet  at  the  socket  and  shank. 

Third  motion.  Wrest  off  the  bayonet,  return  it  to  the  scabbard,  place 
the  little  finger  on  the  butt  of  the  rammer,  lower  the  left  hand  along  the 
barrel  in  extending  the  arm,  without  dei^ressiug  the  shoulder. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

129.  Fii-8t  motion.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  along  the  left 
side,  the  hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  forearm  touching  the 
piece,  the  barrel  to  the  fi-out,-  di'op  at  the  same  time  the  right  hand  to 
seize  the  piece  a  little  above  the  handle,  the  forefinger  touching  the 
cock,  and  the  thumb  on  the  counter  plate. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  75 

Second  niolioii.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  di'op  the  left, 
and  place  it  under  the  hutt.  support  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
against  the  shoulder,  in  the  position  prescribed  for  shoulder  ann^,  the 
right  hand  resting  on,  without  grasping,  the  piece. 

Third  motion.  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand  into  its  position  by 
the  side  of  the  thigh. 

Fix — B  A  Y  O  X  E  T . 

180,  First  and  serond  motions.  As  the  first  and  second  motions  of 
un/lr  bayonet,  exce])t  that  at  the  end  of  the  second  motion,  the  right 
hand  will  go  to  seize  the  bayonet  by  the  socket  and  shank,  so  that  the 
lower  (now  upper)  end  of  the  socket  shall  extend  about  an  inch  above 
the  heel  of  tlic  palm. 

Third  motion.  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scabbard,  carry  and  fix  it 
on  the  muzzle,  turning  the  clasp  toward  the  body  with  the  right  thumb  ; 
place  the  little  finger  on  the  head  of  the  rammer,  lower  the  left  hand 
along  the  barrel,  in  extending  the  arm. 

Sh  oulder — Ar  m  s  . 
The  same  as  from  the  unfix  hajjonet. 

Secure — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

131.  First  motion.  Seize  quickly  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  the 
thumb  on  the  counter  plate,  and  the  forefinger  against  the  cock:  detach 
the  piece  from  the  shoulder  at  the  same  instant,  the  barrel  to  the  front, 
seize  it  at  the  tail-band  with  the  left  hand,  the  thumb  extended  on  the 
ranuucr,  the  piece  erect,  opposite  to  the  shoulder,  the  left  elbow  on  the 
piece. 

/Second  motion.  Keversc  the  piece,  pass  it  under  the  left  arm,  the  left 
hand  remaining  at  the  tail-band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent 
it  from  sliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the  hip,  and  the  right 
hand  falling  at  the  same  time  into  its  position. 

Slioulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

132.  First  motion.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  but  not  too 
suddenly,  lest  the  rammer  should  fly  out;  seize  the  handle  with  the 
right  hand  to  support  it  against  the  shoulder,  quit  the  hold  of  the  left 
hand,  and  place  quickly  this  hand  under  the  butt. 


76  MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Second  motion.  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand  into  its  position; 
drop  at  the  same  time  the  piece  into  the  position  of  shouldered  arms. 

Trail — Arms. 

One  time  and  ttvo  motions. 

133.  First  motion.     As  the  first  motion  of  order  arms. 

Second  motion.  Incline  a  little  the  muzzle  to  the  front,  the  butt  to 
the  rear,  and  about  three  inches  from  the  ground,  the  right  hand,  sup- 
ported at  the  hip,  will  sustain  the  piece  so  that  the  men  of  the  rear  rank 
may  not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  front  of  them. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

134.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  perpendicularly  in  the 
right  hand ;  at  the  command  arms,  execute  what  has  been  prescribed 
for  the  shoulder  from  the  position  of  order  arms. 

To  right  shoulder.,  shift — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

135.  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  to  the  front,  seize  it 
at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  handle,  place  it  on  the  right 
shoulder,  the  left  hand  not  quitting  the  butt,  the  lock-plate  upward, 
the  muzzle  up ;  sustain  the  piece  in  this  position  by  placing  the  right 
hand  on  the  flat  of  the  butt ;  let  fall  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

136.  Raise  the  piece  by  extending  the  right  arm,  seize  it  with  the  left 
hand  above  the  lock,  carry  it  against  the  left  shoulder,  turning  the  bar- 
rel to  the  front,  the  right  hand  being  at  the  handle,  place  the  left  hand 
under  the  butt,  and  let  the  right  fall  into  its  position. 

Arms — At  will. 

*'.i- One  time  and  07ie  motion. 

137.  Carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either  shoulder,  or  with  one  or 
both  hands,  the  muzzle  always  up. 

Shoulder — Arm  s. 

138.  Retake  smartly  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  7  7 


Inspection  of  Arms. 

139.  The  squad  being  at  ordered  arms,  and  having  the  bayonet  in 
the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes  to  cause  an  inspection  of  arms, 
he  will  command  : 

Inspection  of- — Arms. 

One    time    and    three    motions. 

Firfit  motion.  Face  to  the  right  once  and  a  half  on  the  left  heel,  car- 
rying the  right  foot  ijcrpendicularly  to  the  rear  of  the  alignment,  about 
six  inches  from,  and  at  right  angles  with,  the  left  foot ;  seize  promptly 
the  piece  with  the  left  hand  a  little  above  the  middle  band,  incline  the 
muzzle  to  the  rear  Avithout  displacing  the  heel  of  the  butt,  the  rammer 
turned  toward  the  body;  carry  at  the  same  time  the  right  hand  to  the 
bayonet,  and  seize  it  as  has  been  prescribed. 

Second  motion.  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scabbard,  carry  and  fix 
it  on  the  muzzle  :  seize  next  the  raninier,  draw  it  as  has  been  explained 
in  loading  it  twelve  times,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

Third  motion.  Face  promptly  to  the  front,  seize  the  jiiece  with  the 
right  hand,  and  retake  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession  the  piece  of  each  man 
in  passing  along  the  front  of  the  rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches 
him,  will  raise  smartly  his  piece  Avith  his  right  hand,  seize  it  with  the 
left  between  the  tail-band  and  the  feather-spring,  the  lock  to  the  front, 
the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left 
eye ;  the  instructor  will  take  it  Avith  the  right  hand  at  the  handle,  and, 
after  inspecting  it,  will  return  it  to  the  soldier,  who  will  receive  it  back 
with  the  right  hand,  and  replace  it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him,  each  soldier  Avill  retake 
the  position  prescribed  at  the  command  inspection  of  arms,  and  return 
the  rammer  ;  after  which  he  will  face  to  the  front. 

140.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  it  be  the  Avish  of  the  instructor 
only  to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he  Avill  command  : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

Take  the  position  indicated  inspection  of  arms  (first  motion),  fix 
bayonets  as  has  been  explained,  and  immediately  face  to  the  front. 

IJayonets  fixed,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing,  to  as- 
certain Avhether  the  pieces  have  been  discharged,  he  will  command  : 

Sprimi — Ram  m  e  r  s  . 


^:. 


78  MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel,  as  has  been  explaiued  above,  and 
immediately  face  to  the  front. 

The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take  the  rammer  by  the 
small  end  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel,  or  cause  each  man  to  make  the- 
rammer  ring  in  the  barrel. 

Each  man,  after  the  instructor  passes  him,  will  return  rammer,  and 
face  to  the  fi'ont. 

Arms — Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

141.  Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  lock  to  the 
front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  instant  with  both  hands,  the  right  at 
the  handle,  the  left  at  the  tail-band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing  toward 
the  muzzle,  the  barrel  sloping  upward  and  crossing  opposite  to  the 
point  of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  proportionately  lowered.  The  palm 
of  the  right  hand  will  be  above,  and  that  of  the  left  under  the  piece, 
the  nails  of  both  hands  next  to  the  body,  to  which  the  elbows  will  be 
closed. 

Shoulder — Arm  s. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  left  shoulder,  placing' 
the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

Second  motion.     Drop  the  right  hand  smartly  by  the  side. 

MANUAL    OF    ARMS    FOR    THE    RIFLE. 

Princi]}les  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

142.  The  soldier  standing  in  the  position  of  the  soldier,  the  instructor 
causes  him  to  bend  the  right  arm  slightly,  and  places  the  piece  in  it  in 
the  following  manner:  The  piece  in  the  right  hand — the  barrel  nearly 
vertical  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder  —  the  guard  to  the 
front,  the  arm  hanging  nearly  at  its  full  length  near  the  body;  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  embracing  the  guard,  the  remaining  fingers 
closed  together,  and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock  just  under  the  cock, 
which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

Support — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

143.  First  motion.  Bring  the  piece,  with  the  right  hand,  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  front  and  between  the  eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear;  seize  the 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER.  79 

piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  baud,  raise  this  haud  as  high  as 
the  chin,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  rijjht  hand 
four  inches  below  the  cock. 

Second  motion.  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  the  barrel  to  the 
front ;  carry  the  piece  to  the  left  shoulder,  aud  pass  the  forearm 
extended  on  the  breast  between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock:  support 
the  cock  against  the  left  forearm,  the  left  hand  I'esting  on  the  right 
breast. 

Third  motion.     Drop  the  right  hand  hj  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

144.  First  motion.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  under  and 
against  the  left  forearm ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band, 
the  tlinuib  extended;  detach  the  piece  slightly  from  the  shoulder,  the 
left  forearm  along  the  stock. 

Second  motion.  Carry  the  piece  vertically  to  the  right  shoulder  with 
both  hands,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  change  the  position  of  the  right 
hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  slip 
the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and 
joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

Third  motion.     Drop  the  left  haud  quickl}-  by  the  side. 

Present — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

145.  First  motion.  With  the  right  hand  bring  the  piece  erect  before 
the  centre  of  the  body,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  at  the  same  time  seize 
the  piece  with  the  left  hand  half-way  between  the  guide  sight  and  lower 
band,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  barrel  and  against  the  stock,  the 
forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the  body,  the  hand  as  high  as 
the  elbow. 

Second  motion.  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  Avitb  the  right  hand 
below  and  against  the  guard. 

SJioulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  -motions. 

146.  First  motion.  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same 
time  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guai'd 
with  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  slip  up  tlie  left  haud  to  the  height  of 


80  MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly- 
straight. 

Second  motion.     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Order  —  Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

147.  First  motion.  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  near 
the  upper  band,  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right 
hand;  loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  the  piece  with  the  left, 
re-seize  the  piece  with  the  right  band  above  the  lower  band,  the  little 
finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the  butt  about  four  inches  from  the  ground, 
the  right  hand  supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand  by  the 
side. 

Second  motion.  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground  by  opening  slightly  the  fingers,  and  take  the  position  about  to 
be  described. 

Position  of  order  arms. 

148.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
extended  along  the  stock;  the  other  fingers  extended  and  joined;  the 
muzzle  about  two  inches  from  the  right  shoulder;  the  rammer  in  front; 
the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the  butt  against  and  in  a  line  with  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot,  the  barrel  perpendicular. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

149.  First  motion.  Raise  the  piece  vertically  with  the  right  hand  to 
the  height  of  the  right  breast,  and  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow 
close  to  the  body ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  the  right, 
and  drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the  piece  at  the  swell  of  the 
stock,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  embracing  the  guard;  press  the  piece 
against  the  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

Second  motion.     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Load  in  nine  times. 
1.    LOAD.^ 

One  time  a)id  one  motion. 

150.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  as  high  as  the  right  elbow. 


1  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  executed,  the  instructor  will  cause 
tlie  cartridge  boxes  to  be  brought  to  the  front. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  81 

and  bring  it  vertically  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body ;  shift  the  right 
hand  to  the  upper  baud,  place  the  butt  between  the  feet,  the  barrel  to 
the  front ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  near  the  muzzle,  which  should  be 
three  inches  from  the  body  ;  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  cartridge  box. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  oue  motion. 

151.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next  two  finj^ers.  and 
place  it  between  the  teeth. 

8.  Tear — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

152.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cartridge  upright  between 
the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers,  near  the  top;  in  this  position  place  it 
in  front  of  and  near  the  muzzle — the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

4.   Charge — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

15.3.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel;  disengage  the  ball  from  the 
paper  with  the  right  hand  and  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the 
left;  insert  it  into  the  bore,  the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press  it 
down  with  the  right  thumb;  seize  the  head  of  the  rammer  with  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  the  other  fingers  closed,  the 
elbows  near  the  body. 

5.  Dratc — Rammer. 

One  time  and  three  mnlions. 

154.  First  motion.  Half  draw  the  rammer  by  extending  the  right 
arm  ;  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb  ;  grasp  the  rammer 
near  the  muzzle  with  the  right  liand,  the  little  finger  uppermost,  the 
nails  to  the  front,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  rammer. 

Second  motion.  Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  by  again  extending 
the  arm;  the  rammer  in  the  prolongation  of  the  pipes. 

Third  motion.  Turn  the  rammer,  the  little  end  of  the  rammer  pass- 
ing near  the  left  shoulder;  place  the  head  of  the  rammer  on  the  ball, 
the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 


82  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILTTTA. 

6.  Rtuii — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

155.  Insert  the  riimmer  as  far  as  the  \'\%^t,  aud  steady  it  in  this  posi- 
tion with  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand ;  seize  the  rammer  at  the  small 
end  with  the  thumb  aud  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  the  back  of  the 
hand  to  the  front;  press  the  ball  home,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

7.  Return — Rammer. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

156.  Fiist  motion.  Draw  the  rammer  half-way  out,  and  steady  it  in 
this  position  with  the  left  thumb;  grasp  it  near  the  muzzle  with  the 
right  hand,  the  little  fiugcr  uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the 
thumb  along  the  rammer;  clear  the  rammer  from  the  bore  by  extend- 
ing the  arm,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  rammer  in  the  prolongation  of 
the  bore. 

Second  tnotion.  Turn  the  rammei",  the  head  of  the  rammer  passing 
near  the  left  shoulder,  and  insert  it  in  the  pipes  until  the  right  hand 
reaches  the  muzzle,  the  nails  to  the  front. 

Third  motion.  Force  the  rammer  home  by  placing  the  little  finger 
of  the  right  hand  on  the  head  of  the  rammer;  pass  the  left  hand  down 
the  barrel  to  the  extent  of  the  arm,  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

8.  Prime. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

157.  First  motion.  With  the  left  hand  raise  the  piece  till  the  hand  is 
as  high  as  the  eye,  gra.'^p  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand; 
half  face  to  the  right;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  foot  behind 
aud  at  right  angles  with  the  left;  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  against 
the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left  hand  down  to  the  lower  baud,  the  thumb 
along  the  stock,  the  left  elbow  agaiust  the  body  ;  l)ring  the  piece  to  the 
right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right  forearm — the  small  of  the  stock 
against  the  body  and  two  inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  up- 
ward, the  muzzle  on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

Second  motion.  Half-cock  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  the 
fingers  supported  against  the  guard  and  the  small  of  the  stock — remove 
the  old  cap  with  one  of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  with  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch, 
place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it  down  with  the  thumb;  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  the  richt  hand. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  88 

9.  Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  )noti()Uft. 

158.  First  motion.  Bring  the  piece  to  tl\o  right  shoulder,  and  support 
it  there  with  the  left  hand,  face  to  the  front;  bring  the  right  heel  to  the 
side  of  and  on  a  line  with  the  left;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
as  indicated  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

Second  motion.     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Ready. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

159.  First  motion.  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the  right  hand, 
making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel;  carry  the  right  foot  to 
the  rear,  and  place  it  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  oppo- 
site to,  and  against  the  left  heel:  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at 
the  lower  band  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder. 

Second  motion.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel 
upward,  the  left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  butt  below  the 
right  forearm,  the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches 
below  the  right  breaSt,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eye,  the  left  elbow 
against  the  side;  place  at  the  same  time  the  right  thumb  on  the  head 
of  the  cock,  the  other  fingers  under  and  against  the  guard. 

Third  motion.  Cock,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  slock 
without  deranging  the  position  of  the  butt. 

Aim. 

100,  As  ill  the  manual  for  the  musket. 

Fire. 

101.  As  in  the  manual  for  the  musket. 

Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

162.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the  same  time  face  to 
the  front  and  take  the  position  of  load.  Each  rear  rank  man  will  bring 
his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  loading 
to  be  continued  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed. 

If.  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish  the  recruits  to  reload, 
he  will  command : 


84  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

Ove  time  and  one  motion. 

163.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  and  resume  the 
position  of  shotdder  arms,  at  the  same  time  face  to  the  front,  turning 
on  the  left  heel,  and  bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with  the  left. 

Recover — Arms. 

164.  The  same  as  in  the  manual  for  the  musket. 

165.  The  soldiers  being  in  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready, 
if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring  them  to  a  shoulder,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  o)ie  motion. 

At  the  command  shoulder,  place  the  thumb  upon  the  cock,  the  fore- 
finger on  the  trigger,  half  cock,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with 
the  right  hand.  At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the  piece  briskly  to 
the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  fix  bayonets,  he  will  command  : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

On",  time  and  three  ynotions. 

166.  First  motion.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  height 
of  the  shoulder,  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right 
hand. 

Second  motion.  Quit  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  lower  it  with  the 
left  hand,  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  and  place  the  butt  between 
the  feet,  without  shock  :  the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel  vertical,  the 
muzzle  three  inches  from  the  body  ;  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the 
upper  band,  and  carry  the  left  hand  reversed  to  the  handle  of  the 
sabre-bayonet. 

Third  motion.  Draw  the  sabre-bayonet  from  the  scabbard  and  fix  it 
on  the  extremity  of  the  barrel ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the 
arm  extended,  the  right  hand  at  the  upper  band. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  85 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  fico  motions. 

167.  First  motion.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  aud  place  it 
against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front ;  seize  the  piece  at 
the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  embracing  the  guard,  the  right  arm  nearly  extended. 

Second  motion.     Drop  briskly  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Charge — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

168.  First  motion.  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the  right  hand  and 
make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel  ;  place  the  hollow  of  the 
right  foot  opposite  to,  and  three  inches  fi'om  the  left  heel,  the  feet 
square ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  left  hand  a  little 
above  the  lower  band. 

Second  motion.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel 
uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock 
at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  supported  against 
the  hip ;  the  point  of  the  sabre-bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

169.  First  motion.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  in 
facing  to  the  front,  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to 
the  front ;  turn  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide  the 
left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  right  hand  nearly  ex- 
tended. 

Second  motion.     Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the  side. 

Ti'ciil — Arms. 

One  time  and  tn:o  motions. 

170.  First  motion.     The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  order  arms. 
Second  motion.     Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to  the  front,  the  butt  to 

the  rear,  and  about  four  inches  from  the  ground.  The  right  hand  sup- 
ported at  the  hip  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the  rear  rank  men  may 
not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  the  front  rank. 


86  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

SJioulder — Arms. 

171.  At  the  commaud  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  perpendicularly  in 
the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel;  at  the  command 
arms,  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  shoulder  from  the  j)Osi- 
tion  of  order  arms. 

Unjix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

172.  First  and  second  motions.  The  same  as  the  first  and  second 
motions  of  fix  bayonet,  except  that,  at  the  end  of  the  second  command, 
the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  will  be  placed  on  the  spring  of  the  sabre- 
bayonet,  and  the  left  hand  will  embrace  the  handle  of  the  sabre-bayo- 
Bet  and  the  barrel,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  blade. 

Third  motion.  Press  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the  spring, 
wrest  off  the  sabre-bayonet,  turn  it  to  the  right,  the  edge  to  the  front, 
lower  the  guard  until  it  touches  the  right  hand,  which  will  seize  the 
back  and  the  edge  of  the  blade  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fin- 
gers, the  other  fingers  holding  the  piece;  change  the  position  of  the 
hand  without  quitting  the  handle,  return  the  sabre-bayonet  to  the  scab- 
bard, and  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm  extended. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

173.  First  motion.     The  same  as  the  first  motion  from  /?.r  bayonet. 
Second  motion.     The  same  as  the  second  motion  from /?>  bayonet. 

Secure — Arms. 

One  tii),.e  and  three  motions. 

174.  First  motion.  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  su2^2^ort  arms, 
except  with  the  right  hand  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Second  motion.  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  to  the 
front;  bring  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the 
left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and  extended 
on  the  rammer;  the  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  left 
forearm  against  the  piece. 

Third  motion.  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it  under  the  left  arm,  the  left 
hand  remaining  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent 
it  from  sliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the  hip,  the  right 
hand  falling  at  the  same  time  by  the  side. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  87 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

175.  Fii-fit  motion.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  seize  it 
Avitb  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock.  The  piece  erect  and 
detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hi}),  tlio  left  forearm 
along  the  piece. 

Second  motion.  The  same  as  the  second  motion  of  shonldci-  arms  from 
a  Nupjxirf. 

Third  luotion.  The  same  as  the  third  motion  oi'  shoulder  arms  from  a 
sojyport. 

Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  Detach  the  piece  perpendicularly  from  the  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand,  and  seize  it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band 
and  guide-sight,  raise  the  piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulder  and  four  inches  from  it;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right 
hand  on  the  butt,  the  beak  lietwcen  the  first  two  fingers,  the  other  two 
fingers  under  the  butt  plate. 

Second  motion.  Quit  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  raise  and  place  the 
piece  on  the  right  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  the  lock  plate  upward; 
let  fall,  at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

177.  First  motion.  Raise  the  piece  perpendicularly  by  extending  the 
right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time 
seize  the  piece  \i^ith  the  left  hand  between  the  lower  baud  and  guide- 
sight. 

Second,  ^notion.  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  imme- 
diately embrace  the  guard,  lower  the  piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder 
arms,  slide  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers 
extende<l  and  closed.     Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

The  men  being  at  supi)ort  arms,  the  instructor  will  sometimes  cause 
pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder.  To  this  effect,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 


88  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

178.  First  motion.  Seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  below  and 
near  the  left  forearm,  place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  the  heel  of  the 
butt  between  the  first  two  fingers. 

Second  motion.  TiTrn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  plate 
upward,  carry  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  left  hand  still  holding  the 
butt,  the  muzzle  elevated;  hold  the  piece  in  this  position  and  place 
the  right  hand  upon  the  butt,  and  let  fall  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Support — Arm  s  . 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

179.  First  motion.     The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  shoulder  arms. 
Second  motion.     Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  to  the 

front,  carry  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the 
small  of  the  stock,  place  the  left  forearm  extended  on  the  breast,  and 
let  fall  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

A?'ms — At  will. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

180.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either  shoulder, 
with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle  elevated. 

SJwulder — Arms. 

0)te  time  and  one  motion. 

181.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

Ins])ection  of  arms. 

182.  The  soldiers  being  at  ordered  arms,  and  having  ^he  sabre-bayo- 
net in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes  to  cause  an  inspection  of 
arms,  he  will  command  : 

Inspection — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

183.  First  motion.  Seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  and  near 
the  upper  band,  carry  it  with  both  hands  opposite  the  middle  of  the 
body,  the  butt  between  the  feet,  the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel  ver- 
tical, the  muzzle  about  three  inches  from  the  body ;  carry  the  left  hand 
reversed  to  the  sabre-bayonet,  draw  it  from  the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  89 

the  barrel;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  and  near  the  upper 
band,  seize  the  rammer  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand 
bent,  the  other  fingers  closed. 

Second  motion.  Draw  the  rammer  as  has  been  explained  in  loading, 
and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  replace  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand  opposite  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of  ordered 
anus. 

The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession  the  piece  of  each  man, 
in  passing  along  the  front  of  the  rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches 
him,  will  raise  smartl}'  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seize  it  with  the 
left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight,  the  lock  to  the  front,  the 
left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  i)iece  opposite  to  the  left  ejG; 
the  instructor  will  take  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  handle,  and,  after 
inspecting  it,  will  return  it  to  the  man,  who  will  receive  it  back  witli  the 
right  hand,  and  replace  it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him,  each  soldier  will  retake 
the  position  prescribed  at  the  command  inspection  arms,  return  the  ram- 
mer, and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  instructor  should  merely  wish 
to  cause  the  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he  will  command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

184;  Take  the  position  indicated  fix  bayonets  as  has  been  explained, 
and  immediately  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing,  to  ascertain  whether 
the  pieces  have  been  discharged,  he  will  command: 

Spring — Rammers. 

This  is  done  as  in  the  manual  for  the  musket. 

To  load  in  four  times. 

185.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of  the  command  ;  the 
three  others  at  the  commands,  tivo,  three  and/o»r. 
The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.     2.  Load. 

18G.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  cartridge. 

Two. 

187.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge. 

8 


00  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Three. 

188.  Execute  the  times  to  include  prime. 

Four. 

189.  Execute  the  time  of  slioulder  arnm. 

To  load  at  will. 

190.  The  instructor  will  next  teach  loading  at  will,  which  will  be 
executed  as  loading  in  four  times,  but  continued,  and  without  resting 
on  either  of  the  times.     He  will  command : 

1.  Load  at  loill.     2.  Load. 

The  instructor  will  habituate  the  soldiers,  by  degrees,  to  load  with 
the  greatest  possible  promptitude,  each  without  regulating  himself  by 
his  neighbor,  and  above  all  without  waiting  for  him. 

Firings. 

191.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,  and  will  be  executed  as  fol- 
lows : 

The  direct  Jire. 

The  instructor  will  give  the  following  commands  : 

1.  Fire  hy  Squad.     2.  Squad.     3.  Ready.     4.  Aim.     5.  Fire. 

6.  Load. 

Tliese  several  commands  will  be  execiited  as  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  manual  of  ariDs.  At  the  third  command,  the  men  will  come  to  the 
position  of  ready  as  heretofore  explained.  At  the  fourth  they  will  aim 
according  to  the  rank  in  which  each  may  find  himself  placed,  the  rear 
rank  men  inclining  forward  a  little  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order 
that  their  pieces  may  reach  as  much  bej'^ond  the  front  rank  as  possible. 

At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their  pieces,  and  return  imme- 
diately to  the  position  of  ready. 

The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the  commands  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  cease,  he  will  command: 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  91 


Cease  firing. 

At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing,  but  will  load  their  pieces 
if  unloaded,  and  afterward  bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 

Oblique  Jiringa. 

192.  The  oblique  firings  v.ill  be  executed  to  the  right  and  left,  and  by 
the  same  commands  as  the  direct  fire,  with  this  single  difference — the 
cammaud  aim  will  always  be  preceded  by  the  caution,  right  or  left 
oblique. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  oblique  jire  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will  execute  what  has  been 
prescribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

At  the  cautionary  command,  right  ohUqne,  the  two  ranks  Avill  throw 
back  the  right  shoulder  and  look  steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

At  the  command  aini,  each  front  rank  man  will  aim  to  the  right  with- 
out deranging  the  feet;  each  rear  rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot 
about  eight  inches  toward  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right 
of  his  file  leader  and  aim  to  the  right,  inclining  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  left  knee. 

Position  of  the  tivo  ranks  in  the  oblique  fire  to  the  left. 

At  the  cautionary  command,  left  oblique,  the  two  ranks  will  throw 
back  the  left  shoulder  and  look  steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

At  the  command  (lin),  the  front  rank  will  take  aim  to  the  left  without 
deranging  the  feet:  each  man  in  the  rear  rank  will  advance  the  right 
foot  about  eight  inches  toward  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the 
right  of  his  file-leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  inclining  the  upper  part 
of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  right  knee. 

In  both  cases,  at  the  command  load,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  come 
to  the  position  of  load  as  prescribed  in  the  direct  firej  the  rear  rank 
men  bringing  back  the  foot  which  is  to  the  right  and  front  by  the  side 
of  the  other.     Each  man  will  continue  to  load  as  if  isolated. 

To  fire  bij  File. 

193.  The  fire  by  file  will  lie  executed  by  the  two  ranks,  the  files  of 
whicb  will  fire  successively,  and  without  regulating  on  each  other, 
except  for  the  first  fire. 

The  instructor  will  command  : 


92  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


1.  Fire  hy  File.    2.  Squad.    3.  Ready.    4.  Commence  Firing. 

At  the  third  commaud,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the  position  pre- 
scribed in  the  direct  fire. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right  will  aim  and  fire ;  the 
rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will  take  the  position  indicated  in  No.  118. 

The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces  briskly  and  fire  a  second 
time ;  reload  and  fire  again,  and  so  on  in  continuation. 

The  second  file  will  aim  at  the  instant  the  first  brings  down  pieces 
to  reload,  and  will  conform  in  all  respects  to  that  which  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  first  file. 

After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank  men  will  not  be  required 
to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to  the  position  of  ready  and 
continue  the  fire. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to  cease,  he  will  command: 

Cease — Firing. 

At  this  command  the  men  will  cease  firing.  If  they  have  fired,  they 
will  load  their  pieces  and  bring  them  to  a  shoulder  j  if  at  the  position 
of  ready,  they  will  half  cock  and  shoulder  arms.  If  in  the  position  of 
aim,  they  will  bring  down  their  pieces,  half  cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 

To  fire  hy  Rank.         ^ 

194.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  entire  rank,  alter- 
nately. 

The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.    Fire   hy  Rank.      2.    Squad.      3.    Eeady.      4.   Rear  rank. 
5.  Aim.     6.  Fire.     7.  Load. 

At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the  position  of  ready, 
as  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank  will  execute  that  which  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire,  and  afterward  take  the  position  of 
ready. 

As  soon  as  the  instructor  sees  several  men  of  the  rear  rank  in  the 
position  of  ready,  he  will  command : 

1.  Front  rank.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  rank  will  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  rear  rank,  but  they  will  not  step  off  with  the 
right  foot. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  93 

The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the  rear  rank,  and  will 
thus  continue  to  alternate  from  rank  to  rank,  until  he  shall  wish  the 
firing  to  cease,  when  he  will  command,  cease  firiiuj,  which  will  be 
executed  as  heretofore  prescribed. 

To  Jire  and  load  Kneeling. 

195.  In    this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  supposed  loaded  and  drawn 
up  in  one  rank.     The  instruction  will  be  given   to  each  man  individu- 
all}',  without  times  or  motions,  and  in  the  following  manner. 
■  The  instructdr  will  command : 

Fire  ani>  load  Kneeling. 

At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad  will  move  for- 
ward three  paces  and  halt;  then  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to 
the  right  of  the  left  heel,  and  in  a  position  convenient  for  placing  the 
riglit  knee  upon  the  ground,  and  bending  the  left  leg;  place  the  right 
knee  upon  the  ground;  lower  the  piece,  the  left  forearm  supported 
upon  the  thigh  on  the  same  side,  the  right  hand  on  the  small  of  the 
stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right  thigh,  the  left  hand  supporting  the 
piece  near  the  lower  band. 

He  will  next  move  the  right  leg  to  the  left  around  the  knee  supported 
on  the  ground,  until  this  leg  is  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of 
the  left  foot,  and  thus  seat  himself  comfortably  on  the  right  heel. 

Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  support  it  with  the  left,  hold- 
ing it  near  the  lower  band,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh  near 
the  knee;  seize  the  hammer  with  the  thumb,  the  forefinger  under  the 
guard;  cock  and  seize  the  piece  with  the  small  of  the  stock;  bring 
the  piece  to  the  shoulder ;  aim  and  fire. 

Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is  fired,  and  support  it  with  the 
left  hand,  the  butt  resting  against  the  right  thigh;  carry  the  piece  to 
the  rear,  rising  on  the  knee,  the  barrel  downward,  the  butt  resting  on 
the  ground;  in  this  position  support  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
upper  band,  draw  cartridge  with  the  right  and  load  the  piece,  ramming 
the  ball,  if  necessary,  with  both  hands. 

When  loaded,  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with  the  left  hand,  which 
holds  it  at  the  upper  band;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right 
hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock;  turn  the  piece,  the  barrel  uppermost 
and  nearl}^  horizontal,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  lelt  thigh  ;  half 
cock,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  rise,  and  return  to  the  ranks. 

The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  first,  and  so  on  througli  the  remainder  of  the  squad. 


94  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

To  fire  and  load  Lying. 

196.  In  this  exercise,  the  squad  will  he  iu  one  rank  and  loaded;  the 
instruction  >yill  he  given  individually  and  without  times  or  motions. 

The  instructor  will  command  : 

Fire  and  load  Lying. 

At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad  will  move  for- 
ward three  paces  and  halt ;  he  will  then  bring  his  piece  to  an  order, 
drop  on  both  knees,  and  place  himself  on  the  ground  flat  on  his  belly. 
In  this  position  he  will  support  the  piece  nearly  horizontal  with  the  left 
hand,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the  butt  end  of  the  piece  and  the 
left  elbow  resting  on  the  ground,  the  bai'rel  uppermost ;  cock  the  piece 
with  the  right  hand,  and  carry  this  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock  ;  raise 
the  piece  with  both  hands,  press  the  butt  against  the  shoulder,  and, 
resting  on  both  elbows,  aim  and  fire. 

As  soon  as  he  has  lired,  bring  the  piece  down  and  turn  upon  his  left 
side,  still  resting  on  his  left  elbow;  bring  back  the  piece  until  the  cock 
is  opposite  his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting  on  the  groimd;  take  out  a 
cartridge  with  the  right  hand;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  this 
hand,  holding  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  two  first  fingers;  he 
will  then  throw  himself  on  his  back,  still  holding  the  piece  with  both 
hands ;  cai*ry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  place  the  butt  between  the  heels,  the 
barrel  up,  the  muzzle  elevated.  In  this  position,  charge  cartridge, 
draw  rammer,  ram  cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

AVhen  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn  again  upon  his  left  side, 
remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  then  raise  the  piece  vertically,  rise,  turn 
about,  and  resume  his  position  in  the  ranks. 

The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
first,  and  so  on  throughout  the  squad. 

Bayonet  Exercise. 

197,  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be  confined  to  two  move- 
ments, the  (juard  ayawst  infiuitri/,  and  the  guard  ac/dirtst  cavalry.  The 
men  will  be  placed  in  one  rank,  with  two  paces  interval,  and,  being  at 
shoulder  arms,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1,   Guard  against  Infantry.     2.  Guard. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 
Finst  motion.     Make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  turning  on  both  heels, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  95 

the  feet  squai'e  to  each  other;    at  the  same  time  raise  the  piece  slightly, 
and  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band. 

Second  motion.  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty  inches  perpendicularly 
to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  on  the  prolongation  of  the  left,  the  knees 
slightly  bent,  <he  weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  on  both  legs  ; 
lower  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow 
against  the  body;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand 
at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  arms  falling  naturally,  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  slightly  elevated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  place  it  against  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left, 
and  face  to  the  front. 

1.   Guard  against  Cavalry.     2.  Guard. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

Both  motions  the  same  as  for  fjuard  against  infantry,  except  that  the 
right  hand  will  be  supported  against  the  hip,  and  the  bayonet  held  at 
the  height  of  the  eye,  as  in  charge  bat/onet. 

Sh  0  uhJer — Ar  m  s  . 

One   time    and   one   motion. 

Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  place  it  against  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left, 
and  face  to  the  front. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  FOR  OFFICERS. 

POSITION  OF  THE  SWOUD  OR  SABRE,  UNDER  ARMS. 

198.  The  carry.  The  gripe  in  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  sup- 
ported against  the  right  hip,  the  back  of  the  blade  against  the 
shoulder. 

TO    SALUTE    WITH    THE    SWORD    OR    SABRE. 

Three  times  [or  pauses). 

One.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  person  to  be  saluted, 
raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpendicularly,  the  point  up,  the  flat  of  the 


96  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

blade  opposite  to  the  right  eye,  the  guard  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder, 
the  elbow  supported  on  the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by  extending  the  arm, 
so  that  the  right  hand  may  be  brought  to  the -side  of  the  right  thigh, 
and  remain  in  that  position  until  the  person  to  whom  the  salute  is  ren- 
dered, shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  resume  the  position 
first  prescribed. 

COLOR  SALUTE. 

199.  In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or  in  march, 
will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the  color-lance  supported  at  the  right 
hip,  the  right  hand  generally  placed  on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  to  hold  it  steady.  When  the  color  has  to  render  honors,  the 
color-bearer  will  salute  as  follows  : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand  along  the  lance  to 
the  height  of  the  eye;  lower  the  lance  by  straightening  the  arm  to  its 
fullest  extent,  the  heel  of  the  lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and  bring 
back  the  lance  to  the  habitual  position  when  the  person  saluted  shall 
be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 


PART  THIRD. 

200.  When  the  men  are  Avell  established  in  the  principles  and  mech- 
anism of  the  step,  the  jiosiiion  of  the  body,  and  the  manual  of  arms, 
the  instructor  will  unite  from  eight  to  twelve  in  a  squad,  in  order  to 
teach  them  the  principles  of  alignment,  the  touch  of  the  elbow  in 
marching  to  the  front,  the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank,  wheel- 
ing from  a  halt,  wheeling  in  marching,  and  the  change  of  direction  to 
the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will  place  the  squad  in  one  rank,  elbow  to 
elbow,  and  number  the  men  from  right  to  left. 

Alignments. 

201.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  soldiers  to  align  themselves, 
man  by  man,  in  order  to  make  them  understand  the  principles  of  align- 
ment better  5  for  this  purpose,  he  will  command  the  two  men  on  the 
right  flank  to  march  two  j^aces  to  the  front,  and  having  aligned  (or 
dressed)  them,  he  will  cause  the  remainder  of  the  squad  to  move  up,  as 
may  be  successively  called,  each  by  his  number,  as  three,  four,  etc.,  and 
align  (or  dress)  themselves  successively  on  the  line  of  the  first  two 
men. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  97 

Each  man,  as  designated  by  his  number,  will  turn  his  head  and  eyes 
to  the  right,  as  directed  for  eyes  right  in  the  first  part,  and  march  tioo 
jHices  forward  in  quick  time,  shortening  the  last  step,  so  as  to  find  him- 
self about  six  inches  behind  the  new  line,  which  he  ought  never  to 
cross;  he  will  then  move  up  steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches, 
the  legs  straight,  to  the  side  of  the  next  man  to  him  on  the  line,  so 
that,  without  throwing  the  head  or  the  shoulders  out  of  place,  he  may 
find  himself  in  the  exact  line  with  the  files  on  his  right,  and  touching 
elbows  Avitli  tlie  nearest  one  without  ojjening  out  his  arms. 

The  instructor,  seeing  the  line  properly  dressed,  commands  : 

Front. 

At  which  the  men  will  turn  their  eye.s  to  the  front,  and  remain  firm. 
Alignments  to  (he  left  will  be  conducted  on  the  same  principles. 

202.  When  the  men  shall  have  learned  to  dress  correctly,  man  by 
man,  without  deranging  the  head  or  shoulders,  and  without  jostling, 
the  instructor  will  cause  the  entire  squad  to  dress  at  once  by  the  com- 
mand : 

Squad  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

At  this  the  squad,  except  the  two  men  placed  in  advance  as  a  basis 
of  alignment,  will  move  up  in  quick  time,  and  place  themselves  on  the 
new  line  according  to  the  principles  just  laid  down. 

The  instructor  will  superintend  the  dressing,  and  when  he  sees  the 
greater  number  of  the  squad  in  their  proper  j^laces,  will  command  : 

Front. 

The  instructor  may  afterward  order  this  or  that  file  forward  or  bac/i, 
designating  each  man  b}'^  his  number  (or  name).  The  file  or  fil^s  ;]esig- 
nated,  will  slightly  turu  the  head  toward  the  rii/ht  (or  left),  to  judge 
how  much  they  ought  to  move  up  or  back,  place  themselves  on  the  line 
by  moving  an  inch  or  two  at  a  time,  and  then  turn  e3^es  to  the  front, 
without  waiting  for  any  command  from  the  instructor. 

203.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles, 
the  men  stepping  back  a  little  beyond  the  line,  and  then  dressing  up 
according  to  the  principles  laid  down  in  No.  201 ;  the  commands  of  the 
instructor  are : 

Right  (or  left)  backward — Dress. 
7o  march  to  the  front. 

204.  The  squad  being  correctly  aligned,  and  ths  instructor  wishing 
to  march  it  to  the  front,  he  will  place  a  well-instructed  man  on  the 

9 


98  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

right  or  left,  according  to  the  side  on  which  he  wishes  the  guide  to  be, 
and  command  : 

1.   Squad,  forward.     2.   Guide  right  (or  lefC).     3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  squad  will  step  off  smartly  with  the  left 
foot,  and  will  take  up  quick  time,  unless  otherwise  specially  ordered. 
This  rtde  is  general.  The  guide  will  take  care  to  march  straight  to  the 
front,  keeping  his  shoulders  always  square  with  that  line.  The  men 
will  touch  elbows  lightly  on  the  side  toward  the  guide,  maintaining  the 
shoulders  square  to  the  front,  no  matter  on  which  side  the  guide  may  be; 
they  should  be  careful  not  to  open  out  the  left  elbow,  or  the  right  arm; 
that  they  j'ield  to  pressure  coming  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and 
resist  that  coming  from  the  side  opposite;  that  they  recover,  by  insen- 
sible degrees,  the  touch  of  the  elbow,  if  lost;  and  if  any  files  are 
before  or  behind  the  line,  that  they  correct  themselves  by  shortening 
or  lengthening  the  step  by  almost  insensible  degrees.  It  is  all  impor- 
tant that  the  closest  attention  should  be  paid  to  each  one  of  the  above 
directions,  otherwise  the  men  cannot  attain  proficiency,  and  when  they 
are  advanced  to  the  company  drill,  it  will  be  impossible  to  secure 
promptness  or  accuracy  in  the  manoeuvres. 

205.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  principles  of  the  direct 
march,  the  instructor  will  exercise  them  in  marching  obliquely.  The 
squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  man  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  right 
(or  left),  and  will  then  march  straight  forward  in  the  new  direction. 
As  the  men  no  longer  touch  elbows,  they  will  glance  along  the  nearest 
files,  toward  the  side  to  which  they  are  obliquing,  and  will  regulate 
their  steps  so  that  the  right  (or  left)  shoulder  shall  always  be  behind 
the  left  (or  right)  shoulder  of  their  next  neighbor  on  the  right  (or  left), 
and  that  his  head  shall  conceal  the  heads  of  the  other  men  on  the  right 
(or  left).  The  men  should  be  careful  to  preserve  the  same  length  of 
pace,  and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity.  The  guides  must  always  be  on 
the  flank  toward  which  the  oblique  takes  place. 

The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  direct  march,  will  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  man  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  left 
(or  right),  and  all  will  march  straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the 
principles  laid  down  for  marching  to  the  front. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    SOLDIER.  99 


To  march  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time. 

206.  Instruction  in  the  principles  of  this  step  is  recommended  for  all 
infantry  troops ;  it  may  he  omitted  for  infantry  of  the  line,  hut  in  no 
other  case ;  nothing  but  the  imperative  necessity  for  giving  all  of  the 
time  at  the  disposal  of  the  insti'uctor  to  instruction  in  the  principles 
of  the  quick  step  and  to  the  manoeuvres,  should  prevent  even  infantry 
of  the  line  from  being  thoroughly  instructed  in  the  principles  of  this 
step. 

The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  when  either  foot  is  com- 
ing to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  step  off  in  double  quick  time.  The 
men  should  be  careful  to  follow  the  rules  already  laid  down  for  the 
march  in  the  double  quick  step,  and  to  preserve  the  alignment. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squ^d  to  resume  the  quick  step,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  which  should  be  given  when  either  foot  is 
coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  retake  the  step  in  quick  time. 

If  the  squad  is  at  a  halt,  and  the  instructor  wishes  to  march  at  the 
double  quick  step,  he  commands  : 

1.  S quad ^  forward.     2.  Guide  right  (or  left).     3.  Double  quick. 

4.  March. 

The  squad  being  on  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  instructor 
will  occasionally  cause  it  to  mark  time;  the  men  will  then  mark  double 
quick  time  without  altering  the  cadence.  He  will  also  cause  them  to 
pass  from  the  direct  to  the  oblique  march,  and  the  reverse,  conforming 
to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  oblique  march. 

In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will  always  carry  their 
pieces  on  the  riffht  shoulder,  or  at  a  trail.      This  rule  is  general. 

If  the  instructor  wishes  the  pieces  carried  at  a  trail,  he  will  give  the 
command  trail  (trnis,  before  the  command  double  quick.  If,  on  the  con- 
trary, this  command  is  not  given,  the  men  will  shift  their  pieces  to  the 
right  shoulder  at  the  command  double  quick.  In  either  case,  at  the 
command  halt,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  position  of 
ahoiddered  arms.      Thin  rule  is  general. 


100         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


To  face  about  in  marching. 

207.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick,  or  double  quick  time,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.  Squad,  right  about.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  which  should  be  given  at  the  instant  the 
right  foot  touches  the  ground,  the  soldier  will  complete  the  next  pace 
with  the  left  foot,  then  turning  to  the  right  about  on  both  heels,  will 
step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

To  march  by  the  Jlank. 

208.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor 
will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  right — Face.     2.  Forward.     3.  March. 

At  the  command /ace,  the  squad  will  face  to  the  right;  the  even  num- 
bered men,  after  falling  to  the  right,  will  step  quickly  to  the  right  side 
of  the  odd  numbered  men,  the  latter  standing  fast,  so  that  when  the 
movement  is  executed,  the  men  will  be  formed  into  files  of  two  men 
abreast,  or  doubled. 

At  the  command  march,  the  squad  will  step  off  smartly  with  the  left 
foot;  the  files  keeping  their  dress,  and  preserving  their  intervals. 

The  march  by  the  left  flank  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands, 
substituting  the  words  left  for  right,  and  by  inverse  means;  in  this  case, 
the  even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  left,  will  stand  fast,  and  the 
odd  numbered  will  place  themselves  on  their  left. 

When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  halt  the  squad,  marching  by  the 
flank,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

At  the  second  command  the  rank  will  halt,  and  afterward  no  man 
will  stir,  although  he  may  have  lost  his  distance.  This  prohibition 
is  necessary,  to  habituate  the  men  to  a  constant  attention  to  their  dis- 
tances. 

At  the  command  front,  each  man  will  front  by  facing  to  the  left,  if 
marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  by  a  face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by 
the  left  flank.  The  rear  rank  men  will  move  quickly  into  their  places, 
so  as  to  form  the  squad  into  one  rank  again. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    SOLDIER.  101 

209.  The  squad  bciug  on  the  inarch  by  the  flank,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  change  direction  bj'  commanding: 

1.  By  file  left  for  right).     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march.,  the  first  file  will  change  direction  to  the  left 
(or  right)  in  describing  a  small  arc  of  a  circle,  and  will  then  marcli 
straight  forward;  the  two  men  of  this  file,  in  wheeling,  will  keep  up 
the  touch  of  the  elbows,  and  the  man  on  the  side  to  which  the  wheel 
is  made,  will  shorten  the  first  three  or  four  steps.  Each  file  will  como 
successively  to  the  wheel  on  the  same  spot  where  that  which  preceded 
it  wheeled. 

210.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to  face  by  the  right  or 
left  flank  in  marching,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command : 

1.  Squad,  hy  the  right  (or  left)  Jianlc.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  a  little  before  either  foot 
comes  to  the  ground,  the  men  will  turn  the  body,  plant  the  foot  that 
is  raised  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot  without 
altering  the  cadence  of  the  step.  AVheu  the  squad  faces  to  the  front  or 
rear  in  marching,  the  men  who  find  themselves  in  rear  step  to  the  right 
or  left  so  as  to  form  a  single  rank,  each  man  in  his  place  as  in  the  be- 
ginning; this  is  called  the  xindouhliug  of  files. 

If,  when  the  squad  is  marching  to  the  front  or  rear,  the  instructor 
causes  it  to  march  by  a  flank,  the  files  will  double;  when  the  squad  is  on 
the  march  to  the  front,  and  is  faced  by  the  right  flank,  the  even  num- 
bers will  step  up  to  the  right  of  the  odd  ones,  as  in  the  first  instance  in 
facing  from  a  halt;  when  it  is  marched  by  the  left  flank,  the  odd  num- 
bers should  double  on  the  left  of  the  even :  if  the  squad  is  marching  to 
the  rear  when  it  is  faced  by  the  right  flank,  the  odd  will  double  on  the 
even  as  in  the  last  case,  but  if  faced  by  the  left  flank  the  even  will 
double  to  the  right  of  the  odd  as4n  the  first  case. 

The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  by  a  flank  Avithout  doubling 
files ;  for  this  purpose  he  commands  : 

In  one  rank,  right — Face. 

In  marching  at  the  double  quick,  however,  the  files  will  always  be 
doubled. 

General  principles  of  wheelings. 

211.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds;  from  a  halt,  or  on  fixed  pivots, 
an'l  on  the  march,  or  on  a  movable  pivot. 

In  wheelings  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only   turns  in  his  place, 


102         MANUAL    rOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

without  advancing  or  receding.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot- 
man  takes  steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad  is 
marching  in  quick  or  double  quick  time,  so  as  to  clear  the  wheeling 
point,  which  is  necessary  in  order  that,  in  a  column  composed  of  sec- 
tions, platoons,  or  companies,  the  distances  between  the  different  parts 
of  it  shall  not  be  lost,  as  will  be  more  fully  explained  in  the  school  of 
the  company. 

The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  a  full  pace  of  twenty-eight, 
or  thirty-three  inches,  according  to  whether  the  time  is  quick  or  double 
quick. 

Wheeling  from  a  halt  or  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

212.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  place  a  well-in- 
structed man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to  conduct  it,  and  command : 

1.  By  squad,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  viarcli,  the  squad  will  step  off  with  the  left  foot, 
turning  the  head  at  the  same  time  a  little  to  the  left,  the  eyes  on  the 
line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  to  their  left;  the  pivot-man  will  merely 
mark  time,  gradually  turning  his  body,  in  order  to  conform  himself  to 
the  movements  of  the  marching  flank  ,•  the  man  who  conducts  this 
flank  will  take  steps  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  from  the  first  step 
advance  the  left  shoulder  a  little,  cast  his  eyes  from  time  to  time  along 
the  rank,  and  feel  constantly,  but  lightly,  the  elbow  of  the  next  mau 
on  his  right,  but  never  push  him.  The  other  man  will  feel  lightly  the 
elbow  of  the  next  man  to  his  right,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the 
left,  and  yield  to  any  coming,  from  the  right ;  each  man  will  conform 
himself  to  the  march  of  the  men  on  the  left,  shortening  his  step  more 
and  more  as  he  is  nearer  the  right,  or  pivot. 

The  instructor  will  make  the  squad  wheel  round  the  circle  once  or 
twice  before  halting,  in  order  to  cause  the  principles  to  be  better  under- 
stood, and  he  will  be  watchful  that  the  centre  does  not  break  or  get  too 
far  in  advance. 

He  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  arrest  the  wheel,  he  commands  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command  the  squad  will  halt,  and  no  man  stir.  The 
instructor  going  to  the  left  (or  right,  if  the  wheel  has  been  to  the  left) 
flank,  will  place  the  two  outer  men  of  that  flank  in  the  direction  he 
may  wish  to  give  to  the  squad,  without  however  displacing  the  pivot. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER.  103 

who  will  conform  the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  this  direction.  The  in- 
structor will  take  care  to  have  between  these  two  men  and  thejpivot 
only  the  space  necessary  to  contain  the  other  men.  He  will  then  com- 
mand : 

Left  (or  righi) — Dress. 

At  this  the  squad  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment  of  the  men  fixed 
as  the  bases,  in  conformity  with  the  principles  laid  down  for  the  align- 
ments.    As  soon  as  the  men  are  aligned,  the  instructor  commands : 

Front. 

Wheeling  in  marching,  or  on  a  movable  pivot. 

213.  When  the  men  have  been  brought  to  execute  the  wheel  from  a 
halt  properly,  they  will  be  taught  the  wheel  in  marching. 

For  this  end,  the  squad  being  on  the  march,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  flank  opposite  the  guide,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March. 

The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  squad  is  four  paces  from 
the  wheeling  point. 

At  the  command  march  the  wheel  will  be  executed  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  from  a  halt,  except  that  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  remain  to- 
ward the  left  or  marching  flank,  instead  of  the  side  of  the  actual 
pivot;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  merely  turning  in  his  place,  will 
conform  himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly 
the  elbow  of  the  next  man,  take  steps  of  full  nine  inches,  and  thus 
gain  ground  forward  so  as  to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel.  The  middle 
of  the  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As  soon  as  the  movement 
shall  commence,  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  will  cast  his 
eyes  on  the  ground  over  which  he  will  have  to  pass. 

The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  command  ; 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

The  command  forward  will  be  given  four  paces  before  the  wheel  is 
complete. 

At  the  command  march,  which  will  begin  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is 
complete,  the  man  who  conducts  the  wheel  will  march  straight  for- 
ward; the  pivot  man  a^id  all  the  rest  of  the  squad  will  retake  the  step 
of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring  the  head  direct  to  the  front. 


104         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    IMILITIA. 


Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

214.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  in  marching, 
will  be  executed  as  follows  :  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  turn.     2.  March. 

The  first  command  should  be  given  when  the  squad  is /o«r  paces  from 
the  turning  point. 

At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  the  rank 
ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face  to  the  left  (or  right)  in  marching, 
and  move  forward  in  the  new  direction  without  changing  the  pace. 
The  whole  squad  will  promptly  conform  to  the  new  direction  ,•  to  effect 
which,  each  man  will  advance  the  shoulder  opposite  the  guide,  take  the 
double  quick  step,  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  side  of  the  guide, 
place  himself  on  the  line  with  the  guide,  from  whom  he  will  take  the' 
step,  touch  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resume  the  direct  posi- 
tion of  the  head.  The  men  will  arrive  in  their  places  in  regular  suc- 
cession. 

215.  When  the  men  comprehend,  and  can  execute  the  various  wheels, 
etc.,  in  quick  time,  the  instructor  Avill  cause  them  to  be  repeated  in 
double  quick  time,  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to  same 
principles  as  in  quick  time,  except  that  the  command  double  quick  will 
precede  that  of  march.  In  wheeling  while  marching,  the  pivot  man 
will  take  steps  of  eleven  inches,  and  in  the  changes  of  direction  to  the 
side  of  the  guide,  the  men  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide  must  increase 
the  gait  in  order  to  bring  themselves  into  line. 

The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  men,  and  not  to  divide 
their  attention,  will  cause  them  to  execute  the  several  movements  of 
wheelings,  etc.,  first  without  arms,  and  next,  after  the  mechanism  be 
well  comprehended,  with  ai^ms. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  105 


Article     IV. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

MANNER  OF  FORMING  THE  COMPANY. 

216.  The  whole  company  being  assembled  on  its  parade  ground,  or 
in  the  rendezvous,  the  Jirst,  or  orderly  sergeant,  will  command: 

Fall  in — Company. 

At  this  command  the  cori)()rals  and  privates  will  form  in  one  rank 
faced  to  the  right,  and  in  the  order  of  height  from  right  to  left,  the 
tallest  man  on  the  right  (noAV  head  of  the  company),  the  next  tallest 
man  immediately  covering  the  first,  and  so  on  to  the  left  or  rear  of 
the  rank,  in  which  position  will  be  placed  the  shortest  man.  The 
other  sergeants  will  take  post  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  two  paces  to 
the  right  of  the  company,  and  assist  the  first  sergeant  in  forming  the 
company. 

When  the  men  have  their  places,  the  first  sergeant  will  command  : 

Front. 

The  second  sergeant,  who  is  the  left  guide  of  the  comi)any,  Avill  now 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  company,  and  the  orderly  sergeant  will 
promptly  command: 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  Lefl — Face.     8.  March. 

At  the  command  left  face,  the  whole  company  will  face  to  the  left, 
except  the  guide  and  man  on  the  left,  who  stand  fast. 

At  the  command  march,  the  whole  of  the  men  who  have  faced  to  the 
left,  will  step  off  together;  the  second  man,  counting  from  the  left,  will 
place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  behind  the  man  next  to  the  guide,  and 
face  to  the  front ;  the  two  following  men  will,  in  like  manner,  on  clos- 
ing up,  form  the  next  file,  the  third  man  in  the  front,  and  the  fourth  in 
the  rear  rank  behind  him,  and  all  the  other  men  will  come  successively 
to  form  files,  two  deep,  to  the  right  of  those  already  formed.* 

*  When  the  company  is  in  good  discipline,  the  files  may  be  formed  in  two  ranks 
at  once,  each  man  liaving  his  proper  number  in  the  company  depending  upon  his 
lieight,  and  being  able  to  take  his  appropriate  place  without  creating  cunfusion. 


106         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  officers  will  now  take'their  posts  as  prescribed  in  No.  8  ;  if  the 
captaiu  has  to  discharge  the  duties  of  instructor,  the  first  lieutenant 
will  take  his  place  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  the  second  lieutenant 
replacing  the  first  behind  the  fourth  section. 

The  instructor  will  then  cause  the  files  to  be  numbered,  and  for  this 
purpose  will  command: 

In  each  rank — count  Twos. 

At  this  command  the  men  count  in  each  rank  from  right  to  left,  pro- 
nouncing in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same  tone,  without  hurry 
and  without  turning  the  head,  one,  two,  according  to  the  place  each  one 
occupies.  He  will  also  cause  the  company  to  be  divided  into  platoons 
and  sections,  taking  care  that  the  first  platoon  is  always  composed  of 
an  even  number  of  files. 

To  open  t'anks. 

217.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranks  and  file-closers 
well  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  the  ranks  to  be" 
opened,  he  will  direct  the  left  guide  to  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank,  which  being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Company.     2.  Shoulder — Arms. 

3.   To  the  rear,  open  order. 

At  the  last  command,  the  covering  sergeant  (or  orderly  sergeant), 
and  the  left  guide,  will  step  off  smartly  to  the  rear,  four  paces  of  twenty- 
eight  inches  from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark  the  position  for  the 
rear  rank.  They  will  judge  this  distance  by  the  eye  without  counting 
the  stcjas. 

The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same  time  on  the  right  flank, 
in  order  to  observe  if  these  two  non-commissioned  ofiicers  ai'e  on  a  line 
parallel  to  the  front  rank ;  and,  if  necessary,  to  correct  their  positions, 
which,  being  executed,  he  will  command : 

4.  March. 

At  this  command  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast.  The  rear  rank  will 
step  to  the  rear  without  counting  the  steps,  and  will  place  themselves 
on  the  alignment  marked  for  this  rank,  each  man  stepping  slightly 
behind  the  line,  and  then  dressing  forward  as  in  the  backward  dress. 
The  covering  sergeant  will  dress  the  rear  rank  on  the  left  guide  placed 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   COMPANY.  107 

to   mark   the   left   of  this   rank.     The   instructor   seeing   the  rear  rank 
aligned,  will  command  : 

5,  Front. 

At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  will  return 
to  his  place  as  a  file-closer. 

Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

218.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in  the  first  exercises, 
align   the   ranks,  man  by  man,  the  better  to  inculcate  the  principles. 
To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on  the  right  or  left  of  each 
rank  to  march  two  or  three  paces  forward,  and,  after  having    aligned  ■ 
them,  command : 

By  fie  ^  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

At  this,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up  successively  on  the 
alignment,  each  man  being  preceded  by  his  neighbor  in  the  same  rank, 
toward  the  basis,  by  two  paces,  and  having  correctly  aligned  himself, 
will  cast  his  eyes  to  the  front. 

219.  Successive  alignments  having  habituated  the  soldier  to  dress 
correctl}',  the  instructor  Avill  cause  the  ranks  to  align  themselves  at 
once,  forward  and  backward,  sometimes  in  a  direction  parallel,  and 
sometimes  in  one  oblique  to  the  original  direction,  giving,  in  each  case, 
two  or  four  men  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment  to  each  rank.  To 
effect  which  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (oY  left) — Dress.     2.  Front; 

or, 
1.  Right  (or  left)  backward — Dress.     2.  Front. 

In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank 
will  not  seek  to  cover  their  file-leaders,  as  the  sole  object  of  the  exer- 
cise is  to  teach  them  to  align  themselves  correctly  in  their  respective 
ranks,  in  the  different  directions. 

In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will  superintend  the  front 
rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the  rear  rank.  For  this  purpose  they 
will  place  themselves  on  the  side  by  which  the  ranks  are  dressed. 

In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform  the  line  of  their  shoul- 
ders to  the  new  direction  of  their  ranks,  and  will  place  themselves  on 
the  alignment  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
according  as  the  new  direction  shall  be  in  front  or  rear  of  the  original 
one.     ' 


108  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 

To  close  ranks. 

220.  The  instructor  -will  command  : 

1.   Close  order.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  in  quick  time, 
each  man  directino;  himself  on  his  file-leader. 

Alignments  m  closed  ranks. 

221.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed 
parallel  and  oblique  alignments  by  the  right  and  left,  forward  and 
backAvard,  observing  to  place  always  two  or  four  files  as  a  basis  of 
alignment.  He  will  give  the  same  commands  prescribed  for  opened 
ranks. 

In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will  superintend  the  front 
rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the  rear  rank.  They  will  habituate 
themselves  to  judge  the  alignment  by  the  lines  of  the  eyes  and  shoul- 
ders, in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye  along  the  front  and  rear  of  the 
ranks. 

The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greater  number  of  the  front 
rank  aligned,  he  will  command  Front,  and  rectify  afterward,  if  neces- 
sary, the  alignment  of  the  other  men  by  ordering  fliis  or  that  file  for- 
ward  or  back,  designating  each  bj^  its  number.  The  rear  rank  will 
conform  to  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superintended  by  the  cov- 
ering sergeant. 

The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the 
flank  to  verify  their  alignment.  He  will  also  see  that  each  rear  rank 
man  covers  accurately  his  file-leader. 

In  all  alignments,  the  file-closers  will  preserve  the  distance  of  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

The  alignments  being  ended  the  instructor  will  exercise  the  company 
at  the  manual,  and  finish  with  stacking  arms  as  follows: 

To  Stack  Aj-ms. 

222.  The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

Stack — Arms. 

At  this  command,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even  numbered  file 
will  pass  his  piece  before  him,  seizing  it  with  the  left  hand  above  the 
middle  baud,  and  place  the  butt  behind  and  near  the  right  foot  of 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  109 

the  man  next  on  the  left,  the  barrel  turned  to  the  front.  At  the  same 
time  the  front  rank  man  of  every  odd  numbered  file  will  pass  his  piece 
before  him,  seizing  it  with  the  left  hand  below  the  middle  band,  and 
hand  it  to  the  man  next  on  the  left ;  the  latter  will  receive  it  with  the 
right  hand  two  inches  above  the  middle  band,  throw  the  butt  about 
thirty-two  inches  to  the  front,  opposite  to  his  right  shoulder,  incline 
the  muzzle  toward  him,  and  lock  the  shanks  of  the  two  bayonets;  the 
lock  of  this  second  piece  toward  the  right,  and  its  shank  above  that  of 
the  first  piece.  The  rear  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  project  his 
bayonet  forward,  and  introduce  it  (using  both  hands)  between  and 
under  the  shanks  of  the  two  other  bayonets.  He  will  then  abandon 
the  piece  to  his  file-leader,  who  will  receive  it  with  the  right  hand  under 
the  middle  band,  bring  the  butt  to  the  front,  holding  up  his  own  piece 
<-  and  the  stack  with  the  left  hand,  and  place  the  butt  of  this  third  piece 
between  the  feet  of  the  man  next  on  the  right,  the  S  plate  to  the  rear. 
The  stack  thus  formed,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd  file  will  pass 
his  piece  into  his  left  hand,  the  barrel  turned  to  the  front,  and,  sloping 
the  bayonet  forward,  rest  it  on  the  stack. 

223.  If  the  company  be  armed  with  rijies,  or  any  piece  without  the 
bayonet,  arms  will  be  stacked  by  the  same  commands,  and  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner  :  At  the  command  stuck  arms,  the  front  rank   man  ».f 
every  even  numbered  file  will  pass  his  piece  before  him,  seizing  it  v.-,th 
the  left  hand  near  the  upper  band;  will  place  the  butt  a  little  in  a«l- 
vauce  of  his  left  toe,  the  barrel  turned  toward  the  body,  and  draw  the 
rammer   slightly   from   its   place;    the   front  rank   man   of  every  odd 
numbered  file  will  also  draw  the  rammer  slightly,  and  pass  his  piece 
to  the  man  next  on  his  left,  who  will  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  near 
the  upper  band,  and  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance  of  the  right  toe 
of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  the  barrel  turned   to  the  front;  he  will 
then  cross  the  rammers  of  the  two  pieces,  the  rammer  of  the  piece  of 
the  odd  numbered  man  being  inside ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  even 
file  will  also   draAV  his  rammer,  lean   his  piece  forward,  the  lock-plate 
downward,   advance   the   right  foot  about  six   inches,   and  insert  the 
rammer  between  the  rammer  and  barr(^  of  the  piece  of  his  front  rank 
man;  with  his  left  hand  he  will   place  the  butt  of  his  piece  on  the 
ground,  thirty-two  inches  in  rear  of,  and  perpendicular  to,  the  front 
rank,  bringing  back  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left;  the  front 
rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  at  the  same  time  lean  the  stack  to  the 
rear,  quit  it  with  his  right  hand,  and  force  all  the  rammers  down. 
The  stack  being  thus  formed,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd  file  will 
pass  his  piece  into  his  left  hand,  the  l)arrel  to  the  front,  and  inclining 
it  forward,  will  rest  it  on  the  stack. 


110  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

224.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  position  of  the  soldier 
without  arms,  the  instrvictor  Avill  command : 

1.  Break  ranks.     2.  March. 
To  Resume  Arms. 

Both  ranks  being  re-formed  in  rear  of  their  stacks,  the  instructor 
will  command  : 

Take — Arms. 

At  this  command,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd  numbered  file 
will  withdraw  his  piece  from  the  stack ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every 
even  file  will  seize  his  own  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  that  of  the 
man  on  his  right  with  his  right  hand,  both  above  the  lower  band ; 
the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file  will  seize  his  piece  with  the  right 
hand  below  the  lower  band;  these  two  men  will  raise  up  the  stock  to 
loosen  the  rammers  or  bayonets;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  odd  file 
will  facilitate  the  disengagement  of  the  rammers,  if  necessary,  by 
drawing  them  out  slightly  with  the  left  hand,  and  will  receive  his 
piece  from  the  hand  of  the  man  next  on  his  left ;  the  four  men  will 
retake  the  position  of  the  soldier  at  order  arms. 

The  firings. 
To  fire  hy  company. 

225.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  company  to  be  exe- 
cuted, will  command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  company.     2.   Commence  firing. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly  place  himself  op- 
posite the  centre  of  his  company,  and  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of 
file-closers :  the  covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  that  line,  and  place 
himself  opposite  to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  yeneral,  for  both  the  cap- 
tain and  covering  sergeant,  in  aff  the  different  firings. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add  : 

1.  Company.     2.  Ready.     3.  Aim.     4.   Fire.     5.  Load. 

At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load  their  pieces,  and  then  take 
the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the  firing,  by  the  com- 
mands : 

1.  Company.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  Ill 

The  firing  will  be  thus  continued  until  the  signal  to  cease  firing  is 
sounded. 

The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  to  the  right  or 
left,  simply  observing  to  pronounce  right  (or  left)  oblique,  before  the 
command  aim. 

The  fire  hy  file. 

226.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  file  to  be  executed, 
will  command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  file.     2.   Company.    3.  Ready.    4.   Commence  firing. 

The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier. 

The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of  the  company;  the 
next  file  will  take  aim  at  the  instant  the  first  brings  down  pieces  to 
reload,  and  so  on  to  the  left ;  but  this  progression  will  only  be  observed 
in  the  first  discharge,  after  which  each  man  will  reload  and  fire  with- 
out regulating  himself  by  others,  conforming  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

The  fire  hy  rank. 

227.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be  executed,  will 
command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  rank.    2.  Company.    3.  Ready.    4.  Rear  rank — Aim. 
5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  executed  as  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier. 

When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in  the  rear  rank  at  a 
ready,  he  will  command  : 

%l.  Front  rank.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

The  firing  will  be  continued  thus,  by  alternate  ranks,  until  the  signal 
is  given  to  cease  firing. 

228.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  to  the  right 
and  left,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  oblique  fire. 

The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  whether  by  company,  by 
file,  or  by  rank,  by  sounding  the  signal  to  cease  Jiriny;  at  which  signal 
the  men  will  cease  to  fire.  If  they  have  fired,  they  will  load  their 
pieces  and  bring  them  to  a  shoulder ;  if  at  the  position  of  ready,  they 


112  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MIJ.ITIA. 

will  half-cock  and  shoulder  arms.     If  in  the  position  of  aim,  they  will 
bring  down  their  pieces,  half-cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 

229.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  alwaj^s  followed  by  a  bugle 
note,  or  tap  of  the  drum  ;  at  which  sound  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in  line,  and  will  rectify,  if 
necessary,  the  alignment  of  the  ranks. 

The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  frequently  used  against  an 
enemy,  it  is  highly  important  that  it  be  rendered  perfectly  familiar  to 
the  troops.  The  instructor  will,  therefore,  give  it  almost  exclusive 
preference,  and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim  with  care,  and  always, 
if  possible,  at  some  particular  object.  As  it  is  of  the  utmost  im- 
portance that  the  men  should  aim  with  precision  in  battle,  this 
principle  will  be  rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises  for  purposes  of 
instruction. 

Tojire  hy  the  rear  rank. 

230.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be  executed  to  the 
rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.     To  effect  this,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Face  hy  the  rear  rank.     2.   Company.     3.  About — Face. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out  and  place  himself 
near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of  his  company;  the  covering  ser- 
geant and  file-closers  will  pass  quickly  through  the  captain's  interval, 
and  place  themselves  faced  to  the  rear,  the  covering  sergeant  a  pace 
behind  the  cajitain,  and  the  file-closers  two  paces  from  the  front 
rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line,  each  passing  behind  the  covering 
sergeant. 

At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  last 
file-closer  shall  have  passed  through  the  interval,  the  company  will 
face  about;  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  his  interval  in  the  rear 
rank,  now  become  the  front,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him 
in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by  company,  both  direct  and  obli^ie.  the 
fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed. The  captain,  covering  sergeant,  and  the  men  will  conform 
themselves,  in  like  manner,  to  what  is  prescribed. 

The  fire  by  file  Avill  commence  on  the  left  of  the  company,  now 
become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by  rank  the  firing  will  commence 
with  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Face  hv  the  front  rank.     2=  Company.     3.  About — Face. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  113 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering  sergeant  and  file-closers 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  above. 

At  the  third  command,  the  company  having  faced  about,  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant  will  resume  their  places  in  line. 

In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  on  the  men  the-importance 
of  aiming  always  at  some  particular  object,  and  of  holding  the  piece 
as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain  to  make  a  short  pause 
between  the  commands  aim  and  fire,  to  give  the  men  time  to  aim  with 
accuracy. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

231.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  correctly  aligned, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  exercise  it  in  marching  by  the  front, 
he  will  assure  himself  that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  are  perfectly  in  the  direction  of  tlieir  respective  ranks,  and 
that  the  sergeant  accurately  covers  the  cap  :ain  ;  the  instructor  will 
then  place  himself  twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  them,  face 
to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  exactly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  line 
passing  between  their  heels. 

The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  directing  file,  will  command : 

1.   Company,  forward. 

At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated,  will  move  six  paces  in 
advance  of  the  captain  :  the  instructor,  from  the  position  prescribed, 
will  correctly  align  this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation  of  the  directing 
file. 

This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be  charged  with  the  direction, 
will,  the  moment  his  position  is  assured,  take  two  points  on  the  ground 
in  the  straight  line  which  would  pass  between  his  own  and  the  heels  of 
the  instructor. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will  step  aside,  and 
command  : 

2.  March. 

At  this,  the  company  will  step  ofiF  with  life.  The  directing  sergeant 
will  observe,  with  the  greatest  precision,  the  length  and  cadence 
of  the  step,  marching  on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen ;  he  will 
take  in  succession,  and  always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the  point 
nearest  to  him,  new  points  in  advance,  exactly  in  the  same  line  with 
the  first  two,  and  at  the  distance  of  some  fifteen  or  twenty  paces 
from  each  other.  The  captain  will  march  steadily  in  the  trace  of 
10 


114         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  directing  sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces  from  him ;  the 
men  will  each  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the 
elbow  of  his  neighbor  on  the  side  of  direction,  and  conform  himself 
to  the  principles  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier,  for  the  march  by 
the  front. 

The  man  next  to  the  captain  will  take  special  care  not  to  pass  him ; 
to  this  end,  he  will  keep  the  line  of  his  shoulders  a  little  in  the  rear, 
but  in  the  same  direction  with  those  of  the  captain. 

The  file-closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  dis*^ance  of  two  paces 
behind  the  rear  rank. 

If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will  command: 

2^0  the — Step. 

At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  toward  the  directing  ser- 
geant, retake  the  step  from  him,  and  again  direct  their  eyes  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  will  cause  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  to  be 
posted  sometimes  on  the  right,  and  sometimes  oii  the  left  of  the 
company. 

The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having  the  greatest  influence  on 
the  march  of  the  company,  he  will  be  selected  for  the  precision  of  his 
step,  his  habit  of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given 
line  of  direction,  and  of  prolonging  that  line  without  variation. 


To  halt  the  company^  mar^ching  in  line  of  battle.,  and  to  align  it. 

The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company,  will  command: 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt ;  the  directing 
sergeant  will  remain  in  advance,  unless  ordered  to  return  to  the  line 
of  file-closers.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may 
advance  the  first  three  or  four  files  on  the  side  of  direction,  and 
align  the  company  on  that  basis,  or  he  may  confine  himself  to  causing 
the  alignment  to  be  rectified.  In  this  last  case,  he  will  command  : 
Captain,  rectify  the  alignment.  The  captain  will  direct  the  covering 
sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear  rank,  when  each,  glancing  his  eyes 
along  his  rank,  will  promptly  rectify  it,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    COMPANY.  115 


Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

232.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the  oblique  step. 
The  men  will  accurately  observe  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier.  The  rear  rank  men  will  preserve  their  dis- 
tances, and  march  in  rear  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  (or  left)  of 
their  habitual  file-leaders. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  march  to  be  resumed,  he  will 
command : 

1.    Forward.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  resume  the  direct  march. 
The  instructor  will  move  briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain, 
and  facing  the  company,  will  place  himself  exactly  in  the  prolongation 
of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant;  and  then,  by  a  sign,  will  move 
the  directing  sergeant  on  the  same  line,  if  he  be  not  already  on  it;  the 
latter  will  immediately  take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  him- 
self and  the  instructor,  and  as  he  advances,  will  take  new  points  of 
direction. 

In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  having  the  touch  of  elbows, 
the  guide  will  always  be  on  the  side  toAvard  which  the  oblique  is 
made,  without  any  indication  to  that  effect  being  given ;  and  when 
the  direct  march  is  resumed,  the  guide  will  be,  equally  without  indica- 
tion, on  the  side  where  it  Avas  previous  to  the  oblique. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  back  step. 

233.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march  and  in  quick  time,  the 
instructor,  to  cause  it  to  mark  time,  will  command: 

1.  Mark  time.     2.  March. 

To  resume  the  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Fonvard.     2.  March. 

To  cause  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 


116         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  either  foot  is 
coming  to  the  ground. 

To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  either  foot  is  JH 
coming  to  the  ground. 

The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  march  in 
the  back  step ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command : 

1.   Company,  hackivard.     2.  Marcpi. 

The  back  step  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  but  the  use  of  it  being  rare,  the  instructor 
will  not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or  twenty  steps  to  be  taken  in  success- 
ion, and  to  that  extent  but  seldom. 

The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  company  in  marching  in 
double  quick  time  till  the  men  are  well  established  in  the  length  and 
swiftness  of  the  pace  in  quick  time  ;  he  will  then  endeavor  to  render 
the  march  of  165  steps  in  the  minute  equally  easy  and  familiar,  and 
also  cause  them  to  observe  the  same  erectness  of  body  and  composure 
of  mind,  as  if  marching  in  quick  time. 


To  march  in  retreat. 

234.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  command: 

1.   Company.     2.  About — Face. 

The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instructor  will  place  him- 
self in  front  of  the  directing  file. 

The  instructor,  being  correctly  established  on  the  prolongation  of 
the  directing  file,  will  command : 

3.   Company,  forward. 

At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed. No.  231,  with  this  difi"ercnce — he  will  place  himself  six  paces  in 
front  of  the  line  of  file-closers,  now  leading. 

The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of  file-closers,  opposite 
to  his  interval,  and  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
become  the  front. 

This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the  instructor  will  command : 

4.  March. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  117 

At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain,  and  the  men,  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  231. 

The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  marching  in  retreat,  all  that 
is  prescribed  for  marching  in  advance ;  the  commands  and  the  means 
of  execution  will  be  the  same. 

The  instructor  having  halted  his  company,  Avill,  when  he  may  wish, 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  front.  The  captain,  the  covering  sergeant,  and 
the  directing  sergeant,  will  resume  their  habitual  places  in  line,  the 
moment  they  have  faced  about. 

2.35.  The  instructor  being  in  march  by  the  front  rank,  if  the  in- 
structor should  wish  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  cause  the  right 
about  to  be  executed  while  marching,  and  to  this  effect  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Company.     2.  Right  about.     3.  March. 

At  the  third  command,  the  company  will  pi-omptly  face  about,  and 
recommence  the  march  by  the  rear  rank. 

The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with  his  company,  and  will 
move  rapidly  six  paces  in  front  of  the  file-closers,  and  upon  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  guide.  The  instructor  will  place  him  in  the  proper  direc- 
tion by  the  means  prescribed.  The  captain,  the  covering  sergeant,  and 
the  men,  will  conform  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  march  in 
retreat. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company  to  march  by  the  front  rank, 
he  will  give  the  same  commands,  and  regulate  the  direction  of  the 
march  by  the  same  means. 

236.  The  instructor  will  cause  all  the  above  marches,  except  the 
backward  march,  to  be  executed  in  the  double  quick  time;  the  latter 
will  be  executed  only  in  quick  time.  He  will  give  the  same  commands, 
observing  to  add  dunhle  quick  before  the  comniiind  march. 

When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right  shoulder,  in  quick  time,  the 
distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  sixteen  inches.  Whenever,  there- 
fore, the  instructor  brings  the  company  from  a  shoulder  to  this  posi- 
tion, the  rear  rank  must  shorten  a  little  the  first  steps  in  order  to  gain 
the  prescribed  distance,  and  will  lengthen  the  steps,  on  the  contrary,  in 
order  to  close  up  when  the  pieces  are  again  brought  to  a  shoulder.  In 
marching  in  doable  quick  time,  the  di.stance  between  the  ranks  will  be 
twenty-six  inches,  and  the  pieces  will  be  carried  habitually  on  the  right 
shoulder. 

Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  at 
once  to  the  shoulder  at  the  command  halt.  The  rear  rank  will  close  to 
its  proper  distance.      These  rules  are  general. 


118         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


To  march  by  the  fiank. 

237.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  right  flank,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Compamj,  right — Face.     2.  Foricard.     3.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right,  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  the  cap- 
tain having  stepped  out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to  find  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  sergeant,  and  on  his  left;  the  two  ranks  will  form  to  the 
right  at  the  word,  the  rear  rank  will  step  off  one  pace  to  the  right,  then 
the  even  numbers  of  both  ranks  will  step  up  to  the  right  of  the  odd,  as 
directed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier ;  so  that  when  the  movement  is 
completed,  the  files  will  be  formed  of  four  men  aligned,  and  elbow  to 
elbow.     The  intervals  will  be  preserved. 

The  file-closers  will  also  move  by  side  step  to  the  right,  so  that  when 
the  ranks  are  formed,  they  will  be  two  paces  from  the  rearmost  rank. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  move  off  briskly  in  quick 
time ;  the  covering  sergeant  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  and  the 
captain  on  his  left,  will  march  straight  forward.  The  men  of  each 
file  will  march  abreast  of  their  respective  front  rank  men,  heads  direct 
to  the  front ;  the  file-closers  will  march  opposite  their  places  in  line  of 
battle. 

The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  left  flank  to  be  executed 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right ;  the  rear  rank  steps 
one  pace  to  the  left,  then  the  odd  files  of  both  ranks  take  their  places  to 
the  left  of  the  even  numbered. 

At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left,  the  left  guide  will  place 
himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank;  the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to 
the  left,  and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  this  guide ;  the  covering 
sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front  rank,  the  moment  the 
latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the  left. 

The  instructor  will  sometimes  exercise  the  company  in  facing  with- 
out doubling,  for  this  purpose  he  will  command  : 

1.   Company,  in  two  ranks,  right — 2.  Face. 

The  double  quick,  however,  will  never  be  executed  without  the  ranks 
being  doubled. 

To  change  direction  by  Jile. 
238.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and  either  in  march  or 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANYi  119 

at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  fcatise  it  to  wheel  by  file, 
he  will  command  : 

1*  By  Jile^  left  (oi*  right).     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  wheel;  if  to  the  side  of  the 
front  rank  man,  the  latter  will  take  care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to 
describe  a  short  arc  of  a  circle,  shortening  a  little  the  first  five  or  six 
steps,  in  order  to  give  time  to  the  fourth  man  of  this  file  to  conform 
himself  to  the  movement.  If  the  wheel  be  to  the  side  of  the  rear  rank, 
the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and 
the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself  to  the  movement  by  describing  a 
short  arc  of  a  circle  as  has  been  explained.  Each  file  will  come  to 
wheel  on  the  same  ground  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  executed  according  to  these 
principles,  in  order  that  the  distance  between  the  files  may  always 
be  preserved,  and  that  there  be  no  check  or  hindrance  at  the  wheeling 
point. 

To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  Jiank,  and  to  face  it  to  the 

front. 

239.  To  effect  these  objects,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  undoubled,  the  rear 
rank  Avill  close  to  its  proper  distance.  The  captain  and  covering  ser- 
geant, as  well  as  the  left  guide,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left  flank,  will 
return  to  their  habitual  places  in  line  at  the  instant  the  company  faces 
to  the  front. 

The  instructor  may  then  align  the  company  by  one  of  the  means 
prescribed. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank^  to  form  it  on  the  right 
(or  left^  ^y  fil<^  i>'>'io  line  of  battle. 

240.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

1.   On  the  right,  by  fie  into  line.     2.   March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  men  doubled  will  mark  time  ; 
the  captain    and   the   covering  sergeant  will  turn  to  the  right,  march 


120         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

straight  forward,  and  be  halted  by  the  instructor  when  they  shall  have 
passed  at  least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file-closers  ;  the  captain 
will  place  himself  correctly  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  will  direct  the 
alignment  as  the  men  of  the  front  rank  successively  arrive  ;  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  phxco  himself  behind  the  captain  at  the  distance  of 
the  rear  rankj  the  two  men  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will 
continue  to  march,  and  passing  beyond  the  covering  sergeant  and  the 
captain,  will  turn   to  the  right;    after  turning,  they  will  continue   to 
march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct  themselves  toward  the  line  of  battle, 
but  when  they  shall  arrive  at  two  paces  from  this  line,  the  even  number 
will  shorten  the  step  so  that  the  odd  number  may  precede  him  on  the 
line,  the  odd  number  placing  himself  by  the  side  and  on  the  left  of  the 
captain  ;  the  even  number  will  afterward  oblique  to  the  left,  and  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  odd  number;  the  next  two  men  of  the  front 
rank  doubled,  will  pass  in  the  same  manner  behind  the  two  first,  turn 
then  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves,  according  to  the  means  just 
explained,  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of  the  two  men  already  estab- 
lished on  the  line;  the  remaining  files  of  this  rank  will  follow  in  suc- 
cession, and  be  formed  to  the  left  in  the  same  manner.     The  rear  rank 
doubled  will  execute   the  movement  in  the  manner  already  explained 
for  the  front  rank,  taking  care  not  to  commence  the  movement  until 
four  men  of  the  front  rank  are  established  on  the  line  of  battle ;  the 
rear  rank  men,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  accurately  their 
file-leaders. 

If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  form  by  file  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication 
left  for  right.  In  this  case,  the  odd  numbers  will  shorten  the  step,  so 
that  the  even  numbers  may  precede  them  on  the  line.  The  captain, 
placed  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  left  guide,  will  return  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  by  order  of  the  instructor,  after  the  com- 
pany shall  be  formed  and  aligned. 

To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend  the  mechanism  of  this 
movement,  the  instructor  will  at  first  cause  it  to  be  executed  separately 
by  each  rank  doubled,  and  afterward  by  the  two  ranks  united  and 
doubled. 


The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  hy  company, 
or  by  platoon,  into  line,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left 
in  marching. 

211.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  right  flank,  the  instructor 


SCHOOL    OF    THK    COMPANY.  121 

will  order  the  captain  to  form  it  into  Hue;  the  captain  will  iinmediately 
coinraand  : 

1.  Bjj  companj/,  info  line.     2.   March. 

At  the  commaud  march,  the  covering  sergeant  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  :  the  men  will  advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  the 
double  quick  step,  and  move  into  line  by  the  shortest  route,  taking  care 
to  undouble  the  files,  and  to  come  on  the  line  one  after  the  other. 

As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in  line  with  the  covering 
sergeant,  they  Avill  take  from  him  the  step,  and  then  turn  their  eyes  to 
the  front. 

The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the  movements  of  their 
respective  file-leaders,  but  Avithout  endeavoring  to  arrive  in  line  at  the 
same  time  with  the  latter. 

At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  captain  will  face  to  his  com- 
pany in  order  to  folloAV  up  the  execution  ;  and,  as  soon  as  the  company 
is  formed,  he  will  command  <jnide  left,  place  himself  two  paces  before 
the  centre,  face  to  the  front,  and  take  the  step  of  the  company. 

At  the  command  guide  left,  the  second  sergeant  will  promptly  place 
himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  left,  to  serve  as  guide,  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  who  is  on  the  opposite  flank  will  remain  there. 

When  the  company  marches  by  the  left  flank,  this  movement  will 
be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same 
principles  ;  the  company  being  formed,  the  captain  will  commaud 
f/Ht'de  right,  and  place  himself  in  front  of  hia  company  as  above  ; 
the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  will  serve 
as  guide,  and  the  second  sergeant  placed  on  the  left  flank  will  remain 
there. 

Thus,  supposing  the  company  to  constitute  a  part  of  a  column  by 
company,  right  or  left  in  front,  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  second 
sergeant  of  each  corapanj'^  will  always  be  placed  on  the  right  and 
left,  respectively,  of  the  front  rank ;  they  will  be  denominated  right 
guide  and  left  guide,  and  the  one  or  the  other  charged  with  the 
direction. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the 
instructor  to  cause  it  to  form  platoons,  he  will  give  an  order  to  that 
eff"ect  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  into  line.     2.  March. 

The  movement  will  be  executed  by  each  platoon  according  to  the 
above   principles.     The   captain    will  place  himself  before  the   centre 
of  the  first  platoon,  and  the   first  lieutenant  before  the  centre  of  the 
11 


122  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

second,  passing  tLrough  the  opening  made  in  the  centre  of  the 
company,  if  the  march  be  by  the  right  flank,  and  around  the  left 
of  his  platoon,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left :  in  this  last  case,  the 
captain  will  also  pass  around  the  left  of  the  second  platoon  in  order 
to  place  himself  in  front  of  the  first.  Both  the  captain  and  lieutenant, 
without  waiting  for  each  other,  will  command  guide  left  (or  right)  at 
the  instant  their  respective  platoons  are  formed. 

At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right),  the  guide  of  each  platoon 
will  pass  rapidly  to  the  indicated  flank  of  the  platoon,  if  not  already 
there. 

The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  ahvays  serve  as  the  guide 
of  the  right  or  left  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  left  guide  of  the 
company  will  serve,  in  like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second 
platoon. 

Thus  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will  be  but  one  guide  to  each 
platoon ;  he  will  always  be  placed  on  its  left  flank,  if  the  right  be 
in  front,  and  on  the  right  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

In  these  movements,  the  file-closers  will  follow  the  platoons  to 
which  they  are  attached. 

The  instructor  may  cause  the  company,  marching  by  the  flank, 
to  form  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  line,  by  his  own  direct 
commands,  using  those  prescribed  for  the  captain 

The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  in  passing,  without  halt, 
from  the  march  by  the  front,  to  the  march  by  the  flank,  and  recip- 
rocally. In  either  case  he  will  employ  the  commands  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  substituting  comjyauj/  for  squad.  The  com- 
pany will  face  to  the  right  or  left,  in  marching,  and  the  captain, 
the  guides,  and  tile-closers  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  each  in.  the  march  by  the  flank,  or  in  the  march  by  the 
front  of  a  company  supposed  to  be  a  -jubdivision  of  a  column. 

If,  after  facing  to  the  right  or  left,  in  marching,  the  company 
find  itself  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the  captain  will  place  himself  two 
paces  behind  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  the 
guides  will  pass  to  the  rear  rank,  now  leading,  and  the  file-closers 
will  march  in  front  of  this  rank. 

The  instructor,  in  order  to  avoid  fatiguing  the  men,  and  to  prevent 
them  from  being  negligent  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  will 
sometimes  order  support  arms  in  marching  by  the  flank,  and  arms 
on  the  right  shoulder,  when  marching  in  line. 

To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either  at  a  halt  or  in  march. 
242.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle,  the  inetmctor, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  123 

wishing  to   lireak  it  into  column,  by   platoon   to   the  right,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  platoon,  7-ight  wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  will  rapidly  place 
themselves  two  paces  before  the  centres  of  their  respective  platoons, 
the  lieutenant  passing  around  the  left  of  the  company.  They  need 
not  occupy  themselves  with  dressing,  one  upon  the  other.  The  cov- 
ering sergciint  will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front  rank. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  platoon 
will  face  to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  standing  fast,  the  chief  of 
each  i:)latoon  will  move  quickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a  little  beyond  the 
point  at  which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when  the  wheel  shall  be 
completed,  face  to  the  late  rear,  and  place  himself  so  that  the  line 
which  he  forms  with  the  man  on  the  right  (who  had  faced)  shall  be 
per[)endicular  to  that  occupied  bj'  the  company  in  line  of  battle:  each 
platoon  will  wheel  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel 
on  a  fixed  pivot;  and  when  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank 
ishall  approach  near  to  the  perpendicular,  its  chief  will  command: 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  half,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  man 
who  conducts  the  marching  flank  shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces 
from  the  perpendicular,  the  platoon  will  halt;  the  covering  sergeant 
will  move  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  is  to  rest, 
passing  by  the  front  rank;  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself, 
in  like  manner,  in  respect  to  the  second  platoon.  Each  will  take" 
care  to  leave  between  himself  and  the  man  on  the  right  of  his  platoon, 
a  space  equal  to  its  front;  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant  will  look 
to  this,  and  each  take  care  to  align  the  sergeant  between  himself  and 
the  man  of  the  platoon  who  had  faced  to  the  right. 

The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  established  on  the  perpen- 
dicular, each  chief  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide, 
and  facing  towar<l  him,  will  command  : 

o.   Left — Dress. 

The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  platoon  Avill  command, 
Froxt,  and  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

The  file -closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the  movement  of  their 
respective  platoons,  preserving  always  the  distance  of  two  paces  from 
the  rear  rank. 


124         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
same  principles.     The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon^  left  wheel.     2.  March. 

The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  if  break- 
ing by  platoon  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each  platoon 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  platoons  Avill  wheel  to  the  left,  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot ;  the  chiefs 
of  platoon  will  conform  to  the  principles  indicated. 

At  the  command  JiaJt,  given  by  the  chief  of  each  platoon,  the 
covering  sergeant  on  tlie  right  of  the  front  rack  of  the  first  platoon, 
and  the  second  sergeant  near  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  will 
each  move  to  the  points  where  the  right  of  his  platoon  is  to  rest. 
The  chief  of  each  platoon  should  be  careful  to  align  the  sergeant 
between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon  who  had  faced  to  the 
left,  and  will  then  command : 

Right — Dress. 

The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of  platoon  will  command, 
Front,  and  place  himself  opposite  its  centre. 

243.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  company  by  platoon  to  the 
right,  and  to  move  the  column  forward  after  the  wheel  is  completed, 
will  caution  the  company  to  that  eftect,  and  command: 

1.  By  platoon^  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  move  rapidly  in 
front  of  their  respective  platoons,  conforming  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed, and  will  remain  in  this  position  during  the  contiauance  of 
the  wheel.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  right,  con- 
forming to  the  principles  herein  prescribed;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will 
not  face  to  the  right,  but  will  mark  time,  conforming  himself  to  the 
movement  of  the  marching  flank :  and  when  the  man  who  is  on  the 
left  of  tnis  flank  shall  arrive  near  the  perpendicular,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.  Guide  left. 

At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel 
is  completed,  the  platoons  will  move  straight  to  the  front,  all  the  men 
taking  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches.     The   covering   sergeant  and 


SCHOOL    or    THE    COMPANY.  125 

the  second  (sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  reppective 
platoons,  the  former  passing  before  the  front  rank.  The  leading  guide 
will  immediately  take  points  on  the  ground  in  the  direction  which  may 
be  indicated  to  him  by  the  instructor. 

At  the  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  lightly 
to  the  left. 

If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose  his  distance  or  the 
line  of  direction,  he  will  conform  to  the  principles  herein  prescribed. 

If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the  front,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  break  by  platoon  to  the  right  by  the  same  commands.  At 
the  command  march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in  the  manner  already 
explained;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  take  care  to  mark  time  in  his 
place,  without  advancing  or  receding;  the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon and  the  guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed. 

The  company  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to  the  left,  according  to 
the-  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means,  the  instructor  giving  the 
rommands  prescribed,  substituting  left  for  Hyht,  and  reciprocally. 

To  march  in  column. 

244.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right  (or  left)  in  front, 
the  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  column  to  march,  will  throw  him- 
self twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  guides,  place  himself 
correctly  on  their  direction,  and  caution  the  leading  guide  to  take  points 
on  the  ground. 

The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide  of  the  leading  platoon 
will  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line  passing  between 
his  own  and  the  heels  of  the  instructor. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will  step  aside,  and 
command  : 

1.  Column,  forward.     2.   Guide  left  (or  right).     3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  lead  off",  by  a  decided  step,  their  re- 
spective platoons,  in  order  that  the  whole  may  move  smartly  and  at 
the  same  moment. 

The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor  toward  the 
guide,  and  conform  himself,  in  marching,  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  The  man  next  to  the  guide,  in  each  pla- 
toon, will  take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and  also  to  march  always  about 
six  inches  to  the  right  (or  left)  from  him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out 
of  the  direction. 

The    leading   guide    will    observe,  with    the    greatest   precision,  the 


126  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

length   and  cadence   of  the   step,  and    maintain    the   direction    of  his 
march  hy  the  means  prescribed. 

The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  leading 
one,  preserving  between  the  latter  and  himself  a  distance  precisely 
equal  to  the  front  of  his  platoon,  and  marching  in  the  same  step  with 
the  leading  guide. 

To  change  direction. 

The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while  marching  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  wheeling,  on  the  march. 
Whenever,  therefore,  a  column  is  to  change  direction,  the  instructor 
will  change  the  guide,  if  not  already  there,  to  the  flank  opposite  the 
side  to  which  the  change  is  to  be  made. 

245.  The  column  being  in  march,  right  in  front,  if  it  be  the  wish  of 
the  instructor  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  give  the  order 
to  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  and  immediately  go  himself,  or  send  a 
marker,  to  the  point  at  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made; 
the  instructor,  or  marker,  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast  to  that  flank  of  the  column. 

The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  march  on  that  person,  so  that,  in 
passing,  his  left  arm  may  just  graze  his  breast.  When  the  leading 
guide  shall  have  approached  near  to  the  marker,  the  chief  of  his  pla- 
toon will  command  : 

1.  Right  wheel.     2.  March. 

The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  platoon  is  at  the  distance 
of  four  paces  from  the  marker. 

At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  the 
guide  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the  marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to 
the  right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each  platoon  Avill  command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March. 

These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  executed  as  is  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  take 
points  on  the  ground  in  the  new  direction,  in  order  the  better  to  regu- 
late the  march. 

The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  till  up 
with  the  marker,  when  it  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  retake  the  direct 
march  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  means  which  governed  the 
first  platoon. 

The  column  being  in  march,  right  in  front,  if  the  instructor  should 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  127 

wieh  to  change  direction  to  the  left,  he  will  command,  fjuide  riyht.  At 
this  command,  the  two  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  their 
reppcctive  platoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his  subdivision ;  the  men 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right ;  the  instructor  will  after- 
ward conform  to  what  is  prescribed. 

The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then  be  executed  according 
ts»  the  same  principles  as  the  change  of  direction  to  the  right,  but  by 
inverse  means. 

When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand, guide  left. 

The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time,  the  platoons  will  wheel 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  formations  in  line  which  can 
be  executed  only  by  turning  to  the  right  or  the  left,  the  instructor  will 
sometimes  cause  the  column  to  change  direction  to  the  si<lc  of  the 
guide.  In  this  case,  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon  will  command  : 
Left  (or  riylif)  turn,  instead  of  lift  (or  right)  wheel.  The  subdivisions 
will  each  turn,  in  succession,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  , 
school  of  the  soldier.  The  leadiug  guide,  as  soon  as  he  has  turned, 
will  take  points  on  the  ground,  the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of 
the  march. 

To  halt  (he  column. 

The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  halt 
it,  he  will  command: 

1.  Column.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  column  will  halt;  the  guides  also  will  stand  fast,  although  they 
may  have  lost  both  distance  and  direction. 

If  the  command  halt  be  not  repeated  with  the  greatest  vivacity,  and 
executed  at  the  same  instant,  distances  will  be  lost. 

If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to  recover  it  after  that 
command,  he  will  only  throw  his  fault  on  the  following  guide,  who,  if 
he  have  marched  well,  will  no  longer  be  at  his  proper  distance  ;  and  if 
the  latter  regain  what  he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement  will  be  propa- 
gated to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

Being  in  column  hy  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of 
battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  on  the  march. 

246.  The   instructor   having  halted  the  column,  right  in   front,  and 


128         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 

wishing  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  will  place  himself  at  platoon 
distance  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if 
necessary,  the  position  of  the  guide  beyond;  which  being  executed,  he 
will  command  : 

Left — Dress. 

At  this  command,  which  will  not  be  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
each  of  them  will  place  himself  briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide, 
and  direct  the  alignment  of  the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the  direction 
of  the  column. 

Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will  command  Front,  and 
return  quickly  to  his  place  in  column. 

This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Left  into  line,  lolieel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who 
stands  fast;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of 
wheels  from  a  halt,  and  in  conformity  to  what  is  prescribed.  Each 
chief  will  turn  to  his  platoon  to  observe  its  movement,  and  when  the 
marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Platoon.,  2.  Halt. 

The  command  halt  will  be  given  when  the  marching  flank  of  the 
platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having  baited  it,  will  return  to  his 
place  as  a  file-closer,  passing  around  the  left  of  his  subdivision. 

The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
point  at  which  the  right  of  the  company  will  rest  in  line  of  battle,  and 
command  : 

Right — Dress. 

At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  Avill  dress  up  on  the  alignment; 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  leading  platoon,  who  finds  him- 
self opposite  the  instructor  established  on  the  direction  of  the  guides, 
will  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  this  ofiicer.  The 
captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from  the  riglit  on  the  man  on  the 
opposite  flank  of  the  company. 

The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command  : 

Front. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    CO:\IPANY.  1-0 

The  instructor  .«eeiug  the  couipaiij'  in   line  of  battle,  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  the  captain,  and 
the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  ^ilacc  as  a  file-closer. 

If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  ft  rm 
it  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  place  himself  at  platoon  dis- 
tance in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  neces- 
sary, the  position  of  the  guide  beyond  ;  which  being  executed,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Right  into  line,  tclieel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  each 
platoon  will  face  to  the  right  and  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the 
left  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast;  each  platoon  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  when  the  marching 
fliink  has  approached  near  the  line  of  battle;  for  this  purpose,  the  chief 
of  each  platoon  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

The  command  halt  will  be  given  when  the  marching  flank  of  the 
platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  having  halted  his  platoon,  will  resume  his  place  in  the  rank  of 
file-closers. 

The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will  move  briskly  to  the 
point  at  which  the  left  of  the  company  will  rest,  and  command  : 

Left — Dress. 

At  this  command,  the  two  i)latoons  will  dress  up  on  the  alignment; 
the  man  on  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  opposite  the  instructor,  will 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  officer,  and  the 
captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from  the  left  on  the  man  on  the  oppo- 
site flank  of  the  company. 

The  company  being  aligned,  the  Oiiptaiu  will  command  : 

Front. 

The  instructor  will  afterward  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  to  the  right  of  his  eomiiany, 
the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to 
his  pl.ace  as  a  file-closer. 


130  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MTLIPIA. 

247.  If  tbe  column  bo  marehinrr  right  in  front,  and  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halting  the  column,  he  will 
p;ive  the  command  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.  Mauch. 

and  will  himsolf  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  lead- 
ing guide. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoons, 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who 
stands  fast;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of 
wheels  from  a  halt.  Each  chief  will  turn  to  his  platoon  to  observe  its 
movement,  and  conform  to  Avhat  is  prescribed  for  wheeling  into  line 
from  a  halt. 

If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  tiiis  formation  will  be  made 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

248.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  vvithout  halting  the  column,  and  to 
march  the  company  in  line  to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoons,  left  vj heel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  left  guides  will  halt;  the  man  next  to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon 
will  mark  tima:  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the 
principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  When  the  right  of  the  pla- 
toons shall  arrive  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  right  (or  left). 

At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  f;ompletcd, 
all  the  men  of  the  company  will  move  off  together  with  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches;  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  the 
covering  sergeant,  and  the  left  guide,  will  take  their  positions  as  in 
line  of  battle. 

At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given  immediately  after  tho 
fourth,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  if  not  already  there,  will 
move  briskly  to  the  side  on  which  the  guide  is  designated.  The  non- 
commissioned officer  charged  with  the  direction  will  move  rapidly  in 
front  of  the  guide,  and  will  be  assured  in  his  line  of  march  by  the 
instructor.  That  non-commissioned  officer  will  immediately  take 
points  on  the  ground.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the 
side  of  the  guide,  conforming  themselves  to  the  principles  of  the  march 
in  line. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  131 

The  same  principles  are  aj^plicable  to  a  rolnmri  left  iu  front. 

A  company  marching  to  the  front,  to  break  it  into  platoons,  and 
to  re-furm  the  company. 

249.  The  compan\'  inarchint!:  in  the  eatleneecl  step,  and  supposed  to 
make  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  in  which  case  the  guide  is  left, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  break  by  platoon,  he  will 
give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  Break  into  platoons, 

and  immediately  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 

At  the  command  break  into  platoons,  the  first  lieutenant  will  pass 
quickly  around  the  left  to  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  and  give  the  cau- 
tion :  Mark  time. 

The  captain  will  then  command  : 

2.  March. 

The  first  plat  jon  Avill  continue  to  march  straight  forward  ;  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  flank  of  this  platoon  (passing 
by  the  front  rank)  as  soon  as  the  flank  shall  be  disengaged. 

At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the  second  platoon  will 
begin  to  mark  time  ;  its  chief  will  immediately  add  : 

1.  Right  oblique.     2.  March. 

The  last  command  will  be  given  so  that  this  platoon  may  commence 
obliquing  the  instant  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  platoon  shall  have 
passed.  The  men  will  shorten  the  step  in  obliquing,  so  that  when  the 
eommand  for  ward,  march  is  given,  the  platoon  may  have  its  exact  dis- 
tance. 

The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near  the  direction  of  the  guide 
of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the  second  will  command  forward,  and  add 
March,  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover  the  guide 
of  the  first. 

In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will  break  into  platoons  by 
inverse  means,  applying  to  the  first  platoon  all  that  has  been  prescribed 
for  the  second,  and  reciprocally. 

In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  sliift  to  the  right 
flank  of  the  second  platoon,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  remain  on 
the  right  of  the  first. 

250.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being   iu   march,  right  iu  front,  when 


132  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  form  company,  he  will  give  the 
order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command : 

Forjii  company. 

Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will  immediately  add  : 

1.  First  jdatoon.     2.  Right  oblique. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it  to  continue  to  march 
straight  forward. 

The  captain  will  then  command  : 

3.  March. 

At  this  command,  i-epeated  by  the  chief  of  the  second,  the  first  pla- 
toon will  oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  unmask  the  second  j  the  cover- 
ing sergeant,  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to  the  right  of 
the  company,  passing  by  the  front  rank. 

When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  unmasked  the  second,  the 
captain  will  command  : 

1.  Mark  time. 

and  at  the  instant  the  unmasking  shall  be  complete,  he  will  add: 

2.  March. 

The  first  platoon  will  then  cease  to  oblique,  and  mark  time. 

In  the  mean  time  the  second  platoon  will  have  continued  to  march 
straight  forward,  and  when  it  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  first,  the 
captain  will  command  forward,  and  at  the  instant  the  two  platoons 
shall  unite,  add  March;  the  first  platoon  will  then  cease  to  mark  time. 

In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  movement  will  be  executed  by 
inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  giving  the  command /«/•- 
ward,  and  the  captain  adding  the  command  Makch,  when  the  platoons 
are  united. 

The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right,  will  pass  to  its  left 
flank  the  moment  the  platoon  begins  to  oblique  ;  the  guide  of  first,  on 
its  right,  remaining  on  that  flank  of  the  platoon. 

The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause  the  company  to  break  and 
re-form,  by  platoon,  by  his  own  direct  commands.  In  (his  case,  he  will 
give  the  general  commands  prescribed  for  the  captain  above : 

1.  Break  into  plat jons.     2.  March. 

and 

1.  Form  company.     2.  March. 


SCnOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  133 

If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons,  the  subdivision  that 
breaks  oflF  should  mark  time  too  long,  it  might,  in  a  column  of  many 
subdivisions,  arrest  the  march  of  the  following  one,  which  would  cause 
a  lengthening  of  the  column  and  a  loss  of  distances. 

Being  in  column^  to  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to 

re-enter  into  line. 

251.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  supposed  to  constitute  a  sub- 
division of  a  column,  right  (or  left)  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  files  to  break  off  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain, 
who  will  immediately  turn  to  his  company,  and  command  : 

1.   Two  files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the  left  (or  right)  of  the 
company  will  mark  time,  the  others  will  continue  to  march  straight  for- 
ward ;  the  two  rear  rank  men  of  these  files  will,  as  soon  as  the  rear 
rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  move  to  the  right  by  advancing 
the  outer  shoulder;  the  odd  number  will  place  himself  behind  the  third 
file  from  that  flank,  the  even  number  behind  the  fourth,  passing  for  this 
purpose  behind  the  odd  number;  the  two  front  rank  men  Avill,  in  like 
manner,  move  to  the  right  when  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  shall 
clear  them,  the  odd  number  will  place  himself  behind  the  first  file,  the 
even  number  behind  the  second  file,  passing  for  this  purpose  behind  the 
odd  number.  If  the  files  arc  broken  from  the  right,  the  men  Avill  move 
to  the  left,  advancing  the  outer  shoulder,  the  even  number  of  the  rear 
rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the  odd  number  of  the 
same  rank  behind  the  fourth  ;  the  even  number  of  the  front  rank  be- 
hind the  first  file,  the  odd  number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  second, 
the  odd  numbers  for  this  purpose  passing  behind  the  even  numbers. 
The  men  will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  distances,  and  to  keep 
aligned. 

If  the  instructor  should  still  wish  to  break  two  files  from  the  same 
side,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  proceed  as  above 
directed. 

At  the  command  marcli,  given  by  the  captain,  the  files  already 
broken,  advancing  a  little  the  outer  shoulder,  will  gain  the  space  of 
two  files  to  the  right,  if  the  files  are  broken  from  the  left,  and  to  the 
left,  if  the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  shortening,  at  the  same  time, 
the  step,  in  order  to  make  room  between  themselves  and  the  rear  rank 
of  the  company  for  the  files  last  ordered  to  the  rear;  the  latter  will 
break  by  the  same  commands  and  in  the  same  manner  as  the  first.    The 


134         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

men  who  double  should  increase  the  length  of  the  step  in  order  to  pre- 
vent distances  from  being  lost. 

The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the  front  of  a  company  by  break- 
ing off  successive  groups  of  two  tiles,  but  tue  new  files  must  always  be 
broken  from  the  same  side. 

The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  files  broten  off  to  return  into  line, 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  immediately  command: 

1.   Two  files  ijito  line.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  of  those  marching  by  the 
flank  will  return  briskly  into  line,  and  the  others  will  gain  the  space  of 
two  files  by  advancing  the  inner  shoulder  toward  the  flank  to  which 
they  belong. 

The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  watch  the  observance  of  the 
principles  which  have  just  been  prescribed. 

The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two  files  to  break  one 
after  another,  and  to  return  again  into  line,  will  afterward  cause  two 
or  three  groups  to  break  together,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command : 
Four  or  six  Jilts  from  left  (or  ri(/ht)  to  rear,  March.  The  files  desig- 
nated will  mark  time;  each  rank  will  advance  a  little  the  outer  shoul- 
der as  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  it;  will  oblique 
at  once,  and  each  group  will  place  itself  behind  the  four  neighboring 
files,  and  in  the  same  manner  as  if  the  movement  had  been  executed 
group  by  group,  taking  care  that  the  distances  are  preserved. 

The  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain  to  cause  two  or  three 
groups  to  be  brought  into  line  at  once,  who,  turning  to  the  company, 
will  command  : 

Fou7'  or  six  files  into  line  —  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  tiles  designated  will  advance  the  inner 
shoulder,  move  up  and  form  on  the  flank  of  the  company  by  the 
shortest  lines. 

As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  the  guide  on  that  flank 
will  gradually  close  on  the  nearest  front  rank  man  remaining  in  line, 
and  he  will  also  open  out  to  make  room  for  files  ordered  into  line. 

The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed  in  the  following 
order:  the  left  files  as  if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  right 
flank,  and  the  right  files  as  if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  left 
flank.  Consequently,  Avhenever  there  is  on  the  right  or  left  of  a  subdi- 
vision, a  file  which  does  not  belong  to  a  group,  it  will  be  broken  singly. 

It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances  in  column,  that  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  135 

men  should  be  babituated  in  the  schools  of  detail  to  execute  the  move- 
ments of  this  article  with  jsrecision. 

If  new  files  broken  off  do  not  step  well  to  the  left  or  right  in 
obliquing  ;  if,  when  files  are  ordered  into  line,  they  do  not  move  up 
with  promptitude  and  precision,  in  either  case  the  following  files  will 
be  arrested  in  their  march,  and  thereby  cause  the  column  to  be 
lengthened  out. 

The  instructor  will  i)lacc  himself  on  the  flank  from  which  the  files 
are  broken,  to  assure  himself  of  the  exact  observance  of  the  princi- 
ples. 

Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of  direction,  in  order  that 
the  whole  company  may  easily  pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 

To  march  the  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the  movements  inci- 
dent thereto. 

252.  The  swiftness  of  the  route  step  will  be  110  steps  in  a  minute; 
this  swiftness  will  bo  habitually  maintained  in  column  in  route,  when 
the  roads  and  ground  may  permit. 

The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  constitute  a  subdi- 
vision of  a  column,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march 
in  the  route  step,  he  will  command : 

1.   Column,  forward.     2.   Guide  left  (or  right').     3.  Route  step. 

4.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captain,  the  two  ranks  will 
step  off  together  ;  the  i-ear  rank  will  take,  in  marching,  by  shortening 
a  few  steps,  a  distance  of  one  pace  (twenty-eight  inches)  from  the  rank 
preceding,  which  distance  will  be  computed  from  the  breasts  of  the  men 
in  the  i-ear  rank,  to  the  knapsacks  of  the  men  in  the  front  rank.  The 
men,  without  further  command,  will  immediately  carry  their  arms  at 
will,  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  They  will  no  longer  be 
required  to  march  in  the  cadenced  pace,  or  with  the  same  foot,  or  to 
remain  silent.  The  tiles  will  march  at  ease:  but  care  will  be  taken  to 
prevent  the  ranks  from  intermixing,  the  front  rank  from  getting  in 
advance  of  the  guide,  and  the  rear  rank  from  opening  to  too  great  a 
distance. 

The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor  will  cause  it 
to  change  direction,  which  will  bo  executed  without  formal  commands, 
on  a  simple  caution  from  the  captain  ;  the  rear  rank  will  come  up  to 
change  direction  in  the  same  manner  as  the  front  rank.  Each  rank 
will  conform  it«elf,  although  in  the  route  step,  to  the  principles  which 


136         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

have  been  prescribed  for  the  chan,ii-e  in  closed  ranks,  with  this  diflfer-^ 
ence  only:  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  taking  steps  of  nine,  will 
take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in  order  to  clear  the  wheeling  point.    - 

The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to  cause  it  to  pass  to  the 
cadenced  step,  the  instructor  will  first  order  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the 
shoulder,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Clxdck  time.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume  the  cadenced  step,  and 
will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  distance  of  sixteen  inches  between  each 
rank. 

253.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  pace,  the  instructor,  to 
cause  it  to  take  the  route  step,  will  command : 

1.  Route  step.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  will  continue  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches,  the  rear  rank  will  take,  by  gradually  shortening 
the  step,  the  distance  of  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  front  rank:  the 
men  will  carry  their  arms  at  will. 

The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  in  increasing  and  diminish- 
ing front  by  platoon,  which  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands 
and  the  same  means  as  if  the  company  were  marching  in  the  cadenced 
step.  When  the  company  breaks  into  platoons,  the  chief  of  each  will 
move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will  take  the  place  of  the  guide, 
who  will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

254.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and  marching  in 
the  route  step,  the  instructor  can  cause  the  front  to  be  diminished  and 
increased,  by  section,  if  the  platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  files  or 
more. 

The  movements  of  diminishing  and  increasing  front  by  section,  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  principles  indicated  for  the  same  move- 
ment by  platoon.  The  right  sections  of  platoons  will  be  commanded 
by  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant,  respectively;  the  left  sections,  by 
the  two  next  subalterns  in  rank,  or,  in  their  absence,  by  sergeants. 

The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  section,  will  give  the  order  to 
the  captain,  who  will  command : 

1.  Break  into  sections.     2.  March. 

As  soon  as  the  platoons  shall  be  broken,  each  chief  of  section  will 
place  himself  on  its  directing  flank  in  the  front  rank,  the  guides  who 
will  be  thus  displaced,  will  fall  back  into  the  rear  rank ;  the  file-closers 
will  close  up  to  within  one  pace  of  this  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  137 

Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  onlj^  in  the  column  in  route,  the 
movement  will  never  be  executed  in  the  manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be 
the  front  of  the  company. 

When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  re-form  platoons,  he  will  give  the 
order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  Form  platoons.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  section  will  place  himself  befoi-e 
its  centre,  and  the  guides  will  pass  into  the  front  rank.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed  for 
forming  company.  The  moment  the  platoons  are  formed,  the  chiefs  of 
the  left  sections  will  return  to  their  places  as  file-closers. 

The  instructor  will  also  cause  to  bo  executed  the  diminishing  and 
increasing  front  by  files,  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  article,  and  in 
the  same  manner,  as  if  marching  in  the  cadcnccd  step.  When  the  com- 
pany is  broken  into  sections,  the  subdivisions  must  not  be  reduced  to 
a  front  of  less  than  six  files,  not  counting  the  chief  of  the  section. 

The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or  by  section,  the  instructor 
will  cause  it,  marching  in  the  route  step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  the 
same  direction,  by  tlio  commands  and  the  means  indicated.  The  moment 
the  subdivisions  sliall  face  to  the  right  (or  left),  the  first  file  of  each  will 
wheel  to  the  left  (or  right)  in  marching,  to  prolong  the  direction,  and 
to  unite  with  the  rear  file  of  the  subdivision  immediately  preceding. 
The  file-closers  will  take  their  habitual  places  in  the  march  by  the 
flank,  befoi-e  the  union  of  the  subdivisions. 

255.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  in- 
structor should  wish  to  undouble  the  files,  which  might  sometimes  be 
found  necessary,  he  will  inform  the  captain,  who,  after  causing  the 
cadenced  step  to  be  resumed,  and  arms  to  be  shouldered  or  supported, 
will  command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks ^  undouble  Jiles.     2.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward,  the  oven  numbers  will  shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing 
to  the  left  will  place  themselves  promptly  behind  the  odd  numbers ;  the 
rear  rank  will  gain  a  step  to  the  left  so  as  to  retake  the  touch  of  elbows 
on  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  it  will  be  the  even 
numbers  who  will  continue  to  march  forward,  and  the  odd  numbers 
who  will  undouble. 

If  the  instructor  should  wish  to   double  the  files,  he  will  give   the 
order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 
12 


13B         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 


1.  In  four  ranks,  double  files.     2.  March. 

At  the  commiind  march,  the  files  will  double  in  the  manner  as  ex- 
plained, when  the  company  faces  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank.  The 
instructor  will  afterward  cause  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this  lesson  may  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time.  The  men  will  be  brought,  by  degrees,  to  pass  over 
at  this  gait  about  1100  yards  in  seven  minutes. 

When  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step  shall  halt,  the  rear 
rank  will  close  up  at  the  command  halt,  and  the  whole  will  shoulder 
arms. 

Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their 
pieces  in  the  manner  they  shall  find  most  convenient,  paying  attention 
only  to  holding  the  muzzles  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accidents. 

Countermarch. 

256.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  constitute  a  part 
of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it 
to  countermarch,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Countermarch.     2.   Company.,  right — Face.     3.  By  jile  left. 

4.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right,  the  two 
guides  to  the  right  about;  the  captain  will  go  to  the  right  of  his  com- 
pany, and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man  to  conduct  him. 

At  the  command  M?rnc7/,  both  guides  will  stand  fast:  the  company 
will  step  otf  smartly;  the  first  file,  conducted  by  the  captain,  will  wheel 
around  the  right  gifide,  and  direct  its  march  along  the  front  rank  so  as 
to  arrive  behind,  and  two  paces  from  the  left  guide ;  each  file  will  come 
in  succession  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  around  the  right  guide;  the 
leading  file  having  arrived  at  a  point  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  the  cap- 
tain will  command  : 

1.  Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Right — Dress. 

The  first  command  will  be  given  at  four  paces  from  the  point  where 
the  leading  file  is  to  rest. 

At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 

At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the  right;  the  captain  will 
step  two  paces  outside  of  the  left  guide,  now  on  the  right,  and  direct 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  139 

the  alignment,  so  that  tlie  front  rank  may  bo  enclosed  between  the  two 
guides;  the  company  being  aligned,  he  will  command  Froxt,  and  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  the  company  as  if  in  column;  the  guides, 
passing  along  the  front  rank,  will  shift  to  their  proper  places,  on  the 
right  and  left  of  that  rank. 

In  a  column,  by  platoon,  the  countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  principles;  the  guide  of 
each  platoon  will  face  about,  and  its  chief  will  place  himself  by  the  side 
of  the  file  on  the  right,  to  conduct  it. 

In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  will  be  executed  by 
inverse  commands  and  means,  but  according  to  the  same  principles. 
Thus,  the  movement  will  be  made  by  the  right  flank  of  subdivisions,  if 
the  right  be  in  front,  and  by  the  left  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front ;  in 
both  cases  the  subdivisions  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  side  of  the  front 
rank. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  (or  left^  into  line 

of  battle. 

257.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being  in  march,  the 
instructor  wishing  to  form  it  on  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   On  the  right  into  line.     2.   Guide  right. 

At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will  shift  quickly 
to  its  right  flank,  and  the  men  will  touch  elbows  to  the  right ;  the  col- 
umn will  continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

The  instructor  having  given  the  second  command,  will  m'  ve  briskl}"^ 
to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  company  ought  to  rest  in  line, 
and  place  himself  facing  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left  which  he  will 
■choose. 

The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  so  chosen  that  the  guide  of  each  pla- 
toon, after  having  turned  to  the  right,  may  have  at  least  ten  paces  to 
take  before  arriving  upon  that  line. 

The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly  opposite  to  the  instructor,  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  command  :  1,  liight  turn;  and  when 
exactly  opposite  to  that  point,  he  will  add  : 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  lirst  platoon  will  turn  to  the  right,  in 
conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 
Its  guide  will  so  direct  his  marcii  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  man  next 


140         MANUAL     FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

on  his  left,  opposite  to  the  instructor  ;  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will 
march  before  its  centre  ;  and  when  its  guide  shall  be  near  the  line  of 
battle,  he  will  command  :  » 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  right  of 
the  platoon  shall  arrive  at  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line  of 
battle,  the  platoon  will  halt  ]  the  files  not  yet  in  line  will  come  up 
promptly.  The  guide  will  throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite 
to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon ;  he  will  face  to  the  in- 
structor, who  will  align  him  on  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left.  The 
chief  of  platoon  having,  at  the  same  time,  gone  to  the  point  where  the 
right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  will,  as  soon  as  he  sees  all  the  files  of 
the  platoon  in  line,  command : 

Right — Dress.  ^ 

At  this  the  first  platoon  will  align  itself;  the  front  rank  man,  who 
finds  himself  opposite  to  the  guide,  will  rest  his  breast  lightly  against 
the  right  arm  of  this  guide,  and  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  from  the 
right,  will  direct  the  alignment  on  this  man. 

The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  until  its 
guide  shall  arrive  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the  first ;  it  will  then  turn 
to  the  right  at  the  command  of  its  chief,  and  march  toward  the  line 
of  battle,  its  guide  directing  himself  on  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon. 

The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will  be  halted,  as  prescribed  for  the  first;  at 
the  instant  it  halts,  its  guide  will  spring  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite 
to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon,  and  will  be  assured  in  his 
position  by  the  instructor. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its  files  in  line,  »ud  its 
guide  established  on  the  direction,  will  command  : 

Right — Dress. 

Having  given  this  command,  he  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file- 
closer,  passing  around  the  left;  the  second  platoon  will  dress  up  on  the 
alignment  of  the  first,  and,  when  established,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

Front. 

The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  141 

At  this  comijiand,  the  two  guides  will  return  to  their  places  in  line  of 
battle. 

A  column  by  platoon,  left  in  front,  will  form  on  the  left  into  line  of 
battle^  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  hy  inverse  means,  apply- 
ing to  the  second  platoon  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  recipro- 
cally. The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having  aligned  it  CromTthG  pni)it 
d'appni  (the  left),  will  retire  to  his  place  as  a  file-closer.  The  captain 
having  halted  the  first  platoon  three  paces  behind  the  line  of  battle, 
will  go  to  the  same  point  to  align  this  platoon,  and  then  command: 
Front.  At  the  command,  yiiides — posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the 
captain  will  shift  to  his  proper  flank,  and  the  guides  take  their  places 
in  the  line  of  battle. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four^  ayid  recipro- 
cally, at  a  halt,  and  in  march. 

258.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a  halt,  and  sup- 
posed to  form  part  of  a  column  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  four  ranl's,  form  company.     2.  Company,  left — Face.     3 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will  remain  faced  to  the  front, 
the  company  will  face  to  the  left ;  the  rear  rank  Avill  gain  the  distance 
of  one  pace  from  the  front  rank  by  a  side  step  to  the  left  and  rear,  and 
the  men  will  form  into  four  ranks,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier. 

At  the  command  match,  the  first  file  of  four  men  will  reface  to  the 
front  without  undoubling.  All  the  other  files  of  four  will  step  off,  and 
closing  successively  to  about  five  inches  of  the  preceding  file,  will  halt, 
and  immediately  face  to  the  front,  the  men  remaining  doubled. 

The  file-closers  will  take  their  new  places  in  line  of  battle,  at  two 
paces  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

259.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall 
Avish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.    In   two  ranks,  form  company.     2.   Company,  right — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will  stand  fast,  the  company 
will  face  to  the  right. 

At  the  command   iinirrh,  the  right  guide  will  steji  oft"  and  march   in 


142         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank.  The  leading  file  of  four  men  will 
step  oflF  at  the  same  time,  the  other  files  standing  fast  j  the  second  file 
will  step  oS"  when  there  shall  be  between  it  and  the  first  space  sufficient 
to  form  it  into  two  ranks.  The  following  files  will  execute  successively 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  As  soon  as  the  last  file  shall 
have  its  distance,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

At  the  command /rojif,  the  company  will  face  to  the  front,  and  the 
files  will  un double. 

260.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and  marching  to  the 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.     2.   By  the  left,  double  files. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  left  file  of  the  com- 
pany will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front;  the  company  will 
make  a  half  face  to  the  left,  the  odd  numbers  placing  themselves 
behind  the  even  numbers.  The  even  numbers  of  the  rear  rank  will 
shorten  their  steps  a  little,  to  permit  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank 
to  get  between  them  and  the  even  numbers  of  that  rank.  The  files 
thus  formed  of  fours,  except  the  left  file,  will  continue  to  march 
obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps  slightly,  so  as  to  keep  constantly 
abreast  of  the  guide  ;  each  file  will  close  successively  on  the  file  next 
on  its  left,  and  when  at  the  proper  distance  from  that  file  will  face  to 
the  fro)!t  by  a  half  face  to  the  right,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  left. 

2C1.  The  Company  being  in  march  to  the  front  in  four  ranks,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.  Li  two  ranks.,  form  company.     2.  By  the  right.,  undouble  files. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  left  file  of  the  com- 
l^any  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front;  the  company  will 
make  a  half  face  to  the  right  and  march  obliquely,  lengthening  the 
step  a  little,  in  order  to  keep  as  near  as  possible  abreast  of  the  guide. 
As  soon  as  the  second  file  from  the  left  shall  have  gained  to  the  right 
the  interval  necessary  for  the  left  file  to  form  into  two  ranks,  the  Sec- 
ond file  will  face  to  the  front,  by  a  half  face  to  the  left,  and  march 
straight  forward ;  the  left  file  will  immediately  form  into  two  ranks, 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  143 

and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  Each  file  will  execute  suc- 
cessively what  has  just  been  preseribod  for  the  file  next  to  the  left, 
and  each  will  form  into  two  ranks  when  the  file  next  on  its  right  has 
obliqued  the  required  distance  and  faced  to  the  front. 

If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  left  in  front, 
these  different  movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  inverse  means,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  riyht. 


INSTEUCTION  FOE  SKIEMISHEES. 

General  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction. 

202.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  subjected  to  such 
rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander  the  means  of  moving  them  in  any 
direction  with  the  greatest  promptitude. 

It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should  be  executed  with  the 
same  precision  as  in  closed  ranks,  nor  is  it  desirable,  as  such  exactness 
would  materially  interfere  with  their  prompt  e.xecution. 

AVhen  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the  way  for,  and  to  protect 
the  advance  of  the  main  corps,  their  movements  should  be  so  regulated 
by  this  corps  as  to  keep  it  constantly  covered. 

Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  reserve,  the  strength  and 
composition  of  which  n-ill  vary  according  to  circumstances. 

If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  distance  of  the  main 
corps,  a  very  small  reserve  Avill  be  sufficient  for  each  company,  whose 
duty  it  shall  be  to  fill  vacant  places,  furnish  the  line  with  cartridges, 
relieve  the  fatigued,  and  serve  as  a  rallying  point  for  (he  skirmishers. 

If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance,  beside  the  company 
reserves,  another  reserve  will  be  required,  composed  of  entire  compa- 
nies, which  will  be  employed  to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts  of  the 
line  as  may  bo  warmly  attacked;  this  reserve  should  be  strong  enough 
to  relieve  at  least  half  the  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  executed  in  quick,  or  double 
quick  time.  The  run  will  be  resorted  to  only  in  cases  of  urgent  neces- 
sity. 

Skirmishers  will  bo  permitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner 
most  convenient  to  them. 


144  MANUAL     FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated  by  the  sounds  of  the 
bugle. 

The  officers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-commissioned  officers,  will 
repeat,  and  cause  the  commands  to  be  executed,  as  soon  as  they  are 
given  ;  but  to  avoid  mistakes,  when  the  signnls  are  employed,  they 
will  wait  until  the  last  bugle  note  is  sounded  before  commencing  the 
movement. 

Deployments. 

263.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  in  two  ways  :  for- 
ward, and  by  the  flank. 

The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  Avhen  the  company  is  be- 
hind the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be  established  as  skirmishers  :  it  will  be 
deployed  by  the  flank,  when  it  finds  itself  alrea,dy  on  that  line. 

Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skirmishers,  it  will  be 
divided  into  two  platoons,  and  each  platoon  will  be  subdivided  into 
two  sections;  the  comrades  in  battle,  forming  groups  of  four  men,  will 
be  careful  to  know  and  to  sustain  each  other.  The  captain  will  assure 
himself  that  the  files  in  the  centre  of  each  platoon  and  section  arc 
designated. 

The  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on  the  extent  of  ground 
to  be  covered;  but  in  general,  it  is  not  proper  that  the  groups  of  four 
men  should  be  removed  more  than  forty  paces  from  each  other.  The 
habitual  distance  between  men  of  the  same  group  in  open  grounds  will 
be  five  paces ;  in  no  case  will  they  lose  sight  of  each  other. 

To  deploy  fonoard. 

264.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  when  the  captain  shall 
wish  to  deploy  it  forward  on  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon,  holding 
the  second  platoon  in  rescrv'e,  he  will  command  : 

1.  First  platoon — as  skirmishers.     2.   On  the  left  file — take  inter- 
vals.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third  lieutenants  will  place 
themselves  rapidly  two  paces  behind  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left 
sections  of  the  first  platoon  :  the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one  pace  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and  will  place  himself  between 
the  two  sections  in  the  front  rank  as  soon  as  the  movement  begins:  the 
fourth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  of  the  same 
platoon,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  the  ser- 
geant the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct  his  march.     The  firit 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  145 

lieutenant,   ])lacii)g   liimself  before   the   centre   of  the  second   platoon, 
will  conimnnd : 

Second  platoon^  backward — March. 

At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  step  three  paces  to  the 
rear,  so  as  to  unmask  the  flank  of  the  first  j^latoon.  It  will  then  be 
halted  by  its  chief,  and  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the 
left,  and  the  third  sergeant  on  the  right  flank  of  the  platoon. 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of  four  men,  conducted  by 
the  fourth  sergeant,  will  direct  itself  on  the  jioint  indicated  ;  all  the 
other  groups  of  fours,  throwing  forward  briskly  the  left  shoulder,  will 
move  diagonally  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time,  so  as  to  gain  to  the 
right  the  space  of  twenty  paces,  which  shall  be  the  distance  between 
each  group  and  that  immediately  on  its  left.  When  the  second  group 
from  the  left  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with,  and  twenty  paces  from  the 
first,  it  will  march  straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  gait  and 
direction  of  the  first,  keeping  constantly  on  the  same  alignment  and  at 
twenty  paces  from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all  the  others,  will  con- 
form to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second ;  they  will  arrive 
successively  on  the  line.  The  right  guide  will  arrive  Avith  the  last 
group. 

The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  line 
should  rest,  the  captain  will  command  the  skirmishers  to  halt;  the 
men  composing  each  group  of  fours  will  then  immediately  deploy  at 
five  paces  from  each  other,  and  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  front  rank 
men  of  the  even  file  in  each  group,  the  rear  rank  men  placing  them- 
selves on  the  left  of  their  file-leaders.  If  any  groups  be  not  in  line  at 
the  command  halt,  they  will  move  up  rapidly,  conforming  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed. 

If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be  fired  upon  by  the 
enemy,  the  captain  may  cause  the  groups  of  fours  to  deploy  as  thej' 
gain  their  proper  distances. 

The  line  being  formed,  the  non-commissioned  ofiicers  on  the  right, 
left  and  centre  of  the  platoon,  will  place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear 
of  the  line,  and  opposite  the  positions  they  respectively  occupied.  The 
chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities,  and  then  place 
themselves  twenty-five  or  thirt}'^  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sec- 
tions, each  having  with  him  four  men  taken  from  the  reserve,  and  also 
a  bugler,  who  will  repeat,  if  necessary,  the  signals  sounded  by  the  cap- 
tain. 

Skirmishers  should  be  particularly  instructed  to  take  advantage  of 
any  cover  which  the  ground  may  off"er,  and  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground 

in 


146  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

whenever  such  a  movement  is  necessaiy  to  protect  them  from  the  fire 
of  the  enemy.  Regularity  in  the  alignment  should  yield  to  this  impor- 
tant advantage.  W 

When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieutenant  will  face  the  second 
platoon  about,  and  march  it  promptly,  and  by  the  shortest  line,  to 
about  150  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  will  hold  it 
always  at  this  distance,  unless  ordered  to  the  contrary. 

The  reserve  Avill  conform  itself  to  all  the  movements  of  the  line. 
This  rule  is  yeneral. 

Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habitually  in  the  scabbard, 
and  this  rule  applies  equally  to  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve ;  when- 
ever bayonets  are  required  to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  be 
given.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the  Avhole 
deployment,  and  then  promptly  place  himself  about  eighty  paces  in  rear 
of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  will  have  with  him  a  bugler  and  four 
men  taken  from  the  reserve. 

The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right  or  the  centre  of  the  pla- 
toon, by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  ririht  or  centre, 
for  that  of  left  file. 

The  deployment  on  the  right  or  the  centre  will  be  made  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  above ;  in  this  latter  case,  the  centre  of  the 
platoon  Avill  be  marked  by  the  right  group  of  fours  in  the  second  sec- 
tion ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  this  group, 
and  serve  as  the  guide  of  the  platoon  during  the  deployment. 

In  whatever  manner  the  deployment  be  made,  on  the  right,  left,  or 
centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of  fours  will  always  deploy  at  five  paces 
from  each  other,  and  upon  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered 
file.  The  deployments  will  habitually  be  made  at  twenty  paces  inter- 
val ;  but  if  a  greater  interval  be  required  it  will  be  indicated  in  the 
command. 

If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers,  so  near  the  main  body 
as  to  render  a  reserve  unnecessary,  the  entire  company  will  be  extended 
in  the  same  manner,  and  according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for  the 
deployment  of  a  platoon.  In  this  case,  the  third  lieutenapt  will  com- 
mand the  fourth  section,  and  a  non-commissioned  ofiicer  designated  for 
that  purpose,  the  second  section  ,•  the  fifth  sergeant  will  act  as  centre 
guide ;  the  file-closers  will  place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the 
line,  and  opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle.  The  first  and  second 
lieutenants  will  each  have  a  bugler  near  them. 

To  deploy  by  the  Jiank. 
265.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain   shall  wish  to 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  147 

deploy  it   by  the  flank,   holding   the  first  pLatoon   in  reserve,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Second  platoon  —  as  skirmishers.     2.  By  the  right  flank — take 
intervals.     3,  March  (or  douhle  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  place  them- 
selves, respectively,  two  paces  behind  the  centres  of  the  first  and 
second  sections  of  the  second  platoon:  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon  ;  the 
third  sergeant,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the  right 
of  the  front  rank  of  the  same  platoon.  The  captain  will  indicate  to 
him  the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct  his  march.  The  chief 
of  the  first  platoon  will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chief 
of  the  second  platoon.  No.  264.  The  fourth  sergeant  will  place  himself 
on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  sergeant  will  remain  on  the 
right  flank. 

At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  behind  the  left  group  of  their  respective  sections. 

At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will  face  to  the  right 
and  commence  the  movement;  the  left  group  of  fours  will  stand  fast, 
but  will  deploy  as  soon  as  there  is  room  on  its  right,  conforming  to 
what  has  been  prescribed.  No.  2(14;  the  third  sergeant  will  place  him- 
self on  the  left  of  the  right  group,  to  conduct  it;  the  second  group 
will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  one  on  its  left,  the  third  group  at 
twenty  paces  from  the  second,  and  so  on  to  the  right.  As  the  groups 
halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy,  and  deploy  as  has  been  explained  for 
the  left  group. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular  attention  to  the  successive 
deployments  of  the  groups,  keeping  near  the  group  about  to  halt,  so  as 
to  I'ectify  any  errors  which  may  be  committed.  When  the  deployment 
is  completed,  they  will  place  themselves  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  their  sections,  as  has  been  heretofore  prescribed.  The  non- 
commissioned ofliicers  will  also  place  themselves  as  previously  indi- 
cjilcd. 

As  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
causing  it  to  face  about,  will  move  it  as  indicated.  No.  264. 

The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank  according  to  the  same 
principles,  substituting  left  flank  for  right  /tank. 

266.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deploy  the  company  upon  the 
centre  of  one  of  the  platoons,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skii'mishers.     2.  By  the   right  and  left 
flanks — take  intervals.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


148         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  first  command,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officer?  will 
conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed.  No.  265. 

At  the  second  command,  the  first  lieutenant  will  place  himself  behind 
the  left  group  of  the  right  section  of  the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieu- 
tenant behind  the  right  group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same  platoon. 

At  the  command  mnreli,  the  right  section  will  face  to  the  right,  the 
left  section  will  face  to  the  left,  the  group  on  the  right  of  this  latter 
section  will  stand  fast.  The  two  sections  will  move  off  in  opposite 
directions ;  the  third  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right 
file  to  conduct  it,  the  second  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  left  file.  The 
two  groups  nearest  that  which  stands  fast  will  each  halt  at  twenty 
paces  from  this  group,  and  each  of  the  other  groups  will  halt  at  twenty 
paces  from  the  group  which  is  in  rear  of  it.  Each  group  will  deploy  as 
heretofore  prescribed,  No.  264. 

The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct  the  movement,  holding 
themselves  always  abreast  of  the  group  which  is  about  to  halt. 

The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be  made  on  any  named 
group  whatsoever;  in  this  case  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself 
before  the  group  indicated,  and  the  deplojanent  will  be  made  according 
to  the  principles  heretofore  prescribed. 

The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed,  according  to  the  same 
principles. 

To  extend  intervals.  "^ 

267.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend  a  line  of  skir- 
mishers, will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
deployments. 

If  it  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is  at  a  halt,  and  that 
the  captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to  the  left,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces),  extend  intervals.    2.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  command  march,  the  group  on  the  right  will  stand  fast,  all  the 
other  groups  will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  group  will  extend  its  inter- 
val to  the  prescribed  distance  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  265. 

The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to  preserve  between  each 
other  the  distance  of  five  paces,  unless  the  nature  of  the  ground  should 
render  it  necessary  that  they  should  close  nearer,  in  order  to  keep  in 
sight  of  each  other.  The  intervals  refer  to  the  spaces  between  the 
groups,  and  not  to  the  distances  between  the  men  in  each  group.  The 
intervals  will  be  taken  from  the  right  or  left  man  of  the  neighboring 
group. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRIMISIIERS.  149 

If  the  lino  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the  front,  and  the  captain 
should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces')^  extend  intervals.  2.  Makch 
(or  double  quick — March). 

The  loft  group,  conducted  b}^  the  guide,  will  continue  to  march  on  the 
point  of  direction ;  the  other  groups  thi'owing  forward  the  left  shoulder, 
and  taking  the  double  quick  step,  will  open  their  intervals  to  the  pre- 
scribed distance. 

Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre  of  this  line,  according  to 
the  same  principles. 

If,  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that  one  company  or  pla- 
toon should  occupy  a  line  which  had  been  previously  occupied  by  two, 
the  men  of  the  company  or  platoon  which  is  to  retire,  will  fall  suc- 
cessively to  the  rear  as  they  arc  relieved  by  the  extension  of  the  inter- 
vals. 

To  close  intervals. 

268.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals,  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  deployments. 

If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to 
close  intervals  to  the  loft,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  left  Jiank  (so  many  paces')^  close  intervals.    2.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  will  stand  fast,  the  other 
groups  will  face  to  the  left  and  close  to  the  prescribed  distance,  each 
group  facing  to  the  enemy  as  it  attains  its  proper  distance. 

If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  captain  will  command: 

1.   On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces),  close  intervals.    2.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  continue  to  move  on  in 
the  direction  previously  indicated;  the  other  groups,  advancing  the 
right  shoulder,  will  close  to  the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced  to 
the  prescribed  distance. 

Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on  the  centre,  according  to 
the  same  priucii)lcs. 

When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order  to  reinforce  a  line  of 
skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause  two  companies  to  cover  the  ground  which 
had  been  previously  occupied  by  one,  the  new  company  will  deploy  so 


150  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

as  to  finish  its  movement  at  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  it  is  to 
occupy,  and  the  men  will  successively  move  upon  that  line,  as  they  shall 
be  unmasked  by  the  men  of  the  old  company.  The  reserves  of  the  two 
companies  will  unite  behind  the  centre  of  the  line. 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

269.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  be  relieved,  the  captain 
will  be  advised  of  the  intention,  which  he  will  immediately  communi- 
cate to  the  first  and  second  lieutenants. 

The  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment  forward,  so  as  to  finish 
the  movement  at  about  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new  company,  by  command 
of  their  captain,  will  advance  rapidly  a  few  paces  beyond  the  old  line 
and  halt;  the  new  line  being  established,  the  old  company  will  assemble 
on  its  reserve,  taking  care  not  to  get  into  groups  of  fours  until  they  are 
beyond  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

If  the  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  marching  in  retreat,  the  com- 
pany thrown  out  to  relieve  them  will  deploy  by  the  flank,  as  prescribed. 
No.  265  and  following.  The  old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire 
with  order,  and  having  passed  the  new  line,  they  will  form  upon  the 
reserve. 

To  advance. 

To  advance  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line. 

270.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  is  march- 
ing by^he  front,  the  guide  will  be  habitually  in  the  centre.  No  par- 
ticular indication  to  this  effect  need  be  given  in  the  commands,  but  if, 
on  the  contrary,  it  be  intended  that  the  directing  guide  should  be  on  the 
right,  or  left,  the  command  guide  right,  or  guide  left,  will  be  given  im- 
mediately after  that  of  forward. 

The  captain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmishers  to  advance,  will  cdtn- 
mand: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March^. 

This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the  greatest  rapidity  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections,  and  in  case  of  need,  by  the  sergeants.  This  rule 
is  general,  whether  the  skirmishers  march  by  the  front  or  by  the  flank. 

At  the  first  command,  three  sergeants  will  move  briskly  on  the 
line,  the  first  on  the  right,  the  second  on  the  left,  and  the  third  in  the 
centre. 

At  the  cummaud  march,  the  line  will  move   to   the  front,  the   guide 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  151 

charged  with  the  direction  will  move  on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  the 
skirmishers  will  hold  themselves  alif^ncd  on  this  guide,  and  preserve 
their  intervals  toward  him. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  immediately  behind  their  sections 
so  as  to  direct  their  movements. 

The  captain  will  give  a  general  siii)erintcndence  to  the  movement. 

When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  he  will  command  : 

Halt. 

At  this  command,  l)riskly  repeated,  the  line  will  halt.  The  chiefs  of 
sections  will  prompt!}^  rectify  any  irregularity  in  the  alignment  and 
intervals,  and  after  taking  every  possible  advantage  which  the  ground 
may  otfer  for  protecting  the  men,  they,  with  the  three  sergeants  in  the 
lino,  will  retire  to  their  proper  places  in  rear. 

271.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skirmishers  in  retreat,  will 
command : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will  move  on  the  line,  as 
prescribed.  No.  270. 

At  the  command  mnrch,  the  skirmishers  Avill  face  about  individually 
and  march  to  the  rear,  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed,  No. 
270. 

The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exertion  to  preserve  order. 

To  halt  the  skirmishers,  marching  in  retreat,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt  and  immediately  face  to 
the  front. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  guides  will  each  conform  himself 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  270. 

To  change  direction. 

272.  If  the  commander  of  the  line  of  skirmishers  shall  wish  to  cause 
it  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Pught  wheel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  mark  time  in  his  place  j 
the  left  guide  will  move  in  a  cnrcle  to  the  right,  and  that  he  may  prop- 
erly regulate  his  movements,   will  occasionally   cast  his    eyes    to   the 


152  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA.     . 

right,  so  as  to  observe  the  direction  of  the  line  and  the  nature  of  the 
ground  to  be  passed  over.  The  centre  guide  will  also  march  in  a  circle 
to  the  right,  and,  in  order  to  conform  his  movements  to  the  general 
direction,  will  take  care  that  his  steps  are  only  half  the  length  of  the 
steps  of  the  guide  on  the  left. 

The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of  their  steps  by  the  distance 
from  the  marching  flank,  being  less  as  they  approach  the  pivot  and 
greater  as  they  are  removed  from  it;  they  will  often  look  to  the  march- 
ing flank  so  as  to  preserve  the  direction  and  their  intervals. 

When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to  reSume  the  direct 
march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  cease  to  wheel,  and  the  skir- 
mishers will  move  direct  to  the  front ;  the  centre  guide  will  march  on 
the  point  which  will  be  indicated  to  him. 

If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in  place  of  moving  it 
to  the  front,  he  will  command : 

Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  line  will  halt. 

A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  made  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat  will  change  direction  by 
the  same  means  and  by  the  same  commands  as  a  line  marching  in 
advance ;  for  example,  if  the  captain  should  wish  to  reface  his  left, 
now  become  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Left  wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  enemy. 
But  if,  instead  of  halting   the  line,  the   captain  should  wish  to  con- 
tinue to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will,  when  he  judges  the  line  has  wheel- 
ed sufficiently,  command  : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March. 


To  inarch  hy  the  flank. 

273.  The  captain,  Avishing    the   skirmishers    to   march   by   the  right 
flank,  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  flank.     2.  March  (or  double  quick— Marcu). 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  lOO 

At  the  first  command  the  three  sergeants  will  place  themselves  on 
the  line. 

At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right,  and 
move  off;  the  right  guide  will  \A-aq.c  himself  b}'  the  side  of  the  leading 
man  on  the  right  to  conduct  him,  and  will  march  on  the  point  indi- 
cated; each  skirmisher  will  take  care  to  follow  exactly  in  the  direction 
of  the  one  immediately  preceding  him,  and  to  preserve  his  distance. 

The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the  left  flank,  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  riyht; 
the  left  guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  to  con- 
duct him. 

If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and  the  ca})taiu  should 
wish  to  halt  them,  he  will  command  : 

Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  Avill  halt  and  face  to  the  enemy. 
The  ofiicers  and  sergeants  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed. 
No.  270. 

The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements  of  the  line,  and  be 
held  always  about  150  paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  position  to  second 
its  operations. 

When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Platoon,  forward.     2.   Guide  left.     3.  March. 

If  he  should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

At  the  coniiniind  hult,  it  will  reface  to  the  enemy. 

The  men  should  be  made  to  understand  tliat  the  signals  or  com- 
mandi?,  such  as  fonvard,  mean  that  the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the 
enemy;  in  retreat,  that  they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  riyht  or  left  Jtauk 
that  the  men  must  face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever  may  be  their  po- 
sition. 

If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and  the  captain  should 
wish  to  change  direction  to  the  right  (or  left),  he  will  command: 

1.  By  file  right  (or  left).     2.  March. 

These  movements  will  also  be  executed  by  the  signals,  No.  2C2. 


154  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

THE     FIRINGS. 

274.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

To  fire  at  a  halt. 
To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  captain  will  command  : 
Commence — Firing. 

At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  men  of  the  front  rank  will 
commence  firing;  they  will  reload  rapidly,  and  hold  themselves  ii? 
readiness  to  fire  again.  During  this  time  the  men  of  the  fear  rank 
will  come  to  a  ready,  and  as  soon  as  their  respective  file-leaders  have 
loaded,  they  will  also  fire  and  reload.  The  men  of  each  file  will  thus 
continue  the  firing,  conforming  to  this  principle,  that  the  one  or  the 
other  shall  always  have  his  piece  loaded. 

Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to  aim  with  accuracy; 
they  should,  moreover,  endeavor  to  estimate  correctly  the  distances 
between  themselves  and  the  enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled 
to  deliver  their  fire  with  the  greater  certainty  of  success. 

Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place  whilst  reloading, 
unless  protected  by  accidents  in  the  ground. 

To  fire  marching. 

275.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  as  the  fire  at 
a  halt. 

At  the  command,  commence  firing,  if  the  line  be  advancing,  the 
front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  fire,  and  reload  before  throw- 
ing himself  forward.  The  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will 
continue  to  march,  and  after  passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his 
front  rank  man  will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select  his  object,  and  fire 
when  his  front  rank  man  has  loaded;  the  fire  will  thus  continue  to 
be  executed  by  each  tile ;  the  skirmishers  will  keep  united,  and 
endeavor,  as  much  as  possible,  to  preserve  the  general  direction  of 
the  alignment. 

If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  command,  commence 
firing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  face  to  the  enemy 
fire,  and  then  reload  Avhilst  moving  to  the  rear ;  the  i"ear  rank  man 
of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  halt  ten  or  twelve  paces 
beyond  his  front  rank  man,  face  about,  come  to  a  ready  and  fire, 
when   his  front  rank  man  has  passed  him  in  retreat  and  loaded;  after 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  155 

which,  he  will  move  to  the  rear  aud  reload  ;  the  front  rank  man  in 
his  turn,  after  marching  briskly  to  the  rear,  will  halt  at  ten  or  twelve 
paces  from  the  rear  rank,  face  to  the  enemy,  load  his  i:tiece  and  fire, 
conforming  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed:  the  firing  will  thus  be 
continued. 

If  the -company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  at  the  command, 
commence  firinr/,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  face  to  the 
enemy,  stejD  one  pace  forward,  halt  and  fire ;  the  rear  rank  man  will 
continue  to  move  forward.  As  soon  as  the  front  rank  man  has  fired, 
he  will  place  himself  briskly  behind  his  rear  rank  man  and  reload 
whilst  marching.  When  he  has  loaded,  the  rear  rank  man  will,  in 
his  turn,  step  one  pace  forward,  halt  and  fire,  and  returning  to  the 
ranks  will  place  himself  behind  his  front  rank  man ;  the  latter,  in 
his  turn,  will  act  in  the  same  manner,  observing  the  same  principles. 
At  the  command,  cease  firing,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake 
their  original  positions,  if  not  alrendy  there. 

If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the  fire  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles,  but  in  this  case  it  will  be  the 
rear  rank  men  who  will  be  first. 

The  following  rules  will  be  observed  in  the  cases  to  which  they 
apply  : 

If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at 
the  command,  forward — March,  it  will  be  the  men  whose  pieces 
are  loaded,  without  regard  to  the  parti^^ular  rank  to  which  they 
belong,  who  will  move  to  the  front.  Those  men  whose  pieces  have 
been  discharged  will  remain  in  their  j^laces  to  load  them  before 
moving  forward,  and  the  firing  Avill  be  continued  agreeably  to  the 
principles  ^jrescribed  above. 

If  the  line  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or  whilst  march- 
ing by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  in  retreat — March,  the  men  whose 
pieces  are  loaded  will  remain  faced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  fire  in 
this  position  ;  the  men  whose  pieces  are  discharged  will  retreat  load- 
ing them,  aud  the  fire  will  be  continued  agreeably  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  the  fire  in  marching  in  retreat. 

If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or 
in  retreat,  at  the  command,  hy  the  riyht  (or  left)  fiank — March,  the 
men  whose  pieces  are  loaded  will  step  one  pace  out  of  the  general 
alignment,  face  to  the  enemy,  and  fire  in  this  position;  the  men 
whose  pieces  are  unloaded  will  face  to  the  right  (or  left)  and  march 
in  the  direction  indicated.  The  men  wlio  stepped  out  of  the  ranks 
will  place  themselves,  immediately  after  firing,  upon  the  general 
direction,   aud   in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear   rank  men,   as   the    case 


156  MAxNUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

may  be.  The  fire  will  be  contiuued  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  tiring  when  marching  by  a  flank. 

Skirmishers  will  be  habituated  to  load  their  pieces  whilst  marching; 
but  they  will  be  enjoined  to  halt  always  an  instant,  when  in  the  act  of 
charging  cartridge  and  priming. 

They  should  be  practised  to  fire  and  load  kneeling,  lying  down, 
and  silting,  and  much  liberty  should  be  allowed  in  these  exercises, 
in  order  that  they  may  be  executed  in  the  manner  found  to  be  most 
convenient.  Skirmishers  should  be  cautioned  not  to  forget  that,  in 
whatever  position  they  may  load,  it  is  important  that  the  piece  should 
be  placed  upright  before  ramming,  in  order  that  the  entire  charge  of 
powder  may  reach  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

In  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same  rank  should  not  all 
fire  at  once,  and  the  men  of  the  same  file  should  be  particular  that 
one  or  the  other  of  them  be  always  loaded. 

In  retreating,  the  oflScer  commanding  the  skirmishers  should  seize 
on  every  advantage  Avhich  the  ground  may  present  for  arresting  the 
enemy  as  long  as  possible. 

At  the  signal  to  cease  fir iiKj,  the  captain  will  see  that  the  order  is 
promptly  obeyed;  but  the  men  who  may  not  be  loaded,  will  load. 
If  the  line  be  marching  it  will  continue  the  movement;  but  the  man 
of  each  file  who  happens  to  be  in  front  will  wait  until  the  man  in 
rear  shall  be  abreast  with  him. 

If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  advancing,  at  the  command  halt, 
the  line  will  re-form  upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  front;  when 
the  line  is  retreating,  upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  rear. 

276.  Officers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  possible  vigilance 
over  a  line  of  skirmishers:  in  battle,  they  should  neither  carry  a 
riflie  or  foAvling  piece.  In  all  the  firings,  they,  as  well  as  the  ser- 
geants, should  see  that  order  and  silence  are  preserved,  and  that  the 
skirmishers  do  not  wander  imprudently ;  they  should  especially  cau- 
tion them  to  be  calm  and  collected;  not  to  fire  until  they  distinctly 
perceive  the  objects  at  which  they  aim,  and  are  sure  that  those  objects 
are  within  proper  range.  Skirmishers  should  take  advantage  promj)tly, 
and  with  intelligence,  of  all  shelter  and  of  all  accidents  of  the  ground, 
to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  protect 
themselves  from  his  fire.  It  may  often  happen  that  intervals  are 
momentarily  lost  when  several  men  near  each  other  find  a  common 
shelter;  but  when  they  quit  this  position  they  should  immediately 
resume  their  intervals  and  their  places  in  line,  so  that  they  may 
not,  by  crowding,  needlessly  expose  themselves  to  the  fire  of  the 
enemy. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  157 

THE       RALLY. 

To  form  column. 

277.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied  in  order  to 
oppose  the  enemy  with  better  success;  the  rallies  are  made  at  a  run, 
and  with  bayonets  fixed:  when  ordered  to  rally,  the  skirmishers  fix 
bayonets  without  command. 

There  are  several  ways  of  rallying,  v/hich  the  chief  of  the  line  will 
adopt  according  to  circumstances. 

If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely  disturbed  by  scattered 
horsemen,  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  fall  back  on  the  reserve,  but  the 
captain  will  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  should, 
however,  advance  to  charge  the  skirmishers,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand, raJhj  by  fours.  The  line  Avill  halt  if  marching,  and  the  four 
men  of  each  group  will  execute  this  rally  in  the  following  manner : 
the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file  will  take  the  position 
of  fjnard  agniust  cavalri/ ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  odd  numbered 
file  will  also  take  the  position  of  guard  against  cavalry,  turning  his 
back  to  him,  his  right  foot  thirteen  inches  from  the  right  foot  of  the 
former,  and  parallel  to  it;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  odd  file,  and 
the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even*file,  will  also  place  themselves  back 
to  back,  taking  a  like  position,  and  between  the  two  men  already 
established,  facing  to  the  right  and  left ;  the  right  feet  of  the  four 
men  will  be  brought  together,  forming  a  square,  and  serving  for 
mutual  support.  The  four  men  in  each  group  will  come  to  a  ready, 
fire  as  occasion  may  ofl'er,  and  load  without  moving  their  feet. 

The  captain  and  chiefs  of  sections  will  each  cause  the  four  men  who 
constitute  his  guard  to  form  square,  the  men  separating  so  as  to  enable 
him  and  the  bugler  to  place  themselves  in  the  centre.  The  three 
sergeants  will  each  promptly  place  himself  in  the  group  nearest  him  in 
the  line  of  skirmishers. 

Whenever  the  captain  shall  judge  these  squares  too  weak,  but  should 
wish  to  hold  his  position  by  strengthening  his  line,  he  will  command  : 

Rally  hy  sections. 

278.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  move  rapidly  on 
the  centre  grt)up  of  their  respective  sections,  or  on  any  other  inferior 
group  whose  position  might  ofi"er  a  shelter,  or  other  particular  advan- 
tage;  the  skirmishers  will  collect  rapidly  at  a  run  on  this  group,  and 
without  distinction  of  numbers.  The  men  composing  the  group  on 
which  the  Ibrraation  is  made  will  immediately  form  square,  as  hereto- 


158  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

fore  explained,  and  elevate  their  pieces,  tbe  bayonets  uppermost,  in 
order  to  indicate  the  point  on  which  the  rally  is  to  he  made.  The 
other  skirmishers,  as  they  arrive,  will  occupy  and  fill  the  open  angular 
spaces  between  these  four  men,  and  successively  rally  around  this  first 
nucleus,  and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  compact  circle.  The 
skirmishers  will  take,  as  they  arrive,  the  position  of  charge  bayonet, 
the  point  of  the  bayonet  more  elevated,  and  will  cock  their  pieces  in 
this  position.  The  movement  concluded,  the  two  exterior  ranks  will 
fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load  without  moving  their  feet. 

The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his  guard,  wherever  he  may 
judge  his  presence  most  necessary. 

The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular  to  observe  that  the  rally 
is  made  in  silence,  and  with  promptitude  and  order;  that  some  pieces 
in  each  of  their  subdivisions  be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the  fire  is 
directed  on  those  points  only  where  it  will  be  most  effective. 

If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will  form  into  a  circle  around 
its  chief. 

If  the  captain,  or  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers  formed  of 
many  platoons,  should  judge  that  the  rally  by  section  does  not  offer 
sufficient  resistance,  he  will  cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  executed, 
and  for  this  purpose,  will  command : 

Rally  hy  plUtoons. 

279.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, and  by  the  same  means,  as  the  rally  by  sections.  The  chiefs  of 
platoon  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of 
section. 

The  captain,  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers  on  the  reserve,  will 
command  : 

Rally  on  the  resei've. 

280.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  briskly  on  the  reserve; 
the  officer  who  commands  it  will  take  immediate  steps  to  form  square ; 
for  this  purpose,  he  will  cause  the  half  sections  on  the  flanks  to  be 
thrown  perpendicularly  to  the  rear;  he  will  order  the  men  to  come  to 
a  ready. 

The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the  run,  will  form  rapidly 
into  groups,  and  upon  that  man  of  each  group  who  is  nearest  the  centre 
of  the  section.  These  groups  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  toward 
each  other  and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  into  sections,  with  the 
greatest  possible  rapidity,  while  moving  to  the  rear  ;  the  officers  and 
sergeants  will  see  that  this  formation  is  made  in  proper  order,  and  the 
chiefs  will  direct  their  sections  upon  the  refc^erve,  taking  care  to  unmask 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.         159 

it  to  the  right  and  left.  As  the  skirmishers  arrive,  they  will  continue 
and  complete  the  formation  of  the  square  begun  bj^  the  reserve,  closing 
in  rapidly  upon  the  latter,  without  regiird  to  their  places  in  line;  they 
will  come  to  a  readj'  without  command,  and  fire  upon  the  enemy; 
which  will  also  be  done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked  b.y  the 
skirmishers. 

If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cavalry  while  retreating, 
its  chief  will  command,  halt ;  at  this  command,  the  men  will  form 
rapidly  iuto  a  compact  circle  around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his 
section  and  resume  the  march,  the  moment  he  can  do  so  with  safety. 

The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt  and  efficient  manner, 
requires  coolness  and  activity  on  the  part  of  both  officers  and  ser- 
geants. 

The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment  of  respite  which  the 
enemy's  cavalry  may  leave  him ;  as  soon  as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor 
to  place  himself  beyond  the  reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a 
position  where  he  may  defend  himself  with  advantage,  or  by  returning 
to  the  corps  to  which  he  belongs.  For  this  purpose,  being  in  square, 
he  will  cause  the  company  to  break  into  column  by  platoons  at  half 
distance;  to  this  eftect,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

yVt  the  command  viarch,  each  platoon  will  dress  on  its  centre,  and 
the  platoon  which  was  facing  to  the  rear  will  face  about  without  com- 
mand. The  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  their 
respective  platoons,  those  of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves 
at  half  distance  from  those  of  the  first,  counting  from  the  rear  rank. 
These  disj^ositions  being  made,  the  captain  can  move  the  column  in 
whatever  direction  he  may  judge  proper. 

If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  immediately  face  by  the 
rear  rank,  and  move  off  in  the  opposite  direction.  As  soon  as  the 
column  is  in  motion,  the  captain  will  command  : 

3.   Guide  right  (or  left^. 

He  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading  guide;  the  guides  will 
march  at  their  proper  distances,  and  the  men  will  keep  aligned. 
If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  captain  will  command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  March. 


160  MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt;  the  first  platoon  will 
face  about  briskly,  and  the  outer  half  sections  of  each  platoon  will  be 
thrown  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and  third 
fronts  of  the  square.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  promptly  rectify 
any  irregularities  which  may  be  committed. 

If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  in  advance,  the  captain  will 
command  : 

1.  Form,  column.     2.  March. 

Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  above. 

The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March).     3.  Guide 

left  (or  right). 

At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  move  forward,  and  at  the 
third  command,  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of 
the  guide. 

If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain  ground  to  the  right 
or  left,  he  will  do  so  by  rapid  wheels  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide, 
and  for  this  purpose  will  change  the  guide  whenever  it  may  be  neces- 
sary. 

281.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at  half  distance,  right 
in  front,  the  captain  can  deploy  the  first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the 
means  already  explained ;  but  if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the 
second  platoon  forward  on  the  centre  file,  leaving  the  first  platoon  in 
reserve,  he  will  command: 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.     2.   On  the  centre  file — take 
intervals.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  caution  his 
platoon  to  stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  sections  of  the  second  platoon  will 
place  themselves  before  the  centre  of  their  sections;  the  fifth  sergeant 
will  place  himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  pla- 
toon. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section,  second  pla- 
toon, will  command:  Section,  right  face ;  the  chief  of  the  left  section: 
Section,  left  face. 

At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will  move  off  briskly  in  oppo- 
site directions,  and  having  unmasked  the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of 
sections  will  respectively  command  :  By  the  left  flank — March,  and 
By  the  right  flank — March  ;  and  as  soon  as  these  sections  arrive  on 
the  alignment  of  the  first  platoon,  they  will  command  :  As  skirmishers — 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  161 

March.  The  groups  will  then  deploy  according  to  prescribed  princi- 
ples, on  the  right  group  of  the  left  section,  which  will  be  directed  by 
the  fifth  sergeant,  on  the  point  indicated. 

If  the  captain  should  wish  the  dejiloyment  made  by  the  flank,  the 
second  platoon  will  be  moved  to  the  front  by  the  means  above  stated, 
and  halted  after  passing  some  steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the  first 
platoon  ;  the  deployment  Avill  then  be  made  by  the  flank  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed. 

When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as  skirmishers,  and  the 
captain  should  wish  to  rally  them  on  the  battalion,  he  will  command  : 

Rally  on  the  battalion. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve,  no  matter 
what  position  the  company  to  which  they  belong  may  occupy  in  order 
of  battle,  will  rapidly  unmask  the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing 
themselves  in  a  run  toward  its  nearest  flank,  and  then  form  in  its 
rear. 

As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed  beyond  the  line  of  file- 
closers,  the  men  will  take  the  quick  step,  and  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
or  section  will  re-form  his  subdivision,  and  place  it  in  column  behind 
the  wing  on  which  it  is  rallied,  and  at  ten  paces  from  the  rank  of  file- 
closers.  These  subdivisions  will  not  be  moved  except  by  order  of  the 
commander  of  the  battalion,  who  may,  if  he  thinks  proper,  throw  them 
into  line  of  battle  at  the  extremities  of  the  line,  or  in  the  intervals 
between  the  battalions. 

If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the  same  wing  of  a  bat- 
talion, or  behind  any  shelter  Avhatsoever,  they  should  be  formed  always 
into  close  column,  or  into  column  at  half  distance. 

When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  company  of  skirmishers,  shall  be 
formed  into  square,  the  platoons  and  sections  of  the  covering  company 
Avill  be  directed  by  their  chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will  be 
opened  at  the  angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers,  who  will  be  then 
formed  into  close  column  by  platoons  in  rear  of  the  first  fi'ont  of  the 
stjuare. 

If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles  of  the  square  from  being 
opened,  the  skirmishers  will  throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front 
rank  men,  the  right  knee  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  piece  resting 
on  the  thigh,  the  bayonet  in  a  threatening  position.  A  part  may  also 
place  themselves  about  the  angles,  where  they  can  render  good  service 
by  defending  the  sectors  without  fire. 

If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  arc  rallied  be  in  column 
ready  to  form  square,  the  skirmishers  will  be  formed  into  close  column 
14 


162  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

by  platoon,  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  third  division,  and  at  the  com- 
mand, Form  square — MARCH,  they  will  move  forward  and  close  on  the 
buglers. 

When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  platoon  or  section  behind  the 
wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it  be  wished  to  deploy  them  again  to  the 
front,  they  will  be  marched  by  the  flank  toward  the  intervals  on 
the  wings,  and  be  then  deployed  so  as  to  cover  the  front  of  the  battal- 
ion. 

When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the  interior  of  squares  or  col- 
umns, are  to  be  deployed,  they  will  be  marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and 
then  thrown  forward,  as  is  proscribed,  No.  281 ;  as  soon  as  they  shall 
have  unmasked  the  column  or  square,  they  will  be  deployed,  the  one  on 
the  right,  the  other  on  the  left  file. 

The  assembly. 

283.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  assembled  when 
there  is  no  longer  danger  of  its  being  disturbed  ;  the  assembly  will  be 
made  habitually  in  quick  time. 

The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmishers  on  the  reserve,  will 
command  : 

Assemble  on  the  reserve. 

At  this  command  the  skirmishers  will  assemble  by  groups  of  fours ; 
the  front  rank  men  will  place  themselves  behind  their  rear  rank  men  ; 
and  each  group  of  fours  will  direct  itself  on  the  reserve,  where  each 
will  take  its  proper  place  in  the  ranks.  When  the  company  is  re- 
formed, it  will  rejoin  the  battalion  to  which  it  belongs. 

It  may  be  also  proper  1o  assemble  the  skirmishers  on  the  centre,  or 
on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line,  either  marching  cr  at  a  halt. 

If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble  them  on  the  centre  while 
marching,  he  will  command  : 

Assemble  on  the  centre. 

At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  continue  to  march  directly  to 
the  front  on  the  point  indicated:  the  front  rank  man  of  the  directing 
file  will  follow  the  guide,  and  be  covered  by  his  rear  rank  man;  the 
other  two  comrades  of  this  group,  and  likewise  those  on  their  left,  will 
mai-ch  diagonally,  advancing  the  left  shoulder  and  accelerating  the 
gait,  so  as  to  re-form  the  groups  while  draAving  nearer  and  nearer  the 
directing  file;  the  men  of  the  right  section  will  unite  in  the  same  man- 
ner into  groups,  and  then  upon  the  directing  file,  throwing  forward  the 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  168 

right  shoulder.  As  they  successively  unite  on  the  centre  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder. 

To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  bo  executed  according  to 
the  same  jjrinciples. 

The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat  will  also  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  the  front  rank  men  marching  behind 
their  rear  rank  men. 

To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt,  and  on  the  line  they 
occupy,  the  captain  will  give  the  same  commands ;  the  skirmishers  will 
face  to  the  right  or  left,  according  as  they  sh6uld  march  by  the  right 
or  left  flank,  re-form  the  groups  while  marching,  and  thus  arrive  on 
the  file  which  served  as  the  point  of  formation.  As  they  successively 
arrive,  the  skirmishers  will  support  arms. 


164  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Article    V. 
TAEGET    PRACTICE. 

28i.  In  order  that  fire-arms  in  the  hands  of  soldiers  may  produce 
their  full  effect,  it  is  necessary, 

1st.  That  the  soldier  should  have  sufficient  knowledge  of  the  parts 
of  his  piece  to  enable  him  to  take  it  apart  and  put  it  together  again  for 
the  purpose  of  keeping  it  in  order. 

2d.  That  the  soldier  should  know  hoAV  to  load  his  piece  properly. 
Tlie  school  of  the  soldier  contains  all  that  is  necessary  on  this  subject. 

3d.  That  the  rules  for  firing  his  piece  should  be  known  ,•  that  is  to 
say,  that  he  knows  the  manner  of  regulating  his  aim  according  to  the 
distance  of  the  object  to  be  hit. 

4th.  That  he  should  be  practiced  in  estimating  distances  within  the 
range  of  his  piece. 

5th.  That  he  should  be  able  to  take  a  position  which  enables  him, 
To  aim  with  ease  ; 

To  keep  the  body  steady,  without  constraint; 
Not  to  incline  the  sights  to  the  right  or  left  j 
To  sup])ort  the  recoil. 

Gth.  When  pressing  on  the  trigger  to  discharge  the  piece,  not  to 
derange  his  aim. 

The  above  comprises  all  that  is  necessai-y  for  the  soldier  to  know, 
and  put  in  practice,  in  order  that  he  may  obtain  the  maximum  ettect  of 
his  arm. 

EXERCISE    PREPARATORY    TO    FIRING. 

2S5.  In  the  exercises  which  constitute  this  lesson,  the  company  will 
bo  divided  into  as  many  squads  as  there  are  instructors  available. 
When  the  exorcise  is  conducted  on  the  drill-ground,  the  squads  will  be 
foruied  in  one  rank,  wiMi  an  interval  of  one  pace  between  the  files;  and 
efpiipped  as  fur  drill.  The  bayonet,  as  a  general  rule,  will  be  in  the 
scabbard,  unless  otherwise  directed. 


TARGET    PRACTICE.  165 


Aiming. 

286.  Instruction  in  aiming  will  be  given  at  first  in  the  quarters,  if 
practicable.  A  bag,  partially  filled  with  sand  or  earth,  is  placed  on  a 
bench,  the  bench  on  a  table  :  by  striking  the  bag  with  the  back  of  the 
hand,  an  indentation  will  be  formed  in  which  the  piece  can  be  rested. 
The  piece  is  now  placed  on  the  bag,  and  aimed  by  the  instructor  on 
some  object,  such  as  a  wafer  on  the  wall,  being  careful  that  the  sights 
incline  neither  to  the  right  or  left.  He  now  points  out  to  his  squad  the 
two  points  which  determine  the  line  of  sight;  that  is,  tlic  top  of  the 
front  or  muzzle  sight,  and  the  middle  of  the  notch  of  the  hausse  or 
breech  sight.  The  instructor  explains  that  aiming  consists  in  bringing 
these  two  points  and  the  object  aimed  at  in  the  same  riglit  line. 

Eacli  man,  in  turn,  placing  himself  behind  the  butt  of  the  piece, 
without  touching  it,  closing  the  left  eye,  looks  through  the  middle  of 
the  notch  of  tlie  breech  sight,  over  the  top  of  the  front  sight,  and  on 
the  centre  of  the  wafer  upon  which  the  line  of  sight  was  previously 
directed,  and  satisfies  himself  that  these  three  points  are  in  the  same 
right  line.  The  instructor  will  now  derange  the  gun,  and  then  call  up 
each  soldier  in  turn,  who  will  aim  the  piece  at  the  point  indicated :  he 
will  criticise  the  aiming,  pointing  out  to  each  of  them  their  error  or 
errors,  if  any  are  found,  by  making  them  see  that  the  object  aimed  at 
is  not  in  the  line  of  sight,  but  that  this  line  passes  to  the  right,  left, 
above,  or  below,  as  the  case  may  be.  After  having  rectified  the  aiming 
of  each  soldier,  the  instructor  will  be  careful  to  derange  the  piece. 
This  exercise  will  be  repeated;  but,  instead  of  the  instructor  rectifying 
errors  himself,  he  will  first  call  up  the  men  of  his  squad  in  turn,  and 
ask  each  if  the  line  of  sight  passes  to  right,  left,  above,  or  below  the 
point  indicated,  or  whether  the  piece  inclines  to  the  right  or  left. 
When  the  men  have  expressed  their  opinions,  the  instructor  will  give 
his  own,  correcting  thus  all  the  errors  which  have  been  committed. 
The  instructor  will  repeat  this  exercise  as  often  as  may  be  necessary. 

Two  drills,  of  two  hours  each,  devoted  to  the  first  part  of  the  instruc- 
tion in  aiming,  Avill  be  sufficient  to  teach  the  generality  of  men  the 
principles  of  aiming  a  gun  with  the  raised  sight  <lown. 

In  a  third  drill,  the  instructor  will  explain  to  his  squad  the  use  of 
the  different  parts  of  ]\is  piece,  the  rules  for  firing,  the  oV»jcrt  and  use 
of  the  raised  sight,  by  traciitg  tlic  figures  on  a  boar<i,  table  or  floor. 
Explain  that  the  line  of  fire  is  the  axis  of  the  gun  indefinitely  pro- 
duced, that  the  ball  describes  a  curved  line  during  its  flight,  that  the 
line  of  sight  is  a  right  line  passing  through  the  middle  of  the  notch  of 
the  rear  sight  and  the  top  of  front  sight,  that  the  point-blank  is  the 


166  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

second  intersection  of  the  trajectory,  or  curve,  with  the  line  of  sight. 
Assuming  the  i^oint-blank  of  a  gun,  with  the  hausse  down,  to  be  200 
yards,  he  will  explain  to  his  squad,  that  to  hit  a  man  in  the  head  at 
200  yards,  aim  at  his  head;  at  150,  at  his  throat;  at  100,  at  his  chest, 
and  so  on.  Thus,  with  the  assistance  of  a  curved  line,  and  a  few 
simple  remarks  adapted  to  the  comprehension  of  any  man  of  ordinary 
intelligence,  the  squad  will  receive  a  lesson  which  many  will  lind  useful 
in  practice,  and  but  few  will  forget.  The  instructor  will,  from  time  to 
time  during  the  drill,  question  the  men,  and  satisfy  himself  that  he  is 
clearly  understood.  The  instructor  will  also  add,  that  by  the  use  of 
the  hausse  or  raised  sight,  the  number  of  point-blanks  are  increased, 
and  explain  the  reason. 

The  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth  drills  that  follow  will  take  place  on  the 
drill-ground,  and  squads  will  be  exercised  in  aiming  at  any  distance 
between  100  and  1,000  yards,  or  up  to  that  point  for  which  the  aim  is 
sighted.  Each  squad  is  provided  with  a  target,  a  bag  partially  filled 
with  sand,  and  a  tripod,  formed  of  poles  about  six  feet  long,  tied  or 
fastened  near  the  top.  The  tripod  is  placed  in  an  upright  j)Osition,  the 
sand-bag  on  the  tripud,  and  the  piece  on  the  sand-bag.  Each  man  aims 
his  own  gun.  When  he  pronounces  his  piece  correctly  aimed,  the  in- 
structor calls  up  the  remainder  of  the  squad  in  turn,  who  examine  the 
piece,  and  inform  the  instructor,  in  a  low  tone,  how,  in  their  opinion, 
the  gun  is  sighted.  He  then  examines  the  piece  himself,  pronounces 
how  the  gun  is  aimed,  calls  up  those  who  answer  incorrectly,  and,  hav- 
ing satisfied  them  of  their  errors,  requires  the  man  who  aimed  the 
piece,  to  correct  his  mistake.  Should  it  be  desirable  to  economize  tar- 
gets, one  target  will  answer  for  the  different  squads  of  the  same  com- 
pany during  this  part  of  the  drill:  in  that  case  the  tripods  will  be 
placed  as  near  together  as  practicable.  Soldiers  who  have  previously 
been  thoi'ouglil}^  instructed  in  this  part  of  the  exercise,  and  show  a 
knowledge  of  the  first  four  drills,  ma}'  be  excused  from  the  last  two. 


Position  of  a  Skirmisher  aiming  standing. 

287.  AVhen  the  men  can  aim  correctly  from  a  rest,  they  will  be  in- 
structed in  the  above  position. 

Squads  under  arms  will  be  formed  in  a  single  rank,  with  an  interval 
of  one  pace  between  the  files. 

The  instructor,  facing  the  squad,  will  give  the  details  of  the  position, 
executing  the  same  himself  as  he  describes  them. 


TARGET    PRACTICE.  167 

Aiming  with  sight  down  {when  rifled  musket  is  used). 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

First  motion.  As  first  motion  of  "  charge  bayonet,"  except  that  the 
right  foot  is  carried  fifteen  inches  to  rear  of  left  heel. 

Second  motion.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  to  the 
right  side,  the  barrel  uppermost;  seizing  it  with  the  left  hand  in  rear 
of  the  hausse  or  breech  sight,  the  stock  resting  in  the  palm  of  this 
hand,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  left  elbow  close  to  the 
body,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eye.  Cock  the  piece  with  the  thumb  of 
the  right  hand,  the  fingers  supported  against  the  guard  and  the  small 
of  the  stock  ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand. 

Third  motion.  Turn  in  slightly  the  left  toe,  raise  the  piece  with  both 
hands;  place  the  butt  firmly  against  the  shoulder,  the  body  erect,  the 
left  elbow  close  to  the  body;  sliut  the  left  eye,  raise  the  right  shoulder 
in  order  to  bring  the  sight  to  the  height  of  the  right  eye,  the  elbow 
raised  nearly  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder;  aim,  keeping  the  line  of 
sight  horizontal  and  in  the  vertical  plane  of  fire,  inclining  as  little  as 
possible  the  head  to  the  right,  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  over  the 
small  of  the  stock,  the  last  joint  of  the  first  finger  of  the  right  hand  in 
front  of  but  not  touching  the  trigger,  the  remaining  fingers  under,  and 
grasping  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Aiming  ivith  sight  down  (when  rifle  is  used). 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

First  motion.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand;  make  a  half-face 
to  the  right  on  the  left  heel ;  place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  opposite 
to,  and  fifteen  inches  from,  left  heel ;  the  feet  square ;  seize  the  piece 
at  the  same  time  with  the  left  hand  in  rear  of  the  hausse  or  breech 
sight,  the  thumb  extending  along  the  stock. 

Second  motion.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands  ;  the  barrel 
vippermost,  the  left  elbow  close  to  the  body,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the 
eye.  Cock  the  piece  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  the  fingers  sup- 
ported against  the  guard  and  the  small  of  the  stock.  Seize  the  piece 
at  the  small  of  the  stock  with  tlie  right  hand. 

Third  ^notion.     Same  as  that  given  for  rifled  musket. 

The  instructor  directs  each  man  to  tsike  the  position,  commencing  on 
the  right  of  the  squad :  during  the  instruction  he  will  assist  the  soldier 
in  supporting  his  arm  by  placing  his  riglit  hand  under  or  near  the  mid- 


168  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

die  band.  After  which,  the  man  is  made  to  take  the  position  without 
any  assistance.  The  commands  given  in  order  to  make  a  soldier  take 
or  abandon  the  positions  as  given  above,  will  be : 

As  a  skirmisher — Aim.     Cease — Aiming. 

At  the  first  part  of  the  last  command,  withdraw  the  finger  from  in 
front  of  the  trigger  ;  at  the  command  aiming,  retake  the  position  of  the 
second  motion  of  "Aiming  with  sight  down;"  half-cock  the  piece,  and 
come  to  a  shoulder.  As  the  instructor  proceeds  with  the  squad,  he 
will  direct  those  who  have  been  instructed  to  exercise  themselves 'In 
taking  the  position,  keeping  it  for  an  instant,  and  then  abandoning  it, 
repeating  this  as  often  as  they  can  Avhile  the  rest  are  being  instructed. 
Men  will  be  cautioned  not  to  cock  the  piece  when  repeating  the  instruc- 
tion. The  squad  will  now  be  exercised  in  aiming  together,  keeping 
them  in  the  position  long  enough  to  confirm,  but  not  long  enough  to 
fatigue  them.  This  drill  may  be  conducted  in  the  quarters.  In  this 
case  the  instructor  will  drill  but  one  man  at  a  time ;  the  remainder  will 
exercise  themselves  in  taking  and  abandoning  the  position  as  he  pro- 
ceeds. Two  drills  will  be  given  to  the  above  exercise.  One  will  suflSce 
for  soldiers  who  have  been  previously  instructed. 

During  the  drill,  the  soldier  will  not  be  required  to  aim  at  any  fixed 
point,  the  object  being  that  he  may  acquire  with  ease  the  position  of  a 
soldier,  "  aiming  as  a  skirmisher,  standing,"  and  the  habit  of  readily 
catching  with  his  eye  the  two  points  which  determine  the  line  of  sight. 

When  the  men  are  confirmed  in  the  position  described  above,  they 
will  be  exercised  at  aiming  at  a  mark.  First  with  the  sight  down  :  one 
drill  will  be  given  to  this  exercise.  Previous  to  the  man's  aiming,  the 
instructor  will  order  him  to  direct  the  line  of  sight  below  the  point  to 
be  aimed  at;  to  raise  the  piece  slowly  until  the  line  of  sight  is  on  the 
point  designated,  preserving  his  aim  for  an  instant,  keeping  the  body 
and  gun  immovable.  During  the  first  part  of  this  drill  the  men  will  be 
instructed  individually. 

The  men  will  now  be  exercised  in  aiming,  using  the  hausse  for  ranges 
for  which  it  is  graduated,  and  the  intermediate  ones. 

Aiming  with  sight  raised  (when  rijied  musket  and  rifle  are  used). 

One  time  and  four  motiona. 

Fimt  and  Second,     Same  as  "Aiming  with  sight  down." 
Third  motion.     Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  both  hands,  at  the  same 
time  depressing  the  muzzle  until  the  piece  is  horizontal,  the  left  arm  and 
stock  against  the  body  ;  with  the   thumb  and  first  finger  of  the  right 


TARGET    PRACTICE. 


m 


hand  regulate  the  haussc  for  the  distance  indicated,  and  seize  the  piec^ 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Fourth  motion.     Same  as  third  motion,  '^  Aiming  with  sight  down." 

Two  drills  will  be  given  to  this  exercise  :  during  the  first  drill,  the 
men  will  be  instructed  indiv^idually,  commencing  with  the  lower 
sights,  and  then  causing  the  hausse  to  be  raised  graduall3'. 

The  position  of  a  soldier  aiming  as  a  skirmisher  cannot  always  be 
taken  exactly  in  the  same  manner,  as  it  will  be  found  necessary  to 
lower  the  shoulder  and  arms  in  proportion  as  the  hausse  is  elevated  : 
without  moving  the  bodj',  or  inclining  the  head,  the  soldier,  by  lower- 
ing the  shoulder  and  arms,  can  take  any  line  of  sight  from  250  to 
1,000  yards.  This  will  be  found  a  good  exercise  for  the  men.  In 
order  to  aim  at  objects  800,  900  and  1,000  yards  distant,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  press  the  heel  of  the  butt  of  the  piece  against  the  shoulder. 
If  men  have  short  necks  the  position  is  constrained,  and  cannot  be 
taken  properly.  Instructors  perceiving  this  difficulty  will  exercise 
their  judgment  in  requiring  men  to  take  the  position  above  designated 
when  firing  at  these  long  ranges. 

During  the  second  drill,  squads  formed  on  the  drill  ground  will  be 
exercised  in  aiming  together,  using  the  different  lines  of  sight  for 
which  the  hausse  is  regulated.  In  this  drill,  the  bayonet  will  be  fixed 
when  aiming  at  distances  not  less  than  400  j^ards. 

Position  of  a  soldier  kneeling  and  aiming  as  a  skirmisJier. 

288.  The  instruction  will  be  ^ivcn  without  times  or  motions.  The 
instructor  will  command: 

Take  the  position  of  a  skirmisher  kneeling  and  aiming  ; 

or, 

Cease —  Aiming. 

The  instructor  will  detail  the  position  of  a  skirmisher  kneeling  and 
aiming,  as  follows :  The  squad  is  supposed  to  be  at  shouldered  arms, 
the  files  one  pace  apart.  Take  the  position  of  present  arms;  then 
carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to  the  right  of  the  left  heel,  and  in 
a  position  convenient  for  placing  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground 
in  bending  the  left  leg ;  place  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground,  lower 
the  piece,  the  left  forearm  supported  upon  the  thigh  on  the  same  side, 
the  right  hand  on  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right 
thigh,  the  left  hand  supporting  the  piece  near  the  lower  band.  Move 
the  right  leg  to  the  left,  around  the  knee  supported  on  the  ground, 
15 


170         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

until  this  leg  is  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  left  foot, 
and  thus  seat  himself  on  the  right  heel.  Raise  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand  and  support  it  with  the  left,  holding  it  near  the  lower 
band,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh  near  the  knee.  With 
the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand  regulate  the  hausse,  if 
necessary ;  cock  the  piece,  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of 
the  stock,  the  right  shoulder  raised  or  lowered  according  to  the  posi- 
tion of  the  target,  the  right  elbow  nearly  to  the  height  of  the  shoul- 
der:  aim  at  the  point  indicated,  keeping  the  top  of  the  muzzle  sight 
and  the  bottom  of  the  notch  of  the  hausse  in  the  vertical  plane  of  fire, 
the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  over  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  last  joint 
of  the  first  finger  of  the  right  hand  in  front  of  but  not  touching  the 
trigger,  the  other  fingers  of  this  hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock. 
The  instructor,  having  taken,  and  detailed  at  the  same  time,  the  posi- 
tion of  a  skirmisher  kneeling  and  aiming,  will  instruct  the  men  in 
aiming  from  this  position,  in  conformity  with  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  Two  drills  will  be  given  to  this 
exercise.  One  will  suffice  for  soldiers  previously  instructed  in  the 
drill. 

Keeping  the  piece  steady  when  the  trigger  is  pulled. 

289.  It  is  easy  to  preserve  the  aim  until  the  trigger  is  pressed  upon 
in  order  to  discharge  the  piece )  but,  when  this  is  done,  the  aim  is 
maintained  with  diflSculty.  When  pressing  on  the  trigger  the  line  of 
sight  is  apt  to  be  deranged :  although  properly  directed  before  touch- 
ing the  trigger,  it  may  not  be  so  at  the  moment  the  discharge  takes 
place.  The  report  of  the  discharge  of  his  piece  should  find  the  soldier 
still  preserving  his  aim.  The  soldier  will  attain  this  if  he  holds  his 
breath  from  the  moment  he  commences  to  touch  the  trigger  until  the 
gun  is  discharged ;  if  he  does  not  pull  the  trigger  with  a  jerk,  or  sud- 
denly, but  increases  the  pressure  on  the  trigger  by  degrees ;  if  he 
places  his  finger  in  such  a  manner  upon  the  trigger  as  to  exercise  its 
full  force,  pressing  not  on  the  extremity  of  the  finger,  but  on  the  last 
joint,  or  as  near  this  joint  as  the  conformation  of  the  man  will  permit. 
The  instructor,  holding  a  gun  in  a  convenient  position  similar  to  that 
of  charge  bayonet,  will  point  out  to  each  soldier  in  succession  the 
manner  of  pulling  the  trigger,  which  will  be  done  with  the  first  finger 
of  the  right  hand  as  described  above,  the  remaining  fingers  of  this 
hand  under  and  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  over  the 
stock. 

The  men  repeat  after  the  instructor,  in  succession,  what  he  has  just 
executed.     After  this  has  been  repeated  as  often  as  necessary,  the  in- 


TARGET    PRACTICE.  171 

striictor  exi>lains  to  his  squad  how  they  should  manage  in  order  to  fire 
without  deranging  the  position  of  the  piece  after  bringing  the  line  of 
sight  to  bear  on  an  object.  He  will  explain  and  execute  this  as  fol- 
lows : 

Press  upon  the  trigger  by  degrees  with  the  last  joint  of  the  first 
finger  of  the  right  hand,  closing  the  muscles  of  this  finger  without 
moving  the  arm,  holding  the  breath,  the  sound  of  the  discharge  finding 
the  soldier  preserving  the  line  of  sight  upon  the  point  aimed  at.  Re- 
main aiming  an  instant  after  the  gun  is  discharged,  to  be  assured  that 
the  object  is  still  in  the  line  of  sight.  In  actual  firing,  it  will  be  im- 
possible to  preserve  the  aim  the  instant  the  gun  is  discharged  ;  but, 
should  the  gun  hang  fire,  the  soldier  accustomed  to  remain  an  instant 
aiming  will  be  more  apt  to  make  a  good  shot. 

The  instructor  should  make  the  soldier  understand  that  a  good 
marksman  is  known  by  the  steadiness  with  which  he  preserves  his  gun 
when  it  misses  fire. 

The  men  will  be  made  to  take  one  or  the  other  of  the  positions  of  a 
soldier  aiming,  as  laid  down  in  No.  287.  They  will  be  permitted  to 
snap  the  gun  without  any  commands  being  given  to  that  efi'ect.  The 
instructor  will  indicate  the  distance,  either  assumed  or  real,  of  the  tar- 
get, and  will  see  that  the  men  use  the  sights  corresponding  to  those 
distances.  The  instructor  will  command,  for  instance,  ''Take  the 
position  of  a  'skirmisher  aiming  standing'  at  600  yards  aim." 

The  exercise  given  in  this  article  is  considered  of  great  importance. 
It  will  be  repeated  for  four  drills.  Two  will  sufiice  for  those  men  who 
have  been  previously  instructed. 


Simulated  firing  with  caps. 

290.  This  is  the  same  as  the  preceding,  except  that  a  cap  will  be 
used,  and  it  will  not  be  necessai-y  to  explain  to  the  soldier  the  manner 
of  pulling  the  trigger.  S«(uads  assembled  in  the  quarters  will  be  made 
to  aim  at  a  lighted  candle,  which  will  be  placed  three  feet  or  more 
from  the  mixzzle  of  the  gun.  The  line  of  sight  will  be  brought  to  bear 
below  the  flame;  then,  gradually  raising  the  piece  until  the  line  of 
sight  is  directly  on  the  flame,  the  cap  will  be  exploded :  if  the  cone 
and  barrel  of  the  piece  are  perfectly  clear,  and  the  piece  correctly 
sighted,  the  body  kept  steady  when  aiming  and  at  the  moment  the  cap 
explodes,  the  candle  will  be  extinguished.  Simulated  firing  with  caps 
will  be  executed  in  two  drills.  Ten  caps  per  man  will  be  exploded  at 
each  drill ;  eight  caps  standing  and  two  kneeling. 


172  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Simulated  firing  with  blank  cartridges. 

291.  Firing  with  blank  cartridges  will  be  conducted  in  conformity 
with  the  principles  laid  down.  The  squad  will  be  formed  on  the  drill 
ground,  as  prescribed  in  No.-£87.  The  men  will  fire  in  succession  at  a 
target,  placed  or  supposed  to  be  placed  at  different  distances.  The 
rules  laid  down  in  the  foregoing  examples  relating  to  a  soldier  aiming 
will  be  strictly  followed.  This  lesson  will  be  executed  in  two  drills ; 
ten  cartridges  will  be  fired  per  man  at  each  drill  ,•  eight  standing  and 
two  kneeling. 

The  object  of  these  drills  is  to  accustom  the  men  to  preserve  their 
aim  when  firing. 

Estimating  distances. 

292.  The  company  assembled   fully   equipped    as    for    drill    will  be 

divided  into  at  least  three  squads,  or  as  many  as  there  are  company 

ofiicers  present.     Each  officer  is  provided  with  a  small  cord,  25  yards 

long.     The  instructor  will  measure  on   the  ground  a  right  line,  which 

will  be  marked  ofi"  into  distances, 

n     f;A     inn     i  ^n     onn           a     0,50,100,150,200, 
0,  50,  100,  150,  200,  yards:- — ; — ; ■ — 

,  J  'Mill 

marking  these  distances,  as  measured,  with  a  stake,  stone  or  line,  on 
the  ground.  He  will  now  direct  each  man  of  his  squad  to  pace  off" 
the  measured  distance  of  100  yards,  cautioning  them  to  be  careful 
and  preserve  their  natural  gait,  without  attempting  to  increase  or 
diminish  the  length  of  their  step.  He  will  direct  the  men  to  count 
the  number  of  steps  they  take  in  passing  over  the  distance  of  100 
yards.  This  having  been  repeated  at  least  three  times  by  each 
soldier,  who  reports  each  time  the  number  of  steps  taken  by  him  in 
passing  over  100  yards,  the  ratio  which  a  yard  bears  to  the  step  of 
each  soldier  becomes  known.  The  instructor  will  inform  each  soldier 
the  number  of  steps  it  will  be  necessary  for  him  to  take  to  pass  over 
10  yards.  The  soldier  now  knowing  the  number  of  steps  he  must 
take  to  pass  over  10  and  100  yards,  it  will  be  easy  for  him  to  measure 
any  distance  with  sufficient  accuracy  for  all  practical  purposes  when 
firing. 

To  estimate  a  distance  greater  than  TOO  yards — in  steps — the  sol- 
dier, having  started  from  the  point  of  departure,  will  count  the 
number  of  steps  he  should  take  to  pass  over  100  yards;  extending 
as  a  tally,  at  the  moment  of  arrival,  the  thumb  of  his  right  hand, 
the  other  fingers  closed:  he  will  recommence  then  his  count,  ex- 
teading  the  first  finger  of  the  right  hand  when  he  has  counted  the 


TARGET    PRACTICE.  173 

number  of  steps  necessary  to  make  a  second  100  yards,  and  so  on, 
until  he  arrives  at  a  point  less  than  100  yards  from  the  point  up  to 
which  he  is  to  measure.  AVhen  the  soldier  finds  himself  less  than 
100  yards  from  the  object,  he  will  count  by  tens,  saying,  **  Ten 
yards,"  when  he  has  counted  the  number  of  steps  necessary  for  him 
to  pass  over  the  distance  of  10  yards,  20,  30  yards,  and  so  on,  until 
he  arrives  very  near  the  object,  when  he  will  increase  the  length 
of  his  step,  counting  each  step  a  yard;  and,  by  adding  these  to  the 
tens,  he  will  then  only  have  to  count  as  hundreds  the  number  of 
fingers  he  has  raised  to  know  the  whole  distance  expressed  in 
yards. 

The  instructor  will  form  his  squad  at  one  of  the  extremities  of 
the  200  3'ai-d  line,  which  has  been  measured  in  such  a  way  that  the 
right  line  measui'ed  shall  be  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  squad. 
He  will  order  four  men  to  place  themselves,  the  first  at  the  point 
marked  50  yards,  the  second  at  the  point  marked  100  yards,  the 
third  at  the  point  marked  150  yards,  and  the  fourth  at  the  point 
marked  200  yards.  The  men  selected  should  be  as  near  the  saine 
height  as  practicable.  The  instructor  will  now  direct  the  attention 
of  the  squad  to  the  different  parts  of  the  dress,  arms,  equipment, 
and  figure  of  the  men  on  the  line,  such  as  can  be  easily  distinguished 
and  recognized  at  50  yards,  and  such  as  cannot  be  readily  recognized 
at  this  distance.  He  questions  each  man  of  his  squad  on  these  points, 
not  expecting  all  to  answer  alike,  since  the  eyesight  of  men  will  gener- 
ally differ. 

The  instructor  will  now  call  the  attention  of  the  men  to  the  soldier 
placed  at  the  point  100  yards  distant,  and  cause  them  to  make  similar 
observations  upon  this  man  as  those  already  prescribed  for  the  soldier 
at  50  yards.  The  instructor  again  questions  the  men,  and  will  be 
careful  to  point  out  to  them  the  difference  that  exists  between  those 
two  distances,  as  illustrated  by  the  difference  in  the  appearance  of  the 
same  objects  at  these  distances.  The  instructor  will  make,  in  suc- 
cession, upon  the  two  men  placed  at  150  and  200  yards,  similar  ob- 
servations as  prescribed  for  the  men  at  50  and  100  yards;  being  very 
careful  to  call  the  attention  of  each  man  to  the  difference  which  exists 
between  the  four  distances,  illustrated  by  the  distinctness  with  which 
certain  objects  are  seen.  The  instructor  will  direct  the  squad  to  notice 
that  men  appear  smaller  the  farther  they  are  off,  although  in  reality 
they  are  nearly  the  same  height.  The  men  stationed  at  the  different 
points  will  be  frequently  replaced  by  others.  When  the  men  of  the 
squad  have  made  a  sufficient  number  of  observations  upon  the  four 
distances  above  indicated,  and  when  these  observations  are  well  im- 


174         MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

pressed  on  their  memories,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  squad  to 
estimate  intermediate  distances  between  50  and  200  yards. 

In  order  to  do  this,  the  instructor  will  march  his  squad  to  a  different 
part  of  the  ground  from  that  on  which  he  measured  the  distances  in 
the  first  instance,  and  form  it  in  one  rank.  He  now  sends  out  one 
man,  directing  him  to  halt  at  a  given  signal.  The  instant  this  man 
steps  off,  the  squad  is  faced  about,  in  order  that  the  men  may  not  count 
the  steps  taken.  When  the  man  proceeds  a  sufficient  distance,  he  will 
be  halted,  facing  toward  the  squad.  The  squad  will  now  be  faced  to 
the  front.  The  men  will  estimate  the  distance  which  separates  them 
from  the  soldier.  The  instructor  cautions  the  squad  to  recollect  the 
observations  made  by  them  upon  the  men  placed  at  the  measured  dis- 
tances. The  instructor,  placing  himself  a  short  distance  from  the 
squad,  calls  each  man  to  him  in  turn,  directing  them  to  give  in  their 
estimates  in  a  low  voice.  This  is  necessai-y,  in  order  that  no  man 
may  be  influenced  in  his  judgment  by  the  opinion  of  another.  The 
instructor  will  now  cause  the  distance  to  be  measui'cd,  and,  at  the 
same  time,  stepped  oif  by  the  men.  The  instructor  now  points  out 
to  the  men  the  errors,  if  any  were  committed,  in  estimating  the  dis- 
tance. In  order  to  do  this  more  distinctly,  he  may  send  a  man  to 
the  point  from  which  the  squad  started,  pointing  out  all  errors  by 
observations  on  this  man.  The  instructor  will  repeat  this  exercise 
as  often  as  in  his  judgment  is  necessary,  taking  care  each  time  to 
choose  a  different  distance,  but  always  between  the  limits  above 
indicated. 

Estimating  distances  should  take  place  under  different  conditions  of 
the  atmosphere,  cloudy,  foggy,  etc. ;  and,  if  the  locality  permits,  squads 
should  be  drilled  on  ground  the  outline  of  which  is  diversified  by  hills, 
ravines,  etc. 

When  the  instructor  judges  that  the  men  of  his  squad — who  should, 
if  possible,  be  the  same  during  these  exercises — have  acquired  a  suffi- 
cient accuracy  in  estimating  distances  comprised  between  50  and  200 
yards,  he  will  proceed  to  estimate  distances  comprised  between  200  and 
400  yards.  To  accomplish  this,  he  will  cause  to  be  measured  a  dis- 
tance of  400  yards,  and  mark,  upon  the  right  line  so  measured,  dis- 
tances of 

0,  200,  250,  300,  350,  and  400  yards;   0>  ^00> ^^0- ^00,  350,  400. 

J  '    I     I       I       I       I       I 

The  squads  will  be  formed  as  explained.  The  instructor  now  orders 
five  men  to  place  themselves,  the  first  at  200,  the  second  at  250,  the 
third  at  300,  the  fourth  at  350,  and  the  fifth  at  400  yards,  facing  the 
squad  and  resting  on  their  arms.  He  will  make  upon  these  different 
distances  observations  similar  to  those  already  made  upon  the  lesser 


TARGET   PRACTICE.  175 

distances,  and  for  that  of  200  yai'ds.  This  last  distance  should  be  the 
object  of  particular  attention  and  study.  The  instructor  will  cause 
distances  comprised  between  200  and  400  yards  to  be  estimated  as 
explained  for  the  lesser  distances. 

When  the  men  have  acquired  sufficient  accuracy  in  estimating  dis- 
tances comprised  between  200  and  400  yards,  they  will  be  made  to  esti- 
mate distances  comprised  between  60  and  400  yards. 

This  having  been  accomplished,  distances  will  be  no  longer  estimated 
on  single  individuals,  but  on  groups  of  men. 

Each  company,  under  the  command  of  its  captain,  will  be  divided 
into  two  platoons,  commanded  by  the  first  and  second  lieutenants, 
when  not  s-uperintending  the  firing  of  a  class.  The  captain  will  keep 
himself  with  one  of  the  two  ])latoons,  having  an  eye  to  the  exercise. 
The  chief  of  each  platoon,  having  halted  his  platoon  in  a  favorable 
position  indicated  by  the  captain,  will  bring  his  platoon  to  an  order, 
and  rest.  A  group,  composed  of  a  corporal,  a  drummer  or  bugler,  and 
two  men,  will  proceed  immediately  in  front  of  the  platoon,  following  a 
line  indicated  by  the  chief  of  platoon,  who  will  point  out  to  the  corpo- 
ral two  points  on  this  line  upon  which  to  direct  himself.  The  corporal, 
having  passed  over  a  distance  of  200  yards,  but  not  exceeding  700, 
will  be  at  liberty  to  halt  his  group.  He  will  then  place  the  men  one 
pace  apart,  in  one  rank,  and,  facing  the  platoon,  bring  them  to  an 
order,  and  rest,  and  take  his  place  on  the  right  of  the  rank,  the  centre 
of  which  should  be  established  on  the  line.  The  chief  of  the  platoon 
will  now  estimate  the  distance  himself,  and  note  the  same  in  his  note- 
book. He  will  now  call  out  the  non-commissioned  officers,  receive 
their  estimates  (which  should  be  given  in  a  low  tone),  and  so  on  with 
the  men.  As  soon  as  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  platoon  commences  to 
take  down  the  estimates  of  the  men,  a  sergeant,  assisted  by  two  men 
carrying  a  cord  twenty-five  yards  long,  Avill  measure  the  distance 
which  separates  the  platoon  from  the  group,  and  note  down  the  same. 
Should  the  number  of  units  which  remain  after  having  noted  the  hun- 
dreds and  tens  be  less  or  equal  to  five,  they  will  be  rejected;  if  greater 
than  five,  they  will  be  counted  as  ten.  The  officer  having  taken  down 
the  estimates,  and  the  distance  separating  the  platoon  from  the  group 
having  been  measured,  the  officer  will  display  a  signal,  and  the  ser- 
geant who  measured  the  distance  will  indicate  the  number  of  yards  by 
causing  the  drummer  to  sound  a  roll  for  each  hundred,  and  a  single 
tap  for  tens.  The  bugler  will  indicate  the  same  by  long  and  short 
notes. 

The  group,  at  the  discretion  of  the  officer  commanding  the  platoon, 
may  be  made  to  increase  or  lessen  the  distance  which  separates  it 
from  the  platoon,  the  corporal  keeping  the  group  within   the  limits 


176  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

prescribed,  and  on  the  line  as  indicated  to  him.  When  he  halts  the 
group,  he  will  be  careful  to  establish  it  on  the  line  facing  the  platoon. 

The  sergeant  charged  with  measuring  the  distance  will  retire  a  few 
paces  from  the  line,  after  having  marked  the  point  up  to  which  he  last 
measured. 

He  will  observe  the  platoon,  and  as  soon  as  its  chief  commences 
recording  the  estimates,  he  will  measure  the  distance  which  separates 
the  group  from  its  first  station,  taking  note  of  this  distance,  and 
adding  it  to  the  first  or  substracting  it,  as  the  case  may  be. 

In  estimating  distances  comprised  between  700  and  1,000  yards,  the 
number  composing  a  group  will  be  increased  to  eight  men,  a  corporal, 
and  drummer  or  bugler.  The  groups  will  be  formed  sometimes  in  one 
and  sometimes  in  two  ranks. 

In  all  other  respects,  the  rules  laid  down  for  estimating  distances 
between  200  and  700  yards  will  be  followed. 

Instruction  in  estimating  distances  will  be  given  when  it  does  not 
interfere  with  other  parts  of  the  soldiers'  drill.  It  will,  however, 
always  precede  ball  practice,  and  be  carried  on  during  this  practice. 
When  one  squad  is  occupied  in  firing  at  the  target,  the  remaining 
squads  will  be  exercised  in  estimating  distances. 

Ofiicers,  pa^rticularly,  should  be  prompt  in  estimating  distances 
correctly,  as  they  are  called  upon  to  conduct  and  regulate  the  fire  in 
presence  of  an  enemy. 

Firing  with  Ball  Cartridges  at  Different  Distances,  Formation  of 

Classes,  etc. 

293.  The  distances  at  which  the  targets  are  placed  will  be  150,  225, 
250,  300,  325,  350,  400,  450,  500,  550,  600,  700,  800,  900,  and  1,000 
yards. 

These  distances  will  be  carefully  measured  and  staked  ofi"  on  the 
*•'  firing  ground." 

The  surfaces  fired  at  will  be, 

yards,  one  target  6  ft.  high  and  22  inches  broad. 
«         «  44 

"  "  66 

"  "  88 

"  "  110 

"  "  132 

"  "  176 

"  ''  220 

"  "  264 


at  150 

and  225 

yards, 

one 

250  and  300 

one 

325, 

350,  and 

400 

one 

450 

and  500 

one 

550 

and  600 

one 

700 

one 

800 

one 

900 

one 

1,000 

one 

TARGET    PRACTICE.  177 

Four  rounds  will  be  fired  at  each  of  the  above  distances.  The  com- 
pany will  be  divided  into  three  equal  classes,  non-commissioned  officers 
equally  distributed. 

After  the  company  has  fired  at  the  several  distances,  150,  225,  250, 
300,  325,  350,  and  400  yards,  the  classes  will  be  rearranged  according 
to  merit  of  firing, — the  first  class  composed  of  those  men  who  have  hit 
the  target  the  greatest  number  of  times,  the  second  class  of  those  who 
come  next  in  order,  and  so  on  with  the  third,  keeping  the  classes  as 
nearly  equal  as  practicable.  Non-commissioned  officers  will  not  be 
assigned  to  classes  according  to  merit,  but  according  to  rank,  a 
sergeant  in  each  class,  the  presence  of  non-commissioned  officers  being 
necessary  with  classes  when  estimating  distances,  etc.  When  the 
firing  has  been  execvited  at  the  fifteen  distances,  the  classes  will  be 
again  re-formed,  as  prescribed  above ;  previous  to  which  no  change 
will  be  made. 

Men  who,  from  unavoidable  causes,  have  missed  drills,  will  be 
placed  in  that  class  to  which  the  number  of  their  shots  that  hit  the 
target  entitles  them;  which  will  be  determined  by  a  simple  calculation. 
A  list  of  the  company,  arranged  by  classes,  will  be  kept  exposed  in 
the  quarters  until  new  lists  are  formed.  The  object  in  forming  classes 
is  that  the  officers  may  know  the  good  marksmen  in  their  companies, 
and  to  stimulate  the  pride  of  the  men. 

When  the  company  arrives  on  the  ground,  the  classes  will  be  paraded. 
The  first  class,  formed  in  one  rank,  will  take  position  ten  steps  in  rear 
of  the  point  from  which  the  firing  takes  place,  the  centre  of  the  rank 
on  and  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  fire. 

The  remaining  classes  will  be  divided  into  as  many  squads  per  class 
as  there  are  intelligent  non-commissioned  officers  available;  and  these 
squads,  superintended  by  an  officer,  will  be  exercised,  on  suitable 
ground  near  the  firing  ground,  in  estimating  distances.  When  estima- 
ting distances  greater  than  -400  yards,  the  two  classes  may  be  united,- 
in  which  case  the  detachment  will  be  commanded  by  an  officer.  The 
officer  superintending  the  firing  will  order  his  class  to  load  at  will,  and 
then  bring  them  to  a  "  support  arms,"  or  "order  arms,"  and  rest. 

Before  a  man  fires,  a  roll  on  the  drum,  or  note  on  the  bugle,  will  be 
sounded.  At  this  signal  the  markers  will  take  their  places.  At  the 
command  "Commence  firing,"  the  man  on  the  right  will  take  the  position 
in  front  of  the  squad  that  has  been  pointed  out  to  him,  and  fire,  retiring, 
as  soon  as  he  has  fired,  three  paces  in  rear  of  his  first  position;  and  so 
on  with  the  rest.  When  a  class  has  fired,  it  will  reload  at  the  commands 
"  Load  at  will,"  "  Load,"  and  thus  continue  until  the  four  shots  have 
been  expended.  Three  shots  will  be  fired  standing,  the  fourth  kneeling. 
The  firing  of  the  other  classes  will  be  conducted  in  the  same  manner. 


178  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

OfBcers  should  retire  a  short  distance  from  the  soldier  who  is  about  to 
fire,  and  be  careful  not  to  speak  to  him  when  in  the  act  of  firing. 
OfiScers  will  pay  particular  attention  that  all  the  principles  arc  followed 
which  have  been  laid  down  in  the  foregoing  articles. 

Balls  which  strike  within  the  black  lines  will  have  no  greater  value 
on  the  "record-book"  than  those  which  strike  any  other  part  of  the 
target. 

An  intelligent  non-commissioned  officer,  assisted  by  a  man,  will  place 
themselves  in  a  hole  dug  at  the  foot  and  in  front  of  the  target,  protected 
by  a  breastwork  of  earth  thrown  up  on  that  side  from  which  the  firing 
takes  place.  This  non-commissioned  officer  will  mark  the  shots  which 
strike  the  target.  He  will  be  provided  with  a  small  flag,  and  a  rod 
about  six  feet  long,  on  one  end  of  which  will  be  nailed  a  circular  disk 
of  wood,  or  other  material,  six  or  eight  inches  in  diameter,  painted  on 
one  side  white,  on  the  other  black.  When  a  ball  strikes  outside  the 
black,  he  will  cover  the  shot-hole  with  the  disk,  presenting  the  black 
side  to  the  detachment;  when  inside  the  black,  the  white  side  will  be 
presented  to  view.  Firing  will  only  be  permitted  when  the  flag  is  down. 
The  marker  should  be  provided  with  a  pot  of  paste,  a  brush  and  patches 
of  paper,  when  the  target  covered  with  muslin  is  used.  After  five  shots, 
the  marker  will  paste  patches  over  the  ball  holes,  or  otherwise  deface 
them.  When  cast-iron  targets  are  used,  the  marker  should  be  pro- 
vided with  black  and  white  paint. 

Should  it  not  be  possible  to  obtain  the  greatest  range  laid  down,  the 
entire  number  of  shots  will  nevertheless  be  fired.  The  shots,  in  that 
case,  will  be  divided  equally  between  the  150  yard  range  and  the  great- 
est available  range. 

When  the  first  class  has  nearly  completed  firing  its  four  rounds,  the 
drummer  will  be  directed  to  sound  a  roll,  or  the  bugler  the  signal 
'' Commence  firing." 

The  second  class  will  then  be  marched  to  the  position  occupied  by 
the  first,  and  execute  what  has  been  laid  down  above. 

During  the  remainder  of  the  drill,  the  first  class  will  be  exercised 
in  estimating  distances.  It  will  be  found  to  economise  time,  and  the 
record  of  shots  can  be  better  kept  by  keeping  the  same  non-commis- 
sioned officer  superintending  the  marking  of  shots  during  the  entire 
drill.  ^ 

Firing  as  Skirmishers. 

294.  The  company  will  now  be  exercised  in  firing  as  skirmishers. 
Three  drills  will  be  given  to  this  exercise.  Ten  cartridges  will  be  fired 
per  man  at  each  drill.     When  firing  as  skirmishers,  the  men  will  be 


TARGET   PRACTICE.  179 

permitted  to  take  that  position  which  suits  them  best.  The  line  of 
skirmishers  will  fire  first  advancing,  then  retreating,  conforming  to  the 
principles  laid  down  in  the  instruction  for  skirmishers.  The  targets 
will  be  six  feet  high  and  twenty-two  inches  wide,  placed  upon  a  line 
parallel  to  the  line  of  skirmishers  and  six  yards  apart. 

As  many  targets  will  be  used  as  the  nature  of  the  ground  and  a  due 
regard  to  economy  will  permit.  A  line  will  be  staked  off  parallel  to 
the  line  of  targets  and  350  yards  distant.  The  line  of  skirmishers, 
formed  a  suitable  distance  from  this  line,  will  advance  upon  it,  and 
when  on  the  line  the  command  will  be  given,  *'  Commence  firing;"  the 
line  of  skirmishers  will  advance  and  fire  five  rounds;  the  remaining 
five  will  be  fired  retreating. 

The  firing  during  the  second  drill  will  be  executed  as  laid  down  for 
the  first.  The  surface  fired  at  will  be  double ;  the  targets  placed  six 
yards  apart.  The  firing  will  commence  when  the  skirmishers  arrive 
on  a  line  600  yards  from  the  targets.  The  number  of  targets  will  not 
bo  limited.  Five  cartridges  will  be  fired  advancing  and  five  retreat- 
ing. 

Tiring  during  the  third  drill  will  commence  when  the  skirmishers 
reach  a  line  800  yards  from  the  line  of  targets.  Four  targets  will  bo 
used,  placed  12  yards  apart.  The  dimension  of  each  target  will  be  6 
feet  by  88  inches. 

Firing  by  Company  or  Rank,  and  by  Platoon. 

295.  The  exercises  in  firing  will  terminate  with  firing  by  file,  by 
company  or  rank,  and  by  platoon.  At  each  drill,  six  cartridges  per 
man  will  be  fired  by  file,  two  by  rank  or  company,  and  two  by  platoon. 
The  distances  at  which  the  several  firings  take  place  will  be  300,  400, 
and  500  yards.  The  target  used  will  be  six  feet  high  and  176  inches 
broad.  The  vertical  and  horizontal  stripes  on  this  target  will  be  12 
inches  in  width. 

The  firings  by  file,  by  company  or  rank,  and  by  platoon,  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  three  drills ;  at  the  first,  the  firing  will  commence  at  300  yards; 
the  second  at  400,  and  the  third  at  500  yards.  At  each  drill,  the  firing 
will  commence  by  file,  then  by  company  or  rank,  and  will  end  by  firing 
by  platoon.  When  firing  at  300  yards,  whether  by  file,  by  company  or 
rank,  or  platoon,  bayonets  will  be  fixed. 

As  the  position  of  soldiers  firing  by  file,  company  or  rank,  and  by 
platoon,  is  different  from  that  taken  when  firing  as  a  skirmisher,  it  will 
be  necessary,  before  executing  the  above  firings,  to  habituate  the  men 
to  the  positions  which  they  should  take  by  simulated  firings. 

The  simulated  firing  will  first  be  by  allowing  the  hammer  to  fall  upon 


180  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  cone.  The  men  will  be  made  to  take  the  positions  as  laid  down  in 
the  school  of  a  soldier  as  ai:)iilicable  to  those  diflferent  firings.  They 
will  be  accustomed  to  regulate  the  hansse  in  ranks,  putting  in  practice 
as  much  as  possible,  when  firing  in  ranks,  what  has  been  prescribed  fur 
individual  firing. 

During  the  first  part  of  the  first  drill,  ten  caps  per  man  will  be  ex- 
ploded— six  in  file  firing,  two  in  company  or  rank,  and  two  in  platoon. 
During  the  second  part  of  the  same  drill,  ten  blank  cartridges  will  be 
fired — six  by  file,  two  by  company  or  rank,  and  two  by  platoon.  The 
front  rank  will  be  made  frequently  to  change  positions  with  the  rear 
rank.  Firing  with  ball  cartridges  will  then  take  place,  preceding  each 
real  fire  by  simulated  firings,  when  the  hammer  will  be  allowed  to  fall 
upon  the  cone.  The  proper  execution  of  platoon  and  company  firing 
depends  in  a  great  degi'ee  upon  the  commands  of  the  ofiicer.  If  he 
does  not  allow  a  sufficient  interval  between  the  commands  ''Aim  "  and 
"  Pire,"  the  men  will  not  have  time  to  aim.  To  obey  the  command  in 
time,  the  trigger  will  be  pulled  suddenly.  The  result  will  be  that 
much  of  the  efficiency  of  the  fire  will  be  lost,  and  a  simultaneous  fire, 
upon  which  a  great  deal  depends,  will  not  be  obtained;  for  experience 
and  reason  demonstrate  the  fact,  everything  else  being  equal,  that  pla- 
toon-firing is  more  effective  in  proportion  as  it  is  executed  together. 
When  the  officer  leaves  a  suitable  interval  between  the  commands 
"Aim  "  and  "Fire,"  the  men  have  time  to  adjust  the  piece  to  the  shoul- 
der, to  place  the  finger  in  front  of  the  trigger,  and  to  exercise  a  slight 
pressure  on  the  trigger  when  awaiting  the  command  "Fire."  They 
are  then  ready  to  fire  the  moment  the  command  is  given,  thus  obtain- 
ing a  simultaneous  and  efi'ective  fire.  But,  if  the  officer  superintending 
the  firing  should  be  careful  to  leave  a  sufficient  interval  between  the 
commands  "Aim"  and  "Fire,"  he  should  no  less  avoid  the  opposite 
extreme.  If  he  keeps  the  men  aiming  too  long,  they  will  become 
fatigued,  will  lose  their  aim,  and  will  not  be  prepared  to  obey  the  com- 
mand when  given.  It  is  only  by  commanding,  and  seeing  platoon  and 
company  firing  executed  with  ball  and  cartridge,  and  judging  of  its 
effect  by  the  number  of  balls  put  in  the  target,  that  officers  can  appre- 
ciate the  influence  of  a  command  promptly  given,  and  acquire  the  habit 
of  thus  giving  their  commands. 

When  firing  by  file,  by  company  or  rank,  or  by  platoon,  the  officers 
will  indicate  the  distance  which  separates  the  company  from  the  object 
to  be  fired  at.  Men  in  ranks  are  necessarily  more  or  less  constrained 
in  their  movements.  Occupied,  moreover,  in  loading  their  pieces,  sol- 
diers will  not  be  able  to  judge  the  distance  which  separates  them  from 
from  the  enemy. 

The  most  suitable  moment  to  indicate  the  distance  will  be  imme- 


1  Q1 

TARGET    PRACTICE.  ^^^ 

diately  before  the  command  "Aim"  i«  given.  The  men  will  then  be  in 
a  otmon  to  regnlate  the  hausse.  To  direct  the  fire  of  a  platoon  upon 
an  enemy,  for  example,  at  400  yards,  the  officer  will  command : 

Fire  by  platoon.     Platoon-UK AiyY-at  400  yards- Am-YiRK 

— Load. 

The  above  observations  are  applicable  to  firing  by  company  or  rank 
When    firing   by   file,  the    distance  will  be    announced  immediately 
beZ    the    command    "Commence    firing,"    and    after    the    command 

"  Ready." 

Inaccuracy  of  fire  may  arise  from  very  different  causes. 

I3t.    From  ignorance  of,  or  failing  to  apply  the   principles    which 

frovern  good  marksmen  when  firing.  ,  ^     ,    ,    f,.^,„   Us 

2d.  A  ball,  when  fired,  may  be,  and  generally  is   deflected   from   its 
course  when  describing  the  trajectory. 

The  first  causes  may  be  obviated  in  a  great  degree  by  practical  and 
tViporptical  instruction.  ^. 

Th  end  i«  ».tn.,u,ablo  ,o  .he  piece,  and  ex.erio.  influence,  aCng 
upon  the  ball.  Some  of  ,he  canse,  cannot  be  mo.Me.l  by  he  mo  t 
Ikilfnl  mark.man  .  while  other,,  to  a  great  extent,  may  be  counteracted. 
It  luld  be  unreasonable  to  eM-C  comparative  perfeet.on  ,„  ...,■,,„.. 
Led  from  our  large  manufactories  Our  rifled  musUet  .  be  ,eved  « 
be  as  perfect  an  arm  of  its  kind  as  has  ever  been  made.  A  perfect  ,„m 
clu  oily  exist  i„  theory.  A  soldier  always  firing  the  same  p>cce  w.U 
Worn  acquainted  with  its  defects,  and  will  be  able  to  make  such 
allowances  when  firing  as  experience  teaches  him  to  be  neces.sary 

Among  the  exterior  influences  which  affect  the  aecura  y  of  a^  gun 
the  principal  one  is  the  wind.     If  the  wind  blows  from    he  r,gh,   the 
Wl  will    .e  deflected  to  the  left ;  to  the  right,  if  it  blows  from  the  If 
ra   ed     f  from  the  rear;  and  lowered,  if  from  the  front;  ra.scd  and    o 
he   e  .   if  it  blows  from  the  rear  and  right.     The  dcv.at.on  produced 
by  the  ;  nd  will  be  increased  in  proportion  as  the  distance  mcreases ; 
t  ilcreles  even  more  rapidly  than  the  distance.     Expertence  alone 
'a    . each  :be  soldier  the  allowance  he  must  -'■^/"^•i;;;"  „  J° 
only  does  the  wind  affect  accuracy  of  fire  by  defleetmg  the  ball  from 
course  but  it  prevents  a  person  from  holding  his  piece  steady. 

The  temperature  and  dampness  of  the  atmosphere  influence  the  ball 
inls  mgM.  It  has  been  remarked  that  in  dry  weather  longer  ranges 
have  been  obtained  than  in  damp  weather. 

When  firing  at  an  object  in  motion,  allowance  must  "f  -de  f„  th 
motion  For  instance,  when  firing  at  a  horseman  galloping  m  a  dnec 
Uotp  rpendicular  to  the  plane  of  fire,  it  is  necessary  that  the  hue  of 


182  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

sight  should  move  in  proportion  as  the  horseman  moves,  and  should  be 
directed  in  advance  of  him  in  proportion  as  he  is  farther  oflF. 

In  opening  a  fire  upon  an  enemy,  particular  attention  should  be  paid 
to  discover  where  the  first  balls  fired  strike.  It  would  be  better  that 
the  balls  fall  short  of,  rather  than  pass  over,  the  enemy.  In  the  first 
case,  we  stand  a  chance  of  a  ricochet  ball  taking  effect;  from  wliich 
we  naturally  deduce  that  a  soldier  should  be  impressed  with  the  neces- 
sitj  of  firing  too  low  rather  than  too  high. 

TARGETS. 

296.  The  difficulty  of  procuring  any  specified  material  for  targets  at 
many  posts  precludes  the  adoption  of  any  particular  target. 

The  surface  fired  at,  at  the  different  distances,  will  alone  be  fixed  by 
regulation. 

The  following  suggestions  are  offered  : 

The  best  targets,  and  those  recommended  for  permanent  posts,  are 
of  cast-iron — by  far  the  cheapest  and  most  durable.  The  different 
surfaces  required  could  be  obtained  by  having  four  cast-iron  targets 
of  the  following  dimensions:  one  target  6  feet  by  22  inches;  one  6 
feet  by  44  inches;  one  6  feet  by  66  inches;  and  one  6  feet  by  132 
inches. 

When  cast-iron  targets  cannot  be  had,  the  next  best  are  targets 
formed  of  wrought-iron  frames  with  muslin  stretched  upon  them. 
Four  frames  of  the  following  dimensions,  by  combination,  would  ena- 
ble us  to  obtain  the  surfaces  i-equired  :  one  6  feet  by  22  inches ;  one  6 
feet  by  44  inches;  one  6  feet  by  88  inches;  one  6  feet  by  110  inches; 
and  all  the  parts  could  be  carried  in  a  wagon-body. 

By  carefully  covering  the  ball-holes  with  patches  of  paper  pasted 
on,  we  strengthen  and  thicken  the  target ;  and  one  of  these  targets 
will  last  longer  than  one  would  suppose. 

The  next  best  targets  are  wooden  frames  composed  of  four  pieces,  6 
inches  wide  and  1  inch  thick,  bolted  together;  the  ends  of  the  vertical 
sides  projecting  about  a  foot  below,  and  sharpened,  the  frame  covered 
with  muslin,  and  held  in  position  by  four  guys  fastened  to  the  top  and 
attached  to  pins  in  the  ground  in  front  and  rear. 

Every  target  will  be  marked  by  a  vertical  and  a  horizontal  stripe, 
dividing  it  into  four  equal  parts,  and  varying  in  width  according  to  the 
distance,  as  follows  : 


0 

8 

12 
16 
20 


it    150 

and  225 

"  250 

"   300 

"  325 

"   350 

"  400 

450 

''      500 

"   550 

600 

"   700 

*'  800 

900 

••  1000 

SCHOOL  OF  TOE  BATTALION,  183 


Article    VI. 
SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION. 

To  form  the  Regiment  or  Battalion. 

297.  At  the  signal,  called  the  adjutant's  call,  the  companies  are 
marched  from  the  company  parades  by  their  captains,  the  music  play- 
ing. The  color  company  serves  as  the  basis  of  the  formation,  and  is 
the  first  to  form;  the  color-guard  being  at  the  point  where  the  centre 
of  the  line  is  to  rest,  one  marker  is  placed  in  front  of  it,  his  elbow 
touching  the  right  corporal  of  the  color  guard,  and  another  on  the  line 
at  a  little  less  than  company  distance  from  him,  on  his  right,  and  facing 
toward  him  ;  the  color  company  is  halted  three  paces  behind  this  line, 
faced  to  the  front,  and  dressed  up  upon  the  line  by  the  captain,  who 
aligns  it  to  the  left. 

The  company  on  the  left  of  the  color  is  the  next  to  take  its  post;  it 
is  halted  three  paces  behind  the  line,  its  right  nearly  behind  the  left 
file  of  the  color-guard,  and  faced  to  the  front ;  as  soon  as  it  halts  the 
left  guide  of  the  company  throws  himself  out,  so  as  to  be  opposite  one 
of  the  three  left  files  of  the  company,  faces  to  the  right,  and  aligns 
himself  upon  the  two  markers;  the  captain  then  places  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  color-guard,  on  a  line  with  its  front  rank,  and  aligns  the 
company  to  the  right.  The  company  on  the  right  of  the  color  forms 
next  upon  the  same  principles  ;  the  right  guide  posts  himself  upon 
the  line  opposite  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  the  company,  and 
faces  to  the  left;  the  captain  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  color 
company,  and  aligns  his  company  to  the  left. 

The  remaining  companies  take  their  posts  on  the  left  and  right  in 
succession,  and  when  the  formation  is  complete,  the  adjutant  commands, 
gtiides,  2)08ts;  at  this  command  the  guides  on  the  line  retire  to  their 
places  by  passing  through  the  intervals  between  the  companies,  and 
those  captains  who  are  on  the  left  of  their  companies,  shift  to  the  right. 


184  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Opening  and  closing  ranks,  and  the  execution  of  the  different  fires. 

To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

29S.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  will  command: 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranks. 

At  this  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  right  of  the  battalion,  the  first  on  the  flank  of  the  file- 
closers,  and  the  second  four  paces  from  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

2.   To  the  rear,  open  order.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  covering  sergeants,  and  the  sergeant  on 
the  left  of  the  battalion,  will  place  themselves  four  paces  in  rear  of 
the  front  rank,  and  opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  in  order 
to  mark  the  new  alignment  of  the  rear  rank  ;  they  will  be  aligned  by 
the  major  on  the  left  sergeant  of  the  battalion,  who  will  be  careful 
to  place  himself  exactly  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  to 
hold  his  piece  between  the  eyes,  erect  and  inverted,  the  better  to 
indicate  to  the  major  the  direction  to  be  given  to  the  covering  ser- 
geants. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  and  the  file-closers  will  step 
to  the  rear  without  counting  steps ;  the  men  will  pass  a  little  in  rear  of 
the  line  traced  for  this  rank,  halt,  and  dress  forward  on  the  covering 
sergeants,  who  will  align  correctly  the  men  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies. 

The  file-closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve  the  distance  of  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank,  glancing  eyes  to  the  right  j  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will,  from  the  right,  align  them  on  the  file-closer  of  the  left, 
who,  having  placed  himself  accurately  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank, 
will  invert  his  piece,  and  hold  it  up  erect  between  his  eyes,  the  better 
to  be  seen  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  command : 

4.  Front. 

At  this  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel,  major,  and  the  left  ser- 
geant, will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  closed  by  the  commands  pre- 
scribed for  the  instructor  in  the  school  of  the  company. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  185 


THE     FIRINGS. 

299.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  fire  by  company,  the 
fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank, 
by  the  commands  to  be  herein  indicated. 

The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file  will  always  be  direct;  the 
fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by  wing,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  may  be  either 
direct  or  oblique. 

When  the  fire  ought  to  be  oblique,  the  colonel  will  give,  at  every 
round,  the  caution  right  (or  left)  oblique,  between  the  commands  ready 
and  aim. 

The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alternately  b3'  the  right  and 
left  companies  of  each  division,  as  if  the  division  were  alone.  The 
right  companies  will  fire  first;  the  captain  of  the  left  will  not  give  his 
first  command  till  he  shall  see  one  or  two  pieces  at  a  ready  in  the  right 
company  ;  the  captain  of  the  latter,  after  the  first  discharge,  will 
observe  the  same  rule  in  respect  to  the  left  company;  and  the  fire 
will  thus  be  continued  alternately^ 

The  colonel  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  the  firing  by  wing. 

The  fire  by  file  will  commence  in  all  the  companies  at  once,  and  will 
be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company.  The 
fire  b}'^  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  rank  alternatelj'. 

The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  reserve  itself  for  the  defence  of 
the  color. 

The  Jive  hy  comjmny. 

The  colonel,  wishing  the  fire  b}-  companj'^  to  be  executed,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Fire  hy  company.     2.   Commence  firing. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  will  take 
the  positions  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

The  color  and  its  guard  will  step  back  at  the  same  time,  so  as  to 
bring  the  fi-ont  rank  of  the  guard  in  a  line  with  the  rear  rank  of  the 
l)attalion.      This  rule  is  general  for  all  the  different  firings. 

At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbered  companies  will  commence 
to  fire  ;  their  captains  will  each  give  the  commands  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company,  observing  to  precede  the  command  company  by 
that  of f  rut,  third,  fifth,  or  seventh,  according  to  the  number  of  each. 

The  captains  of  the  even  numbered  companies  will  give,  in  their  turn, 
the  same  commands,  observing  to  precede  them  by  the  number  of  their 
respective  companies. 
IG 


186  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

In  order  that  tlie  odd  numbered  companies  may  not  all  fire  at  once, 
their  captains  will  observe,  but  only  for  the  first  discharge,  to  give  the 
command  yZre  one  after  another ;  thus,  the  captain  of  the  third  com- 
pany will  not  give  the  command  jire  ixntil  he  has  heard  the  fire  of  the 
first  company  ,•  the  captain  of  the  fifth  will  observe  the  same  rule  with 
respect  to  the  third,  and  the  captain  of  the  seventh  the  same  rule  with 
respect  to  the  fifth. 

The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  to  cease  by  the  sound  to  cease  firing; 
at  this  sound,  the  men  will  execute  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  company  ,•  at  the  sound,  for  ofiicers  to  take  their  places  after  firing, 
the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  color-guard,  will  promptly  re- 
sume their  places  in  line  of  battle.  This  r^ile  is  general  for  all  the 
firings. 

The  fire  hy  wing. 

When  the  colonel  shall  wish  this  fire  to  be  executed,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

I.  Fwehywing.     2.  Right  wing.     3.  Ready.     4.  Aim.    5.  Fire. 

6.  Load. 

The  colonel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alternately,  and  he  will 
recommence  the  fire  by  the  commands  :  1.  Right  uing;  2.  Aim.; 
3.  Fire;  4.  Loab.  1.  Left  wing ;  2.  Aim;  3.  Fire;  4.  Load;  in  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

The  fire  hy  battalion. 

The  colonel  will  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  last 
prescribed,  substituting  for  the  first  two:  1.  Fire  hy  battalion;  2.  Bat- 
talion. 

The  fire  hy  file. 

To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  file.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ready.     4.   Commence  firing. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  fire  will  commence  on  the  right  of  each 
company.  The  colonel  maj-,  if  he  thinks  proper,  cause  the  fire  to  com- 
mence on  the  right  of  each  platoon. 

The  fire  hy  rank. 
To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


4 


SCHOOL    OP   THE    BATTALION.  187 

1.  Fire  hy  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Rkady.     4.  Rear  rank.     5. 
Aim.     6.  Fire.     7.  Load. 

This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  been  explained  in  the  school  of  the 
company,  in  following  the  progression  prescribed  for  the  two  ranks 
which  should  fire  alternately. 

To  fire  hy  the  rear  rank. 

When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  battalion  to  fire  to  the  rear,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Face  hy  the  rear  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ahout — Face. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants  and  file- 
closers  will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany ;  the  color-bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  and  for  this  pur- 
pose,, the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  before  the  corporal  next  on  his 
right  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  will  then  take  his  place  in  the 
front  rank ;  the  lieutenant-colonel,  adjutant,  major,  sergeant-major, 
and  the  music  will  place  themselves  before  the  front  rank,  and  face  to 
the  rear,  each  opposite  his  place  in  the  line  of  battle — the  first  two  j^ass- 
ing  around  the  right,  and  the  others  around  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face  about;  the  captains 
and  covering  sergeants  observing  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  company.  No.  230. 

The  battalion  facing  thus  by  the  rear  rank,  the  colonel  will  cause  it 
to  execute  the  dift'erent  fires  by  the  same  commands  as  if  it  were  faced 
by  the  front  rank. 

The  colonel,  after  firing  to  the  rear,  wishing  to  face  the  battalion  to 
its  propei*front,  will  command: 

1.  Face  hy  the  front  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ahout — Face. 

At  these  commands,  the  battalion  will  return  to  its  proper  front  by 
the  means  prescribed,  No.  230, 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  hattle  to  the  order  in 

column. 

To  break  the  rigid  or  left  into  column. 

300,  Lines  of  battle  will  habitually  break  into  column  by  company; 
they  may  also  break  by  division  or  by  platoon. 


188         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

It  is  here  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  break  by  company  to 
the  right  J  he  will  command: 

1.  By   company^   right  wheel.     2.  March   (or   double    quick — 

March). 

At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  rapidly  before 
the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  that  it  has  to  wheel  to  the 
right;  each  covering  sergeant  will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front  rank. 

At  the  command  march,  each  company  will  break  to  the  right, 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company ; 
each  captain  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  chiefs 
of  platoon;  the  left  guide,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  front  rank  to  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and  when  he 
shall  have  approached  near  to  the  perpendicular,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Such  com-pany.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  left 
guide  shall  be  at  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  perpendicular,  the 
company  will  halt;  the  guide  will  advance  and  place  his  left  arm  lightly 
against  the  breast  of  the  captain,  who  will  establish  him  on  the  align- 
ment of  the  man  who  has  faced  to  the  right;  the  covering  sergeant  will 
place  himself  correctly  on  the  alignment  on  the  right  of  that  man, 
which  being  executed,  the  captain  will  align  his  company  by  the  left, 
command  Front,  and  jjlace  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

The  captains  having  commanded  Front,  the  guides,  although  some 
of  them  may  not  be  in  the  direction  of  the  preceding  guides,  will  stand 
fast,  in  order  that  the  error  of  a  company  that  has  wheeled  too  much  or 
too  little  may  not  be  propagated;  the  guides  not  in  the  direction  will 
readiljr  come  into  it  when  the  column  is  put  in  march. 

A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into  column  by  company  to 
the  left,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  move  the  column  forward  without 
halting,  he  will  intimate  his  intention,  and  when  the  companies  have 
nearly  completed  the  wheel,  command: 

3.  Forward.     A.  March.     5.   Guide  left. 

To  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  into  column. 

301.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the  battalion  to  break  to 
the  rear,  by  the  right,  into  column  by  company,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies .^  to  the  rear  into  column.    2.  Battalion^ 
right — Face.      3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  189 

At  the  first  command  each  captain  will  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right ;  the  cover- 
ing sergeants  will  step  into  the  front,  rank. 

At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right :  each 
captain  will  hasten  to  the  right  of  his  company,  and  break  two  files  to 
the  rear;  the  first  file  will  break  the  whole  depth  of  the  two  ranks; 
the  second  file  less ;  which  being  executed,  the  captain  will  place  him- 
self so  that  his  breast  may  touch  lightly  the  left  arm  of  the  front  rank 
man  of  the  last  file  in  the  company  next  on  the  right  of  his  own. 
The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  place  himself  as  if  there  were  a 
company  on  his  right,  and  will  align  himself  on  the  other  captains. 
The  covering  sergeant  of  each  company  will  break  to  the  rear  with  the 
right  files,  and  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  of  the  first  file  to 
conduct  him. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to 
the  right;  the  covering  sergeant,  placed  before  this  file,  will  conduct 
it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear.  The  other  files  will  come  successively 
to  \^heel  on  the  same  spot.  The  captains  will  stand  fast,  see  their 
companies  file  past,  and  at  the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have  wheeled, 
each  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Such  conijmmj.      2.  Halt.      3.  Front.      4.  Left — Dress. 

At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front,  its  left  guide  will 
place  himself  so  that  his  left  arm  may  touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his 
captain. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  companj'^  will  align  itself  on  its  left 
guide,  the  captain  so  directing  it  that  the  new  alignment  may  be  per- 
pendicular to  that  which  the  company  had  occupied  in  line  of  battle; 
and,  the  better  to  judge  this,  he  will  step  back  two  paces  from  the 
flank. 

The  company  being  aligned,,  the  captain  will  command:  Front,  and 
take  his  place  before  its  centre. 

302.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the  colonel  shall 
Avish  to  break  into  column  by  company,  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies,  to  the  7'ear  into  column.     2.  Battal- 
ion, hy  the  right  flank.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  step  brisklj'  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  to  face  iy  the  right  Jiank. 

At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right;  each 
captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  company  and  cause  it  to 


190         MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

break  to  the  right;  the  first  file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  and  the  covering  sergeant  placed  in  front  of  this  file  will  con- 
duct it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear ;  the  other  files  will  wheel  succes- 
sively at  the  same  place  as  the  first.  The  captains  will  see  their 
companies  file  past  them  ;  when  the  last  files  have  wheeled,  the 
colonel  will  command: 

3.  Batlalion,  hy  the  left  Jiank — March.     4.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
march  in  column  in  the  new  direction.  The  captains  will  place  them- 
selves in  front  of  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies. 

To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  colonel  will  give  the  same  com- 
mands as  in  the  case  of  breaking  to  the  rear  by  the  right,  substituting 
the  indication  left,  for  that  of  right. 

The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or 
left,  in  like  manner. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column. 

303.  This  movement  may  be  executed  by  company  or  by  division, 
on  the  right  or  left  subdivision,  or  on  any  other  subdivision,  right  or 
left  in  front. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  by  division  in  rear  of  the 
first,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Close  column,  hy  division.  2.  Oti  the  frst  division,  right  in 
front.  3.  Battalion,  right — Face.  4.  March — (or  double 
quick — Ma  r  c  h)  . 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  chiefs  of  division  will  place  them- 
selves before  the  centres  of  their  divisions;  the  chief  of  the  first  will 
caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the  three  others  will  remind  them 
that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  right,  and  the  covering  sergeant  of 
the  right  company  of  each  division  will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front 
rank,  as  soon  as  the  latter  steps  out. 

At  the  third  command,  the  last  three  divisions  will  face  to  the  right; 
the  chief  of  each  division  will  hasten  to  its  right,  and  cause  files  to  be 
broken  to  the  rear,  as  indicated,  No.  301 ;  the  right  guide  will  break  at 
the  same  time,  and  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  man  of  the  first 
file,  to  conduct  him,  and  each  chief  of  division  will  place  himself  by 
the  side  of  this  guide. 

The  moment  these  divisions  face  to  the  right,  the  junior  captain  in 
each  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION.  191 

company,  who  will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank.  This  rule  ts  general 
for  all  the  ployments  hi/  division. 

At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  add,  guide 
left;  at  this,  its  left  guide  will  place  himself  on  its  left,  as  soon  as  the 
movement  of  the  second  division  may  permit,  and  the  file-closers  will 
advance  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

All  the  other  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its  chief,  will  step  off 
together,  to  take  their  places  in  the  column;  the  second  will  gain,  in 
wheeling  by  file  to  the  rear,  the  space  of  six  paces,  which  ought  to 
separate  its  guide  from  the  guide  of  the  first  division,  and  so  direct  its 
march  as  to  enter  the  column  on  a  line  parallel  to  this  division ;  the 
third  and  fourth  divisions  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  toward, 
but  a  little  in  rear  of,  the  points  at  which  they  ought,  respectively,  to 
enter  the  column;  at  six  paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the  column,  the 
head  of  each  of  these  divisions  will  incline  a  little  to  the  left,  in  order 
to  enter  the  column  as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  taking 
care  also  to  leave  the  distance  of  six  paces  between  its  guide  and  the 
guide  of  the  preceding  division.  At  the  moment  the  divisions  put 
themselves  in  march  to  enter  the  column,  the  file-closers  of  each  will 
incline  to  the  left,  so  as  to  bring  themselves  to  a  distance  of  a  pace  from 
the  rear  rank. 

Each  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will  conduct  his  division  till  he 
shall  be  up  with  the  guide  of  the  directing  one;  the  chief  will  then 
himself  halt,  see  his  division  file  past,  and  halt  it  the  instant  the  last 
file  shall  have  passed,  commanding: 

1.  Such  division.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Left — Dress. 

At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt;  the  left  guide  will 
place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction,  six  paces  from  the  guide  which 
precedes  him,  in  order  that,  the  column  being  formed,  the  divisions  may 
be  separated  the  distance  of  four  paces. 

At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  face  to  the  front;  at  the 
fourth,  it  will  be  aligned  by  its  chief,  who  will  place  himself  two  paces 
outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct  the  alignment  so  that  his  division  may 
be  parallel  to  that  which  precedes — which  being  done,  he  will  command, 
Front,  and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  division. 

The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself  in  succession  in  rear  of  the 
left  guides,  will  assure  them  on  the  direction  as  they  arrive,  and  then 
move  to  his  place  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the  column  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with  the  first  division.  In  assuring  the  guides  on 
the  direction  he  will  be  a  mere  observer,  unless  one  or  more  should 
fail  to  cover  exactly  the  guide  or  guides  already  established.  This  rule 
is  general. 


192  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  iu  front  of  the  first  division,  the  colonel  will 
give  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  that  of 
riglit  in  front. 

At  the  second  and  third  commands,  the  chiefs  of  divisions  and  the 
junior  captains  will  conform  themselves  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
above ;  but  the  chiefs  of  the  last  three  divisions,  instead  of  caus- 
ing the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  will  cause  them  to  break 
to  the  front. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  add  : 
guide  riglit. 

The  three  other  divisions  will  step  oS"  together  to  take  their  places 
in  the  column  in  front  of  the  directing  division  ;  each  will  enter  in 
such  manner  that,  when  halted,  its  guide  may  find  himself  six  paces 
from  the  guide  of  the  division  next  previously  established  in  the 
column. 

Each  chief  of  these  divisions  will  conduct  his  division,  till  his  right 
guide  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  guide  of  the  directing  one;  he  will 
then  halt  his  division,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front;  at  the  instant 
it  halts,  its  right  guide  will  face  to  the  rear,  place  himself  six  paces 
from  the  preceding  guide,  and  cover  him  exactly — which  being  done, 
the  chief  will  align  his  division  by  the  right. 

The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  in  front  of  the  right  guide  of  the 
first  division,  will  assure  the  guides  on  the  direction  as  they  succes- 
sively arrive. 

The  movement  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides^  about — Face. 

At  this,  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the  rear,  will  face  to  the 
front. 

304.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  rear,  or  in  front  of  the  fourth  division, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Close  column,  by  division.  2.  On  the  fourth  division  {left  or 
riglit),  in  front.  3.  Battalion,  left — Face.  4.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

These  movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  of 
those  which  precede,  but  by  inverse  means:  the  fourth  division  on 
which  the  battalion  ploys  will  stand  fast;  the  instant  the  movement 
commences,  its  chief  will  command,  guide  right  (or  left). 

.305.  The  foregoing  examples  embrace  all  the  principles  :  thus,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  ploy  the  battalion  on  an  interior  division,  he 
will  command : 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION.  193 

1.  Clofie  column,,  hy  division.  2.  On  such  division,  right  (or  left)  in 
front.  3.  Battalion,  imcard — Face.  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

The  instant  the  movement  commences,  the  chief  of  the  directing 
division  will  command,  <jnide  left  (or  right). 

The  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle,  are  to  the  right  of  the 
directing  division,  will  face  to  the  left  j  those  which  are  to  the  left  will 
face  to  the  right. 

To  march  in  column  at  full  distance. 

306.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the  column  in  march,  he 
will  indicate  to  the  leading  guide  two  distant  objects  in  front,  on 
the  line  which  the  guide  ought  to  follow.  This  guide  will  immedi- 
ately init  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  that  line,  take  the  more  distant 
object  as  the  point  of  direction,  and  the  nearer  one  as  the  intermediate 
point.    The  colonel  will  then  command: 

1.  Column,  forward.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right).     3.  March  (or 
"  double  quick — March). 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  cbiefs  of  subdivis- 
ion, the  column  will  put  itself  in  march,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company.  No.  244. 

The  leading  guide  may  always  maintain  himself  correctly  on  the 
direction  by  keeping  steadily  in  view  the  two  points  indicated  to  him, 
or  chosen  by  himself;  if  these^  points  have  a  certain  elevation,  he  may 
be  assured  he  is  on  the  true  direction,  when  the  nearer  masks  the  more 
distant  point. 

The  following  guides  will  preserve  with  exactness  both  step  and  dis- 
tance; each  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who  immediately 
precedes  him,  without  occupying  himself  with  the  general  direction. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will  hold  himself,  habitually,  abreast  with 
the  leading  guide,  to  see  that  he  does  not  deviate  from  the  direction, 
and  will  observe,  also,  that  the  next  guide  marches  exactly  in  the  trace 
of  the  first. 

'  **  To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance. 

307.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  cadenced  step,  when  the  colo- 
nel shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction,  he  will  go  to  the  point 
at  which  the  change  ought  to  be  commenced,  and  establish  a  marker 

17 


194         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

there,  presenting  the  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column  ;  this  marker, 
no  matter  to  which  side  the  change  of  dii'ection  is  to  be  made,  will  be 
posted  on  the  opposite  side,  and  he  will  remain  in  position  till  the 
last  subdivision  of  the  battalion  shall  have  passed.  The  leading  sub- 
division being  within  a  few  paces  of  the  marker,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  rigJit^. 

At  this  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  immediately  take 
the  guide  on  the  side  opposite  the  change  of  dii-ection,  if  not  already 
there.  This  guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  graze  the  breast  of  the 
marker;  arrived  at  this  point,  the  chief  will  cause  his  subdivision  to 
change  direction  by  the  commands  and  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company.  When  the  wheel  is  com- 
pleted, the  chief  of  this  subdivision  will  retake  the  guide,  if  changed, 
on  the  side  of  the  primitive  direction. 

The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivision,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will 
conform  to  what  has  just  been  explained  for  the  leading  subdivision. 

When  the  column  is  at  half  distance,  the  pivot  man  will  take  a  pace 
of  fourteen  inches  instead  of  nine. 

The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel  will  frequently  cause  the 
about  to  be  executed  while  marching;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command: 

1.  Battalion,  right  about.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

At  the  second  cnmmand  the  companies  will  face  to  the  right  about, 
and  the  column  will  then  march  forward  in  the  opposite  direction;  the 
chiefs  of  companies  will  remain  behind  the  front  rank,  the  file-closers 
in  front  of  the  rear  rank,  and  the  guides  will  place  themselves  in  the 
same  rank. 

To  halt  the  cnlumn. 

308.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt 
it,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Column.     2.   Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains,  the  col- 
umn will  halt ;  no  guide  will  stir,  though  he  may  have  lost  his  distance 
or  be  out  of  the  direction  of  the  preceding  guides. 

The  column  being  in  march,  in  double  quick  time,  will  be  halted  by 
the  same  commands.  At  the  command  half,  the  men  will  halt  in  their 
places,  and  will  themselves  rectify  their  positions  in  the  ranks. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  195 

The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
line  of  battle,  he  will  move  a  little  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  and 
face  to  him;  this  guide  and  the  following  one  will  fix  their  eyes  on  the 
colonel,  in  order  promptly  to  conform  themselves  to  his  directions. 

If  the  colonel  judge  it  not  necessary  to  give  a  general  direction  to 
the  guides,  he  will  limit  himself  to  rectifying  the  position  of  such  as 
may  be  without,  or  within  the  direction,  by  the  command  (jniden  of 
(such)  roDipnuy,  or  ynides  of  (such)  compame«.  to  the  rujht  (or  to  tire 
lef();^iit  this  command,  the  guides  designated  will  place  themselves  on 
the  direction  ;   the  others  will  stand  fast. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it  necessary  to  give  a  general 
direction  to  the  guides  of  the  column,  he  will  place  the  first  two  on  the 
direction  lie  shall  have  chosen,  and  command: 

Guides,  cover. 

At  this,  the  following  guides  will  promptly  place  themselves  on  the 
direction  covering  the  first  two  in  file,  and  each  precisely  at  a  distance 
equal  to  the  front  of  his  company,  from  the  guide  immediately  pre- 
ceding ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  them  in  the  direction,  and 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

At  this  command,  each  company  will  incline  to  the  right  or  left,  and 
dress  forward  or  backward,  so  as  to  bring  the  designated  flank  to  rest 
on  its  guide;  each  captain  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his 
guide,  promptly  align  his  company  parallelly  with  that  which  precedes, 
then  command  Front,  and  return  to  his  place  in  column. 

To  close  the  column  to  half  distance,  or  in  mass. 

.309.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  distance  right  in  front,  and 
at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  dis- 
tance, on  the  leading  company,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  half  distance,  close  column.     2.  I^Iahch  {or  double  quick — 

March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  cau- 
tion it  to  stand  fast. 

At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  repeated  by  all  the  captains, 
except  the  captain  of  the  leading  company,  this  company  will  stand 
fast,  and  its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left;  the  file-closers  will  close 
one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 


196         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

All  the  other  companies  will,  continue  to  march,  and  as  each  in  suc- 
cession arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  one  which  precedes,  its 
captain  will  halt  it. 

At  the  instant  that  each  company  halts,  its  guide  will  place  himself 
on  the  direction  of  the  guides  who  precede,  and  the  captain  will  align 
the  company  by  the  left;  the  file-closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the 
rear  rank. 

No  particular  attention  need  be  given  to  the  general  direction  of  the 
guides  before  they  respectively  haltj  it  will  suffice  if  each  follow  in  the 
trace  of  the  one  who  precedes  him. 

The  colonel,  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  will  superintend  the  execution 
of  the  movement,  observing  that  the  captains  halt  their  companies  ex- 
actly at  platoon  distance  the  one  from  the  other. 

The  lieutenant-colonel,  a  few  paces  in  front,  will  face  to  the  leading 
guide  and  assure  the  positions  of  the  following  guides  as  they  success- 
ively place  themselves  on  the  direction. 

The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  last  guide.- 

If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  close  by  the 
same  commands. 

If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  at  the  first  com- 
mand, the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  command  quick  time; 
the  chiefs  of  the  other  companies  will  catttion  their  companies  to  con- 
tinue the  march. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company  will  take  quick,  while 
the  other  companies  continue  to  march  in  double  quick  timej  and  as 
each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  preceding  one,  its  chief  Avill 
cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

When  the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gained  its  distance,  the 
colonel  will  command : 

Double  quid: — March. 

When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  the  column  marching  at  double 
quick,  and  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance  at  the  same  time,  he  will 
notify  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  of  his  intention,  who,  at  the 
command  march,  will  halt  his  company  and  align  it  to  the  left. 

If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and  the  colonel  should  not 
give  the  command  double  quick,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company 
will  halt  his  company  at  the  command  march,  and  align  it  to  the  left. 
In  the  case  where  the  colonel  adds  the  command  double  quick,  the 
leading  company  will  continue  at  quick,  while  all  the  others,  at  the 
command  march,  take  double  quick  time. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  197 


Tu  close  the  column  on  the  eighth,  or  rearmost  company.         \ 

310.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if.  instead  of  causing  it  to  close  to 
half  distance  on  the  first  company,  the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it 
to  close  on  the  eighth,  he  will  command : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance  close  column.     2.  Bat-, 

talion,  almut — Face.  3.  Column,  forivard.  4.  Guide  right. 
'  5.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

.A.t  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except  the  eighth,  will 
face  about,  and  their  guide  will  remain  in  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 
At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains  will  place  themselves  two 
paces  outside  of  their  companies  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

At  the  command  nKtrchy  the  eighth  comp-any  will  stand  fast,  and  its 
captain  will  align  it  to  the  left;  the  other  com])anics  will  put  them- 
selves in  march,  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  one 
established  before  it,  its  captain  will  halt  it  and  face  it  to  the  front.  At 
the  moment  that  each  company  halts,  the  left  guide,  remaining  faced  to 
the  rear,  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction  of  the  guides 
already  established.  Immediately  after,,  the  captain  will  align  his 
company  to  the  left,  and  the  file-closers  will  close  one  pace  on  the  rear 
rank. 

If  this  movement  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  each  captain,  in 
turn,  will  halt,  and  command : 

Such  company,  right  about — Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  company  designated  will  face  to  the  right 
about,  and  halt. 

All  the  companies  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  guides, 
who  stand  faced  to  the  rear,  to  face  about. 

The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself  behind  the  rearmost  guide? 
will  assure  the  position  of  the  other  guides  in  succession ;  the  major 
will  remain  abreast  with  the  rearmost  company. 

311.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
close  it  on  the  eighth  company,  he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  eighth  cotnpany,  to  half  distafice,  close  column.  2.  Bat- 
talion, right  about.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 
4.   Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  caution 
his  company  that  it  will  remain  faced  to  the  front  j  the  captains  of  the 


198  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

other  companies  will  caution  their  companies  that  they  will  have  to 
face  about.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company 
will  halt  his  company  and  align  it  to  the  left;  the  file-closers  will  close 
one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the  same  command,  will 
place  themselves  on  the  flank  of  the  column  ;  the  subdivisions  will  face 
about,  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  company  im- 
mediately preceding  it,  its  chief  will  face  it  to  the  front,  and  halt  it. 
The  instant  each  company  halts,  the  guide  on  the  directing  flank, 
remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will  quickly  place  himself  on  the  direction 
of  the  guides  already  established.  After  which,  the  captain  will  align 
the  company  to  the  left,  and  the  file-closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the 
rear  rank. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will  follow  the  movements  abreast  of  the  first 
company.  The  major  will  place  himself  a  few  paces  in  rear  of  the 
guide  of  the  eighth  company,  and  will  assure  the  position  of  the  other 
guides  in  succession. 

.312.  A  column  by  division  at  full  distance  will  close  to  half  distance 
by  the  same  means  and  the  same  coipmands. 

A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  being  at  full  or  half  distance, 
the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  close  in  mass  by  the  same  means  and  com- 
mands, substituting  the  indication  column,  close  in  mnim,  for  that  of  to 
half  distance,  close  column. 

In  a  column,  left  in  front,  these  various  movements  will  be  executed 
on  the  same  principles. 

Being  in    column   at   half  distance^  or  closed  in    mass,  to  take 

distances. 

To  take  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column. 

313.  The  column  lieing  by  company  at  half  distance  and  at  a  halt, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  take  full  distances  by  the 
head,  he  will  commaAd  : 

Bi/  the  head  of  column,  take  wheeling  distance. 

At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  put  it 
in  march  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command : 

I.  First  company,  forward.     2.  Guide  left.     S.March  {or  double 

quick — March). 

When  the  second  shall  have  nearly  its  wheeling  distance,  its  captain 
will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  199 

!.  Second  company,  for icnrd.     2.    Guide   left.     3.    March    Cor 
double  quick — March). 

At  th?  command  mrirch,  which  will  be  pronouucecl  at  the  instant 
that  this  company  shall  hare  its  wheelin,^  distance,  it  will  stop  oflf 
sraartly,  takinf^  the  step  from  the  preceding  company.  Each  of  the 
other  compaiiles  will  successively  execute  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  second. 

The  colonel  will  see  that   each  company  put  itself  in  march   at  the  * 
instant  it  has    its    distance.     The  lieutenant-colonel  will  hold  htmself 
at  the  head  of  the  column,  and  direct  the  march  of  the  leading  guide. 
The  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the  rearmost  guide. 

If  the  column,  instead  of  being*  at  a  halt,  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  give  the  same  commands,  and  add: 

March  (or  double  quick — March). 

If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  march, 
the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  cause  double  quid:  time  to 
Vte  taken  ;  which  will  also  be  taken  by  the  other  companies  as  they 
successively  attain  their  proper  distance. 

If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  leading  com- 
pany will  continue  to  march  at  the  same  gait.  The  captains  of  the 
other  companies  will  cause  quick  time  to  be  taken,  and  as  each  com- 
pany gains  its  proper  distance,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  retake  the 
double  quick  step. 

To  lake  diatanceft  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

314,  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on  the  rearmost  company, 
he  will  establish  two  markers  on  the  direction  he  shall  wish  to  give  to 
the  line  of  battle,  the  first  opposite  to  the  rearmost  company,  the 
second  marker  toward  the  head  of  the  column,  at  company  distance 
from  the  first,  and  both  facing  to  the  rear  ;  at  the  same  time,  the  right 
general  guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant-colonel,  will  move 
rapidly  a  little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the  head  of  the  column 
will  extend,  and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two 
markers.     These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  eighth  company,  take  wheeling  distance.    2.  Column,  for- 
ward.    3.  Guide  left.     4.  M.xncu  {ov  double  quick — March). 

At  the  third  command,  the  captains  will  place  themselves  two  paces 
outside  of  the  directing  flank  ;  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will 
caution  it  to  stand  fast. 


200         MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  command  march,  rei:)eated  by  all  the  captains,  except  the 
captain  of  the  eighth  company,  this  latter  company  will  stand  fast; 
its  chief  will  align  it  to  the  left  on  the  first  marker,  who  is  opposite  to 
this  company,  and  place  himself  before  its  centre,  after  commanding, 
Front.  At  this  command,  the  marker  will  retire,  and  the  left  guide 
will  take  his  place. 

All  the  other  comi^anies  will  put  themselves  in  march,  the  guide  of 
the  leading  one  directing  himself  a  little  within  the  right  general 
guide  ;  when  the  seventh  company  has  arrived  opposite  the  second 
marker,  its  captain  will  halt,  and  align  it  on  this  marker,  in  the  man- 
ner prescribed  for  the  eighth  company. 

When  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company  shall  see  that  there  is, 
between  his  company  and  the  seventh,  the  necessary  space  for  wheeling 
into  line,  he  will  halt  his  company;  the  guide,  facing  to  the  rear,  will 
jilace  himself  promptly  on  the  direction,  and  the  moment  he  shall  be 
assured  in  his  position,  the  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the  left, 
and  then  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre;  the  other  compa- 
nies will  in  succession  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for,  the 
sixth  company. 

The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  and  see  that  each  company 
halts  at  the  prescribed  distance  ;  he  will  promptly  remedy  any  fault 
that  may  be  committed,  and  as  soon  as  all  the  companies  shall  be 
aligned,  he  will  cause  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the  rear,  to  face 
about. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  left  guides  on  the  direction  in 
succession,  placing  himself  in  their  rear,  as  they  arrive.  The  major 
will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the  column,  and  will  direct  the  march 


To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  column. 

.315.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  take  distances  on  the  leading  company, 
will  establish  two  marches  in  the  manner  just  described,  one  abreast 
with  this  comj)any,  and  the  other  at  company  distance  in  rear  of  the 
first,  both  facing  to  the  front;  the  left  general  guide,  on  an  intimatidu. 
from  the  lieutenant-colonel,  will  move  rapidly  to  the  rear,  and  place 
himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  marches,  a  little 
beyond  the  point  to  which  the  rear  of  the  column  will  extend;  these 
dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  first  company,  take  wheeling  distance.  2.  Battalion, 
about — Face.  3.  Column,  forward.  4.  Guide  right.  5.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 


'  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  201 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except  the  one  desig- 
nated, will  face  about,  the  guides  remaining  in  the  front  rank  now 
become  the  rear.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  outside  of  their  guides. 

At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  designated  company  will 
align  it  on  the  marker  placed  by  its  side. 

The  remaining  companies  will  put  themselves  in  march,  the  guide  of 
the  rearmost  one  will  direct  himself  a  little  within  the  left  general 
guide ;  when  the  second  company  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the 
second  marker,  its  captain  will  face  it  about,  halt  it,  and  align  it  as  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  first  company. 

The  captains  of  the  remaining  com])anies  will  each,  in  succession, 
conform  himself  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  captain  of 
the  second. 

The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  major,  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  in  No.  314. 

To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 
To  change  direction  in  marching. 

316.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  being  in  march,  will 
change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdivisions. 

Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse  or  to  the  pivot  flank,  it 
will  always  be  executed  on  the  principle  of  wheeling  in  marching;  to 
this  end,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  the  battalion  to  take  the  guide  on 
the  flank  opposite  to  the  intended  change  of  direction,  if  it  be  not 
already  on  that  flank. 

A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in  front,  having  to 
change  direction  to  the  right,  the  colonel,  after  having  caused  a 
marker  to  be  placed  at  the  point  where  the  change  ought  to  com- 
mence, will  command  : 

1.  Battalion,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  inarcli,  the  leading  division  will  wheel  as  if  it  were 
part  of  a  column  at  half  distance. 

The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the  wheel,  all  the  others 
will,  at  once,  conform  themselves  to  its  movement ;  to  this  end  the 
left  guide  of  each,  advancing  slightly  the  left  shoulder,  and  length- 
ening a  little  the  step,  will  incline  to  the  left,  and  will  observe,  at  the 
same  time,  to  gain  so  much  ground  to  the  front  that  there  may  con- 
stantly be  an    interval  of  four  paces    between    his  division    jiud  that 


202         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

which  precedes  it;  and  as  snon  as  he  shall  cover  the  preceding  guide, 
he  will  cease  to  incline,  and  then  march  exactly  in  his  trace. 

Each  division  will  conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  its  guide  ; 
the  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  toward  him  and  advance  a  little 
the  left  shoulder  the  instant  the  movement  commences ;  each  file, 
in  inclining,  will  gaiin  so  much  the  less  ground  to  the  front,  as  the 
file  shall  be  nearer  to  the  pivot,  and  the  right  guide  will  gain  only  so 
much  as  may  be  necessary  to  maintain  between  his  own  and  the 
preceding  division  the  same  distance  which  separates  their  marching 
flanks. 

The  colonel,  seeing  the  wheel  nearly  ended,  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the 
leading  division  completes  its  wheel,  it  will  resume  the  direct  march  ; 
the  other  divisions  will  conform  themselves  to  this  movement;  and 
if  any  guide  find  himself  not  covering  his  immediate  leader,  he  will, 
by  slight  degrees,  bring  himself  on  the  trace  of  that  guide,  by  ad- 
vancing the  right  shoulder. 

Tn  change  direction  from  a  halt. 

317.  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  being  at 
a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  it  a  new  direction,  and  in 
which  it  is  to  remain,  he  will  cause  it  to  execute  this  movement  by  the 
flanks  of  subdivisions,  in  the  following  manner : 

The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  cause  it  to  change  direction  by  the  right  flank,  he  will  indicate  to 
the  lieutenant-colonel  the  point  of  direction  to  the  right;  this  ofiicer 
will  immediately  establish,  on  the  new  direction,  two  markers,  distant 
from  each  other  a  little  less  than  the  front  of  the  first  svibdivision,  the 
first  marker  in  front  of  the  right  file  of  this  subdivision  ;  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Change  direction  hy  the  right  Jiank.    2.  Battalion^  right — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  face  to  the  right,  and  each 
chief  of  subdivision  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  subdivisions  will  step  oS"  together  ; 
the  right  guide  of  the  leading  one  will  direst  himself  from  the  first 
step,  parallelly  to  the  markers  placed  in  advance  on  the  new  direction  ; 
the  chief  of  the  subdivision  will   not  follow  the  movement,  but  see  it 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  208 

file  past,  and  as  soon  as  the  left  guide  shall  have  passed,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   First  companji  (or  first  division).      2.   Halt.      3.   Front. 

4.  Left — Dress. 

At  the  fourth  command  the  subdivision  will  place  itself  against  the 
two  markers,  and  be  promptl.y  aligned  by  its  chief. 

The  right  guide  of  each  of  the  following  subdivisions  will  conform 
himself  to  the  direction  of  the  right  guide  of  the  subdivision  preceding 
his  own  in  the  column,  so  as  to  enter  on  the  new  direction  parallelly 
to  that  subdivision,  and   at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  its  rear 

rank. 

»< 

Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  halt  in  his  own  person  on  arriving 
opposite  to  the  left  guides  already  placed  on  the  ntw  direction,  see  his 
subdivision  file  past,  and  conform  himself,  in  halting  and  aligning  it, 
to  what  is  prescribed  above. 

If  the  change  of  direction  be  by  the  left  flank,  the  colonel  will  canse 
markers  to  be  established  as  before,  the  first  in  front  of  the  left  file  of 
the  leading  subdivision,  and  then  give  the  same  commands,  substi- 
tuting the  indication  left  for  right. 

Being  in  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  to  form  divisions. 

.318.  The  column  being  closed  in  mass,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divisions,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  divisions.     2.  Left  companies,  left — Face.     3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command  the  captains  of  the  left  compaiiies  will  caution 
them  to  face  to  the  left.  At  the  second  command  the  left  companies 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  their  captains  will  place  themselves  by  the 
side  of  their  respective  left  guides. 

The  right  companies,-  and  their  captains,  will  stand  fast ;  but  the 
right  and  left  guides  of  each  of  these  companies  will  place  themselves 
respectively  before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  company,  both  guides 
facing  to  the  right,  and  each  resting  his  right  arm  gently  against  the 
lu-east  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  file,  in  order  to  mark  the  direction. 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  companies  only  will  put  themselves 
in  march,  their  captains  standing  fast:  as  each  shall  see  that  his  com- 
pany, filing  past,  has  nearly  cleared  the  column,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Such- company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 


204  iMANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  company  shall  yet  have 
four  paces  to  march  j  the  second  the  instant  it  shall  have  cleared  its 
right  company  ;   and  the  third  immediately  after  the  second. 

The  company  having  faced  to  the  front,  the  files,  if  there  be  intervals 
between  them,  will  promptly  incline  to  the  right;  the  captain  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  company  of  the  division,  and  align 
himself  correctly  on  the  front  rank  of  that  company.  The  left  guide 
will,  at  the  same  time,  place  himself  before  one  of  the  three  left  files  of 
his  company,  face  to  the  right,  and  cover  the  guides  of  the  right  com- 
pany correctly ;  the  moment  his  captain  sees  him  established  on  the 
direction,  he  will  command : 

Right — Dress. 

At  this,  the  left  company  will  dress  forward  on  the  alignment  of  the 
right  company;  the  front  rank  man,  who  may  find  himself  opposite  to 
the  left  guide,  will,  without  preceding  hiss  rank,  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide;  the  captain  of  the  left  company 
will  direct  its  alignment  on  this  man,  and  the  alignment  being  assured, 
he  will  command  Front  ;  but  not  quit  his  position. 

The  colonel  seeing  the  divisions  formed,  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

At  this  the  guides,  who  have  marked  the  fronts  of  division,  will 
retvirn  to  their  places  in  column,  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company 
passing  through  the  interval  in  the  centre  of  tlie  division,  the  senior 
captain  of  each  division  will  take  his  post  two  paces  in  front  of  the 
division,  and  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  between  the  two 
companies. 

.319.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a  halt,  when  the  colo- 
nel shall  wish  to  form  divisions,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Fonn   divisions.     2.  Left   co7npanies,  hy   the  left  Jiank.      3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  right  companies  will  com- 
mand, inai-k  time,  the  captains  of  the  left  comi^anies  will  caution  their 
companies  to  face  %  the  left  faiik.  At  the  third  command,  the  right 
companies  will  mark  time,  the  left  companies  will  face  to  the  left,  the 
captains  of  the  left  companies  will  each  see  his  company  file  past  him, 
and  when  it  has  cleared  the  column,  will  command  : 

Such  company^'Jjij  the  right  fank — March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  205 

As  soon  as  the  divisions  are  formed,  the  colonel  will  command: 

4.  Forward.     5.  March. 

At  the  fifth  command,  the  column  will  resume  the  gait  at  which  it 
was  marching  previous  to  the  commencement  of  the  movement.  The 
guides  of  each  division  will-  remain  on  the  right  and  left  of  their  re- 
spective companies;  the  left  guide  of  the  right  company  will  pass  into 
the  line  of  file-closers,  before  the  two  companies  are  united;  the  right 
guide  of  the  left  company  will  step  into  the  rear  rank. 

Being  in  column  at  full  or  half  distance  to  form  divisions. 

320.  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  and,  instead  of  being  closed  in  mass, 
is  at  full  or  half  distance,  divisions  will  be  formed  in  the  same  manner; 
but  the  captains  of  the  left  companies,  if  the  m,ovement  be  made  in 
quick  time,  after  commanding  Front,  will  each  place  himself  before 
the  centre  of  his  company,  and  command  : 

1.  Such  company^  forward.     2.  Guide  right.     3.  March. 

If  the  movement  be  made  in  double  quick  time,  each  will  command, 
as  soon  as  his  company  has  closed  the  column  : 

1.  Such  company^  by  the  right  flank.     2.  March. 

If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  inverse 
means. 

Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance. 

321.  In  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  countermarch  will  be 
executed  by  the  means  indicated,  school  of  the  company  ;  to  this  end, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Countermarch.     2.  Battalion.,  right  for  left) — Face.     3.  By 
file  left  (or  right).     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

2o  countermarch  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  countermarch  will  be  executed 
by  the  commands  and  means  subjoined. 

The  column  being  supposed  formed  by  division,  right  in  front,  the 
colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Countermarch.     2.  Battalion^  rigid  and  left  —  Face.     3.  By 
file,  left  and  right.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


206         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  first  commaud,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  numbered  divisious  will 
caution  them  to  face  to  the  right,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  others  to  face  to 
the  left. 

At  the  second  command,  the  odd  divisions  will  face  to  the  right,  and 
the  even  to  the  left ;  the  right  and  left  guides  of  all  the  divisions  will 
face  about;  the  chiefs  of  odd  divisions  will  hasten  to  their  right  and 
cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each  chief  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  leading  front  rank  man  of  his  division  ;  the  chiefs  of  even 
divisions  will  hasten  to  their  left,  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the 
rear,  and  each  chief  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  leading  front 
rank  man. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its  chief, 
will  step  off"  smartly,  the  guides  standing  fast;  each  odd  division  will 
wheel  by  file  to  the  left  around  its  right  guide ;  each  even  division  will 
wheel  by  file  to  the  right  around  its  left  guide,  each  division  so  direct- 
ing its  march  as  to  arrive  behind  its  opposite  guide,  and  when  its  head 
shall  be  up  with  this  guide,  the  chief  will  halt  the  division,  and  cause 
it  to  face  to  the  front. 

Each  division,  on  facing  to  the  front,  will  be  aligned  by  its  chief  by 
the  right  ;  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  even  divisions  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  right  of  their  respective  divisions. 

The  divisions  being  aligned,  each  chief  will  command,  Front  ;  at 
this,  the  guides  will  shift  to  their  proper  flanks. 

In  a  column  with  the  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  will  be  executed 
by  the  same  commands  and  means ;  but  all  the  divisions  will  be  aligned 
by  the  left :  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  divisions  will  hasten  to 
the  left  of  their  respective  divisions  as  soon  as  the  latter  shall  have 
been  faced  to  the  front. 

Different  modes  of  passing  frt.m  the  order  in  column  to  the  order 

in  battle. 

Manner  af  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

322.  The  line  of  battle  may  be  marked  or  determined  in  three  dili'er- 
ent  manners  :  1st,  by  placing  two  markers  eighty  or  one  hundred  paces 
apart,  on  the  direction  it  is  wished  to  give  to  the  line ;  2d,  by  placing 
a  marker  at  the  point  at  which  it  may  be  intended  to  rest  a  flank,  and 
then  choosing  a  second  point  toward  or  beyond  the  opposite  flank, 
and  thei-e  posting  a  second  marker,  distant  from  each  other  a  little  less 
than  the  leading  subdivision  ;  3d,  by  choosing  at  first  the  points  of 
direction  for  the  flanks,  and  then  determining,  by  intermediate  points, 
the  straight  line  between  those  selected  points,  both  of  which  may 
sometimes  be  beyond  reach. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  207 


Column,  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the  left  into  line  of 

battle. 

323.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  to  the  left  into  line,  he  will  assure  the  positions  of  the 
guides  by  means  previously  indicated,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Left  intii  line,  icheel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At, the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  company  will 
hasten  to  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  left  guides  of  the 
column,  face  to  them,  and  place  himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of 
the  three  right  files  of  his  company,  when  they  shall  be  in  line:  he  will 
be  assured  in  this  position  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains,  the  left 
front  rank  man  of  each  company  will  face  to  the  left,  and  rest  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  his  guide;  the  companies  will 
wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of  wheeling  from  a  halt,  conforming 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  school  of  the  company  :  each  captain 
will  turn  to  his  company,  to  observe  the  execution  of  the  movement, 
and,  when  the  right  of  the  company  shall  arrive  at  three  paces  from 
the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command : 

1.   Such  company.     2.  Halt. 

The  company  being  halted,  the  captain  will  place  himself  on  the  line 
by  the  side  of  the  left  front  rank  man  of  the  company  next  on  the 
right,  align  himself  correctly,  and  command: 

3.  Right — Dress. 

At  this  command,  the  company  will  dress  up  between  the  captain 
and  the  front  rank  man  on  its  left,  the  captain  directing  the  alignment 
on  that  man  ;  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  right  company, 
who  finds  himself  opposite  to  its  right  guide,  will  lightly  rest  his 
breast  against  the  left  arm  of  this  guide. 

Each  captain,  having  aligned  his  company,  will  command,  Front, 
and  the  colonel  will  add  : 

Guides — Posts. 

At  this  command,  the  guides  will  return  to  their  places  in  line  of 
battle,  each  passing  through  the  nearest  captain's  interval ;  to  permit 
him  to  pass,  the  captain  will  momentarily  step   before  the  first  file  of 


208  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

his  company,  and  the  covering  sergeant  behind  the  same  file.  This  ruin- 
is  (jeneral  for  all  the  formations  into  line  of  battle. 

When  companies  form  line  of  battle,  file-closers  will  always  place 
themselves  exactly  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  which  will  sufficiently 
assure  their  alignment. 

The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  the  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel, 
and  major,  as  well  as  the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major,  will  return  to 
their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle.  This  rule  is  yeiieral  for  all 
the  formations  into  line  of  battle. 

A  column,  with  the  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  to  the  right  into  line 
of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

At  the  command  guides,  i^osts,  the  captains  will  take  their  places  in 
line  of  battle  as  well  as  the  guides.  This  rule- is  general  for  all  forma- 
tions into  line  of  battle  in  which  the  companies  are  aligned  by  the  left. 

324.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itself  into  line  of  battle  by 
the  same  commands  and  means,  observing  what  follows  :  if  the  right 
be  in  front,  at  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chiefs  of  division,  the 
left  guide  of  each  right  company  will  place  himself  on  the  alignment 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of  his  company;  the  left 
guide  of  the  first  company  will  be  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel ;  the  left  guides  of  the  other  right  companies  will  align 
themselves  correctly  on  the  division  guides ;  to  this  end,  the  division 
guides  (already  on  the  line)  will  invert,  and  hold  their  pieces  up  per- 
pendicularly before  the  centre  of  their  bodies,  at  the  command,  left  into 
line,  wheel.  If  the  column  by  division  be  with  the  left  in  front,  the 
right  guides  of  the  left  companies  will  conform  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  left  guides  of  the  right  companies. 

325.  A  column  in  march  will  be  formed  into  line,  without  halting, 
by  the  same  commands  and  means.  At  the  command  march,  the  guides 
will  halt  in  their  places,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  promptly 
rectify  their  positions. 

If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move 
forward,  without  halting,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  companies,  left  wheel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 

March). 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captains,  ea«h  company  will 
wheel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot,  as  i:)reseribed  in  the  school  of  the 
company,  the  left  guides  will  step  back  into  the  rank  of  file-closers 
before  the  wheel  is  completed,  and  when  the  right  of  the  companies 
shall  arrive  near  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.  Guide  centre. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  209 

At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  completed, 
the  companies  will  march  directly  to  the  front.  At  the  fifth  command, 
the  color  and  the  general  guides  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  to  the 
front.  The  colonel  will  assume  the  direction  of  the  color;  the  cap- 
tains of  companies  and  the  men  will,  at  once,  conform  to  the  principles 
of  the  march  in  line  of  battle,  to  be  indicated,  No.  343. 

By  inversion  to  the  right  (or  left^  into  line  of  battle. 

326.  When  a  column,  right  in  front,  shall  be  under  the  necessity  of 
forming  itself  into  line  faced  to  the  reverse  flank,  and  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  execute  this  formation  by  the  shortest  movement,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  inversion^  right  into  line,  wheel.     2.  Battalion,  guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  in 
front,  and  facing  to  the  i-ight  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision ;  at  the 
second  command,  he  will  rectify,  as  jDrornptly  as  possible,  the  direction 
of  the  right  guides  of  the  column;  the  captain  of  the  odd  company,  if 
there  be  one,  and  the  column  be  by  division,  will  promptly  bring  the 
right  of  his  company  on  the  direction,  and  at  company  distance  from 
the  division  next  in  front;  the  left  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will 
place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides,  and  will  be  assured 
in  his  position  by  the  lieutenant-colonel ;    which   being  executed,  the 

colonel  will  command  : 

s 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  this,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  subdivision  will  face  to  the 
right,  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  his  guide,  and  the 
battalion  will  form  itself  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed. 

Successive  formations. 

327.  Under  the  denomination  of  successive  formations  are  included 
all  those  formations  where  the  several  subdivisions  of  a  column  arrive 
one  after  another  on  the  line  of  battle ;  such  are  formations  on  the 
right,  or  left,  forward  and  faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle,  as  well 
as  deployments  of  columns  in  mass. 

The  successive  formations  which  may  be  ordered  when  the  column  is 
marching,  and  is  to  continue  marching,  will  be  executed  by  a  combina- 
tion of  the  two  gaits,  quick  and  double  quick  time. 

In  all  the  successive  formations,  every  captain  will  always  observe 
18 


210  MANUAL     FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

before  dressing  his  company,  to  place  himself  correctly  on  the  line 
either  on  the  left  or  right  of  the  company  which  precedes  his  in  line, 
and  sec  that  his  guide  has  been  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel. 

Column  at  full  distance,  on  the  right  (or  on  the  left)  into  line  of 

battle. 

328.  A  column  by  company,  at  full  distance,  and  right  in  front,  hav- 
ing to  form  itself  on  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  indi- 
cate to  the  lieutenant-colonel  a  little  in  advance,  the  point  of  appui,  or 
rest,  for  the  right,  as  well  as  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left;  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  hasten  with  two  markers!  and  establish  them  in 
the  following  manner  on  the  direction  indicated: 

The  first  marker  will  be  jjlaced  at  the  point  of  ajipui  for  the  right 
front  rank  man  of  the  leading  company;  the  second  will  indicate  the 
point  where  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  same  company  will  rest 
when  in  line ;  they  will  be  placed  so  as  to  present  the  right  shoulder  to 
the  battalion  when  formed. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  right,  into  line.     2.  Battalion,  guide  right.  i 

At  the  second  command,  the  right  will  become  the  directing  flank, 
and  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  be  to  that  side;  the  right  guide  of  the 
leading  company  will  march  straight  forward  until  up  with  the  turning 
point,  and  each  following  guide  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  one 
immediately  preceding. 

The  leading  company  being  nearly  up  with  the  first  marker,  its  cap- 
tain will  command  : 

1.  Right  turn, 
and  when  the  company  is  precisely  up  with  this  marker,  he  will  add: 

2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company Avill  turn  to  the  right;  the  right 
guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  bring  the  man  next  to  him  opposite  to 
the  right  marker,  and  when  at  three  paces  from  him,  the  captain  will 
command: 

1.  First  company.     2.   Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  bait;  the  files,  not  yet  in 
line,  will  form  promptly;  the  left  guide  will  retire  as  a  file  closer ;  and 
the  cai^tain  will  then  command: 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  211 

3.  Rigid — Dress. 

At  this  command,  the  comjiany  will  align  itself;  the  two  men  who 
find  themselves  opposite  to  the  two  markers  will  each  lightly  rest  his 
breast  against  the  right  arm  of  his  marker;  the  captain,  passing  to  the 
right  of  the  front  rank,  will  direct  the  alignment  on  these  two  men. 
These  rules  are  general  for  all  successive  forwations. 

The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward;  when 
arrived  opposite  to  the  left  flank  of  the  preceding  company,  it  will  turn 
to  the  right,  and  be  formed  on  the  line  of  battle,  as  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed; the  right  guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  come  upon  that 
lino  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  first  company. 

At  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  the  company 
will  be  halted  by  its  captain,  who  will  place  himself  briskly,  by  the  side 
of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  preceding  company',  and  align  himself 
correctlj'  on  its  front  rank. 

The  left  guide  will,  at  the  same  time,  place  himself  before  one  of  the 
three  left  files  of  his  company,  and,  facing  to  the  right,  he  will  place 
himself  accurately  on  the  direction  of  the  two  markers  of  the  preced- 
ing company. 

The  captain  will  then  command: 

Right — Drp:ss. 

At  this  command,  the  second  company  will  dress  forward  on  the  line ; 
the  captain  will  direct  its  alignment  on  the  front  rank  man  who  has 
rested  his  breast  against  the  left  guide  of  the  company. 

The  following  companies  will  thus  come  successively  to  form  them- 
selves on  the  line  of  battle,  each  conforming  itself  to  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  one  next  to  the  right ;  and  when  they  shall  all  be 
established,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

At  this  command,  the  guides  will  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle; 
and  the  markers  placed  before  the  right  company  will  retire. 

If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and  the  colonel  should 
wish  to  cause  the  movement  to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  he  will 
add  the  command : 

Double  quick — March. 

At  the  command  inarch,  all  the  companies  will  take  the  double  quick 
step,  and  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  above. 

The  colonel  will  follow  up  the  formation,  passing  along  the  front,  and 


212  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

being  always  opposite  the  company  about  to  turn  ;  it  is  thus  that  he 
will  be  the  better  able  to  see  and  correct  the  error  that  would  re- 
sult from  a  command  given  too  soon  or  too  late  to  the  preceding  com- 
pany. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will,  with  the  greatest  care,  assure  the  direc- 
tion of  the  guides ;  to  this  end,  the  instant  that  the  markers  are  estab- 
lished for  the  leading  company,  he  will  move  a  little  beyond  the  point 
at  which  the  left  of  the  next  company  will  rest,  establish  himself  cor- 
rectly on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers,  and  assure  the  guide  of 
the  second  company  on  this  direction;  this  guide  being  assured,  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  farther  to  the  rear,  in  order  to 
assure,  in  like  manner,  the  guide  of  the  third  company,  and  so  on,  suc- 
cessively, to  the  left  of  the  battalion.  In  assuring  the  guides  in  their 
positions  on  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  take  care  to  let  them  first  place 
themselves,  and  confine  himself  to  I'ectifying  their  positions  if  they  do 
not  cover  accurately,  and  at  the  projjer  distance,  the  preceding  guides 
or  markers.      This  rule  is  general  for  all  successive  formations. 

When  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  forms  a  sensible  angle 
with  that  of  the  march  of  the  column,  the  colonel,  before  beginning 
the  movement,  will  give  the  head  of  the  column  a  new  direction 
parallel  to  that  line. 

A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

Each  captain  will  cause  his  company  to  support  arms,  the  instant 
that  the  captain,  who  follows  him,  shall  have  commanded  front.  This 
rule  is  general  for  all  successive  formations. 

When,  in  the  execution  of  this  movement,  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  commence  firing,  he  will  give  the  order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain 
whose  company  is  the  first  on  the  line ;  this  captain  will  immediately 
place  himself  behind  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  as  soon  as  the 
next  captain  shall  have  commanded  front,  he  will  commence  the  fire 
by  tile.  At  the  command  fre  by  file,  the  marker  at  the  outer  flank 
of  this  company  will  retire,  and  the  other  will  place  himself  against 
the  nearest  man  of  the  next  company.  The  captain  of  the  latter 
will  commence  firing  as  soon  as  the  captain  of  the  third  company 
in  line  shall  have  commanded  front;  the  marker  before  the  right 
or  left  file  retiring,  and  the  gviide  before  the  opposite  flank  taking  post 
before  the  nearest  file  of  the  third  company,  in  line  ,•  and  so  on  to  the 
last  company. 

Column  at  fall  distance,  forward  into  line  of  battle. 

329.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance,  right  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  forward  into  line, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  213 

he  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  first  part  of  the  last  num- 
ber, and  then  command : 

1.  Forward,  into  line.    2.  By  company,  left  half  wheel.    3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  add, 
guide  right,  put  the  company  in  march,  halt  it  three  paces  from  the 
markers,  and  align  it  against  tlie  latter  by  the  right. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
left  on  fixed  pivots  ;  and,  at  the  instant  the  colonel  shall  judge,  accord- 
ing to  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  that  the  companies  have 
sufiiciently  wheeled,  he  will  command  : 

4.  Forioard.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

At  the  fifth  command  the  companies  ceasing  to  wheel  will  march 
straight  forward ;  and  at  the  sixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  toward 
the  right.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company,  who  is  nearest  to 
the  line  of  battle,  will  march  straight  forward  ;  each  succeeding  right 
guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately  before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the 
wheel. 

The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the 
first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach 
the  line  of  battle;  and  when  its  right  guide  shall  be  at  three  paces 
from  that  line,  the  captain  will  command : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt:  the  files  not  yet  in 
line  with  the  guide  will  come  into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place 
himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three 
files  on  the  left  of  the  company;  and,  as  soon  as  he  is  assured  on  the 
direction  by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the  captain,  having  placed  himself 
accurately  on  the  line  of  battle,  will  command : 

3.  Right — Dress. 

At  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  the  second  company  begins  to  turn 
to  the  right,  the  guide  of  the  third  ceasing  to  follow  the  file  imme- 
diately before  him,  will  march  straight  forward:  and,  when  he  shall 
arrive  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  second,  his  captain  will  cause  the 
company  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  tli€  line  of  battle, 
halt  it  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  and  align  it  by  the  right,  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  second  company. 

Each  following  company  will  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed 


214  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

for  the  third,  as  the  preceding  company  shall  turn  to  the  right  in  order 
to  approach  the  line  of  battle. 

The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  Avill  observe,  in  this  formation, 
what  is  prescribed  for  them  on  the  right  into  line. 

A  column  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  forward  into  line  of  battle 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

330.  When  a  column  by  company  at  full  distance,  right  in  front, 
and  in  march,  has  arrived  at  company  distance  from  the  two  markers 
established  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Forward,  into  line.    2.  By  company,  left  half  wheel.  3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  will  com- 
mand, guide  right,  and  caution  it  to  march  directly  to  the  front, 
the  captains  of  the  other  companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to 
the  left. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  as  in  the  last  case. 

If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  the  column  forward  into  line,  and 
to  continue  to  march  in  this  order,  he  will  not  cause  markers  to  be 
established:  the  movements  will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  by 
the  same  commands  and  means,  observing  what  follows: 

At  the  fir:-t  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  companj'^  will  add 
quick  time  after  the  command  (juide  rigJit.  At  the  second  command, 
the  first  company  will  continue  to  mai'ch  in  quick  time,  and  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbow  to  the  right;  its  chief  will  imniediate'y  place  him- 
self on  its  right,  and  to  assure  the  march  will  take  points  of  direction 
to  the  front.  The  captain  of  the  second  company  will  cause  his  com- 
pany to  take  the  same  gait  as  soon  as  it  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the 
first,  and  will  also  move  to  the  right  of  his  company;  the  captains  of 
the  third  and  fourth  companies  will  execute  in  succession  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  The  companies  will  preserve  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  right,  until  the  command,  ynide  centre. 

When  the  color  company  shall  have  entered  the  line,  the  colonel 
will  command,  guide  centre.  At  this  command  the  color-bearer  and 
right  general  gtiide  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  line. 
The  colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of  the  color-bearer,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  and  right  companies  will  immediately  conform  to  the  prin- 
ciples  of  the  march   in  line  of  battle.      The  left  companies  and  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  215 

left  general  guide,  as  tbey   arrive   in  line,   will  also    conform    to    the 
same  principles. 

1.  Column^  at  full  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 

331.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance,  rigbt  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  faced  to 
the  rear,  he  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  themselves  to  what 
is  prescribed  in  the  first  part  of  No.  328,  and  the  colonel  will  then  com- 
mand : 

1.  Ifito  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  right — Face.     3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  cause 
it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  put  it  in  march,  causing  it  to  wheel  by  file 
to  the  left,  and  direct  its  march  toward  the  line  of  battle,  which  it  will 
pass  in  rear  of  the  left  marker;  the  first  file  having  pas.^ed  three  paces 
beyond  the  line,  the  company  will  wheel  again  by  file  to  the  left,  in 
order  to  place  itself  in  rear  of  the  two  markers;  being  in  this  position, 
its  captain  will  halt  it,  face  it  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right 
against  the  markers. 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  other  companies  will  face  to  the 
right,  each  captain  placing  himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will  put  themselves  in  move- 
ment;  the  left  guide  of  the  second,  who  is  nearest  to  the  line  of  battle, 
will  hasten  in  advance  to  mark  that  Hue;  he  will  place  himself  on  it 
as  prescribed  above  for  successive  formations,  and  thus  indicate  to  his 
captain  the  point  at  which  he  ought  to  pass  the  line  of  battle,  by  three 
paces,  in  order  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  then  to  direct  his  com- 
pany parallelly  to  that  line. 

As  soon  as  the  first  file  of  this  company  shall  have  arrived  near  the 
left  file  of  the  preceding  one  already  on  the  line  of  battle,  its  captain 
will  command : 

1.  Second  company.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front.    4.  Right— Dress. 

The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  company  shall  yet  have 
four  paces  to  take  to  reach  the  halting  point. 

At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

At  the  third,  the  company  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if  there  be 
openings  between  the  files  the  latter  will  promptly  close  to  the  right; 
the  captain  will  immediately  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man  on 
the  left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  himself  on  its  front  rank. 


216  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  fourth  command  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  328. 

The  following  companies  will  be  conducted  and  established  on  the 
line  of  battle  as  just  prescribed  for  the  second,  each  regulating  itself 
by  the  one  that  precedes  it;  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves  in 
time  to  precede  their  respective  companies  on  the  line  by  twelve  or 
fifteen  paces,  and  each  place  himself  so  as  to  be  oj)posite  to  one  of  the 
three  left  files  of  his  company,  when  in  line.  If  the  movement  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time,  the  moment  it  is  commenced,  all  the  left 
guides  will  detach  themselves  at  the  same  time  from  the  column,  and 
will  move  at  a  run,  to  establish  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle. 

The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel,  in  this  formation,  will  each 
observe  what  is  prescribed  for  him  in  that  of  on  the  right,  into  line  of 
battle. 

A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of 
battle,  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

3.32.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  nearly  at  company  distance  from 
the  two  markers  established  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 
3.  March  (or  douhle  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  caution  their  companies  to 
face  by  the  right  flank. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of  com- 
panies, all  the  companies  will  face  to  the  right,  and  the  movement  will 
be  completed  as  in  the  last  case. 

Formation  in  line   of  battle    by   tioo   movements. 

333.  If  a  column  by  company,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  find  itself 
in  part  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  the  colonel  should  think  proper  to 
form  line  of  battle  before  all  the  companies  enter  the  new  direction, 
the  formation  will  be  executed  as  follows  : 

It  will  be  supposed  that  the  column  has  arrived  behind  the  line  of 
battle,  and  that  five  companies  haA^e  entered  the  new  direction,  the 
colonel  having  assured  the  guides  of  the  first  five  companies  on  the 
direction,  will  command: 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.   Three  rear  companies,  forward  into 
i  line. 


SCHOOL    OF    THT:    BATTALION.  217 

At  the  second  commanrl.  the  chief  of  each  of  the  rear  companies 
Avill  command:   B;/  conipnn^,  left  hdlf-irheel ;  and  the  colonel  will  add: 

3.   March   (or  double  quick — March). 

At  this  command,  rci)eated  hy  the  captains,  the  first  five  companies 
will  wheel  to  the  Uft  into  line,  and  the  last  three  will  execute  forward 
into  line,  by  the  means  pi'escrihed  for  this  fm-mation ;  each  captain 
of  the  three  rear  companies  will,  when  his  company  shall  have  suffi- 
ciently wheeled,  command: 

1.  Forivard.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.   I'o   tlie  left^  and  foricard  into  line.     2.  March   (or   double 

quick — Marc  n) . 

If  the  colonel  should  wish,  in  formiuo-  the  battalion  into  line,  to 
march  immediately  forward,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  company,  to  the  left,  and  forward  into  line.     2.  March. 

And  when  the  right  of  the  companies  which  wheel  shall  arrive  on 
the  line,  he  will  command: 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.  Guide  centre. 

If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  colonel  will 
cause  quick  time  to  be  taken  before  commencing  the  movement. 

334.  If,  instead  of  arriving  behind,  the  column  should  arrive  before 
the  line  of  battle,  so  that  a  portion  is  on  the  line,  and  the  remaining 
portion  still  in  front  of  it,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.    Left   into  line,   ivheel.     2.    Three   rear  companies   irito   line, 
faced  to  the  rear. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  the  three  rear  com- 
panies will  command: 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Right — Face. 

The  colonel  will  then  add : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At   this   command,   repeated  by  the   captains,  the  first   five  com- 
panies will  form  to  the  left  into  line,  and  the  three  last  into  line,  f(iced 
to  the  rear. 
19 


218         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   To  the  left,  and  into  line,  faced  to   the  rear.     2.  March    (or 
double  quick — March). 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half  distance  into  line 

of  battle. 

Column  at  half  distance,  to  the  left  (or  right^  into  line  of  battle. 

335.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form  to  the  left  (or 
rio'ht)  into  line,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  take  distance  by  the  means 
prescribed,  No.  313 ;  which  being  executed,  he  will  form  the  column 
into  line  to  the  left  or  right,  No.  323. 

If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  be  in  march,  and  it 
is  necessary  to  form  rapidly  into  line,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  By   the   rear    of   column,   left    (or   right)     into    line,   wheel. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  right  general  guide  will  move  rapidly 
to  the  front,  and  place  himself  a  little  beyond  the  point  where  the  head" 
of  the  column  will  rest,  and  on  the  prolongation  of  the  guides.  The 
captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  command  :  Left  into  line,  wheel;  the 
other  captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  continue  to  march  to  the 
front.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captain  of  the 
eighth  company,  the  guide  of  this  company  will  halt,  and  the  com- 
pany will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the  principles  laid  down  for 
wheeling  from  a  halt;  when  its  right  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  the 
captain  will  halt  the  company,  and  align  it  to  the  left.  The  other  cap- 
tains will  place  themselves  briskly  on  the  flank  of  the  column ;  when 
the  captain  of  the  seventh  sees  that  there  is  sufficient  distance  between 
his  company  and  the  eighth  to  form  the  latter  into  line,  he  will 
command  :  Left  into  line,  wheel — March  ;  the  left  guide  will  halt,  and 
facing  to  the  rear,  will  place  himself  on  the  line ;  the  company  will 
wheel  to  the  left,  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  will  face  to  the 
left,  and  place  his  breast  against  the  arm  of  the  guide ;  the  captain 
will  halt  the  company  when  its  right  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  and 
will  align  it  to  the  left.  The  other  companies  will  conform  in  suc- 
cession to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  seventh.  Each  cap- 
tain will  direct  the  alignment  of  his  company  on  the  left  man  in 
the  front  rank  of  the  company  next  on  his  right. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will  see  that  the  leading  guide  marches  accu- 
rately on  the  prolongation  of  the  line  of  battle,  and  directs  himself 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  219 

on  the  right  general  guide.  The  major,  placed  in  rear  of  the  left  guide 
of  the  eighth  company,  will,  as  soon  as  the  seventh  company  is  es- 
tablished on  the  direction,  hasten  in  rear  of  the  guides  of  the  other 
companies,  so  as  to  assure  each  of  them  on  the  line  in  succession. 

Column^  at  half  distance^  on  the  right  (or  left)  info  line  of  battle. 

336.  A  column  at  half  distaiicc  will  form  itself  on  the  right  (or  left) 
into  line,  as  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

Column  at  half  distance,  forward,  into  line  of  battle. 

337.  If  it  be  wished  to  form  a  column  at  half  distance  forward 
into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it  to  close  in  mass 
and  then  deploy   it  on   the  leading  company. 

Colum?!  at  half  distance,  into  line,  face  to  the  rear. 

338.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  formed  into  line  of  battle, 
faced  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

Deployment  of  column  closed  in  mass. 

339.  When  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  arrives  behind  the  line  on 
which  it  is  intended  to  deploy  it,  the  colonel  will  indicate,  in  advance, 
to  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  as  well  as 
the  point  on  which  he  may  wish  to  direct  the  column.  The  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  immediately  detach  himself  with  two  markers,  and  estab- 
lish them  ou  that  line,  the  first  at  the  point  indicated,  the  second 
a  little  less  than  the  front  of  a  division  from  the  first. 

Deployments  will  always  be  made  upon  lines  parallel  and  lines  per- 
pendicular to  the  line  of  battle;  consequently,  if  the  head  of  the 
column  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  commence  by  estab- 
lishing the  direction  of  the  columu  perpendicularly  to  that  line,  if  it 
be  not  already  so.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  so  direct  it  that 
it  may  arrive  exactly  behind  the  markers,  perpendicularly  to  the  line 
of  battle,  and  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  that  line. 

The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halted,  it  is  supposed  that  the  colo- 
nel wishes  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  ,•  he  will  order  the  left 
general  guide  to  go  to  a  point  on  the  line  of  battle  a  little  beyond  that 
at  which  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  deployed,  and  place 
himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  markers  established  before 
the  first  division. 


220         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command : 
1.  On  the  first  division^  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion^  left — Face. 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  it  to 
Btand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  the  three  other  divisions  will  remind  them 
that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  left. 

At  the  second  command  the  three  last  divisions  will  face  to  the  left; 
the  chief  of  each  division  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  left 
guide,  and  the  junior  captain  by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of 
the  left  company,  who  will  have  stepped  into  the  front  rank. 

At  the  same  command  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  a  third 
marker  on  the  alignment  of  the  two  first,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three 
left  files  of  the  right  company,  first  division,  and  then  place  himself  on 
the  line  of  battle,  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the 
second  division  will  rest. 

The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  this  command  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  go  to  its  right 
and  command  : 

RigJit — Dress. 

At  this  the  division  will  dress  up  against  the  markers;  the  chief  of 
the  division  and  its  junior  captain  will  each  align  the  company  on  his 
left,  and  then  command  : 

Front. 

The  three  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will  put  themselves  in  march; 
the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  direct  himself  paralielly  to  the  line  of 
battle ;  the  left  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  march 
abreast  with  the  guide  of  the  second ;  the  guides  of  the  third  and 
fourth,  each  presei-ving  the  prescribed  distance  between  himself  and 
the  guide  of  the  division  which  preceded  his  own  in  the  column. 

The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  not  follow  its  movement ;  he 
will  see  it  file  by  him,  and  when  its  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with 
him,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  division.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  division  shall  yet  have 
seven  or  eight  paces  to  march ;  the  second,  when  the  right  guide  shall 
be  abreast  with  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  the  third  immediately 
after  the  second. 

At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt ;  at  the  third,  it  will 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  221 

face  to  the  front,  and  if  there  be  openings  between  the  file?,  the  chief 
of  the  division  will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  right ;  the 
left  guides  of  both  companies  will  step  upon  the  line  of  battle,  face  to 
the  light,  and  place  themselves  on  the  direction  of  the  markers  estab- 
lished before  the  first  division,  each  guide  opposite  to  one  of  the  three 
left  files  of  his  company. 

The  division  having  faced  to  the  front,  its  chief  will  place  himself 
accurately  on  the  line  of  battle,  on  the  left  of  the  first  division  ;  and 
when  he  shall  see  the  guides  assured  on  the  direction,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Right — Dress. 

At  this,  the  division  will  be  aligned  by  the  right  in  the  manner  indi- 
cated for  the  first. 

The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  continue  to  march ;  at  the  com- 
mand halt,  given  to  the  second,  the  chief  of  the  third  will  halt  in  his 
own  person,  place  himself  exactly  opposite  to  the  guide  of  the  second, 
after  this  division  shall  have  faced  to  the  front  and  closed  its  files  ;  he 
will  see  his  division  file  past,  and  when  his  right  guide  shall  be  abreast 
with  him  he  will  command  : 

1.   Thii'd  division.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

As  soon  as  the  division  faces  to  the  front,  its  chief  will  place  himself 
two  paces  before  its  centre,  and  command: 

1.   Tldrd  division^  forward.     2.   Guide  right.     3.  March. 

At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  march  toward  the  line  of 
battle;  the  right  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of 
the  man  on  the  left  of  the  second  division,  and  Avhen  the  division  is  at 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  its  chief  will  halt  it  and  align  it  by 
the  right. 

The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  conform  himself  (and  the  chief 
of  the  fifth,  if  there  be  a  fifth)  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
third. 

The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

At  this  command,  the  guides  will  resume  their  places  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  the  markers  will  retire. 

340.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deplo}' 
it  on  the  first  division  without  halting   the  column,  he  will   make  the 


222  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

necessary  dispositions,  and  when  the  first  division  shall  have  arrived  at 
three  paces  from  the  line,  he  will  command : 

1.   On  the  first  division,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion,  hy  the  left 
flank.     3.  March  (or  douUe  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  it  to 
halt,  and  will  command,  first  division;  the  other  chiefs  will  caution 
their  divisions  to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the  rear 
divisions,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  command,  Halt,  and  will 
align  his  division  by  the  riglit  against  the  markers;  the  other  divisions 
will  face  to  the  left,  their  chiefs  hastening  to  the  left  of  their  divisions. 
The  second,  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  execute  what  is  prescribed. 
No.  338;  but  the  chief  of  each  division  will  halt  in  his  own  person  at 
the  command  march,  given  by  the  chief  of  the  division  which  precedes 
him,  and  when  the  right  of  his  division  arrives  abreast  of  him,  he  will 
command  : 

Such  division,  hy  the  right  flanh — March. 

If  the  colonel  should  Avish  to  deploy  the  column  without  halting  it, 
and  to  continue  the  march,  the  markers  will  not  be  posted ;  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  the  fore- 
going, but  with  the  following  modifications  ; 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  command: 
1.  Guide  right.  2.  Quick  time.  At  the  command,  Double  quick — 
March,  given  by  the  colonel,  the  first  division  will  take  quick  time, 
and  touch  elbows  to  the  right;  the  captains  will  place  themselves  on 
the  right  of  their  respective  companies ;  the  captain  on  the  right  of 
the  battalion  will  take  points  on  the  ground  to  assure  the  direction  of 
the  march.  The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  allow  his  division  to 
file  past  him,  and  when  he  sees  its  right  abreast  of  him,  he  will  com- 
mand:  1.  Second  dwision,  by  the  right  flank.  2.  March.  3.  Guide  right; 
and  when  this  division  shall  arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first,  he  will 
cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will 
deploy  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the  second. 

The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  major,  and  color-bearer,  will  conform 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  330. 

341.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of  deploying  it  on  the 
first,  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  rearmost  division,  he 
will  cause  the  dispositions  to  be  made  indicated.  No.  338  ;  but  it  will  be 
the  right  general  guide  whom  he  will  send  to  place  himself  beyond  the 
point  at  which  the  right  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  deployed. 

The  colonel  will  then  command : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  223 

1.   On  the  fourth  (or  sucJi)  division,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion, 

right — Face. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution  it 
to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution  them  that 
they  will  have  to  face  to  the  right. 

At  the  second  command,  the  first  three  divisions  will  face  to  the 
right;  and  the  chief  of  each  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right 
guide. 

At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  a  third 
marker  between  the  first  two,  so  that  this  marker  may  be  opposite  to 
one  of  the  three  right  files  of  the  left  company  of  the  division  :  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  then  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  a  few 
paces  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  third  division  will 
rest  when  dcploj'ed. 

The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  this  command,  the  three  right  divisions  will  put  themselves  in 
march,  the  guide  of  the  first  so  directing  himself  as  to  pass  three  paces 
within  the  line  marked  by  the  right  general  guide.  The  chief  of  the 
third  division  will  not  follow  its  movement;  he  will  see  it  file  past,  halt 
it  when  its  left  guide  shall  bo  abreast  with  him,  and  cause  it  to  face  to 
the  front ;  and  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  he  will  cause 
them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  left. 

The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  sees  it  nearly  unmasked 
by  the  three  others,  will  command  : 

1.  Fourth  division.,  forward.     2.   Guide  left.     3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  which  Avill  be  given  the  instant  the  fourth  is 
unmasked,  this  division  will  approach  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at 
three  paces  from  the  markers  on  that  line,  its  chief  will  halt  it,  and 
command  : 

Ze/]:-^DRESS. 

At  this  command,  the  division  will  dress  forward  against  the  mark- 
ers;  the  chief  of  the  division  and  the  junior  captain  will  each  align 
the  company  on  his  right,  and  then  command  : 

Front. 

The  instant  that  the  third  division  is  unmasked,  its  chief  will  cause 


224         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

it  to  approach  the   line  of  battle,  and  halt  it  in  the  manner  just  pre 
scribed  for  the  fourth. 

The  niomont  the  division  halts,  its  right  guide  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  its  left  company  will  step  on  the  line  of  battle,  placing  them- 
selves on  the  prolongation  of  the  markers  established  in  front  of  the 
fourth  division  ;  as  soon  as  they  shall  be  assured  in  their  positions, 
the  divisions  ■will  be  aligned  as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

The  second  and  first  divisions  which  will  have  continued  to  march, 
will,  in  succession,  be  halted  and  aligned  by  the  left,  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  third;  the  chiefs  of  these  divisions  will  conform  themselves 
to  w^hat  is  prescribed,  xS^o.  339.  The  second  being  near  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, the  command  will  not  be  given  for  it  to  move  on  this  line,  but  it 
Avill  be  dressed  up  to  it. 

The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

342.  To  deploy  the  column  on  an  interior  division,  the  colonel  will 
cause  the  line  to  be  traced  by  the  means  above  indicated,  and  the 
general  guides  will  move  briskly  on  the  line.  This  being  executed, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   On   such   (Iwision,   deploy  colvmn.      2.  BatiaUoiu  outward — 
Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

Whether  the  column  be  with  the  right  or  left  in  front,  the  divisions 
which,  in  the  order  in  battle,  belong  to  the  right  of  the  directing  one, 
will  face  to  the  right;  the  others,  except  the  directing  division,  will 
face  to  the  left. 

The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  finds  itself  unmasked,  will  ap- 
proach the  line  of  battle,  taking  the  guide  left  or  right,  according  as 
the  right  or  left  of  the  column  may  be  in  front.  The  chief  of  this 
division  will  align  it  by  the  directing  flank,  and  then  step  back  into 
ihe  rear,  in  order  momentarily  to  give  place  to  the  chief  of  the  next 
division 

To  advance  in  line  ofhatUe. 

343.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and  supposed  to  be  the 
directing  one  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  in  line  of  battle,  he 
will  give  the  lieutenant-colonel  an  intimation  of  his  purpose,  place 
himself  about  forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  color-file,  and  face  to  the 
front. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  a  like  distance  in  front  of 
the  same  file,  and   face  to  the  colonel,  who  will  establish  him  as  cor- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  225 

rectly  as  possible,  by  signal  of  the  sword,  perpendicularly  to  the  line 
of  battle  opposite  to  the  color-bearer.  The  colonel  will  next,  above  the 
heads  of  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  color-bearer,  take  a  point  of  direc- 
tion in  the  field  beyond,  if  a  distinct  one  present  itself,  exactly  in  the 
prolongation  of  those  first  two  points. 

The  colonel  will  then  move  twenty  paces  farther  to  the  rear,  and 
establish  two  markers  on  the  prolongation  of  the  straight  line  passing 
through  the  color-bearer  and  the  lieuteuaut-colouel;  these  markers 
will  face  to  the  rear,  the  first  .placed  about  twenty-five  paces  behind 
the  roar  rank  of  the  battalion,  and  the  second  at  the  same  distance 
from  the  first. 

The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to  take,  the  moment  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel shall  be  established  on  the  perpendicular,  two  points  on  the 
ground  in  the  straight  line  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would  pass  be- 
tween the  heels  of  that  ofliccrj  the  first  of  these  points  will  bo  taken 
at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  the  color-bearer. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.    Battalion,  forward. 

At  this,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard  will  advance  six  paces  to 
the  front;  the  corjiorals  in  the  rear  rank  will  place  themselves  in  the 
front  rank,  and  these  will  be  replaced  by  those  in  the  rank  of  file- 
closers;  at  the  same  time  the  two  general  guides  will  move  in  advance, 
abreast  with  the  color-bearer,  the  one  on  the  right,  opposite  to  the 
captain  of  the  right  compan}^,  the  other  opposite  to  the  sergeant  who 
closes  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  shift,  passing  before  the  front 
rank,  to  the  left  of  their  respective  companies  ;  the  sergeant  on  the  left 
of  the  battalion  will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank.  The  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  company  next  on  the  left  of  the  color-company  will  step 
into  the  front  rank. 

The  lieutenant-colonel,  having  assured  the  color-bearer  on  the  line 
between  himself  and  the  corporal  of  the  color-file,  now  in  the  front 
rank,  will  go  to  the  position  which  will  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

The  major  will  place  himself  six  or  eight  paces  on  either  flank  of 
the  color-rank. 

The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  this  command,  the  battalion  will  step  off  with  life ;  the  color- 
bearer,  charged  with  the  step  and  direction,  will  scrupulously  observe 
the  length  and  cadence  of  the  pace,  marching  on  the  prolongati(m   of 


226  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

the  two  points  previously  taken,  and  successively  taking  others  in 
advance  by  the  means  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company;  the 
corporal  on  his  right,  and  the  one  on  his  left  will  march  in  the  same 
step,  taking  care  not  to  turn  the  head  or  shoulders,  the  color-bearer 
supporting  the  color-lance  against  the  hip. 

The  two  general  guides  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  color- 
rank,  each  maintaining  himself  abreast,  or  nearly  so,  with  that  rank, 
and  neither  occupying  himself  with  the  movement  of  the  other. 

The  three  corporals  of  the  color-guard,  now  in  the  front  rank  of  the 
battalion,  will  march  well  aligned,  elbow  to  elbow,  heads  direct  to 
the  front,  a$id  without  deranging  the  line  of  their  shoulders ;  the  cen- 
tre one  will  follow  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  color-bearer,  and  maintain 
the  same  step,  without  lengthening  or  shortening  it,  except  on  an  inti- 
mation from  the  colonel  or  lieutenant-colonel,  although  he  should  find 
himself  more  or  less  than  six  paces  from  the  color-rank. 

The  covering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank,  between  the  color-company 
and  the  next  on  the  left,  will  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  on  the  same 
line,  with  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre,  his  head  well  to  the  front. 

The  captains  of  the  color-company,  and  the  company  next  to  the 
left,  will  constitute,  with  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre  of  the  front 
rank,  the  basis  of  alignment  for  both  wings  of  the  battalion ;  they  will 
march  in  the  same  step  with  the  color-bearer,  and  exert  themselves  to 
maintain  their  shoulders  exactly  in  the  square  with  the  direction.  To 
this  end,  they  will  keep  their  heads  direct  to  the  front,  only  occasion- 
ally casting  an  eye  on  the  three  centre  corporals,  with  the  slightest 
possible  turn  of  the  neck,  and  if  they  perceive  themselves  in  advance 
or  in  rear  of  these  corporals,  the  captain,  or  two  captains  will,  almost 
insensibly,  shorten  or  lengthen  the  step,  so  as,  at  the  end  of  several 
paces,  to  regain  the  true  alignment,  without  giving  sudden  checks  or 
impulsions  to  the  wings  beyond  them  respectively. 

The  lieutenant-colonel,  jjlaced  twelve  or  fifteen  paces  on  the  right  of 
the  captain  of  the  color-company,  will  maintain  this  captain  and  the 
next  one  beyond,  abreast  with  the  three  centre  corporals ;  to  this  end, 
he  will  caution  either  to  lengthen  or  to  shorten  the  step,  as  may  be 
necessary,  which  the  captain,  or  two  captains  AvilL  execute  as  has  just 
been  explained. 

All  the  other  captains  will  maintain  themselves  on  the  prolongation 
of  this  basis;  and,  to  this  end,  they  will  cast  their  eyes  toward  the 
centre,  taking  care  to  turn  the  neck  but  slightly,  and  not  to  derange 
the  direction  of  their  shoulders. 

The  captains  will  observe  the  march  of  their  companies,  and  prevent 
the  men  from  getting  in  advance  of  the  line  of  captains  ;  they  will  not 
lengthen  or  shorten  step  except  when  evidently  necessary;  because,  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  227 

correct,  with  too  scrupulous  attention,  small  faults,  is  apt  to  cause  the 
production  of  greater— loss  of  calmness,  silence,  and  equality  of  step, 
each  of  which  it  is  so  important  to  maintain. 

The  men  will  constantly  keep  their  heads  well  directed  to  the  front, 
feel  lightly  the  elbow  toward  the  centre,  resist  pressure  coming  from 
the  flank,  give  the  greatest  attention  to  the  squareness  of  shoulders, 
and  hold  themselves  always  very  slightly  behind  the  line  of  the  cap- 
tains, in  order  never  to  shut  out  from  the  view  of  the  latter  the  basis  of 
alignment;  they  will,  from  time  to  time,  cast  an  eye  on  the  color-rank, 
or  on  the  general  guide  of  the  wing,  in  order  to  march  constantly  in 
the  same  step  with  those  advanced  persons. 

Pending  the  march,  the  line  determined  by  the  two  markers  will  be 
prolonged  by  placing,  in  proportion  as  the  battalion  advances,  a  third 
marker  in  ihe  rear  of  the  first,  then  the  first  marker  will  quit  his  place 
and  go  alike  distance  in  rear  of  tlie  third;  the  second  marker  will,  in 
his  turn,  do  the  like  in  respect  to  the  first,  and  so  on,  in  succession,  as 
long  as  the  battalion  continues  to  advance;  each  marker,  on  shifting 
position,  taking  care  to  face  to  the  rear,  and  to  cover  accurately  the 
two  markers  already  established  on  the  direction.  A  staff  officer,  or 
the  quartermaster-sergeant,  designated  for  the  purpose,  and  who  will 
hold  himself  constantly  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  and  facing  the 
marker  farthest  from  the  battalion,  will  caution  each  marker  when 
to  shift  place,  and  assure  him  on  the  direction  behind  the  other  two. 

To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it. 

344.  The  battalion,  marching  in  the  line  of  battle,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  halt;  the  color-rank  and 
the  general  guides  will  remain  in  front;  but  if  the  colonel  should  not 
wish  immediately  to  resume  the  advance  in  line,  nor  to  give  a  general 
alignment,  he  will  command: 

Color  and  general  guides— Fosts. 

At  this  command,  the  color-rank  and  general  guides  will  retake  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  will  shift  to  the 
right  of  their  companies. 

If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary  to  rectify  the  align- 
ment, he  will  command  : 


228  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Captains,  rectify  the  alignment. 

The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an  eye  toward  the  centre, 
align  themselves  accurately,  on  the  basis  of  the  alignment,  which  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  see  well  directed,  and  then  promptly  dress 
their  respective  companies.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  admonish  such 
captains  as  may  not  be  accurately  on  the  alignment  by  the  command: 
Captain  of  (such)  company^  or  captains  of  (such)  companies,  move  up 
or  fall  back. 

But  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  the  battalion  a  general 
alignment,  eiiber  parallel  or  oblique,  instead  of  rectifying  it  as  above, 
he  will  move  some  paces  outside  of  one  of  the  general  guides  (the  right 
will  here  be  supposed)  and  caution  the  right  general  guide  and  the 
color-bearer  to  face  him,  and  then  establish  them  by  signal  of  the 
sword,  on  the  direction  which  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  battalion.  As 
soon  as  they  shall  be  correctly  established,  the  left  general  guide  will 
place  himself  on  their  direction,  and  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the 
major.  The  color-bearer  will  carry  the  color-lance  perpendicularly 
between  his  eyes,  and  the  two  corporals  of  his  rank  will  return  to  their 
places  in  the  front  rank  the  moment  he  shall  face  to  the  colonel. 

This  disposition  being  made,  the  colon-jl  will  command  : 

1.  Guides — On  the  line. 

At  this  command,  the  right  guide  of  each  company  in  the  right 
wing,  and  the  left  guide  of  each  company  in  the  left,  will  each  place 
himself  on  the  direction  of  the  color-bearer  and  the  two  general  guides, 
face  to  the  color-bearer,  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  guide  who  is  next 
before  him,  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his  company,  and  align 
himself  upon  the  color-bearer  and  the  general  guide  beyond. 

The  captains  in  the  right  wing  will  shift  to  the  left  of  their  com- 
panies, except  the  captain  of  the  color-company,  who  will  remain  on 
its  right,  but  step  into  the  rear  rank  ;  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  will 
shift  to  the  right  of  their  companies. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will  promptly  rectifj^,  if  necessary,  the  posi- 
tions of  the  guides  of  the  right  wing,  and  the  major  those  of  the  other,- 
which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

2.  On  the  centre — Dress. 

At  this  command,  the  companies  will  move  up  in  quick  time  against 
the  guides,  where,  having  arrived,  each  captain  will  align  his  company 
according  to  prescribed  principles,  the  lieutenant-colonel  aligning  the 
color-company. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  22^ 

If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  the  captains  will  take  care  to  conform 
their  companies  to  it  in  conducting  them  toward  the  line. 
The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will  command : 

3.   Color  and  guides — Posts. 

At  this  command,  the  color-bearer,  the  general  and  company  guides, 
and  the  captains  in  the  right  wing,  will  take  their  places  in  the  line  of 
battle,  and  the  color-bearer  will  replace  the  heel  of  the  color-lance 
against  the  right  hip. 

To  march  in  retreat^  in  line  of  batde. 

Mb.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to 
cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Face  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  about — Face. 

At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  about ;  the  color- 
rank  and  the  general  guides,  if  in  advance,  will  take  their  places  in 
line;  the  color-bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  leading ;  the 
corporal  of  his  tile  will  step  behind  the  corporal  next  on  his  own  right, 
to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  then  step  into  the  front  rank,  now 
rear,  to  re-form  the  color-file ,  the  colonel  will  place  himself  behind 
the  front  rank,  become  the  rear  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will 
place  themselves  before  the  rear  rank,  now  leading. 

The  colonel  Avill  take  post  forty  paces  behind  the  color-file,  in  order 
to  assure  the  lieutenant-colonel  on  the  perpendicular,  who  will  place 
himself  at  a  like  distance  in  fi'ont,  as  prescribed  for  the  advance  in 
line  of  battle. 

If  the  battalion  be  the  one  charged  Avith  the  direction,  the  colonel 
will  establish  markers  in  the  manner  indicated,  No.  343,  except  that 
they  will  face  to  the  battalion,  and  that  the  first  will  be  placed  twenty- 
five  paces  from  the  lieutenant  colonel.  If  the  markers  be  already 
established,  the  officer  charged  with  replacing  them  in  succession  will 
cause  them  to  face  about  the  moment  that  the  battalion  executes  this 
movement,  and  then  the  marker  nearest  to  the  battalion  will  hasten  to 
the  rear  of  the  two  others. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  Battalion,  forward. 

At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  will  advance  six  jtaces  beyond  the 
rank  of  file-closers,  accompanied  by  the  two  corporals  of  his  guard  of 
that  rank,  the  centre  corporal  stepping  back  to  let  the  color-bearer 


230  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

pass ;  the  two  file-closers  nearest  this  centre  corporal  will  unite  on  him 
behind  the  color-guard  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment  for  the  line  of 
file-closers  ;  the  two  general  guides  will  place  themselves  abreast  with 
the  color  rank,  the  covering  sergeants  will  place  themselves  in  the  line 
of  file-closers,  and  the  captains  in  the  rear  rank,  now  leading ;  the  cap- 
tains in  the  left  wing,  now  right,  will,  if  not  already  there,  shift  to  the 
left  of  their  companies,  now  become  the  right. 
The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

The  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the  same  principles  which 
govern  the  advance  in  line. 

To  halt,  the  battalion  marching  in  retreat^  and  to  face  it  to  the 

front. 

346.  The  colonel  having  halted  the  battalion,  and  wishing  to  face  it 
to  the  front,  will  command  : 

1.  Face  to  the  front.     2.  Battalion^  about — Face. 

At  the  second  command,  the  color-rank,  general  guides,  captains  and 
covering  sergeants,  will  all  retake  their  habitual  places  in  line  of  battle, 
and  the  color-bearer  will  repass  into  the  front  rank. 

347.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle  by  the  front  rank,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command: 

1.  Battalion,  right  about.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  rear  and  move 
off  at  the  same  gait  by  the  rear  rank.  If  the  colonel  should  wish 
the  battalion  to  march  again  by  the  front,  he  will  give  the  same  com- 
mands. 

Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  retreating. 

348.  The  battalion  advancing  in  line  will  be  supposed  to  encounter 
an  obstacle  which  covers  one  or  more  companies;  the  colonel  will  cause 
them  to  ploy  into  column  at  full  distance,  in  rear  of  the  next  company 
toward  the  color,  which  will  be  executed  as  follows  :  It  will  be  sup- 
posed that  the  obstacle  only  covers  the  third  company,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

Third  company,  obstacle. 
At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third  company  will  place  him- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  231 

self  in  its  front,  turn  to  it,  and  command  :  1.  Third  compa7u/,  hy  the  left 
JJank.  to  the  rear  into  column.  2.  Double  quick.  3.  March.  He  will 
then  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to  the  left  in  march- 
ing ;  the  two  left  files  will  promptly  disengage  to  the  rear  in  double 
quick  time;  the  left  guide,  placing  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front 
rank,  will  conduct  it  behind  the  fourth  company,  directing  himself  par- 
allelly  with  this  company;  the  captain  of  the  third  will  himself  halt 
opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  fourth,  and  see  his  company  file  past ; 
when  its  right  file  shall  be  nearly  up  with  him,  he  will  command :  1. 
Third  company.  2.  By  the  right  Jiank.  3.  March.  4.  Guide  riyht, 
and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  compan3\ 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  Avill  face  to  the  right,  preserv- 
ing the  gait,  but  the  moment  it  shall  be  at  the  prescribed  distance,  the 
captain  will  command  : 

1.   Quick  time.     2.  March. 

This  company  will  follow  in  column  that  behind  which  it  finds  itself, 
and  at  wheeling  distance,  its  right  guide  marching  exactly  in  the  trace 
of  the  captain  of  that  company. 

As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have  faced  to  the  left,  the  left 
guide  of  the  second  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of 
his  company,  and  maintain  between  himself  and  the  right  of  the  fourth, 
the  space  necessary  for  the  return  into  line  of  the  third. 

The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Thii'd  company,  forward  into  line. 


At  this  command,  the  captain,  turning  to  his  company,  will  add  : 

1.  By  company,  right  half  wheel.     2.  Double  quick.     3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the  double  quick  step 
and  execute  a  half  wheel;  its  captain  will  then  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  direct  itself  straight  for- 
ward toward  the  line,  and  retake  its  position  in  it  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  the  formation  forward  into  line. 

34:9.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  covers  several  contiguous 
companies  (the  three  companies  on  the  right,  for  example),  the  colonel 
will  command: 


232  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

1.   Three  right  companies^  obstacle.     2.  Bi/  the  left  Jiank^  to  the 
rear,  mto  column.     3.  Double  quick.     4.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  designated  companies  will 
each  place  himself  befoi-e  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it 
that  it  has  to  face  to  the  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  designated  companies  will  face  to  the 
left  in  marching,  and  immediately  take  the  double  quick  step ;  each 
captain  will  cause  the  head  of  his  company  to  disengage  itself  to  the 
rear,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front 
rank  ;  the  captain  of  the  third  company  will  conform  to  what  has  been 
prescribed  for  him  in  the  last  number;  the  captains  of  the  other  com- 
panies vv'ill  conduct  their  companies  by  the  flank  in  rear  of  the  third, 
inclining  toward  the  head  of  the  column  ;  and  as  the  head  of  each 
company  arrives  opposite  to  the  right  of  the  one  next  before  it  in 
column,  its  captain  will  halt,  see  his  company  file  past  him,  face  it  by 
the  right  flank,  take  guide  right,  and  place  himself  before  its  centre. 

When  the  last  company  in  column  shall  have  passed  the  obstacle, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Three  right  companies.,  forward  into  line. 

At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  these  three  companies  will 
command  :  By  company,  right  half  wheel.     The  colonel  will  then  add  : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  March, 

At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of  the  three  companies, 
each  company  will  execute  the  movement  on  the  principles  laid  down 
in  the  movement  of  forward  into  line  without  halting. 

350.  If  the  companies  belong  to  the  left  wing,  they  will  execute  the 
passage  of  an  obstacle  according  to  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means. 

If  the  battalion  is  marching  at  double  quick,  and  it  becomes  neces- 
sary to  break  off"  several  companies  in  the  passage  of  an  obstacle,  the 
colonel  will  first  bring  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

When  the  color-company  shall  be  obliged  to  execute  the  movement 
of  passing  an  obstacle,  the  color-rank  will  return  into  line  the  moment 
the  company  shall  face  to  the  right  or  left;  the  major  will  place  himself 
six  paces  before  the  extremity  of  the  company  behind  which  the  color 
company  marches  in  column,  in  order  to  give  the  step  and  the  direc- 
tion ;  he,  himself,  first  taking  the  step  from  the  battalion. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  233 

To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  hy  the  right  or  left  flank. 

351.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall  encounter  a  defile  which 
it  must  pass,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in  rear  of  the  left  flank,  and 
that  its  width  is  sufficient  to  give  passage  to  a  column  by  platoon; 
the  colonel  will  place  a  marker  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
file-closers  at  the  point  around  which  the  companies  will  have  to 
change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile ;  he  will  then  command  : 

To  the  rear,  hy  the  right  flank,  pass  the  defile. 
The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  immediately  command: 

1.  First  company,  right — Face.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 

March). 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  company  will  commence  the  move- 
ment; the  first  file  will  wheel  to  the  right,  march  to  the  rear  till  it 
shall  have  passed  four  paces  beyond  the  file-closers,  when  it  will  wheel 
again  to  the  right,  and  then  direct  itself  straight  forward  toward  the 
left  flank.  All  the  other  files  of  this  company  will  wheel  in  succession 
at  the  same  place  where  the  first  had  wheeled. 

The  second  company  will,  in  its  turn,  execute  the  movement,  by 
the  commands  of  its  captain,  who  will  give  the  command  march,  so 
that  the  first  file  of  his  company  may  immediately  folloAV  the  last  of 
the  first,  without  constraint;  the  first  file  of  the  second  company  will 
wheel  to  the  right  on  its  ground;  all  the  other  files  of  this  company 
will,  in  succession,  wheel  at  the  same  place.  The  following  companies 
will  execute,  each  in  its  turn,  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
second. 

When  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall  be  on  the  same  direc- 
tion with  the  first,  the  captain  of  the  first  will  cause  it  to  form,  by 
platoon,  into  line,  and  the  moment  that  it  is  in  column,  the  guide  of  the 
first  platoon  will  direct  himself  on  the  marker  around  whom  he  has  to 
change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile. 

The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  by  the  flank,  directing 
itself  parallelly  with  the  line  ;  and  it,  in  its  turn,  will  form  by  platoon 
into  line,  when  the  third  company  shall  be  wholly  on  the  same  direc- 
tion with  itself.  The  following  companies  will  execute  in  succession 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

The  first  platoon  of  the  leading  company  having  arrived  opposite  to 
the  marker  placed  at  the  entrance  of  the  defile,  will   turn  to  the  left, 
20 


234  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

and  the  following  platoons  will  all  execute  the  same  movement  at  the 
same  point.  As  the  last  company  will  not  be  able  to  form  platoons 
before  reaching  the  defile,  they  will  so  direct  themselves,  in  entering  it, 
as  to  leave  room  to  the  left  for  this  movement. 

The  battalion  will  thus  pass  the  defile  by  platoon  ;  and,  as  the  two 
platoons  of  each  company  shall  clear  it,  companies  will  be  formed.  The 
head  of  the  column  having  cleared  the  defile,  and  having  reached  the 
distance  at  which  the  colonel  wishes  to  re-form  the  line  faced  to  the 
defile,  he  may  cause  the  leading  company  to  turn  to  the  left,  to  pro- 
long the  column  in  that  direction,  and  then  form  it  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle;  or  he  may  halt  the  colvimn,  and  form  it  into  line  faced 
to  the  rear. 

If  the  defile  be  in  rear  of  the  right  flank,  it  Avill  be  passed  by  the 
left;  the  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means. 

If  the  defile  is  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front  of  a  platoon,  it  will  be 
passed  by  the  flank. 

To  march  hy  the  flank. 

352.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  battalion  to  march  by  the  flank,  will 
command  : 

1    Battalion.      2.    Right  i    (or  left) — Face.      3.    Forward.     4. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  will 
place  themselves  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  place  himself  to  the 
left  and  by  the  side  of  the  last  file  of  his  company,  covering  the 
captains  in  file. 

The  battalion  having  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  the  cay  tains,  at  the 
second  command,  will  shift  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  companies, 
and  each  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the 
company  preceding  his  own,  except  the  captain  of  the  left  company, 
who  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the 
battalion.  The  covering  sergeant  of  the  right  company  will  place 
himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  rearmost  file  of 
his  company,  covering  the  captains  in  file. 

At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  step  oft"  with  life ;  the 
sergeant,  placed  before  the  leading  file  (right  or  left  in  front),  will 
be    careful   to  preserve  exactly  the    length    and    cadence  of  the  step, 


lOr,  in  two  ranks — right — Face. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  285 

and  to  direct  himself  straight  forward;  to  this  end,  he  will  take  points 
on  the  ground. 

Whether  the  battalion  march  bj'  the  right  or  left  flank,  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel will  place  himself  abreast  with  the  leading  file,  and  the 
major  abreast  with  the  color-file,  both  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank, 
and  about  six  paces  from  it. 

The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  front 
rank,  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  head  of  the  battalion,  and 
the  sergeant-major,  j^laced  between  the  major  and  the  color-bearer,  will 
march  in  the  same  step  with  the  adjutant. 

The  captains  and  lile-closers  will  carefull}'  see  that  the  files  neither 
open  out  nor  close  too  much,  and  that  they  regain  insensibly  their 
distance?,  if  lost. 

353.  The  colonel  wishing  the  battalion  to  wheel  by  file,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  file  right  (or  left).     2.  March. 

The  files  will  wheel  in  succession,  and  all  at  the  place  where  the  first 
had  wheeled,  in  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  company. 

The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
it  to  halt,  he  will  command : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt.     3.  Fkont. 

These  commands  Avill  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
company. 

If  the  battalion  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and  the  colonel  should 
wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  line,  ^ther  to  the  front  or  to  the  rear,  the 
movements  will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  company. 

To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or  left,  hy  file,  into  line  of 

battle. 

354.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  right  flank,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  on  the  right  by  file,  he  will  determine  the  line  of 
battle,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  two  markers  on  that  line, 
in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed  in  No.  327. 

The  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly  up  with  the  first  marker,  the 
colonel  will  command: 

1.  On  the  right,  by  file  into  line.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 

March). 


236  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company  will  form  itself  on  the 
right,  by  file,  into  line  of  battle,  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, No.  240 ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  first  file  will  rest  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  the  first  marker;  the  other  companies 
will  follow  the  movement  of  the  leading  company;  each  captain  will 
place  himself  on  the  line  at  the  same  time  with  the  front  rank  man  of 
his  first  file,  and  on  the  right  of  this  man. 

The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  the  leading  one,  will  place 
himself  on  the  direction  of  the  markers,  and  opposite  to  the  left  file  of 
his  company,  at  the  instant  that  the  front  rank  man  of  this  file  arrives 
on  the  line. 

The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

The  colonel  will  superintend  the  successive  formation  of  the  bat- 
talion, moving  along  the  front  of  the  line  of  battle. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  Avill,  in  succession,  assure  the  direction  of  the 
guides,  and  see  that  the  men  of  the  front  rank,  in  placing  themselves 
on  the  line,  do  not  i)ass  it. 

Changes  of  front. 
Change  of  front  j^erpendicularly  fortoard. 

355.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is  supposed  to  be  the 
wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  a  change  of  front  forward  on  the  right 
company,  and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new  positions  be 
a  right  angle,  or  a  few  degrees  more  or  less  than  one;  he  will  cause 
two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the  position  to 
be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  order  its  captain  to  establish  it 
against  the  markers. 

The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  immediately  direct  it  upon 
the  markers  by  a  wheel  to  the  right  on  the  fixed  pivot;  and  after 
having  halted  it,  he  will  align  it  by  the  right. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Change  front  forward,  on  first  company.     2.  By  company, 
right  half  wheel.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  his  company. 

At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  right  on  the  fixed 
jiivot;  the  left  guide  of  each  will  place  himself  on  its  left  as  soon  as 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  237 

he  shall  be  able  to  pass ;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  that  the 
companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  command : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

At  the  fifih  command,  the  companies  ceasing  to  wheel  will  march 
straight  forward;  at  the  sixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  toward  the 
right. 

The  right  guide  of  the  second  company  will  march  straight  forward 
until  this  company  shall  arrive  at  the  point  where  it  should  turn  to 
the  right;  each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately 
before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel,  and  will  march  in  the  trace 
of  this  file  until  this  company  shall  turn  to  the  right  to  move  upon 
the  line;  this  guide  will  then  march  straight  forward. 

The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the 
first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  turn  to  the  right;  the  fight  guide 
will  direct  himself  so  as  to  arrive  squarely  upon  the  line  of  battle, 
and  when  he  shall  be  at  three  paces  from  tlia';  line,  the  captain  will 
command  : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt;  the  files  not  yet  in 
line  with  the  guide  will  come  into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place 
himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  as  soon  as  he  is  assured  in  the 
direction  by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the  captain  will  align  the  company 
by  the  right. 

Each  following  company  will  conform  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  second. 

The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

356.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
change  front  forward  on  the  first  company,  and  that  the  angle  formed 
by  the  old  and  new  positions  be  a  right  angle,  he  will  cause  two  mark- 
ers to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the  position  to  be  occupied 
by  that  company,  and  will  command  : 

1.   Change  front  fonmrd,  on  first    company.     2.  By  company, 
right  half  ivheel.     3:   March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  move  rapidly  before  the 
centre  of  their  respective  companies;  the  captain  of  the  first  company 
will  command:  1.  Rif/ht  turn.  2.  Quick  time;  the  captains  of  the 
other  companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the  right. 


238  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  company  will  turn  to  the  right, 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  its 
captain  will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and  the  files  in 
rear  will  promptly  come  into  line.  The  captain  will  align  the  com- 
pany by  the  right. 

Each  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot; 
the  left  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  left  of  their  respective 
companies,  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  they  have  wheeled 
sufficiently,  he  will  command  : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

The  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  change  front  forward^  on  the 
eighth  company  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

Change  of  front  perpendicular  to  the  rear. 

357.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  change  front  to  the  rear  on  the  right 
company,  will  impart  his  purpose  to  the  captain  of  this  company. 
The  latter  will  immediately  face  his  company  about,  wheel  it  to  the 
left  on  the  fixed  pivot,  and  halt  it  when  it  shall  be  in  the  direction 
indicated  to  him  by  the  colonel  ,•  the  captain  will  then  face  his  com- 
pany to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against  the  two  markers, 
whom  the  colonel  will  cause  to  be  established  before  the  right  and  left 
files. 

These  (]ispoi^itions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Change  front  to  the  rear.,  on  frst  company.  2.  Battalion., 
about — Face.  3.  By  company,  left  half  wheel.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except  the  right,  will 
face  about. 

At  the  third,  the  captains  whose  companies  have  faced  about,  will 
each  place  himself  behind  the  centre  of  his  company,  two  paces  from 
the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 

At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  fixed 
pivot  by  the  rear  rank ;  the  left  guide  of  each  will,  as  soon  as  he  is 
able  to  pass,  place  him.-^elf  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  company, 
now  become  the  right;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  that  the 
companies  have  sufiiciently  wheeled,  he  will  command  : 

5.  Forward.     6.  March.     7.   Guide  left. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  289 

At  the  sixth  coiumanrl  the  companies  will  cease  to  wheel,  march 
straight  forward  toward  the  new  line  of  battle,  and,  at  the  seventh, 
take  the  touch  of  the  elbow  toward  the  left. 

The  second  company,  from  the  right,  having  arrived  opposite  to  the 
left  of  the  first,  will  turn  to  the  left;  the  guide  will  so  direct  himself 
as  to  arrive  parallelly  with  the  line  of  battle,  cross  that  line,  and  when 
the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  shall  be  three  paces  bej'ond  it,  the 
captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  Company.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt ;  the  files  which  may 
not  yet  be  in  line  with  the  guide,  will  promptly  come  into  it;  the 
captain  will  cause  the  company  to  face  about,  and  then  align  it  by  the 
right. 

All  the  other  companies  will  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  second,  each  as  it  successively  arrives  opposite  to  the  left  of  the 
company  that  precedes  it  on  the  new  line  of  battle. 

The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

The  colonel  will  cause  a  change  of  front  on  the  left  company  of  the 
battalion  to  the  rear,  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 


To  ploy  the  battalion  info  column  doubled  on  the  centre. 

358.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying  the  corresponding  companies 
of  the  right  and  left  wings  into  column  at  company  distance,  or  closed 
in  mass  in  rear  of  the  two  centre  companies. 

The  colonel,  wishing  to  form  the  double  column  at  company  distance 
(the  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle),  Avill  command: 

1.  Double  column,  at  half  distance.     2.  Battalion,  inward — Face. 
3.  Makch  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  place  themselves  two  paces 
in  front  of  their  respective  companies;  the  captains  of  the  two  centre 
companies  will  cauticm  them  to  stand  fast,  and  the  other  captains  will 
caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  left  and  right  respectively.  The 
covering  sergeants  will  step  into  the  front  rank. 

At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies  will  stand 
fast;  the  others  of  the  right  wing  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  others 
of  the  left  wing-  will  face  to  the  right;  each  c:iptain  whose  company  has 


240  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

faced,  will  hasten  to  break  to  the  rear  the  two  files  at  the  head  of  his 
companj';  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company,  and  the  right  guide  of 
each  left  company,  will  each  place  himself  at  the  head  of  its  front 
rank,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  his  guide. 

At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  which  are  to 
form  the  first  division,  will  stand  fast;  the  senior  captain  of  the  two 
will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  division,  and  command: 
Guide  right;  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  be- 
tween the  two  companies,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company  will 
place  himself  in  the  front  rank  on  the  left  of  the  division,  as  soon  as  he 
shall  be  able  to  pass. 

All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by  their  captains,  will  step  ofi" 
with  life  to  arrange  themselves  in  column  at  company  distance,  each 
company  behind  the  preceding  one  in  the  column  of  the  same  wing,  so 
that,  in  the  right  wing,  the  third  may  be  next  behind  the  fourth,  the 
second  next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to  the  right  company;  and,  in  the 
left  wing,  the  sixth  may  be  next  behind  the  fifth,  the  seventh  next  to 
the  sixth,  and  so  on  to  the  left  company  of  the  battalion. 

The  corresponding  companies  of  the  two  wings  will  unite  into  divis- 
ions in  arranging  themselves  in  column ;  an  instant  before  the  union, 
at  the  centre  of  the  column,  the  left  guides  of  right  companies  will  pass 
into  the  line  of  file-closers,  and  each  captain  will  command:  1.  >S'((c/i 
company.     2.   Halt.      3.   Front. 

At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  of  union, 
each  company  will  halt;  at  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front.  The 
senior  captain  in  each  division  will  place  himself  on  its  right,  and 
command.  Right — Dress,  and  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in 
the  interval  between  the  two  companies.  The  division  being  aligned, 
its  chief  will  command.  Front,  and  take  his  position  two  paces  before 
its  centre. 

The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  divisions  will  take  the  respective 
denominations  of  Jiiat,  second,  third,  etc.,  according  to  position  in  the 
column,  beginning  at  the  front. 

The  lieutenant-colonel,  who,  at  the  second  command  given  by  the 
colonel,  will  have  placed  himself  at  a  little  more  than  company  dis- 
tance in  rear  of  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the 
right  guides  on  the  direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  by  placing 
himself  in  the  rear. 

The  music  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

359.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the  double  column  at 
company  distance  Avithout  halting  the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  241 

1.  Double  column^  at  half  distance.     2.  Battalion.,  by  the  right 
and  left  fianks.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  commaud,  each  captain  will  move  briskly  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  his  company;  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will  caution 
their  companies  to  march  straight  forward ;  the  other  captains  will 
caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  right  and  left. 

At  the  commaud  march,  the  fourth  ami  fifth  companies  will  continue 
to  march  straight  forward;  the  senior  captain  will  place  himself  before 
the  centre  of  his  division  and  command,  Guide,  ri(jht  ;  the  junior  cap- 
tain will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies. 
The  left  guide  of  the  fifth  company  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  division.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  cf  elbows 
to  the  right.  Tlie  color  and  general  guides  will  retake  their  places. 
The  three  right  companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  three  left  com- 
panies will  face  to  the  right.  Each  captain  will  ))reak  to  the  rear  two 
files  at  the  head  of  his  company;  the  left  guides  of  the  right  companies, 
and  the  riglit  guides  of  the  left  co<npanies  will  each  place  himself  at 
the  head  of  the  front  rank  of  his  compau}^,  and  the  captain  by  the  side 
of  his  guide. 

The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the  column  and  direct 
themselves  parallelly  to  the  first  division.  Each  of  the  other  com- 
panies will,  in  like  manner,  place  itself  behind  the  company  of  the 
wing  to  which  it  belongs,  and  will  be  careful  to  gain  as  much  ground 
as  possible  toward  the  head  of  the  column. 

The  corresponding  companies  of  each  wing  will  unite  into  divisions 
on  taking  their  positions  in  column,  and  each  captain,  the  instant  the 
head  of  his  company  arrives  at  the  centre  of  the  column,  will  com- 
mand :  1.  Such  company,  bij  the  riijht  (or  left)  JIank.  2.  Mauch.  The 
senior  captain  of  the  two  companies  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  his  division,  and  command.  Guide  right;  the  Junior  captain 
will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies.  The  two 
companies  thus  formed  into  a  division  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  right,  and  when  each  division  has  gained  its  proper  distance, 
its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

The  double  column,  closed  in  mas?,  Avill  be  formed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indica- 
tion, closed  in  mass,  for  that  of  at  half  distance. 

Deployment  of  the  double  column^  faced  to  the  front. 

.360.  The  colonel   wishing   to   deploy  the   double  column,  will  place 
21 


242  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

a  marker  respectively  before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  first  aivision, 
and  a  third  before  the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  same  division  ; 
which  being  done,  he  will  cause  the  two  general  guides  to  spring  out 
on  the  alignment  of  the  markers  a  little  beyond  the  points  at  which 
the  respective  flanks  of  the  battalion  ought  to  rest;  he  will  then  com- 
mand : 

1.   Deploy  column.     2.  Battalion,  outward — Face.     3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

The  column  will  deploy  itself  on  the  two  companies  at  its  head, 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  deployment  of  columns 
in  mass.  The  captain  of  these  companies  will  each,  at  the  command 
march,  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  own  company,  and  align  it  by 
the  right;  the  captain  of  the  fourth  will  then  place  himself  in  the  rear 
rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  in  the  rank  of  file-closers,  at  the 
moment  the  captain  of  the  third  shall  come  to  its  left  to  align  it. 

The  deployment  being  endid,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

361.  The  battalion  being  in  double  column  and  in  march,  if  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  Avithout  halting  the  column,  he  will 
cause  three  markers  to  be  posted  ou  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  the 
head  of  the  column  shall  arrive  near  the  markers,  he  will  command  : 
1.  Deploy  column.  2.  Battalion,  hy  the  i-iyht  and  le/tjlanks.  Z.  Mauch 
(or  douhle  quick — March).  The  column  will  deploy  on  the  two  lead- 
ing companies,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  deploy- 
ment of  a  close  column  ;  at  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  halt  it,  and  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies 
will  align  their  companies  by  the  right. 

362.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  is  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to 
deploy  the  column,  and  to  continue  on  the  march  in  line  of  battle,  he 
will  not  cause  markers  to  be  established  at  the  head  of  the  column.  At 
the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  command,  quick 
time;  at  the  command  march,  the  first  division  will  continue  to  march 
in  quick  time  ;  the  colonel  will  command,  guide  centre.  The  captains 
of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  the  color,  and  the  men,  will  imme- 
diately conform  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line.  The  companies 
will  take  the  quick  step  by  the  command  of  their  captains,  as  they 
successively  arrive  in  line.  The  movement  completed,  the  colonel  may 
cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  double  quick  time. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  243 

s 

To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  right  or 

left. 

3fi3.  The  double  column  being  at  company  distance,  and  at  a  halt, 
may  be  formed  into  line  faced  to  the  right  or  left;  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  faced  to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  into  line,  wheel,  left  companies  on  the  right  into  line.     2. 
Battalion,  guide  right.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  his  company^ ;  the  right  companies  will  be  cautioned  that 
they  have  to  wheel  to  the  right,  the  left  companies  that  they  will  have 
to  move  straight  forward. 

At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  of  the  fourth  company 
will  place  himself  briskly  on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the 
column,  face  to  them,  and  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  last  files  of 
his  company  when  in  line;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  him  in 
that  position. 

At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains,  the  right 
companies  will  form  to  the  right  into  line,  the  left  companies  will  put 
themselves  in  march  in  order  to  form  on  the  right  into  line;  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel will  assure  the  guides  of  the  left  wing  on  the  line  as 
they  in  succession  come  upon  it. 

Du^positions  against  cavalry. 

364.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it 
into  square,  he  will  first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed  ;  which  being 
done,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  form  square.  2.   To  half  distance,  close  column.  3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close  to  company  distance, 
the  second  division  taking  its  distance  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  first 
division. 

At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth  division,  the  file-closers  of  each 
company  of  which  it  is  composed,  passing  by  the  outer  flank  of  their 
companies,  will  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  front  rank  oppo- 
site to  their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  face  toward  the 
head  of  the  column. 

At  the  commencement  of  the  movement,  the  major  will  place  himself 


244  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

on  the  right  of  the  column  abreast  with  the  first  division ;  the  buglers 
formed  in  two  ranks  will  place  themselves  at  platoon  distance,  behind 
the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  division. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  may,  according  to  circum- 
stances, put  the  column  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form  squares;  if  he 
wish  to  do  the  latter,  he  will  command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  Right  and  left  into  line,  lolieel. 

At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel,  facing  to  the  left  guides, 
and  the  major,  facing  to  those  of  the  right,  will  align  them,  from  the 
front,  on  the  respective  guides  of  the  fourth  division,  who  will  stand 
fast,  holding  up  their  pieces,  inverted,  perpendicularly,-  the  right 
guides,  in  placing  themselves  on  the  direction,  will  take  their  exact 
distances. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  it 
to  stand  fast:  all  the  captains  of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will 
place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and 
caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel,  the  right  companies  to  the 
right,  and  the  left  companies  to  the  left  into  line  of  battle. 

The  color-bearer  will  step  back  into  the  line  of  file-closers,  opposite 
to  his  place  in  line  of  battle,  and  will  be  replaced  by  the  corporal  of  his 
file  who  is  in  the  rear  rank ;  the  corporal  of  the  same  file  who  is  in  the 
rank  of  file-closers  will  step  into  the  rear  rank. 

The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  command:  1.  Fvurth  dictsiou, 
forward;  2.  Guide  left,  and  place  himself  at  the  same  time  two  paces 
outside  of  its  left  flank. 

These  dispositions  ended,  the  colonel  will  command : 

March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  division  will  stand  fast; 
but  its  right  file  will  face  to  the  right,  and  its  left  file  to  the  left. 

The  companies  of  the'  second  and  third  divisions  will  wheel  to  the 
right  and  left  into  line,  and  the  buglers  will  advance  a  space  equal  to 
the  front  of  a  company. 

The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the  square,  and  when  it 
shall  have  closed,  its  chief  will  halt  it,  face  it  about,  and  align  it  by  the 
rear  rank  upon  the  guides  of  the  division,  who  will,  for  this  purpose, 
remain  faced  to  the  front.  The  junior  captain  will  pass  into  the  rear 
rank,  now  becomethe  front,  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  com- 
pany will  place  himself  behind  him  in  the  front  rank,  become  rear. 
The  file-closers  will,  at  the  same  time,  close  up  a  pace  on  the  front  rank, 
and  the  outer  file  on  each  flank  of  the  division  will  face  outward. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  245 

The  square  being  fonncd,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  fourth  divisions,  as  well 
as  the  guides,  will  enter  the  square. 

The  captains  whose  companies  have  formed  to  the  right  into  line, 
will  remain  on  the  left  of  their  companies;  the  left  guide  of  each  of 
those  companies  will,  in  the  rear  rank,  cover  his  captain,  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  of  each  will  place  himself  as  a  file-closer  behind  tlie  right 
file  of  his  company. 

The  field  and  stafl"  will  enter  the  square,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
placing  himself  behind  the  left,  and  the  major  behind  the  right  of  the 
first  division. 

If  the  battalion  present  ten,  instead  of  eight  companies,  the  fourth 
division  will  make  the  movements  prescribed  above  for  the  second  and 
third  divisions,  and  the  fifth,  the  movements  prescribed  for  the  fourth 
division. 

The  fronts  of  the  square  will  be  designated  as  follows:  the  first 
division  will  always  be  the  first  front;  the  last  division,  the  fotirth 
front;  the  right  comjDanies  of  the  other  divisions  will  form  the  second 
front;   and  the  left  companies  of  the  same  divisions  the  third  front. 

365.  If  the  battaliof^,  before  the  square  is  formed,  be  in  double  col- 
umn, the  two  leading  companies  will  form  the  first  front,  the  two  rear 
companies  the  fourth;  the  other  companies  of  the  right  half  battalion 
will  form  the  second,  and  those  of  the  left  half  battalion  the  third 
front. 

The  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  be  commanded  by  the  chiefs  of  "the 
first  and  fourth  divisions;  each  of  the  other  two  by  its  senior  captain. 
The  commander  of  each  front  will  place  himself  four  paces  behind  its 
present  rear  rank,  and  will  be  replaced  momentarily  in  the  command 
of  his  company  by  the  next  in  rank  therein. 

366.  If  the  column  by  division,  whether  double  or  single,  be  in 
mass,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first 
cause  it  to  take  company  distance;  to  this  efi"ect,  he  will  command: 

1.   To  form  square.  2.  By  the  head  of  column,  take  half  distance. 

The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  the  moment  the  third  division  shall 
have  its  distance,  and  as  soon  as  the  necessary  dispositions  are  made, 
form  it  into  square. 

367.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  distance  less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will 
command  : 


246         MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

1.  By  (such)  fro7it,  forward.     2.  March. 

If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  be  made  by  the  fii::3t  front,  the 
chief  of  this  front  will  eounnand : 

1.  First  front,  forward.     2.   Guide  centre. 

The  chief  of  the  second  front  will  face  his  front  to  the  left.  The 
captains  of  the  companies  composing  the  front  will  place  themselves 
outside,  and  on  the  right  of  their  left  guides,  who  will  replace  them  in 
the  front  rank;  the  chief  of  the  third  front  will  face  his  front  to  the 
right,  and  the  captains  in  this  front  will  place  themselves  outside,  and 
on  the  left  of  their  covering  sergeants ;  the  chief  of  the  fourth  front 
will  face  his  front  about,  and  command:  1.  Fourth  front,  forward.  2. 
Guide  centre.  The  captain  who  is  in  the  centre  of  the  first  front,  will 
be  charged  with  the  direction  of  the  march. 

At  the  command  march,  the  square  will  put  itself  in  motion  ;  the 
companies  marching  by  the  flank  will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  dis- 
tances. The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  cause  his  division  to 
keej)  constantly  closed  on  the  flanks  of  the  second  and  third  fronts. 

This  movement  will  only  be  executed  in  rjuick  time. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  file  of  direc- 
tion, in  order  to  regulate  his  march. 

If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  halt  the  square,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  the  square  will  halt:  the  fourth  front  will 
face  about  immediately,  and  without  further  command;  the  second  and 
third  fronts  will  face  outward;  the  captains  of  the  companies  will  re- 
sume their  places  in  square. 

In  moving  the  square  forward  by  the  second,  third  or  fourth  fronts, 
the  same  rule  will  be  observed. 

368.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  advance,  he  will  command  : 

*  1.  Form  column. 

The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  command  :  ^ 

1.  First  division,  forward.     2.   Guide  left. 

The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast:  the 
commander  of  the  second  front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  left,  and 
then  command:  By  comjictny,  hy file  left.     The  commander  of  the  third 


w 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  247 

front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  then  command  :  By  com- 
pani/,  h}i  file  right.  At  the  moment  the  second  and  third  fronts  fa-ce  to 
the  left  and  right,  each  captain  will  cause  to  break  to  the  rear  the  two 
leading  files  of  his  company. 

These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quitk — March  J. 

At  this  command,  the  first  front  will  march  forward;  its  chief  will 
halt  it  when  it  shall  have  advanced  a  space  equal  to  half  its  front,  and 
align  it  by  the  left. 

The  corresponding  companies  of  the  second  and  third  fronts  will 
wheel  by  file  to  the  left  and  right,  and  march  to  meet  each  other  behind 
the  centre  of  the  first  division,  and  the  moment  they  unite  the  captain 
of  each  company  will  halt  hi??  company  and  face  it  to  the  front.  The 
division  being  re-formed,  its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left. 

The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cause  it  to  face  about;  its 
file-closers  will  remain  before  the  front  rank. 

The  column  being  thus  re-formed,  the  colonel  may  put  it  in  march  ; 
the  rio-ht  guides  will  preserve  company  distance  exactly  as  the  direct- 
ing guides. 

When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  square,  he  will  give  the 
necessary  commands. 

369.  To  cause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat,  the  colonel  will  first 
cause  column  to  be  formed,  and,  when  formed,  he  will  cause  it  to  face 
by  the  rear  rank  ;   to  this  end,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.     2.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.     3.  Battalion, 

about — Face. 

At  the  second  command,  the  file-closers  of  the  interior  divisions  will 
place  themselvc$,  passing  by  the  outer  flanks  of  their  respective  com- 
panies, behind  the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line  of  battle ; 
the  file-closers  of  the  other  divisions  will  stand  fast. 

At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face  about:  each  chief  of 
division  will  place  himself  before  its  rear  rank,  become  front,  passing 
through  the  interval  l^etwecu  its  two  companies;  the  guides  will  step 
into  the  rear  rank,  now  front. 

The  column  being  thus  disposed,  the  colonel  may  put  it  in  march, 
or  cause  it  to  form  square  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the  front  rank.  The 
square  being  formed,  its  fronts  will  preserve  the  same  designations  they 
had  when  faced  by  the  front  rank. 

The  battalion  being  in  square  by  the  rear  rank,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat  or  in  advance,  he  will  conform  to  what 


248  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

is  prescribed  above ;  otherwise,  he  will  re-form  the  column,  by  march- 
ing forward  the  fourth  front. 

If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the  front,  the  colonel  will  face  the 
column  by  the  front  rank  ;  to  this  end  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  march  in  advance.  2.  Face  hy  the  front  rank.    3.  Battalion, 

about — Fi^CE. 

370.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  advance,  and  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.    2.  Battalion,  right  about.    3.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command,  the  file-closers  of  the  second  and  third 
divisions  will  place  themselves  rapidly  before  the  front  rank  of  their 
respective  divisions.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  face 
about  and  move  off  to  the  rear. 

If  the  column  be  marching  in  retreat,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
march  it  in  advance,  he  will  command  : 

\.   To  march  in  advance.     2.  Battalion,  right  about.     3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command,  the  file-closers  of  the  second  and  third 
divisions  will  place  themselves  before  the  rear  rank  of  their  respective 
divisions  ;  at  the  third,  the  column  will  face  by  the  front  rank. 

To  reduce  the  square. 
.371.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  break  the  square,  will  command : 

1.  Reduce  square.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

This  movement  will  be  executed  in  the  manner  indicated,  No.  368; 
but  the  file-closers  of  the  fourth  front  will  i^lace  themselves  behind 
the  rear  rank  the  moment  it  faces  about ;  the  field  and  staff,  the  color- 
bearer  and  buglers,  will,  at  the  same  time,  return  to  their  places  in 
column. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  battle. 

372.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  upon  one  of  the  flank  divisions, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION.  249 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Column  at  half  dbitance^  by  division.  3. 
On  the  Jirst  (or  fjurth)  division.  Battalion,  right  (or  lefi^ — 
Face.     5.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  already 
prescribed. 

373.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Double  column  at  half  distance.  3. 
Battalion,  inward — Face.  4.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March. 

374.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into  double  column  to 
form  square,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Form  double  column.  3.  Battalion.,  by 
the  right  and  left  flanks.  4.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

The  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  halt  his  division  at  the  com- 
mand march. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

375.  If  the  squares  formed  in  two  rants,  according  to  the  preceding 
rules,  should  not  be  deemed  sufficiently  strong,  the  colonel  may  cause 
the  square  to  be  formed  in  four  ranks. 

The  battalion  being  in  column  by  company  at  full  distance,  right  in 
front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square  in  four 
ranks,  he  will  first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed,  which  being  executed, 
be  will  command: 

1.   To  form  square  in  four  ranks.      2.   To  half  distance,  close 
column.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  the 
right  company  to  face  to  the  left,  and  the  left  company  to  face  to  the 
right.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution  their  divisions  to 
move  forward. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  company  of  the  first  division  will 
form  into  four  ranks  on  its  left  file,  and  the  left  company  into  four  ranks 
on  its  right  file.  The  formation  ended,  the  chief  of  this  division  will 
align  it  by  the  left. 


250         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  other  divisions  will  move  forward  and  double  their  files  march- 
ing ;  the  right  company  of  each  division  will  double  on  its  left  file,  and 
the  left  companj^  on  its  right  file.  The  formation  completed,  each  chief 
of  division  will  command:  Guide  left.  Each  chief  will  halt  his  division 
when  it  shall  have  the  distance  of  a  company  front  in  four  ranks  from 
the  preceding  one,  counting  from  its  rear  rank,  and  will  align  his  divis- 
ion by  the  left.  At  the  instant  the  fourth  division  is  halted,  the  file- 
closers  will  move  rapidly  before  its  front  rank. 

The  colonel  will  form  square,  re-form  column,  and  reduce  square  in 
four  ranks,  by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  prescribed  for  a  bat- 
talion in  two  ranks. 

376.  If  the  square  formed  in  four  ranks  be  reduced  and  at  a  halt, 
and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the  battalion  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  unduuhle  files.     2.  Batlalion,  outward — Face  . 

3.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  step  before  the  centres  of 
their  respective  companies,  and  those  on  the  right  will  caution  them  to 
face  to  the  right,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the  left. 

At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right  and 
left. 

At  the  command  march,  each  company  will  undovible  its  files  and 
re-form  iuto  two  ranks  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company. 
Each  captain  will  halt  his  company  and  face  it  to  the  front.  The 
formation  completed,  each  chief  of  division  will  align  bis  division  by 
the  left. 

.377.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the  flank  divisions,  the 
colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Column  at  half  distance, 
hy  division.  3.  On  the  first  (or  fourtli)  division.  4.  Battalion, 
right  (or  left) — Face.    5.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division  will  place  himself 
before  the  centre  of  his  division,  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four  men  of  the  first  division 
will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  All  the  other  files  of  four 
men  will  step  off  together,  and  each  in  succession  will  close  up  to  its 
proper  distance  on  the  file  preceding  it,  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  251 

doubled.  When  the  last  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division 
will  command  :   Left,  Dhess. 

The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column  in  the  same  manner  as 
with  a  battalion  in  two  ranks,  observing  what  follows:  the  chiefs  of 
divisions  instead  of  allowing  their  divisions  to  file  past  them,  on  enter- 
ing the  colnmn  will  continue  to  lead  them,  and  as  each  division  shall 
arrive  on  a  line  with  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  its  chief  will 
halt  the  right  guide,  who  will  immediately  face  to  the  front;  the  first 
file  of  four  men  will  also  halt  at  the  same  time  and  face  to  the  front, 
remaining  doubled.  The  second  file  will  close  on  the  first,  and  when 
closed,  halt,  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  All  the  other 
files  will  execute  successively  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
second.  When  the  last  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will 
command:  Left,  Dress. 

378.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  perpendicular  square  in 
four  ranks  by  double  column,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square^  in  four  ranks.  2.  Double  column,  at  half 
distance.  3.  Battalion,  inward — Face.  4.  March  (or  double 
qu  ick — Ma  r  c  h  ) . 

At  the  second  command  the  captains  of  companies  will  place  them- 
selves before  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and  caution 
those  on  the  right  to  face  to  the  left,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the 
right.  The  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will  caution  his  covering  ser- 
geant to  stand  fast. 

At  the  third  command  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  left  and  right; 
at  the  command  march,  the  left  file  of  the  fourth,  and  the  right  file  of 
the  fifth  company,  will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The 
fourth  company  will  close  successively  by  file  of  fours  on  the  left  file, 
and  the  fifth  company,  in  like  manner,  on  the  right  file;  the  files  will 
face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  formation  completed,  the 
chief  of  division  will  command :  Rit/ht,  Dress.  The  junior  captain 
will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies. 

The  other  companies  will  close  as  prescribed  for  the  double  column 
in  two  ranks,  observing  what  follows:  Each  captain  will  halt  the  lead- 
ing guide  of  his  company  the  moment  the  head  of  his  company  arrives 
on  a  line  with  the  centre  of  the  column.  In  the  right  companies,  the 
left  guides  will  step  into  the  line  of  file-closers,  and  the  left  file  of  four 
men  will  face  immediately  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled,  and  by  the 
side  of  the  right  guide  of  the  left  compaiiy.  The  companies  will  each 
form  into  four  ranks,  the  right  companies  on  the  left  file,  and  the  left 
companies  on  the  right  file.     The  formation  completed,  the  junior  cap- 


252         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

tain  will  place  himself  between  tbe  two  companies,  and  the  senior  will 
command:  Eight.  Dress. 

Column  against  cavalry. 

379.  When  a  column  closed  in  mass  has  to  form  square,  it  will  begin 
by  taking  company  distance;  but  if  so  suddenly  threatened  bj'^  cavalry 
as  not  to  allow  time  for  this  disposition,  it  will  be  formed  in  the  follow- 
ing manner: 

The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Column  against  cavalry.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  caution 
it  to  stand  fast  and  pass  behind  the  rear  rank;  in  the  interior  divisions 
each  captain  will  promptly  designate  the  number  of  files  necessary  to 
close  the  interval  between  his  company  and  the  one  in  front  of  it.  The 
captains  of  the  divisions  next  to  the  one  in  rear,  in  addition  to  chjsing 
the  interval  in  front,  will  also  close  up  the  interval  which  separates 
this  division  from  the  last;  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution 
it  to  face  about,  and  its  file  closers  will  pass  briskly  before  the  front 
rank. 

At  the  command  march,  the  guides  of  each  division  will  place  them- 
selves rapidly  in  the  line  of  file-closers.  The  first  division  will  stand 
fast,  tbe  fourth  will  face  about,  the  outer  file  of  each  of  these  divisions 
will  then  face  outward ;  in  the  other  divisions  the  files  designated  for 
closing  the  intervals  will  form  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  but  in  the 
division  next  to  the  rearmost  one,  the  first  files  that  come  into  line  will 
close  to  the  right  or  left  until  they  join  the  rear  division.  The  files  of 
each  company  which  remain  in  column  will  close  on  their  outer  files, 
formed  into  line,  in  order  to  create  a  vacant  space  in  the  middle  of  the 
column. 

If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  column  against  cavalry  will  be  form- 
ed by  the  same  commands  and  means.  At  the  command  march,  the 
first  and  fourth  divisions  will  halt,  and  tbe  latter  division  will  face 
about;  the  interior  divisions  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
above. 

The  battalion  being  no  longer  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  files  in  column  will  close  to  the  left  and 
right  and  make  room  for  those  in  line,  who  will  retake  their  places  in 
column  by  stepping  backward,  except  those  closing  the  interval  be- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  253 

tween  the  two  rear  divisions,  who  will  take  their  places  in  column  by 
a  flank  movement.  The  fourth  division  will  face  about,  the  guides  will 
resume  their  places. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers ,  and  to  rally  this  battalion. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skii'inishers. 

380.  A  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  if  the  colonel  should  wish  to 
deploy  it  on  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  for  example,  holding  the 
three  right  companies  in  reserve,  he  will  signify  his  intention  to  the 
lieutenant-colonel  and  adjutant,  and  also  to  the  major,  who  will  be 
directed  to  take  charge  of  the  reserve.  He  will  point  out  to  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel the  direction  he  wishes  to  give  the  line,  as  well  as  the 
point  where  he  wishes  the  right  of  the  sixth  company  to  rcst,-££nd  to 
the  commander  of  the  reserve  the  place  he  may  wish  it  established. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  the  right  of  the 
sixth  company,  and  the  adjutant  in  front  of  the  left  of  the  same  com- 
pany. The  commander  of  the  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  in  the  manner 
to  be  hereinafter  designated. 

The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

1.  First  (or  second)  platoons — as  skirmishers.  2.  On  the  right  of 
the  sixth  company — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  double  quick 
— March). 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies 
will  prepare  to  deploy  the  first  (or  second)  platoons  of  their  companies, 
the  sixth  on  its  right,  the  fifth  on  its  left  file.  The  captain  of  the 
fourth  company  will  face  it  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  of  the 
seventh  and  eighth  companies  will  face  their  respective  companies  to 
the  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will  commence,  the  platoons 
of  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies  will  deploy  forward  (see  No.  294);  the 
right  guide  of  the  sixth  will  march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indicated 
to  him  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

The  company  which  has  faced  to  the  right,  and  also  the  companies 
which  have  faced  to  the  left,  will  march  straight  forward.  The  fourth 
company  will  take  an  interval  of  100  paces,  counting  from  the  left  of 
the  fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  its  first  platoon  on  its  left  file.  The 
seventh  and  eighth  companies  will  each  take  an  interval  of  100  paces, 
counting  from  the  first  file  of  the  company  which  is  immediately  on  its 


254         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 

right;  and  the  chiefs  of  these  companies  Avill  afterward  deploy  their 
first  platoons  on  the  right  file. 

The  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which  the  deployment  is  made, 
should  be  careful  to  direct  themselves  toward  the  outer  man  of  the 
neighboring  company,  already  deployed  as  skirmishers;  or  if  tlie  com- 
pany has  not  finished  its  deployment,  they  Avill  judge  carefully  the 
distance  which  may  still  be  required  to  place  all  these  files  in  line,  a,nd 
will  then  march  on  the  point  thvis  marked  out.  The  companies,  as 
they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  align  themselves  on  those  already  deployed. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  and  adjutant  will  follow  the  deployment,  the 
one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the  left;  the  movement  concluded,  they 
will  place  themselves  near  the  colonel. 

The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  established  in  echelon  in  the 
following  manner.  The  reserve  of  the  sixth  company  will  be  placed 
150  paces  in  rear  of  the  right  of  this  company  ;  the  reserves  of  the 
fourth  and  fifth  companies,  vinited,  opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of 
skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  in  advance  of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth 
company;  the  reserves  of  the  seventh  and  eighth  companies,  also 
united,  opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of  skirmishers,  and  thirty 
paces  farther  to  the  rear  than  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company. 

The  major  commanding  the  companies  composing  the  reserve,  on 
receiving  an  order  from  the  colonel  to  that  effect,  will  march  these 
companies  thirty  paces  to  the  rear,  and  will  then  ploy  them  into  col- 
umn by  company,  at  half  distance;  after  which  he  will  conduct  the 
column  to  the  point  which  shall  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

The  colonel  will  have  a  general  superintendence  of  the  movement; 
and  when  it  is  finished,  will  move  to  a  point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence 
his  view  may  best  embrace  all  the  parts,  in  order  to  direct  their  move- 
ments. 

If  instead  of  deploying  forward,  it  be  desired  to  deploy  by  the  flank, 
the  sixth  and  fifth  companies  will  be  moved  to  the  front  ten  or  twelve 
paces,  halted,  and  deployed  by  the  flank,  the  one  on  the  right,  the 
other  on  the  left  file,  by  the  means  already  indicated.  (See  No.  265.) 
Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the  flank ;  and  as  soon 
as  the  last  file  of  the  company,  next  toward  the  direction,  shall  have 
taken  its  interval,  it  will  be  moved  upon  the  line  established  hj  the  fifth 
and  sixth  companies,  halted  and  deployed. 

In  the  preceding  example,  it  has  been  supposed  that  the  battalion 
was  in  order  of  battle ;  but  if  in  column,  it  would  be  deployed  as 
skirmishers  by  the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  foncard,  the  directing  company,  as 
soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  be  moved  ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  255 

the  head  of  the  column,  and  will  be  then  deployed  on  the  file  indicated. 
Each  of  the  other  companies  will  take  its  interval  to  the  right  or  left, 
and  deploy  as  soon  as  it  is  taken. 

If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the  J? an k,  the  directing  company 
will  be  moved  in  the  same  manner  to  the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmask- 
ed, and  will  then  be  halted  and  deployed  by  the  flank  on  the  file  indi- 
cated. Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the  flank,  and 
when  its  interval  is  taken,  will  be  moved  on  the  line,  halted,  and  de- 
l^loyed  as  soon  as  the  company  next  toward  the  direction  shall  have 
finished  its  deploj'^ment. 

AYhen  the  color-company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skirmishers,  the  color, 
Avithout  its  guard,  will  be  detached,  and  remain  with  the  battalion 
reserve. 

The  rally. 

3S1.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  movements  prescribed  for  a  com- 
pany to  be  executed  by  the  battalion,  and  by  the  same  commands  and 
the  same  signals.  When  he  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion,  he  will  cause 
the  rally  on  the  battalion  to  be  sounded,  and  so  dispose  his  reserve  as  to 
protect  this  movement. 

The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  rallied  in  squares  on 
their  respective  reserves  (see  No.  280) ;  each  reserve  of  two  contiguous 
companies  will  form  the  first  front  of  the  square,  throwing  to  the  rear 
the  sections  on  the  flanks;  the  skirmishers  who  arrive  first  will  com- 
plete the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last  the  fourth  front.  The  oflUners  and 
sergeants  will  superintend  the  rally,  and  as  fast  as  the  men  arrive, 
they  will  form  them  into  two  ranks,  without  regard  to  height,  and 
cause  them  to  face  outward. 

The  \-aX\j  being  efi"ected,  the  commanders  of  squares  will  profit  by 
any  interval  of  time  the  cavalry  may  allow  for  putting  them  in  safety, 
either  by  marching  upon  the  battalion  reserve,  or  by  seizing  an 
advanced  position ;  to  this  end,  each  of  the  squares  will  be  formed  into 
column,  and  march  in  this  order;  and  if  threatened  anew,  it  will  halt, 
and  again  form  square. 

As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the  battalion  reserve,  each 
will  re-form  as  promptly  as  possible,  and,  without  regard  to  designation 
or  number,  take  place  in  the  column  next  in  the  rear  of  the  companies 
already  in  it. 

The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if  itself  threatened  by 
cavalry.  In  this  case,  the  companies  in  marching  toward  it  will  place 
themselves  in  the  section  without  fire  (/.  e.,  march  on  the  angles),  and 
thus  march  on  the  squares. 


256  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Article    VII. 
SCHOOL    OF    THE    TEOOPEE. 

382.  The  object  of  this  school  is  to  make  troopers  skilful  in  the 
management  of  their  horses  and  arms,  in  all  directions,  and  at  all 
gaits.  To  accomplish  this,  the  instructor  must  attend  particularly, 
from  the  commencement,  to  placing  the  men  well  on  horseback,  and  to 
habituating  them  in  the  application  of  correct  principles. 

The  instruction  should  always  commence  at  a  walk,  in  order  to  give 
the  troopers  the  facility  of  seating  themselves  well,  and  of  calming 
their  horses,  as  they  are  generally  more  restive  on  first  being  brought 
together.     The  instruction  should  also  terminate  at  a  tvalk. 

At  the  commencement,  it  is  generally  necessary  to  make  the  troopers 
march  repeatedly  on  the  same  track,  at  a  walk,  and  at  a  trot;  when, 
however,  they  already  have  some  skill  in  the  management  of  their 
horses,  which  is  almost  invariably  the  case  with  volunteer  cavalry,  this 
exercise  is  less  necessary,  and  the  instructor  may  proceed  almost  at 
once  to  the  changes  of  direction,  and  other  movements. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  rest  the  men,  he  commands : 

Rest. 

At  this  command,  the  trooper  is  no  longer  required  to  remain 
immovable. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  resume  the  drill,  he  commands : 

Attention. 

When  the  trooper  resumes  his  immovable  position,  and  fixes  his 
attention. 

In  the  first  part  of  the  instruction  but  a  very  few  men  should  be 
under  the  same  instructor,  or  small  squai-es  should  be  formed  as  in 
infantry. 

To   conduct  the  horses  to  the  drill  ground. 

383.  The  horses  having  the  bridle  reins  near  the  neck,  each  trooper 
takes  hold  of  the  reins  with  the  right  hand,  six  inches  from  the  mouth 
of  the  horse,  the  back  of  the  hand  up,  the  hand  elevated  and  firm,  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER.  257 

prevent  the  horse  from  jumping,  and  leads  his  horse  to  the  ground, 
where  under  the  direction  of  the  instructor,  he  places  it  in  such  posi- 
tion that  all  the  horses  shall  be  on  the  same  line,  or  in  one  rank. 
The  squad  being  formed,  the  instructor  commands: 

Count  by  fours. 

At  this  command,  the  men  count  from  right  to  left,  one,  two,  three , 
four,  according  to  the  place  which  each  one  occupies. 
The  troopers  should  be  without  arms  or  spurs. 

Position  of  the  trooper  before  mounting.  * 

384.  On  the  left  side  of  the  horse,  abreast  of  the  lower  jaw  ;  the 
reins  in  the  right  hand  six  inches  from  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  the 
back  of  the  hand  up.  Heels  upon  the  same  line  as  nearly  as  the  con- 
formation of  the  man  will  permit,  the  feet  at  a  little  less  than  a  right 
angle,  and  equally  turned  out;  the  knee  straight  without  being  stiff; 
the  body  perpendicular  upon  the  haunches  and  slightly  inclined  for- 
ward;  the  left  hand  hanging  by  the  side,  the  palm  a  little  turned  out, 
the  little  finger  along  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons;  the  head  erect 
without  being  constrained,  the  chin  drawn  in,  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

To  mount. 

385.  The  instructor  commands  : 

Prepare  to  Mount. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  Nos.  1  and  3  move  forward  six  paces,  stepping  off  with 
the  left  foot,  keeping  opposite  their  intervals.  Place  the  right  foot 
three  inches  in  rear  of  the  loft ;  make  a  face  and  a  half  to  the  right  on 
both  heels,  the  right  toe  to  the  front;  let  go  the  right  rein;  slip  the 
right  hand  along  the  left  rein  ;  take  two  steps,  stepping  off  with  the 
right  foot,  and  face  to  the  left  on  the  toe  of  the  left  foot,  the  right  side 
toward  the  flank  of  the  horse;  carry  back  the  right  heel  three  inches 
in  rear  of  the  left;  the  right  hand  seizing  the  end  of  the  reins  is  placed 
upon  the  cantle  of  the  saddle. 

Second  motion.  Place  a  third  of  the  left  foot  in  the  stirrup,  support- 
ing it  against  the  forearm  of  the  horse  ;  rest  upon  the  point  of  the 
right  foot,  and  seize  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  the  left  hand  over  the 
reins  as  far  forward  as  possible,  the  extremity  of  the  lock  passing  out 
of  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  little  finger. 
22 


258         MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Mount. 

One   time    and  two   motions. 

First  motion.  At  the  command  mount,  spring  from  the  right  foot, 
holding  firmly  to  the  mane,  at  the  same  time  pressing  the  cantle  with 
he  right  hand  to  prevent  the  saddle  from  turning;  the  body  erect. 

Second  motion.  Pass  the  right  leg  stretched  over  the  croup  of  the 
horse,  without  touching  him;  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle,  placing 
the  right  hand  at  the  same  time,  without  quitting  the  reins,  upon 
the  right  holster,  the  palm  of  the  hand  resting  upon  it,  the  lingers  on 
the  outside  of  it,  and  take  one  rein  of  the  bridle  (if  a  snaffle)  in  each 
hand. 

If  the  trooper  is  using  the  curb  bridle,  he  will  pass  the  reins  into 
the  left  (or  bridle  hand),  the  little  finger  between  the  reins,  the  other 
fingers  well  closed,  and  the  thumb  upon  the  second  joint  of  the  first 
finger;  the  elbow  slightly  detached  from  the  body,  the  hand  four 
inches  above  the  pommel  of  the  saddle,  the  fingers  six  inches  from, 
and  turned  toward  the  body ;  the  right  hand  at  the  side. 

The  instructor  should  alloAv  but  a  short  interval  between  the  first 
and  second  motion,  because  were  the  trooper  to  remain  a  long  time 
on  the  stirrup,  the  horse  would  become  restive,  and  move  out  of  place, 
then  command : 

Form — Rank. 

Nos.  1  and  3  raise  the  Avrists  (or  the  bridle  hand),  and  h«ld  the  legs 
close  to  the  body  of  the  horse  to  keep  him  quiet;  Nos.  2  and  4  enter 
the  intervals  without  jostling  and  without  precipitation. 

After  mounting,  the  instructor  causes  the  stirrups  to  be  crossed  upon 
the  neck,  the  left  stirrup  over  the  right. 

Position  of  the  trooper,  mounted. 

386.  The  buttocks  bearing  equally  upon  the  saddle,  and  as  far  for- 
ward as  possible;  the  thighs  turned  upon  their  flat  side,  or  knees  turned 
in,  without  effort,  embracing  the  horse  equally,  and  stretched  only  by 
their  own  weight  and  that  of  the  legs;  a  supple  bend  of  the  knees; 
the  legs  below  the  knee  free,  and  falling  naturall}'^ ;  the  toes  falling  in 
like  manner;  the  loins  supported  without  stiflness;  the  upper  jiart  of 
the  body  at  ease,  free  and  erect;  the  shoulders  square;  the  arms  free, 
the  elbows  falling  naturally;  the  head  erect,  at  ease,  and  not  drawn  in 
between  the  shoulders;  when  the  snaffle  is  worn,  one  rein  in  each 
hand,  the  fingers  closed,  the  thumb  along  each  rein,  the  wrists  as  high 


I 


1^  SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  259 

as  the  elbow,  at  six  inches  from  each  other,  the  fingers  turned  toward 
each  other,  the  upper  extremity  of  the  reins  leaving  the  hand  on  the 
side  of  the  thumb. 

The  instructor  then  commands  : 

1.  Eyes  Right  (or  Left).     2.  Front. 

At  the  word  right,  the  head  is  turned  gently  to  the  right,  so  that  the 
corner  of  the  left  eye,  next  the  nose,  may  be  in  a  line  with  the  buttons 
of  the  jacket. 

At  the  command/ron^,  the  head  is  gently  turned  to  the  front. 

The  use  of  the  reins. 

387.  The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  horse  for  the  movements  he  is 
required  to  execute,  to  direct  him,  and  to  stop  him.  Their  action 
should  be  progressive,  and  in  accordance  with  that  of  the  legs. 

When  the  trooper  makes  use  of  the  reins,  the  arras  should  act  with 
suppleness,  and  their  movements  ought  to  extend  from  the  waist  to  the 
shoulder. 

The  use  of  the  legs. 

388.  The  legs  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward,  to  siipport  him,  and 
to  aid  him  in  turning  to  the  right  or  left.  Whenever  the  trooper 
wishes  his  horse  to  move  forward,  he  should  close  the  legs  by  degrees 
behind  the  girths,  causing  their  cD'ects  to  correspond  with  the  sensi- 
bility of  the  horse,  taking  care  neither  to  open  or  elevate  the  knees,  of 
which  the  bend  should  be  always  pliaut.  The  trooper  relaxes  the  legs 
by  degrees,  as  he  closed  them. 

The  effect  of  the  reins  and  legs  combined. 

389.  In  elevating  the  wrists,  or  the  bridle  hand,  a  little,  and  closing 
the  legs,  the  trooper  ^'gathers  his  horse  :"  in  elevating  the  wrists,  or 
bridle  hand,  he  slackens  the  pace  ;  in  repeating  this  movement  of  the 
wrists,  or  bridle  hand,  he  stops  the  horse,  or  he  "  reins  back."  The 
trooper  ought  to  elevate  the  wrists  Avithout  curving  them,  at  the  same 
time  drawing  them  slightly  toward  the  body. 

In  opening  the  right  rein,  and  closing  the  right  leg,  the  trooper 
turns  his  horse  to  the  right.  To  open  the  right  rein,  the  right  wrist 
is  carried,  without  turning  it,  more  or  less  to  the  right,  according 
to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse.  When  the  curb  is  worn,  move  the 
bridle  hand  forward  and  to  the  right. 


260         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

In  opening  the  left  rein,  and  closing  the  left  leg,  the  trooper  turns 
his  horse  to  the  left.  The  left  rein  is  opened  upon  the  same  principle 
as  that  on  which  the  right  is  opened.  When  the  curb  is  worn,  move 
the  bridle  hand  forward  and  to  the  left. 

By  lowering  the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand  slightly,  the  horse  is  at  liberty 
to  move  forward;  the  closing  of  the  legs  puts  him  in  motion. 

.      To  march. 

390.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  squad,  forward,  elevate  the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand, 
slightly,  and  close  the  legs,  in  order  to  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  inarch,  lower  the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand,  slightly, 
and  close  the  legs  moi'e  or  less,  according  to  the  sensibility  of  the 
horse.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  replace  the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand, 
and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

After  some  steps  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  trooper  gathers  his  horse  without  slacken- 
ing his  pace. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  trooper  braces  himself  in  tbe  saddle ;  ele- 
vate the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand,  at  the  same  time,  by  degrees,  and  close 
the  left  to  prevent  the  horse  from  backing.  The  horse  having  obeyed, 
replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

To  turn  to  the  right  or  left. 

391.  The  instructor  commands  : 
1.  Squad,  to  the  right  (or  left).     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  squad,  to  the  right,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  open  the  right  rein,  or  move  the  bridle  band 
to  the  right,  and  gradually  close  the  right  leg.  In  order  not  to  turn 
the  horse  too  short,  perform  the  movement  on  the  fourth  of  a  circle 
three  paces  in  length.  The  movement  being  almost  completed,  dimin- 
ish the  effect  of  the  rein  and  the  right  leg,  supporting  the  horse  at  the 
same  time  with  the  left  rein  and  leg  to  terminate  the  movement. 

At  the  command  halt,  elevate  the  wrists  or  bridle  hand  slightly,  and 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  261 

hold  the  legs  near,  in  order  to  keep  the  horse  straight  in  the  new  di- 
rection ;  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

To  turn  about  to  the  right,  or  left. 

392.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  to  the  iHght  (or  left),  about.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

This  command  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  turn 
to  the  right  or  left,  with  this  difference,  that  the  horse  should  pass  over 
a  semicircle  of  six  paces  and  face  to  the  rear. 

To  make  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right  or  left. 

393.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  )-t</ht  ohlique,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  open  the  right  rein  a  little,  or  move  the 
bridle  hand  slightly  to  the  right,  and  close  the  right  leg  slightly,  in 
order  to  make  the  horse  execute  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right;  cause  the 
horse  to  feel,  almost  at  the  same  time,  the  effect  of  the  right  rein  and 
the  left  leg.  to  terminate  the  movement  without  increasing  the  degree 
of  obliquity. 

At  the  command  halt,  elevate  the  wrist,  or  bridle  hand,  and  close  the 
legs  slightly,  to  keep  the  direction  of  the  quarter  turn  to  the  right;  re- 
place the  wrists  and  legs  by  degrees. 

The  instructor  commands  halt,  almost  immediately  after  the  com- 
mand march;  he  does  not  require  great  exactness  in  this  movement, 
the  object  of  which  is  to  give  the  trooper  the  first  idea  of  the  oblique 
march. 

To  rein  back,  and  to  cease  reining  hack. 

39Jr.   The  instructor  commands  : 

M  1-  Squad,  backward.     2.  March.     3.  Squad.     4.  Halt. 

At  the  Command  backward,  gather  the  horse.  At  the  command 
march,  keep  a  firm  scat,  elevate  the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand,  and  close 
the  legs.  As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  lower  and  elevate  the  wrists  or 
bridle  hand,  in  regular  succession,  which  is  called  yielding  and  check- 
ing. If  the  horse  throws  the  haunches  to  the  right,  close  the  right  leg; 
if  to  the  left,  close  the  left  leg.     If  these  means  are  not  sufiicient  to 


262  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

replace  the  horse  in  his  proper  position,  open  the  rein  on  the  side  to- 
ward which  the  horse  throws  the  haunches,  causing  him  to  feel  slightly, 
at  the  same  time,  the  effect  of  the  opposite  rein. 

At  the  command  squad,  the  trooper  prepares  to  stop.  At  the  com- 
mand halt,  lower  the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand,  and  close  the  legs.  The 
horse  having  obeyed,  replace  the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand,  and  the  legs  by 
degrees. 

To  dismount. 

395.  The  instructor  causes  the  stirrups  to  be  let  down,  and  the  feet 
put  in  them.     He  then  commands  : 

1.  Prepare  to  Dismount. 

One  time,  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  Nos.  1  and  3  move  forward  six  paces,  and  keep  them- 
selves opposite  their  intervals.  Pass  the  right  rein  of  the  snaffle  (when 
it  is  worn)  into  the  left  hand,  the  extremity  of  the  reins  leaving  the 
hands  on  the  side  of  the  thumb. 

Second  motion.  Seize  the  reins  of  the  snaffle  (or  of  the  ctirb  bridle) 
above  and  near  the  left  thumb  with  the  right  hand,  the  back  of  the 
hand  up,  and  place  this  hand  upon  the  right  holster.  Disengage  the 
right  foot  from  the  stirrup,  and  seize  with  the  left  hand  a  lock  of  the 
mane  over  the  reins. 

2.  Dismount. 

One  time,  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  At  the  command  c?/8niOM?jf,  rise  upon  the  left  stirrup; 
pass  the  right  leg  extended  over  the  croup  of  the  horse,  without  touch- 
ing him,  and  bring  the  right  thigh  near  the  left,  the  body  well  sus- 
tained; at  the  same  time  place  the  right  hand  on  the  can  tie  of  the 
saddle,  slipping  it  along  the  reins  without  letting  them  go;  descend 
lightly  to  the  ground,  the  body  erect,  the  heels  on  the  same  line.  Let 
go  the  mane  with  the  left  hand. 

Second  motion.  Make  a  face  and  two  steps  to  the  left,  stepping  off 
with  the  left  foot;  slip  the  right  hand  along  the  left  rein,  seize  both 
reins  with  the  same  hand  six  inches  from  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  back 
of  the  hand  up,  and  take  the  position  of  the  trooper  dismounted. 

To  file  off. 
396.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  By  the  right  (or  left) — File  off.     2.  March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER.  263 

At  the  command  march,  the  trooper  of  the  right  (or  left)  steps  off 
with  the  left  foot,  leading  his  horse  to  the  front;  he  takes  four  steps, 
turns  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  marches,  in  the  new  direction,  at  the 
same  time  holding  the  hand  high  and  firm  to  keep  the  horse  from 
jumping.  Each  trooper  executes,  in  succession,  the  same  movement, 
when  the  one  who  precedes  him  has  moved  four  paces  to  the  front. 

Exercises  in  (he  riding  house. 

397.  In  the  instruction  which  follows,  the  squad  is  supposed  to  be 
exercising  in  a  riding  house  whose  sides  are  about  ninety,  and  ends 
thirty  yards  in  length,  or  on  a  riding  ground  which  is  bounded  by  lines 
corresponding  to  the  walls  of  the  riding  house. 

Two  of  the  best  instructed  troopers  are  designated  to  be  conductors; 
they  are  placed  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  squad,  and  use  their 
stirrups. 

To  march  to  the  right  (or  left)  hand. 

398.  The  squad  being  drawn  up  in  the  riding  house,  or  on  the 
ground,  parallel  to  its  length,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Squad,  to  the  right  (or  left).     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
in  order  to  execute  a  turn  to  the  right  from  a  halt,  as  directed  in 
No.  391. 

At  the  command  fvrward,  the  troopers,  in  lowering  their  wrists  and 
closing  the  legs,  march  straight  forward,  and  follow  the  conductor. 

At  the  extremity  of  the  riding  house,  the  conductor  turns  to  the 
right,  when  the  troopers  march  to  the  right  hand,  having  between  them 
the  distance  of  four  feet  from  head  to  croup. 

The  trooper  marches  to  the  right  hand,  when  he  has  the  right  side 
toward  the  interior  of  the  riding  horse.  He  marches  to  the  left  hand, 
when  it  is  the  left  side. 


*  To  turn  to  the  right  (or  left)  in  marching. 

399.  The  troopers  follow  the  conductor,  and  make  a  turn  to  the  right 
(or  left),  in  marching,  or  arriving  at  the  angles  of  the  riding  house. 
The  instructor  directs  the  trooper  to  advance  the  outer  hip  and  shoul- 
der, without  inclining  inward,  in  order  to  conform  to  the  movement  of 
the  horse. 


261         MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 


To  halt,  and  to  step  off. 

400.  The  troopers  marching  in  column  on  one  of  the  long  sides,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

The  troopers  stop  as  prescribed  in  No.  390. 

To  recommence  the  march,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  March. 

To  pass  from  the  walk  to  a  trot,  and  from  the  trot  to  a  walk. 

401.  The  troopers  becoming  habituated  to  the  movement  of  the  horse, 
the  instructor  causes  them  to  pass  to  the  trot.  When  they  are  in  cpl- 
umn  on  one  of  the  long  rides,  he  commands  : 

1.  Trot,     2.  March. 

At  the  command  trot,  gather  the  horse,  without  increasing  his  gait. 

At  the  command  march,  lower  the  wrists  a  little,  and  close  the  legs 
more  or  less,  according  to  the  sensibility  of  the  horse.  As  soon  as  the 
horse  obeys,  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by  degrees. 

The  instructor  should  employ  this  gait  cautiously  at  first,  and  at  a 
moderate  trot,  that  the  men  may  not  lose  their  position. 

To  pass  from  the  trot  to  the  walk,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Walk.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  walk,  gather  the  horse  without  aflfecting  the  gait. 

At  the  command  march,  elevate  the  wrists,  or  bridle  hand,  by  de- 
grees, and  hold  the  legs  near,  in  order  to  prevent  the  horse  from  stop- 
ping. As  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  wrists  and  legs  by 
degrees. 

Changes  of  hand. 

402.  When  the  troopers  have  marched  some  time  to  the  right  (or  left) 
hand,  to  make  them  change  hands  in  the  breadth  of  the  riding  house, 
or  ground,  without  stopping,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Right  (or  left) — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

At  the  word  turn,  the  leading  file  turns  to  the  right.  At  the  com- 
mand forward,  he  moves  straight  forward  and  crosses  the  riding  house 
or  ground,  in  its  breadth,  followed  by  the  other  troopers. 


*".'. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  265 

The  leading  tile  being  at  two  paces  from  the  opposite  track,  the 
instructor  commands  : 

1.   Left  (or  right) — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

At  the  command  turn,  the  leading  file  turns  to  the  left;  and  at  the 
command  foncard,  be  follows  the  track.  All  the  troopers  turn  in  suc- 
cession on  the  same  ground. 

The  instructor  causes  these  changes  of  hand  to  be  made  at  a  nuilk, 
and  at  a  trot. 


To  turn  to  the  right  (or  lejV)  hy  trooper.,  in  marching. 

40;%  ihe  troopers  marching  in  column,  and  having  arrived  about  the 
middle  of  one  of  tlic  long  sides,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  to  the  right  (or  left).     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

At  the  command  squad,  to  the  right,  gather  the  horse.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  each  trooper  executes  a  turn  to  the  right  in  marching. 
At  the  command  fonvard,  each  trooper  moves  straight  to  the  front. 

The  troopers  being  two  paces  from  the  opposite  track,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Squad,  to  the  right  (or  left).     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  executes  a  turn  to  the  right,  fol- 
lowing the  same  principles  ;  and  at  the  command  foncard,  all  return 
to  the  track. 

The  same  movements  are  repeated  to  resume  the  order  in  which  the 
troopers  were  originally. 

To  turn  about  to  the  right  (or  left)  by  troopers,  in  marching  on  the 

same  line. 

404.  The  troopers  having  made  a  turn  to  the  right  as  has  just  been 
explained,  and  having  arrived  near  the  opposite  track,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Squad,  to  the  right  (or  left)  about.    2.  March.    3.  Forward. 

At  the  command,  squad,  to  the  right  about,  gather  the  horse.  At  the 
command  march,  each  trooper  executes  a  turn  to  the  right  about  in 
marching,  following  the  principles  laid  down  in  No.  392.  At  the  com- 
mand/orwarrf,  each  trooper  moves  directly  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  gives  the  command  march  at  the  moment  the  troopers 


266         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    A^^D    MILITIA. 

are  within  two  paces  of  the  track  ;  the  troopers  are  then  re-formed  in 
column  upon  the  opposite  track,  by  the  movement  of  squad,  to  the  right 
(or  left). 

To  turn  about  to  the  right  (or  left)  by  trooper,  in  marching  in 

column. 

405.  The  troopers  marching  in  column,  and  the  leading  file  having 
arrived  near  the  end  of  one  of  the  long  sides  of  the  riding  house  or 
ground,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  to  the  right  (or  left)  about.    2.  March.    3.  Forward. 

At  the  command  squad,  to  the  right  ahoiit,  gather  the  horse.  At  the 
command  march,  each  trooper  executes  a  turn  to  the  right  about  in 
marching.     At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  moves  forward. 

On  arriving  at  the  short  side  opposite,  the  leading  file  turns  to  the 
left  without  command 5  the  squad  returns  to  the  original  order,  by 
executing  the  inverse  movement. 

406.  To  rest  the  squad,  the  instructor  causes  the  troopers  to  turn  to 
the  right  (or  left),  when  they  are  about  the  middle  of  one  of  the  long 
sides  of  the  riding  house  or  ground,  and  gives  the  command  hah,  when 
they  are  out  of  the  track.  The  instruction  is  recommenced  by  a  turn 
to  the  right  (or  left). 

To  terminate  the  drill,  the  stirrups  are  let  down,  and  the  feet  placed 
in  them,  when  the  instructor  commands  the  troopers  to  dismount,  and 
file  off. 

During  the  rests,  the  instructor  exercises  the  troopers  in  vaulting  on, 
and /ro?H  their  horses,  without  commands. 

To  leap  to  the  ground. 

The  trooper,  holding  the  reins  as  in  dismounting,  seizes  a  lock  of  the 
mane  firmly  with  the  left  hand;  places  the  right  hand  upon  the  pom- 
mel, raises  himself  upon  his  wrists,  brings  the  right  thigh  by  the  side 
of  the  left,  remains  an  instant  in  this  position,  and  descends  lightly  to 
the  ground. 

To  leap  on  the  horse. 

The  trooper  seizes  the  mane  with  the  left  hand,  places  the  right  hand 
which  holds  the  reins  upon  the  pommel  of  the  saddle,  springs  lively, 
raising  himself  upon  the  two  wrists,  remains  an  instant  in  this  position, 
and  places  himeelf  lightly  in  the  saddle. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  267 

The  instructor  sometimes  gives  the  command  to  rest  in  marching,  in 
order  to  calm  the  horses  after  quick  pace,  and  to  relieve  the  troopers. 
During  the  rent  in  vtarching,  the  troopers  relax  themselves,  but  without 
changing  the  pace,  and  without  losing  their  distance. 

Exercises  in  two  ranks. 

407.  The  troopers  arc  placed  in  two  ranks  opened,  with  a  distance  of 
six  paces  between  the  ranks,  and  the  horses  at  one  foot  from  each  other. 
In  this  instruction  from  twelve  to  sixteen  troopers  may  be  united.  The 
stirrups  are  crossed  as  in  the  preceding  case;  the  men  wear  spurs. 

The  instructor  commands  : 

In  each  rank — count  Fours. 

At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from 
right  to  left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same  tone, 
without  hurry,  and  without  turning  the  head;  one,  two,  three, /our,  ac- 
cording to  the  place  which  each  one  occupies. 

At  the  command : 

Prepare  to  Mount. 

Nos.  1  and  3  of  each  rank  move  six  paces  to  the  front;  stepping  off 
with  the  left  foot,  keeping  opposite  their  intervals,  and  regulating 
by  the  right.  The  troopers  then  execute  the  first  motion  of  prepare  to 
mount  as  directed  for  a  single  rank. 

After  the  troopers  are  mounted,  the  instructor  commands : 

Form — Ranks. 

At  the  command  ranks,  Nos.  1  and  3  raise  the  wrists  (or  bridle- 
hand),  and  hold  the  legs  close  to  the  body  of  the  hoi-se  to  keep  him 
quiet;  Nos.  2  and  4  enter  the  intervals  without  jostling  and  without 
precipitation. 

The  rear  rank  being  formed,  closes  to  the  distance  of  two  feet  from 
the  front. 

Of  the  spu7's. 

408.  The  instructor  explains  to  the  troopers  the  use  and  the  effect  of 
the  spur. 

If  the  horse  does  not  obey  the  logs,  it  is  necessary  to  employ  the 
spur.  The  spur  is  not  an  aid,  it  is  a  means  of  chastising.  It  is  only 
necessary  to  use  it  occasionally,  but  always  vigorously,  and  at  the 
moment  the  horse  commits  the  fault. 


268         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

In  order  to  use  the  spurs,  it  is  necessary  to  keep  steady  the  body,  the 
waist  and  the  wrists;  to  cling  to  the  horse  with  the  thighs  and  the 
calves  of  the  legs;  turn  the  toes  a  little  out;  lower  the  wrists  a  little 
press  the  spurs  close  behind  the  girths,  without  moving  the  body,  and 
let  them  remain  there  until  the  horse  obeys;  then  replace  the  wrists 
and  legs  by  degrees.  In  using  the  spur,  the  troopers  should  not  bear 
too  much  upon  the  rein,  as  this  would  counteract  the  effect  of  the  spur. 

409.  To  conduct  the  squad  to  the  riding  house  or  ground,  the 
instructor  commands : 

1.  By  fie  to  the  right  (or  left).     2.  March. 

At  the  command  J)y  file  to  the  right,  gather  the  horse.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  trooper  on  the  right  of  each  rank  executes  a  tarn  to 
the  right,  and  moves  forward,  the  trooper  of  the  rear  rank  approaching, 
in  marching,  to  within  one  foot  of  the  front  rank.  This  movement  is 
executed  by  all  the  other  troopers  in  succession. 

To  march  to  the  right  (or  left)  hand. 

410,  In  entering  the  riding  house  or  ground,  the  instructor  marches 
his  squad  parallel  to  the  long  sides,  and  when  the  head  of  the  column 
arrives  toward  the  middle,  he  commands: 

1.  Right  and  left — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

The  leading  file  of  the  front  rank  turns  to  the  left,  the  one  of  the 
rear  rank  turns  to  the  right;  when  these  files  have  arrived  within  two 
paces  of  the  track,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Right — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

The  two  columns  then  march  to  the  right  hand,  and  at  the  same 
pace. 

The  troopers  preserve  the  distance  of  four  feet  from  head  to 
croup. 

The  leading  files  regulate  the  pace  of  their  horses  so  as  to  arrive 
•at  the  same  time  at  the  opposite  angles  of  the  riding  house  or 
ground,  the  leading  file  of  the  rear  rank  regulating  himself  on  him 
of  the  front. 

To  pass  a  corner  to  the  right,  a  tarn  to  the  right  is  executed;  to 
pass  a  corner  to  the  left,  a  turn  to  the  left  is  made  in  marching; 
the  movement  of  each  one  should  be  independent  of  the  trooper  who 
has  gone  before,  their  hands  and  legs  alone  should  determine  the 
horse  to  go  to  the  right  or  to  the  left. 


SCHOOL    OF.  THE    TROOPER.  269 

To  pass  from  the  walk  to  the  trot,  and  from  the  trot  to  the  walk. 

411.  The  troopers  inarching  in  column  upon  the  long  sides,  the 
instructor  causes  them  to  commence  the  trot. 

Whenever  the  change  is  made  from  a  slow  gait  to  one  more  rapid, 
as  from  a  walk  to  the  trot,  it  is  necessary  to  commence  slowly,  and 
increase  it  gradually  to  the  degree  prescribed. 

The  troopers  marching  in  column  at  a  trot  upon  the  long  sides, 
the  instructor  causes  them  to  pass  to  the  ualk. 

Whenever  the  change  is  made  from  a  lively  gait  to  one  more  slow, 
as  from  the  trot  to  the  mo  Ik,  it  is  necessary  to  commence  the  last 
gait  as  gradually  as  possible,  and  to  reduce  it  by  little  and  little  to 
the  degree  indicated. 

Change  (f  direction  in  the  breadth  of  the  riding  house  or  ground. 

*'  412.  The   instructor  causes  the  change  of  direction   in   the  breadth 

of  the  riding  house  or  ground,  as  directed  for  the  changes  of  hand, 
taking  care  to  give  the  command  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent  the 
columns  from  meeting  at  the  end  of  the  change  of  direction. 

The    change    of  direction    ought    to    be   executed    so    as    neither  to 
stop  nor  check  the  rear  of  the  column ;   the  troopers,  and  particularly 
the  leading  files,  ought  to  turn  without  slackening   the  pace,  aiding 
'    themselves  not  only  with  their  hands  but  also  with  their  legs. 


Change  of  direction  in  the  length  of  the  riding  house  or  ground. 

413.  This  change  of  direction  is  executed  oil  the  same  principle  as 
that  in  the  breadth  of  the  riding  house,  or  ground,  the  instructor 
observing,  in  order  to  commence  it,  to  command  ri<jht  or  left,  at  the 
instant  the  leading  files  arrive  at  the  first  angle,  and  to  command  turn, 
when,  having  past  the  corner,  they  are  at  three  paces  from  the  middle 
of  the  short  side. 

The  troopers  then  cross  the  riding  house  or  ground,  in  its  length 
in  a  right  line,  without  touching  each  other,  passing  to  the  left,  and 
re-enter  upon  the  track  at  the  commands  : 

1.  Right  (or  /e//)— Turn.     2.  Forward. 


Change  of  direction  diagonally. 
414.  When  the  leading  files  have  passed  the  second  corner,  and  have 


270         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

arrived  upon  the  long  sides,  the  instructor  causes  a  diagonal  change  of 
direction  to  be  executed  at  the  commands  : 

1.  Right  (or  left) — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

At  the  command  turn,  the  leading  files  make  a  half-turn  to  the  right. 
At  the  command  forward,  they  move  straight  forward,  cross  the  riding 
house  or  ground,  diagonally,  pass  each  other  to  the  left,  and  re-enter 
upon  the  track  at  the  commands  : 

1.  Left  (or  right).     2.  Turn.     3.  Forward. 

All  the  other  troopers  execute  the  same  movement  in  succession,  in 
turning  upon  the  same  ground  that  the  leading  files  have  turned. 


Change  of  direction  obliquely  hy  the  trooper. 

415.  The  squad  commences  a  change  of  direction  in  the  length  of 
the  riding  house,  or  ground;  as  soon  as  all  the  troopers  have  turned, 
and  are  in  th^  same  direction,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

The  troopers  stop  at  the  same  time,  keeping  their  horses  straight,  and 
at  their  distances. 

The  instructor  causes  the  troopers  to  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  right 
(or  left)  from  a  halt.  This  movement  being  executed,  he  assures  him- 
self of  the  exactness  of  the  directions  and  intervals,  and  then  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  March. 

The  troopers  march  at  the  same  gait,  each  in  the  direction  he  has 
taken.  When  they  arrive  one  foot  from  the  track,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  make  a  quarter-turn  to  the  left  in  advancing,  with 
the  hand  light  and  leg  near,  to  follow  the  track. 

The  instructor  causes  these  movements  to  be  repeated  without  halt- 
ing; for  this  purpose,  after  having  commenced  the  change  of  direction 
in  the  length  of  the  riding  house  or  ground,  as  soon  as  the  two  ranks 
are  in  column,  he  commands : 

1.  Squad,  right  (or  left)  ohlique.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

At  the  command,  right  oblique,  gather  the  horse.  At  the  command 
march,  execute  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right;  having  taken  this  direction, 


fe 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER.  271 

keep  the  legs  equally  neai',  and  march  straight  forward  at  the  same 
gait.  At  the  command  forward,  return  upon  the  track,  or  return  to 
the  original  direction. 

To  march  in  a  circle. 

416.  When  the  leading  files  have  passed  over  about  one-third  of  the 
long  sides,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  In  circle  to  the  right  (or  left).     2.  March. 

At  the  command  in  circle  to  the  right,  the  leading  files,  and  in  succes- 
sion the  troopers,  gather  their  horses.  At  the  command  viareh,  the 
leading  files  describe  a  circle  between  the  two  tracks  ;  they  are  followed 
by  the  other  troopers,  who  march  exactly  in  the  same  direction. 

To  change  hand  on  the  circle. 

417.  The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Right  (or  left)— Turn.     2.  Forward. 

At  the  command  tnni,  the  leading  files  turn  to  the  right.  At  the 
command  forward,  they  move  straight  forward,  directing  themselves, 
in  passing  the  centre,  toward  the  opposite  point  of  the  circumference. 

When  the  leading  files  are  two  feet  from  this  point,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Left  (or  right)— Tmi^.     2.  Forward. 

\ 

At  the  command  turn,  the  leading  files  turn  to  the  left.  At  the  com- 
mand forward,  they  re-enter  upon  the  circle  at  the  new  hand.  All  the 
other  troopers  follow  the  leading  files. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  to  resume  the  exercise  upon  the  right 
line,  he  takes  care  that  the  leading  files  are  at  opposite  points  of  the 
circumference;  and  when  they  are  on  the  track  of  the  long  sides,  he 
commands : 

Forward. 

At  this  command  the  leading  files  straighten  their  horses  and  re-enter 
on  the  track,  followed  by  the  other  troopers. 

418.  To  reunite  the  troopers  in  order  to  conduct  them  to  the  quar- 
ters, the  instructor  causes  them  to  close  to  the  distance  of  two  feet;  he 
then  orders  a  change  of  direction  in  the  breadth  of  the  riding  house 
or  ground,  at  the  moment  the  leading  files  are  opposite  each  other. 


272         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

When  the  leading  files,  in  the  act  of  meeting  each  other,  ain*ive 
toward  the  middle  of  the  space,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Left  and  right — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

The  leader  of  the  front  rank  turns  to  the  left,  that  pf  the  rear  rank 
to  the  right,  the  two  columns  thus  reunite,  the  troopers  of  the  rear 
rank  approaching  to  within  one  pace  of  those  of  the  front. 

The  column  having  arrived  on  the  ground  where  the  squad  was 
formed,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Front.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  front,  the  first  trooper  of  each  rank  turns  to  the 
left  and  moves  straight  forward.  At  the  command  hult,  the  trooper  of 
the  front  rank  stops;  and  when  the  rear  rank  trooper  finds  himself  at 
two  feet  from  the  front  rank  he  stops  also. 

All  the  other  troopers  execute  a  turn  to  the  left,  in  succession,  when 
they  are  nearly  opposite  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in  the  rank,  and 
halt  ahreast  of  this  rank. 

419.  To  terminate  the  exercise,  the  instructor  gives  the  command  to 
dismount  in  two  ranks,  as  follows  :  at  the  command  * 

Prepare  to  Dismount, 

Nos.  1  and  3,  of  the  front  rank,  move  forward  six  paces ;  Nos.  2  and  4, 
of  the  rear  rank,  rein  back  four  paces,  and  keep  themselves  opposite 
their  intervals,  dressing  by  the  right. 

After  the  troopers  have  taken  these  positions  they  go  through  the 
first  motion^- of  jjre^jffre  to  dismount,  as  directed  for  a  single  rank,  fol- 
lowed by  the  dismount. 

After  the  dismount,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Form — Ranks. 

At  the  word  ranks,  Nos.  1  and  .3,  of  each  rank,  elevate  the  right  hand 
slightly,  to  keep  the  horse  quiet;  Nos.  2  and  4  return  quietly  to  their 
intervals. 

Exercises  with  stirrups. 

420.  The  stirrup  should  support  only  the  weight  of  the  leg;  the  foot 
ought  to  be  inserted  one-third  of  its  length,  the  heel  lower  than  the 
toe.  The  stirrups  are  of  proper  length,  if,  when  the  trooper  raises 
himself  on  the  stirrups,  there  is  a  space  of  six  inches  between  the  fork 
and  the  saddle. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  27'^ 

To  turn  to  the  right  (or  /e//),  hy  the  trooper,  in  marching. 

421.  The  instructor  causes  this  movement  to  be  executed  as  already 
pi'escribed  (No.  398).  at  the  commands: 

1.  Squad,  to  the  right.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

He  will  observe  that,  the  troojiers  marching  in  two  columns,  the  com- 
mand march  ought  to  be  given  at  the  moment  the  leading  files  arrive 
opposite  the  last  trooper  but  one  of  the  other  column. 

Immediately  after  the  command /orH;or</,  the  troopers  move  straight 
forward,  preserving  their  gait  and  direction,  so  that  each  one  may  find 
before  him  the  interval  and  the  place  he  is  to  occupy  in  the  column  on 
the  opposite  track.  In  passing  into  the  intervals,  the  logs  should  be 
kept  near,  to  prevent  the  horse  slackening  his  gait. 

To  pass  in  succession  from  the  head  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

422.  This  movement  is  executed  in  succession  in  the  two  columns,  at 
a  simple  warning  from  the  instructor,  by  two  right  (or  le/f)  about  turns. 

The  trooper  designated  to  pass  to  the  roar  of  the  column  gathers  his 
horse  and  executes  the  movement  in  advancing,  so  as  not  to  retard 
those  who  are  behind  him.  He  holds  the  outer  leg  near,  in  order  to 
describe  a  semicircle  of  more  than  six  paces;  he  marches  then  parallel 
to  the  column,  and  when  he  has  re-entered  upon  the  track  by  a  second 
turn,  he  closes  to  the  (^stance  of  four  feet  from  the  last  trooper.  The 
trooper  who  follows,  and  who  becomes  the  leader,  should  gather  his 
horse,  and  direct  him  with  the  outer  rein  and  the  inner  leg,  to  prevent 
his  following  the  horse  which  has  left  the  column. 

Being  at  a  halt,  to  commence  the  move  at  a  trot. 

423.  The  troopers  being  in  column  upon  the  long  sides,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.   Column,  forward.     2.   Trot.     3.  March. 

At  the  command  trot,  gather  the  horse.  At  the  command  march, 
lower  the  wrists  and  close  the  legs  by  degrees ;  as  soon  as  the  horse 
obeys,  replace  the  Avrists  and  legs  slowly. 

Marching  at  a  trot,  to  halt. 

424.  The  troopers  marching  at  a  trot,  and  in  column  on  the  long 
sides,  the  instructor  commands  : 


274         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MTLTTIA. 

1.  Column.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  coluvm,  gather  the  horse.  At  the  command  halt, 
elevate  the  wrists  by  degrees  until  the  horse  stops,  and  hold  the  legs 
always  neai*,  to  keep  him  straight,  and  to  prevent  his  stepping  back. 
The  horse  having  obeyed,  gradually  replace  the  wrists  and  legs. 

The  instructor  should  require  all  the  troopers  to  set  off  freely  at  the 
trot  at  the  command  march,  and  to  stop  altogether,  without  jostling,  at 
the  command  halt. 

To  pass  from  the  trot  to  the  trot-out^  and  from  the  trot-out  to 

the  trot. 

425.  The  troopers  marching  at  the  trot,  and  in  column  upon  the  long 
sides,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Trot-out. 

At  this  command,  lower  the  wrists  a  little,  and  close  the  legs  gradu- 
ally ,:  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys,  replace  the  wrists  and  the  legs  by 
degrees. 

This  gait  should  be  executed  only  during  one  or  two  turns  toward 
each  hand  ;  in  continuing  it  longer,  the  horses  lose  their  steadiness, 
and  the  equality  of  their  gaits  is  destroyed. 

426.  To  pass  from  the  trot-out  to  the  trot,  the  instructor  commands : 

Slow  trot 

At  this  command,  elevate  the  wrists  by  degrees,  and  close  the  legs, 
to  prevent  the  horse  from  taking  the  walk;  as  soon  as  the  horse  obeys, 
replace  the  wrists  and  legs  by  degrees. 

To  pass  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop. 

427.  Before  commencing  this  exercise,  and  when  the  rear  rank 
arrives  opposite  one  of  the  short  sides  of  the  riding  house  or  ground, 
it  is  formed  by  causing  the  troopers  to  front  and  halt,  as  directed, 
No.  391,  paying  attention  to  make  them  move  forward  six  paces  from 
the  track. 

The  troopers  of  the  front  rank  continue  to  march,  take  between  them 
the  distance  oi  four  paces,  pass  to  the  trot  and  commence  the  yallop,  in 
succession,  at  the  indication  of  the  instructor,  as  follows  : 

On  approaching  the  corner,  Ictir/then  the  trot,  and  gather  the  horse, 
feeling  the  left  rein  slightly,  in  order  to  keep  back  the  left  shoulder, 
and  leave  the  right  perfectly  free. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER.  275 

At  the  moment  of  passing  the  corner,  close  the  legs  equally,  but  not 
suddenly.  The  horse  having  taken  the  f/allop,  hold  a  light  hand  and 
the  legs  near,  to  keep  him  at  his  gait. 

After  one  or  two  turns,  the  troopers  pass  from  the  gallop  to  the  trot, 
and  from  the  trot  to  the  walk.  The  instructor  makes  them  change  hand 
in  the  breadth  of  the  riding  ground,  and  recommence  the  same  exercise 
to  the  left  hand.  The  troopers  of  the  front  rank  are  then  formed  as 
those  of  the  rear  rank,  upon  the  other  short  side,  and  tho  troopers  of 
the  rear  rank  go  through  with  the  same  exercise. 

To  passage  to  the  right  or  left.  ^ 

428.  The  two  columns  marching  at  a  tcalk  upon  the  long  sides,  the 
instructor  causes  the  movement  squad,  to  the  right  (or  left)  to  be  exe- 
cuted, No.  398,  and,  having  halted  the  troopers,  he  commands  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  pass.     2.  March.     3.  Squad.     4.  Halt. 

At  the  command  7-iyht  pass,  bear  the  shoulders  of  the  horse  to  the 
right  in  opening  the  right  rein  a  little,  and  closing  the  right  leg.  This 
movement  is  one  of  preparation  ;  it  indicates  to  the  trooper  that  the 
shoulders  of  the  horse  should  always  commence  the  march,  and  pre- 
cede the  movement  of  the  haunches.  At  the  command  march,  open 
the  right  rein  to  incline  the  horse  to  the  right,  closing  the  left  leg  at 
the  same  time  that  the  haunches  may  follow,  without  leaning  the  body 
to  the  left :  make  use  of  the  left  rein  and  the  right  leg  to  support  the 
horse  and  moderate  his  movement. 

After  some  steps  upon  the  side,  the  instructor  halts  the  squad. 

At  the  command  halt,  cause  the  effect  of  the  right  rein  and  left  leg 
to  cease  instantly,  employing  the  opposite  rein  and  leg;  straighten  the 
horse,  and  replace  the  wrists  and  legs  by  degrees. 

To  passage  to  the  left,  employ  the  same  principles  and  inverse 
means. 

The  instructor  causes  this  movement  to  be  executed  in  the  com- 
mencement by  each  man  separatety,  and  then  by  all  at  the  same  time. 

To  passage  to  the  rights  or  left,  bring  in  column. 

The  troopers  being  on  the  track,  and  marching  to  the  right  (or  left 
hand,  the  instructor  orders  a  change  of  direction  in  the  length  of  the 
riding  house  or  ground;  and  when  the  two  columns  are  by  the  side  of 
each  other,  he  halts  them,  and  causes  them  to  execute  passage  to  the 
right  (or  left).  When  the  troopers  have  nearly  arrived  at  the  track, 
the  instructor  halts  them. 


276  JMANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILTTIA. 


Principles  of  the  gallop. 

430.  A  horse  gallops  on  the  riglit  foot,  when  the  right  fore  and  hind 
leg  move  in  advance  of  the  left  fore  and  hind  leg.  This  gait  is  gene- 
rally divided  into  three  distinct  times  or  treads.  The  first  time  is 
marked  by  the  left  hind  foot  which  reaches  the  ground  first;  the 
second  by  the  left  fore  and  right  hind  foot  which  touch  at  the  same 
instant,  and  the  third  by  the  right  forefoot. 

A  horse  gallops  on  the  left  foot  when  the  left  fore  and  hind  leg  move 
in  advance  of  the  right  fore  and  hind  leg.  In  this  case,  the  riglit  hind 
foot  first  reaches  the  ground,  then  the  right  fore  and  left  hind  foot,  and 
lastly  the  left  forefoot. 

A  horse  gallops  true  when  he  gnllops  on  the  right  foot,  in  exercising 
or  turning  to  the  right  hand,  and  on  the  left  foot,  in  exercising  or  turn- 
ing to  the  left  hand. 

A  horse  gallops  false  when  lie  gallops  on  the  left  foot,  in  exercising 
or  turning  to  the  right  hand,  and  on  the  right  foot,  in  exercising  or 
turning  to  the  left  hand. 

A  horse  is  ''disunited"  when  he  gallojis  with  the  near  fore-leg 
followed  by  the  off  !iiud-leg,  »>r  with  the  off  fore-leg  followed  by  the 
near  hind-leg. 

When  the  horse  gallops  on  the  right  foot,  the  rider  experiences  a 
sensible  movement  in  his  position  from  right  to  left,  and  when  he 
gallops  on  the  left  foot,  the  rider  experiences  a  sensible  movement  in 
his  position  from  left  to  right. 

When  the  horse  is  disunited,  the  trooper  experiences  irregular  move- 
ments in  his  position;  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  horse  is  deranged, 
and  his  strength  ini]iaired. 

To  gallop  on  right  lines. 

431.  After  the  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  are  formed  as  directed, 
No.  427,  the  instructor  causes  the  men  of  the  front  rank  to  take  the 
distance  of  four  paces  from  each  other:  these  troopers  marching  at  the 
trot,  and  to  the  ri(j[ht  hand  upon  one  of  the  long  sides,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Galli.p.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  gallop,  gather  the  horse  and  keep  him  perfectly 
straight.  At  the  command  march,  carry  the  bridle  hand  slightly 
forward  and  to  the  left,  to  enable  the  right  shoulder  to  move  in 
advance  of  the  left,  and  close  the  legs  behind  the  girths  in  order  to 
urge  the  horse  forward,  causing  him  to   feel   the  effect  of  the  left  leg 


i 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  277 

lightly.  The  horse  having  obeyed,  hold  a  light  hand  and  the  legs 
near,  to  keep  him  at  his  gait. 

To  preserve  the  movement  of  the  horse  true,  it  is  necessary  for  the 
trooper  to  accommodate  himself  to  all  his  motions,  par'i-utarly  in 
passing  corners,  when  the  slightest  derangement  in  the  seat  would 
render  the  action  of  the  horse  irregular. 

When  a  horse  gallops  false,  or  is  disunited,  the  trooper  is  ordered  to 
take  the  trot  and  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  column,  taking  care  not 
to  interfere  with  those  who  follow.  When  he  arrives  at  the  rear,  he 
resumes  the  gallop. 

The  troopers  should  make  but  a  turn  or  two  at  the  gallojj  to  each 
hand,  and  should  always  be  required  to  pass  to  the  trot  in  order  to 
change  hand. 

When  the  troopers  manage  their  horses  well,  the  distance  between  is 
generally  reduced  to  four  feet. 

The  rear  rank  is  carried  through  the  same  exercise,  and  then  both 
ranks  at  once. 

2a  gallop  on  the  circle. 

432.  When  the  troopers  have  been  sufficiently  exercised  at  the  gallop 
on  straight  lines,  the  instructor  causes  them  to  make  a  few  turns.on  the 
circle,  following  the  principles  laid  down  in  No.  416. 

This  exercise  is  commenced  on  very  large  circles  :  the  diameter  is 
diminished  as  the  troopers  become  more  skilful. 


WHEELINGS. 

433.  There  are  two  kinds  of  wheels  :  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and 
the  wheel  on  a  movable  jnvot.  The  wheel  is  always  on  a  fixed  pivot,  ex- 
cept when  the  command  is  right  (or  left)— turn.  The  troopers  should 
execute  this  movement  without  disuniting,  and  without  ceasing  to  ob- 
serve the  alignment. 

In  every  kind  of  wheel,  the  conductor  of  the  marching  flank  should 
measure  with  his  eye  the  arc  of  the  circle  he  is  to  pass  over,  so  that  it 
may  not  be  necessary  for  the  files  to  open  or  close.  He  turns  his  head 
occasionally  toward  the  pivot;  if.  he  perceives  that  the  troopers  are 
too  much  crowded,  or  too  open,  he  increases  or  diminishes  the  extent  of 
his  circle  gradually.  Each  trooper  of  the. front  rank  should  describe 
his  circle  in  the  ratio  of  the  distance  at  which  .he  may  be  from  the  pivot. 
During  the  wheel,  the  troopers  should  ttirn  the  head  slightly  toward 
the  marching  flank,  to  regulate  the  rapidity  of  their  march  and  to  keep 
themselves  aligned  ;  they  should  also  feel  the  boot  lightly  on  the  side 


278  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

of  the  pivot,  in  order  to  remain  closed  to  that  side.  They  should  yield 
to  pressure  coming  from  the  pivot,  and  resist  that  from  the  opposite 
direction.  The  horses  are  slightly  turned  toward  the  pivot,  in  order 
to  keep  them  on  the  circular  line  they  have  to  pass  over. 

The  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

434.  The  object  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot  is  to  pass  from  the 
order  of  battle  to  the  order  of  column,  and  from  the  order  of  column 
to  the  order  of  battle.  The  trooper  who  forms  the  pivot  of  the  wheel 
turns  upon  his  own  ground,  without  advancing  or  reining  back,  and 
without  passing  to  the  right  or  left. 

The  wheelings  are  executed  at  first  in  single  rank  ;  for  this  purpose 
the  front  rank  is  marched  forward,  and  halted  when  arrived  at  a  dis- 
tance from  the  rear  rank  equal  to  double  its  front.  The  ranks  being 
aligned,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Squad,  in  circle  right  (or  lefl^)  wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  put  themselves  in  motion,  turn- 
ing the  head  toward  the  marching  flank ;  the  flank  file  conducts  the 
flank  at  a  umlk,  measuring  with  the  ej'e  the  extent  of  the  circle  he  is  to 
pass  over,  that  neither  opening  nor  closing  may  be  caused  in  the  rank, 
and  that  the  troopers  may  keep  aligned.  The  pivot  man  turns  upon 
his  own  ground,  regulating  himself  upon  the  marching  flank. 

When  the  squad  has  executed  several  wheels,  to  halt  it,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt.     3.  Left  (or  right^ — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  straighten  their  horses  and  halt 
with  steadiness.  At  the  command  left  (or  right) — dress,  they  align 
themselves  to  the  side  indicated.  At  the  command/ro«f,  turn  the  head 
to  the  front. 

The  two  ranks  are  then  marched  forward,  preserving  between  them 
the  same  distance,  and  made  to  recommence  the  w^leel.  When  the  in- 
structor wishes  the  squad  to  take  the  direct  march,  he  commands  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

At  the  command /o;-«;o;rf,  the  pivot  resumes  the  gait  at  which  it  was 
previously  marching.  All  the  other  troopers  straighten  their  horses, 
and  the  two  flanks  move  forward  at  the  same  gait,  conforming  to  the 
principles  of  the  direct  march.  At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right), 
the  troopers  regulate  their  movements  toward  the  side  indicated. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    TROOPER.  279 

If  tbe  squad  is  wheeling  to  the  right,  and  the  instructor  wishes  it 
to  change  the  wheel   to  the  left  without  halting,  he  commands : 

1.    Squad,  in  circle,  left  wheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  left  flank  halts,  and  becomes  the,  pivot. 
The  right  flank,  assuming  the  gait  at  which  the  left  flank  was  march- 
ing, moves  forward,  and  describes  a  circle  proportionate  to  the  extent 
of  the  front.  All  the  other  troopers  straighten  their  horses,  and  guide 
them  so  as  to  pass  new  circles  in  the  inverse  sense. 

435.  The  troopers  being  suflBciently  exercised  at  the  wheels  in  single 
rank  at  the  iralk  and  the  trot,  the  ranks  are  closed  and  the  wheels  exe- 
cuted in   double  ranks.     The  instructor  commands: 

1.   Squad,  in  circle,  right  (or  kft)  icheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  of  the  front  rank  execute  the 
movement  as  prescribed  above.  The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  turn 
the  head  and  carry  the  hand  toward  the  marching  flank,  so  that  each 
one  may  bo  out  of  the  direction  of  his  file-leader  by  two  troopers.  For 
this  purpose,  the  moment  the  wheel  commences,  each  rear  rank  man 
executes  a  quarter  turn  to  the  left,  sustaining  the  haunches  of  his  horse 
with  the  right  leg,  when  the  wheel  is  to  the  right,  or  a  quarter  turn  to 
the  right,  when  the  wheel  is  to  the  left,  keeping  during  the  wheel  in 
the  direction  of  his  new  file-leader,  and  remaining  at  the  distance  of 
two  feet  from  the  front  rank. 

To  stop  the  wheel,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.   Squad.     2.  Halt.     3.  Left  (or  right)  Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  command  squad,  the  rear  rank  men  straighten  their  horses,  and 
return  to  the  direction  of  their  file-leaders.  All  tbe  troopers  halt  at 
the  command.  At  the  command  left  (or  right)  dress,  they  align  them- 
selves toward  the  side  indicated.  At  the  command  front,  turn  the 
head  to  the  front. 

When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to  resume  the  direct  march, 
he  commands: 

1.  Forward.     2.   Guide  left  (or  right). 

At  the  command  forward,  the  rear  rank  men  replace  themselves 
behind  their  file-leaders,  and  march  straight  forward. 

The  squad  wheeling  to  the  right,  to  wheel  to  the  opposite  side  with- 
out halting,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  in  circle,  left  wheel.     2.  March. 


280  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND  '  MILITIA. 

At  the  command  in  circle,  left  wheel,  the  rear  rank  men  return 
to  the  direction  of  their  file-leaders.  At  the  command  march,  the 
troopers  conform  to  what  has  already  been  laid  down. 

The  squad  being  halted,  to  place  it  in  a  direction  jjerpendicular  to 
the  original  front,  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Squad,  right  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt.    4.  Left 
(or  right) — Dress.     5.  Front. 

AVhicli  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot. 

436.  The  squad  being  at  the  halt,  to  face  it  to  the  rear,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Squad,  right   (or  left)  about,  icheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 
4.  Left — Dress.     5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  in  circle  to  the  riijht  or  left,  the  squad  passing 
over  a  half  circle. 

437.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  to  place  it  toward  its  right  in  a 
direction  oblique  to  the  original,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Squad,  rnght  (or  left)  half  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt.     4. 
Left  (or  right) — Dress.     5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  squad  being  on  the  march,  the  same  movements  are  executed  at 
the  commands:  1.  Squad,  ritjht  (or  left)  tcheel,  right  (or  left)  about,  wheel, 
right  half  (or  left  half)  irheel.  2.  March.  3.  Forward.  4.  Guide 
right  (or  left). 

At  the  command  vuxrch,  the  wheeling  flank  wheels  at  the  gait  at 
which  the  platoon  was  marching;  the  pivot  flank  halts.  At  the  com- 
mand forward,  the  pivot  resumes  its  original  pass,  and  the  two  flanks 
move  forward  at  the  same  gait. 

To  wheel  on  a  movable  pivot. 

43S.  The  wheel  on  a  movable  pivot  is  employed  in  the  successive 
changes  of  direction  in  column.  The  conductor  of  the  marching  flank 
should  measure  his  gait,  and  describe  his  arc  of  circle  so  as  to  cause 
the  files  neither  to  open  or  close.  The  pivot  describes  an  are  of  five 
2)aces,  in  slackening  the  gait.  The  centre  men  preserve  the  gait  at 
which  the  squad  was  marching.  At  the  end  of  the  wheel,  the  march- 
ing flank  and  the  pivot  resume  the  gait  at  which  they  originally 
marched. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER.  281 

The  squad  being  on  the  march,  to  cause  it  change  direction,  the 
instructor  commands: 

1.  I.efl  (or  rigliC) — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

At  the  command  left  (or  right)  the  pivot  prepares  to  slacken,  and  the 
marching  flank  to  augment  the  gait.  At  the  command  turn,  the  squad 
turns  to  the  left,  or  to  the  right,  the  pivot  slackening  its  gait,  in  de- 
scribing an  arc  of  five  paces  ;  the  marching  flank  augments  its  gait,  and 
regulates  itself  by  the  pivot  during  the  whole  of  the  wheel.  At  the 
command  forward,  all  the  troopers  straighten  their  horses,  the  pivot 
and  marching  flank  move  forward  in  the  gait  at  which  the  squad  was 
originally  marching. 


SABKE     EXERCISE. 

439.  For  instruction  in  the  use  of  the  sabre  the  men  of  the  squad  are 
on  foot,  and  in  one  rank  about  nine  feet  apart. 

The  right  side  of  the  gripe  is  the  side  opposite  the  guard. 

The  left  aide  of  the  gripe  is  the  side  next  the  guard. 

Tierce  is  the  position  in  which  the  edge  of  the  blade  is  turned  toward 
the  right,  the  nails  downward. 

Quarte  is  the  position  in  which  the  edge  of  the  blade  is  turned  to  the 
left,  the  nails  upward. 

440.  The  squad  being  in  position,  the  instructor  commands : 

Draw — Sabre. 

Tivo  times  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  which  is  draiv,  turn 
the  head  slightly  to  the  left,  without  changing  the  position  of  the  body  ; 
unhook  the  sabre  with  the  left  hand,  and  bring  the  hilt  to  the  front; 
run  the  right  wrist  through  the  sword-knot;  seize  the  gripe,  draw  the 
blade  six  inches  out  of  the  scabbard,  pressing  the  scabbard  against  the 
thigh  with  the  left  hand,  which  secures  it  at  the  upper  ring,  and  turn 
the  head  to  the  front. 

Second  motion.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  sabre, 
draw  the  sabre  quickly,  raising  the  arm  to  the  full  extent ;  make  a 
slight  pause,  carry  the  blade  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  back  of  it 
against  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  the  wrist  resting  against  the  hip, 
the  little  finger  on  the  outside  of  the  gripe.  This  position  is  the  same 
when  mounted,  except  that  the  wrist  then  naturally  falls  upon  the 
thigh. 

24 


282  MANUAL     FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

Present — Sabre. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

441.  At  the  last  part  of  the  command,  which  is  sabre,  carry  the  sabre 
to  the  front,  the  arm  half  extended,  the  thumb  opposite  to,  and  six 
inches  from  the  neck,  the  blade  perpendicular,  the  edge  to  the  left,  the 
thumb  extended  on  the  right  side  of  the  gripe,  the  little  finger  by  the 
side  of  the  others. 

Carry — Sabre. 

442.  At  the  command  sabre,  carry  the  back  of  the  blade  against  the 
hollow  of  the  shoulder,  the  wrist  resting  against  the  hip,  the  little  fin- 
ger on  the  outside  of  the  gripe. 

Return — Sabre. 

Two  timcn  and  two  motions. 

443.  First  motimi.  At  the  command  return,  execute  the  first  motion 
of  return  sabre. 

Second  motion.  At  the  command  sabre,  carry  the  wrist  opposite  to, 
and  six  inches  from,  the  left  shoulder  j  lower  the  blade  and  pass  it 
across  and  along  the  left  arm,  the  point  to  the  rear  ;  turn  the  head 
slightly  to  the  left,  fixing  the  eyes  on  the  opening  of  the  scabbard; 
return  the  blade,  free  the  wrist  from  the  sword-knot,  turn  the  head  to 
tho  front,  drop  the  right  hand  to  the  side,  and  hook  up  the  sabre  with 
the  hilt  to  the  rear. 

Guard. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

444.  At  the  command  yuard,  carry  the  right  foot  two  feet  from  the 
left,  the  heels  on  the  same  line  ;  place  the  left  hand,  closed,  six  inches 
from  the  body,  and  as  high  as  the  elbow,  the  fingers  toward  the  body, 
the  little  finger  nearer  than  the  thumb  {jiosition  of  the  bridle  hand);  at 
the  same  time,  place  the  right  hand  in  tierce  at  the  height  of,  and  three 

nches  from  the  left  hand,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the 
gripe,  the  little  finger  by  the  side  of  the  others,  the  point  of  the  sabre 
inclined  to  the  left,  and  two  feet  higher  than  the  hand. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER.  283 

In  tierce — Point. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

445.  Fii-fit  motion.  At  the  command  i^oint,  raise  the  hand  in  tierce 
as  high  as  the  eyes,  throw  back  the  right  shoulder,  carrying  the  elbow 
to  the  rear,  the  point  of  the  sabre  to  the  front,  the  edge  upward. 

Second  motion.  Thrust  to  the  front,  extending  the  arm  to  the  full 
length. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  quarte — Point. 

One  time  nnd  three  motions. 

446.  First  motion.  At  the  command  jyoint,  lower  the  hand  in  quarte 
near  the  right  hip,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  right  side  of  the  gripe, 
the  point  a  little  higher  than  the  wrist. 

Second  motion.  Thrust  to  the  front,  extending  the  arm  the  full 
length. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Left — Point. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

447.  First  motion.  At  the  corama.nd  point,  turn  the  head  to  the  left, 
draw  back  the  hand  in  tierce  toward  the  right,  at  the  height  of  the 
neck,  the  edge  upward,  the  point  directed  to  the  left. 

Second  motion.  Thrust  to  the  left,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full 
length. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Right — Point. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

448.  First  motion.  At  the  command  ji:)o?/t^,  turn  the  head  to  the  right, 
carry  the  hand  in  quarte  near  the  left  breast,  the  edge  upward,  the 
point  directed  to  the  right. 

Second  motion  Thrust  to  the  right,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full 
length. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 


284         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS     AND    MILITIA. 

Rear — Point. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

449.  First  motion.  At  the  command  point,  turn  the  head  to  the  right 
and  rear,  bring  the  hand  in  quarte  opposite  to  the  right  shoulder,  the 
arm  half  extended,  the  blade  horizontal,  the  point  to  the  rear,  the  edge 
upward. 

Second  motion.  Thrust  to  the  rear,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full 
length. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry.,  left — Point. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

450.  First  motion.  At  the  command  point,  turn  the  head  to  the  left, 
raise  the  hand  in  tierce  near  the  neck,  the  point  of  the  sabre  directed 
to  the  height  of  the  breast  of  a  man  on  foot. 

Second  motion.     Thrust  down  in  tierce. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry.,  right — Point. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

451.  First  motion.  At  the  command  j^oint,  turn  the  head  to  the  right, 
carry  the  hand  in  quarte  near  the  right  hip,  the  point  of  the  sabre  di- 
rected at  the  height  of  the  breast  of  a  man  on  foot. 

Second  motion.     Thrust  in  quarte. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Fiymt — Cut. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

452.  First  motion.  At  the  command  cut,  raise  the  sabre,  the  ai'm  half 
extended,  the  hand  a  little  above  the  head,  the  edge  upward,  the  point 
to  the  i-ear,  and  higher  than  the  hand. 

Second  motion.  Cut,  extending  the  arm  to  its  full  length,  and  give  a 
back-handed  cut,  horizontally  to  the  rear. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  285 

Right  in  tierce  and  carte — Cut. 

One  time  and  four  motions. 

453.  Firit  motion.  At  the  command  cut,  execute  the  first  motion  of 
right  cut. 

Second  motion.     Execute  the  second  motion  of  right  cut. 
Third  motion.     Turn  the  hand  in  quarte,  and  cut  horizontally. 
Fourth  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Left  in  quarte  and  tierce — Cut. 

One  time  and  four  motions. 

'J 54.  Firnt  motion.  At  the  command  cut,  execute  the  first  motion  of 
teft  cut. 

Second  motion.     Execute  the  second  motion  of  left  cut. 
Third  motion.     Turn  the  hand  in  tierce,  and  cut  horizontally. 
Fourth  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  tierce — Parry. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

455.  First  motion.  At  the  command  jiarry,  carry  the  hand  quickly 
a  little  to  the  front  and  right,  the  nails  downward,  without  moving  the 
elbow;  the  point  inclined  to  the  front,  as  high  as  the  eyes,  and  in  the 
direction  of  the  right  shoulder :  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the 
gripe,  and  pressing  against  the  guard. 

Second  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  quarte — Parry. 

One  time  and  two   motions. 

456.  First  motion.  At  the  command  ^ja/vy,  turn  the  hand  and  carry 
it  quickly  to  the  front  and  left,  the  nails  upward,  the  edge  to  the  left, 
the  point  inclined  to  the  front,  as  high  as  the  eyes,  and  in  the  direction 
of  the  left  shoulder;  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  and 
resting  against  the  guard. 

Second  motion.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

For  the  head — Parry. 

One   time  and  tu^o    motioits. 

457.  First  viofion     At  the  command  parry,  raise   the   sabre   quickly 


286         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 

above  the  bead,  the  arm  neirly  extended,  the  edge  upward,  the  point 
to  the  left,  and  about  six  int  !  es  higher  Ihan  the  head.  The  hand  is 
carried  moi-e  or  less  to  the  right,  left,  or  rear,  according  to  the  position 
of  the  adversary. 

Second  motion.  Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry^  right — Parry. 

One   time  and    three  motions. 

458.  First  motion.  At  the  command  2^C''>'>'y>  turn  the  head  to  the 
right,  throwing  back  the  right  shoulder,  raise  the  sabre,  the  arm 
extended  to  the  right,  and  rear,  the  point  upward,  the  hand  in  tierce, 
the  thumb   extended  on  the  back  of  the  gripe,  the  edge  to  the  left. 

Second  motion.  Describe  a  circle  quickly  on  the  right,  from  rear  to 
front,  the  arm  extended;  turn  aside  the  bayonet  with  the  back  of  the 
blade,  bringing  the  hand  as  high  as  the  head,  the  point  upward. 

Third  motion.    Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

Against  infantry^  left — Parry. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

459.  First  motion.  At  the  command  parry,  turn  the  head  to  the  left, 
raise  the  sabre,  the  arm  extended  to  the  front  and  right,  the  point 
upward,  the  hand  in  tierce,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  back  of  the 
gripe,  the  back  of  the  blade  to  the  front. 

Second  motion.  Describe  a  circle  quickly  on  the  left,  from  front  to 
rear  along  the  horse's  neck,  the  arm  extended ;  turn  aside  the  bayonet 
with  the  back  of  the  blade,  bringing  the  hand,  still  in  tierce,  above  the 
left  shoulder. 

Third  motion.     Return  to  the  position  of  guard. 

460.  When  the  troopers  begin  to  execute  the  above  cuts,  thrusts  and 
parries  correctly,  the  instructor  requires  them  to  make  the  application 
of  them  by  combined  motions,  as  follows  : 

In  tierce — Point  and  front  cut. 

In  quarte — Point  anp  fuont  cut. 

Left — Point  and  cut, 

Iii(jht — Point  and  cut. 

Bear — Point  and  cut. 

Against  infantry,  right — PoiNT  AND  CUT. 

Against  infantry,  left — Point  and  cut. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    TROOPER.  -J87 

Inspection  of  Sabre. 

One  iiinc  and  seven  motions. 

461.  First  motion.   At  the  word  sahre,  execute  the  first  time  of  drain 

Hahre. 

Second  motion.  Execute  the  second  time  of  drarr  sabre. 

Third  motion.    Present  sabre. 

Fourth  motion.   Turn  the  wrist  inward  to  show  the  other  side  of  the 

blade. 

Fifth  motion.    Carry  the  sabre  to   the   shoulder,  as  is  prescribed  in 

carry  sabre. 

Sixth  motion.    Execute  the  first  time  of  return  sabre. 
Seventh  motion.   Execute  the  second  time  of  return  sabre. 


MANUAL   FOR   A   BREECH-LOADING    CARBINE,    OR   RIFLE, 
THE  TROOPERS  MOUNTED. 

462.  Whenever  the  troopers  are  not  exercising  with  the  carbine,  or 
rifle,  it  is  slung  by  a  belt,  which  passes  from  the  left  shoulder  to  the 
right  side,  the  muzzle  down,  and  in  such  a  position  that  it  may  be 
seized  by  the  right  hand  at  any  moment,  and  at  the  same  time  be 
entirely  out  of  the  way  when  the  trooper  is  exercising  with  the  sabre 
or  pistol. 

The  trooper,  in  conducting  his  horse  to  the  ground  before  mounting, 
has  the  carbine  passed  over  the  right  shoulder,  the  muzzle  in  the  air. 

After  mounting,  let  the  carbine  fall  by  the  side. 

At  the  first  command  to  dismount,  seize  the  carbine  with  the  right 
hand  a  little  above  the  band,  and  pass  it  over  the  right  shoulder,  the 
muzzle  in  the  air. 

463.  The  trooper  being  mounted,  with  the  carbine  hanging  by  his 
right  side,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Advance — Carbine  (or  Rifle). 

Tico  times. 

At  the  command  advance,  seize  the  carbine  at  the  small  of  the  stock 
with  the  right  hand.  At  the  command  carbine  (or  rijie),  elevate  it,  and 
place  the  butt  upon  the  thigh,  the  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  eye  and 
opposite  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  lock  to  the  front. 


288         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

To  load. 

464.  The  squad  being  in  the  position  of  advance  carbine  (or  rijie), 
the  instructor  commands  :  Load  in  four  times. 

1.  Load. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  At  this  command,  place  the  carbine  (or  rifle)  in  the 
left  hand,  which  seizes  it  a  little  below  the  band,  the  thumb  along  the 
stock,  the  muzzle  elevated,  at  the  height  of,  and  opposite  to  the  left 
shoulder,  with  the  right  hand  move  back  the  catch,  and  seize  the  lever 
with  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers. 

Second  motion.  Spring  open  the  chamber,  and  carry  the  hand  to  the 
cartridge  box  and  open  it. 

2.  Charge — Cartridge. 

One  time  and   two  motions. 

First  motion.  At  the  command  cartridge,  draw  a  cartridge  and  insert 
it  in  the  barrel,  and  seize  the  lever  with  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers. 

Second  motion.  Draw  back  the  lever  to  its  place,  half-cock,  remove 
the  old  cap,  and  carry  the  hand  to  the  cap  box,  and  open  it. 

3.  Prime. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

At  the  command  prime,  place  a  cap  on  the  nipple,  press  it  down  with 
the  thumb,  let  down  the  cock,  and  seize  the  piece  by  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand. 

4.  Advance — Carbine. 

One  time. 
As  prescribed  above. 

To  fire. 

465.  The  squad  being  in  the  position  of  advance  carbine,  the  instructor 
commands : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  289 

Ready. 

One  time. 
At  this  command  let  fall  the  carbine  in  the  left  hand  as  in  the  first 
motion  of  the  load,  cock  it,  and  return  to  the  position  of  advance  carbine. 

Aim. 

One  time. 
At  this  command,  carrj'  the  butt  to  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand, 
support  the  piece  with  the  thumb  and  first  finger  of  the  left  hand,  a 
little  below  the  barrel,  the  others  closed  in  order  to  hold  the  reins  with- 
out slacking  them ;  place  the  face  against  the  stock,  shut  the  left  eye, 
direct  the  right  along  the  barrel  to  aim,-  and  place  the  forefinger  of  the 
right  hand  on  the  trigger. 

Fire. 

At  the  command   fire,  pass  the  forefinger  against  the  trigger  and  fire, 
without  lowering  the  head  or  turning  it,  and  remain  in  this  position. 
If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  wishes  to  load,  he  commands: 

Load. 

At   the  command  load,  bring  down  the  carbine  to  the  first  motion 
of  load;  load  at  will,  and  take  the  position  of  advance  carbine. 

If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  does  not  wish  to  load,  he  commands : 

A  dvance — Carbine. 

Which  is  done  as  already  prescribed. 
^To  drop  the  carbine,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Drop — Carbine. 

One  time. 

At  the  command  carbine,  lower  the  muzzle  of  the  carbine,  and  cast 
the  butt  to  the  rear. 

Inspection  of  arms. 
466.  The  instructor  commands  : 

Inspection — Carbine. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  ^notion.     At  the  command  carbine,  take  the  position  of  advance 
carbine. 

Second  motion.     Drop  the  carbine. 
•2b 


290  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


MANUAL     FOR     COLT'S     REYOLVERS.i 

467.  The  troopers  being  mounted,  the  pistol  either  in  the  holster 
or  pistol  case,  the  instructor  commands: 

Draw — PiSTOL.2 

Troo  times  and  tiro  motions. 

First  motion.  At  the  first  command,  unbuckle  the  holster  or  pistol 
case,  seize  the  pistol  by  the  handle  with  the  right  hand,  holding  it 
between  the  palm  of  the  hand  and  the  three  last  fingers,  the  forefinger 
resting  on  the  guard,  the  thumb  on  the  handle. 

Second  motion.  At  the  socorid  command,  draw  out  the  pistol  and 
elevate  it,  the  guard  to  tlie  front;  the  wrist  at  the  height  of,  and 
six  inches  from  the  right  shoulder. 

Load  in  six  times. 
1.  Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Place  the  pistol  in  the  bridle  hand,  holding  it  by  the  handle  in  front 
of  the  body,  the  hammer  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  and  turned 
to  the  left,  the  muzzle  jjointing  upward.  Carry  the  right  hand  to  the 
cartridge  box  and  open  it. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  the  first  two  fingers,  and 
carry  it  to  the  mouth. 

3.   Tear — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Bite  oflf  the  end  and  carry  the  cartridge  opposite  the  chamber  nearest 
the  lever,  or,  if  the  cartridge  is  furnished  from  the  manufactory  with 
the  pistol,  seize  the  end  of  the  cord,  which  projects  from  one  end 
of  the  cartridge,  between  the  teeth,  tear  open  the  outer  case,  and 
take  out  the  cartridge. 

1  With  very  little  modification  this  manual  will  serve  for  Colt's  Carbine  and 
Rifle. 

2  If  it  is  a  carbine  or  nfle.  the  command  will  be.  odtHince — carbine  (or  rijlf^.. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOPER.  291 

4.   Charge — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  txco  motions. 

First  motion.  Empt}'  the  powder  into  the  chamber,  and  insert  the 
ball,  pressing  it  down  as  far  as  possible  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger ;  or,  if  it  be  a  cartridge  furnished  from  the  manufactory,  simply 
insert  it  in  the  chamber,  pressing  the  ball  down  as  before. 

Second  motioji.  Turn  the  pistol  with  the  left  hand,  bringing  the 
hammer  toward  the  body,  and  cock  it  with  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand. 

5.  Ram — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  Seize  the  lever  with  the  catch,  with  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  the  right  hand  ram  down  the  ball,  and  replace  the  lever. 

Second  motion.  Let  down  the  hammer  with  the  right  hand,  and 
carry  the  hand  to  the  cartridge  box. 

Repeat  as  above  directed  until  all  the  chambers  are  loaded. 

6.  Prime. 

One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

First  motion.  Lower  the  muzzle  toward  the  right  side  by  turning 
the  wrist  of  the  bridle  hand,  the  muzzle  pointing  downward,  the  ham- 
mer to  the  front,  the  left  wrist  resting  against  the  stomach ;  half-cock 
the  pistol  with  the  left  thumb ;  turn  the  cylinder  with  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  the  right  hand  until  it  clicks.  Take  a  cap  and  press  it  on 
the  cone.  Turn  the  cylinder  agaiu  until  it  clicks,  and  so  on  until  all 
the  cones  arc  capped,  the  hammer  resting  on  the  safety  notch. 

Second  motion.  Seize  the  pistol  at  the  handle  with  the  right  hand, 
and  bring  it  to  the  position  of  draw  pistol. 

468.  The  instructor  wishing  to  fire,  will  command : 

Ready. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion.  Place  the  pistol  in  the  left  hand,  the  little  finger 
touching  the  key,  the  barrel  nearly  vertical,  the  muzzle  a  little  inclined 
to  the  left  and  front,  the  guard  to  the  front,  the  thumb  on  the  head  of 
the  hammer,  the  forefinger  along  the  guard. 

Second  motion.  Cock  the  pistol,  and  bring  it  to  the  position  of  draw 
pistol. 


292         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Aim. 

One  time. 

Lower  the  pisfol,  the  arm  half  extended,  and  place  the  forefinger 
lightly  on  the  trigger,  the  muzzle  directed  to  the  height  of  a  man's 
waist. 

Fire. 

One  time. 

Press  the  forefinger  steadily  on  the  trigger,  fire,  and  retake  the 
position  of  dratc  pistol. 

The  men  being  at  a  ready,  and  the  instructor  witching  to  fire  all  the 
barrels  in  quick  succession,  will  give  intimation  to  that  eflFect,  and 
command : 

1.  Aim.     2.  Fire. 

The  men  will  aim  and  fire,  come  to  the  first  position  of  ready,  cock, 
aim,  fire  again,  and  so  continue  until  the  pistol  is  discharged;  then 
take  the  position  of  draw  pistol. 

469.  The  instructor  wishing  to  reload,  commands  : 

Load  at  will. 
Load. 

One  time. 

Load  the  six  chambers  as  heretofore  directed,  and  take  the  position 
of  draw  pistol. 

Return — Pistol. 

One  time. 

Lower  the  muzzle  of  the  pistol,  and  return  it  to  the  muzzle,  or 
pistol-case. 


SCHOOL    OF    TUE    TROOP.  293 


Article    YIII.    ' 
SCHOOL     OF     THE     TEOOP. 

470.  The  troopers  being  suflSciently  instructed  to  manage  their 
horses  and  use  their  arms,  are  passed  to  the  school  of  the  troop.  The 
object  of  this  school  is  to  teach  them  to  exercise  properly  together, 
and  to  execute  all  the  movements  of  the  troop,  whether  in  column  of 
platoons  or  in  line. 

Each  movement,  after  having  been  correctly  executed  b}^  the  right, 
is  repeated  by  the  left. 

When  the  movements  are  all  executed  at  the  walk,  the  instructor 
causes  them  to  be  repeated  at  the  trot,  requiring  always  the  same 
simultaiieiius  action  and  the  same  precision.  This  gradation  is  also 
followed  for  exercise  at  the  gallop ;  but  the  horses  should  not  be 
kept  long  at  this  gait. 

The  troop  is  composed  of  all  the  troopers  of  a  single  company: 
for  exercising  it  is  formed  in  two  ranks,  and  divided  into  two  pla- 
toons.*  The  troop  is  one  half  of  the  squadron,  and  when  it  forms 
a  part  of  the  squadron  constituting  one  of  the  divisions,  the  officers 
and  non-commissioned  officers  are  posted  as  directed  for  a  squadron 
in  line;  but  where  the  troop  acts  singly,  as  will  be  supposed  in  the 
school  of  the  troop,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  take  posts 
as  directed  for  a  company  acting  singly.     (See  No.  17.) 

For  the  school  of  the  troop,  the  troopers  are  under  arms;  if  armed 
with  the  carbine  it  is  always  slung. 

471.  The  troop  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  open  order,  the  trooper 
and  file-closers  at  the  head  of  their  horses,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
mounted,  facing  the  platoon,  at  ten  paces  from  and  opposite  the  centre, 
the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  RigJil — Dress.     3.  Front. 

He  then  commands  : 

/n  each  platoon — and  in  each  rank — Count  hy  fours. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  count  off  in  both  platoons  at  once, 
commencing  on  the  right  of  each  rank. 

1  If  the  platoons  are  small,  or  if  the  instructor  wishes  to  exercise  the  tioop  in 
the  school  of  the  squadron,  he  may  cause  it  to  be  formed  in  a  single  rank. 


294         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  captain  then  gives  the  command  mount,  which  is  executed  as 
explained  in  the  school  of  the  trooper,  No.  407. 

At  the  command  form — Ra\ks,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  move  forward, 
face  to  the  front  by  tuniintj  to  the  right  about,  "and  place  themselves 
before  the  centre  of  their  platoon,  the  croup  of  their  horses  one  pace 
from  the  head  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank.  The  file-closers  follow 
the  rear  rank. 

General  principles  of  alignment. 

472.  The  troopers,  in  order  to  align  themselves,  should  regulate 
their  shoulders  upon  those  of  the  men  on  the  side  of  the  alignment,  and 
fix  the  eyes  upon  the  line  of  the  eyes,  so  as  to  perceive  the  breast 
of  the  second  trooper  of  their  rank  on  the  alignment  j  for  this  pur- 
pose, they  should  turn  the  head,  remaining  square  upon  their  horses, 
feel  lightly  the  boot  of  the  man  on  the  side  of  the  alignment,  and 
keep  the  horses  straight  ia  the  ranks,  that  all  may  have  a  parallel 
direction. 

The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank,  independently  of  the  alignment, 
should  be  exactly  behind  tlieir  file-leaders,  and  in  the  same  direction, 
taking  care  to  preserve  the  distance  of  two  feet  from  head  to  croup. 

Successive  alignment  of  tlie  files  in  the  troop. 

473.  The  two  files  of  the  right  (or  left)  are  moved  forward  ten 
paces,  and  aligned  parallel  to  the  troop  by  the  commands: 

1.   Two  files  from   the   right    (or   lef)^   forward.     2.  M.\RCH. 
3.  Halt.     4.  Right  (or  left) — Dress.     5.  Front. 

The  captain  then  commands : 

1.  By  file  right  (or  left) — Dress.     2.  Front. 

At  the  command  dress,  each  file  moves  forward  in  succession  and 
steadily,  the  troopers  turning  the  head  to  the  right,  and  taking  the 
last  steps  slowly,  in  order  to  arrive  abreast  of  the  files  already  formed 
without  passing  beyond  the  alignment,  observing  then  to  halt,  give 
the  hand,  relax  the  legs,  and  keep  the  head  to  the  right  until  the 
command  front. 

Each  file  executes  the  same  movement  when  the  preceding  one  has 
arrived  on  the  base  of  alignment,  so  that  only  one  file  may  align  itself 
at  the  same  time. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front.  The  captain 
gives  the  eomnjand  front  when  the  last  file  is  aligned. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  295 

When  the  troopers  execute  these  alignments,  this  instruction  is 
repeated  in  giving  the  two  files  of  the  right  an  oblique  direction. 
For  this  purpose,  the  two  files  having  marched  forward  four  paces,  as 
has  been  prescribed,  execute  a  half  turn  to  the  I'iyht  (or  left),  and 
march  six  paces  in  this  new  direction. 

The  troop  being  unmasked,  the  remainder  of  the  movement  is 
executed  by  the  same  command  and  on  the  same  principles  as  in  the 
last  case ;  each  file,  as  it  arrives  nearly  opposite  the  jjlace  it  is  to 
occupy,  executes  a  linlf  turn  to  the  riijht  (or  left),  so  that,  having  left 
the  troop  by  one  straight  line,  it  arrives  upon  the  new  alignment  by 
another. 

474.  The  two  files  of  the  right,  or  left,  are  made  to  rein  back  four 
paces,  and  align  themselves  parallel  to  the  troop,  and  opposite  the 
place  they  occupied  in  it,  by  the  commands : 

1.    Tuoo    files    from   rir/ht    (or    leff),    backward.       2.    March. 
3.  Halt.     4.  Right  (or  left)  —  Dress.     5.  Front. 

The  captain  then  commands  : 

1.  By  Jile,  right  (or  left),  backward — Dress.     2.  Front. 

At  the  command  dresx,  each  file  reins  back  in  succession,  keeping 
perfectly  straight,  the  troopers  turning  the  head  to  the  right,  and 
passing  a  little  to  the  rear  of  the  files  already  formed,  in  order  to  come 
up  abreast  of  them  by  a  movement  to  the  front,  which  renders  the 
alignment  more  easy. 

The  troopers  of  the  front  rank  rein  back  slowly,  those  of  the  rear 
rank  regulate  themselves  upon  their  file-closers,  preserving  always 
their  proper  distance. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

475.  The  alignment  is  then  executed  by  twos  (or  by  fours).  For 
this  purpose,  the  two  or  four  files  of  the  right  move  forward  as  has 
been  prescribed,  and  the  captain  commands : 

1.  By  twos  (or  by  fours),   right  (or  left)  —  Dress.     2.  Front. 

At  the  command  dress,  the  files  align  themselves  in  succession  by 
twos  (or  by  fours),  following  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  align- 
ment by  file,  being  particular  to  set  out  and  arrive  upon  the  align- 
ment together. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 


296  MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 


Alignment  of  the  troop. 

476.   The  captain,   after  having  placed  the  right  guide,  so  that  no 
trooper  will  be  compelled  to  rein  back,  commands : 

1.  Right — Dress.     2.  Front. 

At    the    command  rir/ht — dress,    all    the   troopers,  align    themselves 
steadily  but  promptly  to  the  right. 

The  troop  being  aligned,  the  captain  commands:  ' 

Front. 

The  captain  causes  three  difTerent  alignments  to  be  executed  by  the 
left,  following  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means. 


To  open  and  close  the  ranks. 

477.  To  open  the  ranks,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Rear  rank,  open  order.     2.  March.     3.  Pdght — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  remains  immovable,  the  rear 
rank  reins  back  six  paces,  each  trooper  preserving  the  direction  of  his 
file-leader.  The  file-closers  reign  back  until  they  are  six  paces  from 
the  rear  rank.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  move  forward  six  paces,  and  face 
the  centime  of  the  platoons  by  tnniiug  to  the  left  about. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  the  rear  rank  dresses  to  the  right.  At 
the  command  front,  the  head  is  turned  to  the  front. 

To  close  the  ranks,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Rear  rank,  close  order.     2.  March.     3.  Right — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  closes  upon  the  front  to  the 
distance  of  two  feet,  each  trooper  taking  care  to  preserve  the  direction 
of  his  file-leader.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  resume  their  places  by  a  turn 
about  to  the  right,  and  the  file-closers  take  their  proper  distances  from 
the  rear  rank. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  the  troop  is  aligned  to  the  right.  At  the 
command  front,  the  head  is  turned  to  the  front. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  297 

To  reign  hack  the  troop. 

478.  The  troop  being  at  a  halt,  the  captain  commands : 

1.    Troop,  backward.     2.   Guide  right  (or  left).     3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  reign  back  at  once,  regula- 
ting their  movements  by  those  of  the  right  guide. 

When  the  troop  has  reigned  back  some  stops,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.   Troop.     2.  Halt.     3.  Eight  (or  left) — Dress.     4.  Front. 

To  break  the  troop  by  fie. 

479.  The  troop  being  in  line,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  file.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  by  file,  the  troopers  of  the  first  file  (front  and  rear 
rank)  gather  their  horses,  and  the  others  in  succession  as  soon  as  the 
file  on  the  right  is  in  motion.  The  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  followed 
by  the  first  sergeant,  or  guide  of  the  right,  posts  himself  in  front  of 
the  first  file. 

At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  the  guide,  and  the 
first  file  on  the  right  moves  straight  to  the  front;  they  are  followed  by 
the  next  file;  each  file' moves  off  when  the  haunches  of  the  horses  of 
the  rear  rank  man,  which  has  broken,  arrives  at  the  head  of  the  horses 
of  the  front  rank;  each  file  marches  six  paces  straight  to  the  front, 
makes  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right,  and  marches  in  the  new  direction 
until  it  reaches  its  place  in  the  column,  when  it  makes  a  quarter  turn  to 
the  left. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  breaks  with  his  first  file,  keeping 
abreast  with,  and  one  pace  to  his  left.  The  first  lieutenant  is  in  the 
rank  of  file-closers,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  column,  and  the  second 
sei'geant  or  guide  of  the  left,  follows  the  last  file. 

To  break  the  platoon  by  the  left,  the  movement  is  executed  following 
the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  : 

1.  By  the  left  file.     2.  March. 

Direct  march  in  column  by  file. 

480.  The  troopers  should  keep  their  horses  straight,  and  march  at  a 
free  and  equal  gait;  they  should  keep  their  eyes  to  the  front,  and  con- 


298  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

tinue  in  the  direction  of  the  column,  so  as  to  perceive  only  the  trooper 
who  marches  before  them,  to  march  at  the  same  gait  with  him,  preserv- 
ing always  the  distance  of  two  feet  from  head  to  croup,  that  his  own 
horse  may  not  tread  upon  the  heels  of  the  horse  in  front.  This  dis- 
tance should  be  recovered  gradually  when  lost. 

The  column  changes  direction  to  the  right  or  left,  as  prescribed,  No. 
410. 

To  halt  the  column,  the  captain  commands: 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  stop  together  in  the  direction  of 
their  file-leaders  and  at  their  distances,  taking  care  to  prevent  the  horses 
from  stepping  back. 

To  move  off,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Column^  forward.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  move  off  together. 

The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  captain  wishes  to  commence  the 
move  at  a  trot,  he  conforms  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  423.  In  this 
case  the  chiefs  of  platoons  move  off  promptly  at  the  trot,  that  the  troop- 
ers in  their  rear  may  take  this  gait  at  once,  without  marching  first  at  a 
walk. 

Individual  oblique  march. 

481.  The  column  marching  b^'  file,  the  captain  commands  : 

1,  Left  (or  right)  oblique.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  executes  a  quarter  turn  to  the 
left,  and  moves  forward  in  his  new  direction,  all  following  parallel  lines, 
and  regulating  themselves  toward  the  right,  in  order  to  keep  on  the 
same  line  and  to  preserve  their  distances  on  that  side. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction  the  captain  commands: 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  return  to  the  original  direction,  by  a 
quarter  turn  to  the  right,  in  advancing,  and  move  forward  in  the  direc- 
tion of  their  file-leaders. 

The  troop  marching  in  column  by  fie.,  to  form  it  to  the  front,  to 
the  left,  or  on  right,  into  line. 

482.  The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  it  to  the  front  into 
line,  the  captain  commands  : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  299 


1.  Front  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Right — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  fii'st  file  continues  to  march  :<traight  for- 
ward. The  others  immediately  commence  obliquing  to  the  left,  march 
in  their  new  direction,  aiKl  each  file  makes  a  quarter  turn  to  the  riyht  on 
coming  opposite  to  the  place  he  is  to  occupy  in  the  troop.  When  the 
first  file  has  marched  twenty  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  com- 
mands halt.  At  this  command,  it  halts  square  to  the  front,  the  guide 
on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  man;  the  other  files  come  up  in  succes- 
sion on  the  left  of  the  first,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

The  captain  gives  the  command  riyht — dress,  immediately  after  halt, 
and  commands  front  when  the  last  file  is  aligned. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is  executed  follow- 
ing the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means. 

483.  The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  it  into  line  upon 
its  left  flank,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Left  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Left — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  turns  to  the  left,  and  moves 
straight  forward;  the  other  files  continue  to  march  on,  and  at  two 
paces  before  arriving  opposite  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in  the  troop, 
they  turn  in  succession  to  the  left. 

When  the  first  file  has  marched  twenty  paces,  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon  commands  half.  At  this  command  it  halts — the  guide  on 
the  right  of  the  front  rank  man  ;  the  other  files  come  up  and  form 
in  succession  on  the  left  of  the  first,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the  front.  The  captain 
gives  the  command  right — dress,  immediately  after  halt,  and  front 
when  the  last  file  is  aligned. 

A  column  marching  left  in  front  is  formed  into  line  on  the  right 
flank  by  inverse  means. 

484.  The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  in  line  upon 
the  prolongation  aud  in  advance  of  its  right  flank,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  On  right  into  line.    2.  March.    3.  Right — Dress.    4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  turns  to  the  right  and  moves 
straight  forward;  the  other  files  continue  to  march  on,  and  each  turns 
in  succession  to  the  right,  at  one  pace  beyond  the  point  where  the 
one  preceding  turned. 

When  the  first  file  has  marched  twenty  paces,  the  chief  of  the  first 


300  MAXUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

platoon  commands  halt.  At  this  command  it  halts;  the  guide  taking 
his  place  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  the  other  files  come  up  and 
form  in  succession  on  the  left  of  the  first,  and  dress  to  the  right. 

A  column  marching  left  in  front,  is  formed  into  line  on  the  left 
by  inverse  means. 

To  break  the  troops  hy  twos  or  hy  fours. 
485.  The  troop  being  in  line,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  By  twos  (or  by  fours).     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  places  himself  in 
front  of  the  two  or  four  files  of  the  right;  the  right  guide  places  him- 
self on  his  right.  At  the  command  murch,  the  first  two  or  four  files  of 
the  right  move  straight  to  the  front;  they  are  followed  by  the  other 
files,  who  move  ofi"  when  the  haunches  of  the  horses  of  the  rear  rank 
are  on  a  line  with  the  heads  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank.  These 
files  march  straight  forward  six  paces,  execute  a  quarter  tarn  to  the 
riyht  by  troopers,  and  march  in  this  direction  until  they  meet  the 
column,  when  they  take  their  places  in  it  by  making  a  quarter  tarn 
to  the  left. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platotm  breaks  with  the  first  two  or  four  files 
of  his  platoon,  keeping  abreast  with  them  and  at  one  pace  from  the 
flank  of  the  column  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  each  rank  of  two  or  four 
preserving  between  them  the  distance  of  two  feet. 

The  captain  assures  himself  that  the  ofiicers,  the  file-closers,  and 
guide  are  properly  placed. 

The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  first  rank  of  twos  (or  fours)  is  guide  of 
the  column ;  he  keeps  his  eyes  to  the  front,  moves  straight  forward,  and 
marches  so  that  the  troopers  of  his  rank  may  be  at  one  pace  from  the 
croup  of  the  horse  of  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon.  The  trooper  on  the 
left  of  each  of  the  other  ranks,  who  is  guide  of  his  rank,  preserves  the 
head  direct,  and  keeps  at  the  distance  of  two  feet  from  his  file-leader, 
and  in  the  same  direction  ;  the  other  troopers  of  each  rank  look  occa- 
sionally toward  the  guide,  in  order  to  align  themselves  and  regulate 
their  march  upon  him.  They  feel  the  boot  lightly  toward  that  side, 
and  yield  to  all  pressure  coming  from  it.  When  the  march  is  by  fours, 
they  resist  all  pressure  coming  from  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

The  column  marching  by  twos  or  by  fours,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Trot.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  take  the  trot,  taking  care  not  to 
fret  their  horses. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  301 

When  the  column  has  marched  a  sufficient  distance  at  the  trot,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Walk.     2.  March. 

^486.  The  column  marching  in  column  of  twos  or  fours,  right  in  front, 
to  change  direction,  the  captaiu  commands: 

Head  of  the  column  to  the  left  (or  right'). 
At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands: 

1.  Left — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

At  the  command  loft,  the  left  trooper,  who  is  pivot,  prepares  to  turn 
at  the  same  gait,  the  trooper  of  the  opjiosite  side  to  lengthen  his. 

At  the  command  turn,  the  first  rank  of  twos  or  fours  turns  to  the 
left.  The  pivot  turns  without  changing  his  gait,  describing  an  arc  of 
a  circle  of  fire  paces.  The  trooper  on  the  opposite  side  turns  in  length- 
ening the  gait;  the  other  troopers  turn  the  head  toward  the  marching 
flank,  to  regulate  their  rate  of  march,  feeling  lightly  the  boot  on  the 
side  of  the  pivot.  At  the  command  forward,  the  troopers  who  had 
increased  the  gait,  resume  the  precise  pace  at  which  they  were  before 
moving,  and  the  head  of  the  column  marches  straight  forward  in  the 
new  direction.  Each  rank  executes  the  same  movement,  on  arriving 
upon  the  ground  where  the  first  has  turned. 

The  column  marching  by  twos  or  by  fours,  the  captain  halts  it,  as 
prescribed,  school  of  the  trooper. 

To  recommence  the  march,  he  commands: 

1.   Column.,  forward.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

487.  The  column  marching  by  twos  or  by  fours,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  oblique.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  each  trooper  executes  a  quarter  turn  to  the 
left.  The  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  first  rank,  who  is  guide  of  the 
column,  moves  straight  forward  in  the  new  direction,  and  parallel  to 
the  chief  of  the  first  platoon.  The  trooper  on  the  left  of  each  of  the 
other  ranks,  who  is  guide  of  his  rank,  moves  forward  also  in  the  new 
direction,  observing  the  guide  of  the  column  so  as  to  keep  on  the  same 
line,  and  in  a  parallel  direction  with  him. 

The  other  troopers  move  forward,  looking  occasionally  to  the  left,  so 
as  to  align  themselves   upon   their  guide.     Each  one  places  the  left 


302  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

knee  behind    the   right  l^nee  of  the  man  on  the  left,  and  the  head  of 
his  horse  opposite  the  lower  part  of  the  neck  of  the  horse  on  his  left. 
To  return  to  the  primitive  direction,  the  captain  commands  : 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  return  to  the  original  direction,  by 
a  quarter   turn   to  the  right. 

The  troop  mar  chin  rj  in  column  hy  tivos  or  hy  fours.,  to  form  it  to 
the  front.,  to  the  left.,  or  on  right  into  line. 

488.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  twos  or  by  fours,  right  in 
front,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Front  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Right — Dress.    4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  (or  four)  files  continue  to 
march  straight  forward;  when  they  have  marched  thirty  paces,  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands: 

Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  first  two  (or  four)  files  halt  square  to  the 
front,  the  guide  of  the  right  returns  to  the  right  of  the  troop.  All 
the  other  files  of  twos  or  fours  oblique  to  the  left,  march  in  this 
direction,  and  come  up  in  succession  by  a  quarter  turn  to  the  right 
on  coming  opposite  their  places,  and  without  command  of  the  chiefs  of 
platoon. 

The  captain,  who  moves  to  the  right  flank  after  the  command  march, 
commands  the  alignment  when  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  com- 
mands halt. 

As  soon  as  the  chiefs  of  platoon  arrive  upon  the  line,  they  place 
themselves  at  the  centre  of  their  platoons  and  align  themselves.  The 
guide  of  the  left  returns  to  the  left  of  the  troop,  when  the  last  two  (or 
four)  files  arrive  upon  the  line.  The  first  lieutenant  superintends  the 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank,  and  then  takes  his  post  in  rear  of  the 
centre. 

489.  The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  it  into  line  on  its 
left  flank,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Left  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Right — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  four  leading  files  turn  to  the  left  and 
move  straight  forward;  when  they  have  marched  thirty  paces,  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  303 


Halt. 

At  this  command,  the  two  (or  four)  leadinc:  files  halt,  and  the  guide 
placoi?  himself  on  the  right  of  the  troop.  All  the  other  files  continue 
to  marcli  on.  and  at  three  paces  hefore  arriving  opposite  the  place  they 
are  to  occupy  in  the  troop,  turn  in  succession  to  the  left,  without  the 
command  of  the  chiefs  of  platoon. 

The  captains,  the  first  lieutenant,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the 
guide  of  the  left,  conform  exactly  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  front 
into  line. 

490  The  column  marching  right  in  front,  to  form  line  upon  the 
prolongation  and  in  advance  of  its  right  flank,  the  captain  commands: 

1.   On   the  right  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Right — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  innrch,  the  four  leading  files  turn  to  the  right,  and 
march  straight  forward;  when  they  have  marched  thirty-  paces,  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  halt. 

At  this  command,  the  four  leading  files  halt,  and  the  right  guide 
takes  his  place  on  the  right  of  the  troop.  All  the  other  files  continue 
to  march  forward,  each  turning  to  the  right  in  succession,  and  without 
the  commands  of  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  at  the  distance  three  paces 
beyond  the  point  where  the  preceding  rank  has  turned,  forming  to  the 
left,  and  upon  the  alignment  of  the  first. 

The  captain,  the  first  lieutenant,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  left 
guide,  conform  exactly  to   what  is  prescribed  for  the  front  into  line. 

491.  The  troop  is  broken  by  the  left,  at  the  commands  : 

1.  By  twos  (or  by  fours)  from  the  left.     2.  March.     3.   Guide 

righ  t. 

The  column  is  exercised  at  the  march  in  column,  the  changes  of 
direction  and  the  individual  oblique  marches.  It  is  also  exercised 
at  the  different  formations,  which  are  executed,  following  the  same 
principles,  but  by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  Front  [right  or 
left)  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Left — Dress.     4.  Front. 

492.  When  the  troop  has  acquired  precision  and  regularity  in  the 
formations  at  the  ditfercnt  gaits,  the  captain  exercises  it  in  breaking 
by  fours  from  a  halt  at  tlte  trot,  and  at  the  galloj). 

To  form  the  troop  to  the  left  in  one  rank. 

493.  The  troop  being  formed  into  two  ranks,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 


304  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

1.  Left  into  single  rank.     2.  March.     3.  Front.      4.   Halt. 
5.  RigJit — Dress.     6.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  moves  forward  six  paces, 
dressing  by  the  right;  the  trooper  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  turns  to 
the  Uft  and  moves  forward;  he  is  followed  by  all  the  other  troopers  of 
that  rank,  who  executes  the  same  movement  in  succession. 

At  the  command  front,  the  troopers  of  the  left  of  the  rear  rank 
turn  to  the  right,  and  the  other  troopers  in  succession,  when  they 
have  arrived  nearly  opposite  the  place  they  are  to  occupy  in  the 
rank. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  trooper  on  the  left  halts,  and  so  do  the 
others  in  succession,  on  arriving  abreast  of  him. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  all  the  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  dress 
to  the  right. 

At  the  command //'ojtf,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

To  form  the  troop  to  the  right  in  two  ranks. 

494.  The  troop  being  in  one  rank,  the  captain  designates  the  trooper 
who  is  to  be  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  also  the  one  to  be  the  right 
of  the  rear  rank,  and  commands  : 

1.  Right   into  two  ranks.      2.  March.      3.  Right — Dress. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  moves  forward  six  paces, 
dressing  by  the  right;  the  trooper  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  turns 
to  the  right  as  soon  as  the  front  rank  has  passed,  and  moves  forward 
obliquely  to  the  right ;  when  he  is  nearly  in  rear  of  the  trooper  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank,  he  fronts  by  turning  to  the  left.  All  the  other 
troopers  execute  the  same  movement  in  succession,  placing  themselves 
exactly  behind  their  file-leaders  and  at  their  proper  distances. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  all  the  troopers  align  themselves 
to  the  right. 

At  the  command/ron(,  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

To  form  twos  and  fours  at  the  same  gait. 

495.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  file,  right  in  front,  to  form 
twos  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  twos.     2.  March. 

At   the  command  march,  the  first  file  continues  to  march  on,  and 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  305* 

halts  when  it  has  marched  ten  paces;  the  second  file  ohliques  to  tho 
left,  and  comes  up  abreast  of  the  first;  on  arriving  there,  it  halts  and 
dresses  to  the  right.  All  the  other  files  continue  to  march  straight 
forward,  Nos.  2  and  4  executing  their  movement  in  the  same  manner 
but  in  succession,  and  when  Nos.  1  aixl  3,  upon  which  they  should 
form,  have  nearly  arrived  at  their  proper  distance,  and  are  about 
to  halt. 

496.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in  front,  to  form 
fours  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  fours.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  continue  to  march  on,  and 
halt  when  they  have  gone  ten  paces :  the  two  following  files  oblique  to 
the  left,  and  come  up  abreast  of  the  first  two  ;  on  arriving  there,  they 
halt,  and  dress  to  the  right.  All  the  other  files  continue  to  march 
straight  forward,  Nos.  2  and  4  of  each  rank  executing  their  movement 
in  the  same  manner,  when  Nos.  1  and  2,  upon  which  they  should  form, 
have  nearly  arrived  at  their  jiroper  distance,  and  are  about  to  halt. 

497.  When  a  column  is  at  a  trot,  the  leading  file  or  files  pass  to  the 
u-alk ;  at  the  command  march,  the  others  continue  to  march  at  the  trot, 
until  they  have  arrived  abreast  of  those  on  which  they  should  form  : 
then  they  pass  to  the  walk. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  (/alloj),  the  leading  file  or  files  pass  to  the 
trot  at  the  command  march;  the  others  continue  a^  the  galloj),  until 
they  have  executed  their  formation,  when  they  pass  to  the  trot. 

When  twos  or  fours  arc  formed  at  the  trot,  or  at  the  gallop,  the  guide 
is  announced  as  soon  as  the  first  files  have  doubled.  In  executing  the 
same  movements  at  a  walk,  as  the  head  of  column  halts,  the  guide  is 
not  announced. 

In  a  column  marching  left  in  front,  these  movements  are  executed 
by  inverse  means. 

To  break  hy  twos  and  by  file  at  the  same  gait. 

498.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  fours,  right  in  front,  to 
break  by  twos  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  twos.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  command   by  tiros,   all   the   troopers  prepare   to  halt  except 

Nos.  1  and  2  of  the  leading  files.    At  the  command  march,  Nos.  1  and  2 

of  the  leading  files  continue  to  march  at  the  same  gait;  all  the  others 

halt.     Files  Nos.  3  and  4  of  the  leading  rank  oblique  to   the  right  at 

20 


306  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  moment  they  are  passed  by  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  the  rear 
rank  of  Nos.  1  and  2,  and  place  themselves  in  column  behind  them. 

Each  rank  of  four  executes  the  same  movement  in  regular  suc- 
cession, files  Nos.  1  and  2  breaking  as  soon  as  files  Nos.  3  and  4  of  the 
rank  which  precedes  them  have  commenced  obnquing,  in  order  to 
enter  the  column. 

Files  Nos.  1  and  2,  which  break  to  the  front,  regulate  their  gait  so 
as  to  preserve  their  distances  ,•  and  files  Nos.  3  and  4  keep  their  horses 
straight,  so  as  not  to  constrain  the  movements  of  files  Nos.  1  and  2. 

499.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in  front,  to  break 
by  file,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  file.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  file,  all  the  troopers  prepare  to  halt  except  the 
right  file  of  the  leading  rank  of  twos.  At  the  command  march,  the 
right  file  of  the  leading  rank  of  twos  continues  to  march  at  the  same 
gait;  all  the  others  halt.  The  left  file  of  this  same  rank  obliqyies  to 
the  right  the  moment  it  is  passed  by  the  croup  of  the  rear  rank  horse 
of  No.  1,  and  places  himself  in  column  behind  the  first  file.  The 
guide  of  the  right  takes  his  place  in  rear  of  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon. 

Each  rank  of  twos  executes  the  same  movement  in  succession,  files 
No?.  1  and  2  breaking  as  soon  as  files  Nos.  2  and  4,  who  precede  them, 
have  commenced  obliquing,  in  order  to  enter  the  column. 

Files  1  and  3,  which  break  to  the  front,  regulate  their  gait  so  as  to 
haA^e  their  distances.  Files  2  and  4  keep  their  horses  straight,  so  as 
not  to  constrain  the  movements  of  files  1  and  3. 

AVhen  the  column  is  at  a  trot,  the  right  files  of  the  leading  rank 
continue  at  that  gait,  all  the  others  take  the  walk  at  the  command 
march,  and  resume  the  trot  on  entering  the  column.  When  the  column 
is  at  the  (jallop,  the  files  which  are  to  break  take  the  trot  at  the  com- 
mand march,  and  resume  the  gallop  on  entering  the  column. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is  executed  by 
inverse  means  at  the  command  :  1.  By  twos  {or  hy  file),  from  the  left, 
march.  If  the  column  marches  by  twos,  the  guide  is  indicated  to  the 
right,  immediately  after  the  command  march. 

To  form  twos  and  fours  in  doubling  the  gait. 

500.  The  troop  marching  by  file  right  in  front,  to  form  twos,  the 
captain  commands  : 


SCirOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  307 

I 

1.  Form  twos,  trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  form  fiios,  trot,  all  the  troopers  prepare  to  trot,  ex- 
cept the  leading  file,  and  take  it  at  the  command  march.  The  second 
file -obliques  to  the  left,  and  comes  up  abreast  of  the  first,  and  on 
arriving  there  tstkes  the  walk;  all  the  other  files  continue  to  move  at 
the  trot.  Files  4  and  2  execute  the  movement  in  the  same  manner, 
when  3  and  1,  upon  Avhom  they  are  to  form,  have  nearly  arrived  at 
their  distance,  and  are  about  to  pass  to  the  walk. 

501.  The  troop  marching  in  column  of  twos,  right  in  front,  to  form 
fours,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  fours,  trot.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  command  form  fortrs,  trot,  all  the  troopers,  except  the  two 
leading  files,  prepare  to  take  the  trot,  and  take  it  at  the  command  march. 
The  two  files  following  the  first  two  oblique  to  the  left,  and  come  up 
abreast  of  these  two,  resuming  the  walk  as  they  do  so  ;  all  the  other 
files  continue  to  march  forward  at  the  trot.  Files  1  and  2  of  the  next 
file  of  fours  close  up  upon  the  leading  file,  and  pass  to  the  walk,  when 
Nos.  2  and  4  of  the  same  file  oblique  to  the  left,  and  come  up  abreast 
of  them,  taking  the  iralk,  and  so  do  all  the  remaining  files  in  succes- 
sion. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  the  movement  is  executed  on  the 
same  principles.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers,  except  the 
files  at  the  head  of  the  column,  pass  to  the  gallop,  and  resume  the  trot 
when  the  formation  is  executed. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is  executed  by 
inverse  means. 

To  break  hy  twos  and  by  file  in  doubling  the  gait. 

502.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  fours,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  twos,  trot.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  command  6y  ticon,  trot,  files  1  and  2  of  the  leading  rank  of 
fours  prepare  to  trot.  At  the  command  march,  they  commence  the  trot; 
all  the  other  files  continue  to  march  at  the  iralk;  files  3  and  4  take  the 
trot  in  succession  and  oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  place  themselves 
in  column  l)chind  files  1  and  2. 

The  movement  being  terminated  the  captain  orders  the  icalk. 


308  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUxNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

503.  The  troop  marching  in  column  of  twos,  right  in  front,  to  break 
by  file  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  file,  trot.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  hy  file,  trot,  the  right  file  of  the  leading  rank  of 
twos  prepares  to  trot.  At  the  command  march,  it  commences  the  trot, 
all  the  other  files  continue  at  the  ivalk;  files  2  and  4  assume  the  trot  in 
succession  and  oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  place  themselves  behind 
files  1  and  3  in  the  column.  < 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  break  in  doubling  the  gait,  the 
captain  commands  :  1.  By  twos  {or  by  file),  galloj).     2.  March. 

504.  The  column  marching  left  in  front,  the  movement  is  executed 
by  inverse  means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  By  twos  (or  hy  fi.le),frovi  the 
left.  2.  March.  If  the  column  is  to  march  by  twos,  the  guide  is  in- 
dicated to  the  right,  immediately  after  the  command  march. 

SABRE    EXERCISE. 

505.  The  captain  causes  the  sabre  exercise  to  be  executed  at  a  halt; 
for  this  purpose  he  opens  the  ranks,  and  commands  : 

1.  By  the  left  for  right).,  open  files.     2.    March.     3.  Right  (or 
lefit) — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  trooper  of  each  rank  moves  for- 
ward six  paces;  the  one  on  tbe  left  of  each -rank  turns  to  the  Ze/V,  and 
moves  forward,-  he  is  followed  by  all  the  other  troopers  of  his  rank,  who 
execute  the  same  movement  as  soon  as  they  have  the  necessary  space  to 
put  themselves  in  file  at  their  proper  distances.  The  second  trooper 
from  the  right  of  each  rank,  after  having  marched  three  paces,  turns 
and  dresses  to  the  right ;  each  of  the  other  troopers  look  occasionally  to 
the  rear,  and  perform  the  same  movement  in  succession  when  at  three 
paces  from  the  one  who  follows  him,  and  dresses  upon  those  already 
formed;  the  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  place  themselves  exactly  behind 
their  file-leaders. 

After  the  command  march,  the  captain  moves  to  the  right  of  the  front 
rank,  and  when  the  second  trooper  from  the  I'ight  has  turned  to  the 
front,  he  commands,  right — dress.  After  having  rectified  the  alignment 
and  the  distances  in  the  two  ranks,  he  commands,  front. 

506.   When  the  captain  wishes  to  re-form  the  troop,  he  commands: 

1.   To  the  right  for  left),  close  files.     2.  March. 
At  the  command  march,  the  right  trooper  of  each  rank  moves  forward 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  309 

six  paces;  all  the  other  tx-oopers  execute  a  turn  to  the  right,  and  move 
forward. 

Each  trooper,  on  arriving  within  two  paces  of  the  place  he  is  to 
occupy  in  line,  turns  to  the  left,  and  places  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
troopers  already  formed,  and  dresses  to  the  right.  The  captain  closes 
the  ranks  as  soon  as  they  are  formed. 

JDirecl  march  of  the  troop  in  line. 

507.  The  most  important  point  in  the  direct  march  being  to  keep  the 
horses  straight  in  the  ranks,  it  is  indispensable  that  the  trooper  should 
preserve  the  head  direct. 

To  keep  themselves  aligned,  the  trooi)ers  should  feel  lightl}'^  the  boot 
of  the  man  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  march  at  an  equal  gait.  They 
sliould  3'icld  to  all  pressure  coming  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and 
resist  that  coming  from  the  opposite  side. 

The  guide  should  always  march  at  a  free  and  steady  gait,  and  change 
it  with  steadiness  in  order  to  avoid  irrcgularitj'  in  the  ranks.  If  the 
troopers  are  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  alignment,  too  near  or  too  far  from 
the  man  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  they  move  from  or  approach  him 
gradually.  When  the  guide  feels  himself  thrown  out  of  his  direction, 
he  extends  his  arm  to  the  front  to  indicate  that  there  is  too  much 
pressure  toward  him.  When  the  troopers  carry  the  hand  toward  the 
opposite  side,  give  a  glance  to  the  guide,  and  straighten  their  horses  as 
soon  as  the  guide  is  relieved. 

The  guide  should  be  alternately  to  the  right  and  to  the  left,  that  the 
troopers  may  acquire  the  habit  of  dressing  equally  well  toward  either 
direction. 

50S.  To  march  the  troop  forward,  the  captain  commands : 

1.   Troop,  forward.     2.   Guide  right  (or  lef).     3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  troopers  move  straight  forward,  at 
the  same  gait  with  the  men  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

The  troopers  march  straight  forward,  feeling  the  l)oot  lightly  on  the 
side  toward  the  guide. 

To  halt  the  troop,  the  captain  commands: 

1.   Troop.     2.  Halt.     3.  Rir/ht  (or  left) — Dress.     4.  Front. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  stop. 

At  the  command  ri(/ht — drcs-fi.  they  align  themselves,  and  at  the  com- 
mand  front,  turn  the  head  to  (be  front. 

After  the  troop  has  been  exercised  sufficiently  in  the  direct  march,  at 


310  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

the  irnlk,  it  will  be  practiced  at  the  trot,  and  afterward  at  the  gallo]); 
wheu  marching  fr^  a  gallop,  the  troop  should  habitually  pass  to  the  trot 
and  the  icalk,  before  being-  halted:  but  when  the  troopers  are  masters  of 
their  horses  it  may  be  halted  from  the  galloj). 

Countei'march. 

509.  The  troop  having  arrived  at  the  extremity  of  the  ground,  in 
order  to  change  the  direction,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.   Countermarch,  hy  the  right  Jiank.      2.   By  file  to  the  right. 

3.  March. 

At  the  command  countermarch,  hi/  the  right  flank,  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon turn  to  the  right,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  placing  himself  in 
front  of  his  first  file  ;  the  file-closers  turn  tv  the  left,  and  pass  to  the 
left  of  the  troop,  ])lacing  themselves  abreast  of  the  rear  rank. 

The  guide  of  the  right  places  himself  promptly  behind  the  guide  of 
the  left,  facing  to  the  rear,  the  croup  of  his  horse  at  six  paces  from  the 
rear  rank. 

At  the  command  march,  the  trooper  on  the  right  of  each  rank  turns 
to  the  right,  the  rear  rank  man  joining  the  front  rank  man;  they  then 
wheel  together  to  the  right,  the  latter  lengthening  his  gait  a  little  ; 
they  pass  very  near  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  the  rear  rank,  and  are 
followed  by  the  other  troopers,  who  execute  the  same  movement  in  suc- 
cession, taking  care  to  pass  over  the  same  ground. 

When  the  first  file  is  two  paces  from  the  right  guide,  who  indicates 
the  place  where  it  is  to  form,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Front.     2.  Halt.     3.  Eight — Dress.     4.  Front. 

The  file-closers  follow  the  movement,  and  resume  their  places  as  they 
arrive  at  them. 

Afler  having  commanded  march,  the  captain  moves  rapidly  to  the 
flank  by  which  the  movement  is  executed,  in  order  to  direct  the  head 
of  the  column,  and  to  re-form  the  troop  to  the  rear  upon  a  line  parallel 
to  the  one  it  at  first  occupied. 

The  troo[)  being  aligned,  the  captain  commands, /ro»f.  At  this  com- 
mand, the  chiefs  of  platoon  face  to  the  front,  by  a  turn  to  the  left. 

The  countermarch  should  generally  be  executed  at  the  trot.  For  this 
purpose,  after  the  second  command,  the  captain  indicates  the  gait. 

This  movement  is  executed  ))y  the  left  flank,  by  inverse  means. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  311 

The  troop  being  in  line,  (o  form  if  in  column  loith  distance. 

510.  The  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  right  wheel.     S.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  left  file  of  each  platoon  prepares  to  step  off 
promptly,  and  the  pivot  to  turn  upon  its  own  j^round. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes  its  wheel  to  the  right, 
following  the  principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  the  marching 
flanks  taking  care  to  step  off  and  wheel  together. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  marching  flanks  and  all  the  troopers  halt 
at  the  same  instant,  those  of  the  rear  rank  resuming  their  places  behind 
their  file-leaders. 

The  captain  commands  halt,  when  the  platoons  have  nearly  com- 
pleted the  wheels. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon,  without  leaving  their  platoons,  observe  that 
the  movement  is  correctly  executed. 

During  the  movement,  the  guide  of  the  left  passes  as  file-closer  be- 
hind the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  second  platoon. 

To  march  in  column  with  distance. 

511.  In  this  order  of  column  the  guides  should  preserve  between 
them  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  their  platoons,  and  regulate  their 
gait  upon  that  of  the  preceding  guide. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon  are  responsible  for  the  preservation  of  the  dis- 
tance, which  should  be  half  of  the  front  of  the  platoon,  assuming  it  to 
contain  twelve  files,  measured  from  the  croup  of  the  horses  of  the  rear 
rank  of  the  leading  platoon,  to  the  head  of  the  horses  of  the  front  rank 
of  the  rear  platoon. 

The  troop  being  in  open  column,  right  in  front,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.   Column,  forward.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  both  platoons  put  themselves  in  motion  at 
the  same  time. 

Before  the  column  commences  the  march,  the  captain  gives  the  guide 
of  the  first  platoon  a  point  of  direction. 

Changes  of  direction. 

512.  In  the  open  column,  the  changes  of  direction  are  executed  by 
successive  wheels  on  a  movable  pivot,  so  that  the  march  of  the  column 


312  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

may  not  be  retarded.       The  arc  of   a  circle  described  by  the  pivots 
should  be  five  j^accs. 

The  column  being  in  march,  to   change   the  direction,  the  captain 

commands  : 

■>■ 
Head  of  column  to  the  left  or  half-left  (or  to  the  right  or  half-right). 

At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  :  1.  Left 
— Turn.  2.  Forward  ;  which  is  executed  on  the  principles  of  the 
wheel  upon  a  movable  pivot. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  gives  the  same  commands  in  time 
for  his  platoon  to  turn  upon  the  same  ground. 

In  this  change  of  direction  while  marching,  the  guide  of  the  right, 
at  the  command  head  of  column  to  the  left,  moves  rapidly  to  the  side  of 
the  pivot,  and  places  himself  so  that'the  head  of  his  horse  will  mark 
the  centre  point  of  the  arc  described  by  the  pivot. 

Both  platoons  commence  their  wheel  at  two  and  a  half  paces  before 
arriving  abreast  of  the  head  of  the  horse  of  the  guide  of  the  right,  so 
q,s  to  prevent  the  column  from  being  thrown  out.  The  guide  resumes 
his  place  when  the  second  platoon  has  completed  its  wheel. 

Individual  oblique  march. 

513.  The  troop  marching  in  column,  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to 
cause  it  to  gain  ground  toward  one  of  the  flanks,  without  changing  the 
front  of  the  columns,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  oblique.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troopers  all  execute,  at  the  same  time,  a 
quarter  turn  to  the  right,  so  that  the  head  of  each  horse  may  be  opposite 
the  extremity  of  the  neck  of  the  horse  on  his  right,  and  that  the  right 
knee  of  each  trooper  may  1ft  in  rear  of  the  left  knee  of  the  trooper  on 
his  right.  This  first  movement  being  executed,  the  troopers  move  for- 
ward in  the  new  direction,  regulating  themselves  upon  the  guide. 

The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  pays  attention  to  march  on  the  same 
line,  to  preserve  his  distance,  and  to  keep  in  a  direction  exactly  parallel 
to  that  of  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon. 

To  resume  the  primitive  direction,  the  captain  commands  : 

Forward. 

At  this  command,  the  troopers  straighten  their  horses,  and  move 
forward,  regulating  themselves  upon  the  guide. 

In   the  oblique  march,  the  guide  is  always  on  the  obliquing  side. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    TROOP.  318 

without  being  indioated  :  and  after  the  commund  fonrard,  the  guide 
retarus,  without  indication,  to  the  side  on  which  it  was  before  the 
oblique. 

To  break  hij  fours,  hy  twos  and  hj  file;  to  form  twos,  fours  and 
platoons  at  the  same  gait. 

614.  The  troop  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to 
break  by  fours  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Bf/ fours.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  by  fours,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
this  officer  places  himself  in  front  of  the  first  four  files  on  the  right  ; 
the  right  guide  places  himself  on  his  right. 

At  the  command  march,  which  is  also  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
platoon,  this  platoon  breaks  by  fours  as  prescribed,  No.  485,  and  the 
chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands  halt. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands  by  fours,  in  sufficient 
time  to  command  march,  the  moment  the  last  four  files  of  the 
first  platoon  commence  the  oblique  movement  in  order  to  enter  the 
column. 

515.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  fours,  right  in  front,  to  break 
by  twos,  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  twos.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

The  chiefs  of  platoon  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  in  order  to  break 
bj'^  fours,  and  give  the  commands,  halt;  and  then,  1.  B>/  twos.  2. 
March;  so  as  to  cause  no  confusion  in  the  column. 

516.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in  front,  to  break 
by  file  at  the  same  gait,  the  cai:)tain  commands : 

1.  By  file.     2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  breaking  by  twos,  the  guide  of 
the  right  placing  himself  behind  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon. 

517.  The  troop,  marching  in  column  with  distance,  at  the  trot, 
right  in  front,  to  break  by  fours  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain 
commands  : 

1.  By  fours.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  this 
ofiicer  and  the  guide  of  the  right  place  themselves  as  prescribed.  No. 
514,  and  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands,  walk. 
27 


'614  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  both  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the 
first  platoon  breaks  bj^  fours,  as  prescribed,  No.  514,  and  the  second 
platoon  takes  the  walk. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands,  by  fours,  trot,  in 
suflScient  time  to  command  march,  when  the  last  four  files  of  the 
first  platoon  commence  the  oblique  movement  in  order  to  enter  the 
column. 

The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  breaking  by  twos,  and  by 
file. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  gallop,  these  movements  are  executed  on 
the  principles  just  prescribed,  the  whole  column  except  the  first  four 
files,  passing  to  the  trot,  and  resuming  the  gallop,  as  the  files  break  in 
order  to  enter  the  column. 

518.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  file,  right  in  front,  to  form 
twos  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Form,  twos.     2.  March. 

At  the  commands  form  tu-os,  and  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon,  this  platoon  executes  the  movement  as  prescribed.  No. 
500;  the  guide  of  the  right  moves  to  the  right  of  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon,  who  commands  hah,  after  having  marched  ten  paces. 
The  other  platoon  continues  to  march  by  file,  and  executes  the  move- 
ment at  the  command  of  its  chief,  who  does  not  command  march, 
until  the  first  files  of  his  platoon  has  arrived  at  its  proper  dis- 
tance. 

519.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  twos,  right  in  front,  to  form 
fours,  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Form  fours.     2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  is  prescribed  for  forming  twos. 

520.  The  troop  marching  in  column  of  fours,  right  in  front,  to  form 
platoons  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Form  platoons.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands, /orm 
platoon. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
the  guide  of  the  right  places  himself  on  the  right  of  this  platoon,  which 
forms  as  \n  front  into  line.  No.  488;  the  chief  of  the  platoon  commands 
halt,  after  having  marched  twenty  paces. 

The  other  platoon  continues  to  march  in  column  by  fours,  and  forms 
at  the  command:  1.  Form  platoon — 'March;  given  by  its  chief  in  suf- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  315 

ficient  time  to  command  halt,  when  the  first  four  files  of  the  platoon 
arrives  at  six  paces  from  the  platoon  which  precedes. 

521.  When  the  column  is  at  the  trof,  the  same  principles  are  con- 
formed to,  except  that  instead  of  halting,  the  first  two  or  four  files  of 
the  first  platoon  pass  to  the  a-nlk,  at  the  command  march  given  by  their 
chief.  The  second  platoon  continues  to  march  at  the  trot,  and  execute 
the  movement  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  two  or  four  files  of  the  platoon 
passing  alsu  to  the  iralk,  at  the  command  march,  given  by  the  chief  of 
the  platoon  when  they  arrive  at  their  proper  distances. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  cjalloj),  to  form  twos,  fours,  etc.,  the  same 
principles  are  observed,  the  first  two  or  four  files  of  each  platoon  pass- 
ing to  the  trot  at  command  march,  given  by  their  chief. 

When  these  formations  are  executed  at  the  trot,  and  at  the  gallop,  the 
guide  is  announced  by  the  captain  as  soon  as  the  first  files  have 
doubled,  or  the  first  platoon  is  formed;  in  the  last  case  only  each 
chief  of  platoon  repeats  the  command  of  the  guide  as  soon  as  his  pla- 
toon is  formed. 


To  break  bi/ fours,  bij  twos,  ayid  by  file  ;  to  form  twos,  fours,  and 
platoons,  in  doubling  the  gait. 

522.  The  trooper  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front, 
to  break  by  fours,  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  fours,  trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  this 
officer  and  the  guide  of  the  right,  place  themselves  as  prescribed,  No. 
514. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
this  platoon  breaks  by  fours,  as  prescribed.  No.  514. 

The  other  platoon  continues  to  march  at  the  icalk ;  its  chief  com- 
mands, by  fours,  trot,  in  sufiicient  time  to  command  march,  the  mo- 
ment the  last  four  files  of  the  first  platoon  commences  the  oblique 
movement  in  order  to  enter  the  column. 

These  principles  are  applicable  to  breaking  by  twos  and  by  file. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  to  bi'cak  at  the  gallop,  the  same  prin- 
ciples are  observed  at  the  commands  : 

1.  By  fours,  gallop.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

523.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  files,  to  form  twos  in  doubling 
the  gait,  the  captain  commande : 


316  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


1.  Form  twos,  trot,     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  commands  form  twos,  trot,  and  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  executes  its  movement  as  prescribed. 
No.  500,  and  the  guide  of  the  right  moves  to  the  right  of  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon. 
•  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands,  trot. 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  him,  the  second  platoon  takes  the 
trot.  He  commands,  form  twos,  in  sufficient  time  to  command  march 
the  moment  the  first  file  of  the  platoon  is  nearly  at  its  proper  distance; 
the  first  file  then  passes  to  the  ir.allc. 

524.  The  troop  marching  in  column  of  twos,  to  form  fours,  in 
doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  fours.,  trot.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  forming  twos. 

525.  The    troop  marching  in    column   by  fours,  to  form  platoon,  in 

doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  commands: 

W 

1.  Form  platoons,  trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands, /ojvh 
platoon,  trot. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands,  trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  officers,  the  first  platoon 
forms  as  prescribed,  No.  520,  and  the  guide  of  the  right  j^laces  himself 
on  the  right  of  this  platoon.  The  second  platoon  takes  the  trot.  The 
chief  of  this  platoon  gives  the  command,  form  twos,  in  sufficient  time 
to  command  march  the  moment  the  first  file  of  his  platoon  is  nearly 
at  its  proper  distance ;  the  first  file  then  passes  to  the  walk. 

526.  The  troop  marching  in  column  by  twos  to  form  fours,  in 
doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  fours,  trot.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  forming  twos. 
627.  The  troop  marching  in   column   by  fours,  to  form  platoons,  in 
doubling  the  gait,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  platoons,  trot.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands,  form 
platoon,  trot. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands,  trot.     At  the  command 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  317 

march,  repeated  by  these  oflBcers,  the  first  platoon  forms  as  prescribed, 
No.  520,  and  the  guide  of  the  right  places  himself  on  the  right  0$.  this 
platoon. 

The  second  platoon  takes  the  trot,  and  forms  at  the  command  for7n 
platoon,  given  by  its  chief  in  sufficient  time  to  command  march,  when 
the  first  four  files  arrive  at  their  proper  distance  from  the  first  platoon; 
then  these  four  files  take  the  walk. 

The  captain  commands  guide  left  when  the  first  platoon  is  formed, 
and  gives  a  point  of  direction. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands  the  guide  as  soon  as  his 
platoon  is  formed. 

When  the  column  is  at  the  trot,  these  formations  are  executed  at  the 
gallop,  following  the  same  principles,  at  the  commands:  1.  Form  ticoa 
or  form  fours,  or  form   2iltttoons,  gallop.     2.  March. 

The  Iroop  niarchimj  in   column  lulth  distance,  to  face  it  in  the 
opposite  direction,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front  again. 

528.  The  troop  marching  in  open  column,  right  in  front,  the  captain 
commands : 

1.  Platoons,  left  about  ivheel.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  trooper  on  the  left  of  each  platoon,  who 
becomes  the  pivot,  prepares  to  halt,  without,  however,  slackening  his 
pace. 

At  the  command  march,  the  pivots  halt,  and  the  marching  flanks 
wheel  at  the  gait  in  which  the  column  was  marching,  regulating  them- 
selves upon  the  outer  flank  of  the  platoon  at  the  head  of  the  column, 
so  as  to  complete  the  first  half  of  the   movement  at  the  same   instant. 

The  movement  being  nearly  finished,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Forward.     2.   Guide  right. 

During  this  movement,  the  guide  of  the  left  places  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  second  platoon;  the  guide  of  the  right  takes  his  place  as 
file-closer  in  rear  of  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the  first  platoon, 
and  the  other  file-closers  pass  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

To  cause  the  troop  to  resume  its  primitive  direction,  the  captain 
commands : 

1.  Platoons,   right   about   ivheel.     2.    March.      3.    Forward. 

4.   Guide  left. 

529.  The  column  being  on  the  march,  to  halt  it,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 


318  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUiNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

^  1.   Column.     2.  Halt.  - 

m 

At  the  first  command,  both  platoons  prepare  to  halt,  and  at  the 
command  halt,  halt  at  the  same  time. 

To  form  line  to  the  left. 

530.  The  troop  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to 
form  it  in  line  on  its  left  flank,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.      2.  March.      8.  Halt.     4.  Right  — 
Djress.     5.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  guide  of  the  right  moves  upon  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  guides  of  the  column,  at  the  distance  of  the  front  of  a 
platoon,  facing  the  side  toward  which  the  line  will  be  formed. 

At  the  command  march,  the  troop  wheels  into  line,  the  trooper  on 
the  left  wing  of  each  platoon  serving  as  pivot,  and  turning  upon  his 
own  ground. 

The  captain  commands  halt  the  moment  the  marching  flanks  have 
nearly  completed  their  movement,  and  then  right — dress. 

At  this  command,  both  jilatoons  align  themselves. 

The  troop  being  aligned,  the  captain  commands,  front. 

During  the  wheel,  the  guide  of  the  left  resumes  his  place  in  line. 

531.  The  formation  of  the  troop  into  a  column  with  distance,  left  in 
front;  the  march  of  this  column;  the  changes  of  direction  in  a  col- 
umn ;  left  in  front ;  etc.,  etc.,  are  executed  upon  the  same  principles  as 
a  column  right  in  front,  but  by  inverse  means. 

To  form  line  to  the  right  hy  inversion. 

532.  The  troop  marching  in  open  column,  right  in  front,  to  form  it 
in  line  upon  its  right  flank  by  inversion,  the  captain  changes  the 
guide  ;  for  this  purpose,  he  commands  : 

Guide  right. 

The  captain  passes  by  the  head  of  the  column  to  the  side  of  the 
new  guides,  rectifies  their  direction,  then  halts  the  column,  and 
commands  : 

"1.  By  inversion,  right  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 
4.  Left  —  Dress.     5.  Front. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  319 

"Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  wheeling  into  line  by  the  left, 
but  by  inverse  means. 

To  put  the  troop  in  column  again,  right  in  front,  the  captain 
commands  :  1.  Platoons,  left  wheel.  2.  March.  3.  Halt  (or  For- 
ward).    4.    Guide  left. 

To  form  on  right  into  line. 

5.33.  The  troop  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to 
form  it  in  line  on  the  prolongation  and  in  advance  of  its  right  flank, 
the  captain  commands  : 

1.    On   right   into  line.      2.  March.       3.    Guide  —  Right. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  right, 
and  at  the  command  march,  he  commands  tarn  ;  the  platoon  turns  to 
the  right  and  moves  forward :  when  it  has  marched  thirty  paces,  its 
chief  commands  halt,  and  then  riijlit  —  dresn. 

The  second  platoon  continues. to  march  forward,  without  approaching 
the  line;  as  soon  as  it  arrives  abreast  of  the  fourth  tile  from  the  left  of 
the  first  platoon,  its  chief  commands  :  1.  Riijht — Turn.  2.  Forward. 
The  platoon  then  directs  itself  toward  the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in  line, 
and  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  file-closers,  its  chief  commands  halt,  and 
then  left — dress. 

When  the  troop  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands,  front. 

To  form  on  left  into  line  hy  inversion. 

534.  The  troop  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to 
form  it  in  line  upon  the  prolongation  and  in  advance  of  its  left  flank, 
the  captain  commands: 

1.  Bg  inversion  on  left,  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands,  left. 

At  the  command  inarch,  he  commands  tiirn  ;  the  platoon  turns  to  the 
left,  and  moves  forward  at  the  commanid  forward ;  when  it  has  marched 
thirty  paces,  its  chief  commands  halt,  and  then  left — dress. 

The  second  platoon  continues  to  march  forward,  without  approaching 
the  line;  when  it  arrives  abreast  of  the  fourth  file  from  the  right  of  the 
first  platoon,  its  chief  commands:  I.  Left — Turn.  2.  Forward;  this 
platoon  directs  itself  toward  the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in  line,  and  on 


320  MANUxlL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

arriving  abreast  of  the  file-closers,  its  chief  commands  halt,  and  then 
left — dress. 

To  form  front  into  line. 

535.  The  troep  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to  form 
it  in  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Front  into  line.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right.     4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands,  pla- 
toon, forward,  and  the  chief  of  the  second  comvawadiS,  platoon,  left  half 
tvheel. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  officers,  the  first  platoon 
moves  forward ;  its  chief  repeats  the  indication  of  the  guide,  and 
when  it  has  marched  thirty  paces,  he  commands  :  1.  Halt.  2.  Right 
— Dress. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  when  the  left  half  wheel  is  exe- 
cuted, commands  :  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  right ;  and  marches  straight 
forward.  When  the  right  of  his  platoon  arrives  opposite  the  left  of 
the  first  platoon,  he  commands  :  1.  Right  half  wheel.  2.  Forward  : 
and  when  he  arrives  abreast  of  the  file-closer  :  1.  Halt.  2.  Right — 
Dress. 

The  troop  being  aligned,  the  captain  commands,  front. 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  rear  into  column. 

536.  The  troop  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to  form 
line  faced  to  the  rear,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  left  ahout  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Front  into  line. 
4.  March.     5.   Guide  left.     6.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  each  jDlatoon  executes  its  wheel  to  the  left 
about. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  now  in 
front,  when  its  wheel  is  nearly  completed,  commands,  forward,  guide 
left;  and  when  it  has  marched  thirty  paces:  1.  Halt.  2.  Left — 
Dress. 

The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  on  completing  three-fourths  of  his 
wheel,  commands  :  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  left,  and  directs  it  toward 
the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in  line,  conforming  in  other  respects  to  what 
is  prescribed  for  front  info  line,  when  the  column  is  left  in  front. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  821 


To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear  on  the  head  of  the  column. 

537.  The  troop  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to  form 
line  faced  to  the  rear  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  inversion^  front  into  line.     2.  Makcii.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands,  ^>Za- 
toon,  forward ;   and  the  chief  of  the  second,  p/afoo«,  ri(jht  half  icheel. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  officers,  the  movement  is 
executed  as  prescribed  for  front  into  line,  but  by  inverse  means. 

The  captain  without  rectifying  the  alignment,  commands: 

1.  Platoon^  left  about  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt.    4.  Right — 
Dress.     5.  Froj^t. 


Movements  by  fours,  the  troop  being  in  column  with  distance. 

538.  The  troop  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to 
cause  it  to  gain  ground  toward  its  left  flank,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  By  fours,  left  icheel.  2.  March.  3.  Forward.  4.  Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  each  rank  of  fours  executes  its  wheel  to  the 
left,  according  to  the  principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot;  Nos.  4 
turn  upon  themselves,  sustaining  with  the  left  leg  the  haunches  of  their 
horses,  in  order  not  to  constrain  the  movement  of  the  rank  immediate- 
ly behind  them  ;  all  the  troopers  regulate  themselves  toward  the  march- 
ing flanks. 

539.  To  take  a  direction  parallel  to  the  first,  and  return  to  column 
with  distance,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  By  fours,  right  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  same  i^rinciplos,  but  by  inverse  means. 
If,    instead    of   halting,    the    captain   wishes    the   column    to   march 
forward,  he  commands  :     1.  Forward.     2.   Gidde  left. 

540.  The  troop  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  it  is 
caused  to  gain  ground  toward  its  right  flank  by  the  Commands  :     1.   By 

fours,  rUjht  icheel.  2.  March.  3.  Forward.  4.  Guide  left;  and  to 
resume  the  primitive  direction  at  the  commands:  1.  By  four h,  left 
wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt  (or  Forward).     4.   Guide  left. 

541.  The  troop  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to 
cause  it  to  march  to  the  rear,  the  captain  commands  : 


322  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

1.  By  fours,   left  about  wheel.      2.     March.      3.   Forward. 

4.   Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  movement  is  executed  in  each  rank  by 
fours,  so  as  to  throw  the  rear  rank  before  the  front  rank,  and  the  ranks 
of  fours  are  inverted  throughout  the  column. 

If,  instead  of  moving  forward  after  the  wheel  to  the  left  nhout  by 
fours,  the  captain  wishes  to  halt  the  column,  he  commands,  halt. 

To  return  to  the  primitive  direction,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  fours,  right  about  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means. 
If  the  captain  wishes  the  column  to  march  forward,  he  commands : 
1.  Forward.     2.  Guide  left. 

542.  In  all  the  movements  to  the  left  and  to  the  right  bij  fours,  the 
chiefs  of  platoon  move  up  abreast  of  the  first  rank  of  their  platoons, 
on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

The  captain,  the  file-closers,  and  the  guides  of  the  right  and  left, 
will  preserve  their  places  after  the  wheel  to  the  left  or  ricjht  hy  fours 
is  completed,  facing  in  the  new  direction. 

In  the  wheel  to  the  left  or  ri.(jht  about  by  fours,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
march  behind  the  centre  of  their  platoons,  and  the  file-closers  in 
front.  The  guide  of  the  right  is  on  the  left  of  his  platoon,  and  the 
guide  of  the  left  in  front  of  his. 

WHEELINGS. 

543.  During  the  wheel,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  keep  at  the  centre  of 
their  platoons,  and  correctly  aligned,  keeping  their  horses  upon  the 
arc  of  a  cii'cle,  more  or  less  great,  in  proportion  to  their  distance  from 
the  pivot.  The  files  on  the  flanks  of  platoons  close  upon  each  other, 
all  observing  the  progression  of  the  marching  flank,  and  keeping  upon 
the  arcs  they  should  describe. 

To  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

544.  The  troop  is  exercised  in  wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot,  first  at  the 
walk,  then  at  the  trot,  also  at  the  gallop. 

The  troop  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.   Troop  in  circle,  to  the  right.     2,  March. 

Which  is  executed  on  the  principles  prescribed,  Nos,  434  and  435. 


\ 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  323 

To  halt  the  troop  during  the  wheel,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Troop.     2.  Halt.     3.  Left— Dress.    4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  straighten  their 
horses,  and  resume  their  places  behind  their  file-leaders. 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  troopers  halt. 

At  the  third  command,  the  troop  dresses  to  the  left. 

The  troop  being  aligned,  the  captain  commands  front. 

If,  instead  of  halting,  the  captain  wishes  to  resume  the  direct  march, 
he  commands  : 

1.  Forward.     2.    Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  straighten  their 
horses,  and  place  themselves  behind  their  file  leaders,  and  the  whole 
troop  moves  forward  at  the  gait  in  which  it  was  marching  before  the 
wheel. 

545.  The  troop  wheeling  to  the  right,  at  the  walk,  or  at  the  trui,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.   Troop  in  circle,  left  wheel.     2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  Nos.  434  and  435.  • 

546.  The  troop  being  halted,  the  captain  commands : 


(  right  (or  left)  wheel. 


1.  Troop,    -j  right  about  (or  left  about)  wheel.  \-    2.  March. 
( 7ight  half  (or  left  half)  wheel.      ) 
3.   Troop.     4.  Halt.     5.  Left  (or  right)  —  Dress.     G.  Front. 

To  exercise  the  troop  while  marching  at  the  wheels  on  a  fixed  pivot, 
the  captain  commands  : 

(  right  (or  left)  ivheel.  ') 

1.  Troop,    <  right  about  (or  left  about)  wheel.  >    2.  March. 
(  right  half  (or  left  half)  wheel.       ) 
3.  Forward.     4.   Guide  left  (or  guide  right). 

To  wheel  on  a  movable  pivot. 

647.  The   troop  marching  in  line,  to  change  direction  to  the  right, 
the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Right — Turn.     2.  Forward. 

Which  is  executed   as  prescribed,  No.  438,  the  pivot  describing  an 
arc  of  a  circle  of  fifteen  pacen. 


324  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 


Movements  hy  fours. 

548.  The  troop  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground  toward  its 
right  flank,  the  captain  commands: 

\.  By  four s^  right  luheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward.    4.  Guide 

left. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  540.  The  chiefs  of  platoon 
march  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  at  one  pace  from  and  abreast  of  the 
leading  files  of  their  platoon. 

The  guide  of  the  right  marches  in  front  of  the  column,  at  one  pace 
from  the  leading  rank  of  eight,  the  guide  of  the  left  behind  the  last 
rank  of  eight  of  the  second  platoon. 

To  put  the  troop  in  line  again,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  By  fours ^  left  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt.     4.  Right — 
Dress.     5.  Front. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed.  No.  540,  the  guides  resuming  their 
place's  in  line. 


The  troop  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  hy  platoons,  to  the  right, 
and  to  form  it  again  into  line. 

549.  The  trooji  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground  toward 
its  right  flank,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  right  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.   Guide  left. 

Which  is  exercised  as  prescribed.  No.  510.  the  pivots  halting  short, 
and  the  left  file  of  each  platoon  stepping  out  promptly,  so  as  to  arrive 
together  in  column. 

To  put  the  troop  in  line  again,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  left  ivheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.   Guide  right. 

The  marching  flanks  regulate  their  movements  so  as  to  arrive  to- 
gether in  line. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  325 

The  troop  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  to  the  front  by  platoons, 

and  to  re-form  it. 

550.  The  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  platoon,  to  the  front.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon  continues  to  march  forward; 
its  chief  repeats  the  command,  r/nide  left.  At  the  first  command,  the 
chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands  :  Platoon,  right  half  wheel, 
which  is  commenced  at  the  command  march;  when  it  is  executed,  the 
chief  of  the  platoon  commands:  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  hft ;  and 
marches  it  straight  forward.  When  the  left  of  his  platoon  arrives  in 
the  direction  of  the  first  platoon,  he  commands:  1.  Left  half  wheel.  2. 
March.     3.  Forward  ;  in  order  to  take  his  position  in  column. 

The  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  at  the  trot,  and  at 
the  yallop. 

651.  The  troop  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front, 
to  form  it  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  commands : 

1.   Fo7'77i  troop.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

Which  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  front  into  line,  No.  535, 
except  that,  as  the  troop  is  on  the  march,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
does  not  command  platoon  forivard,  or  march,  but  repeats  the  com- 
mand for  the  guide. 

The  troop  marching  at  the  trot,  this  movement  is  executed  on  the 
same  principles,  except  that  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  : 

1.  Walk.  2.  March;  the  guide  of  the  right  moving  up  on  the  line 
with  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  com- 
mands :  1.  Walk.  2.  March  ;  on  arriving  in  line.  When  the  column 
is  at  the  gallop,  the  platoons  take  the  trot  in  succession. 

The  troop  marching  in  line  it  is  broken  by  the  left  by  inverse 
means,  at  the  commands  :  1.  By  the  left,  by  platoons  to  the  front.  2. 
March.    3.    Guide  right. 

The  same  movement  may  be  performed  by  doubling  the  gait,  at  the 
commands :  1.  By  platoons  to  the  front,  trot.  2.  March.  3.  Guide 
left.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands, 
trot ;  the  chief  of  the  second  commands,  platoon,  right  half  wheel, 
trot. 

At  the  command  march,  the  movement  is  executed  as  before. 

The  line  may  be  r^-formed  at  the   commands:   1.  Form  troop,    trot. 

2.  "March.  3.  Guide  right.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the 
second   platoon    commands,   platoon,   left  half   wheel,    trot.     The  first 


326         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

platoon  continues  to  march  at  a  tralk,  and  its  chief  repeats  the  com- 
mand for  the  guide.  When  the  second  platoon  arrives  in  line,  its 
chief  commands :  I.    Wall-..     2.  March. 

THE     CHARGE. 

652.  The  troop  is  exercised  at  the  charge :  1.  In  line.  2.  In  column. 
3.  Ah  foragers. 

The  charge  in  line,  executed  by  the  troop  when  in  line ;  it  should 
be  as  short  as  possible,  so  as  to  arrive  in  good  order,  and  without 
fatiguing  the  horses. 

Tlie  charge  in  column  is  exercised  by  the  troop  when  broken  into 
column  of  platoons  with  distance. 

To  execute  the  charge  as  foragers,  all  the  troopers  of  the  troop 
disperse,  and  direct  themselves  each  upon  the  point  he  wishes  to 
attack,  observing  not  to  lose  sight  of  their  officers,  who  charge  with 
them. 

553.  The  troop  being  in  line,  the  captain  orders  the  sabres  to  be 
drawn,  and  the  platoons  to  charge  in  succession. 

For  this  purpose  the  captain  advances  240  paces  to  the  front,  taking 
a  ti'umpeter  with  him;  and  when  he  wishes  the  movement  to  com- 
mence, he  causes  a  signal  to  be  given. 

The  first  platoon  then  moves  forward  at  the  commands:  1.  Platoon, 
forward.  2.  Guide  right  (or  left).  3.  March  ;  b}^  its  chief.  It  passes, 
in  succession  from  the  walk  to  the  trot,  from  the  trot  to  the  gallop,  and 
from  the  gallop  to  the  charge. 

When  the  platoon  has  moved  some  sixty  paces  at  the  charge,  the 
chief  of  platoon  commands :  1.  Attention.  2.  Platoon.  3.  Halt.  4. 
Right — Dress.     5.  Front. 

At  the  command  attention,  the  troopers  carry  the  sabre  to  the 
shoulder.  At  the  command  platoon,  they  take  the  trot.  At  the  com- 
mand halt,  they  stop.  At  the  command  right — dress,  they  align 
themselves  to  the  right.  At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  to  the 
front. 

The  second  platoon  follows  when  the  first  has  halted. 

554.  To  execute  the  charge  by  the  troop,  the  captain  places  himself 
in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  troop,  and  commands: 

1.   Troop,  forward.     2.  Guide  right  (or  left).     3.  March. 

When  the  troop  has  marched  twenty  paces,  he  comxnands  : 

1.  Trot.     2.  March. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    TROOP.  327 

At  sixty  paces  farther,  he  commands: 

1.  Gallop.     2.  March. 

At  eighty  paces  farther,  he  commands  : 

Charge. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  the  troopers 
of  both  ranks  take  the  position  of  raine,  sahre.  They  give  hand 
and  lengthen  the  gallop,  without  losing  control  of  their  horses  or  dis- 
uniting. 

When  the  troop  has  passed  over  sixty  paces  to  the  charge,  the  cap- 
tain commands : 

1.  4.ttention.     2.   Troop.     3.  Halt.     4.  Right — Dress. 
5.  Front. 

At  the  command  attention,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the 
troopers  prepare  to  slacken  the  pace,  and  carry  the  sabre  to  the 
shoulder. 

At  the  command  troop,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  command  platoon,  and 
the  troojiers  pass  to  the  trot. 

At  the  command  halt,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  troopers 
halt. 

At  the  command  right — dress,  they  align  themselves  to  the  right. 

The  troop  being  aligned,  the  captain  commands //•o>l^ 

When  the  troop  executes  the  charge  cori'ectly,  instead  of  halting 
when  the  charge  is  finished,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Trot.     3.  March. 

555.  At  these  commands,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  troop 
passes  to  (he  trot,  and  he  commands  : 

1.  First  (or  second)  platoon,  as  foragers.     2.  March. 

At  these  commands,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  platoon  designated, 
the  platoon  moves  forward  at  the  gallop,  and  disperses  as  foragers.  A 
trumpeter  follows  the  chief  of  the  platoon. 

The  other  platoon  follows  at  a  trot ;  when  it  has  passed  over  150 
paces,  tlie  captain  causes  the  rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal,  re- 
peated by  the  trumpeter  of  the  platoon  dispersed  as  foragers,  the  latter 
rally  upon  the  other  platoon  by  wheeling  to  the  left  about,  and  resum- 
ing their  places  in  rank  by  the  shortest  line,  the  troopers  entering  the 


328  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

ranks  by  the  rear.     When   three-fourths   of  the  platoon  have  rallied 
and  are  in  line,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Gallop.     3.  March.     4.  Charge. 

The  troop  again  executes  the  charge  in  line ;  the  troopers  who  have 
not  been  able  to  rally,  charge  upon  the  flanks  of  the  troop. 

556.  The  troop  marching  in  column  with  distance,  at  the  trot,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.   To  the  charge.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  galloj]. 

^i  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
this  platoon  commences  the  galloji. 

The  other  platoon  follows  at  a  trot,  taking  the  gallop,  when  the  first 
platoon  has  gotten  50  paces  in  front  of  it. 

When  the  first  platoon  has  passed  over  80  paces  at  the  gallop,  its 
chief  commands  charge.  At  this  command  the  platoon  executes  the 
charge ;  and  when  it  has  passed  over  60  paces,  its  chief  causes  it  to 
pass  to  the  trot,  by  the  commands :     1.  Attention.     2.    Trot.     .3.  March. 

The  other  platoon  pays  attention  to  the  movements  of  the  first,  so  as 
to  change  the  gait  in  time,  and  to  resume  the  ordinary  distance  ;  the 
captain  halts  the  column  when  he. thinks  proper.  These  charges  are 
executed,  each  platoon  in  turn  taking  the  head  of  the  column. 

557.  The  troop  marching  in  column  with  distance,  at  the  trot,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  First  platoon.,  as  foragers.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
this  platoon  disperses  as  foragers.  The  troop  continues  to  march  at 
the  trot,  and  when  it  has  passed  over  100  or  150  paces,  the  captain 
causes  the  rally  to  be  sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  platoon  rallies  and  re-forms  in  the  rear  of  the 
second. 

RALLYING. 

558.  To  give  the  troopers  the  habit  of  rallying  promptly,  after  hav- 
ing been  dispersed  as  foragers,  the  captain  places  the  troop  at  the  ex- 
tremity of  the  drill  ground  ;  and  after  giving  notice  to  the  files  on  the 
flanks  of  platoons,  the  file-closers  and  the  trumpeters,  to  remain  upon 
the  line  with  him,  he  causes  the  disperse  to  be  sounded.     At  this  sig- 


SCHOOL    OP   THE   TROOP.  329 

nal,  the  troopers  disperse  and  charge  as  foragers;  when  they  are  at  the 
distance  of  100  or  200  paces,  the  captain  causes  the  ralhj  to  be  sounded. 

The  captain  causes  the  troopers  to  disperse  without  confusion,  and  in 
rallying,  see  that  they  direct  themselves  to  the  right  and  left  of  the 
troop,  in  order  to  unmask  the  front  of  the  troop,  and  to  re-form  in 
passing  to  the  rear. 

When  the  troopers  rally  without  confusion,  this  movement  is  re- 
peated without  requiring  the  flank  files,  etc.,  to  remain  on  the  line  of 
the  troop.  At  the  signal;  the  troop  disperses  in  every  direction  to  the 
front. 

When  the  troop  is  dispersed,  the  captain  causes  the  rally  to  be 
sounded. 

At  this  signal,  the  officers,  the  non-commissioned  officers,  and  the 
troopers,  rejoin  rapidly;  the  officers  align  themselves  promptly  upon 
the  captain,  and  the  non-commissioned  officers  promptly  mark  the 
flanks  of  the  platoons. 

As  soon  as  the  captain  has  rallied  two-thirds  of  the  troop  he  moves 
forward,  charges  again,  and  halts. 

These  movements  are  first  executed  at  the  trot,  and  then  at  the 
yallop. 

Light  cavalry  should  be  particularly  exercised  in  charging  as  for- 
ay em  and  in  raUying. 

SKIRMISHING. 

559.  The  troop  being  in  line,  the  captain  commands  : 
1.  First  (or  second)  platoon^  as  skirmishers.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the^first  platoon  orders  the  sabres 
to  be  returned,  and  the  arms  to  be  loaded ;  he  then  commands  :  1. 
Platoon,  forward.     2.    Guide  right.      3.    Trot. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  this 
platoon  moves  forward  at  the  trot.  After  marching  100  paces  to  the 
front,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  commands :  1.  Six  files  from  right  (or 
left),  as  sJcirmishers.     2.   March.     3.    Guide  right  (or  left). 

At  the  first  command,  the  senior  file-closer  places  himself  in  front  of 
the  files  of  the  left  who  are  intended  to  support  the  skirmishers,  and  at 
the  command  march,  cause  them  to  halt  and  draw  sabre. 

At  the  command  march,  the  six  files  of  the  right  continue  to  move 

forward;  after  going  ten  paces  they  disperse  as  skirmishers,  extending 

themselves  so  as  to  cover  the  exposed  part  of  a  troop  in  passing  beyond 

each  of  its  flanks.     The   right  trooper  obliques  to   the  right,  the  left 

28 


330  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

trooper  to  the  left.  The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  come  up  as  soon  as 
possible,  abreast  of  the  front  rank,  each  one  placing  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  file-leaders,  and  as  soon  as  they  are  in  line,  all  take  the  posi- 
tion of  advance,  carhine,  or  raise,  pistol.  They  continue  to  march 
until  the  signal  to  halt. 

The  chief  of  platoon  causes  the  halt  to  be  sounded  when  the  skir- 
mishers are  at  100  or  150  paces  from  the  reserve. 

The  troopers  keep  at  five  paces  apart,  regulating  themselves  toward 
the  guide  during  the  time  they  act  as  skirmishers. 

The  chief  of  platoon  places  himself  in  rear  of  the  skirmishers,  in 
order  to  superintend  their  movements. 

When  the  captain  wishes  the  skirmishers  to  re-enter  the  troop,  he 
causes  the  rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal,  the  chief  of  the  platoon 
employed  as  skirmishers  rallies  his  platoon,  and  then  rejoins  the  troop 
at  a  gallop. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON.  331 


Article    IX. 
SCHOOL      OF      THE      SQUADEON. 

560.  The  object  of  the  nchool  of  the  squadron  is  to  instruct  four  pla- 
toons to  execute  together  what  has  been  taught  to  two,  and  to  prepare 
the  squadron  to  perform  what  it  will  be  required  to  do  when  a  part 
of  the  regiment. 

To  make  the  formations  in  line  better  understood,  they  are  executed 
at  first  from  a  halt.  Each  movement,  after  having  been  correctly 
executed  by  the  right,  is  repeated  by  the  left. 

The  troopers  are  made  to  mount  and  dismount  by  the  times,  but 
without  explanation. 

The  captain  commanding  requires  the  distance  between  the  platoons 
to  be  preserved  exactly  in  all  the  movements  ;  he  sees  that  the  troop- 
ers are  not  constrained,  and  that  the  rear  rank  men  are  not  only 
in  the  direction  of  their  file-leaders,  but  that  there  is  always  two 
feet  between  the  head  of  their  horses  and  the  croup  of  those  of  the 
front  rank. 

The  second  captain  is  charged  wit)i  the  alignment  of  the  rear  rank 
and  the  rank  of  file-closers;  he  resumes  his  place  in  line  at  the  com- 
mand,/ro»^ 

The  captain  commanding  moves  wherever  his  presence  is  most 
required;  the  troopers  are  required  to  observe  absolute  silence,  and 
all  ratifications  arc  done  by  signs  or  in  a  low  voice. 

A  large  majority  of  the  movements  are  the  same,  and  are  executed 
by  the  same  commands  as  those  already  laid  down  in  the  school  of  the 
troop;  the  only  difference  being  that  what  is  laid  down  as  applicable 
to  two  platoons,  must  now  be  made  to  apply  to  four.  All  the  move- 
ments of  the  squadron  are  indicated  in  the  following  number,  those 
marked  in  italics  not  having  been  already  described  in  the  school 
of  the  troop,  are  described  farther  on;  for  all  the  other  movements 
a  simple  reference  to  corresponding  movements  in  the  school  of  the 
troop  will  be  sufficient  to  make  them  all  perfectly  intelligible. 

For  the  manner  of  forming  the  squadron,  and  the  posts  of  the 
officers,  see  No.  18. 


382  MANUAL    ¥0K    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

MOVEMENTS    OF    THE    SQUADKON. 

561.   Successive  alignment  of 2:)latoons  in  the  squadron. 
Alignment  of  the  squadron. 
To  open  and  close  ranks. 
To  break  the  squadron  by  fours. 
Direct  march  in  column  by  fours. 
Change  of  direction. 
Individual  oblique  march. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  fours,  to  form  it  to  the  front, 
to  the  left,  or  on  right  into  line. 

To  regulate  the  rapidity  of  the  gaits. 

To  form  the  squadron  in  one  rank,  and  to  form  it  in  two  ranks. 
The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  form  it  in  column  with  distance. 
To  march  in  column  with  distance. 
Changes  of  direction  by  successive  wheels. 
Individual  oblique  march. 

Change  of  gait,  being  in  column  with  distance. 

To  break  by  fours,  by  twos  and  by  file  ,•  to  form  twos,  fours  and  pla- 
toons, at  the  same  gait. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  to  face  it  to  the 
opposite  direction,  and  to  face  it  again  to  the  front. 
To  halt  the  column. 
To  form  line  on  the  left. 
To  break  by  the  right  to  march  to  the  left. 
To  form  line  to  the  right  by  inversion. 
To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  to  march  to  the  left. 
To  form  on  right  into  line. 
To  form  on  left  into  line,  by  inversion. 
To  break  by  platoons  to  the  front. 
To  form  front  into  line. 

To    break    by  platoons   to    the   right^    and   to   inove  forward   after   the 
wheel. 

To  form  line  to  the  front  by  inversion. 

To  break  by  i^latoons  to  the  rigid,  head  of  column  to  the  left  or  half 
left. 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 
To  form    line  faced    to    the    rear,    by   inversion,   on    the    rear   of  the 
column. 

To  break  by  jilutoons  to  the  right,  head  of  column  to  the  right  or  half 
right. 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  head  of  the  column. 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  by  inversion,  on  the  head  of  the  column. 


SCllUUL    UF    THK    SQUADRON.  888 

Movements  by  fours,  the  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance' 

Direct  march  of  the  squadron  in  line. 

Countermarch. 

Wheelings. 

To  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

To  wheel  on  a  movable  pivot. 

Individual  oblique  march. 

Oblique  march  by  plnfoonn. 

Movements  by  fours. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  cauxc  it  to  ffain  ground  to  the  rear,  and 
to   face  it  again  to  the  front. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  break  by  platoons  to  the  right, 
and  to  form  it  again  in  line. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  march  it  to  the  rear  by  irherling  the 
platoons  about. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  to  the  front  by  platoons, 
and  to  re-form  it. 

The  squadron  marchi)ig  in  line,  to  break  it  to  the  front  by  platoons,  in 
doubling  the  gait,  and  to  re-form  it. 

Passage  of  obstacles. 

Charge. 

Rallying. 

Skirmishing. 

The  column  by  divisions. 

Successive  alignment  of  platoons  in  the  squadron. 

562.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain  commanding  places  the 
two  non-commissioned  officers,  principal  guides  of  the  right  and  left, 
upon  a  line  parallel  to  the  front  of  the  squadron,  at  thirty  paces  from 
the  front  rank,  and  facing  each  other. 

On  receiving  notice  from  the  captain  commanding,  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon  commands:  1.  Platoon,  forward.  2.  Guide  right. 
3.  March.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoon  moves  forward;  at 
one  pace  from  the  point  which  marks  the  new  alignment,  the  chief  of 
the  platoon  commands  :  1.  Halt.  2.  liighf  —  Dress.  At  the  com- 
mand halt,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  and  guide  of  the  right  establish 
themselves  immediately,  the  latter  bringing  the  head  of  his  horse 
against  the  boot  of  the  principal  guide  of  the  right. 

The  first  platoon  being  correctly  aligned,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  platoon,  right — Dress.     2.  Front. 


834         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  commands : 
1.  Platoon,  forward.  2.  Guide  right.  3.  March.  Having  arrived 
abreast  of  the  file-closers  of  the  platoon  which  forms  the  base  of  the 
alignment,  he  commands:  1.  Halt.  2.  Bight  —  Dress,  and  at  the 
same  time  moves  forward  on  the  line  of  the  chief  of  that  platoon.  At 
the  command  halt,  the  platoon  stops.  At  the  command  right — dress, 
all  the  troopers  move  forward  together  upon  the  alignment. 

Each  chief  of  platoon  executes  the  same  movement,  commanding 
march,  when  the  one  who  precedes  him  has  commanded  halt.  The 
guide  of  the  left,  at  the  command  halt,  from  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
platoon,  brings  up  the  head  of  his  horse  against  the  boot  of  the  prin- 
cipal guide  of  the  left.  The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain 
commands,  front. 

This  alignment  being  correctly  executed,  it  is  repeated,  giving  the 
new  base  of  alignment  a  direction  oblique  to  the  front  of  the  squadron. 
For  this  purpose  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  on  receiving  notice 
from  the  captain  commanding,  moves  his  j)latoon  twenty-four  paces  to 
the  front,  causes  it  to  execute  a  half  wheel  to  the  right  at  the  com- 
mands :  1.  Right  half  wheel.  2.  Forward  ;  and  after  marching  at  six 
paces  in  the  new  direction,  he  halts  and  aligns  it.  The  first  platoon 
being  correctly  aligned,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  platoon,  right — Dress.     2.  Front. 

The  movement  is  executed  by  the  platoons  in  succession  •  each  chief 
of  platoon  moves  straight  forward  and  commands:  1.  Bight  half— 
Wheel.  2.  Forward  ;  in  time  to  complete  the  wheel  at  the  moment 
the  right  arrives  opposite  the  left  of  the  platoon  which  precedes  it. 
Th'j  squadron  being  aligned,  the  first  captain  commands, /;■o«^ 

To  break  by  the  right.,  to  march  by  the  left. 
563.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Platoons.,  break  by  the  right.,  to  march  to  the  left.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands :  1. 
Platoon,  forward.  2.  Guide  left.  At  the  command  inarch,  repeated  by 
the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  marches  ten  paces  to  the 
front,  turns  to  the  left,  and  moves  forward  at  the  commands  :  1.  Left — 
Turn.     2.  Forward. 

The'chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and  successively  those  of  the  third 
and  foi.rth,  command  :  1.  Platoon,  forward.  2.  Guide  left;  when  the 
chief  of  the  platoon  on  the  right  commands  march;  and  they  command 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON.  335 

march,  when  the  chief  of  that  platoon,  after  having  turned  to  the  left, 
commands, /or  wofrrf. 

To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right,  to  march  to  the  left. 
5H4.  The  squadron  being  in  lind,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  break  by  the  right  to  the  rear,  to  march  to  the  left. 

2.  March, 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands,  ja^a- 
toon,  right  about  wheel.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  this  platoon  executes  its  wheel  to  the  right  about; 
when  nearly  terminated,  its  chief  commands  :  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide 
left;  and  sSftev  marching  ten  paces  straight  forward,  he  commands  :  1. 
Eight — Turn.  2.  Forward.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and 
those  of  the  third  and  fourth  in  succession,  commands,  2^iatoon,  right 
about  wheel,  when  the  chief  of  the  platoon  on  their  right  commands 
march,  and  they  command  inarch  when  that  platoon  has  passed  over 
three-fourths  of  its  first  wheel. 

To  break  by  platoons  to  the  right,  and  to  move  forward  after  the 

wheel. 

565,  The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  captain  commanding  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoon,  right  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward.     4.   Guide 

left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  left  file  of  each  platoon  prepares  to  step 
oflF  promptly,  and  the  pivot  to  turn  upon  itself.  At  the  command 
march,  each  platoon  executes  its  wheel  to  the  right,  following  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  At  the  third  command,  the 
platoons  march  straight  forward. 

To  form  line  to  the  front  by  inversion. 

566.  The  squadron  being  in  open  column,  right  in  front,  to  form 
line  by  inversion  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  inversion,  front  into  line.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

4.  Front. 


88(1         MANUAL    FOK    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands,  pla- 
toon, forward;  and  then  the  other  chiefs  of  platoons  command, jpZatoon, 
right  half  wheel.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  officers, 
the  movement  is  exOTuted  as  prescribed,  No.  535,  but  by  inverse  means. 

This  formation  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  when  the  column  is 
marching  5  in  this  case  the  chief  of •  the  first  platoon  does  not  cova- 
mand, platoon,  fortcard,  nor  march,  but  repeats  the  indication  of  the 
guide. 

To  break  hy  platoons  to  the  right,  head  of  column  to  the  left  or  half 

left. 

567.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  right' wheel — head  of  column  to  the  left  (otlkalf  left) . 
2.  March.     3.  Forward.     4.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes  its  wheel  to  the  right. 
At  the  third  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands:  1. 
Left — Turn.  2.  Foravard  ,•  the  other  platoons  move  on  and  turn  in 
succession  at  the  command  of  their  chiefs,  on  the  ground  upon  which 
the  first  had  turned. 

The  first  captain  commands  forward,  when  the  wheels  are  nearly 
completed,  and  gives  a  point  of  direction. 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear  hy  inversion,  on  the  rear  of  the 

column. 

568.  The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  and 
obstacles  are  presented  on  its  left  flank,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  rear, 
the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  right  about   loheel.      2.  March.     3.  By  inversion, 
front  into  line.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  right.     6.  Front. 

At  the  second  command,  each  platoon  executes  its  wheel  to  the  right 
about.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth  platoon,  which 
becomes  the  head  of  the  column,  when  its  wheel  is  nearly  completed, 
commands:  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  right;  and  when  it  has  marched 
thirty  paces:  L  Halt.  2.  Jiight  —  Dress.  The  chiefs  of  the  other 
platoons,  at  three-fourths  of  the  wheel,  command:  1.  Forward.  2. 
Guide  right;  and  direct  themselves  toward  the  place  they  are  to  occupy 
in  line,  conforming,  in  other  respects,  to  what  is  prescribed  for  by  inver- 
sion, front  into  line,  when  the  left  is  in  front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON.  o87 

To  break  by  platoons  to  the  rights  head  of  column  to  the  right  (or 

half  right). 

569.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons  right  ivheel — head  of  colujun  to  the  right  (or  half 
right).     2.  March.     3.  Forward.     4.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  march,  each  phitoon  executes  its  wheel  to  the  right. 
At  the  third  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  :  1. 
liicfht — Turn.  2.  Forward.  The  other  platoons  move  on,  and  turn 
in  succession  at  the  commands  of  their  chiefs,  on  the  same  ground. 
The  first  captain  commands  fonrard,  when  the  wheels  are  nearly  com- 
pleted. 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear.,  by  inversion  on  the  head  of  the 

column. 

570.  The  squadron  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  and 
obstacles  are  presented  on  its  right  flank,  to  form  line  upon  the  head  of 
the  column,  faced  to  the  rear,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Front  into  line.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  front  into  line,  right  in  front, 
No.  535,  but  without  rectifying  the  alignment. 

The  squadron  being  formed,  the  first  captain  immediately  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  right  about  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Halt.     4.  Left 
— Dress.     5.  Front. 

The  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  when  the  column  is 
marching. 

Individual  oblique  march. 

571.  The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground 
toward  the  right  flank,  without  changing  the  front  of  the  squadron, 
the  fix'st  captain  commands  : 

1.  Right  oblique.     2.  March. 

To  resume  the  primitive  direction,  the  first  captain  commands; 
29 


388  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Forward. 

This  movement  is  executed  at  a  walk,  or  at  a  trot,  but  never  at  a 
gnlloj). 

Oblique  march  by  platoons. 

572.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground  toward 
its  right  flanli,  by  the  oblique  march  by  platoons,  the  first  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Platoons,  right  half  loheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.   Guide  right. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes  its  half  ivheel  to  the 
right,  on  a  fixed  pivot.  At  the  third  command,  each  platoon  moves 
forward,  conforming  to  the  principles  of  the  direct  march. 

To  cause  the  squadron  to  resume  the  primitive  direction,  the  first 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Platoons,  left  half  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.   Guide  right. 

Which  is  executed  as  just  prescribed,  but  by  inverse  means. 

During  this  march,  the  right  guide  of  the  first  platoon  marches  di- 
rectly upon  the  point  which  has  been  indicated  to  him.  The  guides  of 
the  other  platoons  preserve  their  distances,  take  for  file-leader  the 
fourth  trooper  from  the  left  of  the  platoon  which  precedes  them,  and 
keep  it  two  paces  from  him.  The  second  captain  places  himself  behind 
the  guide  of  the  first  platoon,  in  order  to  superintend  his  direction. 

The  squadron  being  in  lijie,  to  cause  it  to  gain  ground  to  the  rear, 
and  to  face  it  again  to  the  front. 

573.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  face  it  in  the  opposite  direction, 
the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  fours,  right  about  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward. 

4.  Guide  left. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  541.  The  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  file-closers,  and  the  guides,  ivheel  about  individually,  and  march, 
the  chiefs  of  platoon  behind  the  centre  of  their  platoons,  the  file-closers 
in  front,  and  the  guides  of  the  right  and  left  of  the  rear  rank,  now  be- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON.  339 

Cvome  the  front.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file-closer  nearest  the 
guide  passes  to  the  left,  in  order  to  place  himself  in  front  of  the  guide, 
the  first  captain  gives  him  a  point  of  direction,  which  is  also  indicated 
to  the  guide  of  the  right  or  left,  who,  in  this  movement,  remains  on  the 
flank  of  the  squadron. 

The  squadron  is  faced  arjain  to  the  front,  by  a  movement  similar  to 
the  one  just  stated. 

The  squadron  marching  in  line^  to  march  it  to  the  rear  hy  wheeling 
the  platoons  about. 

574-.  The  squadron  inarching  in  line,  guide  right,  the  first  captain 
commands : 

1.  Platoons,  right  about  loheel.    2.  March.     3.  Forward. 
4.  Guide  left. 

At  the  command  vinrch,  the  pivots  halt  short,  and  turn  upon  them- 
selves, the  marching  flanks  step  off"  at  the  same  instant,  regulating 
themselves  by  the  right  during  the  first  half  of  the  wheel,  so  as  to 
arrive  together  in  column,  and  by  the  left  during  the  second  half,  so  as 
to  arrive  together  in  line.  In  each  platoon,  the  rear  rank  and  the  file- 
closers  carry  the  band  toward  the  marching  flank,  in  order  to  facilitate 
the  movement.  At  the  third  command,  the  squadron  resumes  the  di- 
rect march.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  indicated  guide  moves  up  on 
the  line  of  the  officers ;  he  is  immediately  replaced,  and  a  point  of  di- 
rection given. 

In  this  moA-ement,  the  guide  of  the  right  turns  to  the  rif/ht,  moves 
straight  forward  the  extent,  of  the  front  of  a  platoon,  and  tamH  ar/aiu 
to  the  right,  in  order  to  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  squadron.  The 
guide  of  the  left  executes  the  same  movement,  to  place  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  right  of  the  squadron.  ' 

The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  break  it  to  the  front  by  platoon, 
in  doubling  the  gait,  and  to  reform  it. 

bib.  The  first  captain  commands: 

1.  B^j  platoons,  to  the  front,  trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  trot ; 
and  those  of  the  other  platoons  command,  jilaioon,  right  half  wheel, 
trot.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  officers,  the  movement 
is  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  550. 


340         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA, 

The  squadron  marching  in  line  at  the.  trot,  the  movement  is  executed 
at  the  gallop,  on  the  same  principles. 

The  squadron  marching  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  to 
form  it  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  first  captain  comnitands  : 

1.  Form  squadron^  trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons  command, 
platoon,  left  half  toheel,  trot.  At  the  command  tnarch,  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  the  three  last  platoons,  the  first  platoon  continues  to  march 
straight  forward  at  the  ivalk,  and  its  chief  repeats  the  indication  of  the 
guide.  The  three  other  platoons  execute  their  half  loheel  to  the  left  at 
the  trot,  on  a  fixed  pivot.  The  half  wheels  being  nearly  terminated, 
Ihe  chiefs  of  these  platoons  command  :  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  right; 
they  move  straight  forward,  and  as  soon  as  the  right  file  of  their  pla- 
toon is  in  the  direction  of  the  left  file  of  the  platoon  which  precedes, 
they  command:  1.  Jiight  half  irheel.  2.  March.  3.  Forward;  and 
then  walk,  in  suflBcient  time  to  command  inarch,  when  their  platoon 
arrives  in  line;  then  the  troopers  resume  the  walk,  and  align  themselves 
in  marching.  Each  platoon  after  its  half  wheel  to  the  left,  moves  straight 
forward  on  the  point  where  it  is  to  turn,  and  without  obliquing  toward 
the  platoon  which  precedes  it. 

Passage  of  obstacles. 

676.  The  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  execute  the  passage  of  ob- 
stacle, the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.   Obstacle.     2.  Fii^st  platoon.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  this 
platoon  halts,  and  its  chief  immediately  commands  :  1.  Left  oblique, 
trot.  2.  March  ;  and  this  platoon  doubles  on  the  second.  When  the 
platoon  which  has  aligned,  is  in  rear  of  the  one  upon  which  it  has 
doubled,  its  chief  commands  :  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  right.  3.  Walk. 
4.  March. 

To  cause  the  platoon  which  has  obliqued  to  return  to  its  place,  the 
first  captain  commands  : 

1.  First  platoon.     2.  Into  line. 

At  the  command  into  line,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  commands  :  1. 
Right  oblique,  trot.  2.  March  ;  when  opposite  the  ground  the  platoon 
is  to  occup3%  he  commands  :  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  left.  3.  Walk  ; 
and  when  the  platoon  is  in  line,  march.     The  chief  of  the  platoon  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON.  841 

mtinda  forward,  a  litHe  before  its  left  file  has  passed  beyond  the  right 
file  of  the  platoon  on  which  it  is  to  form. 

The  second  platoon  executes  the  same  movement,  in  obliquing  to  the 
right,  behind  the  first  platoon  :  the  third  in  obliquing  to  the  left  behind 
the  fourth,  and  the  fourth  in  obli([uing  to  the  right  behind  the  third; 
each  platoon  should  always  double  upon  that  with  which  it  forms  the 
division. 

577.  Tlie  squadron  marching  in  line,  to  execute  the  passage  of  ob- 
stacle upon  the  head  of  each  platoon,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  In  each  platoon  J  by  faurs  (or  hij  twos),  trot.     2.  March. 
3.   Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  tlio  chiefs  of  platoon  commands  by  fourn  (or 
by  tiros,  trot.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  three  officers,  each 
])latoon  breaks  by  fours  ;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  march  at  the  head  of 
their  platoons  :  the  guide  of  the  right,  who  marches  on  the  line  of 
officers,  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  ;  the 
guide  of  the  left,  in  rear  of  the  fourth  platoon,  and  the  file-closers  on 
the  right  Hank  of  their  platoons.  Each  platoon  having  thus  broken  in 
column,  should  assume  a  direction  parallel  to  that  one  which  is  the 
guide,  keeping  on  the  same  line,  and  always  at  the  distance  of  its  front, 
to  be  able  at  any  moment  to  re-form  line. 

To  re-form  the  squadron,  each  platoon  having  broken  by  fours,  or  by 
twos  at  the  trot,  right  in  front,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Form  platoons.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  command, /orwi  platoon. 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  their  officers,  each  platoon  forms. 
If  the  ground  does  not  permit  all  the  platoons  to  form  at  once,  the  one 
before  which  the  obstacle  is  presented,  forms  in  the  rear  of  the  other 
platoon  of  its  division,  and  retakes  its  place  in  line  as  soon  as  prac- 
ticable. 


8  K  I  R  iM  I  S  H  I  N  G . 

578.  When  the  squadron  is  in  sight  of  the  skirmishers,  the  first  cap- 
tain orders  no  signal  except  the  rally.  The  chief  of  the  skirmishers 
observes  the  movements  of  the  squadron  he  covers,  and  conforms  to 
them  as  soon  as  practicable,  requiring  his  trumpeter  to  sound  the  ne- 
cessary signals. 

When  the  squa<lron  changes  front,  the  chief  of  the  skirmishers  moves 


342         MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

upon  the  new  front,  unless  the  first  captain  gives  orders  to  the  contrary. 
If  the  squadron  is  out  of  sight  of  the  skirmishers,  the  first  captain 
causes  the  signals  which  correspond  to  the  movements  he  executes  to 
he  sounded,  in  order  to  give  notice  to  the  chief  of  the  skirmishers, 
who  conforms  to  them  as  soon  as  practicable.  The  trumpeter  who  fol- 
lows the  chief  of  the  skirmishers  should  give  the  signals  only  upon  the 
order  of  that  ofiicer.  The  skirmishers  should  execute  their  movement, 
only  by  the  signals  of  the  trumpeter  who  accompanies  the  officer  who 
commands  them. 

The  squadron  being  in  line,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  First  (or  fourth)  'platoon,  as  skirmishers.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  orders  the  sabres 
to  be  returned,  the  holsters  to  be  uncovered,  and  the  arms  to  be  loaded; 
he  then  commands  :  1.  Platoon,  forward.  2.  Guide  right.  3.  Trot.  At 
the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  this  platoon 
moves  forward.  After  marching  100  paces  to  the  front,  the  chief  of 
the  platoon  commands  :  1.  Six  files  from  right  (or  left),  as  skirmishers. 
2.  Makch.  3.  Guide  right  (or  left);  which  is  executed  as  prescribed, 
No.  559.  When  the  first  captain  wishes  the  skirmishers  to  re-enter  the 
squadron,  he  causes  the  rally  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal  the  chief 
of  the  skirmishers  rallies  his  platoon,  as  prescribed.  No.  559,  and  then 
rejoins  the  squadron  at  a  gallop,  directing  himself  upon  one  of  the 
flanks  to  resume  his  place  in  line. 

579.  When  the  first  captain  wishes  to  relieve  a  platoon  which  is  skir- 
mishing, the  chief  of  the  new  platoon  moves  forward  upon  the  reserve 
of  the  platoon  which  is  acting  as  skirmishers.  On  coming  up  abreast 
of  it,  he  orders  out  six  files  as  skirmishers  ,•  the  remaining  files  halt 
and  draw  Sabres.  As  soon  as  the  new  skirmishers  have  passed  five 
paces  beyond  those  they  are  to  relieve,  the  latter  turn  about  and  rally 
upon  their  reserve.  The  platoon  having  rallied,  is  conducted  back  to 
the  squadron  at  a  trot. 

580.  When  the  entire  squadron  is  to  act  as  skirmishers,  the  first  cap- 
tain orders  the  sabres  to  be  returned,  the  holsters  to  be  uncovered,  and 
the  arms  to  be  loaded  ;  he  then  commands  : 

1.  Squadron,  forward.     2.   Guide  right.    3.   Trot.     4.  March. 

H'aving  arrived  at  the  point  where  the  reserve  is  to  be  established, 
about  100  paces  from  the  front  of  the  body  to  be  covered,  and  more  if 
it  has  been  commanded,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.   Three  first  (or  last)  platoons,  as  skirmishers.     2.  March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADRON.  343 

At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  which  is  to  support 
the  skirmishers,  halts  that  platoon,  and  causes  sabres  to  be  drawn. 
The  chiefs  of  the  three  other  platoons  continue  to  march  on,  each  di- 
recting himself  by  the  shortest  route,  100  paces  to  the  front  toward  the 
part  of  the  line  his  platoon  is  to  occupy,  and  having  reached  it,  he  dis- 
perses his  platoon  as  skirmishers.  The  right  platoon  covers  the  right 
of  the  regiment,  aud  extends  30  or  40  paces  beyond  it;  another  platoon 
covers  the  centre,  and  the  left  platoon  covers  the  left,  extending  also 
30  or  40  paces  beyond.  The  chiefs  of  these  platoons  remain  25  paces 
in  rear  of  the  line  of  skirmishers,  and  pass  over  the  extent  occupied  by 
the  troopers  of  their  platoons.  The  reserve  remains  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  line  of  skirmishers. 

The  first  captain,  followed  by  the  first  sergeant,  keeps  habitually 
half-way  between  the  reserve  and  the  skirmishers,  to  direct  the  move- 
ments. The  second  captain,  followed  by  the  second  sergeant,  passes 
the  line,  and  gives  notice  to  the  first  captain  of  everything  that  it  is 
important  for  him  to  know. 

581.  If  the  first  captain  wislies  to  rally  the  skirmishers  upon  them- 
selves, he  causes  the  ralhj  of  .skirmwhers  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal 
each  platoon  rallies  as  rapidly  as  possible  on  its  chief.  If  the  first 
captain  then  wishes  to  rally  the  squadron,  he  moves  upon  the  point 
where  he  intends  it  shall  form,  and  causes  the  raUy  to  be  sounded 
where  three-fourths  of  each  platoon  has  rallied.  At  this  new  signal, 
the  reserve  and  each  platoon  of  skirmishers  move  at  a  yallop  upon  the 
point  where  the  captain  commanding  is  placed.  The  troopers  who  did 
not  rejoin  their  platoon  when  it  rallied  upon  itself,  direct  themselves 
toward  the  squadron. 

The  squadron  being  dispersed  as  skirmishers,  if  the  first  captain 
wishes  it  to  rally  immediately,  he  orders  the  ralbj  to  be  sounded ;  at 
this  signal,  the  ofiicers,  the  skirmishers,  and  the  reserve,  rally  upon  the 
point  occupied  by  the  first  captain. 

The  troopers  being  dispersed  as  skirmishers,  if  the  first  captain 
wishes  them  to  charge  as  foragers,  he  orders  them  to  cease  firing,  and 
causes  the  disperse  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
move  forward  in  line,  and  the  skirmishers  draw  sabres;  they  charge 
immediately.  The  reserve  follows  at  the  trot,  or  at  the  f/allnp,  as  may 
be  necessary.  After  the  charge,  the  first  captain  orders  the  ralli/  to  be 
sounded,  when  the  troopers  rally  in  rear  of  the  reserve. 

The'  skirmishers  being  rallied  by  platoons,  if  the  first  captain  wishes 
to  charge,  he  orders  the  charge  to  be  sounded.  At  this  signal,  each 
cbicf  of  platoon  conducts  his  platoon  to  the  charge,  in  good  order,:  the 
reserve  supports  the  mowcmcnt  nt  the  trot  ov  ynllop.  The  first  captain 
places  himself  so  as  to  be  able  to  direct  the  general  movement.     The 


844         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

second  captain  charges  with  the  platoon  nearest  to  him.  The  platoons 
rally  behind  the  reserve ;  the  first  captain  moves  upon  that  point  at  the 
same  time  that  he  orders  the  rally  to  be  sounded. 

The  Column  by  Divisions.  ' 

582.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  if  the  first  captain  wishes  to  form  it 
into  coh;mn  by  divisions,  he  commands  : 

1.  Divisions,   right    (or   left)    tvheel.     2,  March.     3.  Halt    (or 
Forward).     4.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

Which  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  breaking  of  the  troop 
or  squadron  into  a  column  of  platoons,  either  to  halt  or  move  forward 
without  halting.  The  same  movement  may  be  executed  when  the 
squadron  is  marching  in  line. 

The  principles  prescribed  for  the  column  of  platoons  are  applicable  to 
the  march  in  column  by  divisions,  the  difierent  modes  of  passing  from 
line  into  column,  and  from"  column  into  line. 

To  gain  ground  toward  its  flank  or  to  the  rear,  employ  the  means 
prescribed  for  the  column  by  platoons.  The  wheels  about  can  be  also 
executed  by  divisions.  The  distance  measured  from  the  croup  of  the 
horses  of  the  rear  rank  of  one  division,  to  the  head  of  the  horses  of  the 
division  which  follows,  should  be  equal  to  the  front  of  the  division,  less 
the  depth  of  the  two  ranks.  In  the  wheels  on  a  movable  pivot  by 
divisions,  the  ninth  file  of  the  platoon,  upon  which  the  wheel  is  exe- 
cuted, is  the  middle  point  of  the  radius  of  the  wheel.  The  pivot  des- 
cribes an  arc  of  circle  of  ten  paces. 

583.  The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  right  in  front, 
to  form  the  divisions  at  the  same  gait,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Form  divisions.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons 
command,  jjlafuon,  left  half  wheel.  At  the  commaud  march,  repeated 
by  the  same  ofi&cers,  the  second  and  fourth  platoons  execute  a  half- 
icheel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot.  The  first  and  third  platoons  continue 
to  march  straight  forward,  and  after  having  marched  thirty  paces,  their 
chiefs  command,  halt.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons, 
when  the  half  wheel  to  the  left  is  nearly  terminated,  command  :  1.  For- 
ward. 2.  Guide  ri(/ht.  They  move  straight  forward,  and  as  soon  as 
the  right  of  their  platoon  arrives  in  the  direction  of  the  left  file  of  the 
platoon  which  precedes,  they  command:  1.  Jiiyht  half  wheel.  2. 
March.     3.  Forward.     They  move  forward,  and   command   halt,  on 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUADROV.     '      345 

arriving  abreast  of  the  platoon  belonging  to  the  same  division.  The 
lieutenants  commanding  the  divisions  then  command,  left  dress,  move 
to  the  left  of  the  division,  rectify  the  alignment,  command  front,  and 
return  to  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 

684.  The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  divisions,  right  in  front, 
to  break  the  divisions  by  platoons,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  By  platoons.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons 
command,  platoon,  right  half  irheel.  At  the  command  march,  repeated 
by  the  same  ofl&cers,  the  second  and  fourth  platoons  execute  a  half 
wheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and  the  first  and  third  platoons  con- 
tinue to  march  on.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons,  the 
half  wheel  to  the  right  being  nearly  terminated,  command:  1.  Forward. 
2.  Guide  left ;  they  move  straight  forward,  and  as  soon  as  the  left  file 
of  their  platoons  arrives  in  the  direction  of  the  left  file  of  the  platoon 
which  precedes,  they  command:  1,  Left  half  irhecl.  2.  March.  3. 
Forward;  and  move  forward  in  taking  their  proper  distances. 

The  divisions  are  broken  by  platoons,  on  the  same  principles,  in 
marching  at  the  (rot  or  gal/op. 

585.  The  squadron  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  right  in  front, 
to  form  divisions  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  first  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  divisions  J  trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  above,  the  first  and  third  platoons 
continuing  to  march  at  the  same  gait,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  second 
and  fourth  platoons  commanding:  1.  Platoon,  left  half  wheel,  trot. 
2.  March.  3.  Forward.  4.  Guide  right;  and:  1.  Right  half  wheel. 
2  March.  3.  Forward.  4.  Wall:.  When  they  arrive  abreast  of  the 
platoon  on  which  they  form,  they  command  :   5.  Mauch. 

586.  The  squadron  mprehing  in  column  by  divisions,  right  in  front, 
to  break  the  division  by  platoons,  in  doubling  the  gait,  the  first  captain 
commands  : 

1.  By  platoons.,  trot.     2.  March.     Z.  Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  third  platoons  com- 
mand, trot :  those  of  the  second  and  fourth  platoons  command,  platoon, 
right  half  wheel,  trot.  At  the  command  mareh,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  the  first  and  third  platoons  move  forward  at  the  trot.  The 
second  and  fourth  execute  their  half  uheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot, 
at  the  trot,  and  the  movement  is  completed  as  described  above. 


346  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

587.  The  squadron  being  in  line,  to  break  it  by  division  hj  the  right 
to  march  to  the  left,  the  first  captain  commands: 

1.  Divisions,  break  by  the  right — to  march  to  the  left.    2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  a  column  by  platoons. 
To  break  the  squadron  by  divisions  to  the  rear  by  the  right,  to  march 
to  the  left,  the  first  captain  commands : 

1.  Divisions,  break  by  the  right  to  the  rear — to  march  to  the  left. 

2.  March. 

Which  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  column  of  platoons. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    REGIMENT.  347 


Article     X. 
EA^OLUTIONS    OF    THE    R  E  (I  I  M  E  N  T 


588.  When  the  regiment  is  iu  line,  tlie  squadrons  are  drawn  up 
on  the  same  line,  with  intervals  of  twelve  paces  between  them,  and 
the  field  and  staff  of  the  regiment  are  posted  as  indicated,  No.  18. 

When  it  is  in  column  right  in  front,  and  on  the  march,  the  guide 
is  habitually  to  the  left,  and  as  constantly  to  the  right  when  the  left  is 
in  front;  in  the  march  of  the  column  the  colonel  does  not  indicate  the 
guide,  except  in  cases  where  he  sees  proper  to  depart  from  the  principle 
just  laid  down.  Whenever  the  guide  is  indicated  by  the  colonel,  the 
captains  commanding  all  repeat  it. 

Successive  alignment  of  the  squadrons  in  the  regiment. 

589.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  the  colonel  causes  the  right  general 
guide  and  the  principal  guide  of  the  left  of  the  first  squadron  to  be 
placed  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  squadron  opposite  the  right  and  left, 
and  facing  each  othei*.  The  left  general  guide  immediately  places 
himself  on  the  same  line  in  front  of  the  extreme  left  of  the  regiment, 
facing  the  right  general  guide. 

The  captain  commanding  the  first  squadron,  on  an  intimation  from 
the  colonel,  commands:  1.  Squadron,  forward.  2.  Guide  right.  3. 
March.  The  squadron  having  arrived  within  one  pace  of  the  new 
line,  the  captain  commands  halt.  At  this  command  the  squadron  halts, 
the  captain,  and  the  guides  of  the  right  and  left  advance  and  align 
themselves;  the  first  captain  commands  ritjht — dren>f;  and  when  the 
alignment  is  complete,   front. 

The  colonel  then  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.  By  squadron.,  right — Dress. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  commanding  the  second  squad- 
ron commands:  1.  Squad,  forward.  2.  Guide  right.  3.  March.  The 
squadron  having  reached  the  rank  of  file-closers  of  the  first  squadron, 


348  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  first  captain  commands:  1.  Squadron.  2.  Halt.  The  principal 
"•uide  of  the  left  throws  himself  out  opposite  the  left  of  the  squadron, 
faces  to  the  right,,  and  aligns  himself  on  the  guides  in  front  of  the  first 
squcidron  :  the  oificers  and  guides  of  the  right  and  left  align  themselves 
correctly;  the  first  captain  throws  himself  to  the  left  wing,  and  com- 
mands, right — dress.  The  squadron  being  aligned,  the  captain  com- 
mands front. 

Each  captain  commanding  causes  the  movement  to  be  executed  in 
succession,  and  commands  march  as  soon  as  the  one  preceding  him 
commands  halt.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands 
front. 

Alignment  of  the  regiinent. 

590.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  the  colonel  causes  the  general 
guides  to  be  fixed  on  the  new  line,  facing  each  other,  and  the  guides 
of  the  left  to  be  placed  on  intermediate  points,  facing  to  the  right; 
he  then  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2,  Pdght — Dress. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  captain  commanding,  the 
squadrons  are  aligned  in  such  manner  that  the  men  of  the  front  rank  of 
each  squadron  may  have  the  heads  of  their  horses  on  the  line  of  the 
guides.     The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands  front. 

To  break  the  regiment  by  fours. 

591.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  By  fours.     3.  March. 

The  second  commaud  is  repeated  by  the  captain  commanding  the 
first  squadron.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captain,  the 
first  squadron  breaks  by  fours  as  in  the  school  of  the  squadron.  The 
first  captain  of  the  second  squadron  commands  Iji/  fours,  in  time  to 
command  inarch  at  the  instant  the  fourth  platoon  of  the  squadron 
which  precedes  it,  commences  its  movement.  When  the  half  of  the 
second  squadron  has  broken,  the  captain  changes  direction  in  order  to 
join  the  column.  The  other  squadrons  break  in  succession  in  the  same 
way,  and  change  direction  as  directed  for  the  second. 

To  form  platoons  at  the  same  gait. 

592.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  by  fours,  the  right  in  front, 
the  colonel  commands  : 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    REGIMENT.  349 


1.  Attention.     2.  Form  platoons.     3.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  captain  commanding  the 
first  squadron.  At  the  command  march,  also  repeated  by  the  captains, 
platoons  are  formed  in  the  first  squadron,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  squadron.  The  other  squadrons  continue  to  march,  and  platoons 
are  formed  in  succession,  in  the  same  manner  as  in  the  first,  at  the 
commands:     1.  Form  pldtooiis.     2.  March. 

To  break  the  platoons  hy  fours  at  the  same  gait. 

593.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  by  platoons,  right  in  front, 
the  colo)iel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  By  fours.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command  repeated  by  the  captain  commanding  the 
first  squadron,  the  first  captains  of  the  other  squadrons  command, 
column.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captain  command- 
ing the  first  squadron,  the  captains  commanding  the  other  squadron, 
command  halt.  The  first  captain  of  the  second  squadron,  and  in 
succession  those  of  the  other  squadrons,  commands  :  1.  Bij  fours  2. 
March  ;  in  sufficient  time  for  the  head  of  the  squadron  after  it  is 
broken  to  be  at  its  proper  distance  from  the  rear  of  the  squadron  which 
precedes. 

If  the  column  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  except 
the  first,  take  the  walk  at  the  command  march,  and  at  the  proper 
time  for  breaking  the  squadrons,  command:  1.  By  fours,  trot.  2. 
March. 


To  form  platoons  in  doubling  the  gait. 

694.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  of  fours,  right  in  front,  the 
colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Form  platoons^  trot.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  captain  commanding  the 
first  squadron,  the  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  command  trot.  At 
the  comiuand  march,  repeated  by  all  the  chiefs  of  squadrons,  platoons 
are  formed  in  the  first  squadron.  The  other  squadrons  take  the  trot, 
and  form  in  succession  at  the  command:  1.  Form  platooux.  2. 
March  ;  given  by  each  chief  the  nearest  the  head  of  his  squadron, 
at  its  proper  distance  from  the  squadron  which  precedes. 


350  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 


To  break  the  platoons  in  doubling  the  gait. 

595.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  of  platoon,  right  in  front 
the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.  By  fours.,  trot.     3.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  squadron, 
and  at  the  command  march,  this  squadron  breaks  by  fours.  The  other 
squadrons  continue  to  march  at  a  icolk,  and  the  chiefs  command  in 
succession:  1.  Bi/  fourfi,  trot.  2.  March;  at  such  time  as  to  pre- 
serve their  distance. 

To  form  the  regiment  to  the  front,  to  the  left,  or  upon  the  right 

into  line. 

596.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  by  fours,  the  right  in  front,' 
to  form  line  to  the  front  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Front,  into  line.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  squadron, 
the  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  command,  head  of  column  to  the 
half  left.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron, 
the  first  squadron  forms  front  into  line  as  directed  for  a  single  squad- 
ron. The  other  chiefs  command,  guide  right,  throw  themselves  at  the 
head  of  their  squadron,  and  direct  it  by  the  shortest  line  to  a  point 
100  paces  behind  the  point  the  right  of  the  squadron  is  to  occupy 
in  line;  as  soon  as  the  head  of  each  squadron  reaches  this  point,  the 
chief  commands,  head  of  column  to  the  half  right,  and  when  the  third 
platoon  of  his  squadron  is  in  the  new  direction,  he  commands,  front 
into  line,  in  time  to  give  the  command  march,  at  the  moment  the  head 
of  bis  column  arrives  within  thirty  paces  of  the  line  of  battle.  The 
regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands /ror*?. 

597.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  by  fours,  the  right  in  front, 
to  form  line  to  the  left  flank,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.  Left,  into  litie.     3.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  squad- 
ron. At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  him,  the  first  squadron 
is  formed  into  line  to  the  left,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
troop,  No.  489.  The  other  chiefs  throw  themselves  to  the  head  of 
their  squadrons,  and  each,  in  succession,  commands  left  into  line, 
in    time   to   command  march   the  moment  their  first  four  files   get   to 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    REGIMENT.  351 

tbe    proper   turning   point.     The   regiment   being  aligned,  the  colonel 
commands  front. 

598.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  by  fours,  the  right  in  front, 
to  form  the  line  on  the  prolongation  of  the  right  flank,  the  colonel 
commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.   On  the  right.,  into  line.     3.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  squad- 
ron. At  the  command  march,  also  repeated  by  him,  he  forms  his 
squadron  into  line  on  the  right,  as  prescribed  school  of  the  troop, 
No.  -190.  The  other  chiefs  of  squadron  command  gtiide  right,  throw 
themselves  to  the  hea<l  of  their  squadrons,  and  each  commands 
njjoii  the  right  into  line  in  time  to  command  march,  at  the  proper 
point  for  turning  to  the  right,  in  order  to  take  its  proper  place  in 
line.     The  regiment  being  obliqued  the  colonel  commands,  yVo///. 

To  form  the  regiment  into  column  tvith  distance. 

599.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  break  to  the  right  by  a  general 
movement,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.  Platoons.,  right  loheel.     3.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  all  the  captains  command- 
ing. At  the  command  march,  also  repeated  by  them,  the  move  is 
executed  at  the  same  time  in  all  the  squadrons,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  troop,  No.  510.  At  the  moment  the  platoons  have 
nearly  completed  the  wheel,  the  captains  commanding  command 
halt.  The  chiefs  of  squadron  see  that  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  guides, 
etc.,  take  their  proper  posts.  If  the  colonel  wishes  to  put  the  column 
in  march  without  halting,  he  commands,  when  the  wheel  lacks  about 
one-fourth  of  its  completion  : 

4.  Forward. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron. 

To  break  hy  the  right  to  march  to  the  left. 

600.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  break  by  successive  movements 
from  the  right  to  pass  before  the  front  of  the  line,  the  colonel  com- 
mands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Platoons^  break  by  the  right,  to  march  to  the  left. 

3.  March. 


352  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  captain  commanding  the 
first  squadron,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  :  1.  Platoon, 
forward;  2.  Guide  left.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
the  first  squadron,  and  by  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  the  movement 
is  executed  in  the  first  squadron,  as  it  is  prescribed,  school  of  the 
squadron,  No,  563.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  repeat  the  sec- 
ond command  in  succession,  in  time  to  command  march  when  the 
fourth  platoon  of  the  squadron  which  is  on  their  right  is  opposite  the 
centre  of  the  second  platoon  of  their  squadron. 

7^0  break  to  the  I'ear  by  the  rigid,  to  march  to  the  left. 

6U1.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  break  by  successive  movements, 
the  right  to  pass  by  the  rear  of  the  line,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Platoons.,  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right.,  to  march 

to  the  left.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  captain  commanding  the 
first  squadrou,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands,  platoon,  rujht 
about  wheel.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  both  these  ofiicers, 
the  first  squadron  executes  the  movement  as  prescribed,  school  of  the 
squadron,  No.  564.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  repeat  the  com- 
mands in  succession,  in  time  to  command  march  at  the  instant  the 
fourth  platoon  of  the  squadrou  on  their  right,  after  having  finished  its 
right  about  and  advance,  has  executed  three-fourths  of  its  change  of 
direction  to  the  right. 

To  form  the  regiment  into  close  column. 

602.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  if  it  be  the  desire  of  the  colonel  to 
form  it  into  a  close  column,  faced  to  the  right,  he  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squadrons.,  right  wheel — form  close  column. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  commanding  squadrons  com- 
mand, squadron,  right  wheel.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  squadrons,  all  the  squadrons  wheel  to  the  right.  The  wheel 
being  nearly  completed,  the  chief  of  the  first  squadron  throws  himself 
to  its  left,  and  commands:  1.  Squadron.  2.  Halt.  3.  Left — Dress. 
4.  Front.     The  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  command  :  1.  Forward. 

2.  Guide  left;  and  at  twelve  paces  from  the  squadron  which  precedes: 
1.  Squadron.     2.  Halt.     3.  Left — Dress.     4.  Frokt. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    REGIMENT.  353 

603.  The  regiment  beiug  in  line,  to  form  a  close  column  without 
changing  the  front,  the  colonel  commands  :  1.  Attention.  2.  Upon  the 
third  squadron,  form  close  colnm I}.     3.   March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  third  squadron  throws  him- 
self to  its  left,  and  commands:  1.  Left — Drkss.  2.  Front.  The 
chief  of  the  second  squadron  commands,  p/atooiis,  ritjht  loheel — -fourth 
platoon,  left  half  wheel.  The  chief  of  the  first  squadron  commiands, 
platoons,  right  rvheel — h<^ad  of  column  to  the  half  right.  The  chief  of 
the  fourth  squadron  commands,  platoons,  right  wheel — first  2^l<^t<)on, 
right  about  wheel.  The  chief  of  the  fifth  squadron  commands,  platoons, 
right  loheel — head  of  column  to  the  half  right. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the  chiefs  of  squadrons 
except  that  of  the  third,  all  the  other  squadrons  break  bij  jjlatoons  to 
the  left  and  right;  and  when  the  wheels  are  nearly  completed,  each 
chief  on  the  right  commands  :  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  right;  those  on 
the  left  command  :  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  left.  Each  one  throws 
himself  at  the  head  of  his  column  to  direct  it. 

The  chief  of  the  fourth  platDon,  second  squadron,  after  having  exe- 
cuted the  half  wheel  to  the  left,  moves  forward  and  commands:  1.  Left 
— Turn.  2.  Forv^ard;  so  as  to  enter  the  column  in  a  direction  pai'al- 
lel  to  the  front  of  the  third  scjuadron,  passing  near  the  heads  of  the 
horses  of  the  ofiiccrs.  The  other  platoons  of  this  s(ii1adron  change 
direction  on  the  same  ground,  and  by  the  same  commands  from  their 
chiefs.  The  chief  of  the  squadron  continues  to  march  at  the  head  of 
his  squadron,  and  commands, p/a^>o»s,  right  icheel,  in  time  to  command 
inarch  when  its  fourth  platoon  has  arrived  opposite  the  right  of  the 
fourth  platoon  of  the  third  squadron.  The  platoons  having  executed 
the  wheul,  he  commands  :  1.  Halt.     2.  Left — Dress.     3.  Front. 

The  chief  of  the  fourth  platoon  of  the  first  squadron,  after  having 
executed  his  wheel  to  the  left,  commands:  1.  Right — Turn.  2.  For- 
ward; and  directs  himself  diagonally  to  the  front  in  such  manner  as 
to  turn  to  the  left  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  front  of  the  second  squadron 
at  the  command,  head  of  column  to  the  half  left,  given  by  the  chief  of 
the  squadron  when  the  fourth  platoon  arrives  opposite  the  right  flank 
of  the  squadron  already  formed.  The  rest  of  the  movement  is  per- 
formed in  precisely  the  same  manner  as  has  been  laid  down  for  the 
second  squadron. 

The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  of  the  fourth  squadron,  after  having 
executed  his  right  about  u-heel,  moves  forward,  and  commands  :  1.  Left 
— Turn.  2.  Forward  ;  so  as  to  enter  the  column  in  a  direction  paral- 
lel to  the  third  squadron,  at  the  command,  head  of  column  to  the  left, 
given  by  the  chief  of  squadron,  when  this  platoon  has  gained  a 
distance  of  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  third  siiuadron.  The  three 
30 


354         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

other  platoo-ns  execute  a  right  turn  on  the  same  ground  on  which  the 
first  platoon  made  its  right  about,  and  left  turn  on  the  same  ground 
that  the  first  did.  As  soon  as  the  chief  of  the  squadron  finds  himself 
opposite  the  left  of  the  third  squadron,  he  halts,  allows  his  column  to 
pass  him,  and  gives  the  command,  i^latooiis,  left  wheel,  in  time  to 
command  march  as  soon  as  the  fourth  platoon  gets  opposite  its  place. 
The  platoons  having  executed  the  wheel,  he  commands:  1.  Halt.  2. 
Left — Dress.     .3.  Front. 

The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  of  the  fifth  squadron,  after  having 
executed  the  wheel  to  the  right,  commands:  1.  Eight— Tvrn.  2. 
Forward  ;  and  directs  himself  diagonall}',  in  such  manner  as  to  turn 
to  the  left  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  fourth  squadron,  at  the  command, 
head  of  column  to  the  half  left,  given  by  the  chief  of  the  squadron 
when  the  first  platoon  reaches  the  left  flank  of  the  squadrons  already- 
formed.  The  sciuadron  is  then  brought  to  its  proper  position  in  the 
column  by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  for  the  fourth  squadron. 

604.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  form  in  close  column,  with  the 
left  in  front,  without  changing  the  front,"  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Upon  the  third  Squadron^  form  close  column^ 
the  left  in  front.     3.  March. 

The  commands  are  repeated,  and  the  movements  executed  in  accord- 
ance with  the  principles  laid  down  above,  with  this  diff"erence,  that  the 
squadrons  on  the  right  form  in  rear  of  the  squadron  which  serves  as 
the  basis  of  the  formation,  while  those  on  the  left  form  in  advafltje  of 
this  same  squadron;  and  that  the  alignment  is  to  the  right. 

605.  The  regiment  marching  in  line,  if  the  colonel  wishes  to  form  a 
close  column,  faced  to  the  right,  without  halting,  he  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.     Squadrons^  right    ivheel,  from   close   column. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  commanding  command, 
squadrons,  right  wheel,  trot.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the 
captains  commanding,  a  movement  is  executed.  The  wheel  being 
nearly  completed,  the  chief  of  the  first  squadron  commands  :  1.  For- 
ward. 2.  Guide  left.  3.  Walk.  4.  March;  the  other  chiefs  of 
squadron  command:  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  left;  and  at  twelve 
paces  from  the   preceding  squadron  :    1.   Walk.     2.  March. 

To  march  in  column. 

606.  The  principles  of  the  march   in  column  wi  h  dit^tauce,  as  pre- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    REGIMENT.  355 

scribed  for  the  troop  or  squadron,  are  applicable  to  the  march  of  the 
regiment ;  the  squadrons  are  separated  by  a  distance  equal  to  the 
front  of  a  platoon,  plus  twelve  paces  the  interval  between  squadron 
in  line. 

The  regiment  being  in  column  with  distance,  right  in  front,  the 
colonel  indicates  to  the  adjutant  the  direction  he  wishes  the  column  to 
take;  he  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.   CoIujwt,  forward.     3.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron.  At  the 
command  march,  also  repeated  by  these  officers,  the  movement  is 
executed  as  for  a  single  troop  or  squadron. 

To  halt  the  column,  the  colonel  commands ; 

1.  Attention.     2.   Column.     3.  Halt. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  and  at 
the  command  halt,  all  the  platoons  halt  at  once. 

To  change  the  direction  of  the  column  luith   distance. 

007.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  with  distance,  with  the  right 
in  front,  to  change  the  direction,  the  colonel  commands: 

Head  of  column  to  the  left. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  first  squadron,  this 
squadron  executes  the  movement  as  is  prescribed  for  the  change  of 
direction  of  a  column  of  platoons,  school  of  the  troop,  No.  512.  Each 
of  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  in  succession,  gives  the  same  command 
when  the  head  of  his  column  reaches  the  point  where  the  first  squadron 
changed  its  direction.  The  principal  guide  of  each  squadron  places 
himself  at  the  wheeling  point,  and  remains  there  until  the  last  platoon 
of  his  squadron  has  commenced  the  wheel,  when  he  is  relieved  by  the 
guide  of  the  succeeding  squadron. 

608.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  with  distance,  with  the  right 
in  front,  to  cause  it  to  face  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  colonel 
commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Platoon^  lef  about  ivheel.     3.  March. 
4.  Forward. 

The  last  three  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron;  the 
movement  is  executed  in  all  the  squadrons,  as  prescribed  for  a  single 
squadron,  No.  574. 


356         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

609.  The  regiment  being  in  column  with  distance,  at  a  halt  or  on  the 
march,  in  order  to  gain  ground  in  the  direction  of  one  of  the  flanks,  the 
colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  By  fours  to  the  left  (or  right).     3.  March. 
4.  Forward. 

The  last  three  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  and 
the  movement  is  executed  in  all  the  squadrons,  as  prescribed  for  a  single 
troop,  No.  528. 

610.  The  regiment  being  in  column  with  distance,  at  a  halt  or  on  the 
march,  to  cause  it  to  face  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.    2.  By  fours,  left  (or  rir/hf)  about  ivheel.    3.  March. 

4.  Forward. 

The  last  three  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadrons, 
and  the  movement  is  executed  as  for  a  single  troop  or  squadron,  No. 
573. 

Gil.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  with  distance,  to  cause  it  to 
gain  ground  to  the  left  or  right,  without  changing  the  front,  the  colonel 
commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Left  (or  right)  oblique.     3.  March. 

The  last  two  commands  are  repeated  by  the  captains  commanding, 
and  the  movement  is  executed  in  each  squadron  as  prescribed  for  a 
single  troojD  or  squadron. 

The  column  having  obliqued -sufficiently,  the  colonel  commands: 

Forward. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  and  the  move- 
ment is  executed  as  in  a  single  troop. 


To  form  the  regiment  into  line  upon  one  of  its  fanks,  or  on  the 
prolongation  of  one  of  its  flanks. 

612.  The  regiment  being  in  column  Avitb  distance,  Avitli  the  right  in 
front,  to  form  in  line  upon  its  left  flank,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     3.  March. 

The   second    command    is    repeated    by    the    captains    commanding 
squadrons.     At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squad- 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    REGIMENT.  357 

ron,  the  movement  is  executed  in  each  squadron  as  prescribed,  No.  530. 
The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands,  front. 

613.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  with  distance,  the  right  in 
front,  to  form  into  line  on  the  prolongation  of  the  right  flank,  the 
colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.   On  the  right  into  line.     3.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  1)y  the  chief  of  the  first  squadron. 
At  the  command  march,  also  repeated  by  him.  the  movement  is  executed 
in  the  first  squadron  as  prescribed  for  a  single  troop,  Xo.  530.  The 
chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  command  ynide  riijht,  throw  themselves 
to  the  head  of  their  columns,  and  in  succession  command,  on  the  ri<jht 
into  line,  in  time  to  command  march,  when  the  first  platoon  is  twelve 
paces  beyond  the  left  of  the  one  which  precedes.  The  regiment  being 
aligned,  the  colonel  commands,  front. 

To  form  the  regiment  into  line  to  the  front. 

611.  The  regiment  being  in  column  with  distance,  the  right  in  front, 
in  order  to  form  it  into  line  upon  the  head  of  the  column,  the  colonel 
commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Front  into  line.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  captains  commanding  the 
first  squadron,  the  chiefs  of  the  others  command,  column.,  forward — head 
(f  cotumn  to  the  half  left.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the 
chiefs  of  squadron,  the  first  squadron  is  formed  as  prescribed  for  a  troop. 
No.  535.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  place  themselves  at  the 
head  of  their  column.  The  first  platoon  of  each  squadron  having  made 
a  half  wheel,  is  moved  forward  in  a  diagonal  direction  by  command  of 
its  chiefs,  the  others  following  in  regular  succession.  The  chiefs  of 
squadron  command  f/uide  right  as  soon  as  the  first  platoon  has  changed 
its  direction  to  the  left.  When  the  head  of  the  second  squadron  gets 
within  sixty  paces  of  the  line,  the  chief  of  the  squadron  commands, 
head  of  cotumn  to  the  haff  rit/ht ;  the  chief  of  sfjuadron  commands, 
front  into  fine,  in  time  to  command  march,  when  the  third  platoon  has 
turned  to  the  right,  and  the  fourth  plat<»on  is  marching  toward  its 
l)lace  in  the  line.  The  other  s<|uadrons  are  brought  up  uixm  the  line 
ill  the  same  manner  as  the  second.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the 
colonel  commands  front. 

615.  The  regiment  being  in  column  with  distance,  the  right  in  front, 
if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  bring  it  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he 
commands: 


358  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


1,  Attention.     2.  Into  Ime,  faced  to  the  rear.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the  first  squadron, 
the  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  command,  column,  forward — head  of 
column  to  the  half  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  squadron  performs  the  movement  as 
directed  for  a  single  troop  or  squadron,  No.  537.  The  second  squadron, 
and  the  others  in  succession,  march  in  a  diagonal  direction  toward  the 
line,  the  chief  of  squadron  at  its  head ;  when  at  the  distance  of  sixty 
paces  from  the  line,  he  commands,  head  of  colmnn  to  the  half  left,  fol- 
lowed by  the  command,  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  just  as  the  third 
platoon  has  taken  the  new  direction,  and  before  the  fourth  has  com- 
menced the  half-wheel.  The  squadron  is  then  formed  into  line  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  first,  by  the  commands:  1.  Platoon,  left  about 
wheel.  2.  March.  3.  Halt.  4.  JRight  —  Dress.  5.  Front.  The 
regiment  being, aligned,  the  colonel  commands  front. 

To  form  a  column  ivith  di.^tance  into  line  by  the  union  nf  two 
^  movements. 

616.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  with  distance,  the  right  in 
front,  and  a  portion  of  the  column  having  changed  its  direction  to  the 
right,  if  it  is  desired  to  come  into  line  faced  to  the  front,  the  colonel 
halts  the  column,  a:  the  moment  the  fourth  platoon  of  the  squadron 
which  last  entered  upon  the  new  direction  has  marched  forward  twelve 
paces  after  turning  to  the  right,  and  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.   To  the  left — and  front  into  line.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  the  chiefs  of 
squadron  who  are  in  the  new  direction  command,  left  into  line,  uheel. 
The  chief  of  the  squadron  immediately  in  rear  of  the  one  which 
entered  the  new  direction  last,  commands,  front  into  line.  The  chiefs 
of  the  other  squadrons  command,  column,  forward,  head  of  column  to 
the  half  left.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  field  offi,cers 
and  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  the  portion  of  the  column  in  the  new 
direction  forms  to  the  left  into  line,  which  the  rear  portion  forms  to  the 
front  into  line.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands, 
front. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  and  having  changed  direction  to 
the  left,  is  brought  into  line  to  the  front  upon  the  same  principles,  but 
by  inverse  means. 

617.  The  regiment  marching  in  column  with  distance  right  in  front, 


EVOLUTIONS    OF   THE    REGIMENT.  359 

and  one  portion  having  changed  direction  to  the  left  to  form  it  into 
line  faced  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  halts  the  column  the  moment  the 
fourth  platoon  of  the  squadron  which  last  entered  the  new  direction 
has  turned  to  the  left,  and  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.    To  the  left — and  upon  the  head  of  the  third  (or 
other)  squadron  —  into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  the  chiefs  of 
squadron  whose  squadrons  are  in  the  new  direction  (first  and  second) 
command,  left  info  line,  wheel.  The  chief  of  the  squadron  in  rear  of 
the  last  which  is  in  the  new  direction  (say  the  third),  commands  :  hi/ 
inversion,  front  into  tine.  The  chiefs  of  the  remaining  squadrons 
command  :  1.  Column,  forioard.  2.  Head  of  column  to  the  half  right. 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  field  officers  and  by  the  chiefs 
of  squadrons,  the  squadrons  arc  brought  into  line;  those  on  the  new 
line  are  brought  to  the  left  into  line,  while  those  in  rear,  after  having 
been  brought  l>y  ijirerxion,  front  into  line,  complete  the  movement  by 
platoons,  left  about,  wheel.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel 
commands  front. 

The  column  marching  left  in  front,  having  changed  direction  to  the 
right,  a  portion  still  being  in  the  old  direction,  is  brought  into  line 
upon  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means. 

618.  The  regiment  being  in  column  with  distance,  the  right  in  front, 
to  form  front  into  line  upon  a  line  that  the  head  of  the  column  has 
passed,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.    Upon  the  third  (or  other)  squadron,  front  into 
line.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  the  chiefs  of 
squadrons  which  are  in  front  of  the  designated  squadron,  command, 
platoons,  right  about  wheel.  The  chief  of  the  third  squadron  com- 
mands, front  into  line.  The  chiefs  of  tlie  fourth  and  fifth  squadrons 
command:     1,    Column,  forward.     2.  Head  of  column  to  the  half  left. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  field  officers  and  by  the 
chiefs  of  squadron,  the  third  squadron,  and  those  in  its  rear,  perform 
the  movement  front  into  line  with  the  right  in  front.  The  chiefs  of  the 
first  and  second  squadrons,  after  having  wheeled  about  by  platoons, 
conform  to  what  is  i)resiTil)ed  for  into  line,  faced  to  the  rear,  upon  the 
head  of  the  column,  except  that  they  complete  the  movement  by  a  left 
about  wheel  by  platoons. 

The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands  front. 


To  form  a  close  column  into  line  upon  one  of  its  flanks^  or  upon 
the  prolongation  of  one  of  its  flanks  to  the  front. 

619.  The  regiment  being  in  close  column,  the  right  in  front,  to  form 
it  into  line  upon  the  left  flank  of  the  column,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  By  the  rear  of  the  column — left  into  line,  wheel. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  fifth  squadron  commands, 
squadron,   left  wheel.     The  chiefs  of   the  other  squadrons  command  : 

1.  Sqtiadrons,  forward.  2.  Guide  left.  At  the  command  march, 
repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  the  first  four  squadrons  move 
forward;  the  fifth  executes  its  wheel  to  the  left;  when  it  is  nearly 
completed,    the    chief  commands  :       1.     Forward  ;    and    afterward  : 

2.  Squadron.  3.  Halt.  4.  Left  —  Dress.  5.  Front.  The  chief  of 
the  fourth  squadron  commands,  squadron  left  wheel,  in  time  to  com- 
mand march,  when  the  fifth  squadron  has  made  two-thirds  of  its  wheel 
to  the  left,  completing  the  movement  as  directed  for  the  fifth  squadron. 
The  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  conform  in  succession  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  fovirth.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the 
colonel  commands  front. 

620.  The  regiment  marching  in  close  column,  the  right  in  front,  to 
form  it  into  line  on  the  prolongation  of  the  right  flank  to  the  front,  the 
colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.   On  the  right  into  line.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  squadron  commands, 
riyht.  At  the  command  march,  he  commands  turn;  when  the  wheel  is 
nearly  completed,  he  commands:  1.  Foimvard.  2.  Guide  right;  and 
when  the  squadron  reaches  the  new  line  :  1.  Squadron.  2.  Halt.  3, 
liif/ht — Dress.  4.  Front.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  com- 
mand, guide  right,  throw  themselves  to  the  right  of  their  squadrons, 
and  command  in  succession,  right,  in  time  to  give  the  command  turn, 
when  their  squadron  has  gone  the  proper  distance  beyond  the  left  of 
the  squadron  which  precedes;  the  rest  of  the  movement  is  executed  as 
directed  for  the  first  squadron.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colo- 
nel commands  yVoH^. 

To  deploy  a  close  column. 

621.^  The  regiment  being  in  close  column,  the  right  in  front,  to  deploy 
it  in  advance  of  the  head  of  the  column,  on  one  of  the  interior  squad- 
rons, the  colonel  commands  : 


EVOLUTIONS    OP    THE    REGIMENT.  361 


1.    Attention.       2.     Upon   the   third  squadron — deploy   column. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  second  squadrons 
command,  ^j^o^oo/fs,  riffht  wheel;  the  chiefs  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
mand, p/a^ooHs,  left  toheel.  The  chief  of  the  third  squadron  commands: 
1.  Squadron,  forwnrd;  2  Guide  ri'jht.  At  tlie  command  «irf/-c7<,  repeated 
by  all  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  except  that  of  the  third,  their  squad- 
rons break  by  platoons  to  the  ri(jht  and  left,  when  the  wheels  are  nearly 
complete,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  second  squadrons  command  :  1. 
Forward.  2.  Guide  left;  those  of  the  third  and  fourth  command  :  1. 
Forward.  2,  Guide  rifjht.  They  all  throw  themselves  to  the  head  of 
their  column.  The  chief  of  the  third  squadron  giA-es  the  command 
march,  when  his  front  is  unmasked;  halts  his  squadron  one  pace  be- 
hind the  line,  and  commands:   1.  Eiyht — Dress.     2.  Front. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  march  at  the  head  of  their  respect- 
ive columns,  until  they  have  reached  the  point  on  the  right  or  left  that 
the  left  or  right  of  their  squadron  should  be  from  the  squadron  which 
precedes  them  on  the  left  or  right ;  they  then  halt  in  their  own  persons, 
allow  their  sqviadrons  to  march  past  them,  and  command,  platooiin,  left 
wheel,  if  they  are  on  the  right,  a.n^,  platoons,  right  wheel,  if  they  are  on 
the  left  of  the  third  squadron,  in  time  to  give  the  command  march,  the 
moment  the  rear  platoon  has  gotten  its  proper  interval ;  the  wheels 
being  nearly  completed,  the  chiefs  on  the  right  command  :  1.  For- 
ward. 2.  Guide  left;  those  on  the  left :  1.  Foravard.  2.  Guide  right. 
When  the  squadrons  reach  the  rank  of  file-closers  of  the  squadron  on 
the  left  or  right,  the  chiefs  command  :  1.  Squadron.  2.  Halt.  ?>. 
Left  (or  right) — Dress.  4.  Front.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the 
colonel  commands, /roH^ 

622.  The  squadron  on  the  march  in  close  column,  right  in  front,  to 
deploy  forward  without  halting,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.    Attention.      2.  On  the  first  squadron — deploy   column. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  squadron  commands 
Guide  right,  and  throws  himself  ir^front  of  the  centre  of  his  squadron; 
the  other  chiefs  command,  p^o^oojts,  left  irheel,  trot.  At  the  command 
march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the  last  four  squadrons,  the  first  squad- 
ron continues  to  march  ;  the  others  break  by  platoons,  left  xoheel,  trot, 
and  when  the  wheel  is  nearly  completed,  each  chief  of  squadron  com- 
mands :  1.  FoRAVARD.  2.  Guide  right.  After  reaching  the  point  the 
right  of  bis  squadron  ought  to  occupy,  he  halts,  allows  his  squadron  to 
31 


862  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

march  past  him,  and  commands,  ^^a^oo7is,  right  wheel,  in  time  to  com- 
mand march,  when  his  first  platoon  has  its  proper  place;  the  wheels 
being  nearly  completed,  he  commands  :  1.  Fokward.  2.  Guide  riyht; 
throws  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  squadron,  and  when  he. 
reaches  the  line  on  which  the  first  is  marching,  commands  :  1.  Walk. 
2.  March. 

March  in  line. 

623.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  march  it  to  the  front,  the  colonel 
commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squadrons^  forward.     3.   The  right  (or  left') 
squadron^  the  squadron  of  direction.     4.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  field  oflficers,  the  chiefs  of 
squadrons;  at  the  third  command,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  the 
chiefs  of  squadron  command,  (/jn'rfe  ri<jht  (or  left);  and  the  adjutant 
indicates  the  direction  to  be  taken  by  the  guide  of  the  right  of  the  fii'st 
squadron.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  and 
the  chiefs  of  squadron,  the  regiment  moves  ofi",  and  the  first  squadron 
conforms  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  march  of  a  single  troop  or  squad- 
ron. No.  507  ;  the  others  are  careful  to  preserve  the  alignment  and  their 
intervals  on  the  side  of  the  guide. 

The  regiment  marching  in  line  is  halted  at  the  command : 

1.  Attentiofi.     2.    Squadrons.     3.    Halt.     4.  Right  (or  left) — 

Dress. 

The  last  three  commands  are  repeated  by  the  field  officers  and  the 
chiefs  of  squadron.  The  captains  align  their  squadrons,  and  command 
front.     The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands  front. 

624.  The  regiment  marching  in  line,  Avith  the  guide  right,  to  cause  it 
to  gain  ground  to  the  front  and  ^ank  at  the  same  time,  the  colonel 
commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.    Platoons,  right  half  wheel.     3.    March. 
4.  Forward. 

When  the  colonel  wishes  to  renew  the  march  to  the  front,  he  com- 
mands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Platoons,  left  half  wheel.    3.  March.     4.  For- 
ward. 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE   REGIMENT.  363 

625.  To  gain  ground  to  the  right  without  at  the  same  time  gaining 
to  the  front,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.   2.  Platoons^  right  wheel.    S.March.  4.  Forward. 

The  regiment  having  gained  sufficient  ground  to  the  right,  the  colo- 
nel commands  : 

1.  Attention.    2.  Platoons^  left  wheel.    3.  March.   4.  Forward. 

626.  The  regiment  marching  in  line  with  the  guide  right,  to  cause  it 
to  march  in  retreat,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Platoons^  right  about  wheel.     3.  March. 
4.  Forward. 

To  cause  it  to  resume  the  march  to  the  front,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.    Platoons^  left  about  wheel.     3.  March. 
4.  Forward. 

•  The  last  three  commands  are  repeated  by  the  field  officers  and  chiefs 
of  squadron. 

To  change  the  front  of  the  line. 

627.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  if  it  is  wished  to  change  the  front 
of  the  line  so  that  it  shall  face  to  the  right,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Change  front  on  the  right  wing.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  the  chiefs  of 
squadron  command,  platoons  right  tnhecl.  At  the  command  march,  re- 
peated by  the  field  officers  and  chiefs  of  squadron,  all  the  scjuadrons 
break  by  platoons  to  the  right;  when  the  wheels  are  nearly  completed, 
the  chief  of  the  first  squadron  commands :  1.  Front  into  line.  2. 
March.  3.  Guide  right.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  command  : 
1.  Forward.  2.  Head  of  columm  to  the  half  left,  the  rest  of  the 
movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  for  coming  front  into  line,  the  right 
being  in  front.  No.  535.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel  com- 
mands front. 

628.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  cause  it  to  change  its  front 
to  the  left,  at  the  same  time  gaining  ground  to  the  rear,  the  colonel 
commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.    Change   front    to    rear    on    the    right    wing. 

3.  March. 


364  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  the  chiefs  of 
squadrons  command,  2^f<^foo)}s,  right  wheel.  At  the  command  march, 
repeated  by  the  field  officers  and  chiefs  of  squadron,  all  the  squadrons 
break  by  2'>l<^toon8  to  the  right ;  when  the  wheels  are  nearly  completed, 
the  chief  of  the  first  squadron  commands:  1.  By  inversion,  front  into 
line.  2.  March.  3.  Guide  left;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons 
command:  1.  Forward.  2.  Head  of  column  to  the  half  right ;  the 
remainder  of  the  movement  is  executed  upon  the  principles  for  coming 
into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel 
commands  front. 

To  j)ass  a  defile. 

629.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  and  it  is  proposed  to  pass  a  defile 
in  front  of  some  point  of  the  line,  say  the  interval  between  the  third 
and  fourth  squadrons,  and  the  defile  is  wide  enough  to  admit  the  front 
of  a  division,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.  2.  On  the  fourth  platcon  of  the  third  squadron^ 
and  the  first  of  the  fourth^  pass  the  defile  in  front. 
3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  the  chief  of 
the  third  squadron  commands,  platoons,  left  wheel — fourth  platoon 
forward  ;  that  of  the  fourth  squadron  commands,  platoons,  right  wheel 
first  jylatoon,  forward.  The  chiefs  of  the  first  two  squadrons  command, 
platoons,  left  wheel ;  and  the  chief  of  the  fifth,  platoons,  right  tcheel. 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  field  officers  and  the  chiefs  of 
squadron,  the  two  platoons  designated  march  forward,  and  obliquing 
to  the  right  and  left,  unite;  all  the  others  break  to  the  left  and  right, 
and  the  wheels  being  nearly  completed,  the  chiefs  of  the  squadron  on 
the  right  command:  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  left;  those  of  the 
squadrons  on  the  left:  1.  Forward.  2.  Guide  right.  The  platoons 
of  the  right  and  left  columns  so  regulate  their  march  as  that  those  of 
the  same  number  coming  from  the  head  of  the  column  shall  reach  the 
turning-point  at  the  same  time,  so  that  when  the  turn  is  completed 
they  may  march  through  the  defile  abreast  each  other.  The  column 
thus  formed  passes  the  defile  presenting  the  front  of  a  division,  and 
preserving  the  distances  prescribed  for  a  column  of  platoons. 

When  the  two  squadrons  at  the  head  of  the  column  have  cleared  the 
defile,  the  colonel  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.  Front  into  line.     3.  March. 

The  second  command  is  repeated  by  the  field  officers  and  the  chiefs 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT.        365 

of  the  third  and  fourth  squadrons.  At  the  command  march,  repeated 
by  these  same  officers,  these  t\vo  squadrons  form  froiit  into  line,  the 
head  of  the  columns  of  platoons  obliquing  to  the  right  and  left,  in 
oi'der  to  regain  the  interval  which  should  separate  squadrons.  The 
chiefs  of  the  other  squadrons  continue  to  march  forward,  and  com- 
mand, those  on  the  right,  head  of  column  to  the  right  ;  those  on  the  left, 
head  of  column  to  the  left.  The  columns  move  parallel  to  the  line  of 
battle,  and  when  the  heads  of  squadrons  reach  the  proper  points,  those 
of  the  right  column  are  brought  on  the  left  into  line,  and  those  of  the 
left  on  the  right  into  line.  The  regiment  being  aligned,  the  colonel 
commands  front. 

630.   The  regiment  being  in  line,  to  pass  a  defile  in  rear  of  the  line, 
the  colonel  commands  : 

1.  Attention.  2.  By  platoons  from  the  icings.,  to  pass  the  defile 
in  rear  of  the  interval  betioeen  the  third  and  fourth  squadrons. 
3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  the  chief  of 
the  first  squadron  commands,  platoons  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right, 
to  jnarch  to  the  left.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  same 
officers,  the  first  squadron  breaks  as  directed,  school  of  the  squadron, 
No.  564,  and  the  column  marches  toward  the  defile  in  a  direction 
parallel  to  the  regiment,  until  its  head  reaches  the  defile,  when  it  turns 
to  the  left.  The  chief  of  the  second  squadron  repeats  these  commands 
time  enough  to  follow  the  first  squadron  at  its  proper  distance;  the 
chief  of  the  fifth  squadron  at  the  same  time  commands  :  I.  Platoons, 
break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  to  march  to  the  right.  2.  March  ;  so  that 
the  two  columns  may  reach  the  defile  at  the  same  time,  and  join  after 
turning  into  it,  presenting  the  front  of  a  division.  The  third  and 
fourth  squadrons  break  by  the  same  commands,  and  pass  through  the 
defile  in  the  same  Ava}-  as  has  been  prescribed  for  the  second  and  fifth. 
When  the  squadrons,  after  having  passed  the  defile,  reach  the  new  line 
established  in  rear  of  the  defile,  the  first  turns  to  the  left,  and  when 
the  double  column  i-eaches  it,  the  second  turns  to  the  left,  and  the  fifth 
to  the  right.  When  the  last  platoon  of  each  column  has  turned  into 
the  line,  and  the  two  are  separated  by  the  interval  between  squadrons, 
tlie  colonel,  who  marches  in  rear,  commands  : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Column.     3.  Halt.     4.   To  the  left  and  right 
into  line.     5.  March.     6.  Right — Dress. 

All  these  commands,  except  the  first,  are  repeated  by  the  field  officers 


366         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILTTTA. 

and    chiefs   of  squadron.     The   regiment   being    aligned,    the    colonel 
commands  front. 

The  charge. 

631.  The  regiment  marching  in  line,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1.   Attention   for    the    charge.      2.    Draw — Sabre.      3.    Trot. 

4.  March. 

The  third  command  is  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  and  by  the 
chiefs  of  squadron.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  same 
officers,  the  squadrons  take  the  trot.  After  having  gone  150  paces  at 
this  gait,  the  colonel  commands  : 

1  Gallop.     2.  March. 

The  first  command  is  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  and  by  the 
chiefs  of  squadron;  and  at  the  command  march,  also  repeated  *by 
them,  the  squadrons  take  the  gallop.  After  having  gone  about  one 
hundred  paces  at  this  gait,  and  being  only  about  sixty  paces  from 
the  supposed  line,  the  colonel  causes  the  charge  to  be  sounded.  At 
this  sound,  repeated  by  all  the  trumpets,  all  the  officers  command 
charge.  The  men  of  the  front  and  rear  ranks  place  their  sabres  in 
the  positions  for  the  charge  (see  school  of  the  troop.  No.   554). 

The  colonel  wishing  to  arrest  the  charge,  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squadrons.      3.  Halt.     4.  Right  (or  left^ — 

Dress. 

At  the  command  attention,  repeated  by  all  the  officers,  the  squadrons 
prepare  to  change  the  gait,  and  the  troopers  return  sabres.  At  the 
command  squadrons,  repeated  by  the  field  officers  and  chiefs  of  squad- 
ron, the  chiefs  of  platoon  command  jilatoon,  and  the  squadrons  take 
the  trot.  At  the  command  halt,  repeated  by  the  field  officers,  ttie  chiefs 
of  squadron  and  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  squadrons  halt. 

At  the  command  right  (or  left) — dress,  repeated  by  the  field  officers 
and  by  the  chiefs  of  squadron,  the  squadrons  are  aligned.  The  regi- 
ment being  aligned,  the  colonel  commands  front. 

At  the  sound  of  the  charge,  the  officers  remain  in  their  places  in 
line;  the  colonel  and  other  field  officers  place  themselves  upon  the 
officers'  line. 

Charge  in  column. 

632.  The  charge  in  column  is  employed  against  infantry  formed  in 


EVOLUTIONS    OF    THE    REGIMENT.  367 

column  or  in  square.  For  this  purpose  the  regiment  is  formed  in  close 
column,  and  the  squadrons  take  in  succession  a  distance  equal  to  double 
their  front,  so  that  the  first  squadron  having  charged,  it  is  promptly 
followed  by  the  second,  which,  if  the  first  has  made  an  opening  in  the 
square,  throws  itself  into  it,  and  completes  its  overthrow.  In  case  the 
first  squadron  is  repulsed,  it  retires  by  the  right  and  left,  to  re-form  in 
the  rear,  disengaging  the  front  of  the  second  squadron;  this  squadron 
renews  the  charge ;  if  it  does  not  succeed,  it  clears  the  ground  for  the 
third;  and  thus  they  continue  until  the  charge  may  have  completely 
failed. 

Such  charges,  made  in  rapid  succession,  ought  to  finish  by  breaking 
the  square,  if  they  are  directed  as  they  ought  to  be,  against  the  angles, 
which  are  the  weakest  points,  unless  guarded  by  artillery. 


o68  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Article    XI. 
LIGHT     AETILLEEY     TACTICS. 

.SCHOOL    or    THE    PIECE. 

633.  Light  artillerymen  should,  before  receiving  instruction  in  their 
duties  at  the  piece,  be  familiar  with  the  first  part  of  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  as  laid  down  in  Infantry  Tactics,  and  with  the  Manual  of 
the  Sabre,  No.  440,  and  following.  If  intended  for  horse  artillerymen, 
they  should   also  be  instructed  in  the  duties  of  the  trooper,  No.  382, 

and  following. 

The  drivers  —  one  to  every  pair  of  horses  —  should  have  experience 
in  the  management  of  horses  in  harness. 

634.  The  cannoneers  of  a  piece,  when  united,  constitute  a  gun 
detachment,  which  is  composed  ordinarily  of  nine  men  in  mounted 
artillery,  and  eleven  in  horse  artillery  ;  two  of  whom — the  gunner  who 
commands    the    detachment,    and   the    chief    of  caisson  —  should   be 

corporals. 

The  detachment  is  formed  by  the  gunner,  who  causes  the  cannoneers 
to  form  in  two  ranks,  eighteen  inches  between  them,  elbows  slightly 
turning.  He  tells  the  detachment  off  from  the  right.  No.  1  being  on 
the  right  of  the  rear  rank,  No.  2  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank.  No.  3 
on  the  left  of  No.  1,  No.  4  on  the  left  of  No.  2,  and  so  on,  the  even 
numbers  being  in  the  front,  and  the  odd  numbers  in  the  rear  rank. 
The  chief  of  caisson  is  told  off  as  No.  8.  When  the  detachment  is 
composed  of  more  or  less  than  eight  men,  the  chief  of  caisson  should 
be  the  highest  even  number.  When  the  detachment,  from  any  cause, 
consists  of  less  than  nine  men,  the  higher  numbers  are  left  out,  and 
additional  duties  are  imposed  upon  the  cannoneers  present. 

When  the  chief  of  the  piece,  who  should  be  a  sergeant,  is  present, 
and  is  not  acting  as  the  instructor,  he  performs  the  duties  and  takes 
the  position  of  the  gunner,  who  then  takes  post  one  yard  in  rear  of  the 
right  file,  and  acts  as  file-closer,  except  when  the  chief  of  piece  is  out 
of  ranks,  when  he  resumes  his  post. 

For  purposes  of  instruction,  each  detachment  should  be  halted  in 
front  of  and  facing  the  piece,  the  latter  beiug   unlimbered,  and  the 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  369 

flifferent  numbers  called  upon  successively,  to  perform  their  respective 
duties  in  detail,  while  the  rest  of  the  detachment  are  required  to 
attend  to  the  instruction,  and  to  the  manner  in  which  the  motions  are 
performed. 

Posts  of  the  cannoneers.     Piece  U7ilimbercd. 

635.  The  gunner  is  at  the  end  of  the  trail  handsi)ikc;  Nos.  1  and  2 
are  about  two  feet  outside  the  wheels,  No.  1  on  the  right,  and  No.  2  on 
the  left;  with  howitzers,  they  are  rather  in  ri-ar  of  the  muzzle;  with 
guns,  in  line  with  the  front  part  of  the  wheels.  Nos.  3  and  4  are  in 
line  with  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  covering  Nos.  1  and  2;  No.  5  five 
yards  in  rear  of  the  left  wheel  :  No.  6  in  rear  of  the  limber,  which  is 
turned  about  so  as  to  face  toward  the  piece  (see  No.  29);  and  No.  7  on 
his  left,  covering  No.  5  ;  No.  8,  the  chief  of  the  caisson,  is  four  yards 
in  rear  of  the  limber,  and  on  its  left:  all  face  to  the  left,  which  is  the 
direction  in  which  the  muzzle  of  the  piece  is  pointing. 

The  chief  of  the  piece  is  opposite  the  middle  of  the  trail  handspike, 
outside  of,  and  near  the  left  cannoneers.  In  actual  firing,  he  places 
himself  where  he  can  best  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot. 

Loading  and  firing. 

636.  The  piece  is  supposed  to  be  on  the  drill  ground,  unlimbered, 
and  ready  for  action  ;  the  limber  is  in  position  behind  the  piece,  and 
facing  toward  it,  the  end  of  the  pole  six  j^ards  from  the  end  of  the  trail 
handspike;  and  the  detachment  in  front  of  and  facing  the  piece. 

Before  commencing  the  individual  instruction  of  the  cannoneers,  the 
instructor  should  enter  into  an  explanation  of  the  different  kinds  of  field 
guns,  their  names,  and  the  names  and  uses  of  the  different  parts  of  the 
gun  and  carriage  before  them.  This  done,  he  commences  the  instruc- 
tion with  the  gvmner,  who  commands  and  points  the  piece  in  action. 

637.  Cowmmidivg  and  j^ointiiuj. — The  gunner  is  responsible  for  the 
manner  in  which  the  numbers  discharge  their  duty.  He  communicates 
the  orders  which  he  receives  for  the  kind  of  ammunition  to  be  fired  ; 
sending  to  No.  6  (who  is  charged  with  preparing  the  fuze)  the  time  of 
flight  or  the  distance  for  each  round,  when  firing  shells  or  spherical 
case  shot.  He  should,  when  the  firing  is  slow,  see  that  each  fuze  is 
properly  prepared,  and  make  such  corrections  as  are  necessary;  for 
this  purpose,  he,  as  well  as  No.  6,  should  be  provided  with  a  fuze- 
gouge. 

On  receiving  the  command,  or  signal  to  commence  firing,  he  gives 
the  command  loud ;  takes  hold  of  the  handspike  at  the  end  with  the 


370         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

right  hand,  and  at  the  centre  with  the  left ;  places  his  left  knee  against 
the  left  hand,  bending  over  it,  the  right  knee  being  slightly  bent;  looks 
over  the  top  of  the  piece,  and  gives  the  direction.  He  then  steps  to 
the  breech  to  give  the  elevation,  which  he  does  by  placing  the  hausse 
(see  No.  665)  on  its  seat,  taking  hold  of  a  handle  of  the  elevating 
screw,  drawing  back  his  right  foot,  bending  over  his  loft  knee,  and 
sighting  through  the  slit  in  the  hausse. 

When  the  piece  is  loaded  and  pointed,  he  removes  the  hausse,  gives 
the  command  ready,  and  stepping  clear  of  the  wheel  to  that  side  where 
he  can  best  observe  the  effect  of  his  shot,  gives  the  command  fire.  As 
soon  as  the  piece  has  been  fired,  he  causes  it  to  be  run  up  to  its  former 
place,  if  the  recoil  has  made  it  necessary. 

When  the  instructor,  instead  of  giving  the  command  commence  firing, 
gives  that  of  load,  the  guuner  repeats  it,  and  performs  the  same  duties 
as  before,  except  that  he  does  not  command  fire  until  the  firing  is  or- 
dered to  commence.  After  the  command  to  commence  firing  is  given > 
the  action  is  continued  by  the  gunners  without  further  command  from 
the  instructor,  until  the  firing  is  ordered  to  cease.  When  the  com- 
mands are  all  given  by  the  instructor,  as  in  loading  by  detail,  the  gun- 
ner performs  the  same  duties,  but  without  repeating  the  commands. 

638.  Sj^onging  and  ramming. — Until  the  command  load.  No.  1  stands 
faced  to  the  front,  in  line  with  the  front  of  the  wheels,  holding  the 
sponge  about  the  middle  of  the  staff  in  his  right  hand,  and  trailing  it 
at  an  angle  of  45°,  sponge  head  up. 

The  instructor  commands  : 

Bi/  detail — Load. 

Three  pauses  and  four  motions. 

First  motion.  At  the  command  load,  No.  1  faces  to  the  left,  steps 
obliquely  to  the  right  with  his  right  foot,  without  moving  his  left,  and 
at  the  same  time  brings  the  sponge  to  a  perpendicular  position  by 
drawing  his  right  hand  up  in  line  with  the  elbow.  The  sponge  is  grasp- 
ed firmly  in  the  hand,  the  rammer  head  held  over  the  right  toe,  and  the 
elbow  kept  close  to  the  side. 

Second  motion.  He  steps  obliquely  to  the  left  with  his  left  foot, 
planting  it  about  half-way  between  the  piece  and  the  wheel,  and  oppo- 
site the  muzzle,  bringing  the  sponge  at  the  same  time  across  his  body 
to  the  left,  so  that  his  right  hand  may  be  opposite  the  middle  of  the 
body,  the  sponge  staff  being  inclined  at  an  angle  of  45°  across  the 
front  of  it. 

Third  motion.  He  takes  a  side  step  to  the  right  of  thirty  inches  with 
the  right  foot,  and  bending  the  right  knee,  brings  the  sponge  to  a  hori- 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  371 

zoiital  position,  extending  the  hands  to  the  ends  of  the  staff,  the  sponge 
head  to  the  left,  the  back  of  the  right  hand  up,  and  that  of  his  left 
down,  the  sponge  head  pressing  against  the  face  of  the  piece. 

Fourth  motion.  Ho  inserts  the  sponge  head,  drops  his  left  hand 
behind  his  thigh,  shoulders  square,  feet  equally  turned  out,  straightens 
the  right  knee,  bends  the  left,  and,  leaning  over  it,  forces  the  sponge 
home. 

SrONGE. 

Three  j)au'ics  and  four  motions. 

First  motion.  At  the  comniand  sponye,  No.  1  fixes  his  eye  on  the  vent 
to  see  that  it  is  closed,  gives  two  turns  to  the  sponge,  pressing  it  at  the 
same  time  against  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

Second  motion.  He  draws  out  the  sponge,  at  the  same  time  straight- 
ening his  left  knee  and  bending  his  right,  seizes  the  staff  near  the 
sponge  head  with  his  left  hand,  back  of  the  hand  down,  and  places  the 
sponge  against  the  face  of  the  piece. 

Third  motion.  He  turns  the  sponge  by  bringing  his  hands  together  in 
the  middle  of  the  staff,  giving  a  cant  with  each  hand,  throwing  the 
sponge  head  over,  at  the  same  time  turning  his  wrists,  so  as  to  bring 
the  staff  to  a  horizontal  position ;  he  then  extends  his  hands  to  the 
ends  of  the  staff,  the  back  of  the  left  up.  that  of  the  right  down. 

During  the  whole  time  of  sponging,  No.  1  keeps  his  eye  on  the  vent. 
If  at  any  time  it  is  not  closed,  he  will  discontinue  the  manoeuvre,  and 
command,  stoj)  rent. 

Fourth  motion.  He  introduces  the  rammer  head  into  the  muzzle  as 
soon  as  No.  2  has  inserted  the  charge,  and  joins  his  left  hand  to  his 
right,  casting  his  eyes  to  the  front. 

Ram. 

^jdH^  Two  ].)an>iex  and  three   uiotionti. 

Firfit  motion.  At  the  command  ram,  No.  1  rams  home,  throwing 
the  weight  of  his  body  with  the  rammer ;  bending  over  his  left 
knee,  and  passing  his  left  arm,  with  the  elbow  slightly  bent,  and 
back  of  the  hand  up,  in  a  horizontal  position  over  the  knee,  until  it 
points  in  the  direction  of  the  left  trunnion  ;  the  right  shoulder 
thrown  back,  and  the  eyes  cast  toward  the  front  until  the  cartridge 
is  home. 

Second  motion.  He  jerks  the  sponge  out  with  his  right  hand,  al- 
lowing it  to  slide  through  the  hand  as  far  as  the  middle  of  the  staff, 


372  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 

when  he  grasps  it  firmly,  and  seizing  it  close  to  the  rammer  head  with 
the  left  hand,  back  of  the  hand  up,  places  the  rammer  hand  against  the 
face  of  the  piece,  straightens  his  left  knee  and  stands  erect;  eyes  to  his 
own  front. 

I'liird  motion.  He  then  draws  the  sponge  close  to  his  body,  and 
immediately  steps  back  outside  the  wheel,  first  with  the  right,  then 
with  the  left  foot;  so  that  when  the  right  foot  is  brought  to  it,  the 
right  hip  may  be  on  a  line  with  the  front  of  the  wheel.  In  draw- 
ing the  right  foot  to  the  left,  he  gives  the  sponge  a  cant  with  his 
left  hand,  at  the  same  time  quitting  it,  and  brings  the  sponge  to  a 
perpendicular  position  in  the  right  hand,  the  rammer  head  resting  on 
the  right  toe. 

Ready.  At  this  command,  which   is  given  as   soon  as   the  piece  is 

loaded,  or  the  firing  about  to  commence.  No.  1  breaks  well  off  to  the 
left  with  his  left  foot,  bending  the  left  knee  and  straightening  the  right 
leg,  drops  the  end  of  the  sponge  staff  into  the  left  hand,  back  of 
tlie  hand  down,  and  fixes  his  eyes  on  the  muzzle.  The  heels  should 
be  parallel  with   the  wheel,  the  body  erect  on  the  haunches,  and  the 

sponge  and   rammer  held  in  both  hands  in  a  horizontal  position,  the 

sponge  head  to  the  left. 

The   piece   having  been   fired.   No.  1  rises   on  his   right  knee,  and 

returns  to  his  position  as  in  the  third  motion  of  ram. 

At  the  command  load,  he   steps  in   and  performs  his  duties  in   the 

same  manner  as  before. 

When    the    loading  is   not  by    detail.   No.    1    goes    through    all  his 

duties    at    the   command    load,    returns    to    his    position    outside   the 

wheel,  as  given   in  the  third   motion  of  ram ;  breaks  off  at  the  com- 

nigmd  ready,  and  at  the  firing  of  the  gun  rises,  steps  in,  and  performs 

his  duties  as  before.  This  he  continues  until  the  command  cease 
firiiuj   is  given,   at  which   command   he    resumes  the   position    he  had 

before  the  first  command  load.     If  the  sponging  has  been  commenced 

when    the   command  cease  firing  is  given,  it  is  completed  before  No.  I 

resumes  his  post. 

In  sponging  and  ramming,  if  the  length  of  the  piece  req^iires  it,  the 

sponge  and  rammer   are   to   be   pressed   home  in   two   motions,  No.  1 

extending  his  right  hand  to  the  end  of  the  staff  as  soon  as  it  reaches 

the  muzzle. 

In  sponging  howitzers,  No  1  presses  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of  the 

chamber,  which  should  be  well  sponged   out;  he   wipes  the  bore  by 

rubbing  its  whole  surface,  without  allowing  the  sponge  to  turn  in  his 

hands. 

639.  Loading.— Th.Q  instructor  places  No.  2  on  the  left  of  the  piece, 

where  he  remains  faced  to  the  front  until  the  command  loud.     At  this 


m^ 


LIGHT   ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  373 

command,  he  faces  to  his  right,  and  by  two  oblique  steps,  correspond- 
ing to  those  of  No.  1,  the  first  with  his  left  foot,  the  second  with  his 
right,  at  the  command  two,  he  places  himself  near  the  muzzle  of  the 
piece.  At  the  command  three,  he  brings  up  his  left  foot  to  the  side  of 
the  right,  and  faces  to  the  right,  bringing  his  hands  together  to  receive 
the  ammunition  from  No.  5  ;  the  cartridge  in  the  right,  the  shot  in  the 
ott  hand.  As  soon  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn  by  No.  1,  he  faces  to 
the  left,  and  puts  the  ammunition  into  the  muzzle,  taking  care  that  the 
seam  of  the  cartridge  does  not  come  under  the  vent,  and  then  steps 
back,  commencing  with  his  left  foot,  to  his  position  outside  the  wheel, 
in  the  same  manner  that  No.  1  does. 

At  the  command  read;,,  he  breaks  off  well  to  the  right  with  his  rio-ht 
foot,  bending  the  right  knee,  and  straightening  the  left  knee;  the 
body  erect  on  the  haunches,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  muzzle. 

The  piece  having  been  fired,  No.  2  raises  on  his  left  leg,  remains 
facing  the  piece  until  he  hears  the  oomman.l  /nad,  or  the  firing  of  the 
gun;  then  steps  in,  and  performs  his  duty  as  before.  At  the  command 
cea,e  firin.j,  he  resumes  his  position  outside  the  wheel,  and  faces  to  the 
Iront. 

With  the  hoioltzcr,  No  2  puts  in  the  charge  so  that  the  fuze  may  rc^t 
against  the  rammer  head,  and  No.  1  rams  it  home  very  carefully. 

(UO.  Serving  the  t;e«f.— The  instructor  places  No.  3  on  the  right  of 
the  piece,  on  a  line  with  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  and  covering  No.  1  ; 
he  holds  the  priming  wire  in  his  right  hand,  thumb  through  the  rin-' 
the  thumbstall  on  the  left  thumb,  and  the  tube  pouch  fastened  to  his 
waist. 

At  the  command  load,  he  steps  to  his  left,  wipes  the  vent  field  (.,r 
surface  around  the  vent)  with  the  thumbstall,  which  he  then  holds 
pressed  upon  the  vent,  keeping  his  elbow  raised;  his  fingers  on  the  left 
side  of  the  piece,  so  as  to  allow  the  gunner  to  point  over  his  thumb  ; 
the  right  hand  on  the  tube  pouch.  When  the  piece  is  sponged,  and 
the  charge  inserted  by  No.  2,  he  jumps  to  the  end  of  the  trail  hand- 
spike, and,  seizing  it  with  both  hands,  prepares  to  move  it  to  the  right 
or  left,  on  a  signal  from  the  gunner,  who  taps  the  right  of  the  trail  for 
a  movement  to  the  left,  and  the  left  of  it  for  a  movement  to  the  right. 
As  soon  as  the  piece  is  pointed,  the  gunner  raises  both  hands  1^  a 
signal  to  No.  3,  who  then  resumes  his  post. 

At  the  command  ready,  he  steps  to  the  piece,  pricks  the  cartridge, 
taking  care  not  to  move  the  charge,  and  covers  the  vent  with  his  left 
hand  as  soon  as  the  friction  tube  is  inserted.  At  the  command  fire,  ho 
steps  to  his  right,  clear  of  the  right  wheel,  and  at  the  firing  of 'the 
gun,  or  at  the  command  load,  serves  the  vent  as  before. 


374  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

No.  3  must  keep  the  vent  closed  from  the  time  the  sponge  enters  the 
muzzle,  until  the  charge  is  inserted  by  No.  2. 

641.  Firing. — The  instructor  places  No.  4  on  the  left  of  the  piece, 
opposite  No.  3,  and  covering  No.  2 ;  he  is  equipped  with  a  tube  pouch 
and  lanyard. 

At  the  command  load,  No.  4  inserts  the  lanyard  hook  into  the  ring 
of  a  primer,  and  stands  fast. 

At  the  command  ready,  he  steps  in  with  the  right  foot,  drops  the 
tube  in  the  vent,  takes  the  lanyard  in  his  right  hand,  moves  to  the  rear 
so  far  as  to  keep  the  lanyard  slack,  but  capable  of  being  stretched, 
without  altering  his  position,  which  should  be  outside  the  wheel,  the 
left  foot  broken  to  the  left  and  rear. 

As  soon  as  No.  3  is  clear  of  the  wheel  after  the  command  ftre  is 
given.  No.  4  pulls  the  lanyard  briskly  and  firmly,  passing  the  hand, 
back  up,  in  a  downward  direction  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  keep  the  lanyard 
hook  from  flying  back  in  the  direction  of  the  face.  Should  the  tube 
fail  to  explode  the  charge,  the  gunner  immediately  commands,  don't 
advance,  the  primer  has  failed.  Upon  which  No.  2  steps  inside  the 
wheel,  close  to  the  axletree,  receives  a  priming  wire  over  the  wheel 
from  No.  3,  and  a  prepared  primer  from  No.  4,  pricks,  inserts  the 
primer,  and  resumes  his  post.  At  the  command  cease  firing,  No.  4 
secures  his  lanyard. 

In  the  absence  of  No.  4,  No.  3  discharges  his  duties ;  after  pricking 
the  cartridge,  he  prepares  and  inserts  a  friction  tube,  steps  to  his  post, 
faces  the  vent,  breaks  to  his  rear  with  his  left  foot,  and  at  the  command 
fire,  discharges  the  piece.  He  then  resumes  his  post,  and  tends  the 
vent  as  before. 

642.  Serving  Ammunition. — The  instructor  stations  No.  5  five  yards 
in  rear  of  the  left  wheel,  and  covering  it,  No.  7  in  the  rear  of  and  near 
the  left  limber  wheel,  and  No.  6  in  rear  of  the  limber  chest  to  issue 
ammunition.  He  is  provided  with  a  fuze-gouge,  and  prepares  the  shells 
or  spherical  case  shot,  according  to  the  distance  or  time  ordered,  before 
delivering  them  to  No.  5. 

To  cut  the  Fuze. — Place  the  projectile  between  the  knees,  fuze  upper- 
most, and  support  it  with  the  left  hand.  Holding  the  fuze-gouge  in  the 
right  hand,  place  the  left  corner  of  its  edge  close  to,  and  on  the  right 
of  the  graduated  mark  indicating  the  time  desired;  then  cut  away 
gradually  until  the  composition  is  exposed  for  a  length  about  equal  to 
the  width  of  the  gouge.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  cut  the  fuzes  more 
rapidly  than  the  demand  for  shells  or  case  shot  requires. 

At  the  command  loud,  No.  5  runs  to  the  ammunition  chest,  receives 
from  No.  7  or  No.  6  a  single  round,  the  shot  in  the  right  hand,  the  car- 
tridge in  his  left;  takes  it  to  the  piece  and  delivers  it  to  No.  2;  returns 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  375 

immediately  for  another  round,  and  then  halts  at  his  post  until  the 
piece  is  fired.  In  firing  shell  or  spherical  case,  he  exhibits  the  fuze  to 
the  gunner  before  delivering  it  to  No.  2. 

Ammunition  pouches  are  worn  by  Nos.  5  and  7,  hung  from  the  left 
shoulder  to  the  right  side;  the  round  is  so  placed  in  the  pouch  that  the 
cartridge  will  be  to  the  front.  When  it  is  brought  up,  No.  6  holds  open 
the  pouch,  and  No.  2  takes  out  the  round  with  both  hands.  In  rapid 
firing  with  round  shot  and  canister,  Nos.  5  and  7  may  alternate  in 
delivering  the  charges.  At  the  command  cease  firing,  No.  5  carries  the 
round  back  to  No.  6.  No.  6  should  keep  the  lid  of  the  ammunition 
chest  closed  as  much  as  possible.  At  the  command  cease  firing,  he 
carefully  replaces  the  ammunition  in  the  chest,  and  secures  the  lid. 

643.  Loading  by  detail. — For  the  instruction  of  the  cannoneers  united 
for  the  service  of  the  gun,  the  exercise  is  first  conducted  by  detail,  the 
instructor   giving    all    the   commands.     IJis   commands   are:   Load  hy 

detail — LOAD  J  TAVO,  THREE,  FOUR  :  SrONGE  ',  TWO,  THREE,  FOUR  ;  RAM  ] 
TWO,  THREE  :    READY  J    FIRE  ',    CEASE    FIRING. 

When  the- men  are  sufficiently  instructed  to  go  through  the  manual 
without  detail,  the  commands  of  the  instructor  for  that  purpose  are : 
load;  commence  firing ;  cease  firing ;  or  simply,  commence  firing,  and 
cease  firing.  After  the  command  commence  firing,  the  action  is  con- 
tinued as  laid  down  for  loading  without  detail,  until  the  command 
cease  firing  is  given,  which  is  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  piece  and 
the  gunner. 

Moving  the  piece  hy  hand.     Piece  unlimhered. 

644.  To  the  front. — The  cannoneers  being  at  their  posts,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  By  hand  to  the  front.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  gunner  seizes  the  end  of  the  handspike, 
and  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  the  spokes  of  the  wheels.  No.  1  with  his  left 
hand;  Nos.  2,  3  and  4,  with  both  hands;  No.  1  holds  the  sponge  with 
his  right  hand,  the  staff  resting  upon  his  right  shoulder,  sponge  head 
down.  At  the  second  command  they  move  the  piece  forward,  the  gunner 
raising  the  trail  until  the  command  halt  is  given,  when  all  resume  their 
posts. 

645.  To  the  rear. — The  instructor  commands; 

1.  By  hand  to  the  rear.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  gunner,  lacing  to  the  rear,  seizes  the  hand- 
spike with  his  right  hand;    Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  seize   the  wheels  as 


376  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

before,  except  that  No.  1,  holding  the  sponge  in  his  left  hand,  uses  his 
ri"ht  hand  at  the  wheel.  At  the  command  march,  they  move  the  piece 
to  the  rear,  the  gunner  raising  the  trail,  until  the  command  hrdt  is  given, 
when  all  resume  their  posts. 

Changing  posts.  , 

646.  In  order  to  instruct  the  men  in  all  the  duties  at  the  piece,  the 
instructor  causes  them  to  change  posts. 
For  this  purpose  he  commands  : 

1.   Change  posts.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  chanrfe  jiosts,  the  men  on  the  right  of  the  piece  face 
to  the  rear ;  those  who  have  equipments  lay  them  down  ;  No.  1  resting 
the  sponge  head  on   the  nave  of  the  wheel.     At  the  command  march, 
each  man  takes  the  place  and  equipments  of  the  man  in  his  front. 
No.  1  takes  the  place  of  No.  3. 


No.  3 

No.  8. 

No.  8             « 

No.  6. 

No.  6             " 

No.  7. 

No.  7 

No.  5. 

No.  5             " 

No.  4. 

No.  4 

No.  2. 

No.  2 

No.   1. 

The  gunner  changes  with  one  of  the  numbers,  by  special  direction 
of  the  instructor. 

647.  Equipments. — The  gunner,  who  is  responsible  for  the  equip- 
ments, either  distributes  them  from  the  limber  chest,  or  they  may  be 
hung  on  the  neck  of  the  cascable,  and  distributed  by  him  to  the  proper 
numbers,  at  the  command,  take  equijinients,  from  the  instructor.  He 
receives  them  again  at  the  command,  replace  equipments,  making  such 
disposition  of  them  as  may  be  directed. 

Limbering. 

648.  To  the  front. — The  instructor  commands  : 

Limber  to  the  front. 

At  this  command.  No.  1  steps  up  between  the  muzzle  and  the  wheel, 
by  the  oblique  steps  indicated  for  loading ;  turns  the  staflF,  seizing  it 
with  the  left  hand,  at  the  same  time  shifting  his  right,  the  back  of  the 
right  up,  that  of  the  left  down,  and  passes  the  sponge  on  its  hook; 


tilGrtT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  377 

rammer  head  to  the  rear,  to  No.  3,  who  receives  the  head,  secures  it 
against  the  stop,  and  keys  it  up.  The  piece  is  then  brought  about  by 
the  cannoneers,  and  the  limber,  inclining  to  the  right,  passes  to  its 
place  in  front  of  it,  be  ng  drawn,  when  the  horses  are  not  attached, 
by  Nos.  6  and  7,  who  take  hold  of  the  end  of  the  pole  for  the  purpose. 

To  bring  the  piece  about,  the  gunner  and  No.  5  pass  to  the  right  of 
the  handspike,  and,  facing  toward  the  left,  seize  it,  the  gunner  near 
the  end,  and  No.  5  at  the  middle,  and  on  his  right,  raise  the  trail  and 
carry  it  round  to  the  leftj  Nos.  1  and  2  bear  down  upon  the  muzzle, 
and  Nos.  3  and  4,  each  using  both  hands,  bring  the  wheels  around  ; 
No.  3  turning  the  right  wheel  to  the  rear,  and  No.  4  the  left  wheel  to 
the  front.  When  the  piece  is  brought  about,  the  trail  is  lowered;  Nos. 
3  and  4  step  within  the  wheels  to  avoid  the  limber ;  Nos.  1  and  2  re- 
main at  the  muzzle,  and  the  gunner  and  No.  5  step  up  between  Nos.  3 
and  4  and  the  trail,  the  gunner  first  taking  out  the  handspike,  and 
passing  it  to  No.  4,  by  whom  it  is  put  up. 

As  soon  as  the  limber  is  in  front  of  the  piece,  the  gunner  commands, 
halt,  limber  ujj;  upon  which  the  limber  halts,  the  gunner  and  No.  6 
raise  the  trail  by  means  of  the  handles,  and,  assisted  by  Nos.  3  and  4 
at  the  wheels,  and  Nos.  1  and  2  at  the  muzzle,  run  the  piece  forward, 
and  place  the  lunette  upon  the  pintle;  the  gunner  then  puts  in  the 
key,  and  all  take  their  posts;  when  necessary,  Nos.  6  and  7  assist  at 
the  trail  in  bringing  the  piece  about,  and  in  limbering  up. 

649.  To  the  right  (or  left). — The  in.structor  commands  : 

Limber  to  tlie  right  (or  left). 

The  trail  is  turned  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  the  piece  limbered 
up  as  before;  the  limber  inclining  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  taking  its 
place  by  a  right  (or  left)  wheel. 

650.  To  the  rear. — The  instructor  commands: 

Limber  to  the  rear. 

The  limber  inclines  to  the  right,  and  takes  its  place  l)y  wheeling 
about  to  the  left;  the  piece  is  then  limbered  up  as  before. 


Posts  of  the  cannoneers.     Piece  limbered. 

051.  Nos.  1  and  2  opposite  the  muzzle;  Nos.  3  and  4  o^jposite  the 

knob  of   the  cascable ;    the   gunner  and  No.  5  opposite  the  rear,  and 

Nos.  6  and  7  opposite  the  front   parts   of  the  limber  wheels;   No.   8 

is  on  the  left,  and  opposite  the  limber  chest  of  the  caisson.     Al^  face 

to  the  front,  which  is  now  in  the  direction  of  the  pole  instead  of  the 
32 


378         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

muzzle,  and  cover  each  other  in  lines  one  yard  from  the  wheels ; 
the  even  numbers  on  the  right,  the  odd  on  the  left.  The  chief  of  the 
piece  is  on  the  left,  and,  if  not  mounted,  opposite  the  end  of  the  polej 
if  mounted,  he  is  near  the  leading  driver,  and  on  his  left. 

To  form  the  detachment. 
652.   To  the  front. — The  instructor  commands :  ♦  - 

Detachment — Front. 

The  gunner  commands,  cannoneers,  forward,  march;  the  even  num- 
bers move  directly  to  the  front ;  the  odd  numbers  closing  to  the  right 
upon  them  when  clear  of  the  piece.  The  gunner  files  them  to  the  left, 
halts  the  detachment  in  front  of  the  piece,  and  faces  them  to  the  front. 
No.  8  moves  directly  forward,  and  takes  his  place  in  the  detachment. 

663.   To  the  rear. — The  instructor  commands  : 

Detachment — Rear. 

The  gunners  command,  cannoneers,  rear  face,  march.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  odd  numbers  move  directly  to  the  rear,  the  even, 
numbers  closing  to  the  right  upon  them  after  passing  the  piece,  the 
detachment  is  filed  to  the  left  at  the  proper  distance,  halted  by  the  gun- 
ner opposite  the  i)iece  and  faced  to  the  front.  No.  8  taking  his  proper 
place  in  the  detachment. 

In  forming  the  detachments  in  line,  they  are  always,  after  halting, 
dressed  to  the  right  by  the  gunner. 

Posts  of  the  detachments  at  their  pieces. 

654.  In  front. — The  detachment  is  in  line  facing  to  the  front,  two 
yards  from  the  end  of  the  pole  or  the  leading  horses. 

Li  rear. — The  centre  of  the  detachment  in  two  yards,  behind  the 
muzzle,  and  facing  it. 

On  the  right  or  left. — The  detachment  is  in  line  opposite  the  axle- 
tree  of  the  limber,  and  thi"ee  yards  from  it.  In  horse  artillery,  it  is 
in  line  with,  and  three  yards  from  the  leading  horses.  In  all  cases  it 
faces  to  the  front. 

Change  of  posts  of  detachments  at  their  pieces. 

655.  From  front  to  rear. — The  detachments  being  in  line,  in  front 
of  their  pieces,  to  post  them  in  rear,  the  instructor  commands: 


\ 


LIGHT   ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  379 

Detachments — Rear. 

The  gunner  commands,  cannoneers,  rear  face,  march.  At  the 
command  march,  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  oblique  sufficiently  to  the  left, 
and  Nos.  5,  6,  7  and  8  to  the  right,  move  along  the  sides  of  their 
piece  j  reutfite  as  soon  as  they  have  passed  it,  and  are  halted  at  the 
proper  distance,  faced  to  the  front,  and  aligned  to  the  right  by  the 
gunner,      t 

From  rear  to  front. — The  instructor  commands: 

Detachments — Front. 

The  gunner  repeats  the  command,  and  adds  march.  At  this  com- 
mand, the  cannoneers  oblique;  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  to  the  right,  Nos. 
5,  6,  7  and  8  to  the  left;  pass  their  piece,  reunite  in  front,  and  are 
halted  and  aligned  to  the  right  by  the  gunner. 

From  rear  to  riyht  (or  left). — The  instructor  commands: 

Detachments — right  (or  left.) 

The  gunner  commands,  right  (or  left)  oblique,  march,  and  afterward 
forward,  and  halt,  in  time  to  bring  the  detachment  to  its  post  on  the 
right  or  left.     He  then  aligns  it  to  the  right. 

In  horse  artillery,  to  change  from  front  to  rear,  the  gunners  com- 
mand, left  reverse,  March;  Forward;  left  reverse,  March;  Halt. 
The  left  reverse  is  executed  on  the  same  principle  as  the  left  about  wheel 
in  cavalry  tactics. 

From  rear  to  front. — The  gunners  command,  right  oblique,  March; 
Forward.     Left  oblique,  march ;  FoRAVARD;  Halt. 

From  rear  to  right  (or  left). — The  gunners  command,  right  (or  left) 
oblique;  MARCH ;  Forward;  Halt. 

From  right  (or  left)  to  rear. — The  gunners  command,  right  (or  left) 
reverse;  March;  Forward;  right  (or  left)  reverse,  March;  Halt. 

If  the  piece  is  moving  when  the  last  change  of  post  is  ordered,  the 
gunner  halts,  or  slackens  the  pace  until  it  passes,  and  then  commands^ 
left  (or  right)  obliqxie.     MARCH ;  Forward. 

The  commands  of  the  instructor  in  all  these  cases  are  the  same  as  in 
mounted  artillery.  The  movements  ai'e  executed  in  the  same  manner 
when  the  detachments  are  dismounted. 

To  post  the  cannoneers  at  the  piece  limbered. 

656.  The  detachment  being  formed  in  line  in  front  or  rear,  on  the 
right  or  left,  the  instructor  commands : 


380  MANUAL    FOR   VotitJNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

CANNONEbtiS,    TO   YOUR   POSTS. 

From  tlie  front. — The  gunner  passes  the  detachment  to  the  right,  and 
commands,  to  your  jJosts,  march.  At  this  command,  the  cannoneers, 
Nos.  1  and  2,  turning  to  the  right,  and  opening  out,  file  to  their  posts; 
halt  at  their  ]Droper  places,  and  face  to  the  front. 

From  the  rear,  right  or  left. — At  the  command  cannoneers,  to  your 
posts,  the  gunner,  in  each  case,  faces  the  detachment  to  the  left,  and 
marches  the  cannoneers  by  that  flank  to  their  posts.  » 

Moving  the  piece  hy  hand.     Piece  Umbered. 

657.  To  the  front. — The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos,  6  and  7  seize  the  end  of  the  pole  with 
both  hands,  the  gunner  and  No.  5,  facing  toward  the  pole,  seize  the 
splinter-bar  with  one  hand,  and  the  pole  with  the  other.  Nos.  3  and  4 
seize  the  spokes  of  the  hind  wheels  with  both  hands,  and  Nos.  1  and  2 
apply  both  hands  at  the  head  of  the  carriage.  At  the  second  com- 
mand, all  acting  together,  urge  the  piece  forward  until  the  command 
halt  is  given,  when  all  resume  their  posts. 

To  the  rear. — The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Backtvard.     2.  March.     3.  Halt. 

At  the  fii'st  command,  all  face  to  the  rear;  Nos.  6  and  7  seize  the  end 
of  the  pole  with  both  hands;  No.  5  and  the  gunner  seize  the  spokes  of 
the  limber,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  those  of  the  hind  wheels.  At  the 
command  march,  all  moving  together,  move  the  piece  to  the  rear,  Nos. 
6  and  7  keeping  it  straight  by  the  use  of  the  pole.  At  the  command 
halt,  all  resume  their  posts. 

UnlijJibering,  and  coming  into  action. 
To  the  front. — The  instructor  commands: 
Action — Front. 

658.  At  this  command,  the  gunner  takes  out  the  key,  and  assisted  by 
No.  5,  raises  the  trail  from  the  pintle,  and  then  commands  drive  on, 
upon  which  Nos.  6  and  7  reverse  the  limber,  and  proceed  with  it  to  the 
rear.     Again  reverse  to  the  lefc,  and  halt  so  that  the  limber  shall  cover 


LIGHT   ARTILLERY   TACTICS.  381 

the  piece,  with  the  end  of  the  pole  six  yards  from  the  end  of  the  trail 
handspike.  At  the  same  time  that  the  limber  moves  oflF,  the  piece  is 
brought  about  in  all  respects  as  in  limbering  to  the  front,  except  that 
the  gunner  and  No.  5,  without  lowering  the  trail,  carry  it  about,  each 
by  means  of  the  handle  on  his  own  side.  Nos.  6  and  7,  when  neces- 
sary, assist  at  the  trail,  after  placing  the  limber  in  position. 

As  soon  as  the  piece  is  brought  about,  and  the  trail  lowered,  No.  4 
takes  out  the  handspike  and  passes  it  to  the  gunner,  who  fixes  it  in  the 
trail.  No.  1  takes  out  the  sponge,  No.  3  unkcying  it,  and  No.  4  pre- 
pares his  lanyard.  All  then  take  their  posts  as  required  when  the 
piece  is  unlimhered. 

To  the  ritjht  (or  left). — The  instructor  commands  : 

Action,  right  {or   left). 

659.  The  piece  is  unlimhered  in  the  same  manner  as  for  action,  front, 
and  placed  in  the  required  direction;  the  limber  wheels  to  the  left 
(or  right),  and  takes  its  place  in  rear,  by  reversing  to  the  left  (or 
right). 

To  the  rear, — The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.      2.  In  battery. 

660.  At  the  command  in  battery,  the  piece  is  unlimhered  as  before ; 
the  trail  immediately  lowered,  and  the  gun  prepared  for  action;  the 
limber  moves  directly  forward  at  the  command  drive  on,  from  the 
gunner,  and  takes  its  place  by  coming  to  the  left  about. 

Movements  with  the  prolonge. 

661.  The  piece  being  in  battery,  to  fix  the  prolonge  to  fire  retiring, 
the  instructor  commands  : 

Fix  prolonge  to  fire  retiring. 

At  this  command,  the  limber  inclines  to  the  right,  wheels  to  the  left 
about,  and  halts  four  yards  from  the  trail.  No.  5  uncoils  the  prolonge 
and  passes  the  toggle  to  the  gunner,  who  fixes  it  in  the  trail  by 
passing  it  upward  through  the  lunette,  whilst  he  attaches  the  other 
end  to  the  limber  by  passing  the  ring  over  the  pintle  and  keying  it. 

At  the  command  retire,  the  cannoneers  face  about  and  all  march  on 
the  left  of  the  piece,  except  Nos.  1  and  3.  They  keep  the  implements 
in  their  hands,  and,  at  the  command  halt,  face  about,  resume  their 
posts,  and  go  on  with  the  firing. 

Should  the  piece  be  loaded  at  the  command  retire,  No.  3  puts  in  the 
priming  wire.     At  the  command  halt,  ho  takes  it  out  again,  and  No.  1 


382         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

rams  home.  If  the  command  load  be  given  when  the  piece  is  in 
motion,  No.  5  puts  in  the  charge,  and  No.  2  serves  vent,  receiving  from 
No.  3  the  necessary  implements  for  that  purpose. 

The  piece  being  in  action,  to  fix  the  prolonge  to  fire  advancing,  the 
instructor  commands: 

Fix  prolonge  to  fire  advancing. 

At  this  command,  the  limber  passes  its  piece  on  the  right  and  halts 
when  in  front  of  it,  Nos.  1  and  3  stepping  within  the  wheels  to  avoid 
the  limber.  No.  5  uncoils  the  prolonge,  carries  it  to  the  front,  gives 
the  toggle  to  No.  2,  who  puts  it  in  the  lunette  of  the  axle-strap,  whilst 
he  places  the  ring  over  the  jjintle  and  keys  it. 

In  advancing,  the  men  retain  their  implements  and  march  at  their 
posts.  At  the  command  halt,  No.  2  takes  out  the  toggle  and  com- 
mands drive  on,  upon  which  the  limber  takes  its  place  in  rear,  and 
the  firing  is  renewed. 

When  the  piece  is  limbered,  to  fix  the  prolonge  to  fire  retiring  or 
advancing,  the  same  commands  are  given.  The  piece  is  unlimbered, 
and  the  prolonge  attached  as  before. 

To  fix  the  prolonge  passing  a  ditch,  or  for  any  other  purpose,  the 
command  is,  Jix  liroloncje.  The  prolonge  is  then  fixed  to  the  trail  as 
before. 

In  moving  with  the  prolonge,  the  gunner  attends  the  handspike, 
and  in  changes  of  direction,  is  careful  to  circulate  the  trail  round  in 
proper  time  to  prevent  the  prolonge  being  cut  by  the  wheels.  No.  7 
clears  the  prolonge  from  the  limber  wheels,  and  Nos.  1  and  2  from  the 
gun  wheels.  In  wheeling  about  the  limber  first  backs  a  little  and 
then  describes  a  small  circle.  In  passing  a  ditch  the  gunner  takes  out 
the  handspike. 

In  fixing  the  prolonge  for  any  purpose,  the  caisson  wheels  or 
reverses,  if  necessary,  so  that  the  horses  of  the  limber  and  caisson 
may  face  in  the  same  direction. 

To  detach  the  prolonge  from  the  limber  and  coil  it  up,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

Coil  prolonge.  ^^ 

At  this  command,  the  gunner  takes  out  the  toggle,  and  No.  5  takes 
ofi"  the  ring  and  coils  the  prolonge,  first  passing  the  ring  over  the  upper 
prolonge  hook. 

To  coil  the  prolonge  and  limber  the  piece,  the  instructor  commands, 
coil  prolonge — limber  to  the  rear.  The  prolonge  is  detached  and  coiled 
as  before,  the  piece  is  run  toward  the  limber,  which  reins  back  on  re- 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY   TACTICS.  383 

ceiving  the  command  rein  hack  from  the  gunner,  and  is  limbered  up. 
To  hmber  to  the  front,  right  or  left,  the  instructor  commands,  coil 
prolongc-limher  to  the  front,  right  or  left;  which  is  executed  as  al- 
ready described,  the  gunner  commanding  drive  on,  as  soon  as  the  pro- 
longe  is  detached. 

Service  of  the  gun  with  diminished  numbers. 

662.  Disabled  men  are  replaced  as  soon  as  possible  by  the  highest 
numbers,  or,  if  men  are  selected  to  replace  them,  the  highest  numbers 
will  be  reduced  to  fill  the  vacancies  thus  created.  During  action,  Nos. 
]  and  2  may  occasionally  change  places  and  numbers;  the  duties  of 
No.  1  arc  very  fatiguing. 

Service  of  the  piece  hy  two  »»e».-The  gunner  commands,  points, 
serves  the  vent,  and  fires;  No.  1  sponges,  loads,  and  serves  ammuni- 
tion. 

Three  .»en.-The  gunner  commands,  points,  serves  the  vent,  and 
fires;  No.  1  sponges;  No.  2  loads  and  serves  ammunition. 

Fo«r  vH^n.— The  gunner  commands  and  points;  No.  1  sponges;  No. 
2  loads  and  serves  ammunition;  No.  3  serves  the  vent  and  fires. 

Five  «ien.— The  gunner  commands  and  points;  No.  1  sponges;  No.  2 
loads ;  No.  3  serves  the  vent  and  fires  ;  No.  4  serves  ammunition. 

Six  men.—'^^.Q  gunner  commands  and  points;  No.  1  sponges;  No 
2  loads;  No.  3  serves  the  vent  and  fires;  No.  4  and  5  serve  ammuni- 
tion. 

Seven  ;»e„._The  gunner  commands  and  points;  No.  1  sponges;  No. 
2  loads ;  No.  3  serves  the  vent,  and  attends  to  the  trail ;  No.  4  'fires ' 
No.  6  is  at  the  limber,  and  serves  ammunition  to  No.  5,  and  occasion^ 
ally  changes  with  him. 

Eight  v»eH.— No.  7  assists  No.  6 ;    the  other  numbers  as  before. 

Suij-ply  of  ammunition  when  in  action. 

663.  When  it  can  be  done  without  inconvenience,  ammunition  will 
be  served  direct  from  the  rear  chest  of  the  caisson,  No.  8  performing 
the  duties  prescribed  for  No.  6  at  the  limber  chest.  At  convenient  mo- 
ments, the  ammunition  served  out  by  No.  6  will  be  replaced  from  the 
rear  caisson  chest.  If  the  ammunition  chest  on  the  limber  of  the  piece 
IS  exhausted,  the  limber  is  replaced  by  that  of  the  caisson,  and  the 
empty  chest  exchanged  for  the  centre  one  of  the  caisson. 

As  a  rule,  the  limber  chests,  and  especially  that  of  the  piece,  will  be 
kept  full  at  the  expense  of  the  others,  so  that  in  case  of  a  sudden  move- 


1 


384  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

ment  on  the  field,  there  shall  always  be  a  siiflBcient  supply  of  ammuni- 
tion at  hand. 

Pointing  and  ranges. 

66-i.  To  2ioint  a  piece,  is  to  place  it  in  such  a  position  that  the  shot 
may  reach  the  object  it  is  intended  to  strike.  To  do  this,  the  axis  of 
the  trunnions,  being  horiv.ontal,  the  line  of  metal,  called  also  the  natu- 
ral line  of  sight,  must  be  so  directed  as  to  pass  through  the  object,  and 
then  the  elevation  given  to  the  piece  to  throw  the  shot  the  required  dis- 
tance. The  direction  is  given  from  the  trail,  and  the  elevation  from  the 
breech;  the  trail  being  moved  to  the  right  and  left  by  a  handspike,  and 
the  breech  raised  or  depressed  by  an  elevating  screw. 

The  axis  of  the  piece  coincides  with  that  of  the, cylinder  of  the  bore. 

The  line  of  sight  in  pointing  is  the  line  of  direction  from  the  eye  to 
the  object.  It  lies  in  a  vertical  plane,  passing  through,  or  parallel  to 
the  axis  of  the  piece. 

The  angle  of  sight  is  the  angle  which  the  line  of  sight  makes  with  the 
axis  of  the  piece. 

The  natural  line  of  sight  is  the  straight  line  passing  through  the 
highest  points  of  the  base  ring,  the  swell  of  the  muzzle,  muzzle  sight,  or 
muzzle  band. 

The  natural  angle  of  sight  is  the  angle  which  the  natural  line  of  sight 
makes  with  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

By  range  is  commonly  meant  the  distance  between  the  piece  and  the 
object  which  the  ball  is  intended  to  strike;  or,  the  first  graze  of  the 
ball  upon  the  horizontal  plane  on  which  the  carriage  stands.  Point- 
blank  range  is  the  distance  between  the  piece  and  the  point-blank. 
Extreme  range  is  the  distance  between  the  piece  and  the  point  where 
the  ball  finally  rests. 

665.  Theory  of  2ioi»tiiig. — The  ^Jti//*?-i/«»A;  is  the  secdnd  point  of 
intersection  of  the  trajectory  or  curve  described  by  the  projectile  in 
its  flight  with  the  line  of  sight.  As  the  angle  of  sight  is  increased, 
the  projectile  is  thrown  farther  above  the  line  of  sight,  and  the  trajec- 
tory and  poiift-blank  distance  becomes  more  extended. 

The  point-blank  range  increases  with  the  velocity,  the  diameter,  and 
the  density  of  the  ball. 

A  piece  is  said  to  bo  aimed  point-blank  when  the  line  of  metal, 
which  is  the  natural  line  of  sight,  is  directed  upon  the  object.  This 
must  be  the  case  when  the  object  is  at  point-blank  distance.  When 
at  a  greater  distance,  the  pendulum  hausse,  or  the  tangent  scale,  is 
raised  upon  the  breech  until  the  sight  is  at  the  height  which  the 
degree  of  elevation  for  the  distance  may  require.     An  artijicial  line  of 


LTPxHT   ARTILLERY   TACTICS.  385 

sight,  and  an  arfijiria/  point-lilaiik  aro  thus  obtained,  and  the  piece  is 
aimed  as  before. 

Pei}ch(hti>i  hausxr. — The  instrnnieiit  at  present  in  most  general  use  in 
pointing  field  guns  at  objects  beyond  the  natural  point-blank,  is  called 
a  pendnlitm  hanasc,  of  which  the  component  parts  are  denominated  the 
scale,  the  slider,  and  the  seat.  The  scale  is  made  of  sheet  brass  ;  at 
the  lower  end  is  a  brass  bulb  filled  with  lead.  The  slider  is  of  thin 
brass,  and  is  retained  in  any  desirable  position  on  the  scale  by  means 
of  a  brass  set  screw  with  a  milled  head.  The  scale  is  passed  through  a 
slit  in  a  piece  of  steel,  with  which  it  is  connected  by  a  brass  screw,  form- 
ing a  pivot  on  which  the  scale  can  vibrate  laterally;  this  slit  is  made 
long  enough  to  allow  the  scale  to  take  a  vertical  position  in  any 
ordinary  cjises  of  inequality  of  the  ground  on  which  the  wheels  of  the 
carriage  may  rest.  The  ends  of  this  piece  of  steel  form  two  journals, 
by  means  of  which  the  scale  is  supported  on  the  seat  attached  to  the 
piece.  The  scat  is  of  iron,  and  is  fastened  to  the  base  of  the  breech 
by  three  screws,  in  such  manner  that  the  centres  of  the  two  journal 
notches  shall  be  at  a  distance  from  the  axis  equal  to  the  radius  of 
the  base  ring. 

A  mmzle  sight  of  iron  is  screwed  into  the  swell  of  the  muzzle  of 
r/wns,  or  into  the  middle  of  the  muzzle  ring  of  howitzers.  The  height 
of  the  sight  is  equal  to  the  dispart  of  the  piece,  so  that  a  line  from  the 
top  of  the  muzzle  sight  to  the  j)ivot  of  the  scale  is  parallel  to  the  axis 
of  the  piece.  Consequently,  the  vertical  plane  of  sight  passing  through 
the  centre  line  of  the  scale  and  the  top  of  the  muzzle  sight  will  be  also 
parallel  to  the  axis  in  any  position  of  the  piece;  the  scale  will  therefore 
always  indicate  the  angle  which  the  line  of  sight  makes  with  the  axis. 

The  hausse,  when  not  in  use,  is  carried  by  the  gunner  in  a  leather 
pouch,  suspended  by  a  shoulder  strap. 

On  pointing. 

666.  As  it  is  impossible  to  point  a  piece  correctly  without  knowing 
the  dista7ice  of  the  object,  artillery  men  should  be  frequently  practised 
in  estinmting  distances  by  the  eye  alone,  and  rectifying  the  estimate 
afterward,  cither  by  pacing  the  distance,  or  by  actual  measurement 
with  a  tape-line  or  chain,  until  they  acquire  the  habit  of  estimating 
them  correctly. 

«^Ac/^«  are  intended  to  burst  t»i  the  object  aimed  at;  spherical  case 
shot  are  intended  to  burst  from  fifty  to  eeventy-five  yards  short  of  it. 

Shell  or  spherical  case  firing,  for  long  ranges,  is  less  accurate  than 
that  of  solid  shot. 

At  high  elevations,  a  solid  shot  will  range  farther  than  a  shell  or 
3.3 


1« 


386  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

spherical  case  shot,  of  the  same  diameter,  fired  with  an  equal  charge. 
But  at  low  elevations,  the  shell  or  spherical  case  will  have  a  greater 
initial  velocity,  and  a  longer  range.  If,  however,  the  charges  are  pro- 
portioned to  the  weights  of  the  projectiles,  the  solid  shot  will,  in  all 
cases,  have  the  longest  range. 

The  velocity  or  range  of  a  shot  is  not  affected  in  any  appreciable 
degree  by  checking  the  recoil  of  the  carriage,  by  using  a  tight  wad,  or 
by  diiferent  degrees  of  ramming. 

The  principal  causes  which  disturb  the  true  flight  of  the  projectile 
are  as  follows : 

1st.  If  the  wheels  of  the  carriage  are  not  upon  the  same  horizontal 
plane,  the  projectile  will  deviate  toward  the  lowest  side  of  the  carriage. 

2d.  If  the  direction  of  the  wind  is  across  the  line  of  fire,  deviations 
in  the  flight  of  the  projectile  will  be  occasioned,  and  in  proportion  to 
the  strength  of  the  wind  the  angle  its  direction  makes  with  the  line  of 
fire  and  the  velocity  of  the  projectile. 

3d.  If  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  projectile  be  not  coincident  with 
the  centre  of  figure,  the  projectile  will  deviate  toward  the  heaviest  side^ 
that  is,  in  the  same  direction  that  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  projec- 
tile, while  resting  in  the  piece,  lies  with  regard  to  the  centre  of  figure. 
Therefore,  if  a  shot  be  placed  in  the  piece  so  that  its  centre  of  gravity 
is  to  the  right  of  the  centre  of  the  ball,  the  shot  will  deviate  to  the 
right;  and  vice  versa.  If  the  centre  of  gravity  be  above  the  centre  of 
fio-ure,  range  will  be  increased:  if  below,  it  will  be  diminished. 

Solid  shot  should  be  used  from  350  yards  upward ;  the  use  of 
canister  should  begin  at  360  yards,  and  the  rapidity  of  the  fii-e  in- 
creases as  the  range  diminishes.  In  emergencies,  double  charges  of 
canister  may  be  used  at  150  or  160  yards,  with  a  single  cartridge. 

Spherical  case  should  not,  as  a  general  rule,  be  used  for  a  less  range 
than  500  yards;  and  neither  spherical  case  nor  shells  should  be  fired 
at  rapidly  advancing  bodies,  as,  for  instance,  cavalry  charging. 

The  fire  of  spherical  case  and  of  shells  on  bodies  of  cavalry  in  line 
or  column,  and  in  position,  is  often  very  effective.  To  the  destructive 
effects  of  the  projectile  are  added  the  confusion  and  disorder  occa- 
sioned amongst  the  horses  by  the  noise  of  their  explosion  ;  but  neither 
shells  nor  spherical  case  should  be  fired  so  rapidly  as  solid  shot. 

In  case  of  necessity,  solid  shot  may  be  fired  from  howitzers. 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  387 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTERY. 

Composition  of  the  battery,  and  the  officers  and  men  necessary  to 

man  it. 

667.  Tho  battery  is  composed  of  four,  six  or  eight  pieces ;  six  pieces 
will  be  supposed.  It  is  divided  into  three  sections  of  two  pieces  each, 
denominated  the  rifjht,  centre  and  left  sections,  according  to  their  posi- 
tion in  line.  The  battery  is  cominanded  by  a  captain  ;  each  section  is 
commanded  by  a  lieutenant,  called  the  chief  of  section,  and  an  addi- 
tional lieutenant  is  necessary  to  command  the  line  of  caissons.  Each 
piece  is  commanded  by  a  sergeant,  as  chief  of  the  piece,  while  the  gun- 
ner and  chief  of  caisson  are  corporals.  The  officers  and  men  necessary 
to  man  the  battery  constitute  a  company,  which  is  divided  into  as 
rasiny  platoons  as  there  are  pieces.  Each  platoon  is  composed  of  the 
drivers  and  cannoneers  of  a  single  piefee,  and  is  commanded  by  the 
chief  of  the  piece;  the  cannoneers  of  a  piece,  as  already  stated  in  the 
school  of  the  piece,  constitute  the  gun  detachment.  When  the  drivers 
and  cannoneers  form  together,  the  drivers  form  ox\  the  left. 

Two  platoons  constitute  a  section. 

In  addition  to  the  platoons,  there  sbould  be  a,  fist  (or  orderly)  ser- 
geant attached  to  the  company ;  a.  qnartemiaster-serf/eant;  two  buglers 
or  trumpeters;  one  guidon;  and  as  many  artificers  as  may  be  necessary 
to  keep  the  guns,  carriages,  harness,  etc.,  in  order. 

When  the  company  is  formed,  the  platoons  form  in  line  in  the  order 
of  their  pieces. 

Posts  of  the  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  etc. 

668.  The  captain  commanding  goes  where  his  presence  may  be  neces- 
sary, or  his  commands  best  heard.  His  position,  in  the  order  in  line,  is 
four  yards  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  company  ;  in  the  order  in  col- 
umn, or  when  the  company  is  faced  by  a  flank,  four  yards  outside 
the  flank  in  the  tirst  case,  and  from  the  company  in  the  second,  and 
opposite  the  centre. 

The  lieutenants  commanding  sections  in  line,  or  in  column  of  sec- 
tions, are  two  yards  in  front  of  the  centres  of  their  respective  sections; 
in  columns  of  platoons  or  of  detachments,  or  when  faced  by  a,  flank, 
they  are  two  yards  outside  the  marching  flank,  and  opposite  the 
centres  of  their  respective  sections ;  except  that  when  faced  by  «  flank, 


888  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  chief  of  the  leading  gection  takes  his  place  at  the  side  of  the  lead- 
ing  file. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons,  is  four  yards  in  rear  of  the  centre  of 
the  company  when  it  is  hi  line;  when  it  is  in  column,  or  faced  by  a 
flank,  he  is  four  yards  outside  the  pivot  flank,  and  opposite  the  centre 
of  the  company. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces,  when  the  company  is  in  line,  in  column  of  sec- 
tionn,  or  faced  by  a  jiank,  are  on  the  right  of  the  gun  detachments  of 
their  respective  platoons,  in  the  front  rank.  In  column  of  jilntjoiis,  ov  of 
detachments,  they  are  one  yard  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  platoons 
or  of  their  gun  detachments. 

The  gunners,  when  the  company  is  in  line,  or  in  column  of  sections, 
are  one  yard  behind  the  right  files  of  their  respective  gun  detachments. 
In  column  of  platoons,  or  detachments,  they  are  on  the  right  of  the  gun 
detachment.  When  faced  by  a  flank,  they  face  with  the  company,  and 
retain  their  relative  positions. 

The  chiefs  of  cannons  are  in  their  places  in  the  ranks  as  No.  8 
of  the  gun  detachments,  or  as  the  front  rank  men  on  the  left  of  their 
platoons. 

The  first  sergeant,  when  the  company  is  in  line,  is  on  the  right  of 
the  front  rank,  and  one  yard  from  it;  when  it  is  in  column,  he  is  on  the 
marching  flank,  one  yard  outside  the  section,  platoon,  or  detachment 
nearest  him  when  in  line.  When  the  company  faces  by  n  flank,  he  faces 
with  it. 

The  quartermaster-sergeant  is  on  the  left  of  the  company,  and 
occupies  positions  corresponding  to  those  of  the  first  sergeant  on  the 
right. 

When  the  company  is  in  line,  the  buglers  are  on  the  right  of  the  first 
sergeants,  in  one  rank,  and  two  yards  from  line  ;  i)i  cohuan,  they  are  six 
yards  in  front  or  rear  of  the  subdivision  next  them  in  line,  according 
as  that  subdivision  forms  the  head  or  rear  of  the  column.  When  the 
company  is  faced  by  a  flank,  they  face  also. 

The  artificers  occupy  positions  on  the  left  of  the  company,  correspond- 
ing to  those  of  the  musicians  on  the  right. 

The  guidon  forms  with  the  musicians,  or  takes  such  position  as  the 
captain  prescribes. 

Manning  the  Battery. 

699.  The  gun  detachments  and  teams,  having  been  probably  tolled 
off",  are  marched  to  the  battery  or  park,  with  the  teams  in  front. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  caissons,  when  mounted,  march  with  the 
teams ;    when  the  teams  reach    the   battery,  they  are  hitched   by  the     J 
drivers. 


L 


LIGHT   ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  389 

In  forming  the  detachments  they  are  formed  in  line,  touching  each 
other,  and  in  positions  corresponding  to  the  positions  of  their  pieces  in 
the  battery.  The  chiefs  of  section,  etc.,  are  at  their  posts  as  directed 
for  the  company  in  line. 

The  detachments  are  marched  to  the  battery,  either  in  column  or  in 
line,  as  circumstances  may  require. 

Each  detachment  is  halted  by  its  gunner  when  opposite  its  piece, 
and  wheeled  into  line. 

If  approaching  from  the  front  or  rear,  the  detachments  are  formed 
in  line  facing  the  battery,  in  the  same  order  as  their  pieces,  and  the 
captain  commands : 

Detachments,  opposite  your  pieces. 

At  this  command,  each  detachment  is  wheeled  or  faced  in  the 
proper  direction  by  i(s  gunner,  marched  opposite  its  piece,  and  formed 
in  line. 

The  captain,  after  all  the  detachments  have  been  halted  in  front  or 
roar  of  their  pieces,  commands  : 

Cannoneers,  to  your  posts. 

At  this  command  the  gunners  face  their  detachments,  and  all  take 
their  posts,  as  directed  in  No.  656. 

The  position  of  the  detachment  in  hovse  artilhrij,  is  habitually  two 
paces  in  rear  of  the  muzzle  of  the  piece,  but  its  position  may  be 
changed  hy  the  means  laid  down  in  No.  655, 

During  the  manoeuvres  of  mounted  artillery,  the  cannoneers  are 
seated  on  the  ammunition  chests  as  follows :  The  gunner  and  Nos. 
5  and  6,  on  the  limber  chest  of  the  piece,  the  gunner  on  the  right, 
and  No.  5  on  the  left;  Nos.  X,  2  and  7,  on  the  limber  chest  of  the 
caisson,  No.  2  on  the  right,  and  No.  1  on  the  leftj  Nos.  .3,  4  and 
8  on  the  middle  chest  of  the  caisson,  No.  -i  on  the  right,  and  No.  3  on 
the  left. 

When  circumstances  require  it,  Nos.  6  and  7  may  be  directed  to 
mount  the  rear  chest  of  the  caisson.  They  sit  with  their  backs  to  the 
front,  No.  6  on  the  right. 

To  mount  and  dismount  the  Cannoneers. 

670.  To  iiiovnt. — The  captain  halts  the  battery,  if  not  already  at  a 
halt,  and  commands: 

1.   Cannoneers,  prepare  to  mount.     2.  Mount. 


390  MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  run  to  their  respective  places, 
and  stand  facing  the  chests  which  they  are  to  mount.  The  gunner 
and  No.  5  in  rear  of  the  gun  limber ;  No.  6  on  the  right  of  the 
gunner;  Nos.  1  and  2  in  rear  of  the  caisson  limber;  No.  7  on  the 
left  of  No.  1 ;  Nos.  3  and  4  in  front  of  the  middle  chest  of  the  caisson ; 
No.  8  on  the  right  of  No.  3.  The  gunner  and  Nos.  2  and  3  seize  the 
handles  with  the  right  hand,  and  step  upon  the  stocks  with  the  left 
foot,  and  Nos.  5,  1  and  4,  seize  the  handles  with  the  left  hand,  and  step 
upon  the  stocks  with  the  right  foot. 

At  the  command  mounts  the  gunner  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  and  5,  spring 
into  their  seats.  The  gunner  and  Nos.  5,  )  and  2,  seat  themselves  in 
their  places  with  their  backs  to  the  front,  and  immediately  face  about, 
by  throwing  their  legs  outward  over  the  handles. 

No.  8  then  springs  into  his  scat  in  the  same  manner  as  No.  3;  Nos.  6 
and  7  step  in  rear  of  their  chests,  place  their  hands  upon  them,  step 
upon  the  stocks  with  their  nearest  feet,  spring  up,  step  over  the  boxes 
and  take  their  seats,  placing  their  hands  on  the  shoulders  of  the  men 
already  seated  in  order  to  steady  themselves. 

When  the  command  caniio)ieer.s,  nunint,  is  given  by  itself,  the  men 
run  to  their  places  and  spring  into  their  scats  at  once,  No.  8  taking  his 
seat  before  No.  3. 

671.  To-  dismount. — The  captain  halts  the  carriages  as  before,  and 
commands  : 

1.   Cannoneers.,  prepare  to  dismount.     2.  Dismount. 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  stand  up  in  their  places,  except 
the  gunner  and  No.  5,  who  face  about.  At  the  second  command,  the 
whole  jump  oS"  and  run  to  their  posts. 

When  the  command  cannoneers,  dismount,  is  given  by  itself,  the  men 
jump  from  their  chests  in  the  sam§  manlier. 

The  cannoneers  always  dismount  at  the  command,  action  front,  right 
(or  left).  They  also  dismount  at  the  command  in  battery,  as  soon  as 
the  carriage  on  which  they  are  mounted  halts. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  gunner  dismounts  the  cannoneers  when  the 
command  action  front,  right  or  left,  or  in  battery,  is  given,  and  all 
move  to  their  posts  in  double  quick  time,  and  unlimber  as  rapidly 
as  possible. 

The  object  of  mounting  the  cannoneers  on  the  ammunition  chests,  is 
generally  to  enable  the  battery  to  make  quick  movements. 

To  unpark. 

672.  Everything  being  prepared  for  manoeuvring,  if  the  captain 
wishes  to  unpark  by  the  right,  he  commands  : 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  391 


1.  By  piece — -from  the  right — -front  into  column.     2.  March. 

At  the  command  mnrrh,  the  right  piece,  followed  by  its  caisson, 
marches  direct  to  the  front,  and  the  caj^tain  indicates  the  direction  it 
should  take.  The  other  pieces  and  caissons  follow  the  movement  of 
the  right  piece,  each  so  regulating  its  march  by  that  which  precedes  it, 
as  to  march  in  the  same  direction,  and  two  yards  behind.  Each  chief 
of  section  directs  the  march  of  his  carriages,  which  are  so  conducted 
by  their  chiefs  as  to  enter  the  column  by  the  most  simple  movement. 
The  column  of  pieces  is  thus  formed  with  a  distance  of  two  yards  be- 
tween the  carriages ;  and  in  horse  artillery  with  the  same  distance 
between  the  carriages  and  detachments.- 

The  captain  goes  wherever  his  duty  may  require,  but  generally  re- 
mains on  the  left  flank,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  column. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  places  himself  near  the  chief  of 
the  leading  piece,  and  on  his  left;  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  four 
yards  from  the  left  flank,  abreast  the  centres  of  their  respective  sec- 
tions. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  in  rear  of  the  chief  of  the  centre 
section. 

Each  chief  of  piece  and  caisson,  when  mounted,  is  near  his  leading 
driver,  on  the  left. 

The  trumpeter  is  near  the  captain. 

When  the  battery  is  parked  with  the  caissons  in  front,  the  captain 
causes  it  to  unpark  by  the  right  by  the  same  commands  ;  the  move- 
ments being  executed  in  the  same  manner. 

The  battery  may  be  unparked  by  the  left  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  column  of  pieces  is  not  to  be  considered  a  column  of  manoeuvre. 
It  will  be  changed  into  a  column  of  sections  as  soon  as  the  nature  of 
the  ground  will  permit.  But  the  exigencies  of  service  sometimes  re- 
quire that  formations  into  line  and  battery  should  be  made  directly 
from  the  column  of  pieces.  In  such  cases,  the  principles  and  com- 
mands laid  down  for  similar  formations  from  the  column  of  sections, 
will  govern.  In  the  formations  to  the  right  or  left,  the  pieces  must 
close  up,  and  wheel  successively  when  opposite  their  proper  places. 

To  halt. 

To  halt  the  battery,  when  marching  in  column  of  pieces,  the  captain 
commands  : 


392  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


1.   Column.     2,   Halt, 

At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  all  the 
carriages  are  immediately  halted. 

Change  of  gait. 

673.  The  changes  of  gait,  in  column  of  pieces,  arc  executed  by  the 
following  commands  from  the  captain: 

To  pass  from  the  walk  to  a  trot. 

1.   Trot.     2.  March. 
To  pass  from  a  trot  to  a  walk. 

1.   Walk.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  all  the 
drivers  and  others  on  horscbaA  prepare  to  change  the  gait;  and  at 
the  second,  repeated  in  like  manner,  they  pass  at  once  to  the  gait  indi- 
cated by  the  first  command. 

To  form  sections. 

674.  When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  walk  in  column  of  pieces, 
to  form  sections  at  the  same  gait  by  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  sections,  left  oblique.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  right. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  repeats  the  commands,  Form  sec- 
tion, left  oblique,  march;  guide  right,  in  succession  after  the  captain. 
At  the  command  march,  the  two  first  carriages,  piece  and  caisson,  con- 
tinue to  march,  and  halt  when  they  have  advanced  five  yards.  The 
two  following  gain  their  interval  of  fourteen  yards  by  obliquing  to  the 
left,  and  place  themselves  abreast  and  parallel  with  the  other  two. 

The  other  sections  continue  to  march  in  column  of  pieces,  and  are 
formed  successively  by  their  chiefs;  each  commanding, /br/n  section, 
left  oblique,  in  time  to  command  viarch,  when  the  leading  carriage  of 
his  section  has  arrived  within  five  yards  of  its  distance.  The  chief  of 
section  then  commands,  guide  right. 

AVhen  the  column  of  pieces  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  formation  is 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands. 
But  the  leading  carriages,  instead  of  advancing  five  yards  and  halting 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  893 

as  before,  pass  to  a  walk  as  soon  as  the  command  mnrch  is  repeated  by 
the  chief  of  section.  The  other  sections  continue  to  march  at  a  trot, 
and  execute  the  movement  at  that  gait;  the  two  leading  carriages  of 
each  section  passing  to  a  walk  at  the  command  march,  which  must  be 
given  when  they  have  closed  to  their  proper  distance. 

When  the  column  of  pieces  is  at  a  halt,  the  formation  is  executed  as 
prescribed  for  the  column  at  a  walk.  In  this  case  the  carriages  all 
move  at  the  command,  march,  and  the  leading  ones  halt  after  advanc- 
ing five  yards. 

When  the  column  of  pieces  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  form  sections 
at  a  trot  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Form  sections,  left  oblique,  trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  right. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  repeats  the  commands, /orm  section, 
left  oblique,  trot;  march;  fjnifh  riyht,  in  succession,  after  the  captain. 
At  the  command  march,  the  two  leading  carriages  continue  to  march  in 
the  original  direction  at  a  walk.  The  two  following  oblique  to  the  left, 
gain  their  interval  at  a  trot,  and  resume  the  walk  when  opposite  the 
leading  carriages. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  command  trot ; 
and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat,  their  sectiotis  commence  the  trot. 

The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  third  sections  command,  form  section, 
left  oblique,  in  time  to  command  march,  when  the  leading  carriage  of 
each  section  has  nearly  gained  its  distance.  The  leading  carriage  then 
resumes  the  walk,  and  the  chief  of  section  commands,  guide  riyht. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  superintend  their  carriages,  and  take  the  posts 
assigned  them  in  the  order  in  column  as  soon  as  their  sections  are 
formed. 

Sections  are  formed  by  gaining  ground  to  the  right  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  lattery  being  in  column  of  pieces,  to  form  the  caisso?is  on  the 

flank. 

675.  When  the  battery  is  in  column  of  pieces  with  the  caissons  in 
rear,  to  form  the  pieces  and  caissons  into  separate  columns,  as  in  the 
flauk  march  of  a  battery  in  line,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Caissons  left  (or  caissons  lefi,  trot).     2.  March.     3.  Guide 

light. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  caissons 
oblique  at  once  to  the  left,  gain  the  interval  of  fourteen  yards,  and 


394  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

place  themselves  opposite  their  pieces,-  the  pieces  closing  upon  each 
other  at  the  same  time  to  the  usual  distance.  The  gait  is  regulated  as 
in  the  formation  of  sections;  and  when  the  movement  is  performed  at 
a  walk,  the  leading  carriage  halts  after  advancing  its  own  length. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  take  their  places  as  in  column  of  sections. 

The  caissons  are  formed  on  the  right  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  pieces  are  in  rear,  they  are  formed  on  the  right  or  left  of 
their  caissons  in  the  same  manner  and  by  corresponding  commands. 

To  march  in  column. 

676.  The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  to  advance,  the  captain 
commands : 

1.   Column,,  forward.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

The  commands  /br?co?*f/,  march;  (juiiJe  left  (or  right),  are  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  carriages 
advance,  the  guide  maintains  the  direction,  and  the  carriage.*,  as  well 
as  the  detachments  of  horse  cannoneers,  preserve  their  intervals  and 
distances. 

To  march  by  a  flank. 

677.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  gain 
ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.   Column,,  by  the  left  flank.     2.  March. 

The  3ommands,  hi/  the  left  flank,  march,  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
sections.  At  the  command  march,  each  carriage  wheels  at  once  to  the 
left. 

When  the  wheel  is  nearly  completed,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Forward.     2.  Guide  right. 

These  commands  are  i-epeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the 
command  forward,  all  the  carriages  march  direct  to  the  front. 

The  line  is  regulai-ly  established,  and  the  carriages  aligned  in  each 
rank,  with  their  distances  of  two,  and  intervals  of  fourteen  yards. 
The  chiefs  of  sections  take  their  place.«  between  the  leading  carriages 
as  in  line. 

To  cause  the  V>attery  to  resume  its  original  direction,  the  captain 
commands : 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  895 

1.  Battery,  hy  the  right  flank.      2.    March.      3.    Forward. 

4.   Guide  left. 

The  commands,  i?/  the  ri(/ht  /tank,  luarch  ;  foncard ;  guide  left,  are 
repeated  and  executed  according  to  the  principles  before  d-escribed. 

After  the  flank  march,  to  march  the  battery  in  a  direction  opposite 
to  the  original  one,  the  captain  commands: 

1.    Battery,   by   the  lejl  flank.      2.    March.      3.    Forward. 

4.   Guide  right. 

In  hor/<e  arfillenj  the  flank  march  is  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands.  The  line  formed  by 
the  flank  movement  is  established,  and  the  carriages  aligned  in  each 
rank,  with  distances  of  five  and  intervals  of  fourteen  or  twenty-one 
yards,  according  to  the  relative  position  of  the  pieces  and  caissons. 
The  detachments  wheel  in  the  same  direction  as  their  pieces;  and, 
after  following  them  during  a  part  of  the  movement,  place  them- 
selves by  their  sides,  two  yards  from  the  wheels,  with  the  heads  of 
their  leading  horses  on  a  line  with  the  axle-trees  of  the  limbers. 
In  marching  by  the  left  flank  they  are  on  the  left  of  their  pieces, 
and  the  reverse  when  marching  by  the  right.  When  sufficient  ground 
ha»  been  gained  to  the  flank,  and  the  battery  resumes  its  formation 
in  column  by  marching  in  the  original  direction,  the  detachments 
wheel  in  the  same  direction  as  their  pieces  and  place  themselves 
in  their  rear.  But  when  the  march  in  column  is  in  the  opposite 
direction,  they  resume  their  places  by  allowing  their  pieces  to  pass 
them  and  then  falling  in  their  rear. 

The  flank  march,  to  gain  ground  to  the  right,  is  executed  according 
to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

In  each  ease  the  captain  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  change 
their  direction  to  the  left  or  right,  and  conform  to  the  movements  of 
the  battery. 

Oblique  r)iarch. 

678.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  cause 
it  to  march  obliquely  to  gain  ground  to  the  front  and  left,  the  captain 
commands : 

1.  Column,  left  oblique.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  right. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  repeat  the  commands,  left  oblique;  march; 
yuide    right.     At   the    command    march,  all    the  carriages    oblique    at 


396  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

once  to  the  left,  and  marcli  direct  to  the  front  in  the  new  direction; 
moving  in  pai-allel  lines,  dressing  by  the  right,  and  preserving  their 
intervals  from  that  flank. 

In  obliquing,  the  heads  of  the  horses  in  ea«h  rank  are  on  a  line 
parallel  to  the  original  front  of  the  column.  The  interval  between 
the  carriages  is  fourteen  yards,  measured  parallel  to  the  front;  and 
only  ten  if  measured  perpendicularly  to  the  oblique  direction.  Each 
carriage  of  the  right  file  marches  in  the  prolongation  of  the  left 
carriage  of  the  rank  which  precedes  its  own,  and  at  a  distance  of  nine 
yards. 

The  officers  conform  to  the  movement  and  preserve  their  relative 
positii.ns. 

To  resume  the  original  direction  the  captain  commands: 

Forward. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  the  car- 
riages resume  the  original  direction   by  oblicjuing  to  the  right. 

If  the  caittiiin  wishes  to  halt  the  column  for  the  purpose  of  recti- 
fying its  alignments,  intervals,  or  obliquity,  he  commands: 

1.  Column.     2.  Halt. 

And  to  resume  the  march   in   the  oblique  direction  : 

1.  Column.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  right. 

The  commands  halt;  mardi;  guide  viylit,  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  sections. 

The  right  oblique  is  executed  according  the  same  principles  and 
by  inverse  means. 

Passage  of  carriages  in  column. 

679.  When  ihe  battery  is  marching  in  column  at  a  walk,  to  change 
the  relative  positions  of  the  front  and  rear  ranks,  without  altering  the 
gait,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Pieces  pass  your  caissons  (or  caissons  pass  your  pieces). 
2.  March. 

These /jommands  ai'e  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections;  and  at  the 
command  march,  the  leading  carriages  of  each  section  halt.  Those 
of  the  rear  rank  execute  the  passage  without  changing  the  gait,  and 
halt  as  soon  as  they  have  reached  their  positions  in  front. 

To  continue   the   march   without   halting   the   carriages  of  the  rear 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  397 

rank,  the  captain  commands  forward,  when  the  passage  is  nearly- 
completed  and  the  command  is  repeated   by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  passage  is  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands,  except 
that  the  carriages  of  the  front  rank  move  at  a  walk  instead  of  halting 
at  the  command  march.  The  carriages  of  the  rear  rank  execute  tlie 
passage  at  a  trot,  and  then  change  the  gait  to  a  walk. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  halt,  the  passage  is  executed  according 
to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands.  If  the  captain 
wishes  to  put  the  column  in  march  immediately  after  the  movement, 
he  commands  fonoarrf,  when  the  passage  is  about  being  completed, 
and  then  guide  left  (or  right).  These  commands  arc  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  execute  the  passage 
at  a  trot,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Pieces  pass  your  caissons,  trot  (or  caissons  pass  your  pieces, 
trot).     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the 
command  march,  the  carriages  of  the  front  rank  in  each  section  con- 
tinue to  march  at  a  walk.  Those  of  the  rear  rank  execute  the  passage 
at  a  trot,  and  resume  the  walk  as  soon  as  the  passage  is  completed. 

About  in  column. 

680.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  face  it 
to  the  rear,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Pieces  and  caissons,  left  about.     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections  ,•  and  at  the 
second  all  the  carriages  execute  the  about.  When  the  movement  is 
about  being  completed  the  captain  commands,  column,  halt;  or  for- 
ward, guide  right  (or  left);  the  commands,  halt,  or  forward,  guide 
right  (or  left),  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

Countermarch  in  column. 

681.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  execute 
the  countermarch  in  each  section,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.   Countermarch.     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  at  the 


898  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

second,  each  piece  and  its  caisson  execute  the  countermarch.  When 
the  movement  is  about  being  completed,  the  captain  commands,  rolunni, 
halt ;   or  forward  ;  guide  right  (or  left). 

These  commands  are  repeated  as  in  the  preceding  paragraph. 

To  change  direction  in  column. 

682.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  cause  it 
to  change  direction  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands,  left  v:heel — March;  and 
afterward,  forward.  At  the  command  march,  the  pivot  carriage  exe- 
cutes the  wheel  without  changing  the  gait.  The  carriage  on  the  wheel- 
ing flank  wheels  in  such  a  manner  as  to  conform  to  its  movement; 
increasing  the  gait,  and  preserving  -the  intervals.  At  the  command 
forward,  the  pivot  carriage  moves  direct  to  the  front,  and  the  other 
resumes  its  original  gait  after  completing  the  wheel  and  arriving  upon 
the  same  line.  The  carriages  of  the  rear  rank  preserve  their  distance 
and  follow  those  of  the  front  rank. 

Each  of  the  other  sections,  on  arriving  at  the  point  where  the  first 
wheeled,  executes  the  same  movement,  and  by  the  same  commands 
from  its  chief. 

Each  chief  of  section  must  give  the  command  tcft  wheel  in  time  to 
command  march,  when  the  heads  of  his  leaders  arc  three  yards  from 
the  wheeling  point.  And  the  command  forward  must  be  given  as  soon 
as  the  leading  pivot  carriage  has  entered  the  new  direction. 

The  change  of  direction  to  the  right  is  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  diminish  the  front  of  a  column  on  the  march. 

683.  The  battery  marching  at  a  walk  in  column  of  sections,  to  form 
column  of  pieces  from  the  right,  at  that  gait,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  By  the  right.,  break  sections.     2.  March. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands,  successively,  after  the 
captain,  by  the  right,  break  section  ;  march.  At  the  command  march, 
the  two  right  carriages  of  the  leading  section  continue  to  march  at  a 
walk,  and  all  the  other  carriages  halt  The  left  carriages  of  the  lead- 
ing section  remain  halted,  until  the  leaders  of  the  leading  carriage  are 
passed  by  the  wheel  horses  of  the  rear  carriage  on  the  right.     They 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  399 

then  oblique  to  the  right,  take  their  places  in  column,  and  follow  the 
two  leading  carriages.  The  other  sections  are  broken  in  succession  by 
the  same  commands  from  their  chiefs  ;  the  command  march  being  given 
when  the  wheel  horses  of  the  left  carriages  of  the  next  preceding 
seetion  enter  the  right  oblique. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  column  of  pieces  is  form- 
ed according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands.  But 
in  this  f^ase  the  carriages  which  halted  before  slacken  the  gait  to  a 
walk,  and  resume  the  trot  to  oblique,  and  enter  the  column. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  halt,  the  movement  is  executed  as  pre- 
scribed for  a  column  marching  at  a  walk  :  the  two  right  carriages  of 
the  leading  section  moving  forward  at  a  walk  at  the  command  march. 

The  battery  marching  at  a  walk  in  column  of  sections,  to  form  col- 
umn of  pieces  from  the  right  at  a  trot,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  the  rightj  break  sections,  trot.     2.  March. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands  successively,  after  the 
captain,  by  the  right,  break  section,  trot;  march;  and  at  the  right  car- 
riages of  the  leading  section  move  forward  at  a  moderate  trot.  The 
left  carriages  of  the  same  section  commence  the  trot  on  obliquing  to 
enter  the  column. 

The  other  sections  are  broken  successively  by  the  same  commands 
from  their  chiefs ;  and  the  carriages  are  regulated  by  each  other,  as  in 
breaking  sections  at  a  walk. 

This  formation  is  executed  from  the  left,  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  inverse  means. 

Jn  column  with  the  caissons  on  thejlank,  to  replace  them  in  front 

or  rear. 

684.  The  battery  being  in  column  with  the  caissons  on  the  flank,  to 
re-establish  them  in  rear  of  their  pieces,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Caissons,  rear  (or  caissons,  rear,  trot).     2.  March. 

Each  chief  of  section  repeats  the  commands  in  time  to  command 
march,  when  the  leading  piece  of  his  section  is  to  commence  the  move- 
ment. The  piece  at  the  head  of  the  column  moves  forward  with  the 
required  gait,  and  its  caisson  places  itself  in  rear  by  an  oblique.  The 
other  pieces  move  forward  in  succession,  and  are  followed  by  their 
caissons  in  like  manner. 

All  the  carriages  preserve  the  usual  distance  in  column. 


400         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

This  movement  is  performed  with  the  different  gaits,  and  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  breaking  sections. 

The  formation  for  placing  the  caissons  in  front  is  executed  by  the 
commands,  caissons,  front  (or  caissons,  front,  trot);  march,  the  caissons 
obliquing  successively  in  front  of  their  pieces. 

To  pas$  from  the  order  in  column  to  the  order  in  line,  and  the 

reverse. 

In  all  formations  in  line  or  column,  the  movements  are  the  same 
whether  the  pieces  or  caissons  lead. 


Forward  into  line. 

685.  The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  to  form  it  into  line  on 
the  head  of  the  column,  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Forward  into  line,  left  oblique.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands, 
section,  forward,  and  those  of  the  other  sections,  section,  left  oblique. 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  leading 
section  moves  to  the  front,  and  its  chief  repeats  the  command  for  the 
guide.  After  advancing  eighteen  yards,  or  for  horse  artiller}^  twenty- 
two,  he  commands,  section,  halt;  right,  dress. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  repeats  the  command  for  the 
guide,  and  conducts  his  section  by  a  left  oblique,  until  by  the  direct 
march  it  may  gain  its  proijer  interval  from  the  section  immediately  on 
its  right.  He  then  commands, /o^toarrf,  and  when  within  four  yards  of 
the  line,  section,  halt;  right,  dress. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands //-on^ 

The  movement  is  executed  on  the  opposite  flank,  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

In  this  case  the  commands  are,  forward  into  line,  right  oblique, 
march:  guide  left,  front. 

The  formation  forward  into  line  by  a  right  or  left  oblique,  executed 
in  a  similar  manner  when  the  column  is  in  march.  In  this  case  the 
chief  of  the  leading  section  gives  no  command  except  for  the  guide, 
until  he  has  advanced  the  distance  before  prescribed.  He  then  halts 
his  section  as  before. 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACT'ICS.  401 

To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

686.  The  battery  being  in  column  at  a  halt,  to  form  it  into  line  faced 
to  the  rear,  on  the  head  of  the  column  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Into   line,  faced   to   the  rear,  left  oblique.      2.  March. 
3.  Guide  right.     4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands, 
section,  forward;  and  those  of  the  other  sections,  section,  left  oblique, 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  as  in  No.  685,  with  the  exception  of  the  alignment, 
When  the  leading  section  has  advanced  eighteen  ^^ards,  or  for  horse  ar- 
tillery twenty-two,  it  is  halted  by  its  chief  until  the  centre  section 
arrives  upon  the  same  line.  He  then  commands,  countermarch — march; 
and  when  the  countermarch  is  nearly  completed,  section,  halt;  left 
dress. 

The  centre  section  is  halted  upon  the  line,  in  like  manner,  until  the 
left  section  comes  up,  and  is  then  countermarched  and  aligned  by  the 
same  commands. 

When  the  left  section  arrives  upon  the  line,  it  is  countermarched 
before  halting,  and  then  aligned  like  the  rest. 

When  the  centre  and  left  sections  are  countermarched,  the  com- 
mands, halt;  left  dress,  should  be  given,  if  possible,  when  they  are  four 
yards  in  rear  of  the  line  on  which  the  leading  section  is  established. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands /roH^ 

The  movement  is  executed  on  the  opposite  flank,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  formation  into  line,  faced  to  the  rear,  by  a  right  or  left  oblique, 
is  executed  in  a  similar  manner  when  the  column  is  in  march.  In  this 
case,  as  the  leading  section  is  already  in  motion,  its  chief  only  repeats 
the  command  for  the  guide  as  in  No.  685, 

To  form  line  to  the  7'ight  or  left. 

687.  The  battery  being  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  form  it 
into  line  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.    2.  March.    3.  Battery— Rai^t.   4.  Left 
— Dress.    5.  Front. 

At  the  first  command  the  chiefs  of  sections  command,  section,  left 
wheel;  and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat,  all  the  sections  wheel  to 
34 


4()2  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  left.  Eiich  chief  of  section  commands,  forward,  guide  left,  as 
soiin  as  his  leading  pivot  carriage  has  taken  the  new  direction. 

When  the  rear  carriages  have  completed  the  wheel,  and  the  sections 
arc  in  line,  the  captain  commands,  hatUrry,  halt;  lift  dreaa. 

Tlie  commands,  halt,  left  dress,  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tioiit^,  and  when  the  alignment  is  completed  the  captain  commands 
front. 

The  battery  is  formed  into  line  to  the  right  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  form  line  on  the  right  or  left. 

688.  The  battery  marching  in  column,  to  form  it  into  line  on  the 
right,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  On  the  right  into  line.    2.  March.    3.  Guide  right.    4.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands, 
section,  right  wheel;  and  at  the  second,  which  he  repeats,  the  section 
wheels  to  the  right.  As  soon  as  the  leading  pivot  carriage  enters  the 
new  direction  he  conim-And^,  forward,  guide  right;  and  as  the  section 
completes  the  wheel  and  unmasks  the  column,  he  commands,  section, 
halt;   right  dress. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  repeat  the  command  for  the  guide, 
and  their  section  continues  to  move  forward.  As  each  section  passes 
the  one  preceding  it  in  the  formation,  its  chief  establishes  it  on  the 
line,  with  the  proper  interval,  by  the  same  commands.  The  commands, 
section,  halt;  right  dress,  are  given  when  the  section  is  four  yards  in 
rear  of  the  line. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands  /Vo»f. 

The  line  is  formed  on  the  left  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
by  inverse  means.  The  commands  are,  on  the  left  into  line,  via'rch; 
guide  left;  front. 

When  the  column  is  at  a  halt,  the  line  is  formed  on  the  right  or  left 
in  the  same  manner.  In  this  case,  the  chiefs  of  the  two  I'car  sections 
command,  section,  fonoard,  and  afterward  repeat  the  commands,  )narch; 
guide  right  (or  l<ft). 


To  break  into  column  to  the  front. 

689.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  break  into  column  to  the 
front  from  the  right,  the  captain  commands  : 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  403 

1.  By  section  fro7n  the  rights  front  into  column.     2.  March. 
3.   Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  commands,  sec- 
tion, foncard;  and  those  of  the  other  sections,  section,  right  oblique. 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  right  section, 
that  section  moves  forward,  and  its  chief  repeats  the  command  for  the 
guide. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  repeats  the  commands,  march, 
yiiide  left,  after  the  section  on  hia  right  has  commenced  the  movement, 
and  when  the  leaders  of  its  rear  carriages  are  in  line  with  him.  After 
obliquing  sufliciently  to  gain  the  rear  of  the  preceding  sections,  he  com- 
mands/or««rr/. 

The  movement  is  executed  from  the  left  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  iiiver>-e  means. 

To  break  into  column  to  the  rear. 

The  battery  being  in  line,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  break  into  column 
to  the  rear  from  one  of  the  flanks,  the  captain  executes  an  about  or  a 
countermarch,  according  to  the  kind  of  carriage  he  may  wish  in  front, 
then  halts  the  battery,  and  breaks  it  into  column  to  the  front  by  the 
preceding  manoeuvre. 

To  break  into  column  to  the  right  or  left. 

690.  The  battery  being  in  line,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  to  break  it  into 
columns  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  By  section,  left  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Forward.     4.  Guide 

left. 

,At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command,  section,  left 
icheel ;  and  at  the  second,  repeated  by  those  chiefs,  all  the  sections 
wheel  to  the  left.  When  the  wheels  are  nearly  completed  the  captain 
commands,  f'onrnrd,  yinde  Irft,  and  the  chiefs  of  sections  repeat  the 
commands. 

When  the  column  is  not  to  advance,  the  command,  column,  halt,  is 
substituted  for  foncard,  guide  Irft. 

The  battery  is  broken  into  column  to  the  right  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 


404  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

To  break  into  columns  to  the  front  from  one  fiank^  to  march 
toward  the  other. 

691.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  break  from  the  right  to 
march  to  the  left,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  section,  break  from  the  right,  to  march  to  the  left. 
2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  commands,  sec- 
tion, forward;  and  at  the  second,  which  he  repeats,  the  section  moves 
forward,  and  he  commands,  guide  left.  After  advancing  eleven  yards 
he  changes  the  direction  to  the  left  by  the  commands,  section,  left  wheel; 
march;  forward. 

Each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  sections  command,  section,  forward,  in 
time  to  command  march,  when  the  limber  wheels  of  the  rear  carriages 
in  the  section  preceding  his  own  arrive  in  front  of  him.  He  then  con- 
ducts the  section  to  the  front,  changes  its  direction  to  the  left,  and 
places  it  in  rear  of  the  preceding  section  by  the  commands  already  pre- 
scribed for  the  section  on  the  right. 

The  battery  is  broken  from  the  left  to  march  to  the  right,  according 
to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  break  into  column  to  the  rear  from  one  flank,  to  march  toiuard 

the  other. 

692.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  break  to  the  rear  from 
one  flank  to  march  toward  the  other,  the  captain  first  executes  an 
about  or  countermarch,  according  to  the  kind  of  carriage  he  may 
wish  in  front.  He  then  halts  the  battery  and  executes  the  preceding 
manoeuvre. 

To  break  into  column  to  the  front  when  the  battery  is  marching  in 

line. 

69.3.  The  battery  marching  in  line  at  a  walk,  to  break  into  column 
to  the  front  from  the  right,  and  at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  By  the  right,  break  into  sections.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  left. 

The  chief  of  the  right  section  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide, 
and  his  section  continues  to  move  at  the  same  gait.     At  the  command 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  405 

march,  the  other  sections  are  halted  by  the  command,  section,  halt,  from 
their  chiefs.  ' 

The  halted  sections  are  put  in  motion  successively  by  their  chiefs; 
each  commanding,  section,  ritjht  oblique,  in  time  to  command  march, 
when  the  leaders  of  the  rear  carriages  in  the  section  on  his  right  arrive 
opposite  to  him.  The  sections  obli(pio  and  enter  the  column  as  de- 
scribed in  No.  689. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  movement  is  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles.  But  the  sections  which  halted  in  the 
preceding  case  slacken  the  gait  to  a  walk  at  the  commands,  walk, 
march,  from  their  chiefs.  They  again  trot  and  enter  the  column  by  the 
commands,  section,  right  oblique,  trot;  march;  forward. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line  at  a  walk,  to  break  into  column 
from  the  right  at  a  trot,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  By  the  right,  break  into  sections,,  trot.     2.  March.     3.  Guide 

left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  commands  trot; 
and  at  the  second,  which  he  repeats,  the  section  changes  its  gait  to  a 
trot.     He  afterward  repeats  the  command  guide  left. 

Each  of  the  other  sections  continues  to  march  at  a  walk  until  required 
to  enter  the  column,  when  its  chief  conducts  it,  as  alread}^  described, 
by  the  commands,  section,  right  oblique,  trot;  march;  forward. 

The  battcr^^  is  broken  into  column  from  the  left,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

To  form  line  advancing. 

694.  When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column  at  a  walk,  to  form  it 
into  line  at  a  trot,  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  and  continue  the  march, 
the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Form  line  advancing,,  left  oblique,,  trot.    2.  March.    3.  Guide 

right. 

The  chief  of  the  leading  section  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide, 
and  his  section  continues  to  move  at  a  walk. 

At  the  first  command,  tlie  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  command,  sec- 
tion, left  oblique,  trot.  The  command  march  is  repeated  by  the  same 
chiefs  ;  and  when  the  obliiiue  movement  is  commenced,  they  repeat  the 
command,  guide  right.  Each  chief  commands  forward,  as  soon  as  his 
section  has  obliqued  sufficiently  to  the  loft,  and  u-alk,  in  time  to  com- 
manil  march,  as  it  arrives  on  the  line. 


406  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column  at  a  trot,  the  movement  is 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles.  In  this  case  the  captain 
does  not  command  trot ;  and  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  com- 
mands xoalk,  march,  successively,  after  the  first  and  second  commands 
of  the  cajitain.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  give  the  same  com- 
mands as  their  sections  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  movement  is  executed  so  as  to  gain  ground  to  the  right,  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 


To  form  double  column  on  the  centre  section. 

695.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  form  double  column  on 
the  centre  section,  the  cajatain. commands: 

1.  Double  column  on  the  centre.     2.   March.     3.    Guide  right 

(or  left). 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  commands, 
section,  foricard ;  the  chief  of  the  right  section,  section,  left  oblique ; 
and  the  chief  of  the  left  section,  section,  right  ohlique.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  centre  section,  that  section 
marches  to  the  front,  and  its  chief  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide. 

When  the  wheel  horses  in  the  rear  rank  of  the  centre  section  have 
l^assed  the  leaders  in  the  front  rank  of  the  other  sections,  the  chiefs  of 
those  sections  repeat  the  command  march,  and  the  sections  commence 
the  oblique. 

When  the  piece  nearest  the  column  is  about  entering  it,  in  each  of 
these  sections,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  commands,  hy  the  left, 
break  section,  march ;  and  the  chief  of  the  left,  by  the  right,  break  sec- 
tion, march.  The  right  and  left  sections,  without  change  of  gait,  then 
form  into  columns  of  pieces  in  rear  of  the  right  and  left  carriages  of 
the  centre  section. 

The  chiefs  of  the  flank  sections  are  careful  to  make  their  i^icces  enter 
the  column  at  the  proper  time.  And  when  the  column  is  formed  they 
place  themselves  outside  of  it,  four  yards  from  the  centres  of  their 
respective  sections. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  follows  the  movement,  sees  that  his 
carriages  do  not  enter  the  column  too  soou,  and,  when  the  column  is 
formed,  places  himself  four  yards  in  rear  of  the  centre. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  form  the  double  column 
at  the  same  gait,  the  captain  commands: 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  407 

1.  Double  columii  on   the  centre.     2.   March.     3.    Guide   right 

(or  left). 

The  chief  of  the  centre  section  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide, 
and  the  section  continues  to  advance. 

At  the  command  march,  the  other  sections  are  halted  by  the  com- 
mand, section,  halt,  from  their  chiefs.  They  are  afterward  formed 
into  column  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  for  forming 
double  column  from  a  halt. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  trot,  the  double  column  is  formed 
according  to  the  same  principles.  In  this  case  the  flank  sections  pass 
to  a  Avalk,  instead  of  halting  as  before,  and  resume  the  trot  to  oblique, 
and  enter  the  column.  The  commands  from  their  chiefs  ai*e,  loalk ; 
nmrch  ;  section,  left  (or  right)  oblique,  trot;  march,  and,  bi/  the  left  (or 
riyht),  break  section  ;  march. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  form  the  double  column 
at  a  trot,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  Double   column   on  the  centre.,  trot.     2.    March.     3.    Guide 

right  (or  left). 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  commands  trot. 
At  the  second,  which  he  repeats,  the  section  moves  forward  at  a  mode- 
rate trot,  and  he  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide. 

The  flank  sections  continue  to  walk  until  the  centre  has  advanced 
sufficiently  to  allow  them  to  oblique,  and  are  then  foi-med  into  column 
as  already  prescribed;  their  chiefs  commanding,  section,  left  (or  right) 
oblique,  trot ;   march,  and,  by  the  left  (or  right),  break  section;  march. 

To  form  the  double  column  with  a  battery  of  four  pieces,  the  captain 
gives  the  same  commands  as  with  a  battery  of  six.  The  right  section 
is  broken  into  column  of  pieces  by  the  left,  and  the  left  section  by  the 
right.  The  chiefs  of  sections  place  themselves  on  the  outer  flanks  of 
the  column,  abreast  the  loading  drivers  of  the  leading  carriages.  The 
senior  chief  repeats  the  command  for  the  guide,  and  gives  such  other 
commands  as  are  required  for  the  head  of  the  column;  the  leading  car- 
riages moving  as  a  section  for  the  time  being. 
\ 

To  deploy  the  double  column  into  line  to  the  front. 

The  battery  being  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to  form  it  into  line  to 
the  front,  the  captain  commands: 


408  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


1.  Forward^  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  commands, 
section,  forward ;  the  chief  of  the  right  section,  section,  into  line,  right 
oblique;  and  the  chief  of  the  left  section,  section,  into  line,  left  oblique. 
At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these  chiefs,  the  cenire  section  ad- 
vances five  yards,  and  its  chief  commands,  section,  halt;  right  (or 
left) — dress. 

The  flank  sections  oblique  to  the  right  and  left  ,■  and  as  their  pieces 
arrive  in  rear  of  their  proper  places  on  the  line,  they  move  forward, 
halt,  and  dress  toward  the  centre  without  command. 

As  soon  as  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commands  front. 

AVhen  the  column  is  marching,  the  movement  is  executed  in  the  same 
manner.  In  this  case  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  does  not  com- 
mand, section,  forward ;  march  ;  but  halts  and  aligns  his  section  after 
advancing  five  yards. 

When  the  column  is  raarching  at  a  trot,  to  deploy  it  into  line  to  the 
front  at  the  same  gait,  without  discontinuing  the  march,  the  captain 
commands  : 

1.  Form  line  advancing.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  commands, 
toalk ;  the  chief  of  the  right  section,  section,  into  line,  right  ohliqne  ; 
and  the  chief  of  the  left  section,  section,  into  line,  left  oblique.  At  the 
command  march,  repeated  by  these  chiefs,  the  centre  section  slackens 
its  gait  to  a  walk,  and  the  flank  sections  deploy.  As  each  piece  arrives 
upon  the  line,  its  gait  is  changed  to  a  walk  without  command.  The 
movement  is  executed  as  in  the  preceding  cases  ;  but  when  the  line  is 
formed  it  continues  to  advance:  the  captain  commanding  guide  right 
(or  left),  which  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

When  the  column  is  marching  at  a  walk,  to  deploy  it  into  line  to 
the  front  at  a  trot,  without  discontinuing  the  march,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 

1.  Form  line  advancing,  trot.     2.  March.   3.  Guide  right  (or  left) . 

At  the  first  command  the  chief  of  the  right  section  commands,  section, 
into  line,  right  oblique,  trot;  and  the  chief  of  the  left  section,  section 
into  line,  left  oblique,  trot.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  these 
chiefs,  the  flank  sections  deploy  at  a  trot;  the  centre  section  continues 
to  march  at  a  walk  ;  and,  the  line  having  been  formed  as  in  the  pre- 
ceding case,  the  captain  gives  the  commi^nd  for  the  guide. 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  pieces,  the  double  column  is  de- 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  409 

ploj-ed  into  line  to  the  front  by  the  same  commands  from  the  captain 
as  when  it  consists  of  six.  The  chiefs  of  sections  give  the  same  com- 
mands as  in  the  other  case,  and  then  tlieir  sections  are  formed  as  in  No. 
674.  When  the  line  is  to  be  halted,  as  in  forming  foru:ard  into  line,  the 
senior  chief  commands,  halt  \  right  (or  left)  dress,  as  soon  as  the  leading 
carriages  have  advanced  five  yards;  and  the  alignment  is  made  upon 
the  central  carriages. 

To  form  the  double  column  info  line  to  the  right  or  left. 

607.  The  battery  being  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to  form  it  into 
line  on  the  right,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  To  and  on  the  right  into  line.     2.  March.     3.  Front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands, 
section,  right  wheel ;  and  the  other  chiefs  of  sections,  forward.  At  the 
second,  repeated  by  those  chiefs,  the  leading  section  wheels  to  the  right 
and  is  established  on  the  line  as  in  No.  687.  The  other  pieces  advance 
under  the  direction  of  their  chiefs  and  of  the  chiefs  of  sections,  wheel 
to  the  right  in  succession  as  they  arrive  opposite  their  places,  establish 
themselves  on  the  line,  and  dress  upon  the  pieces  already  aligned. 
AVhen  the  alignment  is  completed,  the  captain  commands  front. 

When  the  column  is  marching,  the  line  is  formed  to  the  right  in  the 
same  manner,  except  that  the  chiefs  of  the  flank  sections  omit'  the 
commands,  fnrnutrd,,  march.  The  line  is  formed  to  the  left  according 
to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  pieces,  the  double  column  is  de- 
ployed into  line  to  the  right  or  left  by  the  same  commands  from  the 
captain,  as  when  it  consists  of  six.  In  this  case  the  leading  pieces  are 
wheeled  to  the  right  or  left,  as  a  section,  and  established  on  the  line. 
For  this  purpose  the  senior  chief  of  section  commands,  right  (or  left) 
wheel;  march  ;  forward  :  gidde  right  (or  left);  halt;  right  (or  left) 
dress.  The  other  pieces  move  forward,  wheel  in  succession  as  they 
arrive  opposite  their  places,  and  form  on  the  line  as  already  des- 
cribed. 

To  advance  in  line. 

698.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  cause  it  to  advance,  the 
captain  indicates  to  the  guide  the  points  on  which  he  is  to  march,  and 
commands: 

1.  Battery,  forward.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right  (or  left). 
^5 


410  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  commands, /oru-arrf;  march;  griide  right  (or  ?e//),  are  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  sectioDS.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  carriages 
move  forward  at  a  walk,  and  the  chiefs  of  sections  preserve  the  align- 
ment toward  that  chief  of  carriage  who  serves  as  guide  of  the  line.  The 
guide  marches  steadily  in  the  given  direction,  and  the  chiefs  of  car- 
riages regulate  their  intervals  and  alignment  by  him. 

The  carriages  of  the  rear  rank  follow  those  in  front  at  their  appro- 
priate distance  of  two  yards.  The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  super- 
intends the  march  of  the  rear  rank  of  carriages,  and  moves  wherever 
his  presence  may  be  necessary  for  that  purpose. 

In  horse  artillery  the  detachments  preserve  their  alignments,  and 
follow  their  pieces  at  the  proper  distance. 

To  halt  the  battery  and  align  it. 

699.  When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  to  halt  and  align  it,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.  Battery — Halt.     2.  Pdght  (or  left) — Dress.     3.  Front. 

The  commands,  halt;  right  (or  left) — dress,  are  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections.  At  the  first  command,  the  carriages  and  detach- 
ments halt,  and  at  the  second  align  themselves  by  the  right  (or  left)  in 
their  respective  ranks ;  the  carriages  dressing  by  the  drivers  of  their 
wheel  horses.  The  carriages  are  placed  as  squarely  on  the  line  as 
possible  without  opening  or  closing  the  intervals.  The  captain  super- 
intends the  alignment  of  the  front  rank  of  carriages,  and  the  chief  of 
the  line  of  caissons  that  of  the  rear  ,•  each  placing  himself  for  that 
purpose  on  the  flank  of  the  guide.  When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the 
captain  commands /roni!. 

When  the  battery  is  halted,  if  it  cannot  be  aligned  by  slight  move- 
ments, the  captain  causes  one  or  two  carriages  from  one  of  the  flanks 
or  centre  to  advance  four  yards,  or  to  a  greater  distance  if  necessary, 
and  then  causes  the  alignment  to  be  made  by  the  right,  left,  or  centre, 
by  the  command,  right,  left,  or,  on  the  centre,  dress.  At  this  command, 
the  carriages  and  detachments  move  forward  and  align  themselves 
according  to  the  principles  just  explained;  the  drivers  halting  a  little 
in  rear  of  the  line,  and  dressing  forward  so  as  to  place  the  carriage  as 
squarely  upon  it  as  possible. 

To  change  direction  in  line. 

700.  The  battery  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  wheel  it  to  the  right,  the 
captain  commands  : 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACT1C8.  411 

1.  Battery^  right  ivheel.      2.  March.      8.  Forward.      4.  Bat- 
tery— Halt.     5.  Right — Dress.     6.  Front. 

The  coinraaLTids,  right  wheel;  march  ;  forward  ;  halt;  ru/ht — drean, 
are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

At  the  command  march,  the  pivot  carriage  moves  at  a  walk,  and  des- 
cribes a  quadrant  (twenty-two  yards)  of  a  circle,  whose  radius  is  four- 
teen yards.  The  other  carriages  move  at  a  trot  and  preserve  their 
intervals  from  the  pivot.  They  regulate  their  gaits  according  to  their 
distances  from  the  pivot,  so  as  to  remain  as  short  a  time  as  possible  in 
rear  of  the  line,  without  urging  their  horses  injuriously,  and  so  as  to 
arrive  upon  it  in  succession.  The  carriages  of  the  rear  rank  follow  at 
the  proper  distance  in  the  tracks  of  those  in  front. 

At  the  command  forward,  which  is  given  when  the  leading  pivot 
carriage  has  described  its  arc  of  twenty-two  yards,  that  carriage  moves 
direct  to  the  front;  and  when  the  rear  pivot  carriage  is  in  the  new 
direction,  the  captain  commands,  battery;  htdt ;  rir/ht  dress.  The 
commands  forward;  half;  riyht  dress,  are  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the 
right  section  immediately  after  the  captain;  and  by  the  other  chiefs  in 
time  to  be  applicable  to  their  sections;  the  pivot  carriages  halting  at 
the  command  halt,  and  the  others  hj^lting  and  dressing  toward  the 
pivot  as  they  arrive  in  succession  on  the  line. 

When  the  battery  is  aligned,  the  captain  commandsyVo»^. 

The  battery  is  wheeled  to  the  left  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  at  a  halt  or  marching  in  line^  to  wheel  it  to  the 
right  and  continue  the  march,  the  captain  commands: 

1.  Battery,  right  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Foravard. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  already  described,  except  that  the 
pivot  carriage,  after  wheeling,  continues  to  march  in  the  new  direction, 
and  the  others  conform  to  its  gait  and  direction  as  they  arrive  on  the 
line. 

The  direction  is  changed  to  the  left  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means. 

FORMATIONS     IN     BATTERY. 
In  line  with  pieces  in  front  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front. 

701.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  pieces  in  front,  to 
form  in  battery  to  the  front,  the  captain  commands: 


412         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

1.  In  battery.     2.  Guide  left.     3.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the 
command  in  hattery,  the  caissons  stand  fast,  and  the  pieces  advance. 
The  intervals  and  alignment  are  preserved,  and  the  chiefs  of  pieces 
and  sections  march  at  their  places  in  line.  At  the  command  march, 
which  is  given  as  soon  as  they  have  advanced  seventeen  yards,  the 
chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  halt,  and  the  pieces  execute  an  about. 
As  soon  as  the  about  is  completed,  the  pieces  are  halted,  unlimbered, 
and  prepared  for  firing:  the  limbers  being  taken  to  their  places  in  bat- 
tery by  an  about. 

When  the  cannoneers  are  marching  by  the  sides  of  their  pieces,  they 

-halt  at  the  command  march,  allow  their  pieces  to  pass  them,  change 

sides,  and  move  forward  to  the  posts  they  are  to  occupy,  when  their 

pieces  have  completed  the  about.     They  are  not  required  to   observe 

any  particular  order  during  this  movement. 

When  the  cannoneers  are  mounted  on  the  ammunition  chest,  those 
on  the  caissons  dismount  and  run  to  their  posts  at  the  command  in  bat- 
tery.    Those  on  the  pieces  dismount  after  the  about. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  take  their  posts  in  battery  as  soon 
as  the  formation  is  completed. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  movement  is  executed  in  the  same  manner,  and 
by  the  same  commands.  But  the  pieces  advance  only  ten  yards  before 
executing  the  about.  The  horses  of  the  detachments  do  not  advance. 
But  at  the  command  in  hattery,  the  cannoneers  dismount  and  run  to 
their  posts. 

After  the  formation,  the  captain  rectifies  the  alignment,  if  necessary. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line  with  the  pieces  in  front,  it  is 
formed  in  battery  to  the  front,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
the  commands,  in  hattery,  march.  The  caissons  halt  at  the  command 
in  hattery  J  and  in  horse  artillery  the  detachments  do  the  same;  the 
cannoneers  dismounting  and  running  to  their  posts. 

To  form  in  battery  to  the  front  hy  throwing  the  caissons  to  the 

rear. 

702.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  pieces  in  front,  to 
form  in  battery  to  the  front  liy  throwing  the  caissons  to  the  rear,  the 
captain  commands : 

Action  front. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the   chiefs  of  sections,  the  pieces  are 


LIGHT   ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  413 

unliuaberea  and  wheeled  about  by  hand;  the  limbers  reversing  to  the 

left  at  the  same  time,  and  taking  their  places  in  battery,  as  described 

in  the  school  of  the  piece   No   CV,^      TV..       •  ucM^noea 

Pi*'^^'  ^^>-  (>J«-     The  caissons  reverse  to  the  left, 

Tattery  ""'  """"  '^""  ''  ''^  ^'^''^  '-^"^^  *^^-  ^^-^  places  in 

When  the  cannoneers  are  mounted   on   the  ammunition  chests,  they 
dismount  and  run  to  their  posts,  at  the  command  action  front 

to  i^rZrT''':  "'"  ''"  "^'^  ^'  "''""^=  ^"^«  -^-«^  - -sorted 
latterv  ^ ^     T       "'"   ''  '''   ^"^^^    '^^^^'^^^"^^  *«  ^^-^  horses  in 

smal  ,  that  they  may  be  led  to  the  roar  by  the  horse  holders.  In  this 
case  the  captain  commands  ai.nount ;  immediately  after.  .cW  front. 
^  ben  he  detachments  conduct  their  horses  to  the  rear,  they  dismount 
without  command  from  the  captain.  ^^mount 

The  battery  is  generally  in  line  at  a  halt,  when  this  mo<le  of  coming 
nto  action  is  resorted  to.     It  may  also  be  used  in  successive  forma 
ions  by  giving  the  command  action  front,  when  a  part  of  the  battery 

:i  T:  f ''  .'"  ''''  ^^""  ^"^  -^^^  ^-1  g-"-l  or  heavy  pieces 
this  mode  of  coming  into  action  should  not  be  used. 

In  line  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front. 

703.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  caissons  in  front, 
to  form  in  battery  to  the  front,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Pieces,  pass  your  caissons.     2.  March.     3.  In  battery. 
4.   Guide  left.     5.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections;  the  pieces 
pass  their  caissons,  and  at  the  command  in  lattery,  given  as  soon  as 
he  pieces  have   passed   their   caissons,   the   formation  is  executed  as 
prescribed  in  No.  702. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  command  in  hatter,^  is  given  when  the  detach- 
ments have  passed  the  caissons. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  with  the  caissons  in  front,  it 
s  .ormed  in  battery  to  the  front  according  to  the  same  principles,  and 
by  the  commands,  piece.,  pass  your  caissons  (or  pieces,  pass  your 
caissons,  trot) ;  march  ;  in  lattery;  guide  hft,  march. 

In  line  with  pieces  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear. 

704.   When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  pieces  in  front, 
to  iorm  in  battery  to  the  rear,  the  captain  command..  : 


414  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MTLTTTA. 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.     2.   Caissons,  pass  your  pieces,    trot. 
3.     March.     4.  In  battery. 

The  three  last  commands  ai'e  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At 
the  third,  the  caissons  pass  their  pieces  at  a  brisk  trot.  And,  at  the 
fourth,  which  is  given  as  soon  as  the  caissons  have  pat^sed,  the  can- 
noneers unlimber  and  prepare  for  firing. 

The  caissons  advance  seventeen  yards  beyond  their  pieces,  execute 
an  aboiit  together,  and  take  their  places  in  batter^'. 

When  the  cannoneers  are  mounted  on  the  ammunition  chests,  the 
caissons  advance  seventeen  yards  beyond  their  pieces,  and  then  halt 
to  allow  the  cannoneers  to  dismount  before  executing  the  about.  As 
soon  as  the  caissons  halt,  the  cannoneers  dismount  and  run  to  their 
posts.  When  the  battery  is  at  a  halt,  as  in  the  present  case,  it  is 
considered  better  to  dismount  the  cannoneers  before  commencing  the 
movement.  The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  precedes  the  movement 
of  his  carriages,  and  places  himself  on  the  line  to  be  occupied  by 
their  leaders,  when  the  about  is  commenced.  He  takes  his  place  in 
battery  as  soon  as  the  about  is  completed  and  the  carriages  ai'e  on  the 
line. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  take  their  places  in  battery  as 
soon  as  the  formation  is  completed. 

In  horse  artiller)/,  at  the  command  in  battery,  the  detachments 
incline  to  the  right,  pass  their  pieces  at  a  brisk  trot,  and  take  their 
places  in  battery  by  a  left  about.  The  cannoneers  then  dismount,  run 
to  their  posts,  unlimber,  and  prepare  for  firing. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line,  with  the  pieces  in  front,  the 
formation  in  battery  to  the  rear  is  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  the  same  commands.  At  the  command  in  battery, 
which  is  given  as  soon  as  the  caissons  have  passed  their  pieces,  the 
latter  halt,  the  detachments  in  horse  artillery  pass  them,  and  the 
movement  is  completed  as  already  described. 

In  line  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear. 

705.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt,  with  the  caissons  in  front, 
to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.     2.  In  battery. 

At  the  command  in  lattery,  which  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions, the  cannoneers  unlimber  and  prepare  for  firing. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  and  sections  take  their  places   in  battery. 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  415 

The  caissons  move  at  a  brisk  trot  and  take  their  places  in  battery, 
under  the  superintendence  of  their  chief. 

In  horse  <irtillcrji,  at  the  command  in  battery,  the  detachments  pass 
their  pieces  at.  a  trot,  move  to  their  places  in  battery,  dismount,  and 
run  to  their  posts. 

When  the  batter}'-  is  marching  in  line,  with  the  caissons  in  front, 
the  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear  is  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  the  same  commands. 

In  hattery,  to  form  in  line  to  the  front. 

706.  Being  in  battery,  to  form  in  line  to  the  front  with  the  caissons 
in  rear,  the  captain  commands : 

Limber  to  the  front. 

This  command  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  the  pieces 
are  limbered  as  described  in  No.  648 ;  the  caissons  closing  at  the  same 
time  to  the  proper  distance  without  further  command. 

When  the  captain  wishes  to  place  the  caissons  in  front,  he  com- 
mands, limber  to  the  front;  and  while  the  pieces  are  limbering,  caissons, 
pass  1/our  pieces,  trot  ;  march.  The  caissons  pass  and  halt  in  front  of 
their  pieces ;  or,  if  the  captain  wishes  the  battery  to  advance,  he 
commands,  forward  ;  (/uide  right  (or  left),  as  the  caissons  are  complet- 
ing the  passage,  and  the  battery  moves  forward  at  a  walk. 

In  horse  artilleri/,  when  the,  pieces  arc  limbered  to  the  front,  the 
horse  holders  advance  within  two  yards  of  their  pieces ;  and  there 
the  cannoneers  mount. 

The  captain  rectifies  the  alignment,  if  necessary,  and  commands 
front. 

When  the  battery  is  to  advance  immediately,  the  captain  commands, 
forward;  guide  right  (or  left),  instead  of  battery,  halt;  and  the  caisson, 
close  on  the  march. 

When  the  captain  wishes  to  place  the  caissons  in  front,  he  may  cause 
the  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear,  and  command: 

1.   Caissons  pass  your  pieces,  trot,  pieces  left  about.     2.  March. 
3.  Battery — Halt,  or  Forward — Guide  right  (or  left). 

These  commands  are  repeated  and  executed  as  already  prescribed  ; 
the  pieces  executing  the  about  as  soon  as  the  ground  has  been  un- 
masked by  the  caissons,  and  the  battery  halting  or  advancing  as  soon 
as  the  passage  is  completed. 

In  horse  artillery,  when  the  pieces  are  limbered  to  the  rear,  the  can- 
noneers run  to  their  horses,  mount,  and  rejoin  their  pieces. 


416  MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 

In  hatleri/,  to  form  in  line  to  the  rear. 

707.  When  in  battery,  to  form  in  line  to  the  rear,  the  captain  causes 
the  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  rear;  and  then,  if  he  wishes  to  place 
the  caissons  in  front,  commands: 

1.   Caissons^  left  about ;  pieces^  forward.      2.  March.     3.  Bat- 
l^ry — Halt,  or  Forward — Guide  right  (or  lefl^. 

The  two  first  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections;  the 
caissons  execute  the  about;  and  the  pieces  close  to  their^roper  distance. 
The  third  command,  which  is  given  at  the  moment  the  about  is  finished, 
is  repeated  and  executed  as  prescribed. 

The  captain    rectifies    the    alignment   if   necessary,   and   commands 

front. 

In  home  artillery,  the  detachments  oblique  to  the  left  to  facilitate  the 
movement  of  the  caissons.  And  then  if  the  battery  halts,  they  place 
themselves  at  once  in  rear  of  their  pieces;  or  if  it  advances,  they  wait 
and  do  the  same  by  wheeling  to  the  right  as  they  pass. 

If  the  formation  in  line  to  the  rear  is  to  be  executed  by  placing  the 
pieces  in  front,  the  captain,  after  causing  the  pieces  to  be  limbered  to 
the  rear,  commands : 

1.  Pieces,  pass  your  caissons;  caissons,  left  about.     2.  March. 
3.  Battery — Halt,  or  Forward — Guide  right  (or  left). 

The  first  two  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections; 
the  pieces  pass  their  caissons;  and  the  caissons  execute  the  about  as 
soon  as  the  ground  is  unmasked.  The  third  command  is  repeated  and 
executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  No.  698. 

The  captain  rectifies  the  alignment  if  necessary,  and  commands 
front. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  detachments  place  themselves  behind  tbeir 
pieces  as  soon  as  they  are  passed  by  them. 

In  forming  line  to  the  rear,  either  with  pieces  or  caissons  in  front, 
the  caissons  may  be  placed  at  once  in  front  of  their  pieces  for  greater 
convenience  in  mounting  the  cannoneers.  For  this  purpose,  as  soon  as 
the  captain  has  commanded,  limber  to  the  rear,  he  commands: 

1.  Caissons,  in  front  of  your  pieces  (or  caissons,  in  front  of  your 
pieces,  trot).     2.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections;  and  while 
the  pieces  are  limbering,  the  caissons  oblique  to  the  right,  move  forward 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  417 

near  the  middle  of  the  interval  between  the  leaders  of  the  pieces,  place 
themselves  iu  front  of  them  by  two  successive  wheels  to  the  left,  and 
halt. 

In  hoy^se  artillery,  when  the  caissons  are  ordered  to  the  front  of  their 
pieces,  the  horse  holders  oblique  to  the  left  at  the  command  march,  and 
halt  between  the  leading  drivers  of  the  pieces.  As  soon  as  the  can- 
noneers are  mounted,  the  detachments  take  their  posts  in  rear  of  their 
pieces. 

In  column  luiih  pieces  in  fronts  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front. 

708.  When  the  batter}'  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the  pieces  in  front, 
to  form  in  battery  to  the  front  by  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the  captain 
commands : 

1.  Forward^  into  battery^  left  oblique.      2.   March.      3.   Guide 

right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands, 
section,  forward;  and  those  of  the  other  sections,  section,  left  oblique. 
The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  moves  quickly  to  the  right  of  the 
leading  section,  to  cause  the  caissons  to  halt  at  the  proper  time  and  to 
superintend  their  alignment.  At  the  command  inarch,  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections,  the  movement  is  executed  as  pi'cscribed  in  No.  085, 
for  forming  line  to  the  front.  But  as  each  section  arrives  on  the 
line,  instead  of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  in  battery  to  the  front  by 
the  commands,  in  battery ;  march,  which  are  executed  as  prescribed  in 
No.  701. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  front,  by  gaining  ground  to  the 
right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is  formed  in  battery  to 
the  front  by  applying  the  principles  of  No.  701. 

In  column^  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front. 

709.  When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the  caissons  in 
front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  front  by  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Forward,   into  battery,  left  oblique.      2.  March.      3.   Guide 

right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands. 


418  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

section,  forward ;  and  those  of  the  other  sections,  section,  left  oblique. 
The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  moves  quickly  to  the  right  of  the 
leading  section,  to  halt  the  caissons  at  the  proper  time  and  to  super- 
intend their  alignment.  At  the  command  inarch,  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  sections,  the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  701,  for 
forming  line  to  the  front.  But  as  each  section  arrives  on  the  line, 
instead  of  halting,  its  chief  forms  it  in  battery  to  the  front  by  the 
commands,  j:>i"ece«,  j^ass  your  caissons;  march;  in  battery;  march, 
which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  703. 

The  formalion  in  battery  to  the  front,  by  gaining  ground  to  the 
right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is  formed  in  battery  to 
the  front  by  applying  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  latter  part  of 
No.  70;5. 


In  column^  with  pieces  in  fronts  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear. 

710.  When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  with  the  pieces  in 
front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear  by  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.    Into   hatter y,  faced   to   the   rear,   left   oblique.      2.    March. 

3.   Guide  right. 

,  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands, 
section,  forward;  and  those  of  the  other  sections,  section,  left  oblique. 
The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes  to  the  right  of  the  leading 
section,  to  direct  the  about  of  the  caissons,  and  to  superintend  their 
alignment.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  685,  for  forming  line  to 
the  front.  But  as  each  section  arrives  on  the  line,  instead  of  halting, 
its  chief  forms  it  in  battery  to  the  rear  by  the  commands,  caissons,  pass 
your  pieces,  trot ;  march;  jh  6o«e/7/,  which  are  executed  as  prescribed 
in  No.  704. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear,  by  gaining  ground  to  the 
right,  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is  formed  into  battery  to 
the  rear  by  aijplying  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  latter  part  of 
Nos.  685  and  70i. 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  419 


In  column,  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear. 

711.  The  battery  being  iu  column  at  a  halt,  with  the  caissons  in 
front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  rear  by  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.   Into   battery,  faced  to  the   rear,  left  oblique.      2.   March. 

3.   Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands, 
section,  foricard;  and  those  of  the  other  sections,  section,  left  oblique. 
The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes  to  the  right  of  the  leading  sec- 
tion, to  direct  the  about  of  the  caissons,  and  to  superintend  their 
alignment.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections, 
the  movement  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No,  685  for  forming  line  to 
the  front.  But  as  each  section  arrives  on  the  line,  instead  of  halting, 
its  chief  forms  it  into  battery  to  the  rear  by  the  command  in  battery, 
which  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  704. 

The  formation  in  battery  to  the  rear,  by  gaining  ground  to  the  right, 
is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  it  is  formed  into  battery  to 
the  rear  by  applying  the  principles  of  Nos.  6S5  and  704. 

In  column,  with  pieces  in  frojit,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  right  or 

left. 

712.  When  the  battery  is  in  column,  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  with  the 
pieces  iu  front,  if  the  captain  wishes  to  form  it  in  battery  to  the  left,  by 
gaining  ground  to  the  right,  he  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left,  by  section,  right  luheel.     2.  March.     3.   Cais- 
sons, pass  your  pieces,  trot.     4.  March.     5.  In  battery. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command,  section,  right 
wheel;  and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat,  all  the  sections  wheel  to 
the  right.     The  caissons  follow  their  pieces  at  the  proper  distance. 

At  the  commands,  caissons,  i^a^'^  your  pieces,  trot;  march,  which  are 
given  before  the  completion  of  the  wheel,  and  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  sections,  all  the  caissons  pass  their  pieces  at  a  trot. 

At  the  command  in  battery,  which  is  given  and  repeated  in  like  man- 
ner as  soon  as  the  caissons  have  passed,  and  the  pieces  are  square  on 
the  new  line,  all  the  sections  form  at  once  into  battery  to  the  roar,  as 
prescribed  in  No.  704. 


420         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND     MILITIA. 

When  the  captain  wishes  to  form  in  battery  to  the  left,  by  gaining 
ground  to  the  left,  he  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left,  by  section,  left  ivheel.     2.  March.     3.  In 

BATTERY.       4.    MaRCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command,  section,  left 
wheel;  and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat,  all  the  sections  wheel  at 
once  to  the  left. 

At  the  command  in  hatter}^,  which  is  given  and  repeated  as  soon  as 
the  caissons  have  completed  the  wheel,  all  the  sections  form  at  once 
into  battei'y  to  the  front,  as  prescribed  in  No.  703. 

The  two  formations  in  battery  to  the  right,  by  gaining  ground  to  the 
left  or  right,  are  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

In  column,  ivith  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  to  the  right  or 

left. 

713.  When  the  battery  is  in  column,  in  march  or  at  a  halt,  with  the 
caissons  in  front,  to  form  it  in  battery  to  the  left,  by  gaining  ground 
to  the  right,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left,  by  section,  right  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  In 

BATTERY. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command,  section,  right 
wheel;  and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat,  the  sections  wheel  at  once 
to  the  right,  and  move  to  the  front  at  the  commands,  forward,  guide 
right,  from  their  chiefs. 

At  the  command  in  battery,  which  is  given  and  repeated  as  soon  as 
the  pieces  are  square  on  the  new  line,  all  the  sections  form  at  once  into 
battery  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  in  No.  704. 

To  form  in  battery  to  the  left,  by  gaining  ground  to  the  left,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left,  by  section,  left  wheel.     2.  March.     3.  Pieces, 
pass  your  caissons.     4.  March.    5.  In  battery.    6.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  command,  section,  left 
wheel;  and  at  the  second,  which  they  repeat,  the  sections  wheel  at  once 
to  the  left.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  are  given  and  repeated 
just  before  the  completion  of  the  wheel:  and  the  fifth  is  given  when 
the  pieces  have  passed  their  caissons,  and  the  latter  are  square  upon 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY   TACTICS.  421 

the  new  line.     The  sections  are  then  formed  in  battery  to  the  front  as 
prescribed  in  No.  703. 

The  formations  in  battery  to  the  right,  by  gaining  ground  to  the 
right  or  left,  are  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

In  column^  with  pieces  in  fronts  to  form  in  battery  on  the  right  or 

left. 

714.  When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  with  the  pieces  in 
front,  to  form  in  battery  on  the  right,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  On  the  rights  into  battery.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands,  sec- 
tion, right  wheel;  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes  to  that  sec- 
tion. At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  leading 
section,  that  section  wheels  to  the  right,  and  its  chief  conducts  it  to  the 
line  by  the  commands,  forward,  (juidc  riyht.  And  then,  without  halting, 
it  is  formed  into  battery  to  the  front,  as  prescribed  in  No.  703,  by  the 
commands,  in  battery,  march,  from  its  chief. 

The  other  sections  continue  to  advance;  and  as  each  arrives  opposite 
its  place  in  battery,  after  passing  the  one  preceding  it  in  the  formation, 
it  is  formed  into  battery  by  its  chief,  by  the  commands,  section,  right 
wheel;  march;  forward;  guide  right;  in  battery;  march;  the  command 
in  battery  being  given  as  the  caissons  arrive  in  line  with  those  already 
established. 

The  formation  in  battery  on  the  left  is  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  it  is  formed  in  battery  on 
the  right  or  left  according  to  the  same  principles.  In  this  case,  the 
chiefs  of  the  two  rear  sections  command,  section,  forxoard,  immediately 
after  the  first  command  of  the  captain,  and  then  repeat  the  commands, 
march;  guide  right  (or  left). 

In  column,  with  caissons  in  front,  to  form  in  battery  on  the  right  or 

left. 

715.  When  the  battery  is  marching  in  column,  with  the  caissons  in 
front,  to  form  in  battery  on  the  right,  the  captain  commands : 

1.  On  the  right,  into  battery.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 
At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  section  commands, 


422  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

section,  right  ivheel;  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  goes  to  that 
section.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  leading 
section,  that  section  wheels  to  the  right,  and  is  conducted  to  the  line 
by  the  commands,  forvard,  guide  right,  from  its  chief;  as  soon  as  it 
reaches  the  line,  the  section  is  formed  in  battery  to  the  front  by  the 
commands,  piecea,  2:>a8n  your  cais>iou8j  march;  in  battery;  march,  from 
its  chief. 

The  other  sections  continue  to  advance,  and  as  each  arrives  opposite 
its  place  in  battery,  after  having  passed  the  one  preceding  it  in  the  for- 
mation, it  is  wheeled  to  the  right,  and  formed  into  battery  by  its  chief, 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  leading  section. 

The  formation  in  battery  on  the  left,  is  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  is  in  column  at  a  halt,  it  is  formed  in  battery  on 
the  right  or  left,  according  to  the  same  principles;  the  chiefs  of  the 
two  rear  sections  giving  the  additional  commands  prescribed  in  No. 
714. 

7o  deploy  the  double  column  info  battery  to  the  front  or  rear. 

716.  The  battery  being  in  double  column  at  a  halt,  to  deploy  it  into 
battery  to  the  front,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Forward  into  battery.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  commands,  sec- 
tion, forroard;  that  of  the  right,  section  into  line,  right  oblique;  that  of 
the  left,  section  into  line,  left  oblique;  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of  cais- 
sons goes  to  the  leading  section.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  sections,  the  centre  section  advances  five  yards,  and  with- 
out halting,  is  formed  into  battery  to  the  front  as  prescribed  in  No.  701 
or  703,  according  to  the  kind  of  carriage  in  front. 

The  pieces  of  the  flank  sections  are  brought  upon  the  line  by  obliqu- 
ing, and  placed  successively  in  battery  without  command ;  regulating 
by  the  centre  section. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  double  column,  it  is  deployed 
into  battery  to  the  front  in  the  same  manner,  except  that  the  chief 
of  the  centre  section  does  not  command,  section,  foncard  ;  march. 

When  the  battery  is  in  double  column,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  it 
is  deployed  into  battery  to  the  rear  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  this  No.  and  in  No.  704  or  705,  according  to  the  kind  of 
carriage  in  front.     The  commands  are: 

1.  Into  battery,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  March. 


f 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  423 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  pieces,  the  double  column  is 
deployed  into  battery  to  the  front  or  rear,  by  the  same  commands 
from  the  captain  as  when  it  consists  of  six.  The  sections  are  formed 
into  battery  as  prescribed  for  the  flank  sections  in  this  number.  The 
senior  chief  of  section,  besides  superintending  the  formation  of  his 
own,  gives  the  commands  required  for  the  centre  section,  and  the 
leading  pieces  conform  to  the  movements  of  that  section. 

To  deploy  the  double  cohimn  into  lattery  to  the  right  or  left. 

717.  When  the  battery  is  in  double  column,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  to 
form  it  in  battery  to  the  right,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.   To  and  on  the  right,  into  battery.     2.  March. 

The  centre  section  is  formed  in  battery  on  the  right,  as  prescribed  for 
the  leading  section  in  No.  712  or  713,  according  to  the  kind  of  carriage 
in  front. 

The  other  pieces  are  brought  into  lino  as  prescribed  in  No.  697,  and, 
without  halting,  are  formed  successively  in  battery  to  the  front  without 
commands  ;  regulating  by  the  centre  section. 

The  deployment  into  battery  to  the  left  is  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  battery  consists  of  four  pieces,  the  double  column  is 
deployed  into  battery  to  the  right  or  left,  by  the  same  commands 
from  the  captain  as  when  it  consists  of  six.  In  thi^  case  the  lead- 
ing pieces  are  wheeled  to  the  right  or  left  as  a  section,  and  conducted 
to  the  line  by  the  senior  chief  of  section.  And  then,  without  halt- 
ing, they  are  formed  into  battery  to  the  front  by  the  same  chief. 
The  other  pieces  move  forward,  wheel  in  succession  as  they  arrive 
opposite  their  places,  and  form  in  battery  on  the  alignment  of  those 
already  established. 

To  pass  from  the  order  in  battery  to  the  order  in  column. 

718.  Being  in  battery,  to  form  column,  the  captain  first  causes 
the  line  to  be  formed  as  prescribed  in  Nos.  706  or  707,  and  then 
forms  column  by  one  of  the  manoeuvres  for  passing  from  the  order 
in  line  to  the  order  in  column. 

.     FIRINGS. 

719.  When  everything  is  prepared  for  firing,  the  captain  com- 
mands : 


424  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA, 

Commence  Firing. 

This  command,  given  by  itself  or  after  load,  is  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  sections,  and  the  firing  immediately  commenced. 

The  firing  is  discontinued  by  the  command  or  signal,  cease  firing, 
which  is  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections  and  pieces. 

When  the  battery  is  formed  for  action,  the  pieces  are  not  loaded 
until  the  command  load  or  commence  firing  is  given  by  the  captain. 
In  successive  formations,  when  this  command  is  given,  it  is  repeated 
in  succession  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  as  their  sections  are  formed 
on  the  line. 

At  the  command  cease  firing,  such  pieces  as  are  loaded  must  be 
discharged. 

To  fire  advancing. 

720i  When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  advance  by  half  batteries,  the 
captain  commands  : 

1.  Fire  advancing,  hy  half  battery.     2.  Right  half  battery — 

Advance. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  half  battery  discon-  • 
tinues  firing,  causes  his  pieces  to  be  limbered  to  the  front,  and  com- 
mands, forward,  march;  guide  left.  Or,  he  may  cause  them  to  be 
limbered  to  the  rear,  and  after  executing  the  about,  command,  for- 
ivard,  guide  left.  The  half  battery  advances,  and  the  caissons  preserve 
their  distance  in  battery. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half  battery  reaches  the  new  position,  previous- 
ly indicated  by  the  captain,  its  chief  places  it  in  battery,  by  the  com- 
mands, halt;  action,  front;  or  in  battery;  march;  the  two  last  commands 
being  given  in  quick  succession.  The  caissons  halt  at  these  com- 
mands; and  as  soon  as  the  pieces  are  unlimbered,  the  firing  is  renewed 
by  command  from  the  chief  of  half  battery. 

The  fire  of  the  left  half  battery  is  continued  during  the  movement 
of  the  right,  care  being  taken  to  direct  the  pieces  so  that  their  fire 
shall  not  injure  the  half  battery  in  advance. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half  battery  commences  firing,  the  left  moves 
forward  with  the  guide  to  the  right;  and,  after  passing  the  right  half 
battery  as  far  as  the  latter  has  advanced,  is  formed  into  battery  and 
the  firing  commenced.  The  movements  of  the  left  half  battery  are 
effected  by  commands  and  means  corresponding  to  those  of  the  right. 

The  right  half  battery  again  advances  as  soon  as  the  left  commences 
firing ;  and  the  two  continue  to  advance  alternately  until  the  captain 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  425 

causes  the  firing  to  cease.  The  battery  is  then  aligned,  or  formed  into 
line,  to  the  front  or  rear,  by  the  proper  commands  from  the  captain. 

While  advancing  by  half  battery,  the  captain  places  himself  habitu- 
ally with  the  most  advanced  portion  of  the  battery,  and  is  accom- 
panied by  the  chief  of  the  centre  section.  The  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons  remains  haliitually  with  the  rear  half  battery. 

In  horse  avtillerj,  while  advancing  by  half  battery,  the  detachments 
preserve  their  distance  in  battery.  When  the  pieces  are  limbered  to 
the  front,  the  horsc-holdcrs  advance  to  enable  the  cannoneers  to  mount 
more  readily  ;  but  as  soon  as  the  pieces  advance,  the  detachments 
resume  their  distance  in  battery. 

To  fire  advancing  by  half  battery,  commencing  with  the  left,  is  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  jDrinciples  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  movement  may  also  be  executed  by  sections  ;  the  sections  ad- 
vancing in  succession,  according  to  their  positions  in  the  batterj'. 


To  Jive  in  retreat. 

721.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  retire  by  half  batteries,  the  cap- 
tain commands  : 

1.  Fire  retiring^  by  half  hattery.     2.  Right  half  battery — Retire. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  half  battery  discon- 
tinues firing,  limbers  to  the  real*,  and  commands,  caissons,  left  about, 
march.  As  soon  as  the  about  is  completed,  he  QommAwiX?,,  forward, 
guide  riyht;  and  conducts  the  half  battery  to  the  ground  previously 
indicated  by  the  captain  ;  the  pieces  preserving  their  distance  in  bat- 
tery by  marching  nineteen  j'ards  in  rear  of  the  caissons.  As  soon  as 
the  ground  has  been  reached,  tlie  chief  of  half  battery  commands, 
halt;  in  battery,  and  commences  firing;  taking  care  not  to  injure  the 
other  half  battery.  The  limbers  and  caissons  remain  facing  toward 
the  rear,  as  long  as  the  firing  in  retreat  continues. 

As  soon  as  the  right  half  battery  commences  firing,  the  left  retires 
with  the  guide  to  the  left;  and,  after  passing  the  right  half  battery  as 
far  as  the  latter  has  retired,  it  is  formed  into  battery,  and  the  firing 
again  commenced.  The  movements  are  executed  in  a  manner  corres- 
ponding to  those  of  the  other  half  battery. 

The  half  batteries  continue  to  fetire  alternately,  until  the  captain 
causes  the  firing  to  cease.  The  battery  is  afterwards  aligned,  or 
formed  into  line  to  the  frf)nt  or  rear,  by  appropriate  commands  from 
the  captain. 

While  retiring  by  half  battery,  the  captain  remains  habitually  with 
36 


426  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  portion  of  the  battery  nearest  the  enemy,  and  is  accompanied  by 
the  chief  of  the  centre  section.  The  chief  of  the  Hne  of  caissons  ac- 
companies the  other  half  battery. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  detachments  moves  to  the  left  to  facilitate  the 
about  of  the  caissons.  They  afterward  place  themselves  behind  and 
follow  them  during  the  retrograde  movement  at  the  distance  of  two 
yards;  remaining  faced  to  the  rear  as  long  as  the  firing  in  retreat  con- 
tinues. 

To  fire  retiring  by  half  battery,  commencing  with  the  left,  is  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  movement  may  also  be  executed  by  sections;  the  sections  retir- 
ing in  succession  according  to  their  positions  in  the  battery. 

Movements  for  firing  in  echellon. 

722.  When  the  battery  is  in  line  at  a  halt  with  pieces  in  front,  to  ad- 
vance in  echellon  of  pieces,  the  captain  commands  : 

1.  Bij  piece  from  the  right,  front  into  echellon.      2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  right  piece  moves  forward,  followed  by  its 
caisson.  The  next  piece  moves  forward  in  like  manner  as  soon  as  its 
leaders  are  abreast  the  wheel  horses  of  the  rear  carriage  on  the  right ; 
and  the  other  pieces  commence  the  movement  in  succession  according 
to  the  same  rule. 

The  officers  preserve  the  same  relative  positions  as  in  line. 

When  the  battery  is  marching  in  line  at  a  walk  or  trot,  the  echellon 
is  formed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands ; 
the  gaits  being  regulated  as  in  breaking  sections. 

The  battery  advances  in  echellon  of  jiieces  from  the  left  according  to 
the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

When  the  caissons  are  in  front,  the  battery  advances  in  echellon  of 
pieces  from  the  right  or  left  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
the  same  commands. 

When  the  battery  is  in  echellon,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  it  may  be 
formed  into  battery  to  the  front,  rear,  right  or  left. 

When  firing  in  echellon  to  the  front  or  rear,  the  direction  of  the  fire 
may  be  changed  to  the  right  or  left.  For  this  purpose  the  captain 
orders  the  firing  to  cease,  and  commands,  action,  right  (or  left).  At 
this  command,  the  trails  of  the  pieces  are  turned  to  the  left  (or  right), 
and  the  limbers  and  caissons  take  their  places  in  rear  of  the  pieces. 
But  if  retiring  with  the  prolonge  fixed,  the  caissons  stand  fast,  and  th^ 
limbers  back  to  allow  the  trails  to  be  turned  in  the  proper  direction. 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    PRACTICE.  427 

The  prolonge  must  be  suflBciently  slack  to  allow  the  recoil  of  the  guns. 
This  last  method  is  only  applicable  to  firing  to  the  right  when  retiring 
by  the  right,  and  to  the  left  when  retiring  hj  the  left. 

To  fire  to  the  rear. 

723.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  fire  to  the  rear,  the  captain  causes 
the  firing  to  cease,  and  commands: 

1.    Fire  to  the  rear.      2.   Limbers  and  caissons,  pass  your  pieces, 

trot.     3.  March. 

These  commands  are  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  sections.  At  the 
command  march,  the  pieces  are  wheeled  about  by  turning  the  trails  to 
the  left;  and  the  limbers  and  caissons  oblique  to  the  right,  pass  them, 
and  take  their  places  in  liattery  by  a  left  reverse. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  horses  follow  their  limbers,  pass  them,  and 
take  their  places  by  wheeling  about  to  the  left. 

CHANGES     OF     FRONT     IN     BATTERY. 

Change  of  front  to  fre  to  the  right,  left  wing  forward,  and  the 

reverse. 

724.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to  make  a  per- 
pendicular change  of  front,  to  fire  to  the  right,  throwing  forward  the 
left  wing,  he  discontinues  firing,  and  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  right.     2.  Change  front  forward  on  the  right  piece. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  places  the 
right  piece  in  the  new  direction,  by  causing  the  trail  to  be  moved  to  the 
left.  lie  also  causes  the  left  piece  of  his  section  to  be  moved  forward 
by  hand,  and  established  on  the  new  line.  When  the  ground  is  un- 
masked, the  limbers  and  caissons  of  these  pieces  oblique  to  the  left, 
move  forward,  and  take  their  places  in  battery  by  wheeling  to  the 
right;  the  caissons  aligning  themselves  by  the  chief  of  the  line  of  cais- 
sons established  on  the  right. 

The  other  chiefs  of  sections  cause  their  pieces  to  be  limbered  by  the 
command,  limber  to  the  front;  the  caissons,  and  in  horse  artillery  the 
horse  holders,  also,  closing  upon  the  pieces  while  they  are  limbering. 
As  soon  as  they  are  limbered  the  chiefs  of  sections  command  forward. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  places  him- 


428  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

self  on  the  left  of  the  right  piece  of  the  centre  section,  facing  to  the 
front,  to  mark  the  right  of  the  new  line  of  caissons. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the  centre  and  left 
sections,  these  sections  move  to  the  front:  and  when  each  has  arrived 
opposite  its  place  on  the  new  line,  its  chief  commands;  section,  right 
wheel;  march;  forward;  and  afterward,  in  battery,  march,  so  as  to 
form  upon  the  alignment  of  the  right  section.  When  the  caisson  of  the 
right  piece  of  the  centre  section  reaches  the  point  where  its  piece 
wheeled,  it  wheels  to  the  left,  takes  its  distance  in  rear,  wheels  about 
and  dresses  to  the  right  upon  the  line  of  caissons. 

The  other  caisson  of  the  same  section  obliques  to  the  left  when  its 
piece  commences  the  wheel ,:  and,  after  gaining  its  distance  establishes 
itself  on  the  line  by  wheeling  and  dressing  to  the  right. 

The  pivot  piece  commences  firing  again,  as  soon  as  it  is  in  position, 
and  the  others  as  they  arrive  oa  the  line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  right  wing  forward,  is  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  detachments  follow  their  pieces  and  halt  at  their 
proper  distance  from  the  line.  That  of  the  left  piece  of  the  right  sec- 
tion, when  limbered,  wheels  to  the  left  when  its  piece  wheels  to  the 
right,  allows  its  caisson  to  pass  it,  and  takes  its  place  by  wheeling  about 
to  the  left.  The  horse  holders  of  the  pieces  not  limbered  oblique  to  the 
left,  with  their  limbers,  and,  like  them,  take  their  places  in  battery  by 
wheeling  to  the  right.  When  it  is  deemed  advisable,  the  captain  may 
retain  the  cannoneers  at  their  pieces,  and  allow  all  the  horse  holders  to 
conduct  their  horses  to  the  new  line.  The  same  may  be  done  in  the 
other  changes  of  front. 

Change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  left  wing  forward^  and  the 

reverse. 

725.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to  make  a 
perpendicular  cliange  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  throwing  forward  the 
left  wing,  he  discontinues  firing  and  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  left.     2.  Change  front  forward  on  the  right  piece. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  causes  the 
right  piece  to  be  placed  in  the  new  direction  at  once,  by  moving 
the  trail  to  the  right;  and  the  limber  and  caisson  of  that  piece  will 
oblique  to  the  right,  and  take  their  places  in  its  rear  by  wheeling  to 
the  left;   the  caisson  dressing  upon  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons. 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    TACTICS.  429 

He  also  causes  his  left  piece  to  be  moved  to  its  place  and  established 
on  the  line  by  hand;  the  limber  of  this  piece,  passing  it  on  the  right, 
takes  its  place  by  wheeling  to  the  left,  its  caisson  obliques  to  the  right, 
passes  on  the  right,  and  in  rear  of  the  right  caisson,  and  takes  its  place 
also  by  wheeling  to  the  left. 

The  chiefs  of  the  other  sections  cause  them  to  be  limbered  to  the  front; 
and  while  limbering  they  command  ;  caiHuons  pass  your  2)ieres,  trot; 
march.  When  this  is  executed  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  com- 
mands section,  right  wheel,  and  that  of  the  left  forward. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  the  centre  and 
left  sections,  these  sections  move  as  ordered,  with  the  caissons  leading. 
The  centre  section  is  conducted  to  the  line  by  its  chief  and  formed  by 
the  commands,  forward  and  in  battery.  The  left  section  advances  five 
yards  and  is  conducted  to  the  line  by  two  successive  right  half  wheels. 
It  is  there  formed  in  like  manner  upon  the  alignment  of  the  right 
section. 

At  the  second  command  from  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons  places  himself  in  prolongation  of  the  line,  thirty-two  yards  on 
the  right  of  the  right  piece,  and  faces  to  the  front,  to  mark  the  left  of 
the  new  line  of  caissons. 

The  pivot  piece  recommences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked;  and 
the  others  when  they  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  right  wing  forward,  is  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  horse  holders  of  those  pieces,  which  are  placed 
on  the  line  by  hand,  conduct  the  horses  to  their  positions  in  battery  by 
followina;  their  limbers. 


Change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  left  wing  to  the  rear,  and  the 

reverse. 

726.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to  make  a  per- 
pendicular change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  throwing  the  left  wing  to 
the  rear,  he  causes  the  firing  to  cease,  and  commands: 

1.  Fire  to  the  left.     2.  Change  front  to  the  rear  on  the  right  piece. 

3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  places  the 
right  piece  in  the  new  direction,  by  causing  the  trail  to  be  moved  to 
the  right.  He  also  causes  the  left  piece  of  his  section  to  be  moved 
to  the  rear  by  hand,  and  established  on  the  new  line.  The  limbers  and 
caissons  of  these  pieces  move  at  once  to  the  right,  obliquing  sufficiently 


430         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

to  place  themselves  in  rear  of  their  respective  pieces,  and  take  their 
places  by  wheeling  to  the  left  or  left  about. 

The  other  chiefs  of  sections  command,  Umber  to  the  rear,  and  imme- 
diately afterward,  caissons  in  front  of  your  pieces,  trot;  march.  The 
caissons  place  themselves  in  front  of  their  pieces,  while  they  are  lim- 
bering, and  halt  as  prescribed  in  No.  707.  The  chiefs  of  these  sections 
then  command  forward. 

The  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  places  himself  in  the  prolongation 
of  the  line,  thirty-two  yards  on  the  right  of  the  right  piece,  and  faces  to 
the  rear  to  mark  the  right  of  the  new  line  of  caissons. 

At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  and  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  the  centre  and  left  sections,  the  chiefs  of  these  sections  com- 
mand (jaide  left,  and  afterAvard  in  succession,  section,  left  wheel; 
march;  forward;  in  battery.  The  carriages  dress  toward  the  pivot  as 
they  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  pivot  piece  recommences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked;  and 
the  others  when  they  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  right  wing  to  the  rear,  is 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  detachments  pass  their  pieces  at  the  command 
march,  place  themselves  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  muzzles,  follow  them, 
and,  at  the  command  in  battery,  take  their  places.  The  horse  holders 
of  those  pieces  which  are  moved  by  hand,  follow  their  limbers  and 
conduct  the  horses  to  their  positions,  by  movements  corresponding  to 
those  (jf  their  caissons.  When  the  left  piece  of  the  right  section  is 
limbered,  the  horses  of  the  detachment  are  conducted  to  their  places 
in  the  same  manner  as  though  the  piece  were  unlimbered,  except  that 
the  detachment  mounts. 

Change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  left  icing  to  the  rear,  and  the 

reverse. 

727.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  if  the  captain  wishes  to  make  a 
perpendicular  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  right,  tlirowing  the  left 
wing  to  the  rear,  he  discontinues  firing  and  commands  : 

1.  Fire  to  the  right.     2.   Change  front  to  the  rear  on   the  right 
piece.     3.  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  commands, 
limbers  and  caissons,  in  rear  of  your  jiieces,  trot;  march.  The  limbers 
and  caissons  oblique  to  the  right,  and  pass  their  pieces  with  the 
limbers  leading.     As  soon    as   the   limbers    have    passed,    they    wheel 


LIGHT    ARTILLERY    PRACTICE.  431 

twice  to  the  left  and  cover  their  pieces.  The  caissons  pass  their 
limbers  and  cover  thcra  in  like  manner.  The  chief  of  the  section 
causes  the  trail  of  his  right  piece  to  be  moved  to  the  left,  and  his  left 
piece  to  be  placed  upon  the  new  alignment  by  hand. 

The  chiefs  of  other  sections  command,  limber  to  the  rear,  and 
caissons  in  rear  of  your  jii^ccs,  trot;  march.  When  this  is  executed 
they  command  forxcard. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  places 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  piece  of  the  centre  section,  facing  to 
the  rear,  to  mark  the  left  of  the  new  line  of  caissons. 

At  the  command  march,  from  the  captain,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
the  centre  and  left  sections,  those  sections,  as  Avell  as  the  limbers  and 
caissons  of  the  first,  are  established  upon  the  new  line  as  described  in 
No.  724. 

The  pivot  piece  recommences  firing  as  soon  as  it  is  placed  in  the  new 
direction ;  and  the  others  as  they  arrive  on  the  line. 

The  change  of  front  to  fire  to  the  left,  right  wing  to  the  rear,  is 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  mounted  detachments  pass  their  pieces  with 
the  caissons  at  the  command  march,  and  take  their  places  in  rear  of 
the  muzzles  by  successive  wheels  to  the  left.  The  horse  holders  of 
the  pieces  which  are  moved  by  hand  follow  their  limbers  and  wheel 
into  their  places  in  like  manner.  The  remainder  is  executed  as  in 
No.  724. 

To  pass  a  defile  in  front. 

728.  When  the  battery  is  firing,  to  pass  a  defile  in  front  of  the  right 
section,  the  captain  commands: 

1.   Ti)  the  front,  by  the  right  section,  pass  the  defle.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the -fright  section  discontinues 
firing,  limbers  his  pieces  to  the  front,  and  commands  fonvard.  At  the 
command  march,  repeated  by  this  chief,  who  also  commands  guide  left, 
the  section  moves  forward,  passes  the  defile,  and  is  again  established 
in  battery,  and  the  firing  commenced  by  his  command. 

As  soon  as  the  right  section  commences  tiring,  the  centre  is  put  in 
motion  in  like  manner.  Its  chief  conducts  it  through  the  defile  by 
successive  wheels,  and,  forms  it  into  battery  in  line  with  the  first. 

As  soon  as  the  centre  section  commences  firing,  the  left  passes  in 
like  manner. 

While  one  section  is  passing  the  defile,  the  others  continue  firing; 
oare  being  taken  not  to  injure  the  section  in  advance. 


432  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

When  the  defile  is  in  front  of  the  left  section,  it  is  passed  according 
to  the  same  principles,  commencing  with  that  section. 

When  the  defile  is  in  front  of  the  centre  section,  it  is  passed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles,  commencing  with  that  section,  and  by  the 
commands,  to  the  front,  hy  the  centre  section,  pass  the  defile  ;  march. 
Unless  there  is  some  reason  to  the  contrary,  the  right  section  will  pass 
before  the  left. 

When  the  flank  or  oblique  march  is  better  suited  to  the  nature  of  the 
ground,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  give  the  required  commands. 

When  the  defile  will  admit  but  one  piece  at  a  time,  the  sections  are 
broken  by  their  chiefs  in  such  a  manner  as  to  cause  the  nearest  piece 
to  enter  first.  The  sections  are  re-formed  by  their  chiefs  immediately 
after  passing  the  defile. 

To  pass  a  defile  in  rear. 

729.  When  the  battei-y  is  firing,  to  pass  a  defile  in  rear  of  the  centre 
section,  the  captain  commands: 

1.   To  the  rear,  hy  the  right  section,  pass  the  dejile.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section  discontinues 
firing,  limbers  to  the  rear,  and  commands,  caissons,  left  about,  23icce8, 
forioard.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  right 
section,  the  caissons  of  that  section  execute  the  about,  and  the  pieces 
close  to  their  proper  distance  at  a  trot.  As  soon  as  the  about  is  com- 
pleted, the  chief  commands  forirurd,  </iiide  left,  conducts  the  section 
through  the  defile  by  successive  wheels,  and  forms  it  into  battery  in 
rear  of  its  first  position. 

The  left  section  is  put  in  motion  as  soon  as  the  right  commences 
firing.  It  is  conducted  through  the  defile  by  its  chief,  and  formed  into 
battery  in  rear  of  its  first  position,  by  the  principles  already  described. 

The  centre  section  moves  as  soon  as  the  left  commences  firing.  It  is 
formed  into  batterj'  in  rear  of  its  first  position,  and  in  line  with  the 
other  two  sections. 

The  passa.ge  of  the  defile  may  be  executed,  commencing  with  the  left 
section,  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

^Vhen  the  defile  is  in  rear  of  one  of  the  flanks,  the  movement  should 
commence  with  the  other.  It  should  always  end  by  passing  the  section 
or  piece  covering  the  defile. 

When  the  defile  will  admit  but  one  piece  at  a  time,  the  sections  are 
broken  by  their  chiefs  in  such  a  manner  as  to  cause  the  piece  farthest 
from  the  defile  to  enter  first;  and  the  sections  are  again  formed  as  soon 
as  possible  after  leaving  the  defile. 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  433 


Article    XII. 

HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS  — INSPEC- 
TIONS—REVIEWS,   ETC. 

HONORS     TO     BE     PAID     BY     THE     TROOPS. 

730.  Whenever  a  person  eulitlcd  to  compliments  from  the  troops 
visits  any  camp  or  military  post,  and  the  commanding  oflicer  has  official 
notice  of  his  presence,  the  troops  are  paraded  to  salute  him. 

The  President  or  Vice-President  of  the  United  States  and  the  Gov- 
ernor of  the  State  to  which  the  troops  belong,  are  to  be  saluted  with 
the  highest  honors — all  standards  and  colors  drooping,  officers  and 
troops  saluting,  drums  beating  and  trumpets  sounding. 

A  General  commandiny-in-chief  is  to  be  received — by  cavalry,  with 
sabres  presented,  trumpets  sounding  the  march,  and  all  the  officers 
saluting,  standards  drooping;  by  infantry,  with  drums  beating  the 
march,  colors  drooping,  officers  saluting  and  arms  presented. 

A  Major-General  is  to  be  received — by  cavalry,  with  sabres  pre- 
sented, trumpets  sounding  twice  the  trumpet-flourish,  and  officers  salut- 
ing; by  infantry,  with  three  ruffles,  colors  drooping,  officers  saluting, 
and  arms  presented. 

A  Brigadier-General  is  to  be  received — by  cavalry,  with  sabres  pre- 
sented, trumpets  sounding  once  the  trumpet-flourish,  and  officers  salut- 
ing; by  infantry,  with  two  ruffles,  colors  drooping,  officers  saluting, 
and  arms  presented. 

An  Adjutant-General  or  Inspector-General,  if  under  the  rank  of  a 
general  officei-,  is  to  be  received  at  a  review  or  inspection  of  the  troops 
Under  arms — by  cavalry,  with  sabres  presented,  officers  saluting;  by 
infantry,  officers  saluting  and  arms  presented.  The  same  honors  to  be 
paid  to  any  field  officer  authorized  to  review  and  inspect  the  troops, 
When  the  inspecting  officer  is  junior  to  the  officer  commanding  the 
parade,  no  compliments  will  be  paid :  he  will  be  received  only  with 
swords  drawn  and  arms  shouldered. 

All  guards  are  to  turn  out  and  present  arms  to  general  officers  as 
37 


434         MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 

often  as  they  pass  them,  except  the  personal  guards  of  general  offi- 
cers, which  turn  out  only  to  the  generals  whose  guards  they  are,  and  to 
officers  of  superior  rank. 

To  commanders  of  regiments,  garrison,  or  camp,  their  own  guard 
turn  out,  and  present  arms  once  a  dayj  after  which,  they  turn  out 
with  shouldered  arms. 

To  the  3/emhers  of  the  Cahinet ;  to  the  Chief  Justice,  the  President 
of  the  Senate,  and  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Representatives  of  the 
United  States;  and  to  Governors  within  their  respective  States  and 
Territories  the  same  honors  will  be  paid  as  to  a  general  commanding- 
in-chief. 

Officers  of  a  foreign  service  may  be  complimented  with  the  honors 
due  to  their  rank. 

American  and  Foreign  Envoys  or  Ministers  will  be  received  with  the 
compliments  due  to  a  major-general. 

731.  The  colors  of  a  regiment  passing  a  guard  are  to  be  saluted,  the 
trumpets  sounding,  and  the  drums  beating  a  march. 

When  general  officers,  or  persons  entitled  to  salute,  pass  in  the  rear 
of  a  guard,  the  officer  is  only  to  make  his  men  stand  shouldered,  and 
not  to  face  his  guard  about,  or  beat  his  drum. 

When  general  officers,  or  persons  entitled  to  a  salute,  pass  guards 
while  in  the  act  of  relieving,  both  guards  are  to  salute,  receiving  the 
word  of  command  from  the  senior  officer  of  the  whole. 

All  guards  are  to  be  under  arms  when  armed  parties  approach 
their  posts;  and  to  parties  commanded  by  commissioned  officers 
they  are  to  present  their  arms,  drums  beating  a  march,  and  officers 
saluting. 

No  compliments  by  guards  or  sentinels  will  be  paid  between  retreat 
and  reveille^  except  as  prescribed  for  grand  rounds. 

All  guard  and  sentinels  are  to  pay  the  same  compliments  to  the 
officers  of  the  navy,  marines  and  militia,  in  the  service  of  the  United 
States,  as  are  directed  to  be  paid  to  the  officers  of  the  army,  according 
to  their  relative  ranks. 

It  is  equally  the  duty  of  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers, 
at  all  times  and  in  all  situations,  to  pay  the  proper  compliments  to 
officers  of  the  navy  and  marines,  and  to  officers  of  other  regiments, 
when  in  uniform,  as  to  officers  of  their  own  particular  regiments  and 
corps. 

Courtesy  among  military  men  is  indispensable  to  discipline.  Respect 
to  superiors  will  not  be  confined  to  obedience  on  duty,  but  will  be 
extended  to  all  occasions.  It  is  always  the  duty  of  the  inferior  to 
accost  or  to  offer  first  the  customary  salutation,  and  of  the  superior  to 
return  such  complimentary  notice.  v 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  435 

Sergeants,  with  swords  drfiwn,  will  salute  by  bringing  them  to  a 
present;  with  muskets,  by  bringing  the  left  hand  across  the  body, 
so  as  to  strike  the  musket  near  the  right  shoulder.  Corporals  out 
of  the  ranks,  and  privates  not  sentries,  will  carry  their  muskets  at  a 
shoulder  as  sergeants,  and  salute  in  like  manner. 

When  a  soldier  without  arms,  or  with  side-arms  only,  meets  an 
officer,  he  is  to  raise  his  hand  to  the  right  side  of  the  visor  of  his  cap, 
palm  to  the  front,  elbow  raised  as  high  as  the  shoulder,  looking  at  the 
same  time  in  a  respectful  and  soldier-like  manner  at  the  officer,  who 
will  return  the  compliment  thus  offered. 

A  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  being  seated,  and  without 
particular  occupation,  will  rise  on  the  approach  of  an  officer,  and 
make  the  customary  salutation.  If  standing,  he  will  turn  toward 
the  officer  for  the  same  purpose.  If  the  parties  remain  in  the  same 
place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such  compliment  need  not  be  re- 
peated. 

Artillery  Salutes. 

732.  The  President  of  the  United  State's  and  the  Governor  of  the 
State  to  which  the  troops  belong,  to  receive  a  salute  of  twenty-one 
guns. 

The  Vice-President  is  to  receive  a  salute  of  seventeen  guns. 

The  Heads  of  the  great  Executive  Dcjyartmcnts  of  the  National  Gov- 
ernment ;  the  General  commandintj  the  army  ;  the  Lieutenant-Governor  or 
the  State  to  which  the  troops  heloa<j  ;  the  Governors  of  other  States  and 
Territories,  fifteen  guns. 

A  Major-Gcncral,  thirteen  guns. 

A  Brigadier-General,  eleven  guns. 

Foreign  ships-of-war  will  be  saluted  in  return  for  a  similar  compli- 
ment, gun  for  gun,  on  notice  being  officially  received  of  such  intention. 
If  there  be  several  posts  in  sight  of,  or  within  six  miles  of  each  other, 
the  principal  only  shall  reciprocate  compliments  Avith  ships  passing. 

Officers  of  the  Navy  will  be  saluted  according  to  relative  rank. 

Foreign  Officers  invited  to  visit  a  fort  or  post  may  be  saluted  accord- 
ing to  their  relative  rank. 

Envoys  and  Ministers  of  the  United  States  and  foreign  powers  are  to 
be  saluted  with  thirteen  guns. 

A  general  officer  will  be  saluted  but  once  in  a  year  at  each  post,  and 
only  when  notice  of  his  intention  to  visit  the  post  has  been  given. 

Salutes  to  individuals  are  to  be  fired  on  their  arrival  only. 

A  national  salute  will  be  fired  at  meridian  on  the  anniversary  of  the 
Independence  of  the  United  States,  at  each  military  post  and  camp 
provided  with  artillery  and  ammunition. 


436  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Escorts  of  Honor. 

733.  Escorts  of  honor  may  be  composed  of  cavalry  or  infantry,  or 
both,  according  to  circumstances.  They  are  guards  of  honor  for  the 
purpose  of  receiving  and  escorting  personages  of  high  rank,  civil  or 
military.  The  troops  for  this  purpose  will  be  selected  for  their  soldierly 
appearance  and  superior  discipline. 

The  escort  will  be  drawn  up  in  line,  the  centre  opposite  to  the  place 
where  the  personage  presents  himself,  with  an  interval  between  the 
wings  to  receive  him  and  his  retinue.  On  his  appearance,  he  will  be 
received  with  the  honors  due  to  his  rank.  When  he  has  taken  his 
place  in  the  line,  the  Avhole  will  be  wheeled  into  platoons  or  companies, 
as  the  case  may  be,  and  take  up  the  march.  The  same  ceremony  will 
be  observed,  and  the  same  honors  paid,  on  his  leaving  the  escort. 

When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a  considerable  distance  from 
the  point  where  he  is  expected  to  be  received,  as,  for  instance,  where 
a  court-j'ard  or  wharf  intervenes,  a  double  line  of  sentinels  will  be 
posted  from  that  point  to  the  escort,  facing  inward,  and  the  sentinels 
will  successively  salute  as  he  passes. 

An  officer  will  be  appointed  to  attend  him,  to  bear  such  communica- 
tions as  he  may  have  to  make  to  the  commander  of  the  escort. 

Funeral  Honors. 

734.  The  funeral  escort  of  a  General  commanding-in-chief,  shall  con- 
sist of  a  regiment  of  infantry,  a  squadron  of  cavalry,  and  six  pieces  of 
artillery. 

That  of  a  Major-General,  a  regiment  of  infantry,  a  squadron  of  cav- 
alry, and  four  pieces  of  artillery. 

That  of  a  Brigadier-General,  a  regiment  of  infantry,  one  company 
of  cavalry,  and  two  pieces  of  artillery'. 

That  of  a  Colonel,  a  regiment. 

That  of  a  Lieutenant-Colonel,  six  companies. 

That  of  a  Major,  four  companies. 

That  of  a  Captain,  one  company. 

Thafof  a  Subaltern,  half  a  company. 

The  funeral  escort  shall  always  be  commanded  by  an  officer  of  the 
same  rank  with  the  deceased  j  or,  if  none  such  be  present,  by  one  of 
the  next  inferior  grade. 

The  funeral  escort  of  a  non-commissioned  staff  officer  shall  consist 
of  sixteen  rank  and  file,  commanded  by  a  sergeant. 

That  of  a  sergeant,  of  fourteen  rank  and  file,  commanded  by  a  ser- 
geant. 


HONORS    PAID   BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  437 

That  of  a  corporal,  of  twelve  rauk  and  file,  commanded  by  a  corpo- 
ral; and 

That  of  a  private,  of  eight  rank  and  file,  commanded  by  a  corporal. 

The  escort  will  be  formed  in  tAvo  ranks,  opposite  to  the  quarters  or 
tent  of  the  deceased,  with  shouldered  arms  and  bayonets  unfixed;  the 
artillery  and  cavalry  on  the  right  of  the  infantry. 

On  the  appearance  of  the  corpse,  the  officer  Commanding  the  escort 
will  command: 

Present — Arms; 

when  the  honors  due  to  the  deceased  will  be  paid  by  the  drums  and 
trumpets.  The  music  will  then  play  an  appropriate  air,  and  the  coffin 
will  then  be  taken  to  the  right,  where  it  will  bo  halted.  The  com- 
mander will  next  order: 

1.  Shoulder — Arms.  2.  By  company  (or  platoon),  left  wheel. 
3.  March.  4.  Reverse — Arms.  5.  Column,  forward. 
6.    Guide  right.     7.  March. 

The  arms  will  be  reversed  at  the  order  by  bringing  the  firelock  under 
the  left  arm,  butt  to  the  front,  barrel  downward,  left  hand  sustaining 
the  lock,  the  right  steadying  the  firelock  behind  the  back;  swords  ar« 
reversed  in  a  similar  manner  under  the  right  arm. 

The  column  will  be  marched  in  slow  time  to  solemn  music,  and  on 
reaching  the  grave,  will  take  a  direction  so  that  the  guides  shall  be 
next  to  the  grave.  When  the  centre  of  the  column  is  opposite  the 
grave,  the  commander  will  order: 

1.  Column.     2.  Halt.     3.  Right  into  line,  ivheel.     4.  March. 

The  coffin  is  then  brought  along  the  front,  to  the  opposite  side  of  the 
grave,  and  the  commander  then  orders: 

1.  Shoulder — Arms.     2.  Present — Arms. 

And  when  the  coffin  reaches  the  grave,  he  adds: 

1.  Shoulder — Arms.     2.  Rest  on — Arms. 

The  rest  on  arms  is  done  by  placing  the  muzzle  on  the  left  foot,  both 
hands  on  the  butt,  the  head  on  the  bands  or  bowed,  right  knee  bent. 

After  the  funeral  service  is  performed,  and  the  coffin  is  lowered  into 
the  gi'ave,  the  commander  will  order: 

1.  Attention.     2.  Shoulder — Arms.     3.  Load  at  loill.    4.  Load. 


438         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

When  three  rounds  of  small  arms  will  be  fired  by  the  escort,  taking 
care  to  elevate  the  pieces. 

This  being  done,  the  commander  will  order : 

1.  By  company  (or  platoon)^  right  wheel.     2.  March.     3.   Col- 
umn, forward.     4.  Guide  left.     5.  Quick — March. 

The  music  will  not  begin  to  play  until  the  escort  is  clear  of  the 
inclosure. 

When  the  distance  to  the  place  of  interment  is  considerable,  the 
escort  may  march  in  common  time  and  in  column  of  route,  after  leav- 
ing the  camp  or  garrison,  and  till  it  approaches  the  burial-ground. 

The  pall-bearers,  six  in  number,  will  be  selected  from  the  grade  of 
the  deceased,  or  from  the  grade  or  grades  next  above  or  below  it. 

At  the  funeral  of  an  officer,  as  many  in  commission  of  the  army, 
division,  brigade,  or  regiment,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  deceased, 
as  can  conveniently  be  spared  from  other  duties,  will  join  in  procession, 
in  uniform,  and  with  side-arms.  The  funeral  of  a  non-commissioned 
officer  or  private  will  be  attended,  in  like  manner,  by  the  nourcommis- 
sioned  officers  or  privates  of  the  regiment  or  company,  according  to  the 
rank  of  the  deceased,  with  side-arms  only. 

Persons  joining  in  the  procession  follow  the  coffin  in  the  inverse 
order  of  their  rank.  J 

The  usual  badge  of  military  mourning  is  a  piece  of  black  crape 
around  the  left  arm,  above  the  elbow,  and  also  upon  the  sword-hilt; 
and  will  be  worn  when  in  full  or  in  undress. 

As  family  mourning,  crape  will  be  worn  by  officers  (when  in  uniform) 
only  around  the  left  arm. 

The  drums  of  a  funeral  escort  will  be  covered  with  black  crape,  or 
thin  black  serge. 

Funeral  honors  will  be  paid  to  deceased  officers  without  military 
rank,  according  to  their  assimilated  grades. 


INSPECTIONS     OF     THE     TROOPS. 

735.  The  inspection  of  troops,  as  a  division,  regiment,  or  other  body 
composing  a  garrison  or  command,  not  less  than  a  company,  will 
generally  be  preceded  by  a  review. 

Form  of  inspection  for  infantry. 

The  present  example  embraces  a  battalion  of  infantry.  The  inspect- 
ing officer  and  field  and  staff  officers  will  be  on  foot. 


211^. 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  439 

The  battalion  being  in  the  order  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  cause  it 
to  break  in  open  feolumn  of  companies,  right  in  front.  He  will  next 
order  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  when  the  color-rank  and  color-guard, 
under  the  direction  of  the  adjutant,  will  take  ten  paces  in  front,  and 
the  band  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  column. 

The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  command: 

1.  Officerft  and  sergeants^  to  the  front  of  your  companies. 
2.  March. 

The  oflBcers  will  form  themselves  in  one  rank,  eight  paces,  and  the 
non-commissioned  officers  in  one  rank,  six  paces  in  advance,  along 
the  whole  fronts  of  their  respective  companies,  from  right  to  left,  in  the 
order  of  seniority;  the  pioneers  and  music  of  each  company,  in  one 
rank,  two  jjaces  behind  the  non-commissioned  officers. 

The  colonel  will  next  command: 

Field  and  staff,  to  the  front — March. 

The  commissioned  officers  thus  designated  Avill  form  themselves  in 
one  rank,  on  a  line  equal  to  the  front  of  the  column,  six  paces  in  front 
of  the  colors,  from  right  to  left,  in  the  order  of  seniority;  and  the 
non-commissioned  staff,  in  a  similar  manner,  two  paces  in  rear  of  the 
preceding  i-ank.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  movement  executed,  will  take  - 
post  on  the  right  of  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  wait  the  approach  of 
the  inspecting  officer.  But  such  of  the  field  officers  as  may  be  superior 
in  rank  to  the  inspector  will  not  take  post  in  front  of  the  battalion. 

The  inspector  will  commence  in  front.  After  inspecting  the  dress 
and  general  appearance  of  the  field  and  commissioned  staff  under  arms, 
the  inspector,  accompanied  by  these  officers,  will  pass  down  the  open 
column,  looking  at  ever^-  rank  in  front  and  rear. 

The  colonel  will  now  command  : 

1.  Order  aims.     2.  Rest; 

when  the  inspector  will  proceed  to  make  a  minute  inspection  of  the 
several  ranks  or  divisions,  in  succession,  commencing  in  front. 

As  the  inspector  approaches  the  non-commissioned  staff,  color-rank, 
the  color-guard,  and  the  band,  the  adjutant  will  give  the  necessary 
orders  for  the  inspection  of  arms,  boxes  and  knapsacks.  The  colors 
will  be  planted  firm  in  the  ground,  to  enable  the  color-bearers  to  display 
the  contents  of  thci4'  knapsacks.  The  non-commissioned  staff  may  be 
dismissed  as  soon  as  inspected;  but  the  color-rank  and  color-guard  will 
remain  until  the  colors  are  to  be  escorted  to  the  place  from  which  they 
were  taken. 


440  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

As  the  inspector  successively  approaches  the  companies,  the  captains 
will  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Company.     3.  Inspection — Arms. 

The  inspecting  oflBicer  will  then  go  through  the  whole  company,  and 
minutely  inspect  the  arms,  accoutrements,  and  dress  of  each  soldier. 
After  this  is  done,  the  captain  will  command : 

Open — Boxes  ; 

when  the  ammunition  and  the  boxes  will  be  examined. 
The  captain  will  then  command : 

1.  Shoulder — Arms.  2.  Close  order.  3.  March.  4.  Order — 
Arms.  5.  Stack — Arms.  6.  To  the  rear.,  open  order.  7. 
March.  8.  Front  rank  —  About — Face.  9.  Unsling — 
Knapsacks.     10.   Open — Knapsacks. 

The  sergeants  will  face  inward  at  the  second  command,  and  close 
upon  the  centre  at  the  third,  and  stack  their  arms  at  the  fifth  command; 
at  the  sixth  command  they  face  outward,  and  resume  their  positions 
at  the  seventh.  When  the  ranks  are  closed,  preparatory  to  take  arms, 
the  sergeants  will  also  close  upon  the  centre,  and  at  the  word,  take  their 
arms  and  resume  their  places. 

The  knapsacks  will  be  placed  at  the  feet  of  the  men,  the  flaps  from 
them,  Avith  the  great-coats  on  the  flaps,  and  the  knapsacks  leaning  on 
the  great-coats.  In  this  position  the  inspector  will  examine  their  con- 
tents, or  so  many  of  them  as  he  may  think  necessary,  commencing  with 
the  non-commissioned  officers,  the  men  standing  at  attention. 

When  the  inspector  has  passed  through  the  company,  the  captain 
will  command : 

Repack,  knapsacks  ; 

when  each  soldier  will  repack  and  buckle  up  his  knapsack,  leaving  it 
on  the  ground,  the  number  upward,  turned  from  him,  and  then  stand 
at  rest. 

The  captain  will  then  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Company.     3.  Sling,  knapsacks. 

At  the  word  sllnrj,  each  soldier  will  take  his  knapsack,  holding  it  by 
the  inner  straps,  and  stand  erect :  at  the  last  word  he  will  replace  it  on 
.his  bask.     The  captain  will  continue  : 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,    ETC.  441 

I.  Fro7U  rank — About — Face.  5.  Close  order.  6.  March. 
7.  Take — Arms.  8.  SJwuJder — Arms.  9.  Officers  and  Ser- 
geants to  your  posts.     10.  March. 

And  will  cause  the  company  to  file  off  to  tbeiv  tents  or  quarters,  except 
the  company  that  is  to  re-escort  the  colors,  which  will  await  the  further 
ordci  s  6f  the  colonel. 

In  an  extensive  column,  some  of  the  rearmost  companies  may,  after 
the  inspection  of  dress  and  general  appearance,  be  permitted  to  stack 
arms  iintil  just  before  the  inspector  approaches  them,  when  they  will 
be  directed  to  take  arms  and  resume  their  position. 

The  inspection  of  the  troops  being  ended,  the  field  and  staff  will  next 
accompany  the  inspector  to  the  hospital,  magazine,  arsenal,  quarters, 
sutler's  shop,  guard-house,  and  such  other  places  as  he  may  think  prop- 
er to  inspect.  The  captains  and  subalterns  repair  to  their  companies 
and  sections  to  await  the  inspector. 

The  hospital  being  at  all  times  an  object  of  particular  interest,  it  will 
be  critically  and  minutely  inspected. 

The  men  will  be  formed  in  the  company  quarters  in  front  of  their 
respective  bunks,  and  on  the  entrance  of  the  inspector  the  word  atten- 
tion will  be  given  by  the  senior  non-commissioned  oflScer  present,  when 
the  whole  will  salute  with  the  hand,  without  uncovering. 

The  inspector,  attended  by  the  company  officers,  will  examine  the 
general  arrangement  of  the  interior  of  the  quarters,  the  bunks,  bedding, 
cooking  and  table  utensils,  and  such  other  objects  as  may  present 
themselves;  and  afterward  the  exterior. 

The  adjutant  will  exhibit  to  the  inspector  the  regimental  books  and 
papers,  including  those  relating  to  the  transactions  of  the  Council  of 
Administration.  The  company  books  and  papers  will  also  be  exhibited, 
the  whole  together,  generally  at  the  adjutant's  office,  and  in  the  pres- 
ence of  the  officers  not  otherwise  particularly  engaged. 

The  inspector  will  examine  critically  the  books  and  accounts  of  the 
administrative  and  disbursing  officers  of  the  command,  and  the  money 
and  property  in  their  keeping. 

Inspection  of  cavalry. 

736.  The  regiment  being  in  line  as  prescribed  for  a  review,  the 
colonel  causes  the  companies  to  wheel  to  the  right.  Ho  then  orders 
the  ranks  to  be  opened  ,•  at  which  the  standard-bearer,  under  the 
direction  of  the  adjutant,  is  posted  about  twenty  paces  ahead  of  the 
column. 


442  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  colonel  seeing  the  ranks  aligneil,  commands  :  1.  Officers  and  non- 
comniissioned  officers.  2.  To  the  front,  of  jour  companies — March  ;  on 
which  the  officers  form  themselves  in  one  rank,  twelve  paces,  and  the 
non-commissioned  officers  in  one  rank,  six  paces,  in  advance,  along  the 
whole  front  of  their  respective  troops,  in  the  order  of  rank,  the  highest 
on  the  right,  and  the  lowest  on  the  left;  the  trumpeters  of  each  com- 
pany, at  the  same  time,  take  post  on  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank, 
six  paces  from  the  right. 

Seeing  the  last  order  in  a  train  of  execution,  the  colonel  commands  : 
1.  Field  and  staff.  2.  To  the  front — March.  The  commissioned  offi- 
cers thus  designated,  form  themselves  in  one  rank,  twelve  paces  in  front 
of  the  standards,  in  the  following  order,  beginning  on  the  right;  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, major,  adjutant,  quartermaster,  etc.  The  non-commis- 
sioned staff  in  a  similar  manner,  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  preceding 
rauk.  The  band  is  formed  in  one  rank,  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  col- 
umn, the  chief  musici.an  four  paces  in  front  of  it. 

The  colonel,  if  a  higher  officer  inspects  the  column,  now  takes  his 
post  on  the  right  of  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

The  inspection  commences  in  front.  After  inspecting  the  dress  and 
general  appearance  of  the  field  and  commissioned  staff,  the  inspector, 
accompanied  by  these  officers,  passes  down  the  column,  looking  at 
every  rank,  in  front  and  in  rear,  with  a  view  to  the  same  object.  He 
afterward,  in  a  like  manner,  passes  and  inspects  the  arms.  As  he 
successively  approaches  each  company  for  this  purpose,  its  captain 
commands  :     1.  Attention.     2.  Inspection  of — Arms. 

The  inspector  then  dismounts  with  the  field  and  commissioned  staff, 
for  the  purpose  of  inspecting  horse  furniture,  and  valises,  preparatory 
to  which,  the  colonel  causes  the  column  to  dismount.  The  men  being 
then  in  the  position  of  stand  to  horse,  the  colonel  commands  rest,  for 
the  whole  column ;  when  the  inspector  proceeds  to  make  a  minute  in- 
spection of  the  several  ranks,  in  succession,  commencing  in  front. 

On  approaching  the  non-commissioned  staff  and  the  band,  the  adju- 
tant gives  the  necessary  orders  for  the  inspection  of  boxes  and  valises; 
and  in  like  manner  as  to  the  standard-bearer.  The  non-commissioned 
staff  may  be  dismounted  as  soon  as  inspected. 

As  the  inspector  successively  approaches  the  companies,  each  captain 
commands:  1.  Attention.  2.  Unstraji  valises.  3.  Oj^en  boxes;  when 
the  valises  are  placed  at  the  feet  of  the  men,  with  the  flaps  from  them. 
In  this  position  the  inspector  may  examine  the  contents  of  the  whole, 
boxes  and  valises,  or  of  as  many  as  he  may  think  necessary. 

As  the  inspector  passes  each  company,  the  captain  orders  the  valises 
to  be  repacked  and  restrapped,  and  the  men  to  file  off  to  their  tents  or 
quarters,  except  the  company  which  is  to  escort  the  standard,  which 
awaits  the  orders  of  the  colonel. 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  443 


FORMS     OF     PARADE. 

737.  On  all  parades  of  ceremony,  such  as  Reviews,  Guard  Mounting, 
at  Trorq^  or  Retreat  parades,  instead  of  the  word  rent,  which  allows  the 
men  to  move  or  chanfre  the  position  of  their  bodies,  the  command  will 
be  parade,  rent.  At  the  last  word  of  this  command,  the  soldier  will 
carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  in  rear  of  the  left  heel,  the  left  knee 
slightly  bent,  the  body  upright  upon  the  right  leg ;  the  musket  resting 
against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  the  hands  crossed  in  front,  the 
backs  of  them  outward,  and  the  left  hand  uppermost.  At  the  word 
attention,  the  soldier  will  resume  the  correct  position  at  ordered  arms. 
In  the  positions  here  indicated,  the  soldier  will  remain  silent  and  mo- 
tionless; and  it  is  particularly  enjoined  upon  all  officers  to  cause  tho 
commands  above  given,  on  the  part  of  the  soldier,  to  be  executed  whh 
great  briskness  and  spirit. 

Officers  on  all  duties  under  arms  are  to  have  their  swords  drawn, 
without  waiting  for  any  words  of  command  for  that  purpose. 

Dreas  jmrade. 

738.  There  shall  be  daily  one  dress  parade,  at  troop  or  retreat,  as  the 
commanding  officer  may  direct. 

A  signal  will  be  beat  or  sounded  half  an  hour  before  troop  or  retreat, 
for  the  music  to  assemble  on  the  regimental  parade,  and  each  com- 
pany to  turn  out  under  arms  on  its  own  parade,  for  roll  call  or  inspec- 
tion by  its  own  officers. 

Ten  minutes  after  that  signal,  the  Adjutant's  call  will  be  given,  when 
the  captains  will  march  their  companies  (the  baud  playing)  to  the  reg- 
imental parade,  where  they  take  their  positions  in  line  as  directed,  No. 
297.  When  the  line  is  formed,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  on 
notice  from  the  adjutant,  steps  one  pace  to  the  front,  and  gives  to  his 
company  the  command  order  arms;  parade,  rest;  which  is  repeated 
by  each  captain  in  succession  to  the  left.  The  adjutant  takes  post  two 
paces  on  the  right  of  the  line  ;  the  sergeant-major  two  paces  on  the  left- 
The  music  will  "be  formed  in  two  ranks  on  the  right  of  the  adjutant. 
The  senior  officer  present  will  take  the  command  of  the  parade,  and 
will  take  post  at  a  suitable  distance  in  front,  opposite  tho  centre,  facing 

the  line. 

When  the  companies  have  ordered  arms,  the  adjutant  will  order  tho 
music  to  heat  off,  when  it  will  commeuco  on  the  right,  beat  in  front  of 
the  line  to  the  left,  and  back  to  its  place  on  the  right. 

When  the  music  has  ceased,  the  adjutant  will  stop  two  paces  to  the 
front,  face  to  tho  left,  and  command : 


444  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

1.  Attention.     2.  Battalion.      3.  Shoulder — Arms.      4.  Prepare 
to  open  ranks.     5.   To  the  rear,  open  order.     6.  March. 

At  the  sixth  command,  the  ranks  will  be  opened  according  to  the 
system  laid  down  in  the  Infantry  Tactic^,  the  commissioned  officers 
marching  to  the  front,  the  company  officers  four  paces,  field  officers 
six  paces,  opposite  to  their  positions  in  the  order  of  battle,  where  they 
will  halt  and  dress.  The  adjutant,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will 
command  : 

Front, 

and  march  along  the  front  to  the  centre,  face  to  the  right  and  pass  the 
line  of  company  officers  eight  or  ten  paces,  when  he  will  come  to  the 
right  about,  and  command  : 

Present — Arms  ; 

when  arms  will  be  presented,  officers  saluting. 

Seeing  this  executed,  he  will  face  about  to  the  commanding  officer, 
salute,  and  report,  "Sir,  the  parade  is  formed."  The  adjutant  will 
then,  on  intimation  to,  that  eflFect,  take  his  station  three  paces  on 
the  left  of  the  commanding  officer,  one  pace  retired,  passing  round  his 
rear. 

The  commanding  officer,  having  acknowledged  the  salute  of  the  line 
by  touching  his  hat,  will,  after  the  adjutant  has  taken  his  post,  draw 
his  sword,  and  command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Shoulder — Arms; 

and  add  such  exercises  as  he  may  think  proper,  concluding  with  : 

Order — Arms  ; 

then  return  his  sword,  and  direct  the  adjutant  to  receive  the  reports. 

The  adjutant  will  now  pass  round  the  right  of  the  commanding 
officer,  advance  upon  the  line,  halt  midway  between  him  and  the  line 
of  company  officers,  and  command  : 

1.  First  sergeants,  to  the  front  and  centre.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  they  will  shoulder  arms  as  sergeants,  march 
two  paces  to  the  front,  and  face  inward.  At  the  second  command, 
they  will  march  to  the  centre,  and  halt.  The  adjutant  vdll  then 
order : 

1.  Front — Face.     2.  Report 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  445 

At  the  last  word,  each  in  succession,  beginning  on  the  right,  will 
salute  by  bringing  the  left  hand  smartly  across  the  breast  to  the 
right  shoulder,  and  report  the  result  of  the  roll  call  previously  made 
on   the  company  parade. 

The  adjutant  again  commands: 

1.  First  sergeants^  outward — Fack.     2.   To  your  posts — March; 

when  they  will  resume  their  places,  and  order  arms.  The  adjutant 
will  now  face  to  the  commanding  officer,  salute,  report  absent  officers, 
and  give  the  result  of  the  first  sergeant's  reports.  The  commanding 
officer  will  next  direct  the  orders  to  be  read,  when  the  adjutant  will 
face  about,  and  announce  : 

Altention  to  Orders. 

He  will  then  read  the  orders. 

The  orders  having  been  read,  the  adjutant  will  face  to  the  com- 
manding officer,  salute  and  report ;  when,  on  an  intimation  from  the 
commander,  he  will  face  again  to  the  line,  and  announce : 

Parade  is  dismissed. 

All  the  officers  will  now  return  their  swords,  face  inward  and  close 
on  the  adjutant,  he  having  taken  position  in  their  line,  the  field  officers 
on  the  flanks.     The  adjutant  commands  : 

1.  Front — Face.     2.  Forward — March; 

when  they  will  march  forward,  dressing  on  the  centre,  the  music  play- 
ing, and  when  within  six  paces  of  the  commander,  the  adjutant  will 
give  the  word : 

Halt. 

The  officers  will  then  salute  the  commanding  officer  by  raising  the 
hand  to  the  cap,  and  there  remain  until  he  shall  have  communicated 
to  them  such  instructions  as  he  may  have  to  give,  or  intimates  that  the 
ceremony  is  finished.  As  the  officers  disperse,  the  first  sergeants  will 
close  the  ranks  of  their  respective  companies,  and  march  them  to  the 
company  parades,  where  they  will  be  dismissed,  the  band  continuing 
to  play  until  the  companies  clear  the  regimental  parade. 

All  field  and  company  officers  and  men  will  be  present  at  dreits 
parades,  unless  especially  excused,  or  on  some  duty  incompatible  with 
such  attendance. 

A  dress  parade  once  a  day  will  not  be  dispensed  with,  except  on 
extraordinary  and  urgent  occasions. 


446  MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Review  of  a  battalion  of  infantry. 

739.  Preparatorj'^  to  a  review,  the  adjutant  will  cause  a  camp  color 
to  be  placed  80  or  100  paces,  or  more,  according  to  the  length  of  the 
line,  in  front  of,  and  opposite  to  where  the  centre  of  the  battalion  will 
rest,  whei'e  the  reviewing  officer  is  supposed  to  take  his  station  :  and, 
although  he  may  choose  to  quit  that  position,  still  the  color  is  to  bo 
considered  as  the  point  to  which  all  the  movements  and  formations  are 
relative. 

The  adjutant  will  also  cause  points  to  be  marked  at  suitable  dis- 
tances, for  the  wheelings  of  the  divisions  ;  so  that  their  right  flanks, 
in  marching  past,  shall  only  be  about  four  paces  from  the  camp  color, 
where  it  is  supposed  the  reviewing  officer  places  himself  to  receive  the 
salute. 

The  battalion  being  formed  in  the  order  of  battle,  at  shouldered 
arms,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Battalion^  prepare  for  review.     2.   To  the  rear.,  open  order. 

3.  March. 

At  the  word  march,  the  field  and  staS"  officers  dismount;  the  company 
officers  and  the  color-rank  advance  four  paces  in  front  of  the  front 
rank,  and  place  themselves  opposite  to  their  respective  places  in  the 
order  of  battle.  The  color-guard  replace  the  color-rank.  The  staff 
officers  place  themselves,  according  to  rank,  three  paces  on  the  right  of 
the  rank  of  company  officers,  and  one  pace  from  each  other;  the 
music  takes  jjost  as  at  a  parade.  The  non-commissioned  staff  take 
post  one  pace  from  each  other,  and  three  paces  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  battalion. 

When  the  ranks  are  aligned,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Front  ; 

and  place  himself  eight  paces,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major 
Avill  place  themselves  two  paces,  in  front  of  the  rank  of  company 
officers,  and  opposite  to  their  respective  places  in  the  order  of  battle, 
all  facing  to  the  front. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  presents  himself  before  the  centre, 
and  is  fifty  or  sixty  paces  distant,  the  colonel  will  face  about,  and 
■command: 

Present — Arms  ; 

and  resume  his  front.  The  men  present  arms,  and  the  officers  salute, 
so  as  to  drop  their  swords  with  the  last  motion  of  the  firelock.     The 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  447 

non-commissioned  staff  salute  by  bringing  the  sword  to  a  ^jo/se,  the 
hilt  resting  on  the  breast,  the  blade  in  front  of  the  face,  inclining  a 
little  outward.  The  music  will  play,  and  all  the  drums  beat,  accord- 
ing to  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer.  The  colors  only  salute  such 
persons  as,  from  their  rank,  and  by  regulation  (see  No.  730),  are 
entitled  to  that  honor.  If  the  reviewing  officer  be  junior  in  rank  to 
the  commandant  of  the  parade,  no  compliment  will  be  paid  to  him.  but 
he  will  be  received  with  arms  carried,  and  the  officers  will  not  salute 
as  the  column  passes  in  review. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  halted,  and  acknowledged  the  salute 
of  the  line  by  touching  or  raising  his  cap  or  hat,  the  colonel  will  face 
about  and  command : 

Shoulder — Arms  ; 

when  the  men  shoulder  their  pieces;  the  officers  and  non-commis- 
sioned staff  recover  their  swords  with  the  last  motion,  and  the  colonel 
faces  to  the  front. 

The  reviewing  officer  will  then  go  toward  the  right,  the  whole 
remaining  perfectly  steady,  without  paying  any  further  compliment, 
while  he  passes  along  the  front  of  the  battalion,  and  proceeds  round 
the  left  flank,  and  along  the  rear  of  the  file-closers,  to  the  right. 
AVhile  the  reviewing  officer  is  going  round  the  battalion,  the  band 
will  play,  and  will  cease  when  he  has  returned  to  the  right  flank  of 

the  troops. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  turns  off,  to  place  himself  by  the  camp 
color  in  front,  the  colonel  will  face  to  the  line,  and  command: 

1.  Close  order.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  field  and  company  officers  will  face  to  the 
right  about,  and  at  the  second  command,  all  persons,  except  the  colonel, 
will  resume  their  places  in  the  order  of  battle;  the  field  and  staff  offi- 
cers mount. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  taken  his  position  near  the  camp  color, 

the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  By  company,  right  icheel.     2.  Quick— Mxncn.     3.  Pass  in 
review.     4.   Column,  forward.  '  5.  Guide  right.     6.  March. 

The  battalion,  in  column  of  companies,  right  in  front,  will  then,  in 
common  time,  and  at  nlunddered  arms,  be  put  in  motion ;  the  colonel 
four  paces  in  front  of  the  captain  of  the  leading  company;  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel on  a  line  with  the  leading  company  ;  the  major  on  a  line 
with  the  rear  company ;  the  adjutant  on  a  line  with  the  second  com- 


448  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

pany ;  the  sergeant-major  on  a  line  with  the  company  next  preceding 
the  rear — each  six  paces  from  the  flank  (left)  opposite  to  the  reviewing 
officer;  the  staft'  ofiicers  in  one  rank,  according  to  the  order  of  prece- 
dency, from  the  right,  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  column ;  the  music, 
preceded  by  the  principal  musician,  six  paces  before  the  colonel ;  the 
pioneers,  j^receded  by  a  corporal,  four  paces  before  the  principal  musi- 
cian ;  and  the  quartermaster-sergeant  two  paces  from  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guides,  and  in  line  with  the  pioneers. 

All  other  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  march  past  in 
the  places  prescribed  for  them  in  the  march  of  an  open  column.  The 
guides  and  soldiers  will  keep  their  heads  steady  to  the  front  in  passing 
in  review. 

The  color-bearer  will  remain  in  the  ranks  while  passing  and  saluting. 

The  music  will  begin  to  play  at  the  command  to  march,  and  after 
passing  the  reviewing  officer,  wheel  to  the  left  out  of  the  column,  and 
take  a  position  opposite  and  facing  him,  and  will  continue  to  play  until 
the  rear  of  the  column  shall  have  passed  him,  when  it  will  cease,  and 
follow  in  the  rear  of  the  battalion,  unless  the  battalion  is  to  pass  in 
quick  time  also,  in  which  case  it  will  keep  its  position. 

The  officers  will  salute  the  reviewing  officer  when  they  arrive  within 
six  paces  of  him,  and  recover  their  swords  when  six  paces  past  him. 
All  officers,  in  saluting,  will  cast  their  eyes  toward  the  reviewing 
officer. 

The  colonel,  when  he  has  saluted  at  the  head  of  the  battalion,  will 
place  himself  near  the  reviewing  officer,  and  will  remain  there  until 
the  rear  has  passed,  when  he  will  rejoin  the  battalion. 

The  colors  will  salute  the  reviewing  officer,  if  entitled  to  it,  when 
within  six  paces  of  him,  and  be  raised  when  they  have  passed  by  him 
an  equal  distance.  The  drums  will  beat  a  march,  or  ruffle,  according 
to  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer,  at  the  same  time  that  the  colors 
salute. 

When  the  column  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer,  the  colonel  will 
direct  it  to  the  ground  it  marched  from,  and  command  : 

Guide  left; 

in  time  for  the  guides  to  cover.  The  column  having  arrived  on  its 
ground,  the  colonel  will  command  ; 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt  ; 

form  it  in  order  of  battle,  and  cause  the  ranks  to  be  opened.  There- 
view  will  terminate  by  the  whole  saluting  as  at  the  beginning. 

If,  however,  instructions  have  been  previously  given  to  march  the 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  449 

troops  pait  in  qtiick  time  also,  thb  colonel  trill,  instead  of  changing  the 
guides,  halting  the  colunin,  and  wheeling  it  into  line,  as  above  directed, 
give  the  command  : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

In  passing  the  reviewing  officer  again,  no  salute  will  be  offered  by 
either  officers  or  men.  The  music  will  have  kept  its  position  opposite 
the  reviewing  officer,  and  at  the  last  command  will  commence  playing, 
and,  as  the  column  approaches,  will  place  itself  in  front  of,  and  march 
off  with  the  column,  and  continue  to  play  until  the  battalion  is  halted 
on  its  original  ground  of  formation.  The  review  will  terminate  in  the 
same  manner  us  prescribed  above. ^ 

The  colonel  will  afterward  cause  the  troops  to  perform  such  exercises 
and  manoeuvres  as  the  reviewing  officer  may  direct. 

When  two  or  more  battalions  are  to  be  reviewed,  they  will  be  formed 
ih  parade  order,  with  the  proper  intervals,  and  will  also  perform  the 
same  movements  that  are  laid  down  for  a  single  battalion,  observing 
the  additional  directions  that  are  given  for  such  movements  when  ap- 
plied to  the  line.  The  brigadier-general  and  his  staff,  on  foot,  will 
place  themselves  opposite  the  centre  of  the  brigade;  the  brigadier- 
general  two  paces  in  front  of  the  rank  of  colonels;  his  aid  two  paces 
on  his  right,  and  one  retired;  and  the  other  brigade  staff  officers,  those 
having  the  rank  of  field  officers,  in  the  rank  of  lieutenant- colonels  and 
majors  ;  and  those  below  that  rank,  in  the  rank  of  company  officers. 

In  passing  in  review,  a  major-general  will  be  four  paces  in  front  of 
the  colonel  of  the  leading  battalion  of  his  division;  and  the  brigadier- 
general  will  be  on  the  right  of  the  colonels  of  the  leading  battalions  of 
their  brigades;  staff  officers  on  the  left  of  their  generals. 

When  the  line  exceeds  two  battalions,  the  reviewing  officer  may  cause 
them  to  march  past  in  quick  time  only.  In  such  cases  the  mounted 
officers  only  will  salute. 

A  number  of  companies,  less  than  a  battalion,  will  be  reviewed  as  a 
battalion,  and  a  single  company  as  if  it  were  with  the  battalion.  In 
the  latter  case,  the  company  may  pass  in  column  of  platoons. 

If  several  brigades  are  to  be  revicAved  together,  or  in  one  line,  this 
further  difference  will  be  observed  :  the  reviewing  personage,  joined  by 
the  general  of  the  division,  on  the  right  of  his  division,  will  proceed 
down  the  line,  parallel  to  its  front,  and  when  near  the  brigadier-gene- 
rals respectively,  will  be  saluted  by  their  brigades  in  succession.  The 
music  of  each,  after  the  prescribed  salute,  will  play  while  the  review- 
ing personage  is  in  front,  or  in  rear  of  it,  and  only  then. 

1  Or  the  battalion  may  pass  a  third  time  at  the  double  quick,  and  then  re-form; 

38 


450  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

In  marching  in  review,  with  several  battalions,  in  common  time,  the 
music  of  each  succeeding  battalion  will  commence  to  play  when  the 
music  of  the  preceding  one  has  ceased,  in  order  to  follow  its  battalion. 
When  marching  in  quick  time,  the  music  will  begin  to  play  when  the 
rear  company  of  the  preceding  battalion  has  passed  the  reviewing 
officer. 

The  reviewing  officer  or  personage  will  acknowledge  the  salute  by 
raising,  or  taking  off  his  cap  or  hat,  when  the  commander  of  the  troops 
salutes  him;  and  also  when  the  colors  pass.  The  remainder  of  the 
time  occupied  by  the  passage  of  the  troops  he  will  be  covered. 

Review  of  a  regiment  of  cavalry. 

740.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  the  captains  one  pace  in  advance  of 
the  centre  of  their  companies,  the  lieutenants  commanding  platoons 
one  pace  in  advance  of  the  centre  of  their  platoons,  the  colonel  com- 
mands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Prepare  for  review.     3.  Rear  rank^  open  order. 
4.  March.    5.  Right — Dress.     6.  Front. 

At  the  fourth  command  the  ranks  are  opened,  all  the  officers  in  the 
rank  of  file-closers  advancing  to  the  front,  and  placing  themselves  on 
the  line  of  officers  opposite  to  the  position  they  before  occupied.  The 
staff  officers  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  rank  of  company 
officers,  according  to  their  relative  rank,  one  pace  from  each  other. 
The  quartermaster-sergeant  and  the  sergeant-major  are  on  the  right  of 
the  front  rank  of  the  regiment. 

The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  major  and  adjutant  are  posted  as  in 
order  of  battle. 

The  music  is  formed,  at  the  same  time,  in  one  rank  on  the  right  of 
the  regiment,  and  ten  paces  from  it. 

After  the  ranks  are  opened,  the  colonel  commands : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Draw — Sabre. 

In  this  parade  order,  the  regiment  awaits  the  approach  of  the 
personage  who  is  to  review  it;  for  whose  guidance  a  camp  color  will 
have  been  placed  eighty  or  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front  of 
the  centre,  according  to  the  extent  of  the  line  and  the  plain  in  front 
of  it. 

When  the  reviewing  personage  is  midway  between  the  camp  color 
and  the  colonel,  the  latter  turns  his  horse  to  the  right  about  on  his 
ground,  and  commands : 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  451 


1.  Attention.     2.  Present — Sabre  ; 

and  resumes  his  proper  front.     The  oflScers  all  salute. 

When  the  reviewing  personage,  who  has  halted  until  the  proper 
compliments  are  paid,  advances,  the  colonel  brings  his  sabre  to  a 
carry,  turns  about  as  before  to  the  line,  and  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.  Carry — Sabre. 

When  the  whole  line  remains  perfectly  steady,  except  the  colonel, 
who  resumes  his  proper  front. 

The  reviewing  personage  now  turns  off  to  the  right  of  the  regiment, 
passes  thence,  in  front  of  all  the  officers,  to  the  left,  around  the  left, 
and  behind  the  rank  of  file-closers,  to  the  right  again.  While  he  is 
pas^sing  around  the  regiment,  no  matter  what  his  rank,  the  music  will 
play ;  and  when  he  turns  off  to  take  his  station  near  the  camp  color, 
the  music  will  cease. 

When  the  music  ceases,  the  colonel  turns  about,  and  commands: 

1.  Attention.     2.  Rear  rank,  close  order.     3.  March. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  officers  from  the  rank  of  file-closers 
return  to  their  position  in  that  rank. 

The  reviewing  personage  having  taken  a  position  near  the  camp 
color,  previously  placed  at  a  proper  distance,  the  colonel  causes  the 
regiment  to  break  into  column  of  companies,  right  in  front,  and 
commands  : 

Pass  in  review. 

At  this  command,  the  band  and  trumpeters  repair  to  the  head  of  the 
regimental  column,  six  paces  in  front  of  the  colonel.  The  quarter- 
master-sergeant places  himself  ten  paces  in  front  of  the  colonel,  two 
paces  from  the  flank  opposite  to  the  guides. 

The  quartermaster,  surgeon.'etc,  in  one  rank,  in  the  order  in  which 
they  are  named,  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  last  division. 

The  colonel  is  six  paces  in  front  of  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  on  a  line  with  the  first  company,  six  paces 
from   the  flank  opposite  to  the  guide. 

The  major  on  a  line  with  the  last  company,  six  paces  from  the  side 
opposite  to  the  guide. 

The  adjutant  on  a  line  with  the  second  company,  six  paces  from  the 
flank  opposite  to  the  guide. 

The  sergeant-major  on  a  line  with  the  company  next  to  the  rear, 
six  paces  from  the  flank  opposite  to  the  guide. 


452  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Captains,  two  paces  in  advance  of  the  centre  of  their  companies. 

Chiefs  of  platoons,  two  paces  in  advance  of  the  centre  of  their 
platoons. 

Officers  of  the  rank  of  file-closers,  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  on 
a  line  with  the  chiefs  of  platoons. 

The  column  is  then  put  in  march,  at  a  walk,  with  the  guide  on  the 
side  next  to  the  reviewing  jiersonage. 

The  column  first  passes  at  a  walk,  and  afterward,  if  required,  at  a 
trot. 

When  the  head  of  the  column  arrives  within  fifty  paces  of  the 
reviewing  personage,  the  music  commences  to  play. 

The  band  having  passed,  the  chief  musician  causes  it  to  wheel  out 
of  the  column  and  take  position  opposite  to  the  reviewing  personage; 
the  music  continues  to  play  until  the  last  company  has  passed,  when 
it  ceases,  and  follows  in  the  rear. 

Passing  at  a  walk,  all  the  officers  salute  with  the  sabre  as  they 
successively  arrive  within  six  paces  of  the  reviewing  personage,  turn- 
ing their  heads  toward  him. 

If  more  than  one  regiment  passes,  the  different  regiments  will 
march  with  intervals  of  about  forty  paces  between  them. 

Review  of  a  battery  of  artillery. 

741.  The  battery  being  in  line,  with  the  trumpeters  on  the  right,  the 
captain  commands : 

1.  Attention.    2.  Prepare  for  revieiv.    3.  To  the  rear,  open  order. 
4.  March.     5.  Right — Dress.     6.  Front. 

At  the  third  command,  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  commands, 
caissons,  left  reterse,  and  places  himself  on  the  right  flank  sixteen 
yards  in  rear  of  the  line  of  pieces,  facing  to  the  left,  to  mark  the  point 
where  the  right  of  the  line  of  caissons  is  to  rest.  In  horse  artillery, 
the  distance  is  twenty  yards. 

At  the  same  command,  the  gunners  face  the  detachments  to  the  rear, 
in  foot  artillery  by  the  command  about — face;  and  in  horse  artillery, 
they  command  bncA-ward. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons, 
the  caissons  reverse  to  the  left,  move  to  the  rear,  reverse  again  to  the 
left,  and  align  themselves  by  appropriate  commands  from  the  chief  of 
the  line  of  caissons.  As  soon  as  the  ground  is  unmasked,  the  gunners 
repeat  the  command  march,  at  which  the  cannoneers  in  foot  artillery 
march  forward,  and  are  formed  six  yards  in  rear  of  their  pieces ;  the 


HONORS   PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  453 

chiefs  of  caissons  joining  their  detachments  at  the  same  time.  In 
horse  artillery,  the  cannoneers  rein  back  and  are  halted  by  the 
gunners  at  the  same  distance. 

At  the  fifth  command,  the  battery  is  aligned;  the  pieces  and  detach- 
ments by  the  captain,  and  the  caissons  by  the  chief  of  the  line  of  cais- 
sons. At  the  sixth  command,  given  by  the  captain  when  the  alignment 
is  completed,  the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  takes  his  post  as  in  line. 
The  captain  then  commands  : 

Draw  —  Swords. 

This  is  executed  by  the  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  and 
detachments  only,  and  the  captain  takes  his  post  as  in  line. 

In  this  order,  the  battery  awaits  the  approach  of  the  reviewing 
officer.  When  he  is  midway  between  the  camp  color  and  the  captain, 
the  latter  turns  his  horse  to  the  right  about  and  commands  : 

Present-  -  Swords. 

He  immediately  resumes  his  front  and  salutes.  The  officers,  non- 
commissioned officers,  and  detachments,  all  salute  as  in  cavalry  ;  and 
the  music  plays  according  to  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  halted  and  acknowledged  the  salute, 
the  captain  brings  his  sword  to  a  carry,  turns  about  to  the  line  as 
before,  and  commands  : 

Carry —  Swords. 

He  immediately  resumes  his  front,  the  reviewing  officer  turns  off  to 
the  right  of  the  battery,  passes  along  its  front,  and  returns  to  the  right 
by  passing  between  the  files  of  carriages  or  in  rear  of  the  caissons. 
While  the  reviewing  officer  is  passing  around  the  battery,  the  music 
plays.  It  ceases  when  he  turns  off  to  take  his  post  at  the  camp 
color. 

When  the  music  ceases,  the  captain  turns  about  and  commands : 

1.  Detachnents.     2.  Return  —  Swords.     3.  Battery.     4.   Close 
order.     5.  March. 

In  horse  artillery,  the  first  and  second  commands  are  not  given. 

At    the   fourth   command,   the    gunners    in    foot   artillery   command 

left  face,  and  in  horse  artillery,  forward. 

At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  gutiners,  the  cannoneers  in 

mounted  artillery  take  their  posts  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 

piece.     The  caissons,   and  in  horse  artillci'y  the  cannoneers,  close  to 

their  proper  distances  in  line. 


454  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  taken  a  position  near  the  camp  color, 
the  captain  causes  the  cannoneers  to  mount,  if  in  foot  artillery,  and 
breaks  the  battery  into  column  of  sections  to  the  right  by  the  usual 
commands.     He  then  commands  : 

Pass  in  review; 

and  puts  the  column  in  march,  at  a  walk,  with  the  guide  to  the  right. 
The  captain  then  places  himself  at  the  head  of  the  column,  four  yards 
in  advance  of  the  chief  of  the  leading  section.  The  trumpeters  march 
four  yards  in  advance  of  the  captain ;  and  the  chief  of  the  line  of 
caissons  outside  the  column,  opposite  the  centre,  and  four  yards  from 
the  left  flank. 

"When  the  head  of  the  column  has  arrived  within  forty  yards  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  the  music  begins  to  play;  and  as  soon  as  the  latter. 
has  passed,  it  wheels  out  of  the  column  to  a  position  in  front  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  where  it  faces  him,  and  continues  to  play  until  the 
column  has  passed.  It  then  ceases,  follows  in  rear  of  the  battery,  and 
resumes  its  place  at  the  head  of  the  column  after  the  next  change 
of  direction. 

All  the  officers  salute  in  succession  as  they  arrive  within  six  yards  of 
the  reviewing  officer;  casting  their  eyes  toward  him  at  the  same  time, 
and  bringing  their  swords  to  a  carry  after  having  passed  him  six  yards. 
As  soon  as  the  captain  has  saluted,  he  places  himself  near  the  reviewing 
officer,  remains  until  the  rear  has  passed,  and  then  rejoins  his  battery. 

The  column  is  so  conducted  as  to  march  parallel  to  the  line  on  which 
the  battery  is  to  form,  and  far  enough  in  its  rear  to  enable  the  column 
to  wheel  into  line.  It  is  then  wheeled  into  line,  the  ranks  opened,  and 
the  review  terminated  by  a  salute  as  at  the  beginning. 

AVhen  instructions  have  been  previously  given  to  pass  a  second  time, 
either  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  it  will  be  done  before  wheeling  into  line;  the 
officers  passing  the  second  time  without  salute.  ^ 

When  artillery  has  been  passing  in  review  with  other  troops,  and  is 
marching  in  prolongation  of  the  line  on  which  the  different  corps  are  to 
form,  it  may  be  wheeled  by  sections  to  the  right,  and,  after  gaining  the 
necessary  distance,  countermarched  and  established  on  the  line. 

When  a  battery  is  to  march  past  in  line,  or  in  column  of  half 
batteries,  it  will  be  done  according  to  the  principles  already  described. 
In  line  the  officers  will  be  at  their  usual  posts.  In  column  of  half 
batteries  the  captain  will  be  two  yards  in  advance  of  the  chief  of  the 
leading  half  battery- :  each  chief  of  half  battery  two  yards  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  his  command;  the  chief  of  the  centre  section  on  the  left 
of  the  leading  half  battery,  four  yards  from  the  leading  driver;  and 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  465 

the  chief  of  the  line  of  caissons  in  the  same  position  with  respect 
to  the  rear  half  battery. 

In  all  cases  the  trumpeters  are  four  yards  in  front  of  the  captain. 

When  the  battery  is  to  be  minutely  inspected,  the  captain  will 
cause  the  ranks  of  the  detachments  to  be  opened,  if  required,  by  the 
commands : 

1.  Detachments.     2.  To  the  rem',  open  order.     4.  MAiicn. 

Which  will  be  executed  as  in  infantry  or  cavalry,  as  the  case  may 
require. 

GUARD     MOUNTING. 

742.  At  the  first  call  for  guard  mounting,  the  men  warned  for  duty 
turn  out  on  their  company  parades  for  inspection  by  the  first  sergeants; 
and  at  the  second  call,  repair  to  the  regimental  or  garrison  parade, 
conducted  by  the  first  sergeants.  Each  detachment,  as  it  arrives,  will, 
under  the  direction  of  the  adjutant,  take  post  on  the  left  of  the  one  that 
preceded  it,  in  open  order,  arms  shouldered  and  bayonets  fixed  ;  the 
supernumaries  five  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  men  of  their  respective 
companies ;  the  first  sergeants  in  rear  of  them.  The  sergeant-major 
will  dress  the  ranks,  count  the  files,  verify  the  details,  and  when  the 
guard  is  formed,  report  to  the  adjutant,  and  take  post  two  paces  on  the 
left  of  the  front  rank. 

The  adjutant  then  commands  front,  when  the  officer  of  the  guard 
takes  post  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  centre,  the  sergeants  in  one  rank, 
four  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  ofiicers,-  and  the  corporals  in  one  rank,  four 
paces  in  the  rear  of  the  sergeants — all  facing  to  the  front.  The  adju- 
tant then  assigns  their  places  in  the  guard. 

The  adjutant  will  then  command : 

1.   Officer  and  non-commissioned  officers.     2.  About — Face. 
3.  Inspect  your  guards — March. 

The  non-commissioned  oflBcers  then  take  their  posts.  The  com- 
mander of  the  guard  then  commands: 

1.  Order — Arms.     2.  Inspection — Arms  ; 

and  inspects  his  guard.  AVhen  there  is  no  commissioned  officer  on  the 
guard,  the  adjutant  will  inspect  it.  During  inspection  the  band  will 
play. 

The  inspection  ended,  the  officer  of  the  guard  takes  post  as  though 
the  guard  were  a  company  of  a  battalion,  in  open  order  under  review ; 


456  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

at  tlie  same   time,  also,  the  oflBcers  of  the  day  will  take  post  in  front 
of  the  centre  of  the  guard;  the  old  officer  of  the  day  three  paces  on 
the  right  of  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  one  pace  retired. 
The  adjutant  will  now  command  : 

1.  Parade — Rest.     2.  Troop — Beat  off; 

when  the  music,  beginning  on  the  right,  will  beat  down  the  line  on 
front  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  to  the  left,  and  back  to  its  place  in 
the  right,  where  it  will  cease  to  play. 
The  adjutant  then  commands  : 

1.  Attention.      2.  Shoulder — Arms.      3.  Close  order — March. 

At  the  word  close  order,  the  officer  will  face  about;  at  march,  resume 
his  post  in  line.     The  adjutant  then  commands: 

Present — Arms. 

At  which  he  will  face  to  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  salute  and  report, 
"Sir,  the  guard  is  formed."  The  new  officer  of  the  day,  after  acknowl- 
edging the  salute,  will  direct  the  adjutant  to  march  the  guard  in 
review,  or  by  flank  to  its  post.  But  if  the  adjutant  be  senior  to 
the  officer  of  the  day,  he  will  report  without  saluting  with  the  sword 
then,  or  when  marching  the  guard  in  review. 

In  review,  the  guard  mafrch  past  the  officer  of  the  day,  accord- 
ing to  the  order  of  review,  conducted  by  the  adjutant,  marching  on 
tL.e  left  of  the  first  division;  the  sergeant-major  on  the  left  of  the  last 
division. 

When  the  column  has  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  the  officer  of 
the  guard  marches  it  to  its  post,  the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  re- 
tiring. The  music,  which  has  wheeled  out  of  the  column,  and  taken 
post  opposite  the  officer  of  the  day,  will  cease,  and  the  old  officer 
of  the  day  salute,  and  give  the  old  or  standing  orders  to  the  new 
officer  of  the  day.  The  supernumeraries,  at  the  same  time,  will  be 
marched  by  the  first  sergeants  to  their  respective  company  parades, 
and  dismissed. 

In  bad  weather,  or  at  night,  or  after  fatiguing  marches,  the  ceremony 
of  turning  off  may  be  dispensed  with,  but  not  the  inspection. 

Grand  guards,  and  other  brigade  guards,  are  organized  and  mounted 
on  the  brigade  parade  by  the  staff  officer  of  the  parade,  under  the 
direction  of  the  field  officer  of  the  day  of  the  brigade,  according  to  the 
principles  here  prescribed  for  a  police  guard  of  a  regiment.  The 
detail  of  each  regiment  is  assembled  on  the  regimental  parade,  verified 
by  the   adjutant,   and  marched  to  the  brigade  parade  by   the  senior 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC  457 

officer  of  the  detail.     After  inspection  cand  review,  the  officer  of  the  day 
directs  the  several  guards  to  their  respective  posts. 

The  officer  of  the  old  guard,  having  bis  guard  paraded,  on  the  ap- 
proach of  the  new  guard,  commands  : 

Present — Arms. 

The  new  guard  will  march,  in  quick  time,  past  the  old  guard,  at 
sJwnklcrcd  nrwii,  officers  saluting,  and  take  post  four  paces  on  its  right, 
where,  being  aligned  with  it,  its  commander  will  order: 

Present — Arms. 

The  two  officers  will  then  approach  each  other,  and  salute.     They  will 
then  return  to  their  respective  guards,  and  command  : 

1.  Shoulder — Arms.     2.   Order — Arms. 

The  officer  of  the  new  guard  will  now  direct  the  detail  for  the 
advanced  guard  to  be  formed  and  marched  to  its  post,  the  list  of 
the  guard  made  and  divided  into  three  reliefs,  experienced  soldiers 
placed  over  the  arms  of  the  guard  and  at  the  remote  and  responsible 
posts,  and  the  young  soldiers  in  posts  near  the  guard  for  instruction 
in  their  duties,  and  will  himself  proceed  to  take  possession  of  the 
guard-house,  or  guard-tent,  and  the  articles  and  prisoners  in  charge  of 
the  guard. 

During  the  time  of  relieving  the  sentinels  and  of  calling  in  the  small 
posts,  the  old  commander  will  give  to  the  new  all  the  information  and 
instructions  relating  to  his  post. 

The  first  relief  having  been  designated  and  ordered  two  paces  to  the 
front,  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard  will  take  charge  of  it,  and  go  to 
relieve  the  sentinels,  accompanied  by  the  corporal  of  the  old  guard, 
who  will  take  command  of  the  old  sentinels,  when  the  whole  are  re- 
lieved. 

If  the  sentinels  are  numerous,  the  sergeants  are  to  be  employed,  as 
well  as  the  corporals,  in  relieving  them. 

The  relief,  with  arms  at  a  support,  in  two  ranks,  will  march  by  a 
flank,  conducted  by  the  corporal  on  the  side  of  the  leading  front-rank 
man;  and  the  men  will  be  numbered  alternately  in  the  front  and  rear 
rank,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  being  No.  1.  Should  an 
officer  approach,  the  corporal  will  command  carry  arms,  and  resume 
the  8uj)port  arms  when  the  officer  is  passed. 

The  sentinels  at  the  guard-house  or  guard-tent  will  be  the  first  re- 
lieved and  left  behind  ;  the  others  are  relieved  in  succession. 

When  a  sentinel  sees  the  relief  approaching,  he  will  halt  and  face  to 
39 


458  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

it  with  bis  arms  at  a  shoulder.     At  six  paces,  the  corporal  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Relief.     2.  Halt. 

When  the  relief  will  halt  nnd  carry  arms.  The  corporal  will  then 
add,  "No.  1/'  or  ''No.  2,"  or  "No.  3,"  according  to  the  number  of  the 
post. 

Arms — Port. 

The  two  sentinels  will,  with  arms  at  port,  then  approach  each  other, 
when  the  old  sentinel,  under  the  correction  of  the  corporal,  will  whis- 
per the  instructions  to  the  new  sentinel.  This  done,  the  two  sentinels 
will  shoulder  arms,  and  the  old  sentinel  will  pass,  in  quick  time,  to  his 
place  in  rear  of  the  relief.     The  corporal  will  then  command: 

1.  Support — Arms.     2.  Forward.     3.  March. 

And  the  relief  proceeds  in  the  same  manner  until  the  whole  are  re- 
lieved. 

The  detachments  and  sentinels  from  the  old  guard  having  come  in, 
it  will  be  marched,  at  slwuldered  arms,  along  the  front  of  the  new 
guard,  in  quick  time,  the  new  guard  standing  at  ^jreseH/eo?  arms;  officers 
saluting,  and  the  music  of  both  guards  beating,  except  at  the  outposts. 

On  arriving  at  the  regimental  or  garrison  parade,  the  commander  of 
the  old  guard  will  send  the  detachments  composing  it,  under  charge  of 
the  non-commissioned  officers,  to  their  respective  regiments.  Before 
the  men  are  dismissed,  their  pieces  will  be  drawn  or  discharged  at  a 
target.  On  rejoining  their  companions,  the  chiefs  of  squads  will  ex- 
amine the  arms,  etc.,  of  their  men,  and  cause  the  whole  to  be  put  away 
in  good  order. 

When  the  old  guard  has  marched  oflF  fifty  paces,  the  officer  of  the 
new  guard  will  order  his  men  to  stack  their  arms,  or  place  them  in  the 
arm-racks. 

The  commander  of  the  guard  will  then  make  himself  acquainted 
with  all  the  instructions  for  bis  post,  visit  the  sentinels,  and  question 
them  and  the  non-commissioned  officers  relative  to  the  instructions 
they  may  have  received  from  other  persons  of  the  old  guard. 

Method  of  escorting  and  receiving  the  color  of  an  infantry  regi- 
ment. 

743.  When  the  regiment  turns  out  under  arms,  and  the  color  is 
wanted,  one  of  the  flank  companies  in  its  tour,  or,  if  both  be  absent,  a 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  459 

battalion  company,  other  than  that  of  the  color,  will  be  put  in  march 
to  receive  and  escort  the  color. 

The  march  will  be  in  the  following  order,  in  quick  time  and  without 
music:  the  drum-major  and  field  music,  followed  by  the  band;  the 
escort  in  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  with  arms  shifted  to  the 
right  shoulder  (see  No.  76S),  and  the  color-bearer  between  the  pla- 
toons. 

Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  quarters  of  the  colonel,  the  escort 
will  form  line,  the  field  music  and  band  on  the  right,  and  arms  will  be 
carried. 

The  moment  the  escort  is  in  line,  the  color-bearer,  preceded  by  the 
first  lieutenant,  and  followed  by  a  sergeant  of  the  escort,  will  go  to 
receive  the  color. 

When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  followed  by  the  lieutenant  and 
sergeant,  he  will  halt  before  the  entrance;  the  escort  will  present  arms, 
and  the  drums  will  beat  to  the  color. 

After  some  twenty  seconds,  the  captain  will  cause  the  beat  to  cease, 
arms  to  be  shouldered,  and  then  break  by  platoon  into  column;  the 
color-bearer  will  place  himself  between  the  platoons,  and  the  lieuten- 
ant and  sergeant  will  resume  their  posts. 

The  escort  will  march  back  to  the  battalion  to  the  sound  of  music  in 
quick  time,  and  in  the  same  order  a^  above. 

Honors  paid  to  the  color. 

Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces  from  the  battalion,  the  escort 
will  halt  and  the  music  cease;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  six  paces 
before  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  the  color-bearer  will  approach  the 
colonel,  by  the  front,  in  quick  time;  when  at  the  distance  of  ten  paces 
he  will  halt:  the  colonel  will  cause  arms  to  be  presented,  and  to  the 
color  to  be  played,  which  being  executed,  the  color-bearer  will  take  his 
place  in  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard,  and  the  battalion,  by  com- 
mand, shoulder  arms. 

The  escort,  field  music,  and  band,  will  return  in  quick  time  to  their 
several  places  in  line  of  battle,  marching  by  the  rear  of  the  battalion. 

The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  colonel's  tent  or  quarters  in 
the  above  order. 

Method  of  escorting  and  receiving  the  standard   of  a  cavalry 

regiment. 

744.  The  squadrons  of  a  regiment,  commencing  with  the  first,  furnish 
in  turn  the  escort  of  the  standard. 


460  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  captains  commanding  and  the  second  captain,  alternate  in  com- 
mand of  the  escort. 

The  escort  is  composed  of  two  platoons  (a  troop). 

The  first  platoon  of  the  escort  furnishes  the  advanced  guard,  com- 
posed of  two  men  in  front,  with  the  carbine  or  rifle  ach-anced  or  pistol 
raised;  a  corporal  and  four  men,  with  drawn  sabres,  march  ten  paces 
from  them. 

The  trumpeters,  formed  by  fours,  and  conducted  by  the  adjutant, 
march  ten  paces  from  the  four  men  who  precede. 

The  rest  of  the  platoon,  with  drawn  sabres,  having  the  lieutenant  at 
its  head,  marches  by  fours,  ten  paces  from  the  trumpeters. 

The  standard-bearer  follows  immediately  after,  between  two  ser- 
geants. 

The  second  platoon,  with  drawn  sabres,  having  the  second  lieutenant 
at  the  head,  follows  the  standard-bearer,  marches  by  fours,  and  fur- 
nishes the  rear  guard,  composed  of  a  corporal  and  two  men,  who  march 
with  drawn  sabres,  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  second  platoon. 

Two  other  men,  with  the  carbine  or  rijle  advanced,  or  pistol  raised, 
march  ten  paces  in  rear. 

The  captain  marches  four  paces  from  the  left  flank,  opposite  to  the 
standard-bearer. 

The  detachment  having  arrived  where  the  standard  is  kept,  without 
sounding  the  trumpets,  is  there  formed  into  line. 

The  adjutant  dismounts,  takes  the  standard,  and  gives  it  to  the 
standard-bearer. 

Reception  of  the  standard. 

As  soon  as  the  standard  appears,  the  captain  orders  sabres  to  be  pre- 
sented; the  trumpets  sound  to  the  standard. 

After  this  signal  has  been  twice  repeated,  the  captain  orders  the 
sabres  to  be  carried,  and  breaks  in  the  same  order  in  which  he  came; 
the  trumpets  sound  the  march. 

When  the  standard  arrives  in  front  of  the  right  or  left  wing  of  the 
regiment,  the  colonel  orders  the  sabres  to  be  drawn;  the  trumpets  cease 
to  sound,  and,  with  the  escort,  take  their  ijlace  in  line,  passing  behind 
the  regiment. 

The  standard-bearer,  accompanied  by  the  two  sergeants,  moves  to- 
ward the  centre  of  the  regiment,  parallel  to  the  front,  and  halts  before 
the  colonel,  fronting  the  regiment;  the  colonel  then  orders  the  sabres 
to  be  pi'esented,  and  the  trumpets  to  sound  to  the  standard ;  he  salutes 
with  the  sabre.  The  standard-bearer  then  takes  his  place  in  line,  and 
the  colonel  orders  the  sabres  to  be  carried. 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  461 

The  field  officers  salute  with  the  sabre  when  the  standard  passes  be- 
fore tbem. 

The  standard  receives  the  same  honors  on  its  departure  as  on  its  ar- 
rival, and  is  escorted  to  the  colonel's  quarters  in  the  order  prescribed 
above. 

Reception  of  one  hothj  of  troops  by  another. 

745.  The  commanding  officer  of  the  receiving  corps,  having  notified 
the  commander  of  the  other  body  of  his  intention,  brings  his  command 
into  line,  so  that  it  shall  be  on  the  riyht  of  the  route  which  it  is  in- 
tended the  other  shall  take.  The  commander  of  the  body  receiving 
the  compliment,  should  have  his  command  in  column  right  in  front; 
and  when  he  sees  the  other  body  in  line,  or  receives  an  intimation  from 
its  commanding  officer  that  he  is  ready  to  receive  him,  he  puts  his 
column  in  motion  ;  when  its  head  is  within  six  paces  of  the  left  of  the 
line  on  its  right,  the  latter  will  be  brought  to  a  present,  and  will  con- 
tinue in  that  position  until  the  rear  of  the  column  has  passed  the  right 
of  the  line.  The  column  passes  ni  shouldered  arwfs-,  each  officer  saluting 
as  soon  as  he  comes  within  six  paces  of  the  left  of  the  line.  When  the 
rear  of  the  column  has  passed  some  twenty-five  or  thirtj'  paces  beyond  the 
right  of  the  line,  the  column  is  brouuht  into  line,  on  the  same  side  with 
the  first  line.  As  soon  as  this  is  done,  the  first  line  breaks  into  column 
right  in  front,  and  marches  past  the  second,  receiving  the  same  compli- 
ments that  it  extended  when  the  other  body  passed.  After  marching 
past,  it  may  be  formed  into  line  again  as  it  was  at  first,  when  both  com- 
mands may  be  brought  to  an  order,  the  officers  advancing  and  being 
presented;  or  the  column  may  halt  long  enough  to  allow  the  other  com- 
mand, now  in  line,  to  re-foi-m  column,  when  both  take  up  the  march, 
the  leading  column  serving  as  an  escort  for  the  other. 

ORDERS. 

746.  The  orders  of  commanders  of  armies,  divisions,  brigadiers  and 
regiments,  are  denominated  orders  of  such  an  army,  division,  etc.  And 
all  orders  are  either  general  or  special.  Orders  are  numbered,  general 
and  special,  in  separate  series,  each  beginning  with  the  year. 

General  orders  provide  for  the  organization,  discipline,  instruction, 
and  movement  of  the  troops  ;  announce  the  hours  for  roll-calls  and 
duties;  the  number  and  kind  of  guards,  and  the  time  when  they  shall 
be  relieved;  police  regulations,  and  the  prohibitions  required  by  cir- 
cumstances and  localites ;  returns  to  be  made,  and  their  forms;  laws 
and  regulations  for  the  forces  ;  promotions  and  ajjpointments;  eulogies 
or  censures  to  corps  or  individuals,  and  generally,  whatever  it  may  be 
important  to  make  known  to  the  whole  command. 


462 


MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    jMTLTTTA. 


Special  orders  are  such  as  do  not  concern  the  troops  generally,  and 
need  not  be  published  to  the  whole  command  ;  such  as  I'elate  to  the 
march  of  some  particular  corps,  the  establishment  of  some  post,  the  de- 
taching of  individuals,  the  granting  requests,  etc. 

An  order  will  state,  at  tlie  head,  the  source,  place  and  date,  and  at 
the  foot,  the  name  of  the  commander  who  gives  it,  followed  by  the  sig- 
nature and  title  of  the  staff  officer  by  whom  it  is  written,  for  example  : 


For  an  army — 


General  (or  Special)  Orders, 
No.  1. 


For  a  division — 


General  (or  Special)  Orders, 

No.  — . 


Head-quarters,  Army  of  Occupation, 

Corpus  Christi,  Texas. 

Seiit.,  18—. 


By  order  of  General  Z.  T., 

W.  S.  B.,  Adft  General. 


Head-quarters,  ?>d  D.,    Va.  M. 
Winchester.  Va.,  Dec,  18 — . 


By  order  of  Major-General  A.  B., 

C.  D.,  AHHiHtant  AdJ'f  General, 

i)T  Diri8lo}i  Inspector. 


For  a  brigade- 


General  (or  Special)  Orders, 
No.—. 


For  a  regiment — 


Orders  (or  Special  Orders), 

No.  — . 


Head-qnarterfi,  9th  Brigade,  ]'«.  M., 
Camp  near .  Jan.  18 — . 


By  order  of  Brigadier-General  F.  G. 
H.  I.,  Assistant  Adft  General, 

or  Brigade  Inspector, 


Head-quarters,  20th  Regiment,  Va.  M. 
C — N.,  August  18 — . 


By  order  of  Colonel  0.  P.  Q., 

R.  S.,  Adjutant. 

Orders  are  ordinarily  transmitted  through  all  the  intermediate  com- 
manders in  the  order  of  rank.  When  an  intermediate  commander  is 
omitted,  the  officer  who  gives  the  order  shall  inform  him,  and  he  who 
receives  it  shall  report  it  to  his  immediate  superior. 

The  orderly  hours  being  fixed  at  each  liead-quarters,  the  staff  officers 
and  chiefs  of  the  special  services,  either  attend  in  person,  or  send  their 
assistants  to  obtain  the  orders  of  the  day;  and  the  first  sergeants  of 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  463 

ompanies  repair  for  that  purpose  to  the  i-egimental  or  garrison  head- 
quarters. 

During  marches  and  active  operations,  and  when  the  regular  orderly 
hours  cannot  be  observed,  all  orders  will  be  either  sent  direct  to  the 
troops,  or  the  respective  commanders  or  corps  will  be  informed  when  to 
send  to  head-quarters  for  tliem. 


MUSTERS. 

747.  Musters  of  the  volunteers  and  militia  are  made  at  least  once  a. 
year,  b}'  the  brigade  inspectors.  Where  troops  are  in  actual  service 
musters  are  made  every  two  months ;  usually  on  the  last  day  of  every 
second  month.  In, this  case  they  arc  made  by  an  inspector-general,  if 
present,  otherwise  by  an  otficer  specially  designated  l)y  the  commander 
of  the  army,  division,  or  l)rigade  ;  and  in  the  absence  of  the  inspector- 
general  or  officer  specially  designated,  the  muster  is  made  by  the  com- 
mander of  the  post. 

When  one  inspecting  officer  cannot  inspect  all  the  troops  himself  on 
the  day  specified,  tlie  commanding  officer  will  designate  such  other 
competent  officers  as  may  be  necessary,  to  assist  him.  All  stated  mus- 
ters of  the  troops  should  be  preceded  by  a  minute  and  careful  in-y)ection 
in  the  prescribed  mode;  and  if  the  command  be  more  than  a  company, 
by  a  review,  before  inspection. 

The  mustering  officer  having  inspected  the  companies  in  succession, 
beginning  on  the  right,  returns  to  the  first  company  to  muster  it.  The 
company  being  at  ordered  arms,  with  open  ranks,  as  when  inspected, 
the  captains  will,  as  the  mustering  officer  approaches,  command  : 

1.  Attentim.     2.   Company.     3.    Shouldei^ — Arms.     4.  Support 

— Arms. 

The  mustering  officer  will  then  call  over  the  names  on  the  roll,  and 
each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  will  distinctly  answer  here,  and  bring 
his  piece  to  a  carri/,  and  to  an  order. 

After  each  company  is  mustered,  the  captain  will  order  it  to  be 
marched  to  the  company  parade,  and  there  dismissed  tc  quarters,  to 
await  the  inspector's  visit.  After  mustering  the  companies,  the  mus- 
tering officei-,  attended  bj"^  the  company  commanders,  will  visit  the 
guard  and  hospital,  to  verify  the  presence  of  the  men  reported  there. 
The  muster  and  pay  rolls  are  made  on  printed  forms  in  accordance 
with  the  directions  on  them.  On  the  muster  rolls  companies  are  desig- 
"  nated  by  the  name  of  the  captain,  whether  present  or  absent.  The  pay 
roll  is  left  blank  to  fill  up  by  the  paymaster. 


464  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

THE    ROSTER,    OR    DETAILS    FOR    SERVICE. 

748.  The  duties  performed  by  detail  are  of  three  cl  .asses.  The  frst 
class  comprises,  first,  grand  guards  and  outposts ;  second,  interior 
guards,  as  of  magazine,  hospital,  etc.;  third,  orderlies;  fourth,  police 
guards. 

The  second  class  comprises,  first,  detachments  to  protect  labor  on 
military  works,  as  field  works,  communications,  etc.;  second,  working 
parties  on  such  works;  third,  detachments  to  protect  fatigues. 

The  third  class  are  all  fatigues,  without  arms,  in  or  out  of  camp. 
In  the  cavalry,  stable  guards  form  a  separate  roster,  and  count  before 
fatigue. 

The  rosters  are  distinct  for  each  class.  Officers  are  named  on  them 
in  the  order  of  rank.  The  details  are  taken  in  succession  in  the  order 
of  the  roster,  beginning  at  the  head.  Lieutenants  form  one  roster,  the 
first  and  second  lieutenants  are  entered  on  it  alternately.  The  senior 
first  lieutenant  is  the  first  on  the  roster;  the  senior  second  lieutenant 
is  the  second,  etc.  The  captains  form  one  roster,  and  are  exempt  from 
fatigue,  except  to  superintend  issues.  A  captain  commanding  a  bat- 
talion temporarily,  is  exempt  from  detail,  and  duty  falling  to  him 
passes.  Lieutenant-colonels  and  majors  are  on  one  roster.  They  may 
be  detailed  for  duties  of  the  first  and  second  classes,  when  the  impor- 
tance of  the  guards  and  detachments  requires  it.  Their  roster  is  kept 
at  division  and  brigade  head-quarters.  The  rosters  of  the  captains 
and  lieutenants  are  kejit  at  regimental  head-quarters,  and  those  of  the 
companies  by  the  first  sergeants.  In  the  company,  sergeants,  corpo- 
rals and  privates  form  distinct  rosters. 

Ofiicers  and  non-commissioned  officers,  and  soldiers,  take  duties  of 
the  first  class  in  the  or^er  stated,  viz.,  the  first  lor  the  detail,  takes 
the  grand  guards  ;  the  next,  the  interior  guards  ;  the  last,  the  police 
guard;  and  the  same  rule  in  regard  to  the  details  and  duties  of  the 
second  class.  In  the  details  for  the  third  class,  the  senior  officer  takes 
the  largest  party.  The  party  first  f«ir  detail  takes  the  service  out  of 
camp. 

When  the  officer  whose  tour  it  is,  is  not  able  to  take  it,  or  is  not 
present  at  the  hour  of  marching,  the  next  after  him  takes  it.  When  a 
guard  has  passed  the  chain  of  sentinels,  or  an  interior  guard  has 
reached  its  post,  the  officer  whose  tour  it  was  cannot  then  take  it.  He 
takes  the  tour  of  the  officer  who  has  taken  his.  When  an  officer  is 
prevented  by  sickness  from  taking  his  tour,  it  passes.  These  rules 
appl,y  equally  to  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers. 

Duties  of  the  first  and  second  class  are  credited  on  the  roster  when  • 
the  guards  or  detachments  have  passed  the  chain  of  sentinels,  or  an 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  465 

interior  guard  has  reached  its  post;  fatigue  duties  when  the  parties 
have  passed  the  chain  or  begun  the  duties  in  camp. 

Every  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier,  on  duty  of  the 
first  class,  or  who  is  of  the  next  detail  for  such  duty,  takes,  when 
relieved,  the  duty  of  the  second  or  third  class  that  has  fallen  to  him 
during  that  time,  unless  he  has  marched  for  detachment  of  more  than 
twenty-four  hours. 

Soldiers  march  with  knapsacks  for  all  duties  of  the  first  class;  and 
with  arms  and  equipments  complete  on  all  working  parties  out  of  camp, 
unless  otherwise  ordered.  In  the  cavalry,  horses  are  packed  for  all 
mounted  service;  and  dismounted  men,  and  those  whose  horses  are  not 
in  order,  are  preferred  for  the  detail  for  dismounted  service.  Those 
who  arc  mounted  are  never  employed  on  those  services,  if  the  number 
of  the  other  class  are  sufficient. 

Every  non-commissioned  officer  and  soldier  in  the  cavalry  detailed 
for  dismounted  service  must,  before  he  marches,  take  to  the  first  ser- 
geant of  his  troop,  or  sergeant  of  his  squad,  his  horse  equipments 
and  valise  ready  packed.  In  case  of  alarm,  the  first,  sergeant  sees 
that  the  horses  of  these  men  are  equipped  and  led  to  the  rendezvous. 

In  the  field,  artillerymen  are  not  called  upon  for  any  duty  outside 
their  own  batteries  or  camps. 

These  rules  in  regard  to  the  roster  apply  also  to  service  in  garrison. 

DUTIES    OF    GUARDS. 

749.  Sentinels  will  be  relieved  every  two  hours,  unless  the  state  of 
the  weather,  or  other  causes,  should  make  it  necessary  or  proper  that 
it  be  done  at  shorter  or  longer  intervals. 

Each  relief,  before  mounting,  is  inspected  by  the  commander  of  the 
guard  or  of  its  post.  The  corporal  reports  to  him,  and  presents  the 
old  relief  on  its  return. 

The  countersign,  or  watchword,  is  given  to  such  i)ersons  as  are 
entitled  to  pass  during  the  night,  and  to  officers,  non-commissioned 
officers,  and  sentinels  of  the  guard.  Interior  guards  receive  the 
cojintersign  only  when  ordered  by  the  commander  of  the  troops. 

The  imrole  is  imparted  to  such  officers  only  as  have  a  right  to  visit 
the  guards,  and  to  make  the  grand  rounds ;  and  to  otfic^rs  command- 
ing guards. 

As  soon  as  the  new  guard  has  been  marched  off,  the  officer  of  the 
day  will  repair  to  the  office  of  the  commanding  ofiicer  and  report  for 
orders. 

The  officer  of  the  day  must  see  that  the  officer  of  the  guard  is  fur- 
nished with  the  parole  and  countersign  before  retreat. 

The  officer  of  the  day  visits  the  guards  during  the  day,  at  such  times 


466  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MTLTTTA. 

as  he  may  deem  necessary,  and  makes  his  rounds  at  night  at  least  once 
after  twelve  o'clock. 

Upon  being  relieved,  the  officer  of  the  day  will  make  such  remarks 
in  the  report  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  as  circumstances  require,  and 
present  the  same  at  head-quarters. 

Commanders  of  guards  leaving  their  posts  to  visit  their  sentinels,  or 
on  other  duty,  are  to  mention  their  intention,  and  the  probable  time  of 
their  absence,  to  the  next  in  command. 

The  officers  are  to  remain  constantly  at  their  guards,  except  while 
visiting  their  sentinels,  or  necessarily  engaged  elsewhere  on  their  proper 
duty. 

Neither  officers  nor  soldiers  are  to  take  off  their  clothing  or  accou- 
trements while  they  are  on  guard. 

The  officer  of  the  guard  must  see  that  the  countersign  is  duly  com- 
municated to  the  sentinels  a  little  before  twilight. 

When  a  fire  breaks  out,  or  any  alarm  is  raised  in  a  garrison,  all 
guards  are  to  be  immediately  under  arms. 

Inexperienced  officers  are  put  on  guard  as  supernumeraries,  for  the 
purpose  of  instruction. 

Sentinels  will  not  take  orders,  or  allow  themselves  to  be  relieved, 
except  by  an  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer  of  their  guard  or 
party,  the  officer  of  the  day,  or  the  commanding  officer  ;  in  which  case 
the  orders  will  be  immediately  notified  to  the  commander  of  the  guard 
by  the  officer  giving  them. 

Sentinels  will  report  every  br''ach  of  orders  or  regulations  they  are 
instructed  to  enforce. 

Sentinels  must  keep  themselves  on  the  alert,  observing  everything 
that  takes  place  within  sight  and  hearing  of  their  post.  They  will 
carry  their  arms  habitually  at  support,  or  on  either  shoulder,  but  will 
never  quit  them.  In  wet  weather,  if  there  be  no  sentry-box,  they 
will  secure  arms. 

No  sentinel  shall  quit  his  post  or  hold  conversation  not  necessary  to 
the  proper  discharge  of  his  duty. 

All  persons,  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service,  are  required  to  observe 
respect  toward  sentinels. 

In  case  of  disorder,  a  sentinel  must  call  out  the  guard ;  and  if  a  fire 
take  place,  he  must  cry — "Fire!"  adding  the  number  of  his  post.  If, 
in  either  case,  the  danger  be  great,  he  must  discharge  his  firelock 
before  calling  out. 

It  is  the  duty  of  a  sentinel  to  repeat  all  calls  made  from  posts  more 
distant  from  the  main  body  of  the  guard  than  his  own,  and  no  sentinel 
Avill  be  posted  so  distant  as  not  to  be  heard  by  the  guard,  either  direct- 
ly or  through  other  sentinels. 

Sentinels  will  halt,  come  to  'attention,  and  present  arms  to  general 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  467 

and  field  officers,  to  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  to  the  commanding  offi- 
cer of  the  post.     To  all  other  officers  they  will  carry  arms. 

When  a  sentinel,  in  his  sentry-box,  sees  an  officer  approaching,  he 
will  stand  at  attention,  and  as  the  officer  passes  will  salute  him  by 
bring  the  left  hand  briskly  to  the  musket,  as  high  as  the  right  shoulder. 

The  sentinel  at  any  post  of  the  guard,  when  he  sees  any  body  of 
troops,  or  an  officer  entitled  to  compliment  approach,  must  call :  "  Turn 
out  the  (/Hard  ;"  and  announce  who  approaches. 

Guards  do  not  turn  out  as  a  matter  of  compliment  after  sunset;  but 
sentinels  will,  when  officers  in  uniform  approach,  pay  them  proper 
attention,  by  facing  to  the  proper  front,  and  standing  steady  at  shoul- 
dered arms.  This  will  be  observed  until  the  evening  is  so  far  advanced 
that  the  sentinels  begin  challenging. 

After  retreat  (or  the  hour  appointed  b}'  the  commanding  officer), 
until  broad  daylight,  a  sentinel  challenges  every  person  who  approaches 
him,  taking,  at  the  same  time,  the  position  of  arms  jiort.  He  will  suffer 
no  person  to  come  nearef  than  within  reach  of  his  bayonet,  until  the 
person  has  given  the  countersign. 

A  sentinel,  in  challenging,  will  call  out — "-Who  comes  there?''  If 
answei'cd — ^^ Friend,  uith  the  countersign,"  and  he  be  instructed  to  pass 
persons  with  the  countersign,  he  will  reply  —  '^ Advance,  friend,  with 
the  countersign."  If  answered  —  "Friends,"  he  will  reply  —  ''Halt, 
friends  ;  advance,  one,  with  the  conntersiyn."  If  answered  —  ''Relief," 
"Patrol,"  or  "Grand  ro»?irfs,"  he  will  reply  —  "Halt.  Advance,  ser- 
geant (or  corporal),  with  the  countersign,"  and  satisfy  himself  that  the 
party  is  what  it  represents  itself  to  be.  If  he  have  no  authoi'ity  to 
pass  persons  with  the  countersign,  if  the  wrong  countersign  be  given, 
or  if  the  persons  have  not  the  countersign,  he  will  cause  them  to  stand, 
and  call — "  Corjjoral  of  the  guard." 

In  the  daytime,  when  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  sees  the  officer  of 
the  day  approach,  he  will  call  — "  Turn  out  the  guard,  officer  of  the 
day."''*  The  guard  Avill  be  paraded,  and  salute  with  presented  arms. 

When  any  person  approaches  a  post  of  the  guard  at  night,  the 
sentinel  before  the  post,  after  challenging,  causes  him  to  halt  until 
examined  by  a  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  guard.  If  it  be  the 
officer  of  the  day,  or  any  other  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard  and 
to  make  the  rounds,  the  non-commissioned  officer  will  call  — ''  Turn  out 
the  guard,"  when  the  guard  will  be  paraded  at  shouldered  arms,  and 
the  officer  of  the  guard,  if  he  thinks  necessary,  may  demand  the  coun- 
tersign and  parole. 

The  officer  of  the  day,  wishing  to  make  the  rounds,  will  take  an 
escort  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  and  two  men.  When  the  rounds 
are   challenged    by    a    sentinel,    the    sergeant   will   answer  —  "  Grand 


468 


MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITTA. 


rounds,"  and  the  sentinel  will  reply — "Halt,  grand  rounds."  Advance, 
sergeant,  with  the  coiintersiffn"  Upon  which  the  sergeant  advances  and 
gives  the  countersign.  The  sentinel  will  then  cry — "Advance,  rounds," 
and  stand  at  a  shoulder  until  they  have  passed. 

When  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  challenges,  and  is  answered  — 
"Grand  rounds,"  he  will  reply  —  "Halt,  grand  rounds.  Tur)i -out  the 
guard ;  grand  rounds."  Upon  which  the  guard  will  be  drawn  up  at 
shouldered  arms.  The  officer  comuiauding  the  guard  will  then  order  a 
sergeant  and  two  men  to  advance;  when  within  ten  paces,  the  sergeant 
challenges.  The  sergeant  of  the  grand  rounds  answers  —  "Grand 
rounds."  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  replies  —  "  Adrance,  sergeant,  with 
the  countersign."  The  sergeant  of  the  rounds  advances  alone,  gives 
the  countersign,  and  returns  to  his  round.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard 
calls  to  his  officer  —  "  'J'/ie  countersign  is  right"  on  which  the  officer  of 
the  guard  calls  —  "Advance,  rounds."  The  officer  of  the  rounds  then 
advances  alone,  the  guard  standing  at  shouldered  arms.  The  officer  of 
the  rounds  passes  along  the  front  of  the  guard  to  the  officer,  who  keeps 
his  post  on  the  right,  and  gives  him  the  parole.  He  then  examines  the 
guard,  orders  back  his  escort,  and.  taking  a  new  one,  proceeds  in  the 
same  manner  to  other  guards. 

All  material  instructions  given  to  a  sentinel  on  post  by  persons  en- 
titled to  make  grand  rounds,  ought  to  be  promply  notified  to  the 
commander  of  the  guard. 

Any  general  officer,  or  the  commander  of  a  post  or  garrison,  may 
visit  the  guards  of  his  command,  and  go  the  grand  rounds,  and  be 
received  in  the  same  manner  as  prescribed  for  the  officer  of  the  day. 

FORM    OF    GUARD    REPORT. 
Kepoit  of  a  Guard  uiouuteJ  at  ,  on  the ,  aud  relieved  on  the . 


1 

^ 

• 

PAROLE. 

' 

Articles  in 

CHARGE. 

Received  the 
foregoing    ar- 
ticles. 

1 

Countersign. 

OD 

X 

a 
u 

o 

OD 

QQ 

.1 

.2 

3 
1^ 

o 

> 

IS 

o 

fcC 

2 

be 

- 

A.  B , 

Lieut.  1st  In- 
fantry. 

2 

cc 

6 

^\ 

H 

< 

1 

1 
1 

1 

Detail. 

1 

1 

1           1 

1 

HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC. 


469 


LIST    OF    THE    GUARD. 


Reliefs,  axd  when  Posted. 

l8t  Relief. 

'       2d  Relief. 

3d  Relief. 

00 

Fr 

om  —  to  —  and 
—  to—. 

From  —  to  — 
and  —  to  — . 

From  —  to  — 
and  —  to  — . 

Where  Posted. 

as 

No. 

Name. 

Co. 
A 

Et. 

Ist 

Name. 

Co. 
D 

Rt. 
3d 

Name. 

Co. 
G 

Rt. 

8th 

1 

CD. 

I.J. 

O.P. 

Guard  House. 

2 

E.  F. 

B 

4th 

K.  L. 

E 

2d 

Q.R. 

H 

9th 

Magazine. 

3 

G.  H. 

C 

6th 

M.N. 

F 

5th 

S.  T. 

I 

10th 

Quar.  Store. 

1 

Sergeant  W.  V..  Co.  A,  Ist  Artillery. 

Serg't  Guard. 

2 

Corporal  W.  X.,  Co.  B,  1st  Infantry. 

Corp'l       " 

3 

Corporal  Y.  Z.,  Co.  C,  3d  Infantry. 

<k             a 

LIST    OF   PRISONERS. 


Names. 

a 

1 

'bo 
» 
(4 

Confined. 

Charges. 

Sentences. 

No. 

When. 

By  whom. 

Remarks. 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 

A.  B.  C, 

Lieut. 


— ,  Regiment , 

Commanding  the  Guard. 


GUARDS. 

750.  Guards,  in  time  of  war,  are  bodies  of  men  whose  duties  are  to 
secure  an  army  or  place  from  being  surprised  by  an  enemy. 

By  a  proper  disposition  of  the  guards  and  by  a  faithful  discharge  of 
the  duties  imposed  upon  them,  a  whole  army  can  at  all  times,  and 


470  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

under  all  circumstances,  be  kept  in  readiness  for  action;  the  larger 
part  of  the  army,  even  in  the  pursuit  of  an  enemy,  and  momentarily 
expecting  to  meet  him,  may  with  safety  seek  that  repose  which  is  so 
necessary'  to  keep  up  the  physical  energies  of  the  forces;  and  as  the 
guards  generally  constitute  but  a  comparatively  small  portion  of  the 
command,  and  are  frequently  relieved,  no  soldier  is  likely  to  be  called 
upon  to  endure  an  amount  of  fatigue  greater  than  a  man  in  his  vigor 
ought  to  bear. 

In  order  that  the  guards  of  an  army  may  protect  it  properly,  they 
must  be  so  posted  as  to  cover  both  the  front  aad  flanks  of  the  position, 
and  at  the  same  time  have  possession  of  all  the  avenues  of  api)roach 
to  it.  The  ordinary  arrangement  of  guards  is  such,  that  no  matter 
how  far  the  outer  line  maj'  lie  from  the  main  body,  it  may  rally  from 
point  to  point,  if  driven  in  by  an  advancing  enemy,  gaining  strength^ 
each  time,  until  it  finally  reaches  the  main  body.  Thus  even  the  most 
advanced  posts  need  never  be  cut  off,  while  it  would  be  impossible  for 
an  enemy  to  surprise  the  main  body. 

The  usual  arrangement  consists  of  two  or  three  lines  of  posts,  within 
i-elief  of  each  other,  and  extending  around  the  main  body  as  a  centre, 
the  exterior  line  throwing  out  a  chain  of  sentinels  in  its  front,  and 
so  distributed  as  to  prevent  the  approach  of  any  one  without  being 
seen. 

751.  The  inner  line  consists  of  what  are  denominated  police  fjiiardti  ; 
there  is  a  police  guard  for  each  regiment,  which  is  posted  within  the 
regimental  camp  (see  camp  of  an  infantry  regiment).  These  guards 
are  of  sufficient  strength  to  supply  a  chain  of  sentinels  along  the  front 
and  rear  of  the  regiment,  connecting  it  with  the  regiments  on  the  right 
and  left,  thus  forming  a  chain  of  sentinels  close  to  and  all  around  the 
camp. 

The  next  line  consists  of  a  number  of  strong  detachments,  termed 
jyickeis ;  they  are  posted  upon  the  main  avenues  of  approach  to  the 
position,  and  serve  as  supports  to  the  exterior  lines,  upon  which  they 
rally  when  driven  in  by  the  enemy. 

Next  beyond  the  pickets  is  the  line  of  grand  guards,  and  of  course 
occupying  a  wider  circumference;  they  are  posted  in  the  most  favor- 
able position  for  observing  the  enemy,  and  throw  out  the  extreme  line, 
called  the  line  of  outposts.  The  line  of  grand  guards,  while  supported 
by  the  pickets,  in  turn  furnishes  support  to  the  outposts  when  neces- 
sary. 

Beside  these  various  Ymas,  patrols  are  kept  up  between  the  various 
posts,  to  keep  the  one  informed  of  the  condition  of  the  other;  and, 
also  between  the  outposts  and  the  extreme  line  of  sentinels,  to  see  that 
the  duties  of  the  latter  are  properly  performed. 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  471 

This  arrangement  pecures  positions  favorable  for  observation  and 
mutual  support. 

"  The  duties  of  the  outposts,  and  of  the  grand  guards  which  form 
their  supports,  are  strictly  those  of  observation.  If  attacked,  they 
offer  no  resistance  further  than  to  enable  them  to  feel  the  enemy  per- 
fectly, and  never  lose  sight  of  him.  The  task  of  holding  the  enemy 
in  check  by  a  vigorous  resistance,  so  as  to  procure  sufficient  time  for 
the  main  body  to  make  its  disposition  for  battle,  is  consigned  to  the 
pickets."     (Mahan.) 

Police  guards. 

752.  The  police  guard  is  detailed  every  day  from  each  regiment,  and 
consists  of  two  sergeants,  three  corporals,  two  musicians,  and  men 
enough  to  furnish  the  necessary  sentinels  and  patrols.  The  men  are 
taken  from  all  the  companies,  from  each  in  proportion  to  its  strength. 

The  guard  is  commanded  by  a  lieutenant,  under  the  supervision  of  a 
captain  as  regimental  officer  of  the  day.  It  furnishes  ten  sentinels  at 
the  camp  ;  one  over  the  arms  of  the  guard  :  one'at  the  colonel's  tent; 
three  on  the  color  front ;  one  of  them  over  the  colors;  three,  fifty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  field  officer's  tents  ;  and  one  on  each  flank,  between  it 
and  the  next  regiment.  If  it  is  a  flank  regiment,  one  more  sentinel  is 
posted  on  the  outer  flank. 

An  advanced  post  is  detached  from  the  police  guard,  composed  of  a 
sergeant,  a  corporal,  a  drummer,  and  nine  men  to  furnish  sentinels  and 
the  guard  over  the  prisoners.  The  men  are  the  first  of  the  guard  roster 
from  each  company.  The  men  of  the  advanced  post  must  not  leave  it 
under  any  pretext.  Their  meals  are  sent  to  the  post.  The  advanced 
post  furi^shes  three  sentinels ;  two  a  few  paces  in  front  of  the  post, 
opposite  the  right  and  left  wing  of  the  regiment,  posted  so  as  to  see  as 
far  as  possible  to  the  front,  and  one  over  the  arms. 

In  the  cavalry,  dismounted  men  are  employed  in  preference  on  the 
police  guard.  The  mounted  men  on  guard  are  sent  in  succession,  a 
part  at  a  time,  to  groom  their  horses.  The  advanced  post  is  always 
formed  of  mounted  jaen. 

In  each  company,  a  corporal  has  charge  of  the  stable  guard.  His 
tour  begins  at  retreat,  and  ends  at  morning  stable-call.  The  stable 
guard  is  large  enough  to  relieve  the  men  on  post  every  two  hours. 
They  sleep  in  their  tents,  and  are  called  by  the  corporal  when  wanted. 
At  retreat  he  closes  the  streets  of  the  camp  with  cords,  or  uses  other 
precautions  to  prevent  the  escape  of  loose  horses. 

The  officer  of  the  day  is  charged  with  the  order  and  cleanliness  ot 
the  camp  :  a  fatigue  is  furnished  to  him  when  the  number  of  prisoners 


472  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

is  insufficient  to  clean  the  camp.     He  has  the  calls  beaten  by  the  drum- 
mer of  the  guard. 

The  police  guard  and  the  advanced  po^t  pay  the  j<ame  honors  as 
other  guards.     They  take  arras  when  an  armed  body  approaches. 

The  sentinel  over  the  colors  has  orders  not  to  permit  them  to  be 
moved  except  in  the  presence  of  an  escort ;  to  let  no  one  touch  them 
but  the  color-bearer,  or  the  sergeant  of  the  police  guard  when  he  is 
accompanied  by  two  armed  men. 

The  sentinels  on  the  color  front  permit  no  soldier  to  take  arms  from 
the  stacks,  except  by  order  of  some  officer,  or  a  non-commissioned  offi- 
cer of  the  guard.  The  sentinel  at  the  colonel's  tent  has  orders  to 
Avarn  him,  day  or  night,  of  any  unusual  movement  in  or  about  the 
cam]). 

The  sentinels  on  the  front,  flanks,  and  rear,  see  that  no  soldier  leaves 
camp  with  horse  or  arms  unless  conducted  by  a  non-commissioned 
officer.  They  prevent  uon-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  from 
passing  out  at  night,  except  to  go  to  the  sinks,  and  mark  if  they  re- 
turn. They  arrest,  at  any  time,  suspicious  persons  prowling  about  the 
camp,  and  at  night,  every  one  who  attempts  to  enter,  even  the  soldiers 
of  other  c<irps.  Arrested  persons  are  sent  to  the  officer  of  the  guard, 
who  sends  them,  if  necessary,  to  the  officer  of  the  daj'. 

The  sentinels  on  the  front  of  the  advanced  post  have  orders  to  per- 
mit neither  non-commissioned  <»fficers  nor  soldiers  to  pass  the  line, 
without  reporting  at  the  advanced  post  ;  to  warn  the  advanced  post  of 
the  approach  of  any  armed  Viody,  and  to  arrest  all  suspicious  persons. 
The  sergeant  sends  persons  so  arrested  to  the  officer  of  the  guard,  and 
warns  him  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body. 

The  sentinel  over  the  arms  at  the  advanced  post  guards  the  prisoners 
and  keeps  sight  of  them,  and  suflFers  no  one  to  converse  with  Acm  with- 
out permission.  They  are  only  permitted  to  go  to  the  sinks  one  at  a 
time,  and  under  a  sentinel. 

If  any  one  is  to  be  passed  out  of  camp  at  night,  the  officer  of  the 
guard  sends  him  under  escort  to  the  advanced  post,  and  the  sergeant  of 
the  post  has  him  passed  over  the  chain. 

At  retreat,  the  officer  of  the  guard  has  the  rolFof  his  guard  called, 
and  inspects  arms,  to  see  that  they  are  loaded  and  in  order;  and 
visits  the  advanced  posts  for  the  same  purpose.  The  sergeant  of  the 
police  guard,  accompanied  by  two  armed  soldiers,  folds  the  colors  and 
lays  them  on  the  trestle  in  rear  of  the  arms.  He  sees  that  the  sutler's 
stores  are  then  closed,  and  the  men  leave  them,  and  that  the  kitchen 
fires  are  put  out  at  the  appointed  hour. 

The  officer  of  the  day  satisfies  himself  frequently  during  the  night  of 
the  vigilance  of  the  police  guard   and  advanced   post.     He  prescribes 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  473 

patrols  and  rounds  to  be  made  by  the  officer  and  non-commissioned 
officers  of  the  guard.  The  officer  of  the  guard  orders  them  when  he 
thinks  necessary.     He  visits  the  sentinels  frequently. 

At  reveille,  the  police  guard  takes  arms  ;  the  officer  of  the  guard 
inspects  it  and  the  advanced  post.  The  sergeant  replants  the  colors 
in  place.  At  retreat  and  reveille  the  advanced  post  takes  arms;  the 
sergeant  makes  his  report  to  the  officer  of  the  guard  when  he  visits  the 
post. 

When  necessary,  the  camp  is  covered  at  night  with  small  outposts, 
forming  a  double  chain  of  sentinels.  These  posts  are  under  the  orders 
of  the  commander  of  the  police  guard,  and  are  visited  by  his  patrols 
and  rounds. 

The  officer  of  the  guard  makes  his  report  of  his  tour  of  service, 
including  the  advanced  post,  and  sends  it,  after  the  guard  is  marched 
off,  to  the  officer  of  the  day. 

When  the  regiment  marches,  the  men  of  the  police  guard  return 
to  their  companie.*?,  except  those  of  the  advanced  post.  In  the  cavalry, 
at  the  sound  "  boot  and  saddle,"  the  officer  of  the  guard  sends  one  half 
the  men  to  saddle  and  pack  ;  when  tlie  regiment  assembles,  all  the  men 
join  it. 

When  the  camping  party  precedes  the  regiment,  and  the  new  police 
guard  marches  with  the  camping  party,  the  guard,  on  reaching  the 
camp,  forms  in  line  thirty  paces-  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  ground 
marked  for  the  regiment.  The  officer  of  the  guard  furnishes  the  senti- 
nels required  by  the  commander  of  the  camping  party.  The  advanced 
posit  takes  its  station. 

The  advanced  post  of  the  old  police  guard  takes  charge  of  the  pris- 
oners on  the  march,  and  marches,  bayonets  fixed,  at  the  centre  of  the 
regiment.  On  reaching  camp,  it  turns  over  the  prisoners  to  the  new 
advanced  post. 

PICKETS. 

753.  The  detail  for  the  picket  is  made  daily,  and  is  composed  of  a 
lieutenant,  two  sergeants,  four  corporals,  a  drummer  and  about  forty 
privates  for  each  regiment.  For  a  smaller  force,  the  picket  is  in  pro- 
portion to  the  strength  of  the  detachment.  The  duty  of  the  pickets  is 
to  hold  the  enemy  in  check,  and  the  points  which  they  take  up  should, 
if  possible,  be  susceptible  of  good  defence;  such  as  villages,  defiles, 
etc.;  when  these  advantages  do  not  present  themselves,  temporary  ob- 
stacles, such  as  abatis,  etc.,  sliould  be  resorted  to.  The  points  occupied 
by  the  pickets  should  be  about  midway  between  the  line  of  outposts 
and  the  position  of  the  main  body. 
40 


474  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Small  posts  should  be  thrown  forward  by  the  pickets,  between  them 
and  the  line  of  grand  guards.  These  give  greater  security  to  the  pick- 
ets, and  furnish  support  to  the  grand  guard. 

GRAND  GUARDS  AND  OUTPOSTS. 

754.  The  numbers,  strength  and  position  of  grand  guards  are  regu- 
lated by  the  commanders  of  brigades ;  in  detached  corps,  by  the  com- 
manding officer.  When  it  can  be  done,  the  grand  guards  of  infantry 
and  cavalry  are  combined,  the  cavalry  furnishing  the  advanced  senti- 
nels. When  the  cavalry  is  weak,  the  grand  guards  are  infantry,  but 
furnished  with  a  few  cavalry  soldiers,  to  get  and  carry  intelligence  of 
the  enemy. 

The  strength  of  the  grand  guard  of  a  brigade  will  depend  on  the 
strength  of  the  regiments,  the  nature  of  the  country,  the  position  of 
the  enemy,  and  the  disposition  of  the  inhabitants.  It  is  usually  com- 
manded by  a  captain. 

Un<ler  the  supervision  of  the  generals  of  division  and  brigade,  the 
grand  guards  are  especially  under  the  direction  of  a  field  officer  of  the 
day  in  eaih  brigade.  In  case  of  necessity,  captains  may  be  added  to 
the  roster  of  lieutenant-colonels  and  majors  for  this  detail. 

Grand  guards  usually  mount  at  the  same  time  as  the  other  guards, 
but  may  mount  before  daybreak  if  the  general  of  brigade  thinks  it 
necessary  to  double  the  outposts  at  this  time.  In  this  case  they  assem- 
ble and  march  without  noise,  and  during  the  march  throw  out  scouts; 
this  precaution  should  always  be  taken  in  the  first  posting  of  a  grand 
guard.  The  doubling  of  guards  weakens  the  corps  and  fatigues  the 
men,  and  should  seldom  be  resorted  to,  and  never  when  preparing 
to  march  or  fight. 

755.  A  grand  guard  is  conducted  to  its  post  in  the  first  instance  by 
the  field  officer  of  the  day,  guided  by  one  of  the  staff  oflBcers  who 
accompanied  the  general  in  his  reconnoissance.  After  the  post  has 
been  established,  the  commander  sends  to  the  field  officer  of  the  dfty, 
when  necessary,  a  soldier  of  the  guard  to  guide  the  relieving  guard 
to  the  post.  He  also  sends  to  him  in  the  evening  a  corporal  or  trusty 
man  of  the  guard,  for  the  note  containing  the  parole  and  countersign, 
and  sends  them  before  dark  to  the  outposts.  He  will  not  suS'er  his 
guard  to  be  relieved  except  by  a  guard  of  the  brigade,  or  by  special 
orders  from  competent  authority. 

If  there  is  no  pass  to  be  observed  or  defended,  the  grand  guards  are 
placed  near  the  centre  of  the  ground  they  are  to  observe,  on  sheltered, 
and,  if  possible,  high  grouud.  the  better  to  conceal  their  strength  and 
observe  the  enemy:  they  ought  not  to  be  placed  near  the  edge  of  a 
wood.  When,  during  the  day,  they  are  placed  very  near,  or  in  sight  of 
the  enemy,  they  fall  back  at  night  on  parts  selected  farther  to  the  rear. 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  475 

After  a  granrl  guard  is  posted,  the  first  care  of  the  commander  and  of 
the  fiell  officer  of  the  day  is  to  get  news  of  the  enemy:  then  to  recon- 
noitre bis  position,  and  the  roads,  bridges,  fords  and  defiles.  This 
reconnoissance  determines  the  force  and  position  of  the  outposts  and 
their  sentinels  day  and  night.  These  posts,  when  of  infantry,  should 
be  about  200  paces  in  front  of  the  line  of  grand  guards,  and  of  cavalry 
from  600  to  800  :  and  are  commanded  by  officers  or  non-commissioned 
officers,  according  to  their  importance.  Cavalry  posts  may  be  relieved 
every  four  or  eight  hours. 

The  commander  of  a  griuid  guard  receives  detailed  instructions 
from  the  general  and  field  officers  of  the  day  of  the  brigade,  and 
instructs  the  commanders  of  the  outposts  as  to  their  duties,  and  the 
arrangements  for  the  defence  or  retreat.  The  commanders  of  grand 
guards  may,  in  urgent  cases,  change  the  positions  of  the  outposts. 
If  the  outposts  are  to  change  their  position  at  night,  they  wait  until 
the  grand  guard  has  gotten  its  position,  and  darkness  hides  their 
movements  from  the  enemy;  then  march  silently  and  rapidly  under 
charge  of  an  officer. 

In  detached  corps,  small  posts  of  picked  men  are  at  night  sent  for- 
ward on  the  roads  by  which  the  enemy  may  attack  or  turn  the  position. 
They  watch  the  forks  of  the  roads,  keep  silence,  conceal  themselves, 
light  no  fires,  and  often  change  place.  They  announce  the  approach  of 
an  enemy  by  signals  agreed  upon,  and  retreat,  by  routes  examined 
during  the  day,  to  places  selected,  and  rejoin  the  guard  at  daybreak. 

Grand  guards  have  special  orders  in  each  case,  and  the  following  in 
all  cases:  to  inform  the  nearest  posts  and  the  field  officer  of  the  day,  or 
the  general  of  brigade,  of  the  march  and  movements  of  the  enemy,  and 
of  the  attacks  they  receive  or  fear;  to  examine  every  person  passing 
near  the  post,  particularly  those  coming  from  without;  to  arrest  suspi- 
cious persons,  and  all  soldiers  and  camp-followers  who  try  to  pass 
out  without  permission,  and  to  send  to  the  general,  unless  otherwise 
directed,  all  country  people  who  come  in. 

756.  All  out-guards  stand  to  arms  at  night  on  the  approach  of  patrols, 
rounds,  or  other  parties ;  the  sentinel  over  the  arms  will  call  them  out. 

The  sentinels  and  videttes  are  placed  on  points  from  which  they  can 
see  farthest,  taking  care  not  to  break  their  connection  with  each  other 
or  with  their  posts.  They  are  concealed  from  the  enemy  as  much  as 
possible  by  walls,  or  trees,  or  elevated  ground.  It  is  generally  even  of 
more  advantage  not  to  be  seen  than  to  see  far.  They  should  not  be 
placed  near  covers,  where  the  enemy  may  capture  them.  A  sentinel 
should  always  be  ready  to  fire  ;  videttes  carry  their  carbines  or  pistols 
in  their  hands.  A  sentinel  must  be  sure  of  the  presence  of  an  enemy 
before  he  fires ;  once  satisfied  of  that,  he  must  fire,  though  all  defence 


476  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

on  his  part  be  useless,  as  the  safety  of  the  post  may  depend  on  it. 
Sentinels  fire  on  all  persons  deserting  to  the  enemy. 

If  a  sentinel's  post  must  be  where  he  cannot  communicate  with  tjie 
guard,  a  corporal  and  three  men  are  detached  for  it,  or  the  sentinels 
are  doubled,  that  one  may  communicate  with  the  guard.  During  the 
day  communication  may  be  made  by  signals,  such  as  raising  a  cap  or 
handkerchief.  At  night  sentinels  are  placed  on  low  ground,  the  better 
to  see  objects  against  the  sky. 

To  lessen  the  duty  of  rounds,  and  keep  more  men  on  the  alert  at 
night,  sentinels  on  outposts  are  relieved  every  hour.  To  prevent  senti- 
nels from  being  surprised,  it  is  sometimes  well  to  precede  the  counter- 
sign by  signals,  such  as  striking  the  musket  with  the  hand,  striking 
the  hands  together,  etc. 

On  the  approach  of  any  one  at  night,  the  outpost  sentinel  orders — 
"Halt .'"  If  the  order  is  not  obeyed,  after  being  repeated  once,  he  fires. 
If  obeyed,  he  calls — "Who  goes  there  t"  If  answered — "Rounds,"  or 
"Patrol,"  he  says — "Advance  trt'th  the  countersign."  If  more  than  one 
advance  at  the  same  time,  or  the  person  who  advances  fails  to  give  the 
countersign  or  signal  agreed  on.  the  sentinel  fires  and  falls  back  on  his 
guard.  The  sentinel  over  the  arms,  as  soon  as  hin  hail  is  answered, 
turns  out  the  guard,  and  the  corporal  goes  to  reconnoitre.  When  it  is 
desirable  to  hide  the  position  of  the  sentinel  from  the  enemy,  the  hail 
is  replaced  by  hi'i/iki/h ;  the  sentinels  give  the  signal,  and  those  ap- 
proaching the  counter  signal. 

With  raw  troops,  or  when  the  li,:i^ht  troops  of  the  enemy  are  numer- 
ous and  active,  and  when  the  country  is  broken  or  wooded,  the  night 
stormy  or  dark,  sentinels  should  be  doubled.  In  tljis  case,  while  one 
watches,  the  other,  called  a  Jlying  sentinel,  moves  about,  examining  the 
paths  and  hollows. 

The  commanders  of  grand  guards  visit  the  sentinels  often  ;  change 
their  position  when  necessary ;  make  them  repeat  their  orders :  teach 
them  under  what  circumstances  and  at  what  signals  to  retire,  and  par- 
ticularly not  to  fall  back  directly  on  their  guard,  if  pursued,  )jut  to 
lead  the  enemy  in  a  circuit. 

757.  At  night  half  the  men  of  the  grand  guard  off  post  watch  under 
arms,  while  the  rest  lie  down,  arms  by  their  side.  The  horses  are 
always  bridled:  the  horsemen  hold  the  reins  and  must  not  sleep.  An 
hour  before  break  of  day,  infantry  grand  guards  stand  to  arms,  and 
cavalry  mount.  At  the  outposts  some  of  the  infantry  are  all  night 
under  arms,  some  of  the  cavalry  on  horseback. 

The  commander  of  a  grand  guard  regulates  the  numbers,  the  hours, 
and  the  march  of  patrols  and  rounds,  according  to  the  strength  of  his 
CQjnmand  and  the  necessity  for  precaution  :  and,  accompanied  by  those 


HONORS    PAID    BY    THE    TROOPS,  ETC.  477 

who  are  to  command  the  patrols  and  rounds  during  the  night,  he  will 
reconnoitre  all  the  routes  they  are  to  follow.  Patrols  and  rounds 
march  slowly,  in  silence,  and  with  great  precaution:  halt  frequently  to 
listen  and  examine  the  ground.  The  rounds  consist  of  an  officer  or 
non-commissioned  officer,  and  two  or  three  men.  Toward  the  break  of 
day  the  patrols  ought  to  be  more  frequent,  and  sent  to  greater  dis- 
tances. They  examine  the  hollow  ways  and  ground  likelj'  to  conceal 
an  enemy,  but  with  great  caution,  to  avoid  being  cut  off  or  engaged  in 
an  unequal  combat;  if  they  meet  the  enemy,  they  fire  and  attempt  to 
stop  his  march.  While  the  patrols  are  out,  the  outposts  are  under 
arms. 

Cavalry  patrols  should  examine  the  country  to  a  greater  distance 
than  infantry,  and  report  to  the  infantry  guard  everything  they  ob- 
serve. The  morning  patrols  and  scouts  do  not  return  until  broad  day- 
light; and  when  they  return  the  night  sentinels  are  withdrawn  and 
the  posts  for  the  day  resumed. 

Ou  their  return  commanders  of  patrols  report  in  regard  to  the 
ground  and  everything  they  have  observed  of  the  movements  of  the 
enemy  or  of  his  posts,  aud  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard  reports 
to  the  field  officers  of  the  day.  The  fires  of  grand  guards  should  be 
hidden  by  a  wall,  ditch,  or  other  screen.  To  deceive  the  enemy,  fires 
are  sometimes  made  on  unoccupied  ground.  Fire  are  not  permitted  at 
small  pt^s  liable  to  surprise. 

If  a  body  of  troops  attempt  to  enter  the  camp  at  night,  unless  their 
arrival  has  been  announced,  or  the  commander  is  known  to,  or  is  the 
hearer  of  a  written  order  to  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard,  he 
stops  them,  and  sends  the  command  under  escort  to  the  field  officer  of 
the  day,  and  at  the  same  time  warns  the  posts  near  him. 

Bearers  of  flags  are  not  permitted  to  pass  the  outer  chain  of  senti- 
nels :  their  faces  are  turned  from  the  post  or  army  ;  if  necessary,  their 
eyes  are  bandaged ;  a  non-commissioned  officer  stays  with  them  to 
prevent  indiscretion  on  the  part  of  sentinels. 

Tlie  commander  of  the  guard  receipts  for  dispatches,  and  sends  them 
to  the  field  officer  of  the  day  or  general  of  brigade,  and  dismisses  the 
bearer  :  but  if  he  has  discovered  what  ought  to  be  concealed  from 
the  enemj',  he  is  detained  as  long  as  necessary. 

Deserters  are  disarmed  at  the  outposts,  and  sent  to  the  commander 
of  the  grand  guard,  who  gets  from  them  all  the  information  he  can 
concerning  the  enemy.  "  If  many  come  at  night,  they  are  received 
cautiously,  a  few  at  a  time.  They  are  sent  in  the  morning  to  the  field 
officer  of  the  day,  or  to  the  nearest  post  or  camp,  to  be  conducted  to 
the  general  of  the  brigade.  All  suspected  persons  are  secreted  by  the 
commanders  of  the  outposts. 


478  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


^• 


Article    XIII. 

DUTIES   OF   CAPTAINS  — COMPANIES  — DUTIES  IN 
CAMP  AND  GARRISON,   ETC. 

758.  Captains  or  commaudevs  of  companies  fill  one  of  the  most 
important  stations  in  the  service,  when  thej'  arc  viewed  in  relation  to 
the  direct  influence  they  exercise  upon  the  soldiery  ;  to  them  attaches 
the  hifrh  responsibility  of  the  instruction,  jjood  order,  efficiency,  and 
discipline  of  their  companies  ;  and  no  one  should  be  willing  to  accept 
the  post  who  is  not  qualified,  or  ready  to  qualify  himself,  for  a  faithful 
discharsre  of  all  the  duties  of  the  office. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  ca])tain  to  make  himself  familiar  with  tactics, 
at  least  so  much  of  it  as  will  enaVilc  him  to  command  his  company 
properly  in  every  situation:  and  to  become  perfectly  acquainted  with 
its  interior  management. 

In  the  case  of  a  vacancy  in  the  office  of  captain,  or  in  his  absence, 
the  command  of  the  company  devolves  on  the  officer  next  in  rank. 
Captains  should  require  their  lieutenants  to  assist  them  in  the  per- 
formance of  all  duties,  the  knowledge  thus  acquired  being  essential  to 
every  company  officer. 

In  the  volunteers  and  militia,  the  captain  and  lieutenant  are  elected 
by  the  company  after  its  organization  ;  the  non-commissioned  officers 
are  cither  elected  in  the  same  way  :  or  are  selected  by  the  captain. 

759.  Arms  and  accoutrements  are  issued  by  order  of  the  adjutant- 
generaf  to  volunteer  companies  after  their  organization,  and  to  such  of 
the  militia  as  the  Governor  may  deem  it  proper  to  arm.  Before  a  vol- 
unteer company  can  receive  its  arms,  the  captain  mast  procure  the 
following  certificate  from  the  colonel  of  the  regiment  to  which  he  is 
attached  : 

Form  of  Inspection  Return  to  enable  a    Volunteer  Company  to 
receive  Public  Arms. 

I,  A.  B.,  commandant  of  the  Regiment  of  Virginia  Militia, 

do  hereby  certify,  that  on  the  day  of ,  I  mustered  and  in- 
spected the  (troop  of  cava'ry,  companj'  of  artiller}',  company  of  light 


DUTIES    OF   CAPTAINS,    COMPANIES,    ETC.  479 

infantry  or  riflemen,  as  the  fact  may  be)  commanded  by  Captain 

,  (attached   to  or  belonging:  to,  as   the  fact  may  be)  the 

said  regiment ;  at  which  muster  and  inspection  there  were  of  the  said 
company men,  fully  and  completely  uniformed,  in  the  mode  pre- 
scribed by  law. 

Given  under  my  hand  th'iH dtty  of ,  18 — .^ 

760.  The  militia  laws  of  many  of  the  States  permit  volunteer  com- 
panies to  choose  their  own  uniforms  ;  all  experience  proves  that  the 
plainest  and  simplest  uniform  is  the  best  for  service.  It  is  a  mistake 
to  suppose  that  handsome  and  expensive  uniforms  are  to  be  preferred  ; 
the  best  uniform  is  that  which  combines  comfort,  appropriateness  and 
durability. 

Plain  and  sul)stantial  overcoats,  with  ca]>es,  should  always  form  a  part 
of  the  uniform;  and  some  simple  fatigue  dress,  to  be  worn  when  off 
duty,  or  on  fatigue,  will  always  be  found  to  be  a  great  saving  to  the 
uniform. 

Each  man  of  the  company  should  be  provided  with  a  knapsack  for 
his  clothing,  a  haversack  for  his  rations,  and  one  or  two  thick  blankets. 
In  addition,  there  should  be  one  bedsack  for  every  two  men,  to  be  made 
of  substantial  linen  or  cotton  goods  ;  it  should  be  made  about  six  and 
a  half  feet  long,  by  three  and  half  feet  wide,  sewed  up  at  both  ends, 
and  having  a  slit  in  the  centre,  provided  with  strings  to  tic  it  close,  so 
as  to  ])revent  the  straw  working  out.  The  haversack  is  made  of  white 
linen  or  cotton  duck;  it  is  worn  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side 
it  should  be  large  enough  to  contain  at  least  three  day's  rations  of  bread 
and  meat,  and  would  be  much  improved  by  having  a  small  tin  box  in 
it  large  enough  to  contain  the  meat  ration.  The  company  should  at  all 
times  be  supplied  Avith  tents,  etc.,  for  service  in  the  tield  :  together  with 
the  requisite  number  of  camp  kettles,  tin  table  furniture,  etc. 

761.  There  are  several  forms  of  tents — the  common  tent,  covering  an 
area  of  about  seven  feet  square,  and  capable  of  accommodating  from 
five  to  six  men  ;  the  wall  tent,  usually  used  by  officers,  about  nine  feet 
square,  and  having  its  roof  protected  by  a  second  piece  of  canvas, 
known  as  the  ",/^3/;"  the  Sibley  tent,  which  is  conical  in  shape,  has 
but  a  single  central  pole,  with  an  arrangement  at  the  top  to  admit  of  a 
fire  in  the  centre  for  cooking  purposes,  or  for  comfort  in  cold  weather, 
and  sufficiently  large  to  accommodate  from  twelve  to  fifteen  men  ;  and 
the  shelter  tent  of  the  French.  The  Sibley  tent  is  in  general  use  in  the 
U.  S.  service. 

A  new  invention  has   been  lately  introduced  into  the  U.  S.  service, 


1  This  is  the  Virp;inin  form  ;  each  State  has  its  own  form. 


480  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

which  promises  to  be  very  useful ;  it  is  called  the  tent  knapsack,  and 
serves  the  purpose  of  a  knapsack  on  the  march,  and  a  shelter  tent  when 
in  camp.  It  is  a  piece  of  gutta-])erchii,  five  feet  three  inches  long,  and 
three  feet  eight  inches  wide,  with  double  edges  on  one  side,  and  brass 
studs  and  button  holes  along  two  edges,  and  slraps  and  buckles  on 
the  fourth  ;  with  two  sticks,  three  feet  eight  inches  long,  by  one  and 
a  half  inches  in  diameter,  and  a  small  cord.  When  used  as  a  knap- 
sack, the  clothing  is  packed  in  a  cotton  bag,  and  the  gutta-perch  sheet 
is  folded  around  it,  lapping  at  the  ends.  The  clothing  is  thus  protected 
by  two  or  three  thicknesses  of  gutta-percha;  the  knapsack  adapts  itself 
to  the  size  of  the  contents,  so  that  a  compact  and  portable  bundle  cau 
be  made,  whether  the  "kit"  be  entire  or  not;  and  with  the  cotton  bag, 
it  forms  a  convenient,  commodious,  and  desirable  receptacle  for  all  a 
soldier's  clothing  and  necessaries. 

The  studs  and  eyelets  along  two  edges  of  the  tent  knapsack  arc  for 
the  purpose  of  fastening  a  number  of  them  together,  and  thus  making 
a  large  sheet  which  may  be  used  as  a  shelter  tent.  When  used,  the 
sheet  is  to  bo  stretched  on  a  cord  supported  by  two  sticks,  or  by  two 
rillcs,  muskets,  or  carbines,  and  pinned  down  at  the  sides  with  small 
pins.  The  sheet  of  four  knapsacks  is  ten  feet  six  inclies  lung,  and  seven 
feet  four  inches  wide,  and  when  pitched  on  a  rope  four  feet  four  inches 
above  the  ground,  covers  a  horizontal  space  of  six  feet  six  inches  wide, 
and  seven  feet  four  inches  long,  which  will  accommodate  from  five  to 
seven  men.  Or  four  of  these  knaj^sacks  may  be  united,  an  edge  pinned 
to  the  grountl.  and  the  opposite  one  secured  to  a  pole  facing  a  lire,  form- 
ing a  half-fuvtd  cdinji. 

762.  Every  man  should  be  ]iruvided  with  the  following  articles  at  all 
times,  such  as  are  not  on  the  person  to  be  kept  in  the  knapsack  : 

Two  woollen  undershirts. 

Two  ])air  thick  cotton  drawers. 

Four  pair  woollen  socks. 

Two  pair  stout  shoes,  with  broad,  thick  soles,  for  footmen. 

One  pair  boots,  and  one  pair  shoes,  for  horsemen. 

Towels,  handkerchiefs,  comb  and  brush,  and  tooth-brush.  Stout 
linen  thread,  large  needles,  a  bit  of  wax.  a  few  buttons,  paper  of  pins, 
and  a  thimble,  all  contained  in  a  small  buckskin  or  stout  cloth  bag. 

In  addition,  every  man  should  be  supplied  with  a  tin  plate ;  quart 
cup  with  the  handle  well  riveted  on,  so  as  to  serve  the  soldier  for 
making  his  coffee,  etc.,  in  case  of  necessity,  as  well  as  for  an  ordinary 
drinking  cup :  knife,  fork,  and  spoon.  The  plate  may  be  carried  in 
the  knapsack,  or  on  the  outside  of  it  under  the  straps,  or  all  the  plates 
of  the  company  may  be  packed  in  the  camp-kettles ;  the  cup  may  be 
carried  on  the  waist  belt  or  on  the  kmipsack  strap,  and  the  knife,  fork, 


DUTIES    OF    CAPTAINS,    COMPANIES,    ETC.  481 

and  spoon  should  be  carried  in  a  leathern  gheath  which  slips  on  to  the 
waist  bcdfi,  to  be  worn  in  front,  and  on  the  left  of  the  centre  of 
the  body. 

Every  company  should  be  provided  with  a  small  chest,  partitioned  oflF 
into  several  compartments,  and  large  enough  to  contain  a  week  or  ten 
dajrs'  issue  of  the  small  rations,  such  as  beans,  rice,  coffee,  sugar,  salt, 
etc.  The  issues  of  bread,  pork,  etc.,  should  be  transported  in  the 
original  packages. 

When  a  militia  company  is  called  into  service,  the  captain  should,  at 
the  earliest  possible  moment,  have  it  properly  uniformed  and  equipped, 
and  taught  how  to  take  care  of  its  arms,  clothing,  etc.;  each  man 
should  be  provided  with  his  knapsack,  haversack,  blanket,  knife  and 
fork,  spoon,  tin  plate,  and  cup. 

Canteens  are  also  necessary  in  most  cases;  they  are  worn  over  the 
haversack. 

76.3.  The  captain  shall  cause  the  men  of  his  company  to  be  num- 
bered in  a  regular  series,  including  the  non-commissioned  officers,  and 
divided  into  several  squads,  each  to  be  put  under  the  charge  of  a  non- 
commissioned officer.  As  far  as  practicable,  the  men  of  each  squad 
are  quartered  together. 

Each  of  the  lieutenants  is  charged  with  a  squad  for  the  supervision 
of  its  order  and  cleanliness  ;  and  captains  should  require  their  subal- 
terns to  assist  them  in  the  performance  of  all  company  duties. 

The  utmost  attention  should  be  paid  by  captains  to  the  cleanliness 
of  their  men.  as  to  their  persons,  clothing,  arms,  accoutrements,  and 
also  as  to  tlicir  quarters  or  tents. 

The  name  of  each  soldier  should  be  labelled  on  his  bunk  in  quarters, 
and  his  company  number  should  be  placed  against  his  arms  and  accou- 
trements. 

The  arms  are  placed  in  arm-racks,  the  stoppers  in  the  muzzles,  the 
cocks  let  down,  and  the  bayonets  in  their  scabbards,  the  accoutrements 
suspended  over  the  arms,  and  the  swords  or  sabres,  when  these  are 
worn,  hung  up  by  the  belts  on  pegs. 

The  knapsack  of  each  man  should  be  placed  at  the  foot  of  his  bunk 
when  he  is  in  quarters,  packed  with  his  effects,  and  ready  to  be  slung  ,• 
the  overcoat  rolled,  strapped,  and  placed  under  the  knapsack;  the  cap 
on  a  shelf,  and  his  boots  well  cleaned.  Dirty  clothes  should  be  kept  in 
an  appropriate  part  of  the  knapsack  ;  nothing  to  be  put  under  the 
bedding. 

Cooking  utensils  and  table  furniture  should  be  clean,  and  fn  their 
appropriate  places ;  blacking  and  brushes  out  of  sight ;  the  fuel  in 
boxes. 

The  cleaning  up  should  take  place  at  least  once  a  week.  The  chiefs 
41 


482  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

of  squads  should  cause  bunks  and  bedding  to  be  overhauled,  floors 
cleaned,  and  arms,  accoutrements,  etc.,  all  put  in  order. 

Non-commissioned  officers,  in  charge  of  squads,  should  be  held  im- 
mediately responsible  that  their  men  observe  vrhat  is  prescribed  above  : 
that  they  wash  their  hands  and  faces  daily;  that  they  brush  or  comb 
their  heads  and  beards;  that  those  who  go  on  duty  put  their  arms, 
accoutrements,  dress,  etc.,  in  the  best  order. 

Commanders  of  companies  should  see  that  the  arms  and  accoutre- 
ments in  possession  of  the  men  are  always  kept  in  good  order,  and 
that  proper  care  is  taken  in  cleaning  them. 

Arms  should  not  be  taken  to  pieces  without  permission  of  an  officer. 
Bright  barrels  should  be  kept  clean  and  free  from  rust  without  polish- 
ing them;  care  shovild  be  taken  not  to  bruise  or  bend  the  barrel. 
After  firing,  wash  out  the  bore,  wipe  it  dry,  and  then  pass  a  bit  of 
cloth,  slightly  greased,  to  the  bottom.  In  these  operations,  a  rod  of 
wood  with  a  loop  on  one  end  is  to  be  used  instead  of  the  rammer. 
The  barrel,  when  not  in  use,  should  be  closed  with  a  stopper.  For 
exercise,  each  man  should  keep  himself  provided  with  a  piece  of  sole 
leather  to  fit  the  cap  or  countersink  of  the  hammer,  to  prevent  break- 
ing the  nipple. 

All  field  pieces  in  the  possession  of  artillery  companies  should  be 
kept  clean  and  dry  ;  their  vents  frequently  examined  to  sec  that 
they  are  clear  ;  the  elevating  screw  wiped  clean,  worked  and  oiled. 
When  tarpaulins  are  placed  over  them,  they  should  occasionally  be 
removed,  the  guns  and  carriages  brushed  off,  and,  if  damp,  allowed 
to  dry. 

The  implements  should  all  be  kept  clean  and  under  cover;  the 
harness  and  leather  articles  should  be  brushed  and  greased  with 
neat's-foot  oil  as  often  as  their  condition  requires  it,  and  if  they  have 
a  reddish  hue,  mix  a  little  lampblack  with  the  oil.  First  brush  the 
leather,  then  pass  over  it  a  sponge  wet  with  warm  water,  and  apply  the 
oil  before  the  leather  is  quite  dry. 

Arms  should  not  be  left  loaded  in  armories,  quarters,  or  tents,  or 
when  the  men  are  off  duty,  except  by  special  orders.  The  ammunition 
in  the  possession  of  the  men  should  be  inspected  frequently,  and  any 
damaged,  wasted,  or  lost  by  neglect,  should  be  paid  for. 

Knapsacks  should  be  black ;  they  should  be  marked  on  the  outside 
with  the  number  of  the  regiment,  and  on  the  inside  with  the  letter  of 
the  company,  and  the  number  of  the  soldier,  on  such  part  as  will 
readily  be  seen  at  inspections. 

Haversacks  should  be  marked  on  the  flap  with  the  number  and 
name  of  the  regiment,  the  letter  of  the  company,  and  the  number  of 
the  soldier. 


DUTIES    OF    CAPTAINS,    COMPANIES,    ETC.  483 

Both  officers  and  meu  should  wear  the  prescribed  uniform  in  camp  or 
garrison. 

In  camp  or  quarters,  the  officers  should  visit  the  kitchen  daily  and 
inspect  the  kettles,  food,  etc.,  and  at  all  times  carefully  attend  to  the 
messing  and  economy  of  their  companies. 

The  company  rations  are  usually  taken  charsre  of  by  the  orderly 
sergeant,  and  issued  daily  to  the  cooks  by  whom  they  are  i)repared 
and  served  to  the  company.  The  men  of  the  company  serve  in  turn 
as  cooks,  two  being  the  usual  number  serving  at  once.  When  iu  camp, 
the  men  present  tliemselves  at  meal  times  to  the  cooks,  who  issue  to 
each  man  in  turn  his  proper  allowance ;  in  garrison  or  quarters  the 
tables  arc  set  out,  and  the  cooks  place  each  man's  ration  on  his  plate, 
and  in  his  cup,  before  the  company  is  marched  in. 

When  not  actually  in  the  field  the  ration  is  in  most  cases  more  than 
sufficient,  so  that  by  care  on  the  part  of  the  orderly  sergeant  and  cooks, 
there  is  more  or  less  saved  on  the  rations  of  the  company  ;  this  saving 
is  sold  for  the  benefit  of  the  company,  and  constitutes  what  is  denomi- 
nated the  Conipniiif  Fund. 

DUTIES     IN     CAMP    AND     GARRISON. 

764.  The  duties  in  camp  and  garrit^on  are  to  be  conducted,  as  far  as 
practicable,  in  the  same  manner  and  on  the  same  principles. 

The  Rereille  is  the  signal  for  the  men  to  rise,  and  the  sentinels  to 
leave  off  challenging.  It  is  usually  sounded  at  dawn  of  day,  except 
when  the  troops  are  on  the  march,  when  the  signal  may  be  sounded  at 
a  much  earlier  hour.  The  men  form  on  their  company  parade  grounds, 
and  as  soon  as  the  reveille  ceases  the  rolls  are  called  by  the  orderly 
sergeants,  Kuj^eriniendcd  hy  <i  conuniHKioued  offi,rer. 

Immediately  after  the  roll  call  (after  stable  duty  in  the  cavalry  and 
light  artillery),  the  tents  or  quarters  should  be  put  iu  order  by  the 
men  of  the  companies,  superintended  by  chiefs  of  squads ;  the  parades, 
streets  of  the  camp,  etc.,  are  cleaned  by  the  iwUce  party  of  the  day, 
in  charge  of  a  non-commissioned  officer,  and  superintended  by  the 
officer  of  the  day,  and  the  guard  house  or  guard  tent  by  the  guard  or 
the  prisoners,  if  there  are  any. 

Breakfast  call  is  sounded  at  —  o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  is  the 
signal  for  breakfast. 

The  Troop  sounds  at  —  o'clock  in  the  morning  for  the  purpose  of 
assembling  the  men  for  duty,  inspection  at  guard  mounting,  and 
morning  dress  parade,  when  the  commanding  officer  commands  it. 

The  Sunjeonh  call  is  to  sound  or  beat  at  —  o'clock  in  the  morning, 
when  the  sick,  able  to   go  about,  are  conducted  to  the  hospital  by  the 


484  MANUAL   rOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILTTIA. 

first  sergeants  of  companies,  who  hand  to  the  surgeon  a  list  of  all  the 
sick  in  the  company. 

After  the  surgeon  has  passed  upon  the  sick,  the  first  sergeants 
proceed  to  make  off"  the  morning  reports  of  their  companies,  which, 
after  being  signed  by  their  captains,  are  taken  to  regimental  head- 
quarters at  first  sergeant's  call. 

The  morning  report  of  the  company  is  made  off  in  a  book  kept  for 
that  purpose,  called  the  morning  rrqinrt  Jiook,  and  in  accordance  with 
Form  No.  1.  The  rulings  extend  across  both  pages  of  the  book  when 
open;  the  report  occupies  but  a  single  line  each  morning,  so  that  if 
the  number  of  lines  are  sufficient,  a  single  heading  will  sufiice  far  the 
reports  of  an  entire  month. 

The  Dinner  call  is  sounded  at  —  o'clock,  and  is  the  signal  for 
dinner. 

The  Retreat  is  sounded  at  sunset,  when  there  is  a  roll  call  and  the 
orders  for  the  day  are  read.  When  the  weather  permits,  there  is  a 
dress  parade  at  retreat,  and  the  orders  are  read  out  at  the  close  of  it. 
Each  regiment  or  battalion  has  an  independent  parade,  commanded 
by  the  colonel. 

The  Tattoo  is  sounded  at  —  o'clock  in  the  evening,  when  the  rolls 
are  called  ;  no  soldier  is  allowed  to  be  out  of  his  tent  or  quarters  after 
this  hour,  without  special  permission. 

In  the  cavalry.  Stable  calls  are  sounded  immediately  after  reveille, 
and  an  hour  and  a  half  before  retreat;  Water  calls  at  the  hours 
directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

The  Drummers'  call  is  beaten  by  the  drums  of  the  police  guard  five 
minutes  before  the  time  of  beating  the  stated  calls,  when  the  field 
music  assembles  before  the  colors  of  their  respective  regiments,  and  as 
soon  as  the  beat  begins  on  the  right  is  taken  up  along  the  line. 

Calls  for  drills  are  sounded  at  such  hours  as  the  commanding  oflficer 
may  designate. 

765.  Daily  duties  must  be  announced  in  order,  and  the  oflicers  to 
perform  them  are  detailed  according  to  the  rules  of  the  roster. 

The  number  and  rank  of  the  officers  for  daily  duty,  are  to  be  regu- 
ulated  by  the  strength  and  circumstances  of  the  camp  or  garrison; 
the  officers  detailed  for  duty  should  remain  in  or  about  the  camp  or 
garrison  during  their  tours  of  duty. 

Besides  the  officers  detailed  for  guard  duty,  the  officers  for  daily 
duties  in  large  commands  are  as  follows  : 

A  General  officer  of  the  dai/  for  each  division  :  a  field  officer  of  the 
day  for  each  brigade;  and  a  regimental  officer  of  the  day  for  each 
regiment. 

In  camps  or  garrisons  of  one  regiment  or  less,  the  officers  are  as 
follows  ;   officer  of  the  day  and   officer  of  the  guard. 


DUTIES    OF    CAPTAINS,    COMPANIES,    ETC.  485 

The  General,  of  the  <friy  is  to  superintend  the  regularity  and  disci- 
pline of  the  camp  of  the  division,  visit  the  guards  and  outposts,  call 
out  and  inspect  the  guards  as  often  and  at  such  times  as  he  thinks 
proper  ;  to  receive  all  reports  of  guards,  and  make  immediate  commu- 
nication of  any  extraordinary  circumstances  to  his  commanding 
officer,  or  to  the  General-in-chief. 

The  Field  offlfer  of  the  day  has  the  immediate  superintendence  of 
the  camp  of  the  brigade;  he  is  to  be  present  at  the  mounting  and 
dismounting  of  the  brigade  or  grand  guards,*  he  is  to  call  them  out 
to  inspect  them;  to  order  such  patrols,  posts  and  outposts  as  may  be 
necessary ;  to  see  that  the  grand  guard  is  vigilant,  that  none  are 
absent,  and  that  their  arms  and  accoutrements  are  in  order;  that  the 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  acquainted  witli  their  duty, 
and  that  the  sentries  arc  properly  posted,  and  have  received  proper 
orders. 

The  Jlct/iiiieittal  o/firer  of  the  dai/  in  each  regiment,  and  in  commands 
less  than  a  regiment,  is  charged  with  the  order  and  cleanliness  of  the 
camp  or  garrison  ;  he  has  the  calls  beaten  by  the  drummer  of  the  police 
guard;  he  attends  the  parading  of  the  guards,  and  orders  the  roll  to  be 
called  frequently'  and  at  unexpected  periods,  and  reports  everything 
extraordinary  to  the  commander  of  the  garrison  or  camp;  he  is  to  visit 
the  hospital  at  various  liours,  and  make  a  report  of  its  state  to  the 
commanding  officer.  He  should  satisfy  himself  frequently  during  the 
night,  of  the  vigilance  of  the  police  guard,  and  prescribe  patrols  and 
rounds  to  be  made  by  the  officer  of  the  guard.  He  should  give  atten- 
tion to  the  condition  of  the  sinks,  the  regulation  of  the  camp  fires,  the 
removal  of  rubbish,  etc.,  and  for  these  purposes  a  fatigue  party  will  be 
furnished  him  when  necessary. 

CAMPS. 
Camps  of  infantry. 

766.  Each  company  has  its  tents  in  two  files,  facing  on  a  street  per- 
pendicular to  the  color  line.  The  width  of  the  streot  depends  on  the 
front  of  the  camp,  but  should  not  be  less  than  five  paces.  The  interval 
between  the  ranks  of  tents  is  two  paces;  between  the  files  of  tents  of 
adjacent  companies,  two  paces  ;  between  regiments,  twenty-two  paces. 

The  color  line  is  ten  paces  in  front  of  the  front  rank  of  tents.  The 
kitchens  are  twenty  paces  behind  the  rear  rank  of  company  tents  ;  the 
non-commissioned  staif  and  sutler,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  kitch- 
ens ;  the  company  otficers,  twenty  paces  farther  in  rear:  and  the  field 
and  statf,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  company  officers. 


486  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  company  officers  are  in  rear  of  their  respective  companies  ;  the 
captains  on  the  right. 

The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  are  near  the  centre  of  the  line  of 
field  and  stafFj  the  adjutant,  a  major  and  surgeon,  on  the  right;  the 
quartermaster,  a  major  and  assistant  surgeon,  on  the  left. 

The  police  guard  is  at  the  centre  of  the  line  of  the  non-commissioned 
staff,  the  tents  facing  to  the  front,  the  stacks  of  arms  on  the  left. 

The  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is  about  200  paces  in  front  of 
the  color  line,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  regiment  or  on  the  best 
ground ;  the  prisoners'  tent  about  four  paces  in  rear.  In  a  regiment  of 
the  second  line,  the  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is  200  paces  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  its  field  and  staff. 

The  horses  of  the  staff  officers  and  of  the  baggage  train  are  twenty- 
five  paces  in  rear  of  the  tents  of  the  field  and  staff;  the  v^agons  are 
parked  on  the  same  line,  and  the  men  of  the  train  camped  near  them. 

The  sinks  of  the  men  are  150  paces  in  front  of  the  color  line — those 
of  the  officers  100  paces  in  rear  of  the  train.  Both  are  concealed  by 
bushes.  When  convenient,  the  sinks  of  the  men  may  be  placed  in  rear 
or  on  a  flank.  A  portion  of  the  earth  dug  out  for  sinks  to  be  thrown 
back  occasionally. 

The  front  of  the  camp  of  a  regiment  of  1,000  men  in  two  ranks  will 
be  400  paces,  or  one-fifth  less  paces  than  the  number  of  files,  if  the 
camp  is  to  have  the  same  front  as  the  troops  in  order  of  battle.  But 
the  front  may  be  reduced  to  190  paces  by  narrowing  the  company 
streets  .to  five  paces;  and  if  it  be  desirable  to  reduce  the  front  still 
more,  the  tents  of  companies  may  be  pitched  in  single  file — those  of  a 
division  facing  on  the  same  street. 

Camp  of  cavalry. 

767.  In  the  cavalry,  each  company  has  one  file  of  tents — the  tents 
opening  on  the  street  facing  the  left  of  the  camp. 

The  horses  of  each  company  are  placed  in  a  single  file,  facing  the 
opening  of  the  tents,  and  are  fastened  to  pickets  planted  firmly  in  the 
ground,  from  three  to  six  paces  from  the  tents  of  the  troops. 

The  interval  between  the  file  of  tents  should  be  such  that,  the  regi- 
ment being  broken  into  column  of  companies,  each  company  should  be 
on  the  extension  of  the  line  on  which  the  horses  are  to  be  picketed. 

The  streets  separating  the  squadrons  are  wider  than  those  between 
the  companies  by  the  interval  separating  squadrons  in  line ;  these  in- 
tervals are  kept  free  from  any  obstruction  throughout  the  camp. 

The  horses  of  the  rear  rank  are  placed  on  the  left  of  those  of  their 
file-leaders. 


DUTIES    OF    CAPTAINS,    COMPANIES,    ETC.  487 

The  horses  of  the  lieutenants  are  placed  on  the  right  of  their  pla- 
toons;   those  of  the  captains  on  the  right  of  tl>e  company. 

Each  horse  occupies  a  space  of  about  two  paces.  The  number  of 
horses  in  the  company  fixes  the  depth  of  the  camp,  and  the  distance 
between  the  files  of  tents;  the  forage  is  placed  between  the  tents. 

The  kitchens  are  twenty  paces  in  front  of  each  file  of  tents. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  are  in  the  tents  of  the  front  rank. 
Camp-followers,  teamsters,  etc.,  are  in  the  rear  rank.  The  police 
guard  in  the  rear  rank,  near  the  centre  of  the  regiment. 

The  tents  of  the  lieutenants  are  thirty  paces  in  I'car  of  the  file  of 
their  company ;  the  tents  of  the  captains  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
lieutenants. 

The  colonel's  tent  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  captains,  near  the  centre 
of  the  regiment;  the  lieutenant-colonel  on  his  right;  the  adjutant  on 
his  left;  the  majors  on  the  same  line,  opposite  the  second  company  on 
the  right  and  left;  the  surgeon  on  the  left  of  the  adjutant. 

The  field  and  staflf  have  their  horses  on  the  left  of  their  tents,  on  the 
same  line  with  the  company  horses;  sick  horses  are  placed  in  one  line 
on  the  right  or  left  of  the  canip.  The  men  who  attend  them  have  a 
separate  file  of  tents;  the  forges  and  wagons  in  roar  of  this  file.  The 
horses  of  the  train  and  of  camp-followers  are  in  one  or  more  files 
extending  to  the  rear,  behind  the  right  or  left  squadron.  The  advanced 
post  of  the  police  guard  is  two  hundred  paces  in  front,  opposite  the 
centre  of  the  regiment:  tlie  horses  in  one  or  more  files. 

The  sinks  for  the  men  are  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front — those 
for  officers  one  hundred  paces  in  rear  of  the  camp. 

Camp  of  artillery.  ^ 

768.  The  artillery  is  encamped  near  the  troops  to  which  it  is 
attached,  so  as  to  be  protected  from  attack,  and  to  contribute  to  the 
defence  of  the  camp.  Sentinels  for  the  park  are  furnished  by  the  artil- 
lery, and,  when  necessary,  by  the  other  troops. 

For  a  battery  of  six  pieces  the  tents  are  in  three  files — one  for  each 
section;  distance  between  the  ranks  of  tents  fifteen  paces;  tents  open- 
ing to  the  front.  The  horses  of  each  section  are  picketed  in  the  file, 
ten  paces  to  the  left  of  the  file  of  tents.  In  the  horse  artillery,  or  if 
the  number  of  horses  makes  it  necessary,  the  horses  are  in  two  files  on 
the  right  and  left  of  the  file  of  tents.  The  kitchens  are  twenty-five 
paces  in  front  of  the  front  rank  of  tents.  The  tents  of  the  officers  are 
in  the  opposite  files  of  company  tents,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear 
rank — the  captain  on  the  right,  the  lieutenants  on  the  left. 

The  park  is  opposite  the  centre  of  the  camp,  forty  paces  in   rear  of 


488  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  officers*  tents.  The  carriages  in  files  four  paces  apart;  distance 
between  ranks  of  carriages  sufficient  for  the  horses  when  harnessed  to 
them;  the  park  guard  is  twenty-five  paces  in  rear  of  the  park.  The 
sinks  for  the  men  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front;  for  the  officers 
one  hundred  paces  in  rear.     The  harness  is  in  the  tents  of  the  men. 

BIVOUACS. 

769.  A  regiment  of  cavalry  being  in  order  of  battle,  in  rear  of  the 
ground  to  be  occupied,  the  colonel  breaks  it  by  platoons  to  the  right. 
The  horses  of  each  platoon  are  placed  in  a  single  row,  and  fastened  as 
prescribed  for  camps;  near  the  enemy  they  remain  saddled  all  night, 
with  slackened  girths.  The  arms  are  at  first  stacked  in  rear  of  each 
row  of  horses;  the  sabres,  with  the  bridles  hung  on  them,  are  placed 
against  the  stacks. 

The  forage  is  placed  on  the  right  of  each  row  of  horses.  Two  stable- 
guards  for  each  platoon  watch  the  horses. 

A  fire  for  each  platoon  is  made  near  the  color  line,  twenty  paces  to 
the  left  of  the  row  of  horses.  A  shelter  is  made  for  the  men  around 
the  fire,  if  possible,  and  each  man  then  stands  his  arms  and  bridle 
against  the  shelter. 

The  fires  and  shelter  for  the  officers  are  placed  in  rear  of  the  line  of 
those  for  the  men. 

The  interval  between  the  squadrons  must  be  without  obstruction 
throughout  the  whole  depth  of  the  bivouac. 

The  interval  between  the  shelters  should  be  such  that  the  platoons 
can  take  up  a  line  of  battle  freely  to  the  front  or  rear. 

The  distance  from  the  enemy  decides  the  manner  in  which  the  horses 
are  to  be  fed  and  led  to  water.  When  it  is  permitted  to  unsaddle,  the 
saddles  are  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  horses. 

In  infantry,  the  fires  are  made  in  rear  of  the  color  line,  on  the 
ground  that  would  be  occupied  by  the  tents  in  camp.  The  companies 
are  placed  around  thet^,  and,  if  possible,  construct  shelters.  When 
liable  to  surprise,  the  infantry  should  stand  to  arms  at  daybreak,  and 
the  cavalry  mount  until  the  return  of  the  reconnoitering  parties.  If 
the  arms  are  to  be  taken  apart  to  clean,  it  must  be  done  by  detach- 
ments, successively. 

CANTONMENTS. 

770.  The  cavalry  should  be  placed  under  shelter  whenever  the  dis- 
tance from  the  enemy,  and  from  the  ground  where  the  troops  are  to  form 
for  battle,  permit  it.  Taverns  and  farm-houses,  with  large  stables  and 
free  access,  are  selected  for  quartering  them. 


DUTIES    OF    CAPTAINS,    COMPANIES,    ETC.  489 

The  colonel  indicates  the  place  of  assembling  iu  case  of  alarm.  It 
should  generally  be  outside  the  cantonment;  the  egress  from  it  should 
be  free;  the  retreat  upon  the  other  positions  secure,  and  roads  leading 
to  it  on  the  side  of  the  enemy  obstructed. 

The  necessary  orders  being  given,  as  in  establishing  a  camp,  the 
picket  and  grand  guards  are  posted.  ,A  sentinel  may  be  placed  on  a 
steeple  or  high  house,  and  then  the  troops  are  marched  to  the  quarters. 
The  men  sleep  in  the  stables,  if  it  is  thought  necessary. 

The  above  applies  in  the  main  to  infantry.  Near  the  enemy,  com- 
panies or  platoons  should  be  collected,  as  much  as  i)ossiblc,  in  the  same 
houses.  If  companies  must  be  separated,  they  should  be  divided  by 
platoons  or  squads.     All  take  arms  at  daybreak. 

When  cavalry  and  infantry  canton  together,  the  latter  furnish  the 
guards  by  night,  aiid  the  former  by  day. 

Troops  cantoned  in  presence  of  the  enemy  should  be  covered  by 
advanced  guards  and  natural  or  ai'tificial  obstacles.  Cantonments 
taken  during  a  cessation  of  hostilities  should  be  established  in  rear 
of  a  line  of  defence,  and  in  front  of  the  point  on  which  the  troops 
■would  concentrate  to  receive  an  attack.  The  general  commanding-in- 
chief  assigns  the  limits  of  their  cantonments  to  the  divisions,  the 
commanders  of  divisions  to  brigades,  and  the  commanders  of  brigades 
post  their  regiments.  The  position  for  each  corps,  in  case  of  attack, 
is  carefully  pointed  out  by  the  generals. 


MARCHES. 

771.  For  marching,  the  force,  if  a  large  one,  is  divided  into  as  many 
columns  as  circumstances  permit,  without  Aveakening  any  one  too  much. 
The  object  of  the  movement  and  the  nature  of  the  ground  determine  the 
order  of  march,  the  kind  of  troops  in  each  column,  and  the  number  of 
columns.  They  ought  to  preserve  their  communications  and  be  within 
supporting  distance  of  each  other.  The  commander  of  each  column 
ought  to  know  the  strength  and  direction  of  the  others. 

The  advance  and  rear  guards  are  usually  light  troops;  their  strength 
and  composition  depend  on  the  nature  of  the  ground  and  the  position 
of  the  enemy.  They  serve  to  cover  the  movements  of  the  army,  and  to 
hold  the  enemy  in  check  until  the  general  has  time  to  make  his  arrange- 
ments. 

The  "general,"  sounded  one  hour  before  the  time  of  marching,  is  the 
signal  to  strike  tents,  to  load  the  wagons,  pack  horses,  etc.,  and  send 
them  to  the  place  of  assembling.  The  fires  are  then  put  out,  and  care 
taken  to  avoid  burning  straw,  etc.,  or  giving  the  enemy  any  other  indi- 
cation of  the  movements. 


490  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILTTTA. 

The  "mai'cb"  beats  in  the  infantry,  and  the  "advance"  is  sounded 
in  the  cavalry,  in  succession,  as  each  is  to  take  its  place  in  the  column. 
The  infantry  forms  in  column  of  companies  or  platoons;  the  cavalry  in 
column  of  twos,  fours,  or  of  platoons;  and  the  artillery  by  sections. 

When  the  army  should  form  suddenly  to  meet  the  enemy,  the  "  lony- 
roli"  is  beat,  and  "to  horse"  soupded.  The  troops  form  rapidly  in  front 
of  their  camp. 

Batteries  of  artillery  and  their  caissons  move  with  the  corps  to  which 
they  are  attached;  the  field  train  and  ambulances  march  at  the  rear  of 
the  column  ;  and  the  baggage  with  the  rear  guard. 

Cavalry  and  infantry  do  not  march  together,  unless  the  proximity  of 
the  enemy  makes  it  necessary. 

In  cavalry  marches,  when  distant  from  the  enemy,  each  regiment, 
and,  if  possible,  each  squadron,  forms  a  separate  column,  in  order  to 
keep  up  the  same  gait  from  front  to  rear,  and  to  trot,  when  desirable, 
on  good  ground.  In  such  cases,  the  cavalry  may  leave  camp  later,  and 
can  give  more  rest  to  the  horses,  and  more  attention  to  the  shoeing  and 
harness. 

After  the  march  has  commenced,  the  troops  habitually  take  the  route 
step.  The  men  should  not  be  allowed  to  straggle,  or  leave  the  ranks 
for  any  but  a  necessary  purpose,  and  then  but  for  a  few  moments  at  a 
time. 

The  general  and  field  ofiicers  frequently  stop,  or  send  officers  to  the 
rear,  to  see  that  the  troops  march  in  the  prescribed  order,  and  keep 
their  distances. 

In  approaching  a  defile,  the  colonels  are  warned ;  they  close  their 
regiments  as  they  come  up;  each  regiment  passes  separately,  at  an  ac- 
celerated pace,  and  in  as  close  order  as  possible.  The  leading  regiment 
having  passed,  and  left  room  enough  for  the  whole  column  in  close 
order,  halts,  and  moves  again  as  soon  as  the  last  regiment  is  through. 
In  the  cavalry,  each  squadron,  before  quickening  the  pace  to  rejoin  the 
column,  takes  its  original  order  of  march. 

When  a  march  is  to  be  continued  from  day  to  day,  the  daily  march 
should  commence  at  a  very  early  hour;  the  rate  of  going  should  be  as 
regular  as  possible,  not  more  than  two  and  a  half  miles  an  hour;  and 
the  guides  should  be  careful  to  preserve  their  distance,  so  as  to  prevent 
oscillations  in  the  rear  of  the  column,  Avhich  are  very  fatiguing  to  the 
men.  At  the  expiration  of  every  hour,  or  a  little  more,  the  halt  is 
sounded,  when  the  men  are  allowed  to  take  their  ease  for  about  ten 
minutes,  when  the  march  is  resumed.  In  this  way  a  day's  march  of 
twenty  miles  or  more  may  be  made  by  mid-day,  or  a  little  later;  the 
men  get  their  dinners  after  getting  into  camp,  have  the  afternoon  to 


DUTIES    OF    CAPTAINS,    COMPANIES,    ETC.  491 

rest,  wash  their  clothing,  clean  theii'  arms,  etc.,  and  are  fresh  for  an 
early  start  on  the  following  day. 

In  forced  marches,  or  where  the  march  is  a  long  one,  the  halt  at  noon 
may  he  from  an  hour  to  an  hour  and  a  half,  when  the  men  may  loosen 
their  belts,  take  a  lunch,  smoke,  and  take  their  ease  in  any  way  they 
choose,  until  the  hour  for  resuming  the  march  ;  the  march  may  be  con- 
tinued until  the  middle  of  the  afternoon,  and  still  the  men  will  have 
time  to  get  their  cup  of  hot  coffee  for  supper,  and  make  themselves 
comfortable  for  the  night.  The  march  of  the  first  two  days  should  he 
short,  after  that  it  may  be  increased  to  the  required  number  of  miles  ; 
the  march  from  day  to  day  should  be  as  nearly  of  equal  length  as  the 
convenience  of  fuel  and  water,  etc.,  for  camping  purposes  will  admit. 

772.  A  (■(iininnff  pnrti/,  headed  by  the  quartermaster  of  the  command, 
precedes  the  column  for  the  purpose  of  selecting  and  marking  off  the 
camp  before  the  arrival  of  the  troops.  The  camp  is  marked  by  placing 
camp  colors  on  the  line  intended  for  the  color  line  of  the  command. 

When  the  column  reaches  the  camp  ground,  the  infantry  comes  into 
line  on  the  color  line  ;  the  cavalry  in  rear  of  its  camp. 

The  number  of  men  to  be  furnished  for  guards,  pickets,  and  order- 
lies ;  the  iatigue  parties  to  be  sent  for  wood  and  water  for  the  cook, 
etc. ;  the  hour  of  marching,  etc.,  are  then  announced  by  the  brigadier- 
generals  to  the  colonels,  and  by  them  to  the  field  officers — the  adjutant 
and  captains  formed  in  front  of  the  regiment,  the  first  sergeants  taking 
post  behind  their  captains.  The  adjutant  then  makes  the  details,  and 
the  first  sergeants  warn  the  men.  The  regimental  officer  of  the  day 
forms  the  picket,  and  sends  the  guards  to  their  posts.  The  colors  are 
then  jilantcd  at  the  centre  of  the  color  line,  and  the  arms  are  stacked 
on  the  line.  The  fatigue  parties  proceed  to  their  duties,  and  the  men 
of  the  company  not  on  detail  pitch  the  tents. 

In  the  cavalry,  each  troop  moves  a  little  in  rear  of  the  point  at  which 
its  horses  are  to  be  secured,  and  forms  in  one  rank;  the  men  then  dis- 
mount ;  a  detail  is  made  to  hold  the  horses ;  the  rest  stack  their  arms 
and  fix  the  picket  rope ;  after  the  horses  are  attended  to  the  tents  are 
pitched,  and  each  horseman  places  his  arms  at  the  side  from  the 
weather. 

Artillery  is  brought  into  line,  and  the  picket  ropes  fixed  ;  the  drivers 
unhitch,  take  off  harness,  secure  their  horses  to  the  picket  ropes,  etc., 
whils  the  cannoneers  pi'oceed  to  pitch  the  tents. 


492  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Article    XIY. 

THE   STAFF.      - 

A  djutant-generaV s  departm en t. 

773.  The  general  duties  of  the  adjutant-general  and  of  the  assistant 
adjutant-generals  have  heen  laid  down  under  the  head  of  army  organ- 
ization. 

The  adjutant-generals  of  the  several  States  are  required  to  make 
annual  returns  of  the  strength  and  condition  of  the  militia,  the  state 
of  the  arms,  etc.,  applicable  to  military  purposes,  to  the  governor  or 
commander-in-chief  of  the  State,  and  to  forward  a  consolidated  return 
of  the  militia,  arms,  etc.,  to  th«  President  of  the  United  States,  through 
the  adjutant-general  of  the  United  JBtates  army,  agreeable  to  a  form 
furnished  by  him. 

Assistant  adjutant-generals,  in  addition  to  the  duties  already  speci- 
fied in  general  terms,  attend  to  the  formation  of  their  divisions  or 
brigades,  publish  all  orders  received  at  division  or  brigade  head-quar- 
ters ;  issue  all  orders  proceeding  from  the  general  commanding  the 
division  or  brigade  ;  prcirerve  the  records  of  the  division  or  brigade ; 
iuspcct  and  form  division  or  brigade  guards  ;  prepare  and  keep  the 
necessary  rosters  of  the  officers  of  the  division  or  brigade;  and  regu- 
late all  details  for  duty  depending  upon  the  rosters. 

774.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  assistant  adjutant-general  of  each  brigade 
to  jDrepare  a  morning  report  of  the  brigade  every  morning  after  the 
receipt  of  the  regimental  morning  reports  (see  Form  No.  2),  in  accord- 
ance with  Form  No.  3,  which  is  signed  by  him  and  (he  general  com- 
manding the  brigade  and  forwarded  to  division  head-quarters.  The 
assistant  adjutant-general  of  the  division  prepares,  in  like  manner,  a 
consolidated  morning  report  of  the  division,  to  be  transmitted  to  the 
adjutant-general  of  the  army  corps,  or  army  of  which  the  division 
forms  a  part.     (See  Form  No.  4.) 

Thus  the  commanding  general  is  from  day  to  day  kept  advised  as  to 
the  exact  strength  and  condition  of  his  command. 

The   assistant  adjutant-general   of  a   detached  brigade,  division   or 


THE    8TAFF.  493 

army  in  the  field,  has  to  prepare  a  monthly  return  of  the  command,  to 
be  signed  by  himself  and  his  commanding  general,  to  be  forwarded  to 
the  adjutant-general  at  general  head-quarters. 

775.  When  orders  are  received  at.  or  emanated  from  the  head- 
quarters of  an  army  or  army  corps,  the  adjutant-general,  or  assistant 
adjutant-general,  as  the  case  may  be.  transmits  copies  to  each  of  the 
assistant  adjutant-generals  at  division  head-quarters  :  the  assistant 
adjutant-generals  at  division  head-quarters  in  turn  transmit  copies  to 
the  assistant  at  eaf'h  of  the  brigade  head-quarters,  and  from  brigade 
head-quarters  they  go  to  the  adjutants  of  regiments,  by  whom  they  are 
read  to  the  troops  on  parade.  When  troops  are  on  a  campaign,  the 
orders  are  given  to  officers  of  the  staff",  who  report  for  them  daily  at 
the  different  head-quarters.     See  article  '* Orders.'' 

776.  The  parole  and  eoimtersign  emanate  daily  from  head-quarters, 
in  the  form  of  "  special  orders;"  copies  of  both,  under  seal,  are  trans- 
mitted to  division  head-quarters  ;  from  them  to  brigade  head-quarters, 
and  from  brigade  head-quarters  to  regimental  head-quarters,  provided 
there  is  any  officer  of  the  regiment  who  is  entitled  to  the  pd,role;  if 
not,  the  countersign  only  is  sent.  Copies  of  one  or  both  are  sent  to 
such  persons  of  the  division,  brigade,  or  regiment,  as  may  be  entitled 
to  them. 

The  parole  is  only  sent  to  the  field  and  regimental  officers  of  the 
day,  officers  of  guards,  and  to  such  other  officers  as  may  be  entitled  to 
visit  and  inspect  guards.  • 

The  parole  and  countersign  are  usually  sent  out  on  small  pieces  of 
paper,  so  folded  as  to  make  jt  impossible  to  discover  either  without 
breaking  the  seal. 

777.  By  the  militia  laws  of  Virginia,  and  most  of  the  other  States, 
the  division  and  brigade  inspectors  are  the  chiefs  of  staff"  of  their 
respective  divisions  and  brigades,  and  they  discharge  the  duties  of 
assistant  adjutant-generals  in  the  divisions  and  brigades  with  which 
they  serve. 

778.  The  adjutants  of  regiments  are  the  chiefs  of  the  regimental 
staff's,  and  perform  within  their  regiments  the  various  duties  required 
of  them  in  the  formation  of  their  regiments,  in  all  parades,  inspec- 
tions, manoeuvres,  formation  of  guards,  etc.  The  adjutant  publishes 
all  orders  received  at  regimental  head-quarters,  and  issues  all  orders 
emanating  from  the  head-quarters  of  the  I'egiment;  keeps  a  roster  of 
the  officers  of  the  regiment,  and  makes  all  details  for  duty  from  the 
roster;  has  charge  of  the  field-music,  band,  and  pioneers:  and  dis- 
charges such  other  duty  as  his  colonel  may  require. 

At  the  first  sergeant's  call,  the  orderly  sergeants  of  companies 
present  the  morning  reports  of  their  companies,  made  off"  in  conformity 


494  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

with  the  requirements  of  Form  No.  1,  and  signed  by  their  captains. 
The  adjutant  then  proceeds  to  make  off  the  morning  report  of  the 
regiment,  as  required  in  Form  No.  2,  which  is  signed  by  himself  and 
the  colonel,  and  transmitted  to  brigade  head-quarters. 

On  receiving  the  parole  and  countersign  from  brigade  head-quarters, 
he  sends  a  copy  of  both  to  the  colonel  and  to  the  regimental  officer  of 
the  day,  and  copies  of  the  countersign  to  the  surgeon,  and  such  other 
of  the  staff  officers  of  the  regiment  as,  from  the  nature  of  their  duties, 
may  require  it. 

The  Quartermaster's  department. 

779.  This  department  has  to  provide  quarters  and  transportation  for 
the  troops;  storage  and  transportation  for  all  supplies;  clothing; 
camp  and  garrison  equipage ;  cavalry  and  artillery  horses  ;  fuel ; 
forage;  straw;  and  stationery.  Its  duties,  when  troops  are  in  actual 
service,  are  very  important,  and  embrace  such  a  wide  range  of  subjects 
that  a  large  number  of  agents,  and  thorough  organization,  are  indis- 
pensable. 

780.  Under  the  head  of  quarters  are  included  all  buildings  for  the 
use  of  an  army;  as  quarters  for  men  and  officers,  hospitals,  store- 
houses, offices,  and  stables.  When  quarters  are  to  be  occupied,  they 
are  allotted  by  the  quartermaster  at  the  station,  under  the  control  of 
the  commanding. officer. 

The  number  of  rooms,  and  amount  of  fuel  for  officers  and  men,  are 
as  follows : 


THE    STAFF. 
Fuel  for  officers  and  men. 


495 


Rooms. 


A  Miijor-Gencral 

A  Brigadier-General  or  Colonel 

A  Lieutenant-Colonel  or  Major 

A  Captain  or  Chaplain 

Lieutenant 

Military  store-keeper 

The  General  commanding  the  army 

The  Commanding  officer  of  a  division  or  department,  an 
Assistant  or  Deputy  Quartermaster-General 

The  Commanding  officer  of  a  regiment  or  post,  Quarter- 
master, Assistant  Quartermaster,  or  Commissary  of 
Sul>sistenre 

An  acting  Assistant  Quartermaster  when  approved  by 
the  Quartermaster-General 

AVagon  and  Foi'age  master,  Sergeant-Major,  Ordnance- 
Sergeant,  or  Quartermaster-Sergeant 

Each  Non-commissioned  officer,  musician,  private,  officer's 
servant  and  washerwoman  

Each  necessary  fire  for  the  sick  in  hospital  to  be  regu- 
lated by  the  surgeon  and  commanding  officer,  not  ex- 
ceeding  

Each  guard-fire  to  be  regulated  by  the  commanding  offi- 
cer, not  exceeding 

A  Comnnssary  or  Quartermaster's  store-house,  when  ne- 
cessary, not  exceeding 

A  regimental  or  post  mess 

To  every  six  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians,  and 
privates,  servants  and  washerwomen,  225  square  feet 
of  room  north  of  .38°  N.,  and  256  square  feet  south  of 
that  latitude 


Cords  of 
wood  per 
month.* 


o  o 


1  -z 


^5, 


5 
4 

3 


No  officer  shall  occupy  more  than  his  proper  quarters,  except  by- 
order  of  the  commanding  officer,  when  there  is  an  excess  of  quarters  at 
the  station.  But  the  amount  of  quarters  shall  be  reduced  pro  rata  by 
the  commanding  officer  when  the  number  of  officers  and  troops  makes  it 
necessary. 

A  mess  room,  and  fuel  for  it,  are  allowed  only  when  a  majority  of 
the  officers  of  a  post  or  regiment  unite  in  a  mess.  Fuel  for  a  mess  room 
should  not  be  used  elsewhere,  or  for  any  other  purpose. 

Fuel  issued  to  officers  or  troops  is  public  property  for  their  use,  and 
what  is  not  actually  consumed  should  be  returned  to  the  quartermaster's 
department.     Fuel  is  issued  only  in  the  month  when  due. 

*  Or  coal,  at  the  rate  of  1.500  lbs  anthracite  or  30  bushels  bituminous  to  the 
cord. 


496 


MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


In  allotting  quarters,  officers  have  choice  according  to  rank;  hut  the 
commanding  officer  may  direct  the  officers  to  he  stationed  convenient  to 
their  troops.  An  officer  may  select  quarters  occupied  hy  a  junior;  hut 
having  made  his  choice,  he  must  ahide  hy  it,  and  shall  not  again  at  the 
post  displace  a  junior,  unless  himself  displaced  by  a  senior. 

An  officer  arriving  at  a  station  should  make  requisition  on  the  quar- 
termaster for  his  quarters  and  fuel,  accompanied  by  a  copy  of  the  order 
putting  him  on  duty  at  the  station.  If  in  command  of  troops,  his  re- 
quisition should  be  for  the  whole,  and  designate  the  number  of  officers 
of  each  grade,  of  non-commissioned  officers,  soldiers  and  servants. 

781.  When  troops  are  moved,  or  officers  travel  with  escorts  or  stores, 
the  means  of  transport  provided  shall  be  for  the  whole  command. 
Proper  orders  in  the  case,  and  an  exact  return  of  the  command,  includ- 
ing officers'  servants  and  company  women,  will  be  furnished  to  the 
quartermaster  who  is  to  furnish  the  transportation.  The  baggage  to  be 
transported  is  limited  to  camp  and  garrison  equipage  and  officers'  bag- 
gage. Officers'  baggage  should  not  exceed  (mess-chest  and  all  personal 
effects  included)  as  follows  : 


General  Officers 
Field  Officers  .  . 

Captains 

Subalterns   . . .  . 


In  the  Field. 


125  pounds. 
100       " 

80       " 

80       " 


Changing  Stations. 


1000  pounds. 

800  " 

700  " 

600  " 


These  amounts  may  be  reduced  pro  rata  by  the  commanding  officer 
when  necessary,  and  may  be  increased  on  transports  by  water,  when 
proper,  in  special  cases. 

All  the  books,  papers,  and  instrumeuts  necessary  for  the  duties  of 
staff  officers ;  also  regimental  and  company  desks,  and  the  medicine 
chests  of  medical  officers,  must  be  transported. 

Estimates  of  the  medical  director,  approved  by  the  comrfianding 
officer,  for  the  transportation  of  the  hospital  service,  and  the  sick,  will 
be  furnished  to  the  quartermaster. 

The  baggage  trains,  ambulances  for  the  sick  and  wounded,  and  all 
the  means  of  transport,  continue  in  charge  of  the  proper  officers  of  the 
quartermaster's  department,  under  the  control  of  the  commanding 
officers. 

When  supplies  are  turned  over  to  the  quartermaster  for  transporta- 
tion, each  package  must  be  directed,  and  its  contents  marked  on  it. 

On  transports,  cabin  passage  is  provided  for  the  officers,  and  reason- 
able and  proper  accommodation  for  the  troops,  and,  when  possible,  a 
separate  apartment  for  the  sick. 


TjHE    STAFF. 


497 


782.  The  forage  ration  is  fourteen  pounds  of  hay,  and  twelve  pounds 
of  oats,  corn,  or  barley.  Forage  is  issued  to  officers  only  in  the  month 
when  due,  and  at  their  proper  stations,  and  for  the  horses  actually 
kept  by  them  in  service,  not  exceeding  in  number  as  follows  :  In  time 
of  war,  major-general,  seven  horses;  brigadier-general,  five ;  colonels 
who  have  the  cavalry  allowance,  five;  other  colonels,  four;  lieutenant- 
colonels  and  majors  who  have  the  cavalry  allowance,  four;  other  lieu- 
tenant-colonels and  majors,  three;  captains  who  have  the  cavalry 
allowance,  throe;  all  other  officers  entitled  to  forage,  two:  and  in  time 
of  peace,  general  and  field  officers,  three  horses;  officers  below  the 
rank  of  field  officers  in  the  regiment  of  cavalry,  etc.,  two  horses ;  all 
other  officers  entitled  to  forage,  one  horse. 

No  officer  is  allowed  to  sell  forage  issued  to  him.  Forage  issued  to 
public  horses  or  cattle  is  public  property;  whatever  is  not  consumed  is 
accounted  for. 

783.  Issues  of  stationery  are  made  quarterly,  in  amount  as  follows  : 


o  ,^ 


se 


Ph    Ah 


Commander  of  an  army,  department,  or  division 
(what  may  be  necessary  for  himself  and  stafi" 
for  their  public  duty) 

Commander  of  a  brigade,  for  himself  and  staff  . . 

Officer  commanding  a  regiment  or  post  of  not  less 
than  five  companies,  for  himself  and  staff" 

Officer  commanding  a  post  of  more  than  two  and 
less  than  five  companies 

Commanding  officer  of  a  post  of  two'"companies. . 

Commanding  officer  of  a  post  of  one  company  or 
less,  and  commanding  officer  of  a  company. .  .  . 

A  Lieutenant-Colonel  or  Major  not  in  command 
of  a  regiment  or  post 

Officers  of  the  luspeetor-General's,  Pay,  and 
Quartermaster's  Department  (the  pre'scril)ed 
blank  books  and  printed  forms,  and  the  sta- 
tionery required  for  their  public  duty) 

All  officers,  including  Chaplains,  not  enumerated 
above,  when  on  duty  and  not  supplied  by  their 
respective  departments 1^^ 


42 


498 


MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Steel  pens,  with  one  holder  to  twelve  pens,  may  be  issued  in  place  of 
quills,  and  envelopes  in  place  of  envelope  paper,  at  the  rate  of  100  to 
the  quire. 

To  each  officer  is  allowed  an  inkstand,  one  stamp,  paper-folder,  sand- 
box, wafer-box,  and  as  many  lead  pencils  as  may  be  required. 

Necessary  stationery  for  military  courts  and  boards  will  be  furnished 
on  the  requisition  of  the  recorder,  approved  by  the  presiding  officer. 

Regimental,  company,  and  post  books,  and  printed  blanks  for  the 
officers  of  quartermaster  and  pay  departments,  will  be  procured  by 
requisition  on  the  quartermaster-general. 

Postage  and  despatches  by  telegraph  on  public  business,  paid  by  an 
officer,  will  be  refunded  to  him  on  his  certificate  to  the  amount,  and  to 
the  necessity  of  the  communication  by  telegraph. 

784.  Supplies  of  clothing  and  camp  and  garrison  equipage  will  be 
sent  by  the  quartermaster-general  to  the  officers  of  his  department  sta- 
tioned with  the  troops.  The  contents  of  each  package,  and  the  sizes  of 
the  clothing  in  it,  will  be  marked  on  it. 

The  allowance  of  camp  and  garri^pn  equipage  is  as  follows : 


CO 

CO 

CO 

OP 

X 
o 

CO 

v 

o 
cS 

to 

<o 

a; 

a 

CO 

a 

to 
CO 

A  General 

3 

2 
1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 
1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 
1 

1 

2 

Field   and    staff  officer   above  the 
rank  of  captain 

Other  staff  officers  and  captains.. 

Subalterns  of  a  company,  to  every 

two 

To  every  fifteen  foot  and  thirteen 
mounted  men 

2 

5 

4 

Bed  sacks  and  straw  are  provided  for  troops  in  garrison.  Requi- 
sitions will  be  sent  to  the  quartermaster-general  for  the  authorized 
flags,  colors,  standards,  guidons,  drums,  fifes,  bugles  and  trumpets. 

Commanders  of  companies  draw  the  clothing  of  their  men,  and  the 
camp  and  garrison  equipage  for  the  officers  and  men  of  their  company. 
The  camp  and  garrison  equipage  of  other  officers  is  drawn  on  their 
own  receipts. 

When  clothing  is  needed  for  issue  to  the  men,  the  company  com- 
mander will  procure  it  from  the  quartermaster  on  requisition,  approved 
by  the  commanding  officer. 


THE    STAFF.  499 

Commanders  of  companies  take  receipts  of  their  men  for  the  cloth- 
ing issued  to  them,  on  a  receipt  roll,  witnessed  by  an  officer  or  non- 
commissioned officer.  Each  soldier's  clothing  account  is  kept  by  the 
captain  in  a  company  book,  the  account  setting  forth  the  money  value 
of  the  clothing  received  and  receipted  for. 

785.  Every  separate  command  should  have  its  quartermaster;  if  it 
is  a  regiment,  or  less,  one  of  the  subalterns  may  discharge  the  duty  by 
order  of  the  commanding  officers;  if  a  brigade  or  division,  an  officer 
of  the  quartermaster  department  is  assigned  by  the  quartermaster- 
general.  In  the  volunteers  and  militia,  quartermasters  are  appointed 
by  the  colonels,  brigadier-generals,  or  major-generals  of  regiments, 
brigades,  or  divisions;  but  while  quartermasters  so  appointed  must 
obey  the  directions  of  their  commanding  officers,  their  accountability 
as  officers  of  the  quartermaster's  department  is  just  the  same. 

All  requisitions  for  supplies,  for  transportation,  forage,  etc.,  are  made 
upon  the  quartermaster  of  the  command  requiring  them;  if  it  is  in  his 
power  to  fill  the  requisition,  he  does  so;  if  not  he  makes  his  requisition 
upon  the  next  higher  officer  of  the  department,  and  so  on. 

In  order  to  facilitate  the  operations  of  the  department,  depots  of  sup- 
l)lies,  in  charge  of  dejiot  (/iiartcnnasterti,  are  established  at  convenient 
points,  and  from  wliich  quartermaster's  supplies  are  drawn  upon  proper 
requisition. 

In  order  to  secure  a  proper  accountability  on  the  part  of  the  officers 
of  the  quartermaster's  department,  the  quartermaster-general  should 
institute  a  proper  system  of  returns,  accounts,  etc.,  requiring  all  officers 
of  the  department  to  conform  strictly  to  their  requirements,  and  in  the 
settlement  of  their  accounts  to  present  satisfactory  vouchers  for  all 
money  or  public  property  expended.  For  the  necessary  forms  see  the 
general  regulations  of  the  United  States  army. 

Suhsutence  department.  ^ 

786.  Every  command  should  have  its  commissary  or  assistant  com- 
missary; when  the  command  is  less  than  a  regiment,  the  same  officer 
may,  and  usually  does  discharge  the  duties  of  both  commissary  and 
(luartermaster. 

Subsistence  supplies  are  issued  on  requisitions  approved  by  the  com- 
manding officer,  in  the  same  way  that  quartermaster's  supplies  are 
issued.  The  commissary  must,  however,  so  regulate  his  own  requi- 
sitions upon  purchasing  or  depot  commissaries,  as  to  keep  on  hand  a 
sufficient  supply  to  meet  the  wants  of  the  troops. 

Good  and  sufficient  store-room  for  the  subsistence  stores  will  be  pro- 
cured by  the  commissary  from  the  quartermaster. 


500  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

787.  The  ration  is  three-fourtlis  of  a  pound  of  pork  or  bacon,  or  one 
and  a  fourth  pounds  of  fresh  or  salt  beef;  eighteen  ounces  of  bread 
or  flour,  or  twelve  ounces  of  hard  bread,  or  one  and  a  fourth  pounds 
of  corn  meal,  and  at  the  rate,  to  one  hundred  rations,  of  eight  quarts 
of  peas  or  beans,  or,  in  lieu  thereof,  ten  pounds  of  rice  ,•  six  pounds  of 
coffee;  twelve  pounds  of  sugar;  four  quarts  of  vinegar;  one  and  a 
half  pounds  of  tallow,  or  one  and  a  fourth  pounds  of  adamantine,  or 
one  pound  sperm  candles;  four  pounds  of  soap,  and  two  quarts  of 
salt. 

On  a  campaign,  or  on  marches,  or  on  board  transports,  the  ration  of 
hard  bread  is  one  pound. 

Fresh  beef,  when  it  can  be  procured,  should  be  furnished  at  least 
twice  a  week  ;  the  beef  to  be  procured,  if  possible,  by  contract. 

788.  Company  provision  returns  are  usually  made  every  week  or  ten 
days,  in  accordance  with  Form  No.  12 ;  the  return  must  be  signed  by 
the  commanding  oflBcer  of  the  regiment,  or  post,  when  the  command  is 
less  than  a  regiment. 

When  it  is  practicable,  a  consolidated  return  for  the  regiment  or 
post  is  made  and  signed  by  the  commanding  officer  (see  Form  13);  but 
the  return  must  state  the  allowance  for  each  companj'^,  in  order  to 
prevent  any  confusion  in  the  issues. 

Issues  to  the  hospital  are  made  on  returns  by  the  medical  officer, 
for  such  provisions  only  as  are  actually  required  for  the  sick  and  the 
attendants.  The  cost  of  such  parts  of  the  ration  as  are  issued  is 
charged  to  the  hospital  at  contract  or  cost  prices,  and  the  hospital  is 
credited  by  the  whole  number  of  complete  rations  due  through  the 
month  at  contract  or  cost  prices;  the  balance,  constituting  the  hospital 
fund,  or  any  portion  of  it,  may  be  expended  by  the  commissary,  on  the 
requisition  of  the  medical  officer,  in  the  purchase  of  any  article  for  the 
subsistence  or  comfort  of  the  sick. 

An  extra  issue  of  fifteen  pounds  of  candles  per  month  may  be  made 
to  the  principal  guard  of  each  camp  or  garrison,  on  the  order  of  the 
commanding  officer.  Extra  issues  of  soap,  candles  and  vinegar  are 
permitted  to  the  hospital  when  the  surgeon  does  not  avail  himself  of 
the  commutation  of  the  hospital  ration,  or  when  there  is  no  hospital 
fund;  salt  in  small  quantities  is  issued  for  public  horses  and  cattle. 
When  the  officers  of  the  medical  department  find  anti-scorbutics 
necessary  for  the  health  of  the  troops,  the  commanding  officer  may 
order  issues  of  fresh  vegetables,  pickled  onions,  sauer-kraut,  or 
molasses,  with  an  extra  quantity  of  rice  and  vinegar.  Potatoes  are 
usually  issued  at  the  rate  of  one  pound  per  ration,  and  onions  at 
the  rate  of  three  bushels  in  lieu  of  one  of  beans.  Troops  at  sea 
are  recommended  to  draw  rice  and  an  extra  issue  of  molasses  in  lieu 
of  beans. 


THE    STAFF.  501 

When  a  soldier  is  detached  on  duty,  and  it  is  impracticable  to  carry 
his  subsistence  with  him,  it  will  be  commuted  at  seA-enty-five  cents 
a  day,  to  be  paid  by  the  commissary,  when  due,  or  in  advance, 
on  the  order  of  the  commanding  officer.  The  ration  of  a  soldier 
stationed  where  he  has  no  opportunity  of  messing,  is  commuted  at 
forty  cents. 

789.  As  in  the  case  of  the  quartermaster's  department,  the  commis- 
sary-general should  organize  such  a  system  of  returns,  accounts,  etc., 

Jton  the  part  of  the  officers  of  the  department,  as  to  ensure  a  proper 
accountability  on  their  part.  See  the  army  regulations  for  the  neces- 
sary forms. 

Medical  department. 

790.  The  senior  medical  officer,  on  duty  with  any  body  of  troops  in 
the  field,  will,  unless  otherwise  sj^ecially  ordered,  be  ex  officio  the 
medical  director;  and  will  have  the  general  control  of  the  medical 
officers,  and  the  supervision  of  the  hospitals  under  their  charge. 

The  senior  medical  officers  of  a  hospital  distribute  the  patients, 
according  to  convenience  and  the  nature  of  their  complaints,  into 
wards  or  divisions,  under  the  particular  charge  of  the  several  assistant 
surgeons,  and  should  visit  them  himself  each  day,  as  frequently  as 
the  state  of  the  sick  may  require, 

His  prescriptions  of  medicine  and  diet  are  written  down  at  once  in 
the  proper  register,  with  the  name  of  the  patient  and  the  number  of  his 
bed;  the  assistants  fill  up  the  diet  table  for  the  day,  and  direct  the 
administration  of  the  prescribed  medicine. 

He  should  enforce  the  proper  hospital  regulations  to  ])romote  health 
and  prevent  contagion,  by  ventilated  and  not  crowded  rooms,  scrupu- 
lous cleanliness,  frequent  changes  of  bedding,  linen,  etc. 

791.  At  surgeon's  call,  the  sick  then  in  the  companies  will  be  con- 
ducted to  the  hospital  by  the  first  sergeants,  who  will  each  hand  to  the 
surgeon,  in  his  company  book,  a  list  of  all  the  sick  of  the  company,  on 
which  the  surgeon  shall  state  Avho  are  to  remain  or  go  into  hospital ; 
who  are  to  return  to  quarters  as  sick  or  convalescent;  what  duties  the 
convalescents  in  quarters  are  capable  of;  what  cases  are  feigned;  and 
any  other  information  in  regard  to  the  sick  of  the  company  he  may 
have  to  communicate  to  the  captain.  He  will  then  make  a  morning 
report  of  the  sick  to  the  commanding  officer  (Form  No.  17). 

Pay  department. 

792.  The  troops  should  be  paid  in  such  manner  that  the  arrears 
shall  at  no  time  exceed  two  months,  unless  the  circumstances  of  the 


502  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

case  render  it  unavoidable.  The  paymaster-general  should  take  care, 
by  timely  remittances,  that  the  paymasters  have  the  necessary  funds  to 
pay  the  troops. 

The  payments,  except  to  officers  and  discharged  soldiers,  are  made 
on  muster  and  pay  rolls;  those  of  companies  and  detachments  are 
signed  by  the  company  or  detachment  commander;  those  of  the  hos- 
pital are  signed  by  the  surgeon ;  and  all  muster  and  pay  rolls  are 
signed  by  the  mustering  and  inspecting  officer. 

Copies  of  the  necessary  blank  forms  for  muster  and  pay  rolls  may 
always  be  obtained  from  the  office  of  the  Adjutant-General  U.  S.  Army, 
Washington.  These  blanks  are  too  large  to  be  properly  represented  in 
a  work  like  this. 

When  a  company  is  paraded  for  payment,  the  men  should  be  called 
to  the  pay  table  one  at  a  time,  commencing  with  the  non-commissioned 
officers,  who  are  paid  according  to  rank  ;  the  privates  are  called  in 
alphabetical  order.  Every  member  of  the  company,  or  detachment, 
must,  on  receiving  his  pay,  sign  his  name  opposite  his  name  in  the  pay 
roll,  and  his  signature  must  be  witnessed  by  the  captain,  or  some  other 
officer  of  the  company,  or  detachment,  whose  duty  it  is  to  be  present 
when  the  company,  or  detachment,  is  paid. 

Officers  are  paid  on  certified  accounts,  as  in  Form  5. 


L 


ItlOFning    Reports    of  Captain    's    Company 


FOBM    No.    1. 

Reeimeiit    of  ,     Stationed    at 


the    JMontU    of  ,     1»- 


PRESENT.                          _.    •Ij 

ABSENT. 

< 

1 

f 

< 

1 
1 

i 

PlRBT  SEHQE-INt's 
RlOX.lTUBE. 

ZZi. 

REMARKS. 
% 

For  Duty.            Si 

Special 
Duty. 

In      I 
Arrest. 

1 

1 

Sice. 

With      1]  Without      Detached  ' 
Leave.          Leave.        Service. 

DATE. 

.1 
S 
i 

Lieutenants 
Sergeants 
Corporals 
ilusiciana 
Privates 
Officers 
N.C.  Officers 

■r    3 

t 

IS 

< 

If 

^J 

'■ 

Vki% 

'\~ 

! 

j 

. 

%% 

\\ 

1 

« 

1 

=^ 

li 

. 

\    m 

1 

m 


\ 


V 

V 


# 


«^« 


\ 


JMorniiig    Tteiiort    of   the 


FORM    No.   2. 

Res'unent    of ^     Commanded    by    Colonel 


PRESENT. 

ABSENT. 

^'1 
Pbksbst      1    J. 

AND          '11      S 

.■\iterati0ss  since 
Yesterday. 

|l 

1 

Extra     ||         I.v 

Detached 

With    j  Without!  Ia,„„  1 

AnsEST. 

g 

C  0  M  >I  A  N  B  . 

a    , 

Do" 

Arrest 

- 

Service. 

Le.we.  I    Leave. 

■^      ! 

' 

•,~ 

1            ^i 

1 

1 

1       1 

u\ 

2      1 

u 

. 

-^ 

c    • 

■a 

1 

n  F,  :\i  A  i;  K 

' 

1   _.!B 

"o     c  It: 
i5     o  13  * 

r 

t-_ 

3 

s\ 

!i 

f 

■= 

I'l 

?  SB  ^  i  = 
£  o  ^H 1? 

1  1 
o  Si 

1    1 

•< 

1 

o 

i 

j 

2 

1 
o 

1 

■? 

1 

3'^ 

-f 

■a 

"7 

7 

f ' 

••> 

i 

... 

|- 

'A. 

'•        (B) 

ri 

i 

if"' 

'i 

1 

1' 

etc.,  etc..  etc. 

1 

i*- 

■ 

j 

•'= 

i 

.»■ 

i 

1^ 

i  i 

1 

11^ 

] 

1 

» 

> 

1 

. 

1 

k 

I 

4» 

.1; 

» 

I 

! 

^ 

1 

^ 

f 

^ 

1 

-- 

- 

-- 

_'_'_ 

^' 

1    -' 

~  ~ 

1 

i 



— ^ 

]iZ 

lirand  Total 

- 

Si 

ATIOSf, ^ 

1= 

(Sisiiod)  C.  D. 

Colonel  Cumniandiiin Hi'!/ 

utent  of                   . 

t 

(Signed)  A.   B. 

;-» 

idj, 

it 

nt. 

*r?» 

1 
1 

4 


JMoming    HeiJort    ot 


Brigade 


FORM    No.    3. 

IJivision,    Ajnay    of  ,    Commanded    by    Brigadier-CS-eneral 


» 





_ 

__ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

-^ 

PRESENT. 

ABSENT. 

Presbnt 

AND 

Alterations  since 
Yesterday. 

For  DniY. 

Extra 

In 

Dbtach'd 

With 

"Without 

Sick. 

COMMAND. 

UUTV. 

Arrest. 

Sebtici. 

Lbavs. 

_:    u  1 

1 

, 

i 

~    °    1  1  ? 

c 

i 

§ 

a 

3 
iS 

1 

3 
T3 
1 

1 
1 

£ 

£ 

£ 

1 

i  II 

u 

K  K  MARKS. 

1 

0 

1 

c 

< 
-< 

-3 

.5? 

1 

< 

i 
1 

a 
o 

§ 

9 
e 

3 

S 

s 
s 

e 

i 
J 

3 
0) 

2 
'S 

a' 

a 
o 

1 
1    1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

£ 

S 
o 

o 
£ 

3 

1 

e 

o 

1 

s 

2 

i 

» 

1 

£, 

g 

i 
< 

1   «  s 

g     -a  -c 

Q 
1 

.5." 
IS 

2 

A 

■ 

i 

' 

1 

1 

k •■            ■' 

'1 

1 

-*L 

•' 

1   : 

1 

• 

« 

f 

'   1   ' 

1 

ic 

jS 

1 

• 

^ 

1    1 

.  I      i   1 

i 

4 

i  ! 

! 

1 

■ll 

"^Bf 

— 

— 





— 

— 

— 

— 

J 

1 

F 

1 

\y 

Station, 


(Signed)  C.  D. 

Hrigndiei'-Genernl   Cn-m.mandinq  Jiriqfide. 


(SiKnpd)   A.   B. 


A  sniatn.nt  Adji^ta.nf-  Genern.l. 


K 


^ 


jn: 


jMoriiins;    TJei>ort    ot 


FORM    No.   4. 

!•    -Army,     CoiTimanded    l>y    ^Major-Oem-rivl 


General  Staff  of  Division. ... 

First  Itrig.ide 

Second      "    

; lipgiment  Cavalry... 

'cnpt.  1! 's    Hultcry  of 

Artillery ] 

;Ciipi.  f 's   Battery   of 


Ariillery.. 


PRESENT 


i5i 


,5?  'o)   « 


-!"l|is'e- 


ABSENT. 


PltE.SBNT 
^    AND 

Absent. 


Altekatioxs  singe 
Yesterdai. 


K  E  .M  A  U  K  .S . 


Station, 


1^ 


D,VTE, 


(Signed);^©. 

Major-Ocncrnl  Cutninniidiiii/  Division. 


ilumn  includes  Non-Ooniis-'ioned  fSio-ned)   A.   B. 

loi-s,  Musiciiins.  and  Privates.^  ^     f 


omo^ 

t  Thi.s  column  incUidps  tlie  entire  force. 


Assistant  Adjutant-General. 


I 


^ 


i 


The 


FORM    No.    5. 
To 


iJr 


ON    WHAT    ACCOUNT. 


PAY. 

Foi-  inysolf 

Fur  private  ssvvaiit      not  soldier 

CLOTHING. 

For  private  servunt      not  soldier 

FOEAGE. 
For  horses 


SUBSISTE.VCE. 

For  myself  for  .year        scrviee 

For  private  servant        not  soldier 


comjMencement  and  expiration. 


the 
the 


TERM  OF  SERVICE 
CHARGEn. 


I'AY   PER  MONTH. 


Xo;OfRa-       Total  No- of    j    Post  or  Place 
per  day.  Ration'.  Where  due. 


^^ 


AMOUNT. 


i^ 


I  HEREKY  CERl'IFY. 
or  reoeivod  nion^y  in  lieu  o 

that  I(Iid  not   dmin-lho  tp 


!  foro^'iing  aeeount  is  correct  and  just;  thafci  have  not  heen  .absent  without  leave  durii 
t  thereof,  for  any  part  of  the  time  therein  iffliarHed:  that  1  actually  owned,  and  kept  in 


any  part  of  the  time  charged  for;  that  I  iiave  not  received  pay,  nor  dra^n  rations,  forage  or  elothin"  in  Idiid, 
!  the  horses,  and  employed  the  priiv ate  servants  for  which  I  charge,  for  the  whole  «f  the  tinio  (diarj;ed  and 


or  any  part  thereof  keep  or  employ  a  soldier  as  a  waiter  or  servant;  tliatthe  annexed  is  an  accurate  description  of  my  servant;  that  for  the  whole  period  eh.arKOd  for  my  atalfappointme 
nd  did  duty  in  the  department;  that  1  was  the  actual  and  only  eommandins  oftieer  at  the  double  ration  posit  charged  foi :  and  that  no  officer  within  my  knowledge  liasariditto  eiaini.  or  does 
nod  charged  ;  that  for  the  whole  time  brevet  pay  is  claimed   1  had  the  coihmtmd  .stated;  that  I  wivs  actually  .in  the  command  of  a  compiiny  for  the  whole  time  additional  Tiay  is  nhar-'ed'  that 

.  r  duty  for  which  I  claim  or  have  received  extra  compensation  during  the  time  an  additional  ration  is  charged  for;  th  u  1  have  been  m  __. ms  a  conimissiortcd  o'fflcor 

111- ex.lr.»  rations;  th;tt  I  am  not  in  arrears  with .on  ally  acoouat  whatsoever;  and  that  the  la-t  payment  1  received  *as  from  Paymaster 

and  to  the day  «f ,18 I^thosame  tirtleaeknovvlcdgo  that  I  have  Received 

of > Paymaster .i.this     .  . day  of ,  18 

the  sum  of dollars  and cent.s,  bein.g  the  amount  and  in  full  of  said 


DESCRIPTION    OF    SERVANTS. 

R  ll'C  A  P  I  T  U  L  A  T  I  O  N. 

1                   N  A  rd  E  S  . 

COSIPLKXJO'V 

Huonr. 

Eyes. 

Haiu.      ' 

Pay 

Feet 

IiK'hos 

Subsistence 

1 

Amount 



(SIOM'.U  IN  DUPLICATE. 


THE    STAFF. 


503 


o 

a 

o 

a 


n 


o 

o 


be 


o 


a 

) 

1 

w 

tf 

<; 

;^ 

w 

P3 

Is 
o 
O 

•spunoj; 

•siaqsng 

o 

■< 
o 

o 
o 

•saqouj 

103J 

•spjoo 

•spaoo  ui  'qo-ea 

o;  'eou'BAvotiTJ  .^iq^aoj^ 

•tT??ox 

•s:)m3A 

(  -ads  puB  S8SS9jpnn'B'][ 

•SQ%VAUd 

pu-B  'suBioisnra  'sjaa 

-^0  pauoTSSTUiraoo-uo^ 

•sa.i9'}['i3qng 

•Sat'B!}dT3Q 

CQ 

O          * 

1— 1 
H 

<; 
H 

CO 

i 

1 

'1 
o 
H 

5^s    '^ 
°    I    =« 

eS    ?     ai 

a  S 

&  S 

o 

CO 

3 


^ 


a 


w 

1^ 

a 

"^ 

S.y 

a 

C.tJ 

o 

-^  .2 

o 
oi 

<1  ^ 

3. 

« 

--Q 

-^3 

> 

a 

^ 

o 

<u 

a> 

rt 

-t-3 

^    O 

CO 

-u 

a 

1      S 

^ 

1     'm 

*^ 

2  fl 

;m 

O 

a 

0) 

03 

o 

be 

O 

Xt 

o 

c 

,a 

<*H 

o 

o 

^  o 

!>i 

0) 

> 

CJ 

t*- 

> 

•  i-< 

o 

Si 

« 

a> 

lA 

t 

^ 


504 


MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


o 

o 


<D 


1-3 

o 

•spanoj 

•spqsng; 

•saqouj 


•189d[ 


•sp.too 


S3 


O    c3 

^1 


o  o 


o  <o 

^-  > 

'-3  'T;  •'- 

t<    -'  a? 

03    ©  o 

«   ^  © 

M    O  Ph  ' 


THE    STAFF. 


505 


bo 

1^ 


.o     _ 


-^  © 
•S  -^ 
n  o 

to    rt 

^  5 
pi    - 

09  ""• 

<D      ^ 

.^    O 

P4  t3 


bo 


o 


»5 
< 

o 
>-] 

< 

H 
O 

H 


5  ^ 


ft 


02 

p:5 


&^ 


•JO  spuno^j 


•JO  spunojj 


•JO  spauojj 


•JO  spunoj 


o 


•JO  spanojj 


jgppoj  JO  spanOjj 


•n.ioo  JO  spimOjj 


•saoT^t'j  JO  jaqran^ 


•sAvp  JO  aaquin^ 


•s^'Bxniu'B  JO  joqoinu  |'B?ox 


•U8X0  JO  laquiu^ 


•sexnui  JO  J8qranj»j 


•S9S.ioq  JO  joqiun^ 


•uopis'inboa  jo  Q]'e(j 


•Avxi  JO  spano  J 

•S|t{o  JO  spunojj 

Xa^auq  JO  spanoj^ 

P^ 


a 

a 
O 


o  o 

O  _^ 


JC         -3 


'-' 

ea 

t« 

o 

a 

s 

d    ^  CO 


■g   c?^ 


3rS 


•'^    CI 

a   ai 

2  =s 
■p   £=0 

=^  2 

o  -a 


a 
be 


o  o 


.i:    o  >> 


o  jy 

o    "^ 

-a  .2 

9    « 
O    fcO 

».  eS 

1-1 -^ 


P5 


a 

Q^   O 

'to 

"3 


43 


506 


MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 


e8     - 


OS 


o  bo 

®  .2 


«  rt 


Pm 


«    O 
O 


» 


!:) 

•  iH 
O 

B 

o 

bo 
cc 
^1 

o 


•spmioj 


•spuuoj 


spuiiOjj 


•spuno,] 


•sqi  95 


o  < 


•spano<j 


•spunoj 


o 


•s  putlog; 


•sesjoq  JO  jaqmn^ 


ho 
1^ 


3 

t> 
o 

c3 


83 


a   o 


C5    O 


THE    STAFF. 


507 


REMARKS. 

8 

< 

< 

% 

H 

0 

O 

■J 
^     . 

^; 
o 

Pounds. 

< 
« 

g 
EH 

•S;U13A.18g 

•sessojpun'B'i 

•se^'BAT.id 
pu-B   '8ui3pismu   -saao 
-i{}0   pauoissiumioo-uo^ 

125 

o 

1— ( 
H 

<1 
H 

c 

E- 

^    I 


1^ 


•^    bo 


508 


MANUAL   FOR    VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 


T-i  © 


o 


b  o 


ci  o 


o  f^ 

OQ 


(4 


•aap 
-AvocI  iiut  JO  sjad-Btj 

•ad^J  JO  S938tJ 

•X13AV 

-Sujx'eas  jo  saounQ 

•SJ8J13j\i  JO  s90uno 

•S[imb  JO  aeqranjij 

•jad^d 
e§pu:^.ii}0  JO  s:)8aqg 

•jad^d 
dBOSiooj   JO  ssjui^ 

•J9d 
-ud  Jsn^i  JO  sa.iTii^ 

O  X 

m  ^ 

P-i  t 

•3  bo 


rJa      ^ 


.S     a' 


ra    o 


-^ 

; 

5    PI  •' 

1 

!-^ 

rt    ;3  e*-i 

r^ 

■^    0    0 

0 

to 

<1 

S   as 

a; 

^ 

> 

&,.a 

,r3 

&< 

s 

M 

73 

rt 

«4. 

-.    S 

'T3 

r3 

0   cr'   ■    ?1 

»-        ^H   be 

r?-! 

0)  .-< 

p.  CO 

cy 

J 

ci  -— ' 

r- 

H 

P. 

-l-J 

•^ 

(B 

bD 

t-l 

eg   is 

0 
0 

ra 

':4- 

a 

P->«M 

0 

cS    0 

CO     M 

r-i    -•-» 

«=  2^ 

0      « 

3 

o     o   « 


^ 


THE    STAFF. 


509 


s 

H 

3 

<1 

® 

H 

« 

CQ 

o 

P5 

•  pH 

o 

CQ 

> 

H 

o 

OQ 

JH 

O 

P^ 

Ph 

510 


MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


bD 


bo 

(4 


CO 
3=1 

o 


re 


o 

O 

1— 1 

•n-^s 

•d-Bog 

•gajpuTiQ 

MBS9nT^\^ 

•jx?gng 

•aajgoo 

•aoiy 

•suBog; 

•jnoij 

•>IJO^ 

•jaaq  qsaaj 

•suot^uj  JO  jaqraiT^ 

•si!Bp  JO  jaqmn^ 

'I^^ox 

•naraoAi.  jo  aoqmnjsj 

•U9tn  JO  aaqtnnj^ 

* 

POST  OR  STATION. 

THE    STAFF. 


511 


■sino 


•sj.ren^) 


•spqsna 


•S30UUO 


•spnnoj 


•saouuo 


•spuixod 


■sino 


?).nin^ 


■suoiiuo 


•saouiiQ 


•spuuo<j 


•saouiiQ 


•spuuO(j 


•saouno 


•spuiio<£ 


■sil!9 


•s;j\!n5 


•siaqsna 


•saomio 


•spmio,! 


•s[o.i.rea 


•saauno 


•spmio<j 


•soouno 


•Kpuuoj 


•siajjua 


•RUOI^'BH  JO  -o^ 


CD(NGC-*00(MCO-t<0000  -oooo 
rH  CO  -f  O  00  o  r-;  CI  -t;  :c  01  cc  -^  |  o  c^l  oo  -^^ 
O  O  O  O  O  O  i-H  T-H  rH  r-I  CO  -f  CO   •  i-H  CO  "^  CO' 


::::::::::::    :  ih  ih  ih  r-i  r-i  im  0  00  to 

:  to  (M 

:      ;o 

::::::::::::::::::: 

-■^OOiMCOO-^CCMCDOOOO      -OOOO      • 

to  IN  »  •«  (N  30  -^  rH  1-.  Ti<  00  (M  to    :  -^  00  oi  to    : 

o  r-I  i-i  c-i  CO  CO  ■'jl  >d  o  to  <m'  CO  aJ    •  to  c<5  co  oJ    • 

T— 1            :      >"*            : 

::::::::::    :r-(r-i'MiM  <m  coco"*  p  oo 

'tCO'MtOO-fOO'NtOOOOOOOOOOO 

(>i  -i;  1-  C5  !>!  -*  <e  oi  i-<  -)<  «:■  oj  to  o  -i<  c/5  0-1  to  o 

O  O  O  O  r-(  T-!  r-i  i-H  n'  c4  ■*  l~  oi  C^i  -H  d  CO  O  00 

:    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    ::    :    :    :r-iiHrHrHooo 

i-H  O  O 

:::::::::::::::                    r-(  o 

rH 

(M-*  tocoo  <N^  tooo  o  o  o  o    :oooo    :    :    :    : 

■COCCOlCltOWMiOCOfM^ttDOO      :(N-*tO00      •      •      •      • 

dodr-Ir-JrHdde-icotor-;^    icotoi-I-*    •    ■    •    • 

:    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    ii-ht-ic^'Mimcoco    :    :    :    : 

::::::::::::::::::r-(ooo 

'•I'.      11'.      11'.      IZlllllll                     r-l 

(M-*toooO(M-»<tooooooo    :oooo    : 
C;  cc  I—  to  to  ic  -*  n  o]  !>]  -t;  to  cc    •  c^j  ^^  to  c/^    . 

i-H  CO  O  t-^  d  rH  CO  O  rH  CO  to  ci  t^'      •  CO  tO  d  'm'      • 
I-H  rH  rH                            ""I      :                      '"'      ' 

;rHrH(N00"*t0t-00l3>O'MOOO 

rH  rH  C^l  O  O 
;  rH  <M  O 


'rH'MCO-^iOtOt-COOSOOOO 

rH  O  O  O 

rH  O  O 


rH  <M  COintOt— 00OrH?^>ret~O<N'Ot—  OMvCOOO 

T-H.JI.J   j^i   ^;r;^^5qjQin«ot-ooorHc^ooo 

rH  rH  r-l  "M  O^O 
rH  'M'"iO' 


toc<)oo-*oto!MooTtioooo    :oooo    : 

05  O  GO  (»  oq  1-;  1-;  tO  tO  tO  C^I  00_  -^^      .  tO  IM_  QO  "*      ; 

d  rH  im'  co'  -*'  >d  to' t-^  Qo'  d  CO*  im'  to'    :  d  co'  im'  to'    • 

:::::::::    :rH  rH  (m  eo  co-*'*  o  to  c 

0009 
009 

to  (N  00  ■*  p  to  iM,  00  "*    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    : 

rH  CO*  '^  to'  oc'  d  rH  (N  ^'    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    :    : 

i-HrHrH:::::::::: 

-*OQ(MtOO-*CX)'MtOOOOO 
to  C<;  OS  lO  (M_  00  ■*  r-<_  t-;  •*  00  <M_  to 

d  r^  r-i  C^*  CO  CO*  -*'  lO  O  to'  TtH  CO'  rH 

:  o  o  oo    : 

.  ■*  00  IM  to      ; 
•  to'  ^^  co'  rH     : 

:    :rH(Mco 

•*  ■*  lo  to  t- 00  to    :    : 

(N  lO 

~C<I^^  00  oc-1  ^"^ 
r-tr-l  T-< 

<M  -Tp  CC  IM      : 

rHC<ICO-*OtOt^OJ 

OrH'MCOiOtOt-OOOrHOliOOOlM 

r-lrH<NeO-*»CtOt-CiOrH-*l:~05 

rH  rH  rH         r-l 

:::::::  lo  1--  CO 

:::::::::::::::••••      o  i^ 
:::::::::::::::::::          lO 

Tj(ooiN    :-*doo5 

rH      .              rH 

■*  00    :  oo    : 

00    :  00    :  00    : 

cqoo-* 

rH 

:  IMOO-* 

•  rH              4 

e^oo 

r-l 

:  00    :  00    :  00    :  oo    : 

;rHCleOCO'*>OtOtOl-. 

rHC^COCO-^OtOtCl- 

:":::cot->« 

::::::::::::    t          co 

iiMCO-^iOtOt-OOOsOOOOOOpOOOO 
rH'7qCO'1*'OtOI^OOOiOO 


o  o 
o  o 
o  o 


512 


MANUAL   FOR   VOLUNTEERS   AND    MILITIA. 


o 

«♦ 

-1 

H 

•" 

m 

W 
^ 

^ 

CD 

M 

;h 

1^ 

•i-i 

. 

^ 

"<* 

Pm 

»-l 

o 

c3 

• 

m 

^ 

o 

H 

oT 

^ 

O 

CM 

CU 

S 

!= 

"eS 

p^ 

w. 

■i-i 

o 

■p^ 

P4 
09 

^ 

o 

O 

^ 

09 

o 

7i 

H 

h- ( 
OQ 
>-< 

•  iH 

P 

h 

o> 

,o 

w 

Shi 

p^ 

O 

•^ 
■f-l 
oa 

® 

P^ 

-^    o 

-H   i:^ 

.-•~  i=! 

w 

as 

0) 

&   o 

^  2 

6 

'S-'S 

0) 

« 

-ij  > 

(U  ^ 

«  s 

<JPh 

;>5 


rJ2 


s 


^ 


'^      r-r 


rt 


THE    STAFF. 


513 


•p^ia 

•qgnoiJiij  no 

•{•K^idsoq  ^tJ-ionoS  0%  :jaog 

•80TAJ0S  raojj  pa°jiJqosT(j 

•p8:f.I8S8(I 

•iC;np  0^  pan.ni)9'a; 

•p9:|^inipy 

Ph 

0 
0 

•Xn-Bfloioo 

•sdaoo  ao  ^namiSay; 

•51111? -a 

NAMES. 

! 

5U 


MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


H 


'CS 

• 

fl 

(£> 

ee 

T— ( 

^ 

,« 

• 

o 

o 

(2; 

o 

4J 

(U 

•  >H 

g 

P 

« 

,« 

o 

o 

o 

f^ 

m 

rt 

P4 


(D 
P4 


f^ 


02 
121 


I 

I 
I 


a>  o  00 


o    "? 

c  .2 


O     Ph 


M    o 


.2  =5  a  .i:  § 

r-    ^       O       O       ;^ 


.t5  a 
cr  o 


a  3^  _  ^ 

O)    S    d   -iJ  ^ 

-t^  ^  S  <i)  &c 

o 


cS 


-1-3   -1^    o 
m     ,-,     r-i 

o  a  5  i;  -^ 
•ij  .^  ^  .rt  f*i 

o  ^^ts  g  IB 

02    <0    S-i  ."    'V 

4)  _2    O   -►-'    O 

p^      a  o  a 

«(-!     •!->      -l-i 

«    ci    S  ""^ 


""    §  § 

=^  M  o  ^  a 

!»  <»  ri      S 

'-'     OJ  O  03  -^ 


O     (3J 


O)     !B 


fl    :3 


r^       « 


4) 


^:5 

(i^^^ct:  a 

"  1=1  -a 

r  a  s 
3  a 

03 


o    '■^  ^  « 

-g  j^  c2  -^x! 

^     03     03  •'-' 

^  _^     !h  • 


s  a 

03 

o 


o  — 


t>     03     o 


fl  o 


l^  t 


43     03 


-2  -^    S    3    fl 

"      -  O 


fl    « 


CO     OJ     t>i   03     "^ 


c5    ^  ^  ra  W 

OJ    c5  ^,  't;  -»J 

-w  .rt  03  H     03 

o  a  o       '^ 

^^-^  ^ 

Z''*^  OJ  o 

fl     a  VS  03     fl     £^ 

rTi   03  .  -»^     03  -— * 

a  S  =^  2  "^ 


-a  o3 


o  o  a  oj  » 


+^  2  =«   03   I'   a 

~     C3 


•^    ■'-    ^  <0      ^r^ 


^  -^  ^  ^  .H 

fl  •  jr  -t^  -e 


O  J  -J2 

o5  r;^  .1=1 


;::;   rt  .s  -^^  '^3  ->^        O   fl  ^ 


CU    S  c/j    - 


C2    ■  i^     <-JJJ 

=*  -3 .9  -b 


«     M  —     03  — 

CLi  03  "    >;  £2 

®  "O  J«  "03  H- 

-fi  ;S  r^:^  "^  ^ 

^j  ^  ^— ' 

®  fl3    *-*  2 

,J2  Cj_  ^j 


^  -P  <D  °  a  g 

°  o  c  -^ 

fl     O  1>.  t^  O  03 

o   s:^  !^  i^  c«  c8 

^  P"  o  r,  o  o 

B  'S  -^  -^  u  a 

3  J-  c  o  fee 

.  03  -3  03  p3 

ii  03  cs  ;::2  tJ  "^ 


THE    STAFF. 


515 


o 


r-l        ^ 
Pi 


o 


be 


pi 


o 

u 

o 


s? 

CO 

p^ 

Remaining. 

•saa^j'Bnb  uj 

1 
•p)i(lsori  "I      1 

1 

"p^ia 

•[TJ^idsoq  [x?.ionaS  o^  '^aag 

•pa.oji;qosi(j 

•^^np  0^  paujn^O'jj 

^ 

E- 

O 

H 

•sjo^junb  UJ 

•{B^idsoq  UJ 

•jjois  ua^i'BX 

Remaining 

AT 

Last 
Report. 

•sjoj.uinb  UJ 

•lx;;idsoq  uj 

COMPANY. 

DATE. 

516         MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 


Article     XY. 
BATTLES. 

793.  A  battle  is  a  general  action  between  two  armies ;  if  only  a  small 
portion  of  the  forces  are  engaged,  it  is  usually  denominated  a  combat, 
an  affair,  a  skirmish,  etc.,  according  to  the  character  of  the  engage- 
ment. Battles  are  of  three  kinds  :  1st.  Defensive  battles,  or  those 
fought  in  a  chosen  position  by  an  army  which  awaits  the  attack  of  an 
enemy.  2d.  Off^eiisive  battles,  or  those  made  by  an  army  which  attacks 
the  enemy  drawn  up,  in  position  and  awaiting  the  attack.  3d.  The 
mixed  or  unforeseen  battles,  which  occur  between  two  armies  meeting 
on  the  march. 

794.  When  an  army  awaits  the  attack,  it  takes  its  position  and  forms 
its  line  of  battle  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground,  and  the  sup- 
posed character  and  strength  of  the  enemy's  forces.  When  some  im- 
portant position  is  to  be  protected  by  an  army,  such  as  when  a  siege  is 
to  be  covered,  a  capital  to  be  protected,  depots  of  supplies  guarded,  or 
some  point  important  to  the  operations  of  the  campaign  is  to  be  held, 
such  battles  are  usually  given. 

795.  The  first  condition  to  be  satisfied  by  a  position  is,  that  the  open- 
ings shall  be  more  favorable  for  falling  on  the  enemy  when  he  has  ap- 
proached to  the  desired  point,  tbau  those  which  he  can  have  for  attack- 
ing our  line.  Second,  the  artillery  should  be  posted  as  to  command  all 
the  avenues  by  which  the  e*iemy  can  approach.  Third,  we  should,  if 
possible,  have  good  ground  upon  which  to  manoeuvre  our  troops  unseen 
by  the  enemy.  Fourth,  we  should  have  a  full  view  of  the  enemy  as  he 
advances  to  the  attack.  Fifth,  the  flanks  of  our  line  should  be  well 
protected  b}^  natural  or  artificial  obstacles.  Sixth,  we  should  have  the 
means  for  effecting  a  retreat  in  the  event  of  a  defeat,  without  exposing 
the  army  to  destruction. 

It  is  seldom  that  all  these  conditions  can  be  satisfied  at  the  same 
time;  sometimes  the  very  means  of  satisfying  one  may  be  in  viola- 
tion of  another.  A  river,  a  forest,  or  a  mountain,  which  secures  the 
iiank  of  an  army,  may  become  an  obstacle  to  a  retreat;  again,  the 


BATTLES.  517 

position  may  be   difficult  of  attack   in  front,   or  on  the  wings,  and  at 
the  same  time  unfavorable  for  retreat. 

We  may  sometimes  be  obliged  to  make  the  attack  at  all  hazards 
to  prevent  the  junction  of  two  of  the  enemy's  corps  to  cut  off  forces 
that  are  separated  from  the  main  body  by  a  river,  etc.  As  a  general 
rule,  the  attacking  force  has  a  moral  superiority  over  the  defensrve,  but 
this  advantage  is  frequently  counterbalanced  by  other  conditions. 

796.  When  we  are  acting  on  the  offensive,  the  main  thing  is  to 
seize  upon  the  decisive  point  of  the  field.  This  point  is  determined 
by  the  configuration  of  the  ground,  the  position  of  the  contendino- 
forces,  the  object  to  be  attained  by  the  battle;  or  by  a  combination 
of  these. 

797.  It  frequently  happens  that  battles  result  from  the  meetiu"- 
of  armies  in  motion,  both  parties  acting  on  the  ofiensive.  Indeed" 
an  army  that  is  acting  on  the  defensive  may,  on  the  approach  of  the 
enemy,  advance  to  meet  him  while  on  the  march.  Battles  of  this 
kind  may  partake  of  the  mixed  character  of  offensive  and  defensive 
actions,  or  they  may  be  in  the  nature  of  a  surprise  to  both  armies. 

798.  An  order  of  battle  is  the  particular  disposition  given  to  the 
troops  for  a  determined  manoeuvre  on  the  field  of  battle.  A  lin,-  of 
battle  is  the  general  name  applied  to  troops  drawn  up  in  their  usual 
order,  without  any  determined  manoeuvre  ,•  it  may  apply  to  defensive 
positions  or  to  offensive  operations,  where  no  particular  object  has 
been  decided  on.  Military  writers  lay  down  twelve  orders  of  bat- 
tle, viz : 

Lst.  The  simple  parallel  order,  in  which  the  two  armies  occupy 
parallel  lines.  This  is  regarded  as  the  worst  possible  position  for  a 
battle,  for  the  two  parties  here  fight  with  equal  chances,  and  the 
combat  must  continue  until  accident,  superior  numbers,  or  mere 
physical  strength  decides  the  day;  skill  can  have  but  little  influence 
in  such  a  contest. 

2d.  The  parallel  order  with  a  crotchet,  in  which  one  of  the  wings 
is  thrown  forward  or  back,  giving  the  line  this  form.  This  order  is 
sometimes  used  in  defensive  position,  and  in  the  offensive  with  the 
crotchet  thrown  forward.  Wellington,  at  Waterloo,  formed  the  parallel 
order  with  the  retired  crotchet  on  the  right  flank. 

3d.  The  parallel  order  reinforced  on  one  or  both  wings.  This  order 
may  in  certain  cases  secure  the  victory,  but  it  has  many  objections. 
The  weak  part  of  the  line  is  too  near  the  enemy,  and  may,  notwith- 
standing the  efforts  of  the  general  to  the  contrary,  become  engaged, 
and  run  the  risk  of  defeat,  thereby  counterbalancing  the  advantages 
gained  by  having  a  strong  point.  Neither  will  the  reinforced  part  of 
the  line    be  able  to   profit  by  any   success  it  may  gain,  and  take  the 


518  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

enemy's  line  in  flank   and   rear,  without  endangering  its    connection 
with  the  rest  of  the  line. 

4th.  The  parallel  order  reinforced  ou  the  centre.  The  same  objec- 
tions are  applicable  to  this  as  to  the  last. 

5th.  The  simple  oblique  order,  in  which  the  two  lines  are  oblique 
to  each  other. 

6th.  The  oblique  order  reinforced  on  the  assailing  wing.  This  is 
suited  to  an  inferior  army  attacking  a  superior,  for  it  enables  the 
general  to  carry  the  mass  of  his  force  on  a  single  point  of  the  en- 
emy's line,  while  the  weaker  wing  is  out  of  reach  of  inimediatc 
attack,  and  holds  the  remainder  of  the  enemy's  line  in  check  by 
acting  as  a  reserve  ready  to  be  concentrated  on  the  favorable  point 
as  occasion  may  require. 

7th.  The  perpendicular  order  on  one  or  both  wings,  in  which  the 
attacking  force  occupies  one  or  more  lines  perpendicular  to  the  de- 
fensive, and  on  one  or  both  of  its  flanks.  A  battle  may  begin  with 
this  order,  but  soon  it  must  change  to  the  oblique.  An  attack  upon 
both  wings  can  only  be  made  with  safety  when  the  attacking  force 
is  vastly  superior. 

8th.  The  concave  order,  in  which  the  army  occupies  a  curve  con- 
cave to  the  enemy ;  in  this  order  the  wings  are  in  advance  of  the 
centre.  It  may  be  used  with  advantage  in  some  cases  and  in  par- 
ticular localities. 

9th.  The  convex  order,  in  which  the  army  is  disposed  in  a  curve 
convex  to  the  enemy,  the  centre  being  thus  thrown  in  advance  of 
the  wings.  This  order  is  sometimes  formed  to  cover  a  defile,  to 
attack  a  concave  line,  or  to  oppose  an  attack  before  or  after  the  pas- 
sage of  a  river. 

10th.  The  order  by  echelon  on  one  or  both  wings,  in  which  the  army 
is  arranged  in  echelon  from  right  to  left,  or  from  left  to  right.  This 
order  on  one  wing  may  be  frequently  employed  with  advantage j  but 
if  it  be  made  on  both  wings,  there  is  the  same  objection  to  its  use  as  to 
the  perpendicular  order  on  both  wings. 

11th.  The  order  by  echelon  on  the  centre,  in  which  the  centre  is  in 
the  advance,  and  the  wings  are  disposed  in  echelon  to  the  right  and  left. 
This  order  may  be  employed  with  success  against  an  army  formed  in  a 
thin  or  too  extended  line  of  battle,  for  then  it  would  penetrate  and 
break  the  line. 

The  echelon  order  possesses  many  advantages.  The  several  corps 
composing  the  army  may  manoeuvre  separately,  and,  consequently, 
with  greater  ease.  Each  echelon  covers  the  flank  of  the  one  which 
precedes  it;  and  all  may  be  combined  to  eff"ect  a  given  object,  and 
extended  without  weakening  any  part  too  much. 


BATTLES.  519 

12th.  The  combined  orders  of  attack  in  columns  on  the  centre  and 
one  wing  at  the  same  time.  This  is  better  suited  than  either  of  the 
others  for  attacking  a  strong  line. 

799.  No  general  rule  can  be  laid  down  as  to  which  of  these  orders  of 
battle  should  be  employed,  or  whether  either  should  be  exclusively  fol- 
lowed throughout  the  battle.  The  question  must  be  decided  by  the 
general  himself  on  the  ground,  whore  all  the  circumstances  may  be 
duly  considered.  An  order  well  suited  to  one  position  might  be  the 
worst  possible  in  another. 

Whatever  the  plan  adopted  by  the  attacking  general,  he  should 
endeavor  to  dislodge  the  enemy,  hy  piercing  or  turning  his  line.  If  he 
can  conceal  his  real  intentions  and  deceive  the  enemy  respecting  the 
true  point  of  attack,  success  will  be  more  certain. 

800.  We  will  now  discuss  the  particular  manner  of  arranging  the 
troops  on  the  line  of  battle,  or  the  manner  of  employing  each  arm, 
beginning  with  the  infantry,  as  this  is  the  most  important. 

Position  and  formation. — On  the  field  of  battle,  whether  the  object 
be  to  attack  or  defend,  the  infantry  is  divided  into  three  bodies — an 
advanced  guard,  the  main  body,  and  a  reserve.  Their  relative  propor- 
tion will  depend  upon  the  total  force  and  the  Character  of  the  position 
occupied.  The  advanced  guard  must  be  of  sufficient  strength  to  hold 
the  enemy  in  check,  but  at  the  same  time,  the  main  body,  upon  which 
the  brunt  of  the  action  should  fall,  must. not  be  left  of  insufficient  force, 
by  unnecessarily  increasing  the  advanced  guard;  and  the  reserve 
should  be  strong  enough  to  repair  any  disaster  that  may  befall  the 
main  body,  or  to  profit  by  its  success  in  accomplishing  the  complete 
overthrow  of  the  enemy. 

These  three  bodies  are  separated  from  each  other  by  intervals  which 
will  depend  upon  the  nature  of  the  ground.  The  advanced  guard 
occupying  the  front;  the  main  body  at  a  distance  from  one  hundred 
and  fifty  to  three  hundred  paces  in  its  rear;  and  the  reserve  at  a  like 
interval  in  rear  of  the  main  body.  Where  the  ground,  for  example,  is 
undulating,  and  therefore  favorable  to  masking  the  troops  from  the 
enemy's  fire,  these  intervals  may,  if  requisite,  be  reduced  to  eighty  or 
one  hundred  paces. 

The  troops  composing  these  three  bodies  will  be  formed  either  in 
columns  of  battalions,  or  be  deployed,  according  to  the  circumstances 
under  which  they  may  be  placed.  For  an  attack,  for  evolution,  or  for 
defence  against  cavalry,  the  formation  of  columns  of  battalions  is  best. 
To  repel  the  enemy's  attack  by  a  fire,  and  in  some  cases,  to  present  a 
less  favorable  mark  to  his  artillery,  the  battalions  are  deployed.  The 
battalions,  whether  dcpl.)yed  or  in  column,  preserve  the  proper  inter- 


520  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

vals    for  evolutions;   these   intervals   may  be  increased  in  obftructed 
ground  without  weakening  the  defence. 

The  battalions  composing  the  main  body  may  be  drawn  up  in  one  or 
two  lines.  The  latter  usually  obtains  only  when  a  large  force  is  present. 
In  this  case  the  reserve  no  longer  holds  the  position  of  a  third  line,  as 
in  the  other  j  but  forms  an  independent  body,  to  be  used  according  to 
the  emergency,  the  second  line  supporting  the  battalions  of  the  first, 
and,  for  this  purpose,  occupying  positions  to  the  rear  opposite  to  their 
intervals. 

801.  Defence. — When  the  position  is  taken  up  to  receive  the  enemy's 
attack,  and  there  either  to  remain  on  the  defensive,  or  to  assume  the 
oflfensive,  as  circumstances  may  justify,  the  advanced  guard  will  be 
posted  on  the  ground  most  favorable  to  hold  the  enemy  in  check,  and 
so  force  him,  by  disputing  it  with  tenacity,  to  develop  his  means  and 
plans.  This  is  best  done  by  a  judicious  combat  of  skirmishers,  who, 
for  this  purpose,  are  thrown  forward  three  or  four  hundred  paces  to  feel 
the  enemy,  and  are  only  reinforced  when  closely  pressed. 

Whether  the  advanced-guard  shall  maintain  its  ground  obstinately 
until  reinforced  by  the  main  body,  or  whether  it  shall  fall  back,  cither 
on  the  flanks  or  to  the  rear  of  the  main  body,  must  be  determined  by 
the  strength  of  the  position.  If  this  be  so  strong  that  the  enemy's 
loss  in  carrying  it  must  be  great,  then  it  should  be  pertinaciously 
maintained;  in  the  contrary  case  it  must,  after  a  suitable  show  of 
resistance,  be  abandoned. 

As  a  general  rule,  troops  should  be  placed  as  much  out  of  view  as 
practicable,  before  they  go  into  action,  by  taking  advantage  of  covers 
offered  by  the  ground.  The  main  body  should  be  kejDt  masked  in  this 
way  until  it  is  called  to  engage  the  enemy.  If  it  advance  to  support 
the  advanced-guard,  it  will  usually  attack  with  the  bayonet;  if  the 
advanced-guard  is  called  in,  the  main  body  will  usually  receive  the 
enemy  by  its  fire;  the  battalions  being  deployed  for  this  purpose.  If 
the  enemy  is  staggered  by  this  fire,  or,  in  advancing,  shows,  by  the 
wavering  or  confusion  of  his  line,  a  want  of  confidence,  the  fire  may 
be  followed  up  either  by  a  charge  of  the  troops  in  line,  or  they  may  be 
formed  in  columns  of  attack  before  charging,  if  the  enemy  perseveres 
in  his  onward  movement.  A  charge  by  a  column,  when  the  enemy  is 
within  fifty  paces,  will  prove  effective,  if  resolutely  made. 

The  reserve  is  composed  of  the  most  reliable  troops.  It  should  be 
distinguished  for  cool  courage;  acting  under  all  circumstances,  either 
defensive  or  offensive,  with  circumspection  and  determined  resolution. 

As  the  object  of  the  reserve  is  to  infuse  greater  energy  into  the  action 
of  the  main  body,  and,  if  necessary,  to  strike  a  last  and  decisive  blow 
it  should  be  kept  masked  from  the  enemy's  fire  and  view  until  called 


BATTLES.  521 

into  action.  The  proper  moment  for  engaging  the  reserve  is  either 
when  the  enemy  has  been  shaken  in  his  attack  by  the  resistance  offered 
by  the  main  body,  or  when  the  latter  is  unable  farther  to  resist  the 
enemy's  efforts.  If  engaged  too  soon,  the  resistance  offered  to  the 
reserve  may  prevent  its  making  a  decisive  blow;  if  not  engaged  in 
time,  the  main  body  may  be  too  far  exhausted  and  disorganized  to 
rally. 

In  cases  where  the  reserve  forms  a  second  line,  to  support  the  main 
body,  it  should  approach  the  first  line  when  it  becomes  engaged,  to  be 
ready  to  replace  it  when  circumstances  may  render  it  necessary.  The 
advanced-guard,  in  such  cases,  should  retire  to  the  rear,  to  act  as  a 
reserve. 

802.  AffacI:. — In  the  attack  of  infantry,  the  same  fundamental  dis- 
positions are  made  as  for  the  defensive.  The  advanced-guard  will 
not  throw  forward  its  skirmishers  until  they  are  near  enough  to  engage 
the  encn)y.  The  line  of  skirmishers  should  be  strongly  supported,  and 
will  press  the  enemy  witli  vigor  and  without  relaxation.  If  the  force 
engaged  be  small,  the  main  body  will  regulate  its  movements  by  those 
of  the  line  of  skirmishers;  if  considerable,  the  reverse  will  obtain. 

The  main  body  and  reserve  follow  the  advanced-guard  in  colamu, 
preserving  the  requisite  intervals.  The  columns  should  take  every 
advantage  of  the  ground  to  mask  their  movements — getting  rapidly 
over  any  where  the}'  are  much  exposed  to  fire.  So  soon  as  the  ad- 
vanced-guard is  checked,  it  will  fall  back  either  on  the  flanks  of  the 
columns,  or  to  the  rear;  and  the  main  body  will  be  immediately 
brought  into  action,  either  by  deploying  and  ojiening  its  fire,  or  by  a 
vigorous  charge  with  the  bayonet.  If  the  main  body  falters  in  its 
attack,  or  gives  any  signs  of  want  of  resolution,  the  reserve  should  ad- 
vance at  once  through  the  intervals,  and  make  a  vigorous  charge  with 
the  bayonet. 

If  the  attack  by  the  main  body  is  made  with  the  bayonet,  the  inter- 
val between  it  and  the  columns  of  the  reserve  may  be  lessened  to  eighty 
or  one  hundred  paces.  The  flanks  of  the  columns  of  attack,  and  the 
intervals  between  them,  should  be  occupied  by  skirmishers.  This  is  an 
important  precauti<jn;  as,  by  forcing  the  enemy  to  deliver  his  fire 
before  the  columns  have  reached  within  a  «lestructive  range,  the  main 
obstacle  to  their  onward  movement  will  be  removed, 

80.3.  Pursuit. — If  the  assailed  retires,  the  pursuit  may  be  conducted 
with  system  and  in  good  order.  The  line  nearest  the  enemy  wiJi  throw 
forward  a  few  troops  in  pursuit ;  which,  in  most  eases,  will  be  preceded 
by  skirmishers.  The  line  in  close  order  will  follow  thcce  troops  until  It 
attains  a  good  position  to  receive  the  enemy,  should  be  make  an  offen- 
sive movement,  when  it  will  be  halted  and  formed  in  readiness  for  ac- 
44 


522  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

tion.  A  pursuit  by  infantry  alone  cannot  be  pushed  far,  even  should 
the  enemy  retire  without  any  order  or  show  of  resistance,  as  the  re- 
treating force  will  soon  distance  their  pursuers. 

804.  Retreat. — When,  either  in  the  defensive,  or  oflFensive,  it  becomes 
necessary  to  retire,  the  first  point  to  be  attended  to  is  to  withdraw  the 
troops  engaged,  either  to  a  good  position  to  their  rear,  where  they  can 
halt  and  face  the  enemy,  or  else  behind  the  line  in  their  rear,  which 
should  hold  the  assailants  in  check,  and  allow  the  retreating  troops  to 
fall  back  in  good  order.  Having  fairly  got  disengaged,  dispositions 
must  be  promptly  made  to  withdraw  from  the  field.  This  may  be  done 
by  the  entire  force  moving  off  together,  if  the  enemy  shows  no  disposi- 
tion to  follow  up  his  success  with  energy;  or,  in  the  contrary  case,  by 
retiring  by  successive  portions;  the  line  which  withdraws  falling  some 
150  paces  by  the  rear  of  the  one  by  which  it  is  covered,  whilst  falling 
back,  and  then  forming,  to  cover  in  turn  the  retreat  of  the  lattei*. 

The  dispositions  made  in  the  retreat  will  depend  entirely  upon  the 
character  of  the  enemy's  pursuit  and  the  features  of  the  ground.  It 
will  usually  be  made  in  columns,  covered  by  skirmishers,  if  the  pursuit 
is  made  by  infantry  alone ;  if  by  cavalry,  the  retreat  must  be  made 
with  great  circumspection ;  the  troops  retiring  slowly  and  in  good 
order,  adopting  the  formation  against  cavalry;  never  hastening  the 
march,  unless  near  a  good  position  for  defence,  which  should  be  attain- 
ed as  rapidly  as  possible,  unless  closely  pressed  by  the  cavalry. 

If  it  be  necessary  to  continue  the  retreat  for  some  marches,  under  the 
eye  of  the  enemy,  a  rear-guard  must  be  formed;  selecting  from  a  fourth 
to  a  third  of  the  entire  force,  for  this  service.  The  main  duty  of  the 
rear-guard  is  to  hinder  the  enemy  from  pressing  too  closely  on  the 
main  body ;  and  it  should,  therefore,  under  no  circumstances  allow  it- 
self to  be  forced  back  upon  the  main  body.  The  dispositions  adopted 
by  the  rear-guard  will  depend  upon  the  features  of  the  ground;  its. rear 
will  usually  be  covered  by  a  line  of  skirmishers.  The  rear-guard  will 
keep  within  good  supporting  distance  of  the  main  body;  and,  when 
pressed  by  the  enemy,  the  latter,  whenever  a  favorable  position  offers, 
will  halt  and  form,  to  cover  the  former,  and  force  the  enemy  to  greater 
circumspection. 

805.  Measures  for  protracting  an  engagement. — In  the  attack,  as  in 
the  defence,  it  ma}'  frequently  become  an  object  to  protract  an  engage- 
ment, without  coming  to  any  decisive  result;  either  for  the  purpose  of 
holdin^^  a  position  for  a  certain  time,  to  favor  other  objects,  as  the  arri- 
val of  reinforcements ;  or  to  occupy  an  adversary  upon  one  point, 
whilst  a  decisive  blow  is  preparing  on  another.  This  game  can  be 
played  only  upon  ground  favorable  to  alterations  from  the  defensive  to 
the  offensive;  and  should  only  be  intrusted  to   troops  thoroughly  con- 


BATTLES.  523 

versant  with  the  duties  of  skirmishers.  The  main  body  is  kept  some 
two  thousand  paces  to  the  rear  of  the  skirmishers  in  such  affairs;  tak- 
ing advantage  of  the  ground,  and  making  suitable  dispositions  of  the 
troops  to  avoid  the  effects  of  the  enemy's  artillery.  Small  columns  are 
thrown  forward  between  itself  and  the  troops  engaged,  which  take  post 
in  covered  ground,  to  be  on  hand  to  support  the  skirmishers.  The 
troops  engaged  should  be  promptly  reinforced,  when  the  enemy  presses 
onward  ;  and  attempts  should  be  made,  by  charging  him  in  flank,  to 
force  Iiim  to  retire.  The  troops  in  action  should  be  frequently  relieved, 
and  the  opportunity  should  be  seized,  when  the  fresh  troops  come  up, 
to  make  an  onward  movement  on  the  enemy,  and  force  him  from  any 
points  he  may  have  gained. 

806.  De/ence'ttgaiHHt  cavalry. — When  infantry  is  threatened  by  cav- 
alry, the  proper  formation  to  repel  its  charge  is  that  of  squares.  If  but 
one  square  is  formed,  it  must  rely  on  its  own  resources  to  beat  off  the 
enemy;  but  when  there  are  several  they  may  give  mutual  support,  by 
bringing  a  flank  fire  from  one  upon  a  force  advancing,  or  either  of  the 
two  contiguous  to  it.  The  safety  of  infantry  against  cavalry,  will  de- 
pend upon  the  preservation  of  perfect  coolness,  good  order,  and  connec- 
tion in  the  ranks  ;  the  avoidance  of  any  precipitate  movements  which 
might  bring  about  a  surprise ;  and  the  husbanding  of  its  ammunition, 
and  reservation  of  its  fire,  until  the  enemy  is  within  a  deadly  range. 
Well-disciplined  infantry,  whilst  in  position,  and  when  not  exposed  to 
a  fire  of  artillery,  may  securely  trust  to  its  own  resources  to  repulse  the 
best  cavalry,  so  long  as  it  adopts  the  proper  precautions.  If  annoyed, 
as  sometimes  may  happen,  by  the  fire  of  a  few  horsemen,  advanced  to 
draw  the  fire  of  the  squares,  it  will  be  better  to  throw  out  some  skir- 
mishers, ten  or  twelve  paces  from  the  squares,  to  keep  off  such  attacks, 
than  to  open  a  fire  from  the  squares. 

807.  Defence,  etc.,  against ^artiUenj. — Infantry  may  take  advantage, 
either  of  covers  presented  by  the  features  of  the  ground,  or  of  occa- 
sionally shifting  its  position,  to  avoid  the  fire  of  artillery.  Very 
slight  undulations,  obstructions,  like  the  low  banks  along  the  borders 
of  ditches,  will  serve  to  cover  troops,  by  causing  the  shot  to  rise  above 
them.  If  no  covers  are  at  hand,  the  chances  of  casualties,  when 
within  point-blank  range,  may  be  diminished  by  moving  forward,  or 
backward,  some  fifty  paces;  if  the  fire  be  a  ricochet,  the  position 
should  be  shifted  some  fifty  paces  to  the  right  or  left.  The  enemy's 
batteries  may  be  annoyed,  and  sometimes  be  forced  to  change  their 
position,  by  sending  out  good  marksmen,  who  advance  singly  to  within 
some  250  paces  of  them;  when,  lying  down,  they  can  pick  off  the  ofii- 
cers,  men  and  horses. 

808.  Attack  of  artillery.— Whenever  it  is  found  necessary  to  carry  a 


524  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

battery  by  the  bayonet,  the  troops  for  this  duty  are  divided  into  two 
detachments;  one  of  which  is  charged  with  capturing  the  guns,  and 
the  other  with  attacking  the  supports  of  the  battery. 

The  dispositions  made  by  the  detachment  which  moves  against  the 
guns  will  be  the  usual  one  of  skirmishers ;  the  line  surrounding  the 
battery,  and  opening  their  fire  upon  it  when  within  about  250  paces, 
taking  advantage  for  this  purpose  of  any  covers  to  screen  the  men. 
The  supports  of  the  line  of  skirmishers  should  be  kept  well  to  the 
rear,  to  be  ready  against  a  flank  movement  on  the  line.  If  this 
manoeuvre  succeeds  in  drawing  the  fire  of  the  guns,  and  any  confusion 
is  observed  among  the  men,  then  a  rush  must  be  made  immediately 
upon  them  with  the  bayonet. 

The  detachment  against  the  supports  of  the  battefy  will  make  its 
dispositions  according  to  the  kind  of  troops  which  composes  the  sup- 
ports. If  of  infantr}^,  the  detachment  to  seize  the  guns,  divided  into 
two  portions,  will  advance  either  in  line  or  column,  as  may  be  best, 
on  the  flanks  of  the  line  of  skirmishers ;  gradually  getting  in  advance 
of  it,  and  closing  on  the  flanks  of  the  battery,  so  as  to  attack  the  sup- 
ports in  flank ;  or  else  they  may  keep  to  the  rear  of  the  line  of  skir- 
mishers, in  order  to  tempt  the  supports  to  move  forward,  and  thus 
mask  the  fire  of  their  guns.  If  the  supports  are  of  cavah'y,  the 
detachment,  divided  into  two  columns,  will  follow  the  line  of  skir- 
mishers, in  rear  of  the  flanks,  to  cover  it  against  a  charge  of  cavalry. 

CAVALRY. 

809.  Position. — This  arm  is  usually  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  in- 
fantry, on  ground  favorable  to  its  manoeuvres,  and  where  it  will  be 
masked  from  fire  until  the  moment  arrives  to  bring  it  into  action  ; 
here,  if  acting  on  the  defensive,  the  cavalry  watches  its  opportunity 
to  support  the  other  troops,  driving  back  the  enemy,  by  prompt  and 
vigorous  charges,  when  these  are  hard  pressed;  or,  if  on  the  offensive, 
biding  its  time,  to  rush  upon  the  assailant,  and  <?omplete  his  destruc- 
tion, when  his  ranks  commence  to  waver,  or  show  signs  of  disorgani- 
zation from  the  assaults  of  the  other  arms. 

Formation. — The  habitual  formation  of  cavalry  for  the  attack  is  a 
line  of  two  ranks,  with  a  reserve  or  support  in  rear.  The  supports  are 
indispensably  requisite  to  guard  against  those  chances  of  danger  to 
which  cavalry  is  particularly  exposed,  if  attacked  in  turn,  when  in  a 
state  of  partial  disorganization,  after  a  successful  charge,  or  when 
threatened  by  an  offensive  movement  against  its  flanks.  The  supports 
offer  a  safeguard  against  either  of  these  dangers;  for,  if  the  front 
line  is  brought  up  by  the  enemy,   after  a   successful  charge,  it  can 


BATTLES.  525 

retire  and  rally  in  rear  of  the  supports;  and  if  the  enemy  makes  a 
movement  against  the  flanks,  the  supports,  placed  behind  them  and  in 
column,  can  form  and  anticipate  the  enemy's  charge.  For  the  fore- 
going reasons,  cavalry  should  not  give  way  to  a  headlong  pursuit  after 
a  successful  charge,  unless  its  supports  are  at  hand;  and,  in  cases 
where  a  charge  is  made  without  supports,  a  portion  only  should  engage 
in  pursuit,  the  rest  being  rallied  to  form  a  support. 

Cavalry  is  seldom  called  on  to  use  firearms.  When  on  outpost 
service,  or  acting  on  the  defensive  on  ground  unfavorable  to  chai'g- 
ing,  a  portion  of  the  force  may  be  dispersed  as  flankers,  to  hold  the 
enemy  in  check  by  their  fire.  In  this  case  their  movements  Jire 
regulated  in  the  same  waj'  as  other  skirmishers. 

810.  Defences. — The  defensive  qualities  of  cavalry  lie  in  the  offen- 
sive. A  body  of  cavalry  which  waits  to  receive  a  charge  of  cavalry,  or 
is  exposed  to  a  fire  of  infantry,  or  artillery,  must  either  retire  or  be 
destroyed.  This  essential  quality  of  cavalry  renders  its  service  in- 
valuable in  retreats  when  the  enemy  pursues  with  vigor.  In  such  cases 
it  should  be  held  in  constant  readiness  to  take  advantage  of  every  spot 
favorable  to  its  action ;  and  by  short  and  energetic  charges,  force  the 
enemy  to  move  with  circumspection. 

811.  Attdck  ai/ainst  iufantry. — So  long  as  infantry  maintains  its  po- 
sition firmly,  particularly  if  the  ground  is  at  all  unfavorable  to  tlie 
movements  of  cavalry,  the  chances  are  against  a  successful  attack  by 
the  latter.  Cavalry  should  therefore  wait  patiently  until  a  way  is  pre- 
pared for  its  action,  by  the  fire  of  artillery  on  the  enemy's  infantry ;  or 
until  the  infantry  has  become  crippled  and  exhausted  by  being  kept  in 
action  for  some  time;  or  else,  watching  its  opportunity,  make  a  charge 
whilst  the  infantry  is  in  motion,  so  as  to  surprise  it  before  it  can  form 
to  receive  the  attack. 

Cavalry  should  direct  its  charge  on  that  point  of  the  enemy's  in- 
fantry where  it  will  itself  be  exposed  to  the  least  column  of  fire.  If 
the  infantry  is  in  line,  the  charge  should  be  made  on  one  of  its 
flanks;  if  in  square,  on  one  of  the  angles  of  the  square;  and  when 
several  squares  are  formed,  so  as  to  atlord  mutual  support  by  their 
fire,  selecting  the  squares  on  the  flanks  as  most  vulnerable,  t>oui  their 
position. 

The  formation  usually  recommended  for  charging  against  squares, 
is  that  of  three  squadrons  in  line  at  double  distance;  the  leading 
squadron  being  followed  by  the  others,  either  directly  in  its  rear; 
or  else  the  squadrons  may  be  formed  in  echelon,  successively  over- 
lapping each  other,  by  about  the  front  of  a  platoon.  The  angle  of 
the  square  is  charged  by  each  squadron  in  succession,  if  the  charge 
of  the  one  preceding  it  fails ;  the  repulsed  squadrons  each  wheeling  to 


526  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  right  or  left,  on  retiring,  to  leave  the  way  clear  for  its  suc- 
cessor. A  fourth  squadron  in  column  follows  those  in  line,  to  sur- 
round the  square,  and  make  prisoners  if  it  should  he  broken  by  the 
charge. 

To  draw  the  fire  of  the  infantry  before  charging,  a  few  skilful 
flankers  may  be  thrown  forward,  to  open  a  fire  on  the  square. 
Stratagem  may  also  be  tried,  by  moving  along  the  front  of  the 
infantry,  at  some  400  paces,  and  then  charging,  if  it  is  attempted 
to  throw  away  its  fire  at  this  distance.  In  an  attack  where  several 
squares  are  in  line,  if  one  fires  to  second  another  it  should  instantly  be 
changed. 

812.  Attack  against  artillery. — In  attacks  against  artillery,  the  de- 
tachment of  cavalry  should  be  divided  into  three  bodies ;  one-fourth  of 
the  detachment  being  charged  with  carrying  the  guns;  one-half  to 
attack  the  supports  of  the  battery;  and  the  remaining  fourth  acting 
as  a  reserve,  to  cover  the  parties  in  advance,  from  an  offensive  move- 
ment against  their  flanks  or  rear. 

The  party  to  secure  the  guns  make  their  attack  in  dispersed  order 
and  endeavor  to  gain  the  flanks  of  the  battery.  When  the  battery  has 
a  fair  sweep  over  the  ground  along  which  they  must  advance,  they 
should,  by  manoeuvering  and  false  attacks,  try  to  confuse  the  artillerist, 
and  draw  their  fire  before  making  their  charge. 

The  attack  against  the  support  of  the  battery  will  be  directed  in  the 
usual  manner,  the  party  manoeuvering  to  gain  their  flanks. 

ARTILLERY. 

813.  Position. — The  manner  of  placing  artillery  and  its  employment 
must  be  regulated  by  its  relative  importance  under  given  circum- 
stances, with  respect  to  the  action  of  other  arms.  In  the  defen- 
sive, the  principal  part  is  usually  assigned  to  the  artillery ;  and 
the  positions  taken  up  by  the  other  arms  will,  therefore,  be  subordinate 
to  those  of  this  arm.  In  ofi"ensive  movements  the  reverse  generally 
obtains. 

814.  Defence. — In  defensive  positions  the  security  of  the  batteries 
is  of  the  last  importance.  Unless  the  batteries  are  on  points  which  are 
inaccessible  to  the  enemy's  cavalry  and  infantry,  they  must  be 
placed  under  the  protection  of  the  other  troops,  and  be  outflanked 
by  them. 

As  in  the  defensive  we  should  be  prepared  to  receive  the  enemy  on 
every  point,  the  batteries  must  be  distributed  along  the  entire  front  of 
the  position  occupied,  and  on  those  points  from  which  they  can  obtain 
a   good  sweep   over  the   avenues  of  approach   to  it;    the   guns  being 


BATTLES.  527 

masked,  when  the  ground  favors,   from   the  enemy's  view,  until   the 
proper  moment  arrives  for  opening  the  fire. 

The  distance  between  the  batteries  should  not  be  much  over  600 
paces,  so  that  by  their  fire  they  may  cover  well  the  ground  intervening 
between  them,  and  afford  mutual  support;  the  light  guns  being  placed 
on  the  more  salient  points  of  the  front,  from  their  shorter  range  and 
greater  facility  of  manoeuvring;  the  heavier  guns  on  the  more  retired 
points.  Guns  of  various  calibre  should  not  bo  placed  in  the  same 
battery.  A  sufficient  interval  should  also  be  left  between  batteries  of 
different  calibre,  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  judging,  by  the  variations 
in  the  effect  of  the  shot,  of  the  weight  of  metal  of  the  batteries. 

Those  positions  for  battr^ries  should  be  avoided  from  which  the  shot 
must  pass  over  other  troops  to  attain  the  enemy.  And  those  should 
be  sought  for  from  which  a  fii'e  can  be  maintained  until  the  enemy  has 
approached  even  within  good  musket-range  of  them. 

When  the  wings  of  a  position  are  weak,  batteries  of  the  heaviest 
calibre  should  be  placed  to  secure  them. 

A  sufficient  number  of  pieces — selecting  for  the  object  in  view  horse 
artillery  in  preference  to  any  other  —  should  be  held  in  reserve  for  a 
moment  of  need,  to  be  thrown  upon  a  point  where  the  enemy's  progress 
threatens  danger,  or  to  be  used  in  covering  the  retreat. 

The  collection  of  a  large  number  of  pieces  in  a  single  battery  is  a 
dangerous  arrangement,  particularly  at  the  outset  of  an  engagement. 
The  exposure  of  so  man^^  guns  together  might  present  a  strong  induce- 
ment to  the  enemy  to  make  an  effort  to  carry  the  battery  ;  a  feat  the 
more  likely  to  succeed,  as  it  is  difficult  either  to  withdraw  the  guns  or 
change  their  position  promptly,  after  their  fire  is  opened;  and  one 
which,  if  successful,  might  entail  a  fatal  disaster  on  the  assailed,  from 
the  loss  of  so  many  pieces  at  once. 

In  all  defensive  dispositions,  the  ammunition  should  be  most  care- 
fully husbanded.  A  fire  should  never  be  opened  until  the  enemy  is 
within  good  range,  and,  when  once  opened,  be  continued  with  perse- 
verance and  coolness  up  to  the  last  moment  in  which  it  can  be  made 
effective. 

815.  Attack. — In  the  outset  of  offensive  movements,  good  positions 
should  be  selected  for  the  heaviest  pieces,  from  which  they  can  main- 
tain a  strong  fire  on  the  enemy  until  the  lighter  pieces  and  the  columns 
of  attack  are  brought  into  action.  These  positions  should  be  taken  on 
the  flanks  of  the  ground  occupied  by  the  assailant,  or  on  the  centre,  if 
more  favorable  to  the  end  to  be  attained.  In  all  cases,  wide  intervals 
should  be  left  between  the  heavy  batteries  and  the  other  troops,  in 
order  that  the  latter  may  not  suffer  from  the  return  fire  which  the 
assailed  will   probably  open  on   the  batteries.     For  the  same  reason, 


528  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

care  should  be  taken  not  to  place  other  troops  behind  the  point  occu- 
pied by  a  battery,  where  they  would  be  exposed  to  the  return  fire  of 
the  assailed;  when  this  cannot  be  avoided,  the  troops  should  be  so 
placed  as  to  be  covered  by  any  undulation  of  the  ground,  or  else  be 
deployed  in  time  to  lessen  the  effects  of  the  shot. 

The  artillery  which  moves  with  the  column  of  attack  should  be 
divided  into  several  strong  batteries,  as  the  object  in  this  case  is  to 
produce  a  decisive  impression  upon  a  few  points  of  the  enemy's  line, 
by  bringing  an  overwhelming  fire  to  bear  upon  these  points.  These 
batteries  should  keep  near  enough  to  the  other  troops  to  be  in  safety 
from  any  attempts  of  the  assailed  to  capture  them.  Their  usual  posi- 
tions will  be  on  the  flanks,  and  near  the  heads  of  the  columns  of 
attack ;  the  intervals  between  the  batteries  being  sufficient  for  the  fire 
manoeuvres  of  the  other  troops,  in  large  bodies.  The  manoeuvres  of 
these  batteries  should  be  made  with  promptitude,  so  that  no  time  may 
be  lost  for  the  action  of  their  fire.  They  should  get  rapidly  over  unfa- 
vorable ground  to  good  positions  for  firing,  and  maintain  these  as  long 
as  possible;  detaching,  in  such  cases,  a  few  pieces  to  accompany  the 
column  of  attack.  In  all  the  movements  of  the  batteries,  great  care 
should  be  taken  not  to  place  them  so  that  they  shall  in  the  least 
impede  the  operations  of  the  other  troops. 


COURTS    MARTIAL.  529 


Article     XVI. 
CO  URT8     MAETIAL. 

816.  Courts  Martial  are  military  courts  instituted  for  the  investi- 
gation and  punishment  of  all  offences  committed  by  ojicers,  soldiers, 
sutlers,  retainers  to  the  camp,  and  persons  serving  ivifh  the  army,  in 
violation  of  military  law  and  the  custom  of  war.  Their  powers  and 
duties  are  laid  down  in  general  terms  in  the  Articles  of  War,  from 
Article  64  to  91  inclusive. 

817.  Commissioned  officers  clothed  with  military  rank,  and  entitled 
to  command,  are  the  only  persons  in  the  United  States  service  who  are 
eligible  as  members  of  courts  martial;  this  excludes  all  paymasters, 
surgeons,  and  assistant-surgeons  whose  rank  is  only  assimilated. 

818.  Courts  martial  are  of  three  kinds.  General,  Recjimental  and  Gar- 
rison. 

A  general  court  martial  is  competent  to  take  jurisdiction  over  any 
oflFence  of  a  military  nature  that  can  be  committed  by  military  persons; 
and  its  powers  to  award  punishments  are  coextensive  with  this  right. 
Commissioned  officers  are  not  amenable  to  any  other  than  a  general 
court  martial,  and  it  is  provided  bj^  Article  75  of  the  Articles  of  War, 
that  they  shall  not  be  tried  by  officers  of  an  inferior  rank,  if  it  can  bo 
avoided. 

819.  A  general  court  martial  can  only  be  appointed  or  assembled  by 
the  President  of  the  United  States,  by  the  Governor  of  a  State  as  com- 
mander-in-chief of  the  forces  of  the  State,  by  a  general  commanding 
an  army,  or  by  a  general  or  colonel  commanding  a  separate  military 
department.  The  warrant  for  assembling  the  court,  or  the  appointment 
of  the  members  thereof,  is  in  the  form  of  an  order,  and  issues  directly 
from  the  officer  to  whom  the  law  has  delegated  such  power. 

820.  It  is  provided  by  Article  64  of  the  Articles  of  War,  that  general 
courts  martial  may  consist  of  any  number  of  members,  from  five  to 
thirteen  inclusively;  but  they  shall  not  consist  of  less  than  thirteen 
when  that  number  can  be  convened  without  manifest  injury  to  the 
service.  It  is  to  be  observed,  however,  that  the  officer  empowered  to 
appoiut  a  court  ia  iuvested  with  disurotionary  authority  as  to  the  uuia> 

4o 


blM)  MAM  AL    FOH    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

ber  of  officers  whicli  Hhall  oi.mpoBC  it,  and  their  rank  relatively  to  that 
of  the  accused. 

821.  The  proceedings  and  decisions  of  general  courts  martial  are 
subjoct  to  review  or  revision  by  the  officer  ordering  the  .-^aine.  or  the 
officer  coniinajiding  the  troops  for  the  time  luing.  In  the  United 
States  service  no  htntenci-  of  a  general  court  niar:ial  in  time  of  peace, 
extending  to  the  loss  of  life,  or  the  dismission  of  a  coramisaiuncd  officer  ; 
or  which  fhull,  either  in  time  of  peace  of  war,  respect  a  general  officer, 
cannot  l>e  carried  into  execution,  until  after  the  whole  proceedings 
shall  have  been  transmitted  to  the  Secretary  of  War,  to  be  laid  before 
the  President  of  the  United  States  tor  hi»  confirmation  or  disnpproval, 
and  orders  iu  the  case.  All  other  sentences  may  be  confirmed  and  exe- 
cuted by  the  officer  onlcring  the  court,  or  the  commanding  officer  for 
the  time  being,  as  the  case  may  be.  Every  officer  authorised  to  order 
a  general  court  martial  shall  have  power  to  panlon  or  mitigate  any 
punishment  onlered  by  such  court,  except  the  sentence  of  death,  or  of 
cashiering  an  officer. 

822.  Regimental  and  garrison  courts  martial  take  cognizance  of  and 
punish  officers  of  minor  degree.  The  regimental  court  martial  is  or- 
dered by  the  colonel  or  other  commauder  uf  the  regiment,  for  the  trial 
of  offences  in  the  regiment;  it  consists  of  three  commis»ioned  officers. 

(larrison  cotirts  martial  are  in  like  manner  composed  of  three  eoni 
missioned   officers,   and   appointed    by   the    commanders   of    garri^on^, 
forts,  barracks,  or  other  places,  where  the  troops  consist  of  mixed  corps. 

The  proceedings  of  regimental  and  garrison  courts  martial  arc  sub- 
niittod  to  the  olficers  ordering  them,  or  to  their  succes.<'or.s  in  command, 
for  revision  and  decision  on  the  sentences  pronounced.  The  jurisdic- 
dictiou  of  these  courts  is  very  limited,  and  can  in  no  case  extend  to  the 
trial  of  capital  cases  or  commissioned  officers. 


THE     TRIAL. 

823.  A  court  martial  haviog  l>een  deemed  necessary  to  investigate 
the  conduct  of  an  officer  ur  soldier,  against  whom  a  charge  has  been 
preferred,  the  order  appointing  the  members  and  judge  advocate  to 
compose  the  same,  as  well. as  the  time  and  place  of  meeting,  ie  duly 
promulgated. 

When  the  hour  has  arrived  lor  assembling,  the  members  of  the  court 
martial  take  their  places  at  the  table  according  to  rank,  on  the  right 
and  left  of  the  president,  the  latter  at  the  head  of  the  table.  The 
judge  advocate  is  seated  opposite  to  the  president.  The  prisoner  and 
his  council  ( if  he  ha*  any )  hMX«  a  place  a»digaed.  with  the  aeoeaaary 


roURTS    MARTIAL.  531 

arcomniodation  for  writing,  on  the  right  band  of  the  judge  advocate. 
The  wirnffu  *tand?  near  the  judge  advocate,  on  hi?  left  hand.  In  case 
a  third  party,  as  prosecutor,  fihoHld  be  permitted  to  appear,  be  will  be 
placed  to  the  left  of  the  judge  advocate.  The  court  being  peafod  and 
called  to  order,  no  mom>>er  can  leave  hi?  seat  without  the  ixrinission 
of  the  president. 

It  jc  u?ual  for  the  ju'ige  ailvf.cate  to  prepare  a  copy  of  the  charges 
for  the  u?e  '"f  the  court,  which  i.«  |)]aced  upon  the  lablc  previous  to  the 
arraignment. 

The  court  having  been  called  to  order,  and  any  preliminary  matter 
which  may  have  rcf^uired  their  attention  being  dis^pofjcd  of,  it  is  pro- 
claimed ((pen.     The  iiarties  arc  then  called,  and  appear  in  court. 

The  pri.«fmer,  unle??  there  be  danger  of  escape  or  re?cue,  must  appear 
without  fetters,  and  free  from  shackleB  of  any  kind  .-  when  the  court 
adjourn?,  the  pri?oner,  if  a  soldier,  i?  remanded  to  the  hands  of  the 
guard. 

The  judge  advocate  now  read?  the  order  for  the  afsembling  of  the 
court.  It  i?  proper  al?o  to  read  the  charges  to  be  investigated,  so  that 
the  court  may  have  before  them  the  matter  which  they  are  about  to 
?wear  that  thej-  will  "truly  try  and  determine.*' 

824.  The  order  for  convening  the  court  having  been  read,  the  judge 
advocate  asks  the  prisoner  if  he  ha?  any  objection  to  any  member 
present,  named  in  the  order,  or  any  cau.se  of  challenge  to  present. 

Peremptory  challenge  or  challenge?  arc  not  permitted,  but  the  pris- 
oner must  ag?ign  hi?  reasons  in  writing,  or  if  brief,  the  judge  advocate 
will  record  them  as  stated. 

In  case  a  member  should  be  challenged  (and  only  one  can  be  chal- 
lenged at  a  time),  the  reasons  therefor,  and.  when  susceptible  of  such, 
the  reply  or  explanation  offered,  are  committed  to  writing  as  a  part  of 
the  minute?  of  the  court,  and  make  a  portion  of  the  proceedings  ;  and 
the  court  i?  cleared  in  order  to  deliberate  and  decide  on  the  objection 
assigned.  The  member  objected  to  always  withdraws  during  the  dis- 
cussion which  follows,  and,  of  course,  doe?  not  vote  on  the  question. 
Upon  the  reopening  of  the  court,  the  judge  advocate  (by  direction  of 
the  court)  makes  known  the  decision,  and  the  challenged  member 
resumes  his  seat,  or  withdraws  altogether,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  a 
member  in  waiting,  or  supernumerary,  if  any  be  detailed,  supplies  his 
place. 

The  judge  advocate  cannot  be  challenged  on  any  pretence  whatever. 

825.  The  judge  advocate  then  proceeds  to  administer  the  prescribed 
oath;  the  members  of  the  court,  and  the  judge  advocate,  stand,-  the 
person  or  persons  to  be  sworn  lift  the  right  hand,  ungloved,  when  the 
judge  advocate  recites  in  an  audible  voice :  *'  You,  Colonel  A.  B.,  Major 


532  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

B»  C,  Major  B.  F.,  and  Captain  G.  H.  (thus  naming,  with  his  rank, 
each  member  of  the  court),  do  swear  that  you  will  well  and  truly  try 
and  determine,"  etc.,  etc.  "  So  help  you  God."  (See  69th  Article  of 
War.) 

The  presiding  officer  then  administers  the  oath  to  the  judge  advo- 
cate, who  observes  the  same  form  5  during  which  time  all  the  members 
of  the  court  remain  standing,  and  observe  the  most  decorous  silence 
and  attention. 

The  same  oath  pi'escribed  to  be  taken  by  the  members  of  a  general 
court  martial,  is  directed  to  be  taken  by  the  members  of  a  regimental 
and  garrison  court  martial.  No  particular  oath  of  secrecy  is  required 
of  the  recorder,  as  he  is  a  member  of  the  court. 

Whenever  several  persons  are  to  be  tried  by  the  same  court  martial, 
upon  different  charges,  the  court  must  be  resworn  at  the  commence- 
ment of  each  trial,  and  the  record  of  each  case  made  up  separately 
and  signed  by  the  president  and  judge  advocate. 

826.  The  court  having  been  sworn  in  tlie  presence  of  the  prisoner, 
the  judge  advocate  read-*  the  cliarge  to  the  prisoner  in  open  court, 
whom  the  judge  advocate  arraigns,  by  addressing  by  his  proper  title  or 
rank,  ami  name.  "You  have  heard  the  charges  preferred  against  you; 
how  say  you — guilty,  or  not  guilty?" 

The  prisoner  may  plead  guilty  or  not  guilty;  but  it  must  be  made 
simply  and  unqualified,  as  nothing  exculpatory  can  at  this  time  be 
received.  No  specidf  justification  can  be  offered  as  a  plea,  as  such 
would  be  an  anticipation  of  the  defence.  He  may  stand  mute,  that  is, 
refuse  to  answer;  or  answer  foreign  to  the  purpose;  or  may  plead  in 
bar  of  trial. 

The  ordinary  plea  is  "not  guilty,"  upon  which  the  trial  proceeds. 
The  plea  being  recorded,  the  judge  advocate  calls  the  first  witness,  and 
gives  notice  that  should  there  be  any  persons  present  in  court  who 
have  been  summoned  as  witnesses,  they  will  retire  until  called  for,  as  it 
is  a  rule  that  the  witnesses  of  neither  party  can  be  present  during  the 
examination  of  other  witnesses. 

827.  The  witness  is  sworn  by  the  judge  advocate,  and  the  same  form 
of  administering  the  oath  is  observed  as  was  indicated  for  swearing  in 
of  the  members.  The  words  are:  "You  do  swear  (or  aflfirmj  that  the 
evidence  you  shall  give  in  the  cause  now  in  hearing,  shall  be  the  truth, 
the  Avhole  truth,  and  nothing  but  the  truth,  so  help  you  God." 

The  name,  rank,  regiment,  or  corps,  or  distinctive  condition  of  the 
witness  is  recorded  by  the  judge  advocate  at  length,  so  that  the  person 
may  b}^  the  description  be  easily  identified. 

The  examination  of  the  witnesses  is  always  in  the  presence  of  every 
member  of  the  court;    and  the  ''countenance,  looks  and  gestures  of  a 


COURTS    MARTIAL.  538 

witness"  are  considered  of  importance  as  adding  to  or  taking  from  the 
weight  of  his  testimony.  The  testimony  is  sometimes  given  in  the 
form  of  a  narrative,  but  more  frequently  by  interrogations.  Narration 
in  many  cases  is  the  most  natural  and  easy  method  to  observe,  but 
interrogation  is  the  more  direct  and  searching  means  of  soliciting  evi- 
dence, and  also  the  more  certain.  All  evidence  received  is  recorded  in 
tbe  order  in  which  it  is  given,  and  as  nearly  as  may  be  in  the  very 
words  of  the  witness.  In  case  a  witness  should  be  too  ill  to  attend  the 
court,  the  latter  may  adjourn  to  the  room  or  bedside  of  the  former 
to  receive  his  evidence.  Questions  are  reduced  to  writing  by  the  party 
originating  them,  and  rea<l  aloud  by  the  judge  advocate,  who  writes 
them  on  the  proceedings.  Should  an  objection  be  made  to  a  question 
on  examination,  the  court  is  cleared,  and  a  majority  of  voices  deter- 
mines whether  it  shall  be  put  or  not. 

A  question  having  been  rejected,  is  not,  therefore,  expunged  from  the 
record,  of  which  it  makes  a  part,  unless  by  consent  of  the  parties 
before  the  court,  but  appears  on  the  record,  with  the  decision  of  the 
court.  A  jiarty  before  the  court  cannot  object  to  a  question  put  by  the 
court,  though  he  may  to  a  question  put  by  a  member  of  it,  before  the 
collective  opinion  of  the  court  has  been  expressed  in  relation  to  it.  All 
questions  originating  with  members,  and  which  have  been  received, 
are  recorded  as  "%  the  court,''  but  when  made  the  subject  of  discus- 
sion, and  rejection,  they  are  entered  upon  the  record  as  ^'hy  a  member." 

When  a  witness  is  sworn,  the  party  who  calls  him  commences  the 
examination,  which  is  styled  the  examination  in  chief;  that  being 
tinished,  the  opposite  party  asks  what  questions  he  may  deem  neces- 
sary, and  this  latter  interrogation  is  called  the  cross-examination.  A 
re-examination  of  the  witness,  by  the  first  party,  follows  the  cross- 
examination,  upou  such  points  as  the  latter  may  have  touched  on,  and 
then  the  court  put  sucli  ((uestions  as  they  may  deem  requisite  to  elicit 
the  whole  truth. 

The  examination  of  the  witness  having  been  completed,  his  evidence, 
if  deemed  necessary  by  the  court,  or  if  desired  by  him,  is  I'ead  over 
previous  to  his  leaving,  to  give  him  the  opportunity  of  correcting  any 
errors  therein.  Aceordingly.  any  remai'k  or  explanation,  with  such  a 
view,  is  entered  on  the  proceedings;  but  no  erasure  or  obliteration  of 
what  has  been  previousl3'  stated  can  be  made. 

Should  either  party  perceive,  after  having  concluded  his  case,  that  a 
material  question  has  been  omitted,  he  submits  it  to  the  court,  who  will 
always  allow  it  to  be  put. 

The  witnesses  called  by  the  prosecutor  having  been  examined,  and 
all  the  evidence  to  substantiate  the  charges  submitted  to  the  court,  the 
prisoner  enters  upon  his  defence.     Should  it  be  necessary  for  prepara- 


534  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

tion,  the  court,  at  the  request  of  the  prisoner,  would  grant  time  to 
enable  him  to  proceed  with  more  certainty  or  precision. 

Witnesses  for  the  defence  are  examined  in  the  same  order  as  those 
presented  on  the  part  of  the  execution.  The  prosecutor  cross- 
examines,  and  the  prisoner  re-examines  to  the  same  extent  jillowod  to 
the  prosecutor. 

828.  The  examination  of  witnci-ses  having  been  closed,  the  prisoner 
takes  his  time  to  address  the  court,  when,  by  argument  and  statement 
of  facts  as  shown  in  the  evidence,  he  presents  to  the  court  every  con- 
t-'idoration  which  may  tend  to  weaken  the  force  of  the  prosecution. 
The  greiitc^t  liberty  consistent  with  strict  propriety,  especially  in 
regard  to  third  persons  not  before  the  court,  is  at  all  times  allowed  a 
)iris(iner:  and  he  therefore  may  impeach,  by  evidence,  the  character  of 
witnesses  brought  against  him,  aud  remark  on  their  testimony  and 
the  m<»tive8  by  which  they  and  the  prosecutor  appear  to  have  been 
actuated.  C<iarsc  and  insulting  language  cannot,  however,  be  tol- 
erated. 

Should  either  party,  in  the  course  of  their  examination  of  the 
witnesses,  or  by  bringing  forward  new  ones  for  that  purpose,  introduce 
new  matter,  the  opposite  one  has  the  ri^'ht  of  calling  other  witnesses 
to  rebut  such  new  unitter. 

The  address  (or  defence)  of  the  prisoner,  prepared  subsequent  to  the 
reception  of  all  the  testimony,  is  read  by  the  prisoner,  or  if  any  cause 
should  prevent  his  s<.  doing,  it  may  be,  at  the  retjuest  of  the  prisoner, 
rea<i  by  his  counsel,  the  judge  advocate,  or  a  military  friend. 

The  judge  advocate,  or  the  prosecutor,  can  always  claim  the  right  of 
replying  to  the  defence  of  the  prisoner,  and  the  court  will  generally 
grant  a  reasonable  time  for  the  preparation  of  it.  Whun  the  reply  has 
been  read,  the  trial  is  closed.  Should  the  prisoner  have  examined 
witnesses  as  to  matter  nut  touched  upon  in  the  course  of  the  j^rosecu- 
tion  :  or  should  he  have  reflected  ujioij  the  crcilibility  of  the  prosecu- 
tor's evidence,  the  prosecutor  is  allowed  to  examine  witnesses  to  the 
new  matter,  and  for  the  re-establishment  of  the  character  of  his 
witnesses. 

F  I N  D  I  \  (J  . 

829.  The  charges  having  been  investigated  by  the  production  aud 
examination  of  all  the  evidence  which  the  parties  have  deemed  neces- 
sary, it  is  now  the  business  of  the  court  to  decide  upon  the  question  of 
guilt. 

It  is  necessury,  however,  before  proceeding  to  this  stage  of  the  trial, 
that  each  and  every  allegation  made  against  the  prisoner  should  be 
fully  inquired   into;  and   this,  too,  entirely  without  reference  to   the 


COURTS    MARTIAL.  535 

proof  of  any  one  item,  which  mij^ht  even  call  for  the  uttermost  sen- 
tence which  a  court  martial  can  award,  either  against  the  life  or  the 
commission  of  the  oflender:  and  so,  too,  must  a  distinct  judgment  he 
pronounced  upon  every  specification  adduced  in  support  of  the 
charges. 

Every  member  should  fullj'  satisfy  himself  of  the  extent  and  value 
of  the  testimony-  on  record :  and,  for  this  purpose,  a  fair  copy  of  the 
proceedings  is  laid  upon  the  table,  or  read  over  by  the  judge  advocate, 
for  the  convenience  of  jeference,  and  to  make  certain,  while  the  sub- 
ject or  particulars  of  the  evidence  is  still  fresh  in  the  minds  of  the 
member,*,  that  such  copy  is  a  faithful  transcript  of  the  same. 

This  is  of  importance  when  the  case  is  intricate,  or  the  testimony 
voluminous;  and  it  is  also  a  very  useful  practice  for  the  judge  advo- 
cate, in  such  cases,  to  prepare  an  index,  or  short  notes  of  the  evidence, 
in  order  that  reference  to  the  record  may  be  made  more  easy. 

It  is  competent  for  the  court  at  this  stage  of  the  proceedings,  to  call 
back  a  witness  for  the  purpose  of  asking  any  particular  question 
thou;^'ht  neceg-sary;  but  the  ])arties  must  be  present  during  such  further 
examination.  Indcecl.  before  the  finding,  the  court  can  recall  a  witness 
at  any  time. 

8:}0.  The  court  having  had  sufficient  time  for  a  re-examination  of 
the  evidence,  if  neces.sary,  and  for  deliberation  and  free  discussion,  the 
president,  having  ascertained  that  every  member  is  ready  to  give  his 
opinion,  signifies  to  the  judge  advocate  to  proceed.  The  latter  then 
reads,  in  consecutive  order,  the  specifications  to  each  charge,  and 
addresses  each  member,  beginning  with  the  youngest:  "From  the 
evidence  in  the  matter  now  before  you,  how  say  you  of  the  specifica- 
tion or  charge — is  the  prisoner  guilty  or  not  guilty?"  The  vote  upon 
each  specification  of  the  charge  having  been  given  and  recorded,  the 
opinion  on  the  charge  is  then  given,  and  so  on  in  succession  for  all  the 
specifications  and  charges  which  have  been  the  subject  of  investiga- 
tion. In  order  to  avoid  the  exposure  of  each  individual  opinion  as  his 
vote  is  given,  the  members  write  upon  slips  of  paper  the  opinion, 
gidlfy  or  not  ffttHty,  and  hand  them  to  the  judge  advocate,  who,  after 
receiving  every  vote,  arranges  them,  and  announces  the  verdict.  As 
the  vote  of  each  member  is  given,  the  judge  advocate  makes  a  minute 
of  the  same,  which  should  be  carefully  retained  by  him,  to  meet  the 
possible  contingency  of  proceedings  in  the  common  law  courts,  touch- 
ing the  legality  of  the  acts  of  the  court  martial. 

The  majority  of  the  voices  deftermines  the  conviction  or  acquittal  of 
the  prisoner,  except  in  such  cases  as  when  (upon  conviction)  the  law 
absulutely,  and  without  any  discretion  in  the  court,  condemns  him  to 
suffer  death.     In  all  such  cases,  a  two-third  vote  is  necessary  to  convic- 


536  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

tion,  and  the  record  must  e.x))lifitly  state  that  two-tbirds  of  the  court 
concurred  in  the  finding. 

Should  it  happen,  by  the  organization  of  the  court,  or  from  the  acci- 
dent of  sickness  or  death  of  any  of  the  uierabers,  that  there  is  an 
equality  of  votes  upon  the  finding,  the  douht  must  bo  resolved  in  favor 
of  the  prisoner,  and  he  must  have  the  benefit  of  acquittal. 

831.  Tiie  degree  of  guilt  of  whieh  the  jirisoner  is  found,  or  the  extent 
to  which  the  charge  is  proved,  ought  to  be  well  defined  and  clearly 
expressed,"  and  so,  likewise,  the  mode  of  duijlaring  the  prisoner  ac- 
quitted, is  a  matter  of  some  importance.  Acipiittals  which  are  charac- 
terized by  the  terms,  houorabh/,'  iiiotit  honoruhlif :  fidly;  or  mont  fnlli/, 
should  be  employed  when  the  nature  of  the  charge  makes  them  neces- 
sary; but  ill  general,  when  no  circumstances  exist  which  call  for 
emphatic  opininions,  a  simple  verdict  of  ac<|uittal  is  the  better  formula. 
To  declare  that  the  charges  <irc  not  prond  is  improper. 

In  the  deliberation  of  the  court  upon  the  finding  to  be  declared, 
it  is  proper  to  observe  the  distinctions  which  may  be  made  lictwccn  the 
crime  as  alleged  in  the  charge,  and  the  degree  of  ofl"encc  proved.  A 
court  martial,  therefore,  may,  in  some  instances,  find  a  prisoner  guilty 
of  the  oflVnce  in  a  less  degree  than  that  stated.  But  a  court  martial, 
although  empowered  to  find  him  guilty  in  a  less  degree,  cannot  find  a 
higher  degree  t)f  guilt  than  that  alleged  in  the  charge. 

The  finding  declared  by  a  majority,  or  specifi<-  proportion  of  all  the 
court,  when  the  law,  iu  jiarticular  oflTcnces,  requires  such,  is  the  decision 
of  the  court,  and  the  minority  are  bouud  by  it. 

OF    THE    SENTENCE. 

832.  The  court,  having  determined  the  finding  of  innocence  or  guilt 
of  the  prisoner,  proceed  to  the  conclusion  of  their  labors  by  pronouncing 
an  acquittal,  or  affixing  the  punishment,  according  to  the  nature  and 
degree  of  the  offence. 

Whatever  may  have  been  the  opinion  of  a  member  as  to  the  finding 
of  the  court,  he  muf-t.  upon  a  conviction  being  declared  by  the  legal 
number  of  votes,  give  his  opinion  as  to  the  nature  and  degree  of  pun- 
ishment, and  apportion  the  same  according  to  the  degree  of  crime  of 
whieh  the  majority  have  found  the  prisoner  guilty.  The  minority  then 
act  independently  of  their  individual  opinions,  and  award  punishment 
according  and  adequate  to  the  offence  of  the  accused.  If  the  prisoner 
has  been  convicti.'d  of  a  particular  offence,  for  which  punishment  is  pre- 
scribed by  law.  every  member  must  vote  the  punishment  which  the  law 
has  prescribed.  In  cases  not  provided  for  Vjy  special  penalty,  it  is 
of  importance  to  the  court  to  consider  what  kinds  and  degrees  of  pun- 


M 


COURTS    MARTIAL.  537 

isbment  are  legally  applicable  to  the  case,  and  none  should  be  inflicted 
except  such  as  are  in  accordance  with  the  custom  of  war  in  like  cases, 
or  the  common  law  of  the  land. 

833.  In  passing  sentence,  courts  martial  should  be  careful  to  employ 
clear  and  unambiguous  language,  so  that  the  kind  and  degree  of 
punishment  shall  be  set  forth  deiinitely  and  precisely  ;  and  the  mode 
of  inflicting  capital  punishment  should  be  designated.  The  military 
laws  do  not  say  -how  a  criminal,  oflfending  against  such  laws,  shall 
be  put  to  death,  but  leave  it  to  the  custom  of  war.  Shooting  or  hnng- 
ing  is  the  method  determined  by  such  custom.  A  spy  is  generally 
banged;  and  mutiny,  accompanied  with  loss  of  life,  is  punished  by  the 
same  means.  Desertion,  disobediewe  of  orders,  or  other  military 
crimes,  usually  by  shooting. 

CONFIRMATION     OF     SENTENCE  —  REVISION. 

8.T4.  When  the  proceedings  of  a  court  martial  are  submitted  to  the 
officer  ordering  the  same,  for  his  confirmation  or  disapproval  and  or- 
ders, it  becomes  his  duty  to  peruse,  in  the  most  careful  manner,  the 
record  of  the  court,  and  to  ascertain  any  error  which  may  have  been 
admitted.  Or  should  the  record  be  found  perfect  in  all  its  parts,  he  is 
to  signify  his  decision  thereon,  and  give  his  orders  accordingly.  But 
if  any  mistake  or  error  in  the  conduct  of  the  trial  be  presented  to  view, 
the  proceedings  of  the  court  may  be  sent  back  to  them  for  revision. 
The  officer  who  directs  the  court  to  reconvene,  to  reconsider  its  original 
opinion,  points  out,  at  the  same  time,  the  particular  cause  which  makes 
a  reconsideration  necessary:  and  the  court  is  therefore  bound  to  re- 
examine, with  <leliberation  and  care,  the  reasons  upon  which  the  former 
opinions  rested.  The  principal  cause  for  requiring  courts  martial  to  re- 
vise their  judgments  is  when  an  insufficient  or  undue  weight  has  been 
given  to  the  testimony,  and  is  supposed  to  arise  from  inadvertence, 
misconception  -of  the  law,  or  the  custom  o4"  war;  or  where  an  exorbi- 
tant, inadequate,  or  illegal  punishment  has  been  awarded. 

Every  officer  having  authority  to  review  the  proceedings  of  courts 
martial,  has  power  to  suspend  the  execution  of  the  sentence,  to  pardon 
or  mitigate  any  punishment  ordered  by  such  court.  He  cannot,  how- 
ever, alter  or  commute  the  punishment,  even  with  the  consent  of  the 
party  sentenced. 

OF     THE     JUDGE     ADVOCATE. 

835.  By  the  laws  of  the-  United  States  it  is  made  the  duty  of  the 
judge  advocate  to  "prosecute   in   the  name  of  the  United  States,  but 


* 


538  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

shall  so  far  consider  himself  as  counsel  for  the  prisoner,  after  the  said 
prisoner  shall  have  made  his  plea,  as  to  object  to  any  leading  question 
to  any  of  the  witnesses,  or  any  question  to  the  prisoner,  the  answer  to 
which  might  tend  to  criminate  himself;  and  administer  to  each  mem- 
ber of  the  court,  before  they  proceed  upon  any  trial,  the  following  oath, 
which  shall  also  be  taken  by  all  the  members  of  the  regimental  and 
garrison  courts  martial.'' 

The  charges  upon  which  a  prisoner  is  to  be  tried  having  been  placed 
in  the  hands  of  the  judge  advocate,  he  is  to  ascertain  what  witnesses 
or  evidence  will  be  necessary,  both  for  the  prosecution  and  defence, 
and  thereupon  summon  every  person  whose  testimony  may  be  required. 
This  duty  should  be  performed  at  the  earliest  period  possible,  to  avoid 
any  delay  in  the  proceedings.  He  is  to  furnish  the  accused  party  with 
a  copy  of  the  charges  as  soon  as  possible,  or  ascertain  if  such  has  been 
transmitted  to  him  from  another  source;  and  should  any  alteration 
be  made  in  the  charges,  the  prisoner  should  be  immediately  apprized 
of  it. 

Between  the  adjournment  of  one  daj',  and  the  meeting  on  the  next, 
the  judge  advocate  prepares  a  fair  copy  of  the  proceedings,  which, 
upon  the  reasscmbliug  of  the  court,  is  read  over. 

The  business  of  the  court  having  been  concluded,  the  record  of  the 
proceedings  is  signed  by  the  president  of  the  court,  and  countersigned 
by  the  judge  advocate. 

836.  The  duties  of  a  judge  advocate  before  a  court  of  inquii'y  are  in 
many  respects  the  same  as  officiating  before  a  general  court  martial, 
though  of  limited  extent. 

A  court  of  inquiry  may  be  composed  of  from  one  to  three  officers, 
with  a  judge  advocate,  or  suitable  person  as  recorder,  to  reduce  the 
proceedings  and  evidence  to  writing;  all  of  whom  are  to  be  sworn  ac- 
cording to  a  prescribed  oath.     (See  95th  Article  of  War.) 

The  judge  advocate  prepares  the  case  for  investigation.  He  sum- 
mons the  necessary  witnesses,  and  gives  notice  to  the  parties  interest- 
ed, as  to  the  place  and  time  of  meeting.  He  swears  the  witnesses  in 
the  same  way  as  they  are  sworn  before  a  court  martial,  and  he  records 
the  testimun}^  and  keeps  the  proceedings  from  day  to  day- 

Tbe  business  of  the  coui-t  having  been  completed,  the  record  will  be 
authenticated  b^y  the  signatures  of  the  president  and  the  judge  advo- 
cate, and  by  the  latter  transmitted  to  the  authority  by  which  the  court 
Was  convened. 


COURTS    MARTIAL.  589 

837.  Form  of  order  for  conveninr/  a  general  court  martini. 

Adjutatit-Geiieral's  Office, 
Washington,  Jan.  — ,  18 — . 
General  Orders,  ) 
No.  — .  ) 

A  general  court  martial  will  assemble  at ,  at  ten  o'clock,  A.  m., 

the  15th  instant,  or  as  soon  thereafter  as  practicable,  for  the  trial  of 
,  and  such  prisoners  as  may  be  brought  before  it. 

Detail  for  the  court. 

1.  Colonel  A.  B 1st  Regiment  of  Infantry. 

2.  Colonel  C.  D 2d  "  ''    Cavalry. 

.3.  Major  E.  F 3d  "  "   Artillery. 

4.  Major  G.  H 5th         "  "    Infantry. 

5.  Captain  L,  M 1st         "  "    Dragoons. 

6.  Captain  N.  0 4th         "  "   Infantry. 

7.  Etc.,  etc.,  etc 

Captain  P.  S.,  of  the  2d  regiment  of  artillery,  is  appointed  the  judge 

advocate  of  the  court. 

Should  any  of  the  officers  named   in   the   detail   be  prevented  from 

attending  at  the  time  and  place  specified,  the  court  will  nevertheless 

proceed  to,  and  continue  the  business  before  it,  provided  tlie  number  of 

members  present  be  not  less  than  the  juiniinnm  prescribed  by  law — the 

above  being  the  greatest  number  [when  the  court  is  coniponed  of  less 

than  thirteen  members]  that  can  be  convened  without  manifest  injury  to 

the  service. 

By  command  of  Major-General  S. 

S.  C,  Adjutant- General. 

838.  Form  of  the  procecdinr/s  of  a  general  court  martial. 
Proceedings  of  a  general  court  martial,  convened  at ,  by  virtue 

of  the  following  order,  viz: 

{Here  iiiscrt  the  order.) 

—  o'clock,  A.  M.,  Jan.  15th,  18 — . 
The  court  met  pursuant  to  the  above  order.     Present: 

Colonel  A.  B 1  ^t  Regiment  of  Infantry. 

ColonelC.D 2d  "  "Cavalry. 

Major  E.F 3d  "  ''Artillery. 

MajorG.H 5th        "  "Infantry. 

Captain  L.  M 1st         "  ''    Dragoons. 

Etc.,  etc 

Etc.,  etc 

Captain  P.  S.,  of  the  2d  regiment  of  artillery,  judge  advocate. 
Captain  T.  W.,  8th  regiment  of  infantry,  the  accused,  also  present. 


540  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

The  judge  advocate  having  read  the  order  convening  the  court,  asked 
Captain  T.  W.  if  he  had  any  objection  to  any  member  named  therein, 
to  which  he  replied — 

{If  any  chaUeixje  is  made,  it  >iinnt  be  note,  and  to  one  memher  at  a  time.) 
The  court  was    then    duly  sworn    by  the  judge  advocate,    and    the 
judge  advocate  was  duly  sworn  by  the  presiding  officer  of  the  court, 
in  the  presence  of  the  accused. 

[It  is  at  this  .sfaf/e  of  the  proceedings  that  the  accused  makes  his  request 
for  the  privilege  of  introdacinij  his  coutisel,  and  ivill  also,  if  he  desires  it, 
state  his  reasons  for  postpo)tcment  of  the  trial.  These  matters  heinrj  set- 
tled, the  court 2>roc€eds.) 

The  charges  were  read  aloud  by  the  judge  advocate.  Judge  advocate 
{addressinfj  the  accused)  :  "Captain  T.  W.,  you  have  heard  the  charge, 
or  charges,  preferred  against  you  ;  how  say  you — guilty  or  not  guilty?" 
To  which  the  accused,  Captain  T.  AV.,  pleaded  as  follows: — {The 
j'ltdi/e  advocate  here  ylves  notice,  that  should  there  he  any  persons  present 
in  court,  who  have  been  summoned  as  uritiiesscs,  they  inust  retire  and  u-ait 
until  called  for.) 

Capt.  D.  N,,  second  regiment  of  artillery,  a  witness  on  the  part  of 
the  prosecution,  was  duly  sworn. 

Question  by  the  judge  advocate. ? 

Answer. . 

Question. ? 

Answer.         — — . 

Cross-examined  by  the  accused. ? 

Answer. . 

Question. — ? 

Answer. . 

Que.-^tion  by  the  court.  ? 

Answer. . 

Question. ? 

Answer. . 

Re-examined  by  the  judge  advocate. ? 

Answer. . 

Question. ? 

Answer. . 

{The  examination  of  the  witness  beitit/  completed,  his  testimony  is  read 
over  to  him,  and  corrected  if  necessary — when  the  next  witness  is  called. 
The  judge  advocate  having  jiresented  all  the  evidence  for  the  prosecution, 
states  such  fact,  and  announces  that  the  prosecution  is  closed — tahen  the 
accused  enters  upon  the  defence.) 

Lieutenant  A.  B.,  8d  Regiment  of  Infantry,  a  witness  for  the  defence, 
was  duly  sworn. 


COURTS    MARTIAL.  541 

Question  by  the  accused.  ? 

Answer. . 

Question. ? 

Answer. . 

Cross-examined. 

Question  by  judge  advocate. v 

Answer. . 

Question. '> 

Answer. . 

Question  by  the  court.  ? 

Answer. . 


(  The  evidence  on  both  aides  having  been  heard,  the  accused  asks  for 
time  to  prejyare  his  defence.) 

The  court  adjourned  to  meet  again  at  ten  o'clock,  A.  m.,  on  Fhe 
inst. 

Ten  o'clock,  a.  m., ,  18 — . 

The  court  met  pursuant  to  adjournment.     Present,  Colonel  A.  B.; 
Colonel  C.  D.;  Major  E.  F.j  Major  G.  IL:  Captain  J.  M.,  etc.,  etc. 
Captain  P.  S.,  judge  advocate,  and  Captain  T.  W.,  the  accused. 
The  proceedings   of  yesterday  were   read  over,   when    the   accused. 
Captain  T.  W.,  presented  and   read  {or  tchich  was  read  by  his  council) 
the  written  defence  (A.)  appended  to  these  proceedings. 

(Should  the  judge  advocate  intend  to  reply,  he  would  notify  the  coxirt, 
and  ask  for  the  requisite  time  for  jJ reparation.) 

The  statements  of  the  parties  being  thus  in  possession  of  the  court, 
the  court  was  cleared  for  deliberation  ;  and  having  maturely  considered 
the  evidence  adduced,  find  Captain  T.  W.,  of  the  8th  Regiment  of  In- 
fantry, as  follows : 

Of  the  first  specification  of  1st  charge, ,  Guilty. 

Of  the  second  specification  of  1st  charge, ,  Not  guilty. 

Of  the  third  specification  of  1st  charge, ,  Guilty. 

Of  the  First  charge,  ,  Guilty. 

Of  the  first  specification  of  2d  charge, ,  Not  guilty. 

Of  the  second  specification  of  2d  charge, ,  Not  guilty. 

Of  the  Second  charge,  ,  Not  guilty. 

And  the  court  do  therefore  sentence  the  said  Captain  T.  W.  of  the  8th 

Regiment  of  Infantry, to . 

(Signed)  A.  B., 

Colonel  1st  Regiment  of  Infantry,  and  President  of  the  C.  M. 

(Signed)  P.  S., 

Judge  Advocate. 
There  being  no  further  business  before  them,  the  court  adjourned 
sine  die. 

(Signed)  A.  B., 

Colonel  1st  Regiment  of  Infantry,  and  President  of  the  C.  M. 

(Signed)  P.   S., 

Judge  Advocate. 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR. 

AN  ACT  FOR  ESTABLISHING  RULES  AND  ARTICLES  FOR 
THE  GOVERNMENT  OF  THE  ARMIES  OF  THE  CONFEDE- 
RATE   STATES. 

Section  1.  The  Congress  of  the  Confederate  States  of  America  do 
enact,  That,  from  and  after  the  passage  of  this  Act,  the  following  shall 
be  the  rules  and  articles  by  which  the  armies  of  the  Confederates  States 
shall  be  governed : 

Article  1.  Every  officer  now  in  the  army  of  the  Confederate 
States  shall,  in  six  months  from  the  passing  of  this  Act,  and  every 
officer  who  shall  hereafter  be  appointed,  shall,  before  he  enters  on 
the  duties  of  his  office,  subscribe  these  rules  and  regulations. 

Art.  2.  It  is  earnestly  recommended  to  all  officers  and  soldiers 
diligently  to  attend  divine  service;  and  all  officers  who  shall  behave 
in<lecently  or  irreverently  at  any  place  of  divine  worship,  shall,  if 
commissioned  officers,  be  brought  before  a  general  court  martial,  there 
to  be  publicly  and  severely  reprimanded  by  the  President;  if  non- 
commissioned officers  or  soldiers,  every  person  so  offending  shall,  for 
his  first  offence,  forfeit  one-sixth  of  a  dollar,  to  be  deducted  out  of 
his  next  pay  ;  for  the  second  offence,  he  shall  not  only  forfeit  a  like 
sum,  but  be  confined  twenty-four  hours  ;  and  for  every  like  offence, 
shall  suffer  and  pay  in  like  manner;  which  money,  so  forfeited,  shall  be 
applied,  by  the  captain  or  senior  officer  of  the  troop  or  company,  to  the 
use  of  the  sick  soldiers  of  the  company  or  troop  to  which  the  offender 
belongs. 

Art.  3.  Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  use  any 
profane  oath  or  execration,  shall  incur  the  penalties  expressed  in  the 
foregoing  article  :  and  a  commissioned  officer  shall  forfeit  and  pay,  for 
each  and  every  such  offence,  one  dollar,  to  be  applied  as  in  the  preced- 
ing article. 

Art.  4.  Every  chaplain,  commissioned  in  the  array  or  armies  of  the 
Coufederate  States,  who  shall  absent  himself  from  the  duties  assigned 
him  (excepting  in  cases  of  sickness  or  leave  of  absence),  shall,  on 
conviction  thereof  before  a  court  martial,  be  fined  not  exceeding  one 


544  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

month's  pay,  besides  the  loss  of  his  pay  during  his  absence;  or  be  dis- 
charged, as  the  said  court  martial  shall  judge  proper. 

Art.  5.  Any  oflScer  or  soldier  who  shall  use  contemptuous  or  dis- 
respectful words  against  the  President  of  the  Confederate  States, 
against  the  Vice-President  thereof,  against  the  Congress  of  the  Con- 
federate States,  or  against  the  Chief  Magistrate  or  Legislature  of  any 
of  the  Confederate  States,  in  which  he  may  be  quartered,  if  a  com- 
missioned officer,  shall  be  cashiered,  or  otherwise  punished,  as  a  court 
martial  shall  direct ;  if  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  he  shall 
suffer  such  punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted  on  him  by  the  sentence  of 
a  court  martial. 

Art.  6.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  behave  himself  with  con- 
tempt or  disrespect  toward  his  commanding  officer,  shall  be  pun- 
ished, according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by  the  judgment  of  a 
court  martial. 

Art.  7.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  begin,  excite,  cause,  or  join 
in  any  mutiny  or  sedition,  in  any  troop  or  company  in  the  service 
of  the  Confederate  States,  or  in  any  party,  post,  detachment,  or  guard, 
shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  by  a  court  martial  shall 
be  inflicted. 

Art.  8.  Any  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier,  who,  being 
present  at  any  mutiny  or  sedition,  does  not  use  his  utmost  endeavor 
to  suppress  the  same,  or,  coming  to  the  knowledge  of  any  intended 
mutinj',  does  not,  without  delay,  give  information  thereof  to  his 
commanding  officer,  shall  be  punished  by  the  sentence  of  a  court 
martial  with  death,  or  otherwise,  according  to  the  nature  of  his 
offence. 

Art.  9.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  strike  his  superior  officer,  or 
draw  or  lift  up  any  weapon,  or  offer  any  violence  against  him,  being  in 
the  execution  of  his  office,  on  any  pretence  whatsoever,  or  shall  dis- 
obey any  lawful  command  of  his  superior  officer,  shall  suffer  death, 
or  such  other  punishment  as  shall,  according  to  the  nature  of  his 
offence,  be  inflicted  upon  him  by  the  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 

Art.  10.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  who  shall  enlist 
himself  in  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States,  shall  at  the  time  of  his 
so  enlisting,  or  within  six  days  afterward,  have  the  Articles  for  the 
government  of  the  armies  of  the  Confederate  States  read  to  him,  and 
shall,  by  the  officer  who  enlisted  him,  or  by  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  troop  or  company  into  which  he  was  enlisted,  be  taken  before  the 
next  justice  of  the  peace,  or  chief  magistrate  of  any  city  or  town 
corporate,  not  being  an  officer  of  the  armj'^,  or  where  recourse  cannot 
be  had  to  the  civil  magistrate,  before  the  judge  advocate,  and  in  his 
presence  shall   take  the  following  oath   or  affirmation:    "  I,  A.  B.,  do 


ARTICLES    OF    WAR.  545 

solemnly  swear,  or  affirm  (as  the  case  may  be),  that  I  will  bear  true 
allegiance  to  the  Confederate  States  of  America,  and  that  I  will  serve 
them  honestly  and  faithfully  against  all  their  enemies  or  opposers 
whatsoever;  and  observe  and  obey  the  orders  of  the  President  of  the 
Confederate  States,  and  the  orders  of  the  officers  appointed  over  me, 
according  to  the  Rules  and  Articles  for  the  g<>vernment  of  the  armies 
of  the  Confederate  States."  AVhich  justice,  magistrate,  or  judge  advo- 
cate is  to  give  to  the  officer  a  certificate,  signifying  that  the  man  en- 
listed did  take  the  said  oath  or  affirmation. 

Art.  11.  After  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  have 
been  duly  enlisted  and  sworn,  he  shall  not  be  dismissed  the  service 
without  a  discharge  in  writing ;  and  no  discharge  granted  to  him  shall 
be  sufficient  which  is  not  signed  by  a  field  officer  of  the  regiment  to 
which  he  belongs,  or  commanding  officer,  where  no  field  officer  of  the 
regiment  is  present:  and  no  discharge  shall  be  given  to  a  non-commis- 
sioned officer  or  soldier  before  his  term  of  service  has  expired,  but  by 
order  of  the  President,  the  Secretar}'^  of  War,  the  commanding  officer 
of  a  department,  or  the  sentence  of  a  general  court  martial;  nor  shall 
a  commissioned  officer  be  dischai'ged  from  the  service,  but  by  order  of 
the  President  of  the  Confederate  States,  or  by  sentence  of  a  general 
court  martial. 

Art.  12.  Every  colonel,  or  other  officer  commanding  a  regiment, 
troop,  or  company,  and  actually  quartered  with  it,  may  give  furloughs 
to  non-commissioned  officers  or  soldiers,  in  such  numbers,  and  for  so 
long  a  time,  as  he  shall  judge  to  be  most  consistent  with  the  good  of 
the  service;  and  a  captain,  or  other  inferior  officer,  commanding  a 
troop  or  company,  or  in  any  garrison,  fort,  or  barrack  of  the  Con- 
federate States  (his  field  officer  being  absent),  may  give  furloughs  to 
non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers,  for  a  time  not  exceeding 
twenty  days  in  six  months,  but  not  to  more  than  two  persons  to  be 
absent  at  the  same  time,  excepting  some  extraordinary  occasion 
should  require  it. 

Art.  13.  At  every  muster,  the  commanding  officer  of  each  regiment, 
troop,  or  company,  there  present,  shall  give  to  the  commissary  of 
musters,  or  other  officer  who  musters  the  said  regiment,  troop,  or  com- 
pany, certificates  signed  by  himself,  signifying  how  long  such  officers 
as  shall  not  appear  at  the  said  muster  have  been  absent,  and  the 
reason  of  their  absence.  In  like  manner,  the  commanding  officer  of 
every  troop  or  company  shall  give  certificates,  signifying  the  reasons 
of  the  absence  of  the  non-commissioned  officers  and  private  soldiers; 
which  reasons  and  time  of  absence  shall  be  inserted  in  the  muster 
rolls  opposite  the  names  of  the  respective  absent  officers  and  soldiers. 
The  certificates  shall,  together  with  the  muster  rolls,  he  remitted  by 
46 


546  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

the  commissary  of  musters,  or  other  officer  musterinjr,  to  the  Depart- 
ment of  War.  as  speedily  as  the  distance  of  the  place  will  admit. 

Art.  14.  Every  officer  who  shall  be  convicted  before  a  general 
court  martial  of  having  signed  a  false  certificate  relating  to  the 
absence  of  either  officer  or  private  soldier,  or  relative  to  his  or  their 
pay,  shall  be  cashiered. 

Art.  15.  Every  officer  who  shall  knowingly  make  a  false  muster  of 
man  or  horse,  and  every  officer  or  commissary  of  musters  who  shall 
willingly  sign,  direct,  or  allow  the  signing  of  muster  rolls  wherein 
such  false  muster  is  contained,  shall,  upon  proof  made  thereof,  by  two 
witnesses,  before  a  general  court  martial,  be  cashiered,  and  shall  be 
thereby  utterly  disabled  to  have  or  hold  any  office  or  employment  in 
the  service  of  the  Confederate  States. 

Art.  16.  Any  commissary  of  musters,  or  other  officer,  who  shall  be 
convicted  of  having  taken  money,  or  other  thing,  by  way  of  grati- 
fication, on  mustering  any  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  or  on  signing 
muster  rolls,  shall  be  displaced  from  his  office,  and  shall  be  thereby 
utterly  disabled  to  have  or  hold  any  office  or  employment  in  the  service 
of  the  Confederate  States. 

Art.  17.  Any  officer  who  shnll  presume  to  muster  a  person  as  a 
soldier  who  is  not  a  soldier,  sliall  be  deemed  guilty  of  having  made 
a  false  muster,  and  shall  sufler  accordingly. 

Art.  18.  Every  officer  who  shall  knowingly  moke  a  false  return  to 
the  Department  of  War,  or  to  any  of  his  superior  officers  authorized 
to  call  for  such  returns,  of  the  state  of  the  regiment,  troop,  or  com- 
pany, or  garrison,  under  his  command;  or  of  the  arms,  ammunition, 
clothing,  or  other  stores  thereunto  belonging,  shall,  on  conviction 
thereof  before  a  court  martial,  be  cashiered. 

Art.  19.  The  commanding  officer  of  every  regiment,  troop,  or  inde- 
pendent company  or  garrison  of  the  Confederate  States,  shall,  in  the 
beginning  of  every  month,  remit,  through  the  proper  channels,  to 
the  Department  of  War,  an  exact  return  of  the  regiment,  troop,  inde- 
pendent company  or  garrison  under  his  command,  specifying  the 
names  of  the  officers  then  absent  from  their  posts,  with  the  reasons  for 
and  the  time  of  their  absence.  And  any  officer  who  shall  be  convicted 
of  having,  through  neglect  or  design,  omitted  sending  such  returns, 
shall  be  punished,  ax-cording  to  the  nature  of  his  crime,  by  the  judg- 
ment of  a  general  court  martial. 

Art.  20.   All  officers   and  soldiers  who   have  received  pay,  or  have 

been  duly  enlisted  in  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States,  and  shall 

be  convicted  of  having  deserted  the  same,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such 

other  punishment  as.  by  sentence  of  a  court  martial,  shall  be  inflicted. 

Art.  21.    Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who  shall,  without 


ARTICLES    OF    WAR.  547 

leave  from  his  commanding  officer,  absent  himself  from  his  troop, 
company,  or  detachment,  shall,  upon  being  convicted  thereof,  be 
punished  according  to  the  nature  of  his  oflFence,  at  the  discretion  of  a 
court  martini. 

Art.  22.  No  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  enlist  himself 
in  any  other  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  without  a  regular  discharge 
from  the  regiment,  troop,  or  company  in  which  he  last  served,  on  the 
penalty  of  being  reputed  a  deserter,  and  suffering  accordingly.  And 
in  case  any  officer  shall  knowingly  receive  and  entertain  such  non- 
commissioned officer  or  soldier,  or  shall  not,  after  his  being  discovered 
to  be  a  deserter,  immediately  confine  him,  and  give  notice  thereof  to 
the  corps  in  whicli  he  last  served,  the  said  officer  shall,  by  a  court 
martial,  be  cashiered. 

Art.  23.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  be  convicted  of  having  ad- 
vised or  persuaded  any  other  officer  or  soldier  to  desert  the  service  of 
the  Confederate  States,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as 
shall  be  inflicted  upon  him  by  the  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 

Art.  24.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  use  any  reproachful  or  provoking 
speeches  or  gestures  to  another,  upon  pain,  if  an  officer,  of  being  put 
in  arrest;  if  a  soldier,  confined,  and  of  asking  pardon  of  the  party 
offended,  in  the  presence  of  his  commanding  officer. 

Art.  25.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  send  a  challenge  to  another  officer 
or  soldier,  to  fight  a  duel,  or  accept  a  challenge  if  sent,  upon  pain,  if  a 
commissioned  officer,  of  being  cashiered:  if  a  non-commissioned  officer 
or  soldier,  of  suffering  corporal  punishment,  at  the  discretion  of  a 
court  martial. 

Art.  20.  If  any  commissioned  or  non-commissioned  officer  com- 
manding a  guard  shall  knowingly  or  willingly  suffer  any  person  what- 
soever to  go  forth  to  fight  a  duel,  he  shall  be  punished  as  a  challenger; 
and  all  seconds,  promoters,  and  carriers  of  challenges,  in  order  to 
duels,  shall  be  deemed  principals,  and  be  punished  accordingly.  And 
it  shall  be  the  duty  of  every  officer  commanding  an  army,  regiment, 
company,  post,  or  detachment,  who  is  knowing  to  a  challenge  being 
given  or  accepted  by  any  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier, 
under  his  command,  or  has  reason  to  believe  the  same  to  be  the  case, 
immediately  to  arrest  and  bring  to  trial  such  offenders. 

Art.  27.  All  officers,  of  what  condition  soever,  have  power  to  part 
and  quell  all  quarrels,  frays,  and  disorders,  though  the  persons  con- 
cerned should  belong  to  another  regiment,  troop,  or  company:  and 
either  to  order  officers  in(u  arrest,  or  non-commissioned  officers  or  sol- 
diers into  confinement,  until  their  proper  superior  officers  shall  be 
acquainted  therewith;  and  whosoever  shall  refuse  to  obey  such  officer 


548  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

(though  of  an  inferior  rank),  or  shall  draw  his  sword  upon  him,  shall 
be  punished  at  the  discretion  of  a  general  court  martial. 

Art.  28.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  uphraid  another  for  refus- 
ing a  challenge,  shall  himself  be  punished  as  a  challenger;  and  all 
officers  and  soldiers  are  hereby  discharged  from  any  disgrace  or 
opinion  of  disadvantage  which  might  arise  from  their  having  refused 
to  accept  of  challenges,  as  they  will  only  have  acted  in  obedience  to 
the  laws,  and  done  their  duty  as  good  soldiers  who  subject  themselves 
to  discipline. 

Art.  29.  No  sutler  shall  be  permitted  to  sell  any  kind  of  liquors  or 
victuals,  or  to  keep  their  houses  or  shops  open  for  the  entertainment  of 
soldiers,  after  nine  at  night,  or  before  the  beating  of  the  reveille,  or 
upon  Sundays,  during  divine  service  or  sermon,  on  the  penalty  of  being 
dismissed  from  all  future  sutling. 

Art.  30.  All  officers  commanding  in  the  field,  forts,  barracks,  or  gar- 
risons of  the  Confederate  States,  are  hereby  rec^uired  to  see  that  the 
persons  permitted  to  sutle  shall  supply  the  soldiers  with  good  and 
wholesome  provisions,  or  other  articles,  at  a  reasonable  price,  as  they 
shall  be  answerable  for  their  neglect. 

Art.  31.  No  officer  commanding  in  any  of  the  garrisons,  forts,  or 
barracks  of  the  Confederate  States,  shall  exact  exorbitant  prices  for 
houses  or  stalls,  let  out  to  sutlers,  or  connive  at  the  like  exactions 
in  others;  nor  by  his  own  authority,  and  for  his  private  advantage, 
lay  any  duty  or  imposition  upon,  or  be  interested  in,  the  sale  of  any 
victuals,  liquors,  or  other  necessaries  of  life  brought  into  the  garrison, 
fort  or  barracks,  for  the  use  of  the  Sfddiers,  on  the  penalty  of  being 
discharged  from  the  service. 

Art.  32.  Every  officer  commanding  in  quarters,  garrisons,  or  on  the 
march,  shall  keep  good  order,  and  to  the  utmost  of  his  power,  redress 
all  abuses  or  disorders  which  may  be  committed  by  any  officer  or  sol- 
dier under  his  command;  if,  upon  complaint  made  to  him  of  officers  or 
soldiers  beating  or  otherwise  ill-treating  any  person,  or  disturbing  fairs 
or  markets,  or  of  committing  any  kind  of  riots,  to  the  disquieting  of 
the  citizens  of  the  Confederate  States,  he,  the  said  commander,  who 
shall  refuse  or  omit  to  see  justice  done  to  the  oflender  or  offenders,  and 
reparation  made  to  the  party  or  parties  injured,  as  far  as  part  of  the 
offender's  pay  shall  enable  him  or  them,  shall,  upon  proof  thereof,  be 
cashiered,  or  otherwise  punished,  as  a  general  court  martial  shall 
direct. 

Art.  33.  When  any  commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  be  accused 
of  a  capital  crime,  or  of  having  used  violence,  or  committed  any  offence 
against  the  person  or  property  of  any  of  the  Confederate  States,  such 
as  is  punishable  by  the  known  laws  of  the  land,  the  commanding  officer 


ARTICLES    OF    WAR.  549 

and  officers  of  every  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  to  which  the  person  or 
persons  so  accused  shall  belong,  are  hereby  required,  upon  application 
duly  made  by,  or  in  behalf  of,  the  party  or  parties  injured,  to  use  their 
utmost  endeavors  to  deliver  over  such  accused  person  or  persons  to  the 
civil  magistrate,  and  likewise  to  be  aiding  and  assisting  to  the  officers 
of  justice  in  apprehending  and  securing  the  person  or  persons  so  ac- 
cused, in  order  to  bring  him  or  them  to  trial.  If  any  commanding 
officer  or  officers  shall  wilfully  neglect,  or  shall  refuse,  upon  the  appli- 
cation aforesaid,  to  deliver  over  such  accused  person  or  persons  to  the 
civil  magistrates,  or  to  be  aiding  and  assisting  to  the  officers  of  justice 
in  apprehending  such  person  or  persons,  the  officer  or  officers  so  offend- 
ing shall  be  cashiered. 

Art.  34.  If  any  officer  shall  think  himself  wronged  by  his  colonel, 
or  the  commanding  officer  of  the  regiment,  and  shall,  upon  due  appli- 
cation being  made  to  him  be  refused  redress,  he  may  complain  to  the 
general  commanding  in  the  State  or  Territory  where  such  regiment 
shall  be  stationed,  in  order  to  obtain  justice;  Avho  is  hereby  required 
to  examine  into  said  complaint,  and  take  proper  measures  for  redress- 
ing the  wrong  complained  of,  and  transmit,  as  soon  as  possible,  to  the 
Department  of  War,  a  true  state  of  such  complaint,  with  the  proceed- 
ings had  thereon. 

Art.  .35.  If  any  inferior  officer  or  soldier  shall  think  himself  wronged 
by  his  captain  or  other  officer,  he  is  to  complain  thereof  to  the  com- 
manding officer  of  the  regiment,  who  is  hereby  required  to  summon  a 
regimental  court  martial,  for  the  doing  justice  to  the  complainant; 
from  which  regimental  court  martial  either  party  may,  if  he  think  him- 
self still  aggrieved,  appeal  to  a  general  court  martial.  But  if,  upon  a 
second  hearing,  the  appeal  shall  appear  vexatious  and  groundless,  the 
person  so  appealing  shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion  of  said  court 
martial. 

Art.  .36.  Any  commissioned  officer,  store-keeper,  or  commissary,  who 
shall  be  convicted  at  a  general  court  martial  of  having  sold,  without  a 
proper  order  for  that  purpose,  embezzled,  misapplied,  or  wilfully,  or 
through  neglect,  .sutfered  any  of  the  provisions,  forage,  arms,  clothing, 
ammunition,  or  other  military  stores  belonging  to  the  Confederate 
States,  to  be  spoiled  or  damaged,  shall,  at  his  own  expense,  make  good 
the  loss  or  damage,  and  shall,  moreover,  forfeit  all  his  pay,  and  be  dis- 
missed from  the  service. 

Art.  37.  Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  be  con- 
victed at  a  regimental  court  martial  of  having  sold,  or  designedly,  or 
through  neglect,  wasted  the  ammunition  delivered  out  to  him,  to  be 
employed  in  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States,  shall  be  punished  at 
the  discretion  of  such  court. 


550  MANUAL    FOR   VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Art.  38.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  who  shall  he 
convicted  before  a  court  martial  of  having  sold,  lost,  or  spoiled, 
through  neglect,  his  horse,  arms,  clothes,  or  accoutrements,  shall  un- 
dergo such  weekly  stoppages  (not  exceeding  the  half  of  his  pay)  as 
such  court  martial  shall  judge  sufficient,  for  repairing  the  loss  or  dam- 
age;  and  shall  suffer  confinement,  or  such  other  corporal  punishment 
as  his  crime  shall  deserve. 

Art.  39.  Every  officer  who  shall  be  convicted  before  a  court  martial 
of  having  embezzled  or  misapplied  any  money  with  which  he  may  have 
been  intrusted,  for  the  payment  of  the  men  under  his  command,  or  for 
enlisting  men  into  the  service,  or  for  other  purposes,  if  a  commissioned 
officer,  shall  be  cashiered,  and  compelled  to  i-efund  the  money;  if  a 
non-commissioned  officer,  shall  be  reduced  to  the  ranks,  be  put  under 
stoppages  until  the  money  be  made  good,  and  suffer  such  corporal  pun- 
ishment as  such  court  martial  shall  direct. 

Art.  40.  Every  captain  of  a  troop  or  company  is  charged  with  the 
arms,  accoutrements,  ammunition,  clothing,  or  other  warlike  stores  be- 
longing to  the  troop  or  company  under  his  command,  which  he  is  to  be 
accountable  for  to  his  colonel  in  case  of  their  being  lost,  spoiled,  or 
damaged,  not  by  unavoidable  accidents,  or  on  actual  service. 

Art.  41.  All  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  who  shall  be 
found  one  mile  from  the  camp  without  leave,  in  writing,  from  their 
commanding  officer,  shall  suffer  such  punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted 
upon  them  by  the  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 

Art.  42.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  lie  out  of  his  quarters,  garrison, 
or  camp  without  leave  from  his  superior  officer,  upon  penalty  of  being 
punished  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by  the  sentence  of  a 
court  martial. 

Art.  43.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  and  soldier  shall  retire  to 
his  quarters  or  tent  at  the  beating  of  the  retreat ;  in  default  of  which 
he  shall  be  punished  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence. 

Art.  44.  No  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier  shall  fail  in 
repairing,  at  the  time  fixed,  to  the  place  of  parade,  of  exercise,  or  other 
rendezvous  appointed  by  his  commanding  officer,  if  not  prevented  by 
sickness  or  some  other  evident  necessity,  or  shall  go  from  the  said  place 
of  rendezvous  without  leave  from  his  commanding  officer,  before  he 
shall  be  regularly  dismissed  or  relieved,  on  the  jienalty  of  being  pun- 
ished, according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by  the  sentence  of  a  court 
martial. 

Art.  45.  Any  commissioned  officer  who  shall  be  found  drunk  on  his 
guard,  party,  or  other  duty,  shall  be  cashiered.  Any  non-commissioned 
officer  or  soldier  so  offending  shall  suffer  such  corporal  pnni?hment  as 
shall  be  inflicted  by  the  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 


ARTICLES    OF    WAR.  551 

Art.  46.  Any  sentinel  who  shall  be  found  sleepins;  npon  his  post,  or 
shall  leave  it  before  he  shall  be  regularly  relieved,  shall  .snffer  death, 
or  such  other  punishment,  as  shall  be  inflicted  bj'^  the  sentence  of  a  court 
martial. 

AuT.  47,  No  soldier,  belonnjing  to  any  regiment,  troop  or  company, 
shall  hire  another  to  do  his  duty  for  him,  or  be  excused  from  duty  but 
in  cases  of  sickness,  disability  or  leave  of  absence  ;  and  every  such 
soldier  found  guilty  of  hiring  his  duty,  as  also  the  party  so  hired  to  do 
another's  duty,  shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion  of  a  regimental 
court  martial. 

Art.  48.  And  every  non-commissioned  officer  conniving  at  such  hir- 
ing of  duty  aforesaid  shall  be  reduced;  and  every  commissioned  olficer 
knowing  and  allowing  such  ill  practices  in  the  service,  shall  be  pun- 
ished by  the  judgment  of  a  general  court  martial. 

Art.  49.  Any  officer  belonging  to  the  service  of  the  Confederate 
States,  who,  by  discharging  of  firearms,  drawing  of  swords,  beating  of 
drums,  or  by  any  other  means  whatsoever,  shall  occasion  false  alarms 
in  camp,  garrison  or  quarters,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  jiunish- 
ment  as  shall  be  ordered  bj'  the  sentence  of  a  general  court  martial. 

Art.  50.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall,  without  urgent  necessity, 
or  without  the  leave  of  his  superior  officer,  quit  his  guard,  platoon  or 
division,  shall  be  punished,  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by 
the  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 

Art.  51.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  do  violence  to  any  person  who 
brings  provisions  or  other  necessaries  to  the  camp,  garrison  or  quarters 
of  the  forces  of  the  Confederate  States,  employed  in  any  parts  out  of 
the  said  States,  upon  pain  of  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a 
court  martial  shall  direct. 

Art.  52.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  misbehave  himself  before 
the  enemy,  run  away,  or  shamefully  abandon  any  fort,  post  or  guard, 
which  he  or  they  may  be  commanded  to  defend,  or  speak  words  induc- 
ing others  to  do  the  like,  or  shall  cast  away  his  arms  and  ammunition, 
or  who  shall  quit  his  post  or  colors  to  plunder  and  pillage,  every  such 
off'ender,  being  duly  convicted  thereof,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other 
punishment  as  shall  be  ordered  by  the  sentence  of  a  general  court 
martial. 

Art.  53.  Any  person  belonging  to  the  armies  of  the  Confederate 
States,  who  shall  make  known  the  watchword  to  any  person  who  is  not 
entitled  to  receive  it  according  to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  war,  or 
shall  presume  to  give  a  parole  or  watchword  different  from  what  he 
received,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  br- 
dered  by  the  sentence  of  a  general  court  martial. 
Art.  54.  All  officers  and  soldiers  are  to  behave  themselves  orderly  in 


552  MANUAL    FOR    VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

quarters  and  on  their  march;  and  whoever  shall  commit  any  waste,  or 
spoil,  either  in  walks  or  trees,  parks,  warrens,  fish-ponds,  houses  or 
gardens,  corn-fields,  enclosures  of  meadows,  or  shall  maliciously  de- 
stroy any  property  whatsoever  belonging  to  the  inhabitants  of  the 
Confederate  States,  unless  by  order  of  the  then  commander-in-chief  of 
armies  of  the  said  States,  shall  (besides  such  penalties  as  they  are  lia- 
ble to  by  law),  be  punished,  according  to  the  nature  and  degree  of  the 
offence,  by  the  judgment  of  a  regimental  or  general  court  martial. 

Art.  55.  Whosoever,  belonging  to  the  armies  of  the  Confederate 
States  in  foreign  parts,  shall  force  a  safeguard,  shall  suffer  death. 

Art.  56.  Whosoever  shall  relieve  the  enemy  with  money,  victuals  or 
ammunition,  or  shall  knowingly  harbor  or  protect  an  enemy,  shall  suf- 
fer death  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  ordered  by  the  sentence 
of  a  court  martial. 

Art.  57.  Whosoever  shall  be  convicted  of  holding  correspondence 
with,  or  giving  intelligence  to  the  enemy,  cither  directly  or  indirectly, 
shall  suft'cr  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  ordered  by  the 
sentence  of  a  court  martini. 

Art.  58.  All  public  stores  taken  in  the  enemy's  camp,  towns,  forts 
or  magazines,  whether  of  artillery,  ammunition,  clothing,  forage  or 
provisions,  shall  be  secured  for  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States ; 
for  the  neglect  of  which  the  commanding  oflScer  is  to  be  answerable. 

Art.  59.  If  any  commander  of  any  garrison,  fortress  or  post,  shall 
be  compelled,  by  the  officers  and  soldiers  under  his  command,  to  give 
up  to  the  enemy,  or  to  abandon  it,  the  commissioned  officers,  non-com- 
missioned officers  or  soldiers  who  shall  be  convicted  of  having  so 
offended,  shall  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  in- 
flicted upon  them  by  the  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 

Art.  60.  All  sutlers  and  retainers  to  the  camp,  and  all  persons  what- 
soever, serving  with  the  armies  of  the  Confederate  States  in  the  field, 
though  not  enlisted  soldiers,  are  to  be  subject  to  orders,  according  to 
the  rules  and  discipline  of  war. 

Art.  61.  Officers  having  brevets  or  commissions  of  a  prior  date  to 
those  of  the  corps  in  which  they  serve,  will  take  place,  on  courts  mar- 
tial or  of  inquiry,  and  on  boards  detailed  for  military  purposes,  when 
composed  of  different  corps,  according  to  the  ranks  given  them  in 
their  brevets  or  former  commissions;  but  in  the  regiment,  corps  or 
company  to  which  such  officers  belong,  they  shall  do  duty  and  take 
rank,  both  in  courts  and  on  Jjoards  as  aforesaid,  which  shall  be  com- 
posed of  their  own  corps,  according  to  the  commissions  by  which  they 
there  mustered. 

Art,  62.  If,  upon  marches,  guards,  or  in  quarters,  different  corps 
shall  happen  to  join,  or  do  duty  together,  the  officer  highest  in  rank. 


ARTICLES    OF    WAR.  558 

according  to  the  commission  by  which  he  is  mustered,  in  the  army, 
navy,  marine  corps,  or  militia,  there  on  duty  by  orders  from  compe- 
tent authority,  shall  command  the  whole,  and  give  orders  for  what  is 
needful  for  the  service,  unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  President 
(if  the  Confederate  States,  in  orders  of  special  assignment  providing 
for  the  case. 

Art.  (>.*].  The  functions  of  the  engineers  being  generally  confined  to 
the  most  elevatc<l  branch  of  military  science,  they  are  not  to  assume, 
nor  are  they  subject  to  be  ordered  on  any  duty  beyond  the  line  of  their 
immediate  profession,  except  by  the  special  order  of  the  President  of  the 
Confederate  States:  but  they  are  to  receive  every  mark  of  respect  lo 
which  their  rank  in  the  army  may  entitle  them  respectively,  and  are 
liable  to  be  transferred,  at  the  discreti.m  of  the  President,  from  one 
corps  to  another,  regard  being  paid  to  rank. 

Art.  G-4.  General  courts  martial  may  consist  of  an}-  number  of  com- 
missioned officers;  from  five  to  thirteen,  inclusively;  but  they  shall  not 
consist  of  less  than  thirteen  where  that  number  can  be  convened  with- 
out manifest  injury  to  the  service. 

Art.  (ii).  Any  general  officer  commanding  an  army,  or  colonel  com- 
manding a  separate  department,  may  appoint  general  courts  martial 
whenever  necessary.  But  no  sentence  of  a  court  martial  shall  be  carried 
into  execution  until  after  the  whole  proceedings  shall  have  been  laid 
before  the  officer  ordering  the  same,  or  the  officer  commanding  the  troops 
for  the  time  being;  neither  shall  any  sentence  of  a  general  court  martial, 
in  the  time  of  peace,  extending  to  the  loss  of  life,  or  the  dismission  of 
a  commissioned  officer,  or  which  shall,  either  in  time  of  peace  or  war, 
respect  a  general  officer,  be  carried  into  execution,  until  after  the  whole 
proceedings  shall  have  been  transmitted  to  the  Secretary  of  War,  to  be 
laid  before  the  President  of  the  Confederate  States  for  his  confirmation 
or  disapproval  and  orders  in  the  case.  All  other  sentences  may  be 
confirmed  and  executed  by  the  ofiicer  ordering  the  court  to  assemble,  or 
the  commanding  officer  for  the  time  being,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Art.  66.  Every  officer  commanding  a  regiment  or  corps  may  appoint, 
for  his  own  regiment  or  corps,  courts  martial,  to  consist  of  three  com- 
missioned officers,  for  the  trial  and  punishment  of  offences  not  capital, 
and  decide  upon  their  sentences.  For  the  same  purpose,  all  officers 
commanding  any  of  the  garrisons,  forts,  barracks,  or  other  places  where 
the  troops  consist  of  different  corps,  may  assemble  courts  martial,  to 
consist  of  three  commissioned  officers,  and  decide  upon  their  sentences. 

Art.  67.  No  garrison  or  regimental  court  martial  shall  have  the  power 
to  try  capital  cases  or  commissioned  officers;  neither  shall  they  inflict  a 
fine  exceeding  one  month's  pay,  nor  imprison,  nor  put  to  hard  labor,  any 
non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  for  a  longer  time  than  one  month. 
47 


554  MANUAL    FOR     VOLUNTEERS    AND    MILITIA. 

Art.  68.  Whenever  it  may  be  found  convenient  and  necessary  to  tlie 
public  service,  the  officers  of  the  marines  shall  be  associated  with  the 
officers  of  the  land  forces,  for  the  purpose  of  holding  courts  martial, 
and  trying  ofl'enders  belonging  to  either;  and,  in  such  cases,  the  orders 
of  the  senior  officer  of  either  corps  who  may  be  present  and  duly  author- 
ized, shall  be  received  and  obeyed. 

Art.  69.  The  judge  advocate,  or  some  person  deputed  by  him,  or  by 
the  general,  or  officer  commanding  the  army,  detachment,  or  garrison, 
shall  prosecute  in  the  name  of  the  Confederate  States,  but  shall  so  far 
consider  himself  as  counsel  for  the  prisoner,  after  the  said  prisoner  shall 
have  made  his  plea,  as  to  object  to  any  leading  question  to  any  of  the 
witnesses,  or  any  question  to  the  prisoner,  the  answer  to  which  might 
tend  to  criminate  himself,  and  administer  to  each  member  of  the  court, 
before  they  proceed  upon  any  trial,  the  following  oath,  which  shall  also 
be  taken  by  all  members  of  the  regimental  and  garrison  courts  martial : 

*'You,  A.  B.,  do  swear  that  you  will  well  and  truly  try  and  determine, 
according  to  evidence,  the  matter  now  before  you,  between  the  Confed- 
erate States  of  America  and  the  prisoner  to  be  tried,  and  that  you  will 
duly  administer  justice,  according  to  the  provisions  of  'An  Act  estab- 
lishing Rules  and  Articles  for  the  government  of  the  armies  of  the 
Confederate  States,'  without  partiality,  favor,  or  affection;  and  if  any 
doubt  should  arise,  not  explained  by  said  Articles,  according  to  jonr 
conscience,  the  best  of  your  understanding,  and  the  custom  of  Avar  in 
like  cases;  and  you  do  further  swear  that  you  will  not  divulge  the  sen- 
tence of  the  court  until  it  shall  be  published  by  the  proper  authority; 
neither  will  you  disclose  or  discover  the  vote  or  opinion  of  any  par- 
ticular member  of  the  court  martial,  unless  required  to  give  evidence 
thereof,  as  a  witness,  by  a  court  of  justice,  in  a  due  course  of  law.  So 
help  you  God." 

And  so  soon  as  the  said  oath  shall  ha^e  been  administered  to  the 
respective  members,  the  president  of  the  court  shall  administer  to 
the  judge  advocate,  or  person  officiating  as  such,  an  oath  in  the  follow- 
ing words  : 

**You,  A.  B.,  do  swear,  that  you  will  not  disclose  or  discover  the 
vote  or  opinion  of  any  particular  member  of  the  court  martial,  unless 
required  to  give  evidence  thereof,  as  a  witness,  by  a  court  of  justice,  in 
due  course  of  law;  nor  divulge  the  sentence  of  the  court  to  any  but  the 
proper  authority,  until  it  shall  be  duly  disclosed  by  the  same.  So  help 
■you  God." 

Art.  70.  When  a  prisoner,  arraigned  before  a  general  court  martial, 
shall,  from  obstinacy  and  deliberate  design,  stand  mute,  or  answer  for- 
eign to  the  purpose,  the  court  may  proceed  to  trial  and  judgment  as  if 
the  prisoner  had  regularly  pleaded  not  guilty. 


ARTICLES    OF    WAK.  ;:  555 

Art.  71.  When  a  member  shall  be  challenj^ed  by  «i  prisoner,  he  mu^t 
state  his  cause  of  challenge,  of  which  the  court  shall,  after  clue  deliber- 
ation, determine  the  relevancy  or  validity,  and  decide  accordingly; 
and  ifb  challenge  to  more  than  one  niember  at  a  time  shall  bo  received 
by  the  court. 

Art.  72.  All  the  members  of  a  court  martial  are  to  behave  with 
decency  and  calmness;  and  in  giving  their  votes  are  to  begin  with  the 
youngest  in  commission. 

Art.  73.  All  persons  who  give  evidence  before  a  court  martial  are  to 
be  examined  on  oath  or  affirmation,  in  the  following  form: 

*'You  swear  or  affirm  (as  the  case  may  be)  the  evidence  you  shall 
give  in  the  cause  now  in  hearing  shall  be  the  truth,  the  whole  truth. 
and  nothing  but  tho  truth.     So  help  you  God." 

Art.  7-i.  On  the  trials  of  cases  not  ca}utal.  before  courts  martial,  the 
deposition  of  witnesses,  not  in  the  line  or  staff  of  the  army,  may  be 
taken  before  some  justice  of  the  peace,  and  read  in  evidence;  i)rovided 
the  prosecutor  and  person  accused  arc  present  at  the  taking  the  same, 
or  are  duly  notified  thereof. 

Art.  75.  No  officer  shall  be  tried  but  bj'  a  general  court  martial,  nor 
by  officers  of  an  inferior  rank,  if  it  can  be  avoided.  Nor  shall  any 
proceedings  of  trials  be  carried  on,  excepting  between  the  hours  of 
eight  in  the  morning  and  three  in  the  afternoon;  excepting  in  cases 
which,  in  the  opinion  of  the  officer  appointing  the  court  martial,  re- 
quire immeiliatc  example. 

Art.  76.  No  person  whatsoever  shall  use  any  menacing  words,  signs, 
or  gestures,  in  presence  of  a  court  martial,  or  shall  cause  any  disorder 
or  riot,  or  disturb  their  proceedings,  on  the  penalty  of  being  punished 
at  the  discretion  of  the  said  court  martial. 

Art.  77.  Whenever  any  officer  shall  be  charged  with  a  crime,  he 
shall  be  arrested  and  confined  in  his  barracks,  quarters,  or  tent,  and 
deprived  of  his  sword  by  the  commanding  officer.  And  any  officer  who 
shall  leave  his  confinement  before  he  shall  be  set  at  liberty  by  the 
commanding  officer,   or  by  a  superior  officer,   shall  be  cashiered. 

Art.  78.  Non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers,  charged  with 
crimes,  shall  be  confined  until  tried  by  a  court  martial  or  released 
by  proper  authority. 

Art.  79.  No  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  be  put  in  arrest  shall  con- 
tinue in  confinement  more  than  eight  days,  or  until  such  time  as  a 
court  martial  can  be  assembled. 

Art.  80.  No  officer  commanding  a  guard,  or  provost  marshal,  shall 
refuse  to  receive  or  keep  any  prisoner  committed  to  his  charge  by  an 
officer  belonging  to  the  forces  of  the  Confederate  States;  provided 
the   officer  committing  shall,   at  tho  same  time,  deliver  an  account  in 


55'.)  MANUAL    F(JH     VOLUNTEKKS    AND    MILITIA. 

writinj;,  .sigued  by  himself,  of  the  crime  of  which  the  -aid  prisoner  is 
char^^ed. 

AuT.  81.  No  officer  commandiiif;  a  jrnard,  or  provost  marshal,  shall 
presume  to  release  any  person  committed  to  his  charge  without  proper 
authority  for  so  doinp,  nor  shall  he  suflFer  any  per.son  to  escape,  on  the 
penalty  of  being  )»iinished  for  it  by  the  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 

AuT.  S2.  Kvery  officer  or  provost  marshal,  to  whose  charge  prisoners 
shall  l)e  committed,  shall,  within  twentj'-four  hours  after  such  commit- 
ment, or  as  soon  as  he  siiall  be  relieved  fr<im  his  guar<l,  make  report  in 
writing,  to  the  commanding  officer,  of  their  names,  tlieir  crimes,  and 
the  names  of  the  officers  vdio  committed  them,  <>n  the  penalty  of  being 
punished  for  dis<»bedience  <ir  neglect,  at  the  discretion  nf  a  court 
martial. 

AitT.  H'^.  Any  commissioned  officer  convicted  before  a  general  court 
martial  of  contluct  unbecoming  an  officer  and  a  gentleman,  shall  be 
dismissed  the  service. 

AiiT.  si.  In  cases  where  a  court  martial  may  think  it  proper  to  sen- 
tence a  commissioned  officer  to  l)e  suspended  from  command,  they  shall 
have  power  also  to  susjiend  liis  pay  and  emoluments  for  the  same  time. 
.Mccording  to  the  nature  and  hcinousness  of  the  offence. 

Aht.  S5.  In  all  cases  where  a  <-ommissione4l  officer  i«  cashiered  for 
cowardice  or  fraud,  it  sliall  be  ad<led  in  the  sentence,  that  the  crime, 
name,  and  place  of  abode,  and  punishment  of  the  «lclin(iucnt,  be  pub- 
lished in  the  newsi>apers  in  an<l  about  the  camp,  and  of  the  particular 
State  from  which  the  ofTcnder  came,  or  where  he  usually  resides;  after 
which  it  shall  be  deemed  scandalous  for  an  officer  to  associate  with 
him. 

Aht.  ST).  The  ominatiding  officer  »d'  any  jjust  or  detachment,  in 
which  there  shall  not  be  a  number  of  officers  adequate  to  form  a 
general  court  martial,  shall,  in  cases  which  require  the  cognizance  of 
such  a  court,  report  to  the  commanding  officer  of  the  department,  who 
shall  order  a  court  to  be  assembled  at  the  nearest  post  or  department, 
and  the  party  accused,  with  neee.^^sary  witnes>es,  to  br  tr.m-i.ortcd  to 
the  place  where  the  said  court  shall  be  assembled. 

Akt.  ST.  No  person  shall  be  sentenced  to  suffer  death  but  by  the 
Concurrence  of  two-thirds  of  the  members  of  a  general  court  martial, 
nor  except  in  the  cases  herein  expressly  mentione*!;  and  no  officer, 
non-commissioned  officer,  soldier,  or  follower  of  the  army,  shall  be 
tried  a  second  time  for  the  same  <tlfence. 

Art.  S8.  No  person  shall  be  liable  to  be  tried  and  punished  by  a 
general  court  martial  for  any  offence  which  shall  appear  to  have  been 
committed  more  than  two  years  before  the  issuing  of  the  order  for  such 
trial,  unless  the  jierson,  by  reason  of  having  absented  himself,  or  some 


ARTICLES    OF    WAR.  00 < 

other  maaifest  impediment,  shall  not  have  been   amenable  to  justice 
within  that  period. 

Art.  89.  Every  officer  authorized  to  order  a  general  court  martial 
."hall  have  power  to  pardon  or  mitigate  any  punishment  ordered  by 
such  court,  except  the  sentence  of  death,  or  of  cashiering  an  officer  : 
which,  in  the  cases  where  he  has  authority  (by  Article  65)  to  carry 
them  into  execution,  he  may  suspend,  until  the  pleasure  of  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  Confederate  States  can  be  known  ;  which  suspension, 
together  with  copies  of  the  proceedings  of  the  court  martial,  the  said 
officer  shall  immediately  transmit  to  the  President  for  his  determina- 
tion. And  the  colonel  or  commanding  officer  of  the  regiment  or 
garrison  where  any  regimental  or  garrison  court  martial  shall  be  held, 
may  pardon  or  mitigate  any  punishment  ordered  by  such  court  to  be 
inflicted. 

Art.  90.  Every  judge  advocate,  or  person  officiating  ns  such,  at  any 
general  court  martial,  shall  transmit,  with  as  much  expedition  as  the 
opportunity  of  time  and  distance  of  place  can  admit,  the  original  pro- 
ceedings and  sentence  of  such  court  martial  to  tlie  Secretary  of  War; 
which  said  original  proceedings  and  sentence  shall  be  carefully  kept 
and  preserved  in  the  office  of  said  Secretary,  to  the  end  that  the  per- 
sons entitled  thereto  may  be  enabled,  upon  application  to  the  said 
officer,  to  obtain  copies  thereof. 

The  party  tried  by  any  general  court  martial  shall,  upon  demand 
thereof,  made  by  himself,  or  by  any  person  or  persons  in  his  behalf,  be 
entitled  to  a  copy  of  the  sentence  and  proceedings  of  such  court 
martial. 

Art.  91.  In  cases  where  the  general  or  commanding  officer  may 
order  a  court  of  inquiry  to  examine  into  the  nature  of  any  transaction, 
accusation,  or  imputation  against  any  officer  or  soldier,  the  said  court 
shall  consist  of  one  or  more  officers,  not  exceeding  three,  and  a  judge 
advocate,  or  other  suitable  person,  as  a  recorder,  to  reduce  the  pro- 
ceedings and  evidence  to  writing;  all  of  whom  shall  be  sworn  to  the 
faithful  i^erformauce  of  their  duty.  This  court  shall  have  the  same 
]tower  to  summon  witnesses  as  a  court  martial,  and  to  (fxamine  them  on 
oath.  But  they  shall  not  give  their  opinion  on  the  merits  of  the  case, 
excepting  they  shall  be  thereto  specially  required.  The  parties 
accused  shall  also  be  permitted  to  cross-examine  and  interrogate 
the  witnesses,  so  as  to  investigate  fully  the  circumstances  in  the 
question. 

Art.  92.  The  proceedings  of  a  court  of  inquiry  must  be  authenti- 
cated by  the  signature  of  the  recorder  and  the  president,  and  delivered 
to  the  commanding  officer,  and  the  said  proceedings  may  be  admitted 
as  evidence  bv  a  court  martial,  in  cases  not  capital,  or  extending  to  the 


t558  MANUAL    FOR,    VOLUNTEERS    ANT)    MILITIA. 

dismissiou  of  au  officer,  provided  that  the  circumstances  are  such  that 
oral  testimony  cannot  be  obtained.  But  as  courts  of  inquiry  may  be 
perverted  to  disl)onorable  purposes,  and  may  be  considered  as  engines 
of  destruction  to  military  merit,  in  the  hands  of  weak  and  envious 
commandants,  they  arc  hereby  prohibited,  unless  directed  by  the 
President  of  the  Confederate  States,  or  demanded  by  the  accused. 

Art.  93.  The  judge  advocate  or  recorder  shall  administer  to  the 
members  the  following  oath  : 

"You  shall  well  and  truly  examine  and  inquire,  according  to  your 
evidence,  into  the  matter  now  before  you,  without  partiality,  favor, 
affection,  prejudice,  or  hope  of  reward.     So  help  you  God." 

After  which  the  president  shall  a<lminister  to  the  judge  advocate  or 
recorder,  the  following  oath  : 

"You,  A.  B.,  do  swear  that  you  will,  according  to  your  best  abili- 
ties, accurately  and  impartially  record  the  proceedings  of  the  court, 
and  the  evidence  to  be  given  in  the  case  in  hearing.  So  help  you 
<lod." 

The  witnesses  shall  take  the  same  oath  as  witnesses  sworn  before  a 
court  martial. 

Art.  94.  When  any  commissioned  officer  shall  die  or  be  killed  in  the 
.service  of  the  Confederate  States,  the  major  of  the  regiment,  or  the 
officer  doing  the  major's  duty  in  his  absence,  or  in  any  post  or  garrison, 
the  second  officer  in  command,  or  the  assistant  military  agent,  shall  im- 
mediately secure  all  his  effects  or  equipage,  then  in  camp  or  quarters, 
and  shall  make  an  inventory  thereof,  and  forthwith  transmit  the  same 
to  the  office  of  the  Department  of  War,  to  the  end  that  his  exetnitors  or 
administrators  may  receive  the  same. 

Art.  95.  When  any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  die,  or 
be  killed  in  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States,  the  then  commanding 
officer  of  the  troop  or  company  shall,  in  the  presence  of  two  other  com- 
missioned officers,  take  an  account  of  what  effects  he  died  possessed  of, 
above  his  arms  and  accoutrements,  and  transmit  the  same  to  the  office 
of  the  Department  of  War,  which  said  effects  are  to  be  accounted  for, 
and  paid  to  the  representatives  of  such  deceased  non-commissioned 
officer  or  soldier.  And  in  case  any  of  the  otFieers,  so  authorized  to  take 
care  of  the  effects  of  such  deceased  non-commissioned  otlicers  and  sol- 
diers, should,  before  they  have  accounted  to  their  representatives  for 
the  same,  have  occasion  to  leave  the  regiment  or  post,  by  preferment  or 
otherwise,  they  shall,  before  they  be  permitted  to  quit  the  same,  deposit 
in  the  hands  of  the  commanding  officer,  or  of  the  assistant  military 
agent,  all  the  effects  of  such  deceased  non-commissioned  officers  and 
soldiers,  in  order  that  the  same  may  be  secured  for.  and  paid  to  their 
respective  rejivesentatives. 


AKTlCLt.S    OF    WAK.  559 

Art.  96.  All  oflacers,  conductors',  gunners,  matrosses,  drivers,  or 
other  persons  whatsoever,  receiving  pay  or  hire  in  the  service  of  the 
artillery  or  corps  of  engineers  of  the  Confederate  States,  shall  be 
governed  by  the  aforesaid  Rules  and  Articles,  and  shall  be  subject  to 
be  tried  by  courts  martial,  in  like  manner  with  the  officers  and  soldiers 
of  the  other  troops  in  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States. 

Art.  97.  The  officers  and  soldiers  of  any  troops,  whether  militia  or 
others,  being  mustered  and  in  pay  of  the  Confederate  States,  shall,  at 
all  times  and  all  places,  when  joined  or  acting  in  conjunction  with  the 
regular  forces  of  the  Confederate  States,  be  governed  by  these  Rules 
and  Articles  of  War,  and  shall  be  subject  to  be  tried  by  courts  martial, 
ill  like  manner  with  the  officers  and  soldiers  in  the  regular  forces;  save 
only  that  such  courts  martial  shall  be  composed  entirely  of  militia 
officers. 

Art.  98.  All  officers  serving  by  commission  from  the  authority  of 
any  particular  State,  shall,  on  all  detachments,  courts  martial  or  other 
duty,  wherein  they  may  be  employed  in  conjunction  with  the  regular 
forces  of  the  Confederate  States,  take  rank  next  after  all  officers  of 
the  like  grade  in  said  regular  forces,  notwithstanding  the  commissions 
of  such  militia  or  State  officers  may  be  elder  than  the  commissions  of 
the  officers  of  the  regular  forces  of  the  Confederate  States. 

Art.  99.  All  crimes  not  capital,  and  all  disorders  and  neglects  which 
officers  and  soldiers  may  be  guilty  of,  to  the  prejudice  of  good  order 
and  military  discipline,  though  not  mentioned  in  the  foregoing  Articles 
of  War,  are  to  be  taken  cognizance  of  by  a  general  or  regimental  court 
martial,  according  to  the  nature  and  degree  of  the  offence,  and  be  pun- 
ished at  their  discretion. 

Art.  lOU.  The  President  of  the  Confederate  States  shall  have  power 
to  prescribe  the  uniform  of  the  army. 

Art.  101.  The  foregoing  Articles  are  to  be  read  and  published,  once 
in  every  six  months,  to  every  garrison,  regiment,  troop,  or  company 
mustered,  or  to  be  mustered,  in  the  service  of  the  Confederate  States, 
and  are  to  be  duly  observed  and  obeyed  by  all  officers  and  soldiers 
who  are,  or  shall  be,  in  said  service. 

Sec.  2.  And  he  it  further  enacted,  That  in  time  of  war,  all  persons 
not  citizens  of,  or  owing  allegiance  to  the  Confederate  States  of 
America,  who  shall  be  found  lurking  as  spies  in  and  about  the  fortifi- 
cations or  encampments  of  the  armies  of  the  Confederate  States,  or 
any  of  them,  shall  suffer  death,  according  to  the  law  and  usage  of 
nations,  by  sentence  of  a  general  court  martial. 


< 


•  »